null  null
Tender No: -1800000008
MAZAGON DOCK LIMITED
(A Government of India Undertaking)
Dockyard Road, Mazagon,
Mumbai 400 010.
INDIA
Biennial Rate Contract for various Civil & Electrical Works
within MDL Premises located at Dockyard Road, Sewree &
Anik Chembur, Gavan Land, Residential Quarters & Quarters
at Vashi & Belapur,Navi Mumbai
VOLUME-IV
Specification for Civil and Electrical work
Specifications
Page i
Tender No: -1800000008
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CIVIL WORKS
SECTION-I– (CIVIL WORK)
SECTION
PERTICULARS
Page
No.
1.
LIST OF PREFERRED MAKE
2
2.
GENERAL
4
3.
EARTH WORKS
10
4.
MORTARS
15
5.
PLAIN CEMENT CONCRETE (PCC) WORKS
19
6.
REINFORCED CEMENT CONCRETE
22
7.
BRICKWORK
53
8.
STONE WORKS
56
9.
MARBLE/ GRANITE STONE WORKS
58
10.
WOOD WORK
60
11.
STEEL WORKS
75
12.
FINISHING WORKS
119
13.
FLOORING
134
14.
ROOFING
141
15.
DISMANTLING & DEMOLISHING
145
16.
MISCELLANEOUS
150
17.
ROAD WORK
152
18.
SERVICES MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
158
19.
ALUMINIUM WORKS
161
20.
WATERPROOFING WORKS
175
21.
SNITARY APPLICIANCES AND FITTINGS
182
22.
EXTERNAL DRAINAGE & SEWAGE DISPOSAL
202
23.
APPENDIX : GUIDELINES FOR STORAGE AND INSTALLATION
OF CPVC PIPES
209
Specifications
Page 1
Tender No: -1800000008
SECTION-I– (CIVIL WORK)
1. LIST OF PREFERRED MAKE:
Following are the list of preferred makes to be used in execution of works, unless
otherwise specified in Bill of Quantities.
S.N.
DESCRIPTION OF MATERIAL
Plywood
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
Laminates
Block board
Soft Board (pin up board)
Gyp. board
Vertical blinds
Screws
Brass hinges
Hardware
Drawer shutter lock
Ball catch
Door lock / handles
Veneer
MAKE OF MATERIALS
Anchor / Archid / Century / Kenwood /
Garnet / Samrat / Green / Prince /Mayur
(6mm, 9mm, 12mm, 19mm or any other
thickness.
Formica / Greenlam / Century / Signature /
Heritage / Archid / Bravia Newmica / Kitmica
Anchor / Century / Archid / Green / Marino
/ Multiply
Jolly board, Western India plywood.
India gypsum
Vista, Mac, Universal
GKW / Mettle fold
Magnum, Reliance, Punit heavy duty.
Shalimar, Everite, Reliance(brass powder
coated)
Godrej /Vijayan - (3 set of keys).
Magnetic (M-2) / Brass.
4-C ACME, Golden, Godrej, Ultra.
Anchor / URO / Durian / Century.
Adhesives
Wood preservatives
Door closure
Glass
Fevicol (SH), Mowicoll, Mahacol, Araldite
Woodguard, PCI, Black Japan.
Efficient gazets, Everite Hyper.
Modi / Saint Gobain / Hindustan Palington /
Asahi / Triveni
Melamine Polish
Paint
Vitrified/ Ceramic/Glazed Tiles
Asian paint, MRF, Nerolac.
Burger, Nerolac, Asian, Dulux, Tractor.
Nitco, Kajaria, RAK, Bells, Johnson
/Regency/Bells
Jindal / Indal
Everite / Hemco / Hyper / ozone
Asian paint / Pidilite / MRF
Ultratech/ ACC / Ambuja / Birla
21.
22.
23.
24.
Aluminium sections
Floor springs
Wood preservative
Cement
25.
26.
27.
28.
White cement
Putty
Sun control film
Stainless steel sink
Steel (Thermo Mechanically
Treated Steel) High strength
deformed bars or mild steel
reinforcement (TOR-Steel)
Clay Bricks
Birla cement, JK cement
Birla White Putty
Garware, LG
Nirali / Diamond
TATA, SAIL, JSW ,RINL, Jindal, Ispat
Water proofing material /
Sika / Roff / Sunanda / Krishna Conchem
29.
30.
31.
Specifications
Good quality locally available material
approved by Engineer / Architect
Page 2
Tender No: -1800000008
S.N.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
50.
51.
52.
53.
DESCRIPTION OF MATERIAL
compound.
Panelled Doors
P.V.C. Doors
Red Oxide
Acrylic Exterior paint
Glazing
Iron monjires and brass fittings
Vitreous sanitary ware (ISI
mark)
MAKE OF MATERIALS
National / Century / Swastik / Kitply
Sintex
Asian
Asian Ultra/Nitcotex / Sandtex / Berger
Weathershield
Saint Gobain/“Hindustan Pilkington”/ Tiveni,
Modi/ Asahi
Enox, Archis, doorset, ozone, dorma,
Jaquar/Hindustan sanitary ware/parry ware/
Bells/Cera
Seats & Covers solid (W.C.)
Jaquar/Hindustan sanitary ware/parry ware/
Bells / Cera
PVC Low level flushing cisterns
Jaquar / Parryware / Hindustan /Sanitary
Wall
Jaquar / Plumber
C P Fittings / Toilet
Accessories ISI Marked
UPVC Pipes ( S/W/R Pipes)
G.I. Pipes ( B-Class)
G.I. Fittings (ISI Brand)
S.W. Pipes / Fittings & Gully
traps
Ball valves
C.I. Manhole Cover
R.C.C. Pipes
Sanitary Fixture
PVC Fittings (Moulded)
Non-return valve
Stoneware Pipe and fittings
Stoneware Pipe and fittings
Supreme / Finolex / Prince
Tata / Zenith
Unik / AMCO
Perfect / Trimurti
Zoloto
RIF / BIC / Neco
Indian Hume pipe
Jaquar/Hindware / Parryware / Cera.
Finolex / Prince
Intervalve
Trimurti / Perfect Potters / Bharat
Trimurti / Perfect Potters / Bharat
Note (i) Wherever specification of BOQ item is not mentioned; then CPWD specification shall
be applicable.
(ii) Wherever make is specified in BOQ then manufacture’s specifications & procedure
shall be applicable.
(iii) Wherever no specifications or make is specified than work is to be carried out as per
the written instruction of the Engineer-In-Charge
Specifications
Page 3
Tender No: -1800000008
2. GENERAL:
2.1. Materials
All materials required to complete the works shall be procured by the contractor
including steel and cement unless specified. All materials shall be of Indian origin of the
best quality of their respective kinds as specified and shall conform strictly to the
stipulations laid down by the latest Indian Standards. Standards issued elsewhere may
be used only if approved by the Engineer-In-Charge and for those materials only for
which appropriate Indian Standard does not exist.
2.2. Sampling and Testing
The Contractor shall submit adequate number of samples of materials to the EngineerIn-Charge for approval giving all relevant information like source of supply, availability,
etc. The approved samples shall be deposited with the Engineer-In-Charge, whenever so
instructed.
The Engineer-In-Charge may order such tests and analysis as per requirement and as
considers necessary and the Contractor shall bear the cost of all sampling and testing
which is in consonance with the Indian Standards.
If tests on materials lead to rejection of the particular consignment, notwithstanding the
results of the tests at the manufacturer’s works or elsewhere or of test certificates or of
any approval given earlier, such materials shall be removed forthwith from the site by
him at his own cost and replaced by other proper consignment. All charges in
connection with of the new materials shall be borne by the Contractor.
Samples required for approval and testing must be supplied well in time to allow for
testing and approval, due allowance being made for the fact that if the first samples are
rejected, further samples may be required. Delay to the Works arising from the late
submission of samples will not be acceptable as a reason for delay in the completion of
the Works.
2.3. Storage of Materials
Generally stacking and storage of construction materials at site shall be as per
recommendations in IS: 4082. All materials required to be incorporated in the Works
shall be stored in racks in bins, under cover etc. as appropriate and as amplified in the
succeeding clauses to prevent deterioration or damage from any cause whatsoever to
the satisfaction of the Engineer-In-Charge.
2.4. Records & Usage of Materials
The Contractor shall maintain detailed records of all materials received at Site or in his
workshop and also about the consumption, balance in stock etc. and shall make such
records available to the Engineer-In-Charge, if asked for.
Depending on the types of materials the same should be used in the order in which they
arrive at site and as directed by the Engineer-In-Charge.
2.5. Contractor’s Responsibility
The Contractor shall be responsible for keeping the material in sound and acceptable
condition from the time of consignment of any material is received at site and till its
consumptions. Any material not approved for use shall be removed from the site at
Contractor’s cost.
2.6. Workmanship
In all cases the work shall be carried out in accordance with the latest Indian Standard
Specifications and the best Engineering practice. In the absence of such specifications,
work shall be executed in accordance with any other relevant standards issued
elsewhere as approved by the Engineer-In-Charge or as per the instructions and
directions of the Engineer-In-Charge.
Specifications
Page 4
Tender No: -1800000008
2.7. Constructional Plant (s)
The Contractor shall be responsible for the supply, use and maintenance of all
Constructional Plant and Equipment so as to ensure smooth and efficient working of
the job at his own cost. The Engineer-In-Charge shall have access to the Plant at all
times.
2.8. Workmen and Staff
The Contractor shall ensure that they employs only capable and experienced labour
force, foremen, other tradesmen and supervisory staff on the job capable of handling the
types of work assigned to them in a workmanlike and efficient manner to the
satisfaction of the Engineer-In-Charge. They shall also ensure that his Sub-contractors
or nominated Sub-contractors also employ all workmen and supervisory staff capable of
delivering work of a high standard.
For all concrete work trained and experienced personnel at site shall be deployed.
2.9. Method of Measurement
Mode of measurement shall be in accordance with the relevant parts of IS: 1200
“Method of Measurement of Building and Civil Works” only, unless otherwise specified
in various item wise specifications describes herein below.
2.10. Rates and Prices
Unless otherwise mentioned, the rates and prices set against items in the bill of
quantities or which can be reasonably inferred there from complete as a functioning
entity shall include all costs and expenses which may be required in and for the
construction of the work such as- material to be incorporated in the works (permanent/
temporary), labour required for all operations, temporary works, tools and equipments
as required, all operations required for the completion and or maintenance of the
relevant items as per specifications, all leads and lifts unless otherwise specifically
mentioned in the items, including all general risks, liabilities and obligations set forth
or implied in the documents on which the tender is based.
2.11. List of Bureau of Indian Standard Codes (BIS)
Following is the consolidated list of various Indian Standards relevant to the civil
works appearing in this specification.
Specifications
Page 5
Tender No: -1800000008
S.
No
1
2
IS Code No
IS : 4082-1977
IS:1200 (Part 22)1988
IS : l7293-1974
IS : 7969-1975
3
4
5
6
IS : 8989-1978
IS : 4014 (part 2)
1967
IS:13416 (Part 1)
1992
IS : 13416 (Part
2)1982
IS: 13416 (part 3)
1994
7
8
9
10
IS : 13416 (Part 5)
1994
Particulars
1. Carriage of materials.
Recommendation of stacking and storage of
construction materials at sites.
(1st revision) (Reaffirmed-1990)
Method of Measurement of Building & Civil
Engineering Works-Part 22-Materials
Safety code for working with construction machinery
Safety code for handling & storage of building
materials
Safety code for erection of concrete framed structures
Code of practice for steel tubular scaffolding – Part 2
– Safety regulations for scaffolding
Preventive measures against hazards at work places
– Part 1 – Falling material hazard prevention.
Preventive measures against hazards at work places
recommendations – Fall prevention.
Preventive measures against hazards at work places
– Recommendations – Part 3 – Disposal of debris
(MULBA)
Preventive measures against hazards at work places
– Recommendations – Part 5 – Fire protection
GENERAL
S. No
1
2
IS Code No
3764
6313 (PartII)-1981
S. No
1
2
3
4
IS Code No
650
3025
8112
12269
S. No
1
IS Code No
383
2
3
4
5
456
516
1199
1200 (Part II)
6
1322
7
8
1791
2386(Part I
to IV)
2505
2506
3812
4656
9
10
11
12
Specifications
EARTHWORK
Particulars
Safety code for excavation work
Code of Practice for Anti-termite measures in Buildings (PartII) Pre-constructional Chemical Treatment measures (1st
Revision) (Amendments 3) (Reaffirmed-1991)
MORTARS
Particulars
Specification for standard sand for testing of cement
Method of sampling and test for water
Specification for 43 grade ordinary Portland cement
Specification for 53 grade ordinary Portland cement.
CONCRETE WORK
Particulars
Specification for coarse & fine aggregate from Natural
Source for Concrete.
Code of Practice for plain and reinforced concrete.
Method of test for strength of concrete
Method of sampling and analysis of concrete
Method of measurement of building and civil engineering
work (concrete work)
Specification for bitumen felt for waterproofing and damp
proofing
Specification for batch type concrete mixers
Method of test for aggregate for concrete work
General requirement for concrete vibrators immersion type
General requirement for screed board concrete vibrators
Specification for fly ash for use as Pozzolana and admix
Specification for form vibrators for concrete
Page 6
Tender No: -1800000008
REINFORCED CEMENT CONCRETE WORK
S. No
1
IS Code No
432 (Part I
&II)
2
1200 (Part V)
3
2505
4
2751
5
4925
6
9103
Particulars
Specification for mild steel and medium tensile steel bars
and hard drawn steel wire for concrete reinforcement Part-I
mild steel and medium tensile steel bars
Method of measurement of building and civil engineering
work – concrete work (Part 5 – Form work)
Code of Practice for bending and fixing of bars for concrete
reinforcement
Recommended practice for welding of mild steel plain and
deformed bars for reinforced construction
Batch plants specification for concrete batching and mixing
plant
For admixtures for concrete
BRICK WORK
S. No
1
2
3
IS Code No
1200 (Part 3)
1976
2212-1991
1905-1980
4
2116-1980
Particulars
Method of measurements of building and civil engineering
works: Part 3 brick work (3rd revision) Reaffirmed 1992
Code of practice for brick work (1st revision)
Code of Practice for structural safety of buildings - Masonry
wall
Specification for sand for masonry mortars (1st revision)
IS Code No
3316 – 1974
MARBLE/GRANITE / STONE WORK
Particulars
Granite slabs
S. No
1
WOOD WORK
S. No
1
IS Code No
287-1973
2
1200 (Part
XII)1973
2202 (Part I
&II) 1991
3087-1985
3
4
5
6
7
8
4021-1995
883
1708 (Part –
I)
2095
Particulars
Recommendations for maximum permissible moisture
content of timber used for different purposes (3rd revision)
Wood work and joinery (2nd revision) (Amendment 1)
(Reaffirmed 1992)
Specification for wooden flush door shutters (solid core type)
plywood face panels (5th revision) (Amendments 2)
Specification for wood particle boards (medium density) for
general purposes (1st revision) (Amendments 4) (Reaffirmed
1990)
Timber door, window and ventilator frames.
Defects permissible
Moisture Content
Gypsum Board
STEEL WORK
S. No
1
IS Code No
800-1984
2
806-1968
3
812-1978
Specifications
Particulars
Code of practice for use of structural steel in general in steel
construction (2nd revision) (Amendments 2) (Reaffirmed
1991)
Code of practice for use of steel tubes in general building
construction (1st Revision) (Amendment 1) (Reaffirmed 1991)
Glossary of terms relating to welding and cutting of metals
(Reaffirmed 1991)
Page 7
4
5
813-1986
816-1969
6
818-1968
7
8
822-1970
1200-1993
(Part VIII)
Tender No: -1800000008
Scheme of symbols for welding (revised) (Reaffirmed 1991)
Code of practice for use of metal arc welding general
construction in mild steel (1st revision) (Amendments 2)
(Reaffirmed 1992)
Code of practice for safety and healthy requirements in
electric and gas welding and cutting operations (1st revision)
(Reaffirmed 1991)
Code of procedure for inspection of welds (Reaffirmed 1991)
Method of measurements of building and civil engineering
works steel work and iron works (4th revision)
FLOORING
S. No
1
IS Code No
777-1988
2
1130-1969
3
1200-1977
4
2571-1970
5
8042-1989
6
7
8
13755
4457 – 1982
3462
Particulars
Specification for glazed earthenware wall tiles (2nd revision)
(Superseded by IS 13753, 13754, 13755, 13756)
Specification for marble (Blocks, slabs and tiles) (Reaffirmed
1993)
Method of measurement of building and civil engineering
work (Part XI) paving, floor finishes, dado and skirting) (3rd
revision) (Amendment 1) (Reaffirmed 1992)
Code of practice for laying in situ cement concrete flooring
(1st revision) (Reaffirmed 1991)
Specification for white Portland cement (2nd revision)
(Amendments 4)
Ceramic tiles
Ceramic unglazed vitreous acid resting tiles
PVC flooring (Vinyl Tiles)
FINISHING
S. No
1
IS Code No
104-1979
2
109-1968
3
4
5
290-1961
419-1967
428-1969
6
1200-1976
(Part XII)
7
12001994(Part
XIII)
1200-1987
(Part XV)
8
9
2932-1994
10
11
12
13
14
5410-1992
1661
1542
2645
2395 (Part I
& II)
Specifications
Particulars
Specification for ready mixed paint, brushing, zinc chrome,
priming (Reaffirmed 1993) (2nd Revision)
Ready mixed paint, brushing, priming plaster to Indian
Standard colour No.361.631 white and off white (Reaffirmed
1993) (1st Revision)
Coal tar black paint (Reaffirmed 1991) Revised
Putty for use on window frames (Reaffirmed 1992) (Revised)
Distemper, oil emulsion, colour as required (Reaffirmed
1993) (1st Revision)
Method of measurements of building and civil engineering
works: Part XII – Plastering and pointing (Reaffirmed 1992)
(3rd Revision)
Method of measurements of building and civil engineering
works: Part XIII – white washing, colour washing,
distempering and painting of building surfaces (5th Revision)
Methods of measurements of building and civil engineering
works: Part XV – Painting, polishing, varnishing etc.
(Reaffirmed 1992) (4th Revision)
Enamel, synthetic, exterior (a) undercoating (b) Finishing
(2nd Revision)
Cement paint (1st Revision)
Application of plaster
Plaster for sand
Integral waterproofing compound
Painting workmanship
Page 8
Tender No: -1800000008
DISMANTLING AND DEMOLITION
S. No
1
IS Code No
1200-1974
Particulars
Method of measurements of building and civil engineering
works: Part XVII: Demolition and dismantling (Reaffirmed
1992) (3rd Revision)
MISCELLANEOUS
S. No
1
IS Code No
2721
Particulars
G.I. chain link fencing
ALUMINIUM WORK
S.
No
1
IS Code No
1285-1975
2
1868-1996
3
1948-1961
Particulars
Specification for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy,
extruded round tube and hollow sections (for general
engineering purposes)
Anodic coatings on aluminium and its alloys –
Specification
Specification for aluminium doors, windows and
ventilators (Reaffirmed 2001)
WATER PROOFING
S. No
1
2
Specifications
IS Code No
2645-1975
1077
Particulars
Specification for integral cement water proofing compounds.
Brick bats
Page 9
Tender No: -1800000008
3. EARTH WORKS:
3.1. Earthwork in Excavation & Backfilling
General
Any excavation shall be started only after recording the existing ground levels jointly with the
Engineer-In-Charge.
Classifications
All materials to be excavated shall be classified by Engineer-In-Charge, into one of the
following classes and shall be paid for at the rate tendered for that particular class of material.
No distinction shall be made whether the material is dry, moist or wet. The decision of
Engineer-In-Charge regarding the classification of the materials shall be final and binding on
Contractor.
Earthwork will be classified under any of the following categories –
(a) Ordinary / soft Soils
These shall include all kinds of soils containing kankar, sand, silt, moorum and / or shingle,
gravel, clay, loam, peat, ash, shale etc. which can generally be excavated by spade, pick axes
and shovel. This shall also include embedded rock boulders not longer than 0.5 metre in any
direction and not more than 200mm. in any one of the other two directions.
(b) Hard soil / Rock
This shall include rock, boulders, slag, chalk, slate, hard mica schist, laterite and all other
materials which in the opinion of Engineer-In-Charge is rock, and could be removed with
picks, hammer, crow bars, wedges and pneumatic breaking equipment.
This shall also include excavation in macadam and tarred roads and pavements and masonry
to be dismantled as also rock boulders not longer than 0.5 metre in any direction and not
more than 200 mm. in any one of the other two directions.
Method of Excavation
Depending on the type of material, quantum of excavation and time for construction, the
Contractor may carry out the work manually or by use of appropriate mechanical equipment.
Details of Works
Dimensions / Levels
Excavation for permanent work shall be carried out to the correct dimensions, lines and levels
and profiles shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer-In-Charge. Rough
excavation shall be carried out to a depth 150 mm. above the final level. The balance shall be
excavated with special care. Soft pockets shall be removed even below the final level and extra
excavation filled up as directed by the Engineer-In-Charge.
Shoring and strutting
The Contractor shall provide and maintain all planking and strutting as may be necessary to
prevent any ground movement.
Excavation to be kept dry
The Contractor shall keep all excavation free from water, whether from sub-soil or from rains
or from any other source, by pumping or other approved means.
Specifications
Page 10
Tender No: -1800000008
Sides and bottom of excavation
Excavation shall be left open for as short period as practicable and necessary. Immediately
before foundations or other work be constructed therein, the sides of excavation shall be
trimmed, if necessary and the bottom shall be cleaned, free of loose or disturbed ground, dry
well rammed and approved by the Engineer-In-Charge.
Stacking / Removal of excavated material
Stacking, dumping, spreading at site or removal from site of excavated material shall be
strictly as approved by the Engineer-In-Charge.
Excavated material suitable for filling shall be dumped in an orderly manner to required levels
/ grades as directed. All surplus material or material not suitable for filling shall be carried
away from site to approved dumping ground.
Backfilling
All return fill in excavated trenches, pits etc. shall consist of materials selected from excavation
or elsewhere and shall be dry, friable and free from clay and plastic material, mud, vegetable,
salts, sulphates and organic matter likely to decay and shall be subject to the Engineer-InCharge’s approval before use. All clods of earth shall be removed or broken. Where excavated
material is mostly rock, it shall be broken to pieces not larger than 150mm size and mixed
with properly graded murum or equivalent approved material. Filling shall be placed in layers
not exceeding 150mm well watered & consolidated by mechanical compaction machines or
manually to achieve 95% proctor density if permitted by the Engineer-In-Charge and to the
satisfaction of the Engineer-In-Charge.
3.2. Earthwork in Filling
Material
All fill material, whether out of surplus material from excavations or brought from any other
source outside shall be subject to prior approval of the Engineer-In-Charge. The source of
outside material shall also be approved by the Engineer-In-Charge.
All fill material shall be free from vegetable refuse and other organic matter, marine clay, black
cotton soil, injurious salt and other material considered unsuitable by the Engineer-In-Charge.
All large clods shall be broken. Where the material is mostly rock, boulders shall be broken
into pieces not larger than 15 cm. size, mixed with properly graded fine material like murum
etc.
Filling over areas (site gradation) / roads /pathways
Any filling work shall be started by the Contractor only after recording existing ground levels
jointly with the Engineer-In-Charge.
Formation width and side slopes shall be as per drawings or as directed by the Engineer-InCharge.
All banks shall be thrown up in layers of not more than 200 mm. in depth over the whole
width between the surfaces of side slopes slightly concave in section, so as to retain water for
subsidence. When on side long ground, the whole area of the bank of the slope shall be
benched out or stepped so as to prevent material from slipping.
Each layer of filling shall be watered, rammed and thoroughly consolidated to the satisfaction
of the Engineer-In-Charge and to obtain the density stipulated in the item. Compaction shall
be done by mechanical compaction machines unless otherwise allowed by the Engineer-InCharge. The normal allowance for subsidence or settlement shall be 5 cm. per 30 cm. depth of
Specifications
Page 11
Tender No: -1800000008
bank. This may be increased or decreased by the Engineer-In-Charge depending on the nature
of the filling material used. Necessary field and laboratory tests shall be carried out by the
Contractor to demonstrate that the specified density at moisture content is obtained in the fill
at different stages of filling and after the fill to the entire height is completed, if so specifically
called for.
The Contractor shall protect the fill from being washed away by rain or damaged in any other
way. Should any slip occur, the Contractor shall remove the affected material and make good
the same at his own cost.
If rock obtained from excavation (which may be used for filling and levelling to indicated grades
without further breaking) is permitted for filling by the Engineer-In-Charge, filling shall be
done in layers not exceeding 50cm approximately. After rock filling to the approximate level,
the voids in the rocks shall be filled with finer materials such as earth, broken stone etc. and
the area shall be flooded with water so that the finer materials fill up the voids. Care shall be
taken to ensure that the finer fill material does not get washed out. Over the layer so filled, a
100 mm. thick mixed layer of broken material and earth shall be laid and consolidation
carried out by a 10 -12 tonne roller. No less than twelve passes of the roller shall be accepted
before subsequent similar operations are taken-up.
After the filling layers are consolidated, the surface and slopes shall be trimmed to the levels,
formation width and to even and uniform gradient as per requirement.
Plinth filling
Plinth filling shall be carried out with approved material in layers not exceeding 15cm. watered
and compacted with mechanical compaction machines such as pneumatic tampers, rammers
etc. The Engineer-In-Charge may, however, permit manual compaction by hand tampers in
case he is satisfied that mechanical compaction is not possible. When filling reaches the
finished level, the surface shall be flooded with water, unless otherwise directed, for at least 24
hours, allowed to dry and then the surface again compacted as specified above to avoid
settlements at a later stage. The finalised level of the filling shall be trimmed to the level/slope
as directed / specified.
Where specifically specified, compaction of the plinth fill shall be carried out by means of 8 -10
tonne approved type of roller. In this case fill layers can be upto a maximum of 300 mm. As
rolling proceeds water sprinkling shall be done to assist consolidation. Water shall not be
sprinkled in case of sandy fill. Rolling shall commence from the outer edge and progress
towards the centre and continue until compaction to the satisfaction of the Engineer-InCharge or provides density not less than that specified in the item but in no case less than 10
passes of the roller shall be accepted for each layer. The compacted surface shall be properly
shaped, trimmed and consolidated to an even and uniform gradient. All soft spots shall be
excavated and filled and consolidated.
At places back filling shall be carried out with local sand if directed by the Engineer-In-Charge.
The sand used shall be clean, medium grained and free from impurities. The filled-in-sand
shall be kept flooded with water for 24 hours to ensure maximum consolidation. The surface
of the consolidated sand shall be dressed to required level or slope. Construction of floors or
other structures on sand fill shall not be started until the Engineer-In-Charge has inspected
and approved the fill.
3.3. Anti-termite Treatment:
Material
Chemical to be used for treatment shall be from the approved specialised agencies, proportion
in accordance with IS 6313 (Part-II) subject to confirmation of the Engineer-In-Charge.
Graduated containers shall be used for dilution of chemicals with water in the required
proportion to achieve the desired percentages of concentration.
Specifications
Page 12
Tender No: -1800000008
Safety Precaution
All chemical used for treatment shall be clearly labelled in properly sealed form, and kept
securely closed in stores. Mixing is to be done with utmost care as per manufacturer’s
instructions. Chemicals are not allowed to contaminate with drinking water.
Application
Chemical treatment of soils for the protection of buildings from attack of subterranean
termites shall be done as per IS:6313 (Part-II). Proper check should be kept to ensure that the
specified quantity of chemical is used for the required area during the operations.
Time of application of Soil treatment should start when foundation trenches and pits are ready
to take bed concrete/ levelling course in foundations. Laying of bed concrete / levelling course
should start when the chemical emulsion has been absorbed by the soil and the surface is
quite dry. Treatment should not be carried out when it is raining or soil is wet with rain or
sub- soil water. Treatment to the surface of earth filling within plinth shall also be done in the
same manner before laying sub-grade for flooring. Treatment along the external perimeter of
building shall be carried out after completion of the building by providing 30 mm deep holes in
the soil with iron rods at intervals of about 15 cm unless otherwise specified by the
manufacturer.
Disturbance
The treated soil barrier shall not be disturbed. If for some reasons the treated soil barriers are
disturbed, immediate steps shall be taken to restore the continuity and completeness of the
barrier system.
The contractor shall provide 10 years guarantee bond to cover defects liability period.
3.4. Dry rubble soling
Materials
Supply of rubble stone of the specified type and size and shall be obtained from approved
sources only and transporting to the site of work including all loads, lifts, handling,
transportation etc.
The rubble of the specified type of stones shall be hard, tough, sound, durable, dense, clean of
close texture and free from unsound material, cracks, decay and weathering. Their water
absorption shall be as low as possible but not more than 5 percent.
The shape of the stones shall be as regular as can be obtained by quarrying without attempt at
shaping or dressing. They shall be sufficiently flat bedded. The stone shall be broken with the
smallest dimensions equal to the specified thickness of soling. The length and breadth should
not generally exceed twice its thickness. Before starting collection, the contractor shall get a
sample conforming to the required quality, shape and size approved by the Engineer-InCharge.
Laying Soling
The item provides for the labour for laying soling of specified type of stones in the specified
thickness including preparing the sub-grade to proper sections by scrapping, dressing,
compaction, etc. and hand packing the rubble chips to the required line, curve and grade and
section.
The rubble supplied shall be laid with the largest face downwards and in contact with each
other. The stones shall break joint as far as possible. The full thickness of the soling shall
generally be made with one stone only. Unless otherwise provided in the plans or directed by
Specifications
Page 13
Tender No: -1800000008
the Engineer-In-Charge, the width of the soling shall be 30cm more than that of the metal
above.
As the laying of rubble advances the soling shall be hand packed by wedging and packing with
80mm metal collected for the purpose in the joints of the soling and driving them by hammers
in place so as to fill the voids as completely as possible. This operation of hand packing shall
follow the rubble laying closely. The soling shall be laid and hand packed true to grade and
section and these shall be often checked by boning rods, template boards and fish lines, etc.
The grades sections etc. of the soling shall correspond to those of the surfacing coming on it.
The soling thus laid shall be finished by knocking out projecting stones and filling depressions
by chips to come up to the grade and camber.
3.5. Low density polyethylene (LDPE) sheets:
Materials
LDPE Sheets of approved quality and thickness as mentioned in the item description or as
shown on the drawing shall be used.
Laying
A separation membrane to be used between the concrete floor and the sub-base shall be
unless otherwise specified impermeable plastic sheeting of 150 micron thick laid in flat
without creases. Before placing the LDPE sheet, the sub-base shall be prepared to the correct
line and level, swept clean of all the extraneous material using air compressor. Whenever
overlap of LDPE sheet is necessary the same shall be at least 300mm and any damaged
sheeting shall be replaced at Contractor’s expense.
3.6.
Damp Proof Course
Material
Cement concrete shall consist of specified proportion and thickness. Cement, sand, aggregate
and water etc. shall be as specified under Mortars- under relevant clauses as applicable. Hot
bitumen shall be of approved quality and conforming to IS: 3117 / IS: 3037. Integral cement
waterproofing compound or its equivalent to be used shall conform to IS 2645. It shall be from
approved standard manufacturers and shall be approved by the Engineer-In-Charge.
Laying
Cement concrete layer of specified proportion and thickness shall be laid. The surface of brick
/ concrete shall be levelled and prepared before laying the cement concrete. Edge of damp
proof course shall be straight, even and vertical. Side shuttering shall be strong and properly
fixed. The concrete mix shall be of workable consistency and shall be tamped thoroughly to
make a dense mix. There shall be no construction joint in the damp proof course.
Curing
Damp proof course shall be cured for at least seven days, after which it shall be allowed to dry.
Application of Hot Bitumen
Hot bitumen in specified quantity shall be applied over the dried up surface of cement concrete
properly cleaned with brushes and finally with a piece of cloth soaked in kerosene oil .The hot
bitumen shall be applied uniformly all over, so that no blank spaces are left anywhere.
Waterproofing Agent / Ingredients
Waterproofing agent / ingredients of approved quality shall be added to the concrete mix in
accordance with the manufacturer’s specification subject to approval of the Engineer-InCharge.
Specifications
Page 14
Tender No: -1800000008
4. MORTARS:
4.1.
Cement
Standard
Cement to be used in the Works shall be conforming to the following IS standards codes•
•
43 Grade Ordinary Portland Cement
Portland Pozzolana Cement ( fly ash based)
: IS 8112
: IS 1489 (part-I)
Supply & Storage
The cement to be used on works shall be OPC or PPC (fly ash based) as specified. Unless
otherwise specified, Ordinary Portland Cement or PPC shall be supplied in bags containing 50
Kg. each. Stacking of cement rejected due to aging or not fulfilling IS requirements shall be at
the cost of the Contractor. Cement held in storage for a long period shall be re-tested before its
use, if directed by Engineer in charge.
Tests
A certified report, attesting the conformance of the cement to IS Specifications by the cement
manufacturer shall be furnished to the Engineer-In-Charge, by the contractor.
Samples of cement shall be taken immediately on receipt of cement at site. The methods and
procedure of sampling shall be as per IS 3535. Tests shall be carried out for fineness, initial
and final setting time and compressive strength as per IS 4031.
Supplier of cement shall furnish the following documents before the cement is delivered to site
–
Certificate conforming that chemical composition and physical characteristics are within the
stipulated values for types of cement supplied as per relevant codes.
Certificate conforming that the chloride content in the cement is not in excess of 0.05 per cent
of mass of cement.
If during subsequent testing of cement supplied in lots any of the properties are found to be
outside the acceptable limits, the lot of cement shall be rejected.
Each 1000 bags or part thereof of cement, or each wagon load of cement shall constitute one
lot of cement for the purpose of conducting tests at site.
Samples for testing at site shall be taken at random from 2% of the total quantity supplied in
one lot. For cement supplied in bags, samples shall be drawn from minimum of 5 bags and the
2% value shall be rounded to the next higher integer. For bulk cement, sampling shall be done
with the help of slotted sampler to be as per IS 3535.
Results of test conducted on samples drawn shall be submitted to the Engineer-In-Charge for
his approval. If in the opinion of the Engineer-In-Charge, the test results are not within
permissible limits, the lot of cement from which samples have been obtained for testing shall
stand rejected and the material shall be removed from site.
Following tests shall be conducted at site on each lot of cement delivered:
Specifications
Page 15
Tender No: -1800000008
TABLE 1
Mandatory tests
Number of test/lot
Consistency of standard cement
5
1
paste
2. Initial and final setting time
3. Compressive strength test
5 each
10
Mean values of the results from the above results shall be taken as the representative value
and the acceptance criteria shall be based on these test. All test procedures and computation
of test results shall be as per IS 4031.
Apart from mandatory tests specified as above, the Engineer-In-Charge may at his discretion,
call for any additional tests that he may consider necessary. All such tests shall be done on
representative samples taken from each lot described above para and testing and computation
of test results shall be done as per IS 4031.Charges for such testing shall be born by the
contractor.
4.2.
Fine Aggregate
Standard
Fine aggregate for different end uses (other than lightweight concrete) shall conform to the
following standards:
For Structural Concrete
For Mortar & Grout
For Plastering
- IS: 383 (between Grading Zones I & II)
- IS: 2116
- IS: 1542 (Class A grading)
Fine aggregate shall consist of natural sands or machine crushed rock/gravel. It shall be
clean, sharp, hard, strong and durable and free from dust, vegetable substances, adherent
coating, clay, loam, alkali, organic matter, mica, soluble sulphate, gypsum or any other
deleterious substances which can be injurious to the setting qualities / strength / durability
of concrete. Use of sea sand is prohibited.
Source
Once a specific source of supply of fine aggregate is accepted, the source shall not be changed
without prior approval of the Engineer-In-Charge.
Storage
Fine aggregates shall be stored at site in adequate quantity on clean and well maintained hard
floor and areas not liable to flooding. Contamination with foreign matter and earth shall be
avoided during storage and while heaping the materials.
Usage
Fine aggregate shall be thoroughly washed at site with clean fresh water such that the
percentage of all deleterious matter is within the permissible limits as laid down in IS 2386
(Part-II).
Screening of sand shall be done if necessary, and as and when directed by the Engineer-InCharge to remove all objectionable foreign matter and effecting any grading.
4.3.
Water
Standard
Water supplied shall conform to the various provisions detailed under Clause 5.4 of IS
456:2000. Broadly stated water used for mixing and curing as also for cooling / washing of
aggregates shall be clean and fresh, free from oils, acids, alkalises, salts, sugar, organic
Specifications
Page 16
Tender No: -1800000008
materials or other substances that may be deleterious to concrete or steel. Sea water or water
from excavation shall not be used.
Potable water is generally considered satisfactory for mixing concrete. As a guide the following
concentration represent the maximum permissible values:
To neutralize 100 ml sample of water, using phenolphthalein as an indicator, it should not
require more than 5ml of 0.02 normal NaOH. The test shall be conducted as detailed in 8.1 of
IS 3025 (Part 22).
To neutralize 100ml sample of water, using mixed indicator, it should not require more than
25ml of 0.02 normal H2So4. The test shall be conducted as detailed in 8 of IS 3025 (Part 23).
Permissible limits for solid content shall be as given in the table below:
SI.
No.
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
Particulars
TABLE 2
Tested as per
Organic
Inorganic
Sulphates
(as
SO3)
Chlorides(as Cl)
IS 3025 (Part 18)
IS 3025 (Part 18)
IS 3025 (Part 24)
Suspended
matters
IS 3025 (Part 17)
IS 3025 (Part 32)
Permissible limits
Max
200 mg/l
3000 mg/l
400 mg/l
2000 mg/l
for
concrete
not
consisting embedded steel
& 500 mg/l for reinforced
concrete work
2000 mg/l
Storage
Water shall be so stored that it remains free from all deleterious materials as mentioned above.
Tests
No water shall be used until tested for its chemical and other impurities in accordance with IS
3025 to ascertain its suitability. Tests shall be conducted whenever the source is changed or
during seasonal variation.
4.4.
Fly Ash
Material
Fly ash is a finely crushed residue resulting from the combustion of pulverised coal in boilers.
Fly ash used shall be as per IS: 3812-1981. It shall be clean and free from any contamination
of bottom ash, grit or small pieces of pebbles. Fly ash adding is meant for use to improve
grading of its pozzolanic properties. Grades and proportion of fly ash shall be as specified in
the item description in accordance with relevant IS provision. It is obligatory on the part of
supplier/ manufacturer that the fly ash conforms to the requirement if mutually agreed &
shall furnish a certificate to this effect to the purchaser or his representative.
Fly ash shall be protected from dirt collecting on it.
4.5.
Mortar Mixing
Cement and sand in the specified proportion shall be mixed in dry thoroughly by using
mechanical mixer or by hand mixing, if permitted. Composition (cement and sand mortar, or
lime and sand mortar or cement, lime and sand mortar) and proportions of mortars shall be as
Specifications
Page 17
Tender No: -1800000008
specified in the respective items of work. The ingredients of the mortar shall be accurately
gauged by measure.
Precaution
Mortar shall be used as soon as possible after mixing and before it begins to set, and in any
case within half hour, after the water is added to the dry mixture.
Specifications
Page 18
Tender No: -1800000008
5. PLAIN CEMENT CONCRETE (PCC) WORKS:
5.1.
Cement
Cement shall be as specified under –Mortars specifications.
5.2.
Aggregate
5.2.1. Coarse Aggregates
Standard
Coarse aggregate for use in concrete (other than light weight concrete) shall conform to IS 383.
Coarse aggregate shall have a minimum specific gravity of 2.6 (saturated surface dry basis).
Aggregate below this specific gravity shall not be used without specific permission of the
Engineer-In-Charge.
Coarse aggregate shall consist of natural or crushed stone, angular in shape with granular or
crystalline surfaces or approved river shingle or gravel, rounded in shape. All aggregate shall
be clean and free from elongated, friable, flaky or laminated pieces, adherent coatings, clay
lumps, mica, organic matter and any other deleterious matter that may cause corrosion of
reinforcement or impair the strength and / or durability of concrete. It shall be chemically
inert, hard, strong, dense, and durable against weathering.
The maximum quantities of deleterious materials in the coarse aggregate shall not exceed the
limits indicated in the IS 383 when tested as per IS 2386 Part-I & Part-II “Method of Tests for
Aggregate for Concrete”.
Source
Once a specific source of supply of coarse aggregate is accepted, the source shall not be
changed without prior approval of the Engineer-In-Charge.
Supplier of aggregates shall furnish the following information before the material is delivered to
site:
Precise location of source from where the material is to be supplied
Trade group of principal rock type as per table given below
Presence or reactive minerals.
TABLE 3
Trade
group
names
of Granite, Gabbro, Dolerite, Rhyolite,
aggregates
To be used for concrete
Basalt, Quartzite, Gneiss
The supplier shall also furnish reports of test results giving the following information for
approval to Engineer-In-Charge before delivery of material at site:
Specific gravity
Bulk density
Moisture content
Absorption value
Aggregate crushing strength
Aggregate impact value
Abrasion value
Flakiness index
Elongation index
Limits of deleterious substances in the aggregate
Soundness of aggregate
Potential reactivity of aggregates.
Specifications
Page 19
Tender No: -1800000008
Storage
Coarse aggregate of available sizes shall be stored at site as separate stacks over clean and
well maintained hard floor and areas not liable to flooding. Alternatively they will be stored in
bins.
Contamination with foreign materials and earth during storage and while heaping the
materials shall be avoided. It shall be kept in layers not exceeding 1.2 m in height to prevent
coning or segregation.
Usage
Coarse aggregate, which is not clean, shall be washed with clear fresh water before use in the
job. Screening would be done if considered necessary by the Engineer-In-Charge without extra
cost.
Tests
All test shall be conducted in accordance with IS 2386 (Part I to VIII).
In addition to above, the following tests shall be carried out on representative samples from
every lot of aggregates after delivery at site. These test results are to be submitted to the
Engineer-In-Charge for his approval. Acceptance criteria for aggregates shall be based on the
results of this set of tests only. If in the opinion of the Engineer-In-Charge, the test results are
not within permissible limits, the lot of aggregates from which the samples have been obtained
for testing shall stand rejected and the material shall be removed from the site.
Mandatory Tests on Aggregates at site shall be min. 3 on each 10 cub.m or part there of as per
IS: 2386. Mean value of the results from site test shall be taken as the representative value
and the acceptance criteria shall be based on these. All test procedures & computations for
test results shall be as per IS 2386.
Apart from above, the Engineer-In-Charge may at his discretion, call for any additional tests
that he may consider necessary. Sampling, procedure and computations for such test shall be
done in accordance with IS 2430 and IS 2386 as applicable.
5.2.2. Fine Aggregates
Fine aggregates shall be as specified under –Mortars specifications.
5.2.3. Water
Water shall be as specified under –Mortars specifications.
5.2.4. Fly Ash :
Fly ash shall be as specified under -Mortars specifications.
5.2.5. Admixtures :
Admixtures if required, shall be as specified under RC Concrete specifications.
5.2.6. Placing of Cement Concrete
Placing of cement concrete shall be as specified under- Reinforce Cement Concrete
specifications (relevant as applicable). All concrete shall be protected against damage until
final acceptance by the Engineer-In-Charge.
Specifications
Page 20
Tender No: -1800000008
5.3.
Formwork
Formwork may be of timber, plywood, steel or other metal, plastic or concrete or any suitable
material as per the direction of Engineer-In-Charge.
Formwork (or shuttering) comprises all forms and moulds made up of planks and sheeting
etc., shores, bracings and struts, ties, anchors and hangers, steel rods, bolts and allied
inserts, uprights, walling, wedges and all other temporary supports for concrete work during
the process of concreting and setting.
Form work design parameters and specifications shall be as specified under- Reinforce Cement
Concrete ( relevant as applicable).
5.4.
Measurement
All measurements shall be as per relevant part of IS 1200. Any work done in excess over the
specified dimensions or sections shown in the drawing shall be ignored.
Concrete work executed under water, in liquid mud or under foul positions shall be measured
separately as instructed by the Engineer-In-Charge.
No deductions shall be made for- Opening upto 0.1 sq.m, volume occupied by pipes, conduits,
sheathing, small voids etc.
Specifications
Page 21
Tender No: -1800000008
6. REINFORCED CEMENT CONCRETE:
6.1.
Cement
Cement shall be as specified under - Mortars specifications.
6.2.
Coarse Aggregate
Coarse Aggregates shall be as specified under- Mortars specifications.
6.3.
Fine Aggregate
Fine aggregates shall be as specified under- Mortars specifications.
6.4.
Water
Water shall be as specified under –Mortars specifications.
6.5.
Fly Ash :
Fly ash shall be as specified under –Mortars specifications.
6.6.
Admixtures
6.6.1. General :
Admixtures if permitted shall comply with IS 9108 Concrete admixtures are proprietary items
of manufacturer and shall be obtained from established /approved manufacturers.
Admixtures should not impair durability of concrete nor combine with the constituent to form
harmful compounds nor increase the risk of corrosion of reinforcement.
The workability, compressive strength and slump with and without use of admixtures shall be
established during the trial mixes prior to use of admixtures.
The relative density of liquid admixture shall be checked for each drum containing admixtures
and compared with the specified value before acceptance.
The chloride content of admixtures shall be independently tested for each batch before
acceptance.
If two or more admixtures are used simultaneously in the same concrete mix, data shall be
obtained to assess their interaction and to ensure their compatibility.
The Contractor shall provide the following information concerning each admixture after using
the same from the manufacturer:
Normal dosage and detrimental effects, if any, of under dosage and over dosage.
The chemical names of the main ingredients in the admixtures.
The chloride content, if any, expressed as a percentage by the weight of the admixture.
Values of dry material content, ash content and relative density of the admixture which can be
used for uniformity tests.
Whether or not the admixture leads to the entrainment of air when used as per the
manufacturer’s recommended dosage and of so to required extent.
Where two or more admixtures are proposed to be used on any one mix, confirmation as to
their compatibility.
Assurance with documentary evidence to show that there would be no increase in risks of
corrosion of the reinforcement or other embedment as a result of using the admixture.
In addition the following conditions also shall be satisfied:
Specifications
Page 22
Tender No: -1800000008
“Plasticizers” and “super-plasticizers” shall meet the requirements indicated for “water
reducing admixtures”.
Except where resistance to freezing and thawing and to disruptive action of de-icing salts is
necessary, the air content of freshly mixed concrete in accordance with the pressure method
given in IS 1199 shall be not more than 2% higher than that of the corresponding control mix
and in any case not more than 3% of the test mix.
The chloride content of the admixture shall not exceed 0.2% when tested in accordance with IS
6925. In addition, the maximum permissible limit of chloride content of all the constituents of
concrete as indicated in IS 456:2000 shall also be observed.
Uniformity tests on the admixtures are essential to compare qualitatively the composition of
different samples taken from batch to batch or from the same batch of different items.
The tests that shall be performed with permissible variations in the same are indicated below:
Dry material content : to be within 3% and 5% of liquid and solid admixtures respectively of
the value stated by the manufacturer.
Ash content: to be within 1% of the value stated by the manufacturer.
Relative density (liquid admixtures) : to be within 2% of the value stated by the manufacturer.
All tests relating to the admixtures shall be conducted periodically as decided by the EngineerIn-Charge at an independent laboratory and compared with the data given by the
manufacturer.
6.6.2. Material Admixtures
Pozzolana
Pozzolonic materials conforming to IS 3812 may be used with the permission of the EngineerIn-Charge provided uniform blending with cement is ensured.
Fly ash (Pulverized fuel ash)
Fly ash conforming to Grade 1 of IS 3812 may be used as part of replacement of Ordinary
Portland cement provided uniform blending with cement is ensured.
Silica fume
Silica fume conforming to standard acceptable to the Engineer-In-Charge may be used as part
replacement of cement provided uniform blending with cement is ensured.
Rice husk ash
Rice husk ash giving required performance and uniformity characteristics may be used with
the approval of the Engineer-In-Charge.
Metakoline
Metakoline having fineness between 700 to 900sq.m per kg may be used as Pozzolonic
material in concrete.
Ground granulated blast furnace slag (GBSS)
Specifications
Page 23
Tender No: -1800000008
Ground granulated blast furnace slag obtained by grinding granulated blast furnace slag
conforming to IS 12089 may be used as part replacement of Ordinary Portland cement
provided uniform blending with cement is ensured.
6.7.
Placing of Concrete – (Plain & Reinforced)
Grades of Concrete
Various grades of concrete shall be as per IS 456 - 2000 (latest) with specified characteristic
compressive strength against these grades in accordance with Table 2 in the said IS. In the
grade designation, letter ‘M’ refers to the mix and the number to the specified characteristic
compressive strength of 15 cm. cube at 28 days expressed in N/mm2. The characteristic
strength is defined as the strength of material below which not more than 5 percent of the test
results are expected to fall.
The mix shall be designed to produce the grade of concrete having the required workability and
a characteristic strength not less than appropriate values given in Table 2 of IS 456:2000. The
target mean strength of concrete mix should be equal to the characteristic strength plus 1.65
times the standard deviation.
Design Mix Concrete
All RC work shall be in “Design Mix Concrete” only. The Contractor shall make all the
necessary tests from approved authorized laboratories like VJTI, IIT, Sardar Patel College, etc.
to determine for each grade of concrete, the proportions of various ingredients by weight to
arrive at the desired design mix to the satisfaction of the Engineer-In-Charge. Such mix will be
known as the “declared mix”. No deviation from the “declared mix” will be permitted without
the approval of the Engineer-In-Charge. Approval by the Engineer-In-Charge to such “declared
mix” shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to use in the Works at all times only
concrete as specified in the relevant drawings.
The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for design of concrete mixes of the specified
performance to suit the degree of workability and characteristic strengths required for the
various parts of the Works.
Concrete shall meet with the strength requirements and minimum cementations material,
maximum w/c ratio as indicated in TABLE 5 of IS 456:2000 hereinafter unless specifically
stated otherwise.
Alternative mixes may be designed by the Contractor for use in both thin and narrow sections
and thick sections. Special mixes using finer aggregates may be designed by him for in filling
pockets and narrow spaces and for regions of congested reinforcement.
Nominal Mix Concrete
Nominal mix concrete may be allowed by the Engineer-In-Charge at his discretion. The
proportions of materials shall be in accordance with Table 9 of IS 456-2000. The relevant
details at a glance are indicated in given below in Table 4.
TABLE - 4
Grade of
Concrete
M 10
M 15
M 20
Total quantity of dry aggregates by
Mass per 50kg of Cement, to be
taken as the sum of the individual
Masses of Fine & Coarse Aggregate,
Kg,
Max.
480 Kg.
350 Kg.
250 Kg.
Quality of
water per
50Kg. of
cement,
Max.
34 Litres
32 Litres
30 Litres
The proportion of fine aggregate to coarse aggregate by mass shall generally be 1:2
subject to an upper limit of 1:1 ½ and lower limit of 1:2 ½.
Specifications
Page 24
Tender No: -1800000008
TABLE - 5
I.S.
Sieve
Designat
ion
63 mm.
40 mm.
20 mm.
16 mm.
12.5
mm.
10 mm.
4.75
mm.
2.36
mm.
Percentage passing for single sized
aggregate of nominal size
40
20
16
12.5
10
mm.
mm.
mm.
mm.
mm.
100
85100
0-20
-
100
-
85-100
100
85-100
-
Percentage passing for graded
aggregate of nominal size
40
20
16
12.5
mm.
mm.
mm.
mm.
-
-
95-100
100
85-100
100
30-70
-
100
-
-
95-100
100
100
90-100
90-100
0-5
-
0-20
0-5
0-30
0-5
0-45
0-10
85-100
0-20
10-35
0-5
25-55
0-10
30-70
0-10
40-85
0-10
-
-
-
-
0-5
-
-
-
-
Mix Design & Proportioning
Mix proportions shall be designed to ensure that the workability of fresh concrete is suitable
for conditions of handling and placing, so that after compaction it surrounds all
reinforcements and completely fills the formwork. When concrete is hardened, it shall have
the stipulated strength, durability and impartibility.
Determination of the proportions by weight of cement, aggregates and water shall be based on
design of the mix.
As a trial the manufacturer of concrete may prepare a preliminary mix according to provisions
of SP: 23-1982.
All concrete proportions for various grades of concrete shall be designed separately and the
mix proportions established keeping in view the workability for various structural elements,
methods of placing & compacting.
Standard Deviation
Standard deviation calculations of test results based on tests conducted on the same mix
design for a particular grade designation shall be done in accordance with clause 9.2.4 of IS
456.
Acceptance Criteria
Compressive strength: The concrete shall be deemed to comply with the strength requirements
when both the following conditions are met –
a. The mean strength determined from any group of four consecutive test results complies
with the appropriate limits in col. 2 of Table 6 pf IS 456 - 2000.
b. Any individual test result complies with the appropriate limits in column 3 of Table 6.
Flexural strength: When both the following conditions are met, the concrete complies with the
specified flexural strength.
i.
The mean strength determined from any group of four consecutive test results exceeds
the specified characteristic strength by at least 0.3 N/mm2
ii.
The strength determined from any test results is not less than the specified
characteristic strength less 0.3 N/mm2
Specifications
Page 25
Tender No: -1800000008
Quantity of concrete represented by strength test results – The quantity of concrete
represented by a group of four consecutive test results shall include the batches from which
the first and last samples were taken together with all intervening batches.
For the individual test result requirements given in col. 3 of Table 6 or in item (b) of above only
the particular batch from which the sample was taken shall be at risk.
Where the mean rate of sampling is not specified the maximum quantity of concrete that four
consecutive test results represent shall be limited to 60 cub. m
If the concrete is deemed not to comply pursuant to quality of concrete represented by
strength Test result as above, the structural adequacy of the parts affected shall be
investigated and any consequential action as needed shall be taken.
Cement content of concrete
For all grades of concrete manufactured / produced, minimum cement content in the concrete
shall be 310 kg per cubic metre of concrete. Also, irrespective of the grade of concrete, the
maximum cement content shall not be more than 500 kg per cub. m of concrete. These
limitations shall apply for all types of cements of all strengths.
Actual cement content in each grade of concrete for various conditions of variables shall be
established by design mixes and approved by the Engineer-In-Charge.
Approval of Design Mix
The contractor shall submit details of each trial mix of each grade of concrete designed for
various workability conditions to the Engineer-In-Charge for approval. Concrete of any
particular design mix and grade shall be produced / manufactured for works only on obtaining
approval of the Engineer-In-Charge.
For any change in quality/quantity in the ingredients of a particular concrete for which mix
has been designed earlier and approved by the Engineer-In-Charge, the mix has to be
redesigned and approval shall be obtained again.
Quality Assurances Measures
In order that properties of the completed structure be consistent with the requirements and
the assumptions made during planning and design adequate quality assurance measures shall
be taken. Quality Assurance procedures be developed and submitted to the approval of
Engineer-In-Charge. The said Quality Assurance plan shall fulfil the requirements detailed
under clause no. 10.1 of IS : 456 - 2000.
Proportioning & Batching
Preliminary tests shall be carried out to determine the proportions by weight of cement, coarse
and fine aggregate to produce the desired grade of concrete. These proportions shall be
maintained during subsequent concrete batching by means of weight batchers conforming to
IS 2722.
The accuracy of the measuring equipment shall be within ± 2 percent of the quantity of cement
being measured and within +/- 3 percent of the quantity of aggregate, admixtures and water
being measured.
The batcher shall be tested for accuracy of calibration before commencement of the work and
at least once a week thereafter or more frequently, if so required by the Engineer-In-Charge.
All measuring equipment shall be maintained in a clean serviceable condition and their
accuracy periodically checked.
Specifications
Page 26
Tender No: -1800000008
Grading of Aggregate & Foreign Material Limitations
Coarse Aggregate
Coarse aggregates shall be either in single size or graded; in both cases, the grading shall
be within acceptable limits .
The percentages of deleterious substances in the coarse aggregate delivered to the mixer
shall not exceed the volumes given in table here below.
TABLE - 6
Deleterious Substance
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
Coal & Lignite
Clay lumps
Material finer than 75
micron
Soft fragments
Shale
Total of percentages of all
the deleterious materials
(except mica) including SI
no. (i) to (v)
PERCENT BY WEIGHT
Uncrushed
1.00
1.00
3.00
Crushed
1.00
1.00
3.00
3.00
-5.00
--5.00
Fine Aggregate
Unless otherwise directed or approved, the grading of sand shall be within the limits
indicated in table here below.
TABLE - 7
I.S. Sieve
Designatio
n
10 mm.
4.75 mm.
2.36 mm.
1.18 mm.
600 micron
300 micron
150 micron
Grading
Zone-I
%
passing
100
90-100
60-95
30-70
15-34
5-20
0-10
Grading
Zone - II
%
passing
100
90-100
75-100
55-90
35-59
8-30
0-10
Grading
Zone - III
%
passing
100
90-100
85-100
75-100
60-79
12-40
0-10
Grading
Zone - IV
%
passing
100
95-100
95-100
90-100
80-100
15-50
0-15
Where the grading falls outside the limits of any particular grading zone of sieves other than
600 micron I.S. sieve, by total amount not exceeding 5 percent, it shall be regarded as falling
within that grading zone. This tolerance shall not be applied to percentage passing the 600
micron I.S. sieve or to percentage passing any other sieve size on the coarser limit of Grading
Zone I or the finer limit of Grading Zone IV. Fine Aggregates conforming to Grading Zone IV
shall not be used unless mix designs and preliminary tests have shown its suitability for
producing concrete of specified strength and workability.
Fine aggregate shall have a fineness modulus of not less than 2.2 or more than 3.2. The
fineness modulus is determined by adding the cumulative percentages retained on I.S. sieve
sizes 4.75 mm., 2.36 mm., 1.18 mm., 600 micron 300 micron and 150 micron and dividing the
sum by 100.
The percentage of deleterious substances in sand delivered to the mixer shall not exceed
the values given in table here below:
Specifications
Page 27
Tender No: -1800000008
TABLE - 8
Deleterious Substance
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
Coal & Lignite
Clay lumps
Material finer than 75
micron
Soft fragments
Shale
Total of percentages of all
the deleterious materials
(except mica) including
SI no. (i) to (v) for
uncrushed and SI. No. (i)
& (ii) for crushed fine
aggregate.
PERCENT BY
WEIGHT
Uncrushe
Crushed
d
1.00
1.00
3.00
1.00
1.00
15.00
-1.00
5.00
--2.00
Water Cement Ration (W/C Ratio)
The water-cement ratio is defined as the weight of water in the mix (including the surface
moisture of the aggregates) divided by the weight of cement in the mix. Free water-cement
ratio should not exceed 0.40 for substructure and 0.45 for superstructure unless otherwise
specified.
Only such quantity of water shall be added to the cement / cementations material and
aggregates in the concrete mix as to ensure dense concrete, specified surface finish,
satisfactory workability, consistent with the strength stipulated for each class of concrete.
Water added to the mix shall be such as not to cause segregation of materials or the
collection of excessive free water on the surface of the concrete.
The actual water-cement ratio to be adopted shall be determined in each instance by the
Contractor & approved by the Engineer-In-Charge.
The W/C ratio determined and approved for use by the Engineer-In-Charge shall be
maintained throughout the corresponding part of the Works. Approved tests conforming to
relevant IS Codes subject to approval of Engineer-In-Charge shall be undertaken periodically
by the Contractor for maintaining the consistency. Such ones comprise frequent determination
of the water content of the aggregate during the progress of work as specified in IS 2386 (PartIII). To allow for the variation in weight of aggregates due to variation in their moisture content,
suitable adjustments in the weights of aggregates shall also be made.
The Contractor shall exercise special precautions on the water content for concrete work
since the colour of such concrete is sensitive to small variations of water in the mix.
Volumetric mixing may be allowed by the Engineer-In-Charge at his discretion by converting
the “declared mix” to corresponding mix by volume. Allowance for bulkage shall be made in
accordance with IS 2386(Part 3). Periodic checks shall be made on mass / column relationship
of the materials. Similarly where cement is measured by bags directly reasonable number of
cement bags should be weighed periodically to check the net mass as directed by the EngineerIn-Charge.
Workability
•
Workability of concrete should be checked at frequent intervals. It shall be checked at
frequent intervals by approved tests such as slump tests, compacting factor tests etc. in
accordance with IS 1199. If required the same shall be controlled by adjusting the dosage
of the admixtures if permitted by the Engineer-In-Charge.
Specifications
Page 28
Tender No: -1800000008
•
The range of slumps for various types of work shall generally be as follows subject to
approval by the Engineer-In-Charge unless stated otherwise. Slump required for
workability shall be achieved, if necessary by using approved super plasticizer without any
extra cost.
TABLE - 9
Placing condition
SLUMP (in mm.)
Maximu
m
75
Minimu
m
25
Blinding concrete; shallow sections; Pavement
using Pavers
Mass concrete; Lightly reinforced sections in slabs,
75
25
beams, walls, columns, Floors, hand placed
pavements, Strip footings
Heavily reinforced sections in slabs, beams, walls,
100
50
columns;
Slip formwork, Pumped concrete
100
75
Trench fill; In-situ piling
150
100
Note:
For most of the placing conditions, internal vibrators (needle vibrator) are
suitable. The diameter of the needle shall be determined based on the
density and the spacing of reinforcement bars and thickness of the
sections. For trieme concrete, vibrators are not required to be used and
clause 7.1.2 of IS : 456 - 2000 shall be followed in such case.
a)
Mixing of Concrete
All concrete whether design mix or nominal mix shall be mixed in an approved mechanical
mixer. The mixer shall comply with IS : 1791 & IS : 12119. The mixer shall be fitted with water
measuring (metering) devices.
Material for concrete shall be deposited into the mixer drum while it is in rotation in the
following order.
Coarse aggregate, cement, fine aggregate and water
The mixing shall be continued until there is a uniform distribution of the materials and the
mass is uniform in colour and consistency. If there is segregation after unloading from the
mixer, the concrete should not be remixed.
For guidance, the mixing time shall be at least 2 minutes .For other types of more efficient
mixers, manufacturers recommendations shall be followed; for hydrophobic cement it may be
decided by the Engineer-In-Charge.
The volume of mixed material shall not exceed the manufacturer’s rated mixer capacity.
Temperature of aggregate, water and cement when added to the mixer shall be such that the
temperature (minimum & maximum) of the concrete at the time of placement shall be as
specified in IS 456 : 2000
The mixer shall be thoroughly cleaned of all hardened sticking concrete and foreign materials
before beginning the concreting operations and also at frequent intervals between batches and
at the end of concreting work by spraying the drum with cool water.
Concrete shall be discharged from the mixer on to a level, clean and water-tight surface. The
area surrounding the mixer and the aggregate stacks shall be kept clean.
Specifications
Page 29
Tender No: -1800000008
Subject to the approval of the Engineer-In-Charge, the Contractor may use waterproofing
admixtures and / or other chemical admixtures and additives in concrete. The proportions and
the mode of use shall be as per the manufacturers’ instructions. The Contractor shall furnish
complete literature in regard to such admixtures / additives to the Engineer-In-Charge.
Dosage of retarders, plasticizers and super-plasticizers shall be as per manufacturer’s
requirement and subject to approval of the Engineer-In-Charge. Unless otherwise specified. It
shall be restricted to 0.5, 1.0 and 2.0 percent respectively by weight of cementations materials
unless a higher value is permitted by the Engineer-In-Charge. Approval of mix design shall be
by the Engineer-In-Charge prior to actual executions.
Mixing of cement mortar or concrete which has partially set shall not be permitted under any
circumstances.
b)
Transporting and Placing of Concrete
Concrete shall be handled from the place of mixing to the place of final placing as rapidly as
practicable by methods which will prevent the segregation or loss of any of the ingredients and
maintaining the required workability. Entire operation shall not take time more than the
initial setting time of concrete under the prevailing site conditions.
During hot or cold weather, concrete shall be transported in deep containers. Other suitable
methods to reduce the loss of water by evaporation in hot weather and heat loss in cold
weather may also be adopted.
The concrete shall be deposited as nearly as practicable in its final position to avoid rehandling. No concrete shall be permitted to be used in the Works after initial set has taken
place. Concreting of beams, slabs and similar members shall be carried out in one continuous
operation to the full depth of the member and the sequence of placing shall be so arranged as
to avoid disturbance of partially set concrete.
Method of placing of concrete should be such that no segregation occurs during placing.
Generally concrete shall not be dropped freely from a height of more than 1.2 meters in the
works of watertight structures and 1.6 m. in all other works. When required to be deposited
from a greater height, it shall be done through a metal-lined chute with slope no flatter than
1:3 (vertical : horizontal) and not steeper than 1:2. The discharge end of the chute will be
provided with a baffle plate to prevent segregation. The discharge end of the chute shall be
maintained above the surface of the concrete in forms and concrete shall not be permitted to
fall from the end of chute by more than 1 m. During cleaning a chute, the waste water shall be
kept clear of the forms.
c)
Compaction of Concrete
Except for thin layer of plain concrete (for which tamping may be allowed), each layer of all
grades / mixes of concrete shall be thoroughly compacted with approved mechanical vibrators
of adequate power or as per IS 2505, IS 2506, IS 2514 supplemented by hand spreading,
rodding and tamping as directed so that concrete works around the reinforcement, around
entrapped fixtures and into corners of the formwork, embedded air is expelled, dense concrete
is obtained and the exposed surfaces are free from air pockets, honey-combing and other
defects.
Type of vibrators (immersion vibrators, shutter vibrators, surface vibrators etc.) to be used
shall depend on the type of structure for which concreting is done and shall have the approval
of the Engineer-In-Charge. The size and number to be provided shall be such as to ensure
proper consolidation.
General precautions to be taken in vibration work shall be as follows•
Concrete once vibrated shall not be vibrated again.
Specifications
Page 30
•
•
•
•
•
d)
Tender No: -1800000008
Partially hardened concrete or mortar shall not be re-tamped.
Over-vibration, under-vibration or vibration of very wet mixes should be avoided.
Tapping or external vibration of forms by hand tools or immersion vibrators shall not be
permitted.
Care shall be taken to prevent contact of immersion vibrators against reinforcement
steel. These vibrators shall not be allowed to come in contact with the reinforcement
steel after start of initial set. They shall also not be allowed to come in contact with
forms or finished surfaces.
Whenever external vibrators are used, the design of formwork & the disposition of
vibrators should be given special consideration to ensure sufficient compaction and
surface blemishes.
Concreting in Inclement Weather
During heavy rains, concreting shall be stopped keeping appropriate temporary stop ends and
newly cast concrete shall be instantly covered by suitable protective means. Any concrete
damaged due to rainstorms etc. shall be replaced appropriately as directed by the Engineer-InCharge at the expense of the Contractor.
e)
Concreting under water
When it is necessary to deposit concrete under water, the Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer-In-Charge for his approval the method of carrying out the work together with the
materials and proportions thereof he propose to use. In no case such concrete be considered as
"Design Mix Concrete”
f)
Curing
All concrete shall be protected during hardening from the harmful effects of sunshine and
drying winds. All exposed surfaces of newly placed concrete shall be kept continuously in a
damp or wet condition by water ponding or by covering with a canvas, hessian or similar other
water absorbent materials and kept continuously wet for at least seven days from the date of
placing of concrete. Likewise all formwork directly in contact with concrete shall be kept dry.
Curing compounds to provide surface coating with specking equipment may also be used if
permitted by the Engineer-In-Charge. The necessary literature shall be furnished by the
Contractor for the purpose.
For in-situ slabs (whether for flat roofs or other level surfaces, floors, pavements, side walks
etc.), curing shall be by pounding only.
The curing period for water-tight structure shall be 10 days. In the case of concrete where
mineral admixtures or blended cements are used the curing period shall be extended to 14
days.
The Contractor shall take good care in the arrangement (whether by continuous fine mist
spraying or sprinkling or by covering with clean sand or wet gunny bags or by any curing
compounds) and execution of curing so that curing will be carried out without interruption
during the nights, Sundays and holidays.
Water for curing shall be of the same quality as used for concrete.
g)
Expansion Joints
Expansion joints in the watertight structures shall always be provided with water-stop for the
entire length of joints unless otherwise specified or as specified in the item description. The
work shall be carried out in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
h)
Construction Joints & Keys
Specifications
Page 31
Tender No: -1800000008
Concrete shall be placed without interruption until completion of the part of the work between
predetermined construction joints as specified hereinafter. Time lapse between the pouring of
adjoining units shall be as specified on the drawings or as directed by Engineer-In-Charge.
If stopping of concreting becomes unavoidable anywhere, properly formed construction joints
shall be made along where the work is stopped. These joints shall be either vertical or
horizontal, unless shown otherwise on drawings. In case of an inclined or curved member, the
joint shall be at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the member. Vertical joints in walls
shall be kept to a minimum. Vertical joints shall be formed against a stop board. Horizontal
joints shall be level and wherever possible, arranged so that the joint lines coincide with the
architectural features of the finished work. Battens shall be nailed to the formwork to ensure a
horizontal line and if directed shall also be used to form a grooved joint. For tank walls and
similar work joints shall be formed as per IS 3370. Concrete that is in the process of setting
shall not be disturbed or shaken by traffic either on the concrete itself or upon the shuttering.
Horizontal and vertical construction joints and shear keys shall be located and shall conform
in detail to the requirements of the plans unless otherwise directed by Engineer-In-Charge.
Where not described, the joint shall be in accordance with the following.
Column Joint
In a column, the joints shall be formed 75 mm. below the lowest soffit of the beams including
haunches if any. In flat slab construction, the joint shall be 75 mm. below the soffit of column
capital. At least 2 hours shall elapse after depositing concrete in columns, piers or walls, before
depositing in beams, girders or slabs supported thereon.
Beam & Slab Joint
Concrete in a beam shall be placed throughout without a joint but if the provision of a joint is
unavoidable the joint shall be vertical and at the centre or within the middle third of the span
unless otherwise shown on drawings. Where a beam intersects a girder, the joints in the girder
shall be offset a distance equal to twice the width of the beam and additional reinforcement
provided for shear. The joints shall be vertical throughout the full thickness of the concrete
member. A joint in a slab shall be vertical and parallel to the principal reinforcement. Where it
is unavoidably at right angles to the principal reinforcement, the joint shall be vertical and at
the middle of the span.
Joints in Liquid Retaining Structures
Vertical construction joints in watertight construction will not be permitted unless indicated on
the drawings. Where a horizontal construction joint is required to resist water pressure, special
care shall be taken in all phases of its construction to ensure maximum water tightness.
Where the work has to be resumed on a surface which has hardened, any skin or laitance shall
be removed and the surface roughened by hammering with an approved power-operated
“bush” hammer followed by wire brushing to remove all loose practices. When using this
procedure, great care shall be taken to avoid disturbing concrete matrix . The surface is then
thoroughly wetted. Fresh concrete should thoroughly be vibrated near the construction joint so
that mortar from the new concrete flows between large aggregates and develop proper bond
with old concrete.
Where high shear resistance is required at the construction joints, shear key may be provided.
Sprayed curing membranes and release agents should be thoroughly removed from joint
surfaces.
Where the concrete has not fully hardened, all laitance shall be removed by scrubbing the wet
surface with wire on bristle brushes or by using water jets, care being taken to avoid
dislodgment of particles of aggregate. The prepared surface should be in a clean saturated
surface dry condition when fresh concrete is placed, against it. Fresh concrete shall be
thoroughly vibrated near construction joint so that mortar from new concrete flows between
large aggregates and develop proper bond with old concrete.
Specifications
Page 32
Tender No: -1800000008
i)
Sampling & Testing of Concrete
For preliminary tests( initial trial mix), test specimen shall be prepared with at least two
different water / cement ratio for each class of concrete consistent with the workability
required for the nature of the work. The materials and proportions used in making preliminary
tests shall be similar in tall respects to those to be actually employed in the works. All the
cubes shall be made, cured and tested in accordance with IS : 516
Facilities required for sampling materials and concrete in the field, if Engineer-In-Charge so
desires, shall be provided by Contractor at no extra cost. The following equipment with
operator shall be made available at Engineer-In-Charge’s request (all must be in serviceable
conditions) –
Concrete cube-testing machine suitable for 15 cm. cubes
of 100 Tonnes capacity with providing calibration ring
Cast Iron cube moulds 15 cm. size 18 Nos. (minimum)
Slump cone complete with temping rod
Laboratory balance to weight upto 5 Kg.with sensitivity of
10 gm
IS sieves for coarse & fine aggregates
A set of measuring cylinder from 5 ltr. to 0.1 ltr.
Laboratory balance of 2 Kg. capacity with sensitivity of 1
gm
1 No
18 No
1 Set
1 No
1 Set
1 Set
1 No
Note: Arrangement shall be made by Contractor to have the cubes tested in an approved
laboratory in lieu of a testing machine at site at his expense, with the prior consent of the
Engineer-In-Charge.
Three test specimens unless otherwise specified shall be made from each sample for testing at
28 days. Additional samples shall be taken for determining the strength of concrete at 7 days
or at the time of striking the formwork, or to determine the duration of curing or to check the
testing error. Additional samples shall also be required for testing samples cured by
accelerated methods as described in IS 9103. The specimen shall be tested as described in IS
516.
For works test, samples from fresh concrete shall be taken as per IS 1199 and cubes shall be
made, cured and tested in accordance with IS 516 unless specified or instructed otherwise by
the Engineer-In-Charge. Minimum frequency for sampling of concrete of each grade shall be in
accordance will the following:
TABLE 10
Quality of concrete in the
work m³
1 - 5
6 - 15
16 – 30
31 – 50
51 and above
Number of samples
1
2
3
4
4 plus one additional sample for
each additional 50 m³ as part
thereof
Note : At-least one sample shall be taken from each shift when concrete is produced at
continuous production unit, such as ready-mixed concrete plant, frequency of sampling shall
be subject to the approval of Engineer-In-Charge.
The acceptance criteria of concrete tests shall be as per Clause 16.1, 16.2, 16.3, 16.4, 16.5 &
16.6 of IS 456-2000.
Specifications
Page 33
Tender No: -1800000008
j)
Concrete Below Specified Strength
Should the concrete tests fail to meet the minimum specified strength requirements for the
respective grades of concrete, the Engineer-In-Charge may take one of the following decisions –
Instruct the Contractor to carry out such additional tests (e.g. NDT test, core test, load-test
etc.) and/or remedial measures to ensure the soundness of the structure at the Contractor’s
expense.
The Engineer-In-Charge may accept the work provided it meets the relevant acceptance criteria
as stipulated in IS 456-2000. Any decision to accept the work shall be entirely at the discretion
of the Engineer-In-Charge who may make a reduction in the rate of the appropriate item.
The work will be rejected and any consequential action as needed shall be taken at the
Contractor’s expenses including cutting out and replacing a part or whole of the work.
k)
Repair & Replacement of unsatisfactory Concrete
Immediately after the shuttering is removed, the surface of concrete shall be carefully
inspected and all defective areas called to the attention of Engineer-In-Charge who may permit
patching of the defective areas or also reject the concrete unit either partially or fully shall be
attended. Rejected concrete shall be removed and replaced by Contractor at No additional
expense. Holes left by bolts etc. shall be filled up and made good with mortar composed of one
part of cement to one and half parts of sand passing 2.36 mm. IS sieve after removing loose
stones adhering to the concrete. Mortar filling shall be struck off flush at the face of the
concrete. Concrete surfaces shall be finished as described under the particular items of work.
Superficial honey combed surfaces and rough patches shall be similarly made good
immediately after removal of shuttering, in the presence of Engineer-In-Charge and superficial
pores shall be filled in. The mortar shall be well worked into the surface with a wooden float
Excess water shall be avoided. Unless instructed otherwise by Engineer-In-Charge, the surface
of the exposed concrete placed against shuttering shall be rubbed down immediately on
removal of shuttering to remove fine or other Irregularities, care being taken to avoid damaging
the surface. Surface irregularities shall be removed by grinding.
Use of Epoxy
The use of epoxy for bonding fresh concrete used for repairs will be permitted upon written
approval of Engineer-In-Charge. Epoxies shall be applied in strict accordance with the
instructions of the manufacturer. Only flexible epoxy shall be permitted with certain minimum
solid contents as recommended by the Engineer-In-Charge. The use of epoxy if any shall be at
no extra cost to the Employer.
Method of Repair
Small size holes having surface dimensions about equal to the depth of the hole, holes left after
removal of bolts, grout insert holes and slots cut for repair of cracks shall be repaired as
follows. The holes to be patched shall be roughened and thoroughly soaked with clean water
until absorption stops.
Before surface treatment, grouting may have to be done by equal strength shrinkable grout.
Unless otherwise specified, 5 mm. thick layer of grout of equal parts of cement and sand shall
be well brushed into the surface to be patched, followed immediately by the patching concrete
which shall be well consolidated with a wooden float and left slightly prod of the surrounding
surface. The concrete patch shall be built up in 10 mm. thick layers. After an hour or more,
depending upon weather conditions, it shall be worked off flush with a wooden flat and a
smooth finish obtained by wiping with hessian, a steel trowel shall be used for this purpose.
The mix for patching shall be of the same materials and in the same proportions as that used
in the concrete being repaired, although some reduction in the maximum size of the coarse
aggregates may be necessary and the mix shall be kept as dry as possible.
Specifications
Page 34
Tender No: -1800000008
Mortar filling by air pressure (guniting) shall be used for repair of areas too large and / or too
shallow for patching with mortar. Patched surfaces shall be given a final treatment to match
the colour and texture of the surrounding concrete. White cement shall be substituted for
ordinary cement, if so directed by Engineer-In-Charge, to match the shade of the patch with
the original concrete.
Curing of patched work
The patched area shall be covered immediately with an approved water retaining, water
saturated material such as gunny bags which shall be kept continuously wet and protected
against sun and wind for a period of 24 hours. Thereafter, the patched area shall be kept wet
continuously by a fine spray or sprinkling for not less than 10 days.
Approval by Engineer-In-Charge
All materials, procedures and operations used in the repair of concrete and also the finished
repair work shall be subject to the approval of Engineer-In-Charge. All fillings shall be tightly
bonded to the concrete and shall be sound, free from cracks after the fillings have been cured
and dried.
l)
Finishing
This specification is intended to cover the treatment of concrete surfaces of all structures.
Areas requiring special finish not covered by this specification shall be clearly indicated on the
drawings and special specifications, if any shall be furnished by the contractor for approval.
Finish for Formed Surfaces
The type of finish for formed concrete surfaces shall be as follows, unless otherwise specified.
For surface against which backfill or concrete is to be placed, no treatment is required except
repair of defective areas.
For surfaces below grade, which will receive, waterproofing treatment the concrete shall be free
of surface irregularities, which would interfere with proper application of the waterproofing
material, which is specified for use.
Unless specified, surfaces which will be exposed when the structure is in service shall receive
no special finish, except repair of damaged or defective concrete, removal of fins and abrupt
irregularities, filling of holes left by form ties and rods and clean up of loose or adhering debris.
Surfaces which will be exposed to the weather and which would normally be level, shall be
sloped for drainage. Unless the drawing specifies a horizontal surface or shows the slope
required, the tops of narrow surface such as stair treads, walls, curbs and parapets shall be
sloped across the width approximately 1 in 30. Broader surface such as walkways, roads,
parking areas and platforms shall be sloped about 1 in 50. Surfaces that will be covered by
backfill or concrete, sub-floors to be covered with concrete topping, terrazzo or quarry tile and
similar surfaces shall be smoothing screened and levelled to produce even surfaces. Surface
irregularities shall not exceed 6 mm. Surfaces which will not be covered by backfill, concrete or
tiles toppings such as outside decks, floors of galleries and sumps, parapets, gutters, side
walks, floors and slabs, shall be consolidated, screened and floated. Excess water and laitance
shall be removed before final finishing. Floating may be done with hand or power tools and
started as soon as the screened surface has attained the stiffness to permit finishing
operations and these shall be the minimum required to produce a surface uniform in texture
and free from screed marks or other imperfections. Joints and edges shall be tooled as called
for on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer-In-Charge.
Standard finish for exposed concrete
Specifications
Page 35
Tender No: -1800000008
Exposed concrete shall mean any concrete, other than floors or slabs, exposed to view upon
completion of the job.
Unless otherwise specified on the drawings, the standard finish for exposed concrete shall be a
smooth finish.
A smooth finish shall be obtained with the use of lined or plywood forms having smooth and
even surfaces and edges. Panels and form linings shall be of uniform size and be as large as
practicable and installed with closed joints. Upon removal of forms the joint marks shall be
smoothed off by grinding etc. and all blemishes, projections etc. removed leaving the surfaces
reasonably smooth and unmarred.
Integral cement concrete finish
When specified on the drawings an integral cement concrete finish or specified thickness for
floors and slabs shall be applied either monolithic or bonded, as specified on the drawings, as
per IS 2571. The surface shall be compacted and then floated with a wood float or power
floating machine. The surface shall be tested with a straight edge and any high and low spots
eliminated. Floating or trowelling of the finish shall be permitted only after all surface water
has evaporated. Dry cement or a mixture of dry cement and sand shall not be sprinkled
directly on the surface of the cement finish to absorb moisture or to stiffen the mix.
Protection
All concrete shall be protected against damage until final acceptance by Engineer-In-Charge.
Measurement
Dimensions shall be measured to a cm except for the thickness of slab which shall be
measured correct to 0.50cm. The areas shall be worked out nearest to 0.01 sq.m.
The cubical contents shall be worked out to nearest 0.01 cubic meter. Reinforced cement
concrete shall be classified under different category and measured as categorized in the item
description.
No deductions shall be made fori)
Ends of dissimilar material( e.g. joist, beams, post girders, rafters, purlins, corbels, steps
etc.),
ii)
volume occupied by water pipes, conduits etc. Nothing extra shall be paid for leaving and
finishing such cavities and holes.
iii)
The concrete displaced by the reinforcement, inserts shall not be deducted.
iv)
No deduction shall be made for openings less than 0.10 Sq.m. in area where concrete is
measured in Sq.m. and 0.02 Cu.m. where concrete is measured in Cu.m.
The measurement of RCC work between various units shall be regulated as belowa) Footings (sloped) –
Volume
=
h /3 (A1 + A2 + A1 x A2)
where A1 & A2 are areas at top and bottom respectively and h = perpendicular height of the
trapezoidal portion.
b) Slabs They shall be measured full on superficial areas in the plane of the slab.
Specifications
Page 36
Tender No: -1800000008
c) Columns When in junction with slab, the thickness of slab shall be deducted in computing the
column height.
d) Beams They shall be measured as clear length between supporting beams and columns. Depth
shall be measured clear below slab.
e) Lintels
The length shall be measured including the bearing lengths.
f)
Chajja’s
Measurement of chajjas shall be inclusive of bearings.
Rate
The rate includes the cost of material and labour involved in all the operations described above
except for the cost of centering and shuttering unless specified. Reinforcement shall be
measured separately .
Unless otherwise specified the rates of concrete work shall allow fori)
Use of metal 12mm and below in size well-graded in thin members or where reinforcement
is crowded,
ii)
any shapes and sizes of various members,
iii) all architectural effects like chases, ledges, moulds, grooves, chamfers etc.
iv) provision of any openings, pockets, channels, holes, wooden blocks etc
v)
provision of cover blocks (made out of precast cubes in CM of the same strength as that of
concrete of the member or equivalent approved material) to maintain the specified cover to
reinforcement
vi) work at all depths and heights and levels and locations
vii) taking out and testing of cubes as per IS specifications
viii) For machine mixing and through vibrating.
ix) The rates for all concrete work shall be for unfinished work only. (It may be noted that all
concrete surfaces need not be plastered and all unplastered surfaces are not necessarily
form-finished)
x)
6.8.
Cost towards Design Mix and approval.
Formwork
Formwork (or shuttering) comprises of all forms and moulds made up of planks and steel
sheeting etc., shores, bracings and struts, ties, anchors and hangers, steel rods, bolts and
allied inserts, uprights, walling, wedges and all other temporary supports for concrete work
during the process of concreting and setting.
Material
Formwork may be of timber, plywood, steel or other metal, plastic or concrete or any suitable
material. For special finishes the formwork may be lined with plywood, steel sheets, oil
tempered hard board etc. Dented steel plates will not be allowed and shall not be used at all.
Specifications
Page 37
Tender No: -1800000008
Timber shall be easily workable without splitting and shall not warp when exposed to sun or
rain or wetted during concreting. Plywood shall be 12 mm. thick complying with IS 4990 and
steel shall be 3 mm. black sheets suitably stiffened with angles or appropriate equivalent.
Sliding forms and slip forms may be used for special purpose construction with the approval of
the Engineer-In-Charge.
Design
Formwork shall be adequately designed to cater for all the vertical (dead load of wet concrete,
superimposed live loads during construction, materials, equipment etc.) and lateral loads
without causing displacement, deflection or movement of any kind. The Contractor shall be
entirely responsible for the design and stability of formwork regardless of whether he is
instructed to furnish the design calculations, drawings and other particulars of his proposal or
not, and regardless of whether his proposal has been approved by the Engineer-In-Charge or
not. All the expenses arising out of defective shuttering & centering resulting in dismantling /
redoing the work etc. shall be to the Contractor’s account. For details regarding design,
detailing etc. reference may be made to IS 14687. Contractor shall submit formwork design &
methodology for the approval of Engineer-In-Charge prior to execution.
Erection of Formwork
Forms shall be true to shape, lines, levels and dimensions of the concrete work as shown on
the drawings and shall be rigidly constructed using adequate number of props, struts, ties,
braces etc. Where props rest on natural or filled-up ground, the soil shall be thoroughly
compacted to avoid any settlement. False-work shall be so constructed that vertical
adjustments can be made to compensate the settlements. Wedges may be used at the top or
bottom of timber shores, but not at both ends to facilitate vertical adjustments or dismantling
of the formwork. No bamboos and wooden bullies shall be permitted to be used for props or
cross bearers/bracings.
Proper precautions shall be taken to see that all joints in the formwork are watertight to
prevent escape of slurry.
Connections in formwork shall be constructed to permit easy removal of the shuttering and
shall be adequately secured by screws, bolts, clamps, wire etc. so as to be strong enough to
retain the correct shape during consolidation.
Faces in contact with concrete shall be free from adhering ground, projecting nails, splits or
any defects so that when stripped, any formation of blemishes is avoided. All formwork shall be
carefully cleaned and thoroughly wetted or treated with an approved chemical compound. Care
being taken to keep all reinforcement away from contact from such composition.
Unless specifically permitted, wire ties passing through the walls and through bolts are not
permitted. For fixing of formwork, alternative arrangements such as coil nuts shall be adopted
at the Contractor’s cost.
Plywood shall be used for Exposed Concrete surfaces; where called for. Sawn and wrought
timber may be used for unexposed surfaces. Inside faces of forms for concrete surfaces which
are to be roughed finished shall be planed to remove irregularities or unevenness in the face.
Formwork with linings will be permitted.
All new and used form timber shall be maintained in a good condition with respect to shape,
strength, rigidity, water tightness.
Excessive construction camber to compensate for shrinkage, settlement etc. that may impair
the structural strength of members will not be permitted.
Forms for substructure concrete may be omitted when, in the opinion of Engineer-In-Charge
the open excavation is firm enough to act as the form. Such excavations shall be slightly larger
Specifications
Page 38
Tender No: -1800000008
than required by the drawings to compensate for irregularities in the excavation and to ensure
the design requirements. No extra payments on this account will be made in any item of work.
Forms shall be so designed and constructed that their removal will not damage the concrete.
Face formwork shall provide true vertical and horizontal joints, conform to the architectural
features of the structure as to location of joints and as directed by Engineer-In-Charge.
Where exposed smooth or rubbed concrete finishes are required the forms shall be constructed
with special care so that the resulting concrete surface requires a minimum finish.
Bracings, Struts & Props
Shuttering shall be braced, strutted, propped and so supported that it shall not deform under
weight and pressure of the concrete and also due to the movement of men & other materials.
Bamboo’s shall not be used as props or cross bracings.
The shuttering / forms for beams and slabs shall be so erected that the shuttering / forms on
the sides of the beams and under the soffit of slabs can be removed without disturbing the
beam bottoms. Re-propping of beams bottom forms shall not be done except when props have
to be reinstated to take care of construction loads anticipated to be in excess of the design
load. Vertical props shall be supported on wedges or other measures shall be taken whereby
the props can be gently lowered vertically while striking the shuttering.
Mould Oil
Care shall be taken to see that the faces of formwork coming in contact with concrete are
perfectly cleaned and two coats of mould oil or any other approved material applied before
fixing reinforcement and placing concrete. Such coating shall be insoluble in water, nonstaining and not injurious to the concrete. It shall not become flaky or be removed by rain or
wash water. Reinforcement and/or other items to be cast in the concrete shall not be placed
until coating of the forms is complete. Adjoining concrete surfaces shall also be protected
against contamination from the coating material.
Chamfers and fillets
All concrete and angles exposed in the finished structure shall be formed with mouldings to
form chamfers or fillets on the finished concrete. The standard dimensions of chamfers and
fillets, unless otherwise specified, shall be 2cm x 2cm. Care shall be exercised to ensure
accurate mouldings. The diagonal face of the moulding shall be planed or surfaced to the same
texture as the forms to which it is attached.
Vertical Construction Joint Chamfered
Vertical construction joints on faces which will be exposed at the completion of the work shall
be chamfered as above except where not permitted by Engineer-In-Charge for structural or
hydraulic reasons.
Wall Ties
Wire ties passing through the walls shall not be allowed. In their place bolts passing through
sleeves shall be used.
Reuse of Forms
Before reuse, all forms shall be thoroughly scraped, cleaned, nails removed, holes that may
leak suitably plugged and joints examined and when necessary repaired and the inside
retracted to prevent adhesion, to the satisfaction of Engineer-In-Charge. Warped timber shall
be resized.
Removal of Forms
Specifications
Page 39
Tender No: -1800000008
Contractor shall record on the drawing or in a register the date upon which the concrete is
placed in each part of the work and the date on which the shuttering is removed there from.
In no circumstance shall forms be struck until the concrete reaches a strength of at least twice
the stress due to self weight and any construction/erection loading to which the concrete may
be subjected at the time of striking formwork.
Nor formwork shall be removed or otherwise allowed to move until concrete attains sufficient
strength against own weight and external load as per the stipulations of Clause 11.3 of IS 4562000.
The stripping of formwork shall be done without shock or vibration so that no damage is
caused to newly cast concrete. Any damage resulting from premature removal of shutters or
from any other cause whatsoever shall be made good by the Contractor at his own expense as
directed by the Engineer-In-Charge.
In normal circumstances generally where ambient temperatures are above 15oC and ordinary
port land cement is used forms may be struck after expiry of the following periods:
TABLE - 11
Type of formwork
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
Vertical formwork to columns, walls,
beams
Soffit formwork to slabs
(Props to be refixed immediately after
removal of formwork)
Soffit formwork to beams
(Props to be refixed immediately after
removal of formwork)
Props to slabs
1) Spanning up to 4.5 m
2) Spanning over 4.5 m
Props to beams and arches:
1) Spanning up to 6 m
2) Spanning over 6 m
Ordinary
Portland Cement
Concrete
16-24 hrs
3 days
7 days
7 days
14 days
14 days
21 days
For other cements and or lower or higher temperature, the stripping time as above may be
suitably modified with prior approval of the Engineer-In-Charge.
Oiling of forms
Use of form / mould oil will not be permitted on the surfaces which require painting.
Tolerances
Tolerance is a specified permissible variation from lines, grade or dimensions given in
drawings. No tolerances specified for horizontal or vertical building lines. Footings shall be
constructed to permit encroachment beyond the legal boundaries. Unless otherwise specified,
the following tolerances will be permitted.
Tolerances for RC buildings
•
Variation from the plumb
In the lines and surfaces of columns, piers, walls and in arises 5 mm. per 2.5 m. but not
more than 25 mm.
Specifications
Page 40
Tender No: -1800000008
For exposed corner columns and other conspicuous lines.
In any bay or 5 m. maximum
In 10 m. or more
-
5 mm
10 mm
•
Variation from the level or from the grades indicated on the drawings –
In slab soffits, ceilings, beam soffits and in arises.
In 2.3m
In any bay or 5 m. maximum
In 10m or more
-
5 mm
8 mm
15 mm
For exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves and other conspicuous lines.
In any bay or 5 m. maximum
In 10m or more
-
5 mm
10 mm
•
Variation of the linear building lines from established position in plan and related position
of columns, wall and partitions.
In any bay or 5 m. maximum
In 10 m. or more
•
Variation in the sizes and location of sleeves, openings in walls and floors 5 mm. (except in
the case of and for anchor bolts).
•
Variation in cross sectional dimensions of columns and beams and in the thickness of
slabs and walls (- 5 mm. + 10 mm.)
•
Footings
Variation in dimension in plan (- 5 mm. + 50 mm.)
Misplacement or eccentricity
-
10 mm
20 mm.
2% of footing width in the direction of misplacement but not more than 50 mm.
Reduction in thickness
5% of specified thickness subject to a maximum of 50 mm.
•
Variation in Steps
RISE
3 mm.
1.5 mm.
a) In a flight of stairs
b) In consecutive steps
i)
TREAD
5 mm.
3 mm.
Tolerances in other concrete structures
Variation of the constructed linear out line from established position in plan.
In 5 m.
In 10 m. or more
ii)
10 mm.
15 mm.
Variations of dimensions to individual structure features from established positions
In 20 mm. or more
In buried construction
iii)
25 mm.
50 mm.
Variation from plumb, from specified better or from curved surfaces of all structures.
Specifications
Page 41
Tender No: -1800000008
In
In
In
In
2.5 m.
5 m.
10 m. or more
buried construction
10 mm.
15 mm.
25 mm.
Twice the above
iv)
Variation from level or grade indicated on drawings in slabs, beams, soffits, horizontal
grooves and visible arises.
In 2.5 m.
In 7.5 m.
In buried construction
5 mm.
10 mm.
Twice the above
v)
Variation in cross sectional dimensions of columns, beams buttresses, piers and similar
member
(- 5mm + 10 mm)
vi)
Variation in the thickness of slabs, walls, arch sections and similar members.
(- 5mm + 10 mm)
Footings for columns, piers, walls, buttresses and similar members
Variation of dimensions in plan (-10mm + 50mm)
Misplacement or eccentricity
2% of footing width in the direction of misplacement but not more than 50mm
Reduction in thickness
5% of specified thickness subject to a mix of 50mm
Tolerances in other types of structures shall generally conform to those given in Clause 2.4 of
Recommended Practice for Concrete Form-work (ACI-347).
Special Provision
Where exposed smooth or rubbed concrete finishes are required, the forms shall be
constructed with special care so that the resulting concrete surfaces will required a minimum
finish.
Wherever the concreting of narrow members is required to be carried out within shutters of
considerable depth, temporary openings (windows) in the sides of the shutters shall, if so
directed by the Engineer-In-Charge, be provided to facilitate the pouring and consolidation of
the concrete. Small temporary openings shall be provided as necessary at the bottom of
shutters of columns, walls and deep beams to permit the expulsion of rubbish etc.
Measurement
a)
Unless otherwise stated, shuttering shall be measured as the area of the finished
structure which is required to be supported during the deposition of the concrete but no
deduction shall be made for holes less than 0.10 Sq.m.
b)
Shuttering to secondary beams shall be measured upto the sides of main beams but no
deduction shall be made from the shuttering of the main beam where the secondary beam
intersects it.
c)
Shuttering to beams which intersect with stanchion casings or columns shall be
measured upto them on all sides. No deduction shall be made from shuttering to stanchion or
column casings at these intersections.
Specifications
Page 42
Tender No: -1800000008
d)
Shuttering at construction joint shall not be measured.
e)
Shuttering for the cover blocks shall not be paid for separately but is included in the
respective items of formwork items.
Rate
The rate of the form work includes the cost of labour and materials required for all the
operations described above.
Unless otherwise specified the rate of form work shall allow fori)
provision of required well supported false work such as staging, access and working
platforms for concreting etc.
ii)
provision of any dowels and inserts etc. to be left out from shuttering (dowels, inserts
etc. themselves shall be paid for under respective items), provision of any holes, pockets,
channels etc.
iii)
iv)
removing the shuttering carefully after specified time limit or as directed.
work at all depths and heights as specified in the item descriptions.
The formwork generally shall includei)
Splayed edges, notching, allowance for overlaps and passing at angles, sheathing
battens, strutting, bolting, nailing, wedging, easing etc.
ii)
All supports, struts, braces, wedges as well as mud sills, foundation pads, ground
improvement, temporary piles or other suitable arrangements to support the form work.
iii)
Bolts, wire ties, clamps, spreaders, nails or any other to hold the sheathing together.
iv)
Filleting to form stop chamfered edges of splayed external angles not exceeding 20 mm
wide to beam, columns and the like.
v)
Where required, the temporary openings provided in the forms for pouring concrete,
inserting vibrators, and cleaning holes for removing rubbish from the interior of the
sheathing before pouring concrete.
vi)
Dressing with oil to prevent adhesion and
vii)
Raking or circular cutting.
Inspection of forms
Temporary openings shall be provided at the base of columns and wall forms and other places
necessary to facilitate cleaning and inspection. Immediately before concrete is placed all forms
shall be carefully inspected to ensure that they are properly placed, sufficiently rigid and tight,
thoroughly cleaned, properly treated and free from foreign material.
When forms appear to be unsatisfactory in any way, either before or during the placing of
concrete, the Engineer-In-Charge shall order all work stopped until the defects have been
corrected.
6.9.
Steel Reinforcement
Standard
Steel reinforcing bars shall conform to the following standards –
Specifications
Page 43
Tender No: -1800000008
•
•
•
•
Mild steel & medium tensile steel bars
High yield strength deformed steel bars
Hard- drawn steel wire fabric
Structural steel, Grade A
-
IS:
IS:
IS:
IS:
432 (Part-I)
1786
1566
2062
Binding wire shall conform to IS 280 and shall be soft drawn mild steel wire of size not less
than 1.5 mm. in dia. (16 g.)
All reinforcement shall be free from loose mill scales, loose rust and coats of paints, oil, mud or
any other substances, which may destroy or reduce bond.
Supply
Supply of reinforcement for the Works shall be arranged by the Contractor as per the
provisions of the tender.
Storage
Reinforcement bars shall be kept in a clean condition out of direct contact with soil, mud, oil,
water, etc. They shall be coated with cement wash before stacking to prevent formation of scale
and rust. Fabricated reinforcement shall be carefully stored on timber planks / bellies, ends
protected, no water shall be allowed to accumulate in the stored area, to prevent damage,
distortion, corrosion and deterioration. Storage of materials shall be as described in IS 4082.
The areas under storing shall be properly demarcated.
Fabrication
Bending of reinforcement shall be in accordance with IS 2502-1963 and as shown in the
Drawings and sketches and any written instructions if any. Bars shall not be bent or
straightened in a manner injurious to the materials. All bars shall be bent cold except for bars
over 25 mm. dia. which may be bent hot if specifically approved by the Engineer-In-Charge.
Bars which depend on their strength on cold working shall not be bent hot. Bars bent hot shall
not be heated beyond cherry red colour (not exceeding 645 Degree C) and after bending shall
be allowed to cool slowly without quenching.
No reinforcement bar shall be bent when in position without the Engineer-In-Charge’s
approval, whether or not it is partly embedded in hard concrete.Spiral reinforcement shall have
1½ finishing turns at both top and bottom unless shown otherwise.
Where reinforcement bars are bent aside at construction joints and afterwards bent back into
their original position, care shall be taken to ensure that at no time is the radius of the bend
less than 4 bar diameters for plain M.S. bars and 6 bar diameters for deformed bars. Care
shall also be taken when bending back bars, to ensure that concrete around the bar is not
damaged.
Cut ends of treated rods shall be given a protective coat of approved zinc paint immediately
after cutting.
Binding
All bars shall be bound tightly together where they cross, with black annealed steel binding
wire. The free ends of the binding wire shall be bent inwards. The binding wire shall satisfy
provisions of IS : 280.
Placing & Fixing
The reinforcement as per the Drawings and instructions shall be placed, fixed and maintained
in the forms within a tolerance of ±10 mm. for effective depth 200 mm. or less and ±15 mm
tolerance for effective depth over 200 mm. during the placing and compaction of concrete.
Precast concrete blocks, MS chairs and spacers as required shall be provided to maintain the
steel in position. In fair faces of concrete temporary spacers only shall be used and withdrawn
as compaction of concrete proceeds.
Specifications
Page 44
Tender No: -1800000008
Tack welding of crossing bars shall be done without any extra cost and only if permitted by the
Engineer-In-Charge.
Cover
Spacing of reinforcement shall be governed by Clause 25.3 and cover to reinforcement by
Clause 25.4 of IS 456-2000. Increased covers, if shown on the drawings or instructed by the
Engineer-In-Charge shall be provided at the respective locations. Cover to reinforcement shall
be as per IS 456-2000. Fully cured cement mortar blocks of 1:2 mix shall be used as cover
blocks where no grade of concrete is specified and where grade of concrete is specified it shall
be as per the same strength as that of the structural member. Any other cover blocks shall be
used only on approval by the Engineer-In-Charge. However, use of pebbles or stones shall not
be permitted. Where the bars cross, the outer one shall have the minimum cover.
Splicing & Lapping
Where splicing and / or overlapping in reinforcement are required, the bars shall be provided
with such splices or overlaps as are shown on the drawings or directed by the Engineer-InCharge. Laps shall be staggered only as shown on the drawings and approved by the EngineerIn-Charge.
Welded Laps
Butt welding of reinforcing steel bars shall be used only when specified or shown on the
drawings or approved by the Engineer-In-Charge. When butt-welding is carried out, the ends of
the bars shall be prepared with single 450 C and a backing plate shall be used. The minimum
root face will be one quarter of the bar diameter. Welding shall be done in accordance with the
recommendations of IS 2751 & 816. Electrodes shall comply with IS 814. The maximum size of
electrodes shall be based on following table:
TABLE - 12
Diameters
of Bars in
mm.
12 to 25
25 to 32
32 to 50
25 to 50
Diameters
of
Bars in
inches
½” to 1”
1” to 1 ¼”
Double bevel
1 ¼” to 2”
Double bevel
1” to 2”
Maximum size of
Electrodes
10
3.25
8
4.06
(0.160)
10
3.25
(0.160)
6
(0.160)
mm.
mm.
mm.
4.06
Amperage
corresponding to
maximum size of
mm. Electrodes
}
} As specified by
the
} manufacture of
} Electrodes
}
}
Before doing the welding of bars at site, the Contractor shall make minimum 3 No. joints and
get them tested in an approved laboratory (including X-ray testing of welds if necessary). Only
on these tests proving satisfactory, the Contractor would be permitted to weld at site.
The following precautions shall be taken while providing welded laps:
If the cold twisted deformed bar has an untwisted end at the lapping point, the said portion
shall be cut off for a minimum length of 10 cm. from such end prior to welding.
Bars shall be aligned on a proper axis to avoid crookedness after welding.
The joints to be welded shall be rust free.
Weld slag shall be chipped off and removed by brush.
Welding Contract
The welding work shall not be given to a sub contractor who does not produce satisfactory
evidence of his ability to handle the work in a competent manner. The Contractor shall also
Specifications
Page 45
Tender No: -1800000008
prove the ability of the operators employed by him to produce welding connection of the
required strength.
The Contractor shall employ a competent welding supervisor or charge-hand to ensure that the
standard of workmanship is satisfactory.
The Engineer-In-Charge shall have free access to the work being carried out by the Contractor
at all reasonable times and facility shall be provided so that during the course of welding he
may be able to inspect any layer of weld metal. Engineer-In-Charge shall be at liberty to reject
any work not conforming to the relevant specifications, IS codes . Defective welds shall be cut
out and re-welded.
Safety requirement and health provisions
The Contractor shall make all safety and health provisions for his welders as laid in IS : 818 1968 i.e. Code of Practice of safety and health requirements in electric and gas welding and
cutting operation.
Reinforcement to be clean
All steel reinforcement before the concrete is deposited shall be clean, free of dust, loose scales,
oils, rust, grease or any other deleterious materials. Particular care shall be taken to avoid
contamination of reinforcement with mould oil.
Checking Reinforcement
No concrete shall be deposited until all formwork and reinforcement have been inspected and
approved by the Engineer-In-Charge. There shall be in attendance on each concreting gang a
competent steel fixer who shall ensure that the reinforcement and other embedded fittings are
kept in position during placing and compaction of concrete.
The Contractor shall provide temporary gangways, platforms and other means of access to
prevent men from walking on the reinforcement bats. These shall be independent of the
reinforcement.
Measurement
a)
Steel reinforcement shall be measured in lengths of different diameters as actually used
in the work and their weight calculated on the basis of Bureau of Indian Standard’s Structural
Engineer’s Handbook No. 1 latest issue without any allowance for rolling margin. All
authorised spacer bars on supports on any saddles, forks, chairs, laps, etc. shall be measured
on the actual quantity consumed in the job.
b)
Wastage and unauthorised laps etc. shall not be measured for payment purpose.
c)
Annealed steel wire required for binding or tack welding shall not be measured, its cost
being included in the rate of reinforcement.
d)
Wherever lap joints are provided by welding, the measurement shall be on linear meter
of the actually welded seam length.
Rate
The rate for reinforcement shall include the cost of labour and materials required for all the
operations described above such as cleaning of reinforcement bars, straightening, cutting,
hooking, bending, binding, placing in position etc. as required or as directed including tack
welding on crossing of bars in lieu of binding with wires, wastages etc.
Specifications
Page 46
Tender No: -1800000008
6.10. Ready Mix Concrete
General specifications shall be as described under- Reinforced cement concrete specifications
& shall generally comply with the requirements of IS : 456 - 2000.
Ready mixed concrete is the concrete delivered at site from a Central Plant. The delivery is
made by either agitator truck or truck mixer in a plastic condition requiring no further
treatment before being placed in position in which it is to set and harden. The ready mix
concrete shall conform to IS 4926, Specification for Ready Mixed Concrete is subject to the
following:
o
The ready mixed concrete shall be Centrally Mixed Concrete unless otherwise specifically
mentioned.
o
Batching plant : The batching plant shall be of fully automatic central batching and mixing
type conforming to the provisions of IS : 4925. The capacity of the plant shall not be less
than 30 cu.m./ hour.
o
The ready mixed concrete shall be manufactured strictly as per the approved mix design by
Engineer-In-Charge and supplied on the basis of specified strength based on 28 day
compressive strength of 15 cm cube tested in accordance with IS : 456 - 2000. For any
change in quality / quantity in the ingredients of a particular concrete for which mix has
been designed earlier and approved by the Engineer-In-Charge, the mix has to be
redesigned and accordingly approval shall be obtained prior to use.
o
Since the ready mixed concrete is a tailor made concrete, certain precautions are necessary
for the concrete mix. Some of these are as listed below :
o
Minimum quantity of cement and the details regarding proportioning and works control
shall be in accordance with IS : 456-2000.
o
The air content of the concrete shall not be more than 2% in any case.
established by necessary testing at worksite.
o
The dosage of the admixture shall be given at the batching plant only. Subsequent dosage
of admixture shall not be permitted thereafter unless otherwise permitted by the EngineerIn-Charge.
This shall be
Water shall not be added to ready-mixed concrete to restore the workability of concrete.
However the workability can be restored to the design slump by use of proper admixture
(without retarding effect) with prior approval of the Engineer-In-Charge provided the slump has
not dropped below 50 mm. For the concrete with slump less than 50 mm and more than zero
mm, the slump shall not be revised after the initial setting of the concrete. The initial setting of
the concrete shall be established at worksite by the procedure in accordance with IS: 8412 Method of test for determining setting time of concrete by penetration resistance.
When a truck mixer or agitator truck is used for transporting concrete, the concrete shall be
delivered to the site for work the exact location as approved by the Engineer-In-Charge.
Discharge of the concrete to be done by chute only to avoid segregation. The slump shall be
checked at this delivery point. Further transport and placing of concrete along with
compaction shall be completed prior to initial setting of concrete. In any case total transport
time not to exceed 1½ hours.
Placing of Concrete :
When placing of concrete by manually the following shall apply –
Method of placing of concrete shall be such that no segregation occurs during placing. In
manual placing, contractor has to arrange proper paths for the free movement of wheel
barrows. Contractor has to prepare method statement for placing operation and get the same
Specifications
Page 47
Tender No: -1800000008
approved from Engineer-in-charge prior to actual execution. Generally concrete shall not be
dropped freely from a height of more than 1.5 meters in the works of watertight structures and
2 m. in all other works. When required to be deposited from a greater height, it shall be done
through a metal-lined chute with slope no flatter than 1:2 (Vertical : Horizontal) and not
steeper than 1:3. The discharge end of the chute will be provided with a baffle plate to prevent
segregation. The discharge end of the chute shall be maintained above the surface of the
concrete in forms and concrete shall not be permitted to fall from the end of chute by more
than 1 m. During cleaning a chute, the waste water shall be kept clear of the forms.
When placing concrete by mechanical equipment, the following shall apply
Central-bottom-dump buckets which provide for positive regulation of the amount and rate of
deposition of concrete in all dumping position shall be employed. Concrete shall be discharged
by a vertical drop into the middle of bucket or hopper. In placing concrete in large open areas,
the bucket shall be spotted directly over the position designated and then lowered for dumping.
The open bucket shall clear the concrete already in place and shall be opened slowly to avoid
high vertical bounce. The height of drop of concrete shall not exceed 1 m. Dumping in a
manner which would result in segregation of concrete ingredients shall not be permitted.
If pumps & pneumatic placers are used for conveying and placing concrete
Concrete mix with desired slump shall be appropriately designed to suit pumping. Care shall
be taken to avoid stoppages in work once pumping is started. Care shall be taken to minimize
frictional losses.
Before commencing to pump concrete, the pipeline shall be “Lubricated” with two batches of
1:2 cement and sand mortar. If required, sponge balls to be placed in pipes before grouting.
Adequate emergency for washing / cleaning of pumps and pipelines to be made for efficient
working. Supports to the pipes should be firmly ensured.
Manufacturers’ instructions regarding pipeline layout, concrete quantity etc. shall be taken to
avoid problems as blockages and excessive wear etc.
Pipe dia to be adequate and minimum pipe dia. to be three times the maximum aggregate size
of the concrete mix. The pipe should be as far as possible rigid to avoid increased frictional
losses and cleaning problems. Aluminium pipes shall not be used under any circumstances.
Concrete shall be placed in successive horizontal layers of uniform thickness ranging from 15
cm to 90 cm such that the formation of cold joints, of planes of weaknesses between each
succeeding layer within the pour are avoided. The bucket loads or other units of deposit shall
be spotted progressively along the face of the layer with such overlap as will facilitate spreading
the layer to uniform depth and texture with a minimum of shovelling.
Freshly laid concrete shall not be wheeled over or walked over or otherwise disturbed.
When depositing concrete adjacent to a construction joint, special care shall be taken not to
disturb the dowels or other reinforcing bars projecting from the existing concrete.
In vertical members like walls, columns, pardis etc. where the full height is not being poured in
one continuous operation, the surface of each lift shall be finished horizontal and any laitance
removed between the period of initial and final set.
Admixtures
Contractor shall submit the following before any admixtures is approved by the Engineer-InCharge for their use –
-
Certificate conforming that the use of a particular brand of admixture shall not be harmful
to concrete in any way.
Certificate conforming the exact dosage of admixture of a particular brand
Specifications
Page 48
-
Tender No: -1800000008
Certificate stating the specific purpose for which the admixture is to be sued.
Special precautionary measures to be taken in the manufacturer of concrete when using
the particular brand of admixture.
Certificate conforming that the admixture conforms to specifications of IS 9103 or to ASTM
– C 260, ASTM – C 10, ASTM – C 595 or to ASTM-C 618.
Engineer-In-Charge at his discretion may require tests to be performed to reconfirm the
characteristic properties of any admixture. All such tests shall be done in accordance with IS
9103.
All tests described above shall be done at the site laboratory or at a laboratory to be identified
by the Engineer-In-Charge depending on the test to be conducted.
All test shall be done in the presence of a representative nominated by the Engineer-In-Charge
and a representative of the concrete manufacturer / Contractor when tests are performed at
the site laboratory. All observations and reports of test shall be jointly signed by the two
representatives before the test results are submitted to the Engineer-In-Charge for approval.
Expenses for all materials used for testing, sampling procedures and testing including
preparing reports shall be borne by the Contractor.
Sampling & testing for quality control of concrete
Fresh concrete
Fresh concrete shall be tested for
−
−
−
−
Slump
Compacting factor/workability
Consistency
Weight per cubic metre, cement factor and air content.
Slump
For concrete totally mixed in a central plant, slump shall be checked at
−
−
−
immediately during loading of trucks
Point of discharge from the delivery truck
Final placement location
At placement location the slump measured shall conform to the design slump. Manufacturer of
concrete shall adjust for loss of slump in transit and establish the requirements of design mix.
All slump measurements shall be done within a period of 20 minutes from the time cement is
added to the mixer. Placement contractor shall transport concrete from truck discharge point
to actual placement location within 10 minutes of delivery before the final slump reading is
taken at placement location.
For concrete entirely mixed in transit or for shrink mix concrete, slump readings shall be taken
at
−
−
point of discharge from delivery trucks
final placement location
For measuring concrete slump at point of discharge from delivery trucks, samples shall be
taken from concrete omitting the first and the last 15 % of the load. For concrete delivery or
placed by pumping, sampling shall be similar to those specified for delivery trucks.
Slump measurement of ready mix concrete transported by buckets shall be at locations
specified in above para with some limits of time. Sampling from buckets shall be such that
the buckets containing discharge from mixer for the and last 15% are omitted.
Specifications
Page 49
Tender No: -1800000008
At placement locations, samples for checking slump shall be collected from every 20 cum of
concrete or part thereof placed at location for each type of concrete.
For all slump checks in the field at least two recordings shall be made and the average value
taken as the recorded slump.
Slump checks for concrete in the laboratory shall be carried out as and when required by the
manufacturer of concrete during the mix design stage and during the progress of work for
control on field results.
Slump readings shall only be a guideline for concrete consistency and shall not be taken as the
acceptability criteria for concrete placed at location. All slump tests shall be carried out in
accordance with IS : 1199.
For quality control of strict check on the strength of concrete shall be maintained along with
other field requirements such as workability, consistency, slump etc. mentioned in para above.
Acceptability criterion for concrete as specified in para above shall only be applicable.
Test on cube crushing strength of concrete in accordance and compliance with IS 456-2000
and IS 516 shall be done as under –
o
Samples of fresh concrete shall be taken from concrete at central batch plant mixer while
loading delivery trucks or other transport and also from concrete transported to placement
location.
o
Test on specimens made from samples collected at placement location shall be considered
as field test specimens and results therefrom shall be the criterion of concrete strength.
Test in specimens made from samples at the batch plant shall only be taken as guide lines
test. Only in the case of doubtful result, the Engineer-In-Charge may refer to such guide
line results for deciding on the quality of concrete
o
For truck mix concrete and shrunk mix concrete guide line test specimens shall be made
from samples collected at discharge location from mixing trucks. For this purpose first and
last 15% of the load shall be omitted while collecting samples.
The contractor shall set up a laboratory at this own expense which shall have facilities for
conducting all necessary field test on materials and field and laboratory test on concrete. The
laboratory shall be staffed with qualified and experienced scientists and technicians.
6.11. Industrial Vacuum Dewatered Flooring
General specifications for RCC grade slab/ structural slab shall be as described underReinforced cement concrete specifications & shall generally comply with the requirements of IS
: 456 - 2000.
Laying of Concrete
Laying of concrete for Grade slab/ structural slab shall be generally as described underReinforce cement concrete specifications and laid to the required slope and level as shown on
the drawing subject to prior approval of Engineer-In-Charge. Vibrating of the laid concrete with
double beam screed vibrator till its setting unless other wise recommended by the process
agency. Dewatering of the laid concrete shall be done by using suction pipe and pump after
laying lower matt shall be laid on green concrete and excess water can be removed and
optimum water cement ratio can be maintained by use of “TREMIX” or other approved process
subject to approval of Engineer-In-Charge. The contractor shall execute the work strictly as per
the process agency’s specifications, methodology and instructions in regard to use of screed
vibrators, channels, shuttering, dewatering unit, power floater, power trowel, etc. to get desired
smooth finish over a levelling course etc. complete.
Specifications
Page 50
Tender No: -1800000008
•
Cutting and filling sealant of grooves / sawed joints / strips for placing land ties etc. shall
be as shown on approved drawings, as instructed by the process agencies subject to prior
approval of Engineer-In-Charge.
•
Application of non-metallic floor hardener of approved makes / unless otherwise specified
at 7 Kg/Sq.m. shall be sprinkled over green concrete in alternate bags and trowel
simultaneously. Floor laid is to be trowel to acquire desired smooth finish with power
trowel.
•
When initial setting of concrete is reached, from next day onwards curing with water shall
be carried out for minimum seven days.
6.12. Pre-cast Cement Concrete Jali
MaterialThe jali shall be of cement concrete 1:2:4 (1 cement: 2 coarse sand: 4 stone aggregate 6 mm
nominal size) conforming to the specification as described under Clause No. 3005.1, reinforced
with 1.6 mm thick mild steel wire, unless otherwise specified.
Fixing
The jali shall be set in position true to plumb and level before the joints sills and soffits of the
openings are plastered. It shall then be properly grouted with cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement: 3
coarse sand) and rechecked for levels. Finally the jambs, sills and soffits shall be plastered
embedding the jali uniformly on all sides.
Measurements
The jali shall be measured for its gross superficial area.
Rate
The rate shall be inclusive of materials and labour involved in all the operations described
above except plastering of jambs, sills and soffits, which will be paid for under relevant items of
plastering.
6.13. Encasing Rolled Steel Section
Before concrete work is started, the Engineer-In-Charge shall check that all rolled steel
sections to be encased, have been erected truly in position. The sections shall be unpainted
and shall be wire brushed to remove the loose rust/scales etc. Encased steel sections shall be
jointed with M.S. reinforced bars / links as shown on the drawings and as directed by the
Engineer-In-Charge.
The reinforced bars / links shall be in conformation with the
specifications as described under Clause 3005.9 above.
Concreting
Concrete shall be of specified grade in the item description. Consistency of concrete, placing of
concrete and its compaction, curing, finishing and strength of concrete shall be in accordance
with the specification as specified of this Section under relevant clauses as applicable. The mix
shall be poured around the steel sections and around the wrapping by vibrating the concrete
into position.
Measurement
The length shall be measured correct to one cm and other dimensions correct to 0.5 cm. The
cement concrete shall be measured as per gross dimensions of the encasing exclusive of the
thickness of plaster. No deductions shall be made for the volume of steel sections, expanded
Specifications
Page 51
Tender No: -1800000008
metal, mesh or any other reinforcement used therein. However, in case of boxed stanchions or
girders, the boxed portion only shall be deducted.
Reinforcement shall be measured and paid separately. The description shall include the
bending of the fabric as necessary, raking or circular cutting and waste shall be included in
the description.
Rate
The rate shall include the cost of materials and labour required for all the operations described
above except the cost of reinforcement. The cost of providing and erecting steel section and
wire hangers reinforcement shall be paid for separately.
Specifications
Page 52
Tender No: -1800000008
7. BRICKWORK:
Materials
Bricks used for masonry work shall conform to IS 1077 except that sizes shall be as per the
approved local bricks. The crushing strength shall be as specified in IS 3495.
Bricks shall be of uniform size shape and colour. They shall be well burnt and free from
cracks, twists, stones, floats or nodules of lime and other defects. They shall have sharp and
square edges and parallel faces, sound texture, uniform colour and they shall give a ringing
sound when struck with a mallet. No brick shall absorb on average water more than 20% of its
dry weight in 24 hours.
Brick shall be procured from source/s to be approved by the Engineer-In-Charge.
It shall not break when struck against each other and dropped flat from a height of one meter
on ground.
Mortar- The mortar for the work shall be as specified under - Mortars specifications.
Laying
All the masonry work shall be carried out to specified dimension, lines and levels indicated on
the drawings or as directed by the Engineer-In-Charge and a good bond shall be provided
throughout the work both longitudinally and transversely.
Double scaffolding of adequate strength shall be provided for all types of loads likely to come
on them during construction. No holes allowed in masonry for scaffolding.
During rains and frosty weather, the work shall be carefully covered so as to prevent any
mortar being washed away.
Any anchors, wall plugs, accessories, flashings and other items required to be built in with
masonry shall be provided in their correct position as the masonry work progresses.
Before new work is started, all loose mortar shall be removed and the exposed joints shall be
thoroughly cleaned before laying new work.
Brick Work Proper
Every brick shall be thoroughly soaked in water before using in work. Before starting the brick
masonry the concrete surfaces e.g. plinth beams, columns, slabs, chajjas, lofts etc. shall be
thoroughly hacked and washed to remove all mud, dirt, loose particles etc. and a thin coat of
cement slurry shall be applied over concrete surfaces when fresh masonry is to be started on
or against old masonry, the surface of the old masonry shall be thoroughly cleaned and
washed to remove all moss deposits loose mortar mud and dirt etc.
Brickwork shall be laid in English Bond with frog upwards unless otherwise specified. In
exposed brickwork, selected bricks of the specified class shall be used for the face work. No
half or quarter brick shall be used except as closures. Nor more than ten courses shall be
raised in a day and no part of the work shall be raised more than 1 m. above another at any
time.
The size of the brick shall be 22.5 x 11.5 x 7.5 cm. unless otherwise specified; but tolerance
upto ± 3mm. in each direction shall be permitted, However, bricks conforming in size to IS
1077 could be used. Bricks shall be provided with frogs. Only full size bricks shall be used for
masonry work. Brick bats shall be used only with permission of the Engineer-In-Charge to
make up required wall length or for bonding. Sample bricks shall be submitted to the
Engineer-In-Charge for approval and brick supplied shall confirm to approved samples. If
demanded by Engineer-In-Charge, brick sample shall be tested as per IS 3495 by the
Specifications
Page 53
Tender No: -1800000008
Contractor at no extra cost to Employer. Brick rejected by Engineer-In-Charge shall be
removed from the site of works within 24 hours.
Each brick shall be set with both bed and vertical joints filled with mortar as per IS 2250.
Joints shall not be less than 6 mm. and not more than 10 mm. in thickness and are to be full
of mortar, close, well finished and neatly struck. All joints shall be adjusted to their final
position in the wall while the mortar is still soft and plastic. All joints shall be raked out by
raking tools when mortar is still green to a depth of 12 mm. to ensure good key to plaster or
pointing. Where plastering or pointing is not required to be done, the joints shall be uniform in
thickness, struck flush and finished at the time of laying.
The face of brick work shall be cleaned daily and all mortar droppings removed. The surface of
each course shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dirt before another course is laid on top. If the
mortar in the lower course has begun to set, the joints shall be raked out to a depth of 12 mm.
before another course is laid.
Miscellaneous inserts in masonry e.g. sleeves, wall ties, anchors, conduits, structural steel,
steel lintels etc. shall be installed by the Contractor. Openings etc. shall be provided as shown
on the drawings. Chases, pockets etc. shall be provided as shown on the drawing to receive
windows, louvers, doorframes, circular openings for exhaust fans etc.
Curing shall constantly keep the brick masonry moist on all faces for a minimum period of
seven days. Brickwork done during the day shall be suitably marked indicating the date on
which the work is done so as to keep a watch on curing period.
7.1.
Half Brick Work
Material
Bricks and mortar shall be as specified under -Brick work specifications.
The reinforcement used for the half brick work shall be as specified under- Reinforced Cement
Concrete specifications. All steel reinforcement before the concrete for RC stiffeners / patli is
deposited shall be clean, free from dust, loose scales, oils, rust, grease or any other deleterious
materials. Particular care shall be taken to avoid contamination of reinforcement with mould
oil.
Cement concrete – The cement concrete work for RC stiffeners/ patli of specified grade shall be
as specified under - Reinforced Cement Concrete specifications.
Laying- Generally shall be laid in the same manner as described under- Brick work
specifications.
Half-brick work shall be carried out in panels and with horizontal stiffeners of 75 mm. thick
unless otherwise specified 900mm at vertical intervals, with MS 2 No. 6mm. dia.
Reinforcements laid in 1:2:4 nominal mix concrete properly filled as per specifications. These
shall be securely anchored at their end where the partitions end. The free ends of the
reinforced shall be keyed into the mortar of the main brick work to which the half brick work is
joined. The mortar used for reinforced brick work shall be rich dense cement mortar of mix 1:4
.Over laps in reinforcement, if any shall not be less than 30cm The mortar interposed between
the reinforcement bars and bricks shall not be less than 5mm. The mortar covering in the
direction of joints shall not be less than 15mm
Measurement
The length and height of the wall shall be measured correct to a cm. The area shall be
calculated in sq.m where half brick wall is joined to the main walls one brick greater thickness
and measurements for half brick wall shall be taken for its clear length from the face of the
thicker wall.
Specifications
Page 54
Tender No: -1800000008
In case of half brick masonry with RC stiffeners / patlis etc., stiffeners including
reinforcement, shuttering etc. shall not be measured for separately.
Deductions shall be as described under –Brick work specifications.
Rate
The rate includes the cost of the materials & labour involved in all the operations described
above including RC stiffeners & reinforcement, double scaffolding, curing etc.
Specifications
Page 55
Tender No: -1800000008
8. STONE WORKS:
8.1.
Materials
Stones shall be the best available local stone from approved quarry. They shall be tough, hard,
dense, sound and durable, free from cracks, veins, crystals, cavities and other flaws and
defects and shall conform to IS 1567 (Part-I). They shall not absorb water more than 5% of
their dry weight when immersed in water and tested as per IS 1124 and shall have uniform
colour and texture.
Rubble
When used for soling, stones shall be flat bedded and the smallest size shall be equal to the
specified thickness of soling with length and breadth generally not exceeding twice the
thickness.
Stone metal (for Roads /path ways)
Rubble shall be broken or crushed to pieces to pass through the square mesh of about 65 mm.
and all pieces shall be retained on a square mesh of about 10 mm. Not more than 20% of any
sample shall exceed 75 mm. in its greatest dimensions. The metal shall roughly be cubical in
shape and more or less or uniform size with sharp edges for proper interlocking. Rounded,
flaky thin and elongated material shall not be acceptable.
8.2.
Laying
The item to includes all labour , materials, tools, scaffolding unless specified etc. necessary to
complete the works as per drawing or as directed by the Engineer-In-Charge. Rubble is placed
vertical with broad based at bottom. The gaps shall be filled with smaller stones and
compacted properly.
8.3.
Pre-cast Block Masonry Work
Material
Solid concrete block shall confirm to IS 2185 (I) – latest grade D (5.0) but shall have minimum
compressive strength of 5 N/mm² & density not less than 1800 Kg per cub.m. Water
absorption average Value of min. 3 units shall not be more than 10% by mass. Mix design for
the blocks shall be got prepared from approved lab & further got approved from the EngineerIn-Charge.
Only factory made properly cured concrete blocks shall be used. Manually compacted / hand
compacted blocks shall not be permitted at any case. The face of masonry units shall be flat
and rectangle, opposite face shall be parallel, and all arises shall be square. The bedding
surface shall be at right angles to faces of the block. Storage and stacking as described under
relevant IS codes or as directed.
Testing of blocks and frequency shall be as per IS codes. Standard deviation shall be worked
out as periodically & mix design shall be reviewed accordingly. The maximum variation in the
length of units shall not be more than ± 5 mm and maximum variation in height and width of
unit ,not more than ± 3 mm.
Mortar shall be as described under - Mortars specifications. The mortar used for solid block
masonry work shall be rich dense cement mortar of mix 1:4.
Work Procedure for block masonry:
Before commencement of work contractor shall ensure that the blocks are semi dry. They
should not be soaked in water at the time of use.
Specifications
Page 56
Tender No: -1800000008
Blocks in successive courses should be laid in such a manner that vertical joints are staggered
uniformly. Precast half-length closers (cut from full size blocks) shall be used. For battered
faces, bedding shall be at right angles to the face unless otherwise directed. Care shall be
taken during construction to see that edges of blocks are not damaged.
Two top layers of masonry work shall be constructed after 8 days period from successive
course of masonry work. After the construction of balance two layers, the gap between RC
work & masonry work shall be filled with metal or grit with proper hammering / cement
mortar.
For 10 cm thick Block masonry RC horizontal stiffeners 10 cm thick at every 1.0 meter height
or as indicated in the drawing at vertical intervals, with MS 2 No. 6 mm. dia. reinforcements
laid in 1:2:4 concrete properly filled as per specifications.
Racking should be done up to depth 12 mm., then remove all excess mortar from masonry wall
surface.
In one day’s work allow mason to do the masonry work up to 1.0 meter height only
The blocks shall be cast in full / half & quarter length to avoid breakage during construction.
Curing
Newly laid masonry shall be thoroughly cured for 10 days and shall be protected from the
effects of sun, rain etc. by suitable covering.
Measurement
The length and height of the wall shall be measured correct to a cm. The area shall be
calculated in sq.m where partition block wall is joined to the main walls one block greater
thickness and measurements for 10 cm thick block wall shall be taken for its clear length from
the face of the thicker wall.
In case of 10 cm thick block masonry, with RC stiffeners / patlis etc. Stiffeners including
reinforcement, shuttering etc. shall not be measured separately.
Deductions in Block work shall be as described under –Brick work specifications.
Rate
The rate includes the cost of the materials and labour involved in all the operations described
above including RC stiffeners and reinforcement, curing etc and double scaffolding unless
specified.
Specifications
Page 57
Tender No: -1800000008
9. MARBLE/ GRANITE STONE WORKS:
9.1.
Materials
Marble slabs / Granite slabs shall be of the best quality and in sizes and thickness as
approved by the Engineer-In-Charge. The specified thickness shall be taken at the thinnest
part.
They shall be hard, dense, uniform and homogenous in texture having clean crystallizing grain
and free from all defects and cracks. The edges shall be machine cut true and square and
surface shall be machine polished to an even and perfectly plain surface.
Marble slabs shall confirm to IS 1130 – 1969.
Granite slabs shall confirm to IS 3316 – 1974.
Before starting the work, the Contractor shall get approval of samples of marble/ granite
stones from the Engineer-In-Charge. Approved samples shall be kept in the custody of the
Engineer-In-Charge and marble/ granite supplied / used on the work shall strictly conform to
the samples approved by the Engineer-In-Charge with regard to soundness, colour, veining
and general texture.
Stones to be used for skirting and dado shall be from the same stock and shade as used for
floors. Tolerance in thickness of stone shall be ± 3 mm.
9.2.
Flooring/ dado/ skirting
General
The surfaces to be laid with flooring or dado shall be thoroughly hacked, joints of masonry
racked, cleaned of all mortar scales and concrete lumps and loose materials etc. and washed to
remove mud, dirt, oil, grease etc. from the surface and shall be thoroughly wetted.
All stones shall be laid in a pattern given on the drawings or directed by the Engineer-InCharge.
All stones in floor shall be truly and evenly set and pressed in position to obtain uniform plane
surface. The skirting tiles shall be in true plane, level and plumb.
Flooring /dado work shall not be started unless and until the surface is approved by the
Engineer-In-Charge.
9.3.
Marble / Granite Stone work in steps / platforms / frames etc.
Materials
Material and general specifications shall be as described under –granite/ Marble flooring
specifications except joint shall be permitted only at curvature or when width / length is more
than 0.6 / 2 metres respectively. No of joints in each direction shall not be more than one for
every 2 metres. Additional joints shall be provided as shown in the drawing subject to approval
of Engineer-In-Charge. Finishing/ polishing if not possible with machine can be done by
standard practices, so as to give a plane true and highly smooth surface. It shall then be
cleaned with a solution of oxalic acid, washed and finished clean.
9.4.
Cudappa/ Granite/ Marble stone window framing
Materials
Cudappa/Granite/ Marble stones / strips shall be of the best quality, sizes and thickness as
specified and approved by the Engineer-In-Charge. The specified thickness shall be taken at
the thinnest part. General specifications shall be as described under –Flooring specifications.
Specifications
Page 58
Tender No: -1800000008
As sample of window framing shall be prepared and it shall be kept on worksite after being
approved by the Engineer-In-Charge.
Mortar
The mortar used for jointing shall be as described under –Marble/ Granite Flooring
specifications.
Laying
The stone shall be wetted before laying. The framing (about 200mm wide) shall be made by
using 2 No. strips of suitable size stuck together with adhesive chemical to form a rebate of
minimum 100mm for sliding and openable windows while one strip for Fixed ventilators/
Louvered windows. Laying / fixing of window framing shall be as described under - Marbles/
Granite flooring specifications. In case spans are more, where so desired the stones shall be
secured to each other by means of copper pins 75mm long and 6mm diameter or as specified
or as directed.
Joints
All joints shall be full of mortar. If any hollow groundings are detected by tapping the face
stones, these shall be taken out and re-laid. No joints in between are permitted unless
otherwise specifically approved by the Engineer-In-Charge the framing stone shall be in single
piece. The thickness of the face joints shall be uniform, straight and as fine as possible, not
more than 1.5mm in the face joint the top 6mm depth shall be filled with mortar.
Curing
The work shall be kept constantly moist on all faces for a period of at least seven days.
Finishing
Finishing shall be as described in the item description. Unless other wise exposed edges to be
rounded off / chamfered and polished as specified or directed. When factory made finished
slabs are used, no further polishing is required.
Protection and scaffolding
Double scaffolding having two sets of vertical supports shall be provided where necessary. The
supports shall be sound and strong, tied together by horizontal pieces over which the
scaffolding plank shall be fixed. Green work shall be protected from rain by suitable coverings.
The work shall also be suitably protected from damage during construction.
Specifications
Page 59
Tender No: -1800000008
10. WOOD WORK:
10.1. Scope
This section shall cover all woodwork, joinery and similar work in the Building. All wood work
associated with work of all other sections shall also be done generally according to these
specifications unless specified otherwise. Unless otherwise specified, Timber used in the work
shall be approved quality.
10.2. General
No woodwork shall be painted, varnished waxed or otherwise finished before specifically
approved by the Engineer-In-Charge.
10.3. Fixing Generally
All wood shall be fixed in the manner as shown in the drawings. If not shown, fixing with
masonry or concrete shall be done with expansion plugs and screws of approved size, under no
circumstances they shall be fixed by wooden plugs.
10.4. Workmanship
All work shall be done in workmanlike manner as per best trade practices by skilled workmen.
10.5. Starting of Work
Unless otherwise instructed, finishing of woodwork on trims, finished frames, etc. shall not be
commenced until all interior plastering and flooring is completed and cured and area cleared of all
rubbish. Whenever so required samples of actual work shall be installed at the site and got
approved by the Engineer-In-Charge.
10.6. Timber
All wood shall be of best quality kiln seasoned timber of its kind specified. Unless otherwise stated
all wood shall be approved CP teak wood. All timber shall be treated with approved anti-termite
treatment. All wood in contact with masonry or concrete shall be painted with hot bitumen before
placing in position taking care to ensure that exposed parts of the timber are completely free from
any bitumen. Samples of all wood shall be got approved before ordering. Moisture content of wood
shall be in accordance to IS:287-1993. CP Teak wood shall not possess any individual hard and
sound knot exceeding 40 mm in diameter and the aggregate area of all the knots shall not exceed
one percent of the area of the piece.
10.7. Sawing·
All scantlings, planks, battens, etc. shall be sawn in straight lines, planes, uniform thickness, of
full measurements from end to end and shall be sawn in the direction of grain. They shall be
procured with sufficient margins in as to secure the specified dimensions, lines and planes after
being wrought.
Specifications
Page 60
Tender No: -1800000008
10.8. DOOR, WINDOW AND VENTILATOR FRAMES
10.8.1.
Timber for door, window and ventilators frames shall be as specified. Timber shall be
sawn in the direction of the grains. All members of a frame shall be of the same species of timber
and shall be straight without any warp or bow. Frames shall have smooth, well-planed (wrought)
surfaces except the surfaces touching the walls, lintels, sill etc., which may be left clean sawn.
Rebates, rounding or moulding shall be done before the members are jointed into frames. The
depth of the rebate for housing the shutters shall be 15 mm, and the width of the rebates shall be
equal to the thickness of the shutters. A tolerance of ± 2 mm shall be permitted in the specified
finished dimensions of timber sections in frames.
10.8.2.
Joints
The Jamb posts shall be through tenoned in to the mortise of the transoms to the full thickness of
the transoms and the thickness of the tenon shall be not less than 2.5 cm. The tenons shall closely
fit into the mortise without any wedging or filling. The contact surface of tenon and mortise before
putting together shall be glued with polyvinyl acetate dispersion based adhesive conforming to IS
4835 or adhesive conforming IS 851 and pinned with 10 mm dia hard wood dowels, or bamboo pins
or star shaped metal pins. The joints shall be at right angles when checked from the inside surfaces
of the respective members. The joints shall be pressed in position. Each· assembled door frame
shall be fitted with a temporary stretcher and a temporary diagonal brace on the rebated faces.
10.8.3.
Fixing of Frames
The frames shall be got approved by the Engineer-in-Charge before being painted, oiled or otherwise
treated and before fixing in position. The surface of the frames abutting masonry or concrete and
the portions of the frames embedded in floors shall be given a coating of coal tar. Frames shall be
fixed to the abutting masonry or concrete with holdfasts or metallic fasteners as specified. After
fixing, the jamb posts of the frames shall be plugged suitably and finished neat. Vertical members
of the door frames shall be embedded in the floor· for the full thickness of the floor finish and shall
be suitably strutted and wedged in order to prevent warping during construction. A minimum of
three hold fasts shall be fixed on each side of door and window frames one at centre point and other
two at 30 cm from the top and bottom of the frames. In case of window and ventilator frames of less
than 1 m in height two hold fasts shall be fixed on each side at quarter point of the frames. Hold
fasts and metallic fasteners shall be measured and paid for separately.
10.9. Measurements
Wood work wrought, framed and fixed shall be measured for finished dimension without any
allowance for the wastage or for dimensions beyond specified dimension. However, in case of
members having mouldings, roundings or rebates and members of circular or varying sections,
finished dimensions shall be taken as the sides of the smallest square or rectangle from which such
a section can be cut. Length of each member shall be measured over all to the nearest cm so as to
include projection for tenons. Width and thickness shall be measured to the nearest mm and the
quantity shall be worked out in unit of upto three places of decimal.
10.10.
Rate
The rate shall include the cost of material and labour involved in all the operations described above
except the hold fasts or metallic fasteners which will be paid for separately.
10.11.
FLUSH DOOR SHUTTERS
10.11.1.
Flush door shutters shall have a solid core and may be of the decorative or nondecorative (Paintable type as per IS 2202 (Part I). Nominal thickness of shutters may be 25, 30 or
35 mm. Thickness and type of shutters shall be as specified.
10.11.2.
Width and height of the shutters shall be as shown in the drawings or as indicated by
the Engineer in-Charge. All four edges of the shutters shall be square. The shutter shall be free
Specifications
Page 61
Tender No: -1800000008
from twist or warp in its plane. The moisture content in timbers used in the manufacture of flush
door shutters shall be not more than 12 per cent when tested according to IS 1708.
10.11.3. Core
The core of the flush door shutters shall be a block board having wooden strips held in a frame
constructed of stiles and rails. Each stile and rail shall be a single piece without any joint. The
width of the stiles and rails including lapping, where provided shall not be less than 45 mm and not
more than 75 mm. The width of each wooden strip shall not exceed 30 mm. Stiles, rails and wooden
strips forming the core of a shutter shall be of equal and uniform thickness. Wooden strips shall be
parallel to the stiles.
End joints of the pieces of wooden strips of small lengths shall be staggered. In a shutter, stiles and
rails shall be of one species of timber. Wooden strips shall also be of one species only but it mayor
may not be of the same species as that of the stiles and rails. Any species of timber may be used for
core of flush door. However, any non-coniferous (Hard wood) timber shall be used for stiles, rails
and lipping.
10.11.4. Face Panel
The face panel shall be formed by gluing, by the hot-press process on both faces of the core, either
plywood or cross-bands and face veneers. The thickness of the cross bands as such or in the
plywood shall be between 1.0 mm and 3.0 mm. The thickness of the face veneers ,as such or in the
plywood shall be between 0.5 mm and 1.5 mm for commercial veneers and between 0.4 mm and 1.0
mm for decorative veneers, provided that the combined thickness of both is not less than 2.2 mm.
The direction of the veneers adjacent to the core shall be at right angles to the direction of the
wooden strips. Finished faces shall be sanded to smooth even texture. Commercial face veneers
shall conform to marine grade plywood and decorative face veneers shall conform to type I
decorative plywood in IS 1328.
10.11.5. Lipping
Lipping, where specified, shall be provided internally on all edges of the shutters. Lipping shall be
done with battens of first class hardwood or as specified of depth not less than 25 mm. For double
leaved shutters, depth of the lipping at meeting of stiles shall be not less than 35 mm. Joints shall
not be permitted in the lipping.
10.11.6. Rebating
In the case of double leaves shutters the meeting of stiles shall be rebated by 8 mm to 10 mm. The
rebating shall be either splayed or square type as shown in drawing where lipping is provided. The
depth of lipping at the meeting of stiles shall not be less than 30 mm.
10.11.7. Opening for Glazing
When required by the purchaser opening for glazing shall be provided and unless otherwise
specified the opening for glazing shall be 250 mm in height and 150 mm or 200 mm in width unless
directed otherwise. The bottom of the opening shall be at a height of 1.4 m from the bottom of the
shutter. Opening for glazing shall be lipped internally with wooden batten of width not less than 25
mm. Opening for glazing shall be provided where specified or shown in the drawing.
10.11.8. Venetian Opening
Where specified the height of the venetian opening shall be 350 mm from the 'bottom of the shutter.
The width of the opening shall be as directed but shall provide for a clear space of 75 mm between
the edge of the door and venetian opening but in no case the opening shall extend beyond the stiles
of the shutter. The top edge of the opening shall be lipped internally with wooden battens of width
not less than 25 mm. Venetian opening shall be provided where specified or shown in the drawing.
Specifications
Page 62
Tender No: -1800000008
10.11.9. Tolerance
Tolerance on width and height shall be + 3 mm and tolerance on nominal thickness shall be ± 1.2
mm. The thickness of the door shutter shall be uniform throughout with a permissible variation of
not more than 0.8 mm when measured at any two points.
10.11.10. Adhesive
Adhesive used for bonding various components of flush door shutters namely, core, core frame,
lipping, cross-bands, face veneers, plywood etc. and for bonding plywood shall conform to BWP
type, phenol formaldehyde synthetic resin adhesive conforming to IS 848.
10.11.11. Tests
Samples of flush door shutters shall be subjected to the following tests:
(a) End Immersion Test
(b) Knife Test
(c) Glue Adhesion Test
One end of each sample shutter shall be tested for End Immersion Test. Two specimens of 150 x
150 mm size shall be cut from the two corners at the other end of each sample shutter for carrying
out Glue Adhesion Test. Knife Test shall be done on the remaining portion of each sample shutter.
10.11.12. Sample Size
Shutters of decorative and non-decorative type from each manufacturer, irrespective, of their
thickness, shall be grouped separately and each group shall constitute a lot. The number of
shutters (sample size) to be selected at random from each lot for testing shall be as specified in
following Table. If the total number of shutters of each type in a work (and not the lot) is less than
twenty five, testing may be done at the discretion of the Engineer-in-Charge and in such cases extra
payment shall be made for the sample shutter provided the sample does not fail in any of the test
specified in CPWD Specification Manual.
For knife test, glue adhesive test, slamming test, the end immersion test, the number of shutters
shall be as per col. 4 of following Table.
TABLE 13
Sample Size and Criteria for Conformity
Permissible no. of defective
Lot Size
Sample Size
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
8
0
1
51 - 100
13
1
2
101 - 150
20
1
2
151 - 300
32
1
3
301 - 500
50
2
4
501 and above
80
2
5
Upto 26 to 50
Sub. Sample size
10.11.13. Criteria for Conformity
All the sample shutters when tested shall satisfy the requirements of the tests. The lot shall be
declared as conforming to the requirements when numbers of defective sample does not exceed the
Specifications
Page 63
Tender No: -1800000008
permissible number given in col. 3 of above Table. If the number of sample shutters found
unsatisfactory for a test is one, twice the number of samples initially tested shall be selected and
tested for the test. All sample shutters so tested shall satisfy the requirement of the test. If the
number of samples found unsatisfactory for a test is two or more, the entire lot shall be considered
unsatisfactory.
.
10.11.14. Fixing
This shall be as specified in CPWD Specifications.
10.11.15. Measurements
Length and width of the shutters shall be measured to the nearest cm in closed position covering
the rebates of the frames but excluding the gap between the shutter and the frame. Overlap of two
shutters shall not be measured.
All work shall be measured net as fixed and area calculated in square metres to nearest two places
of decimal. No deduction shall be made for providing venetian opening and opening for glazing.
10.11.16. Rates
The rate includes the cost of material and labour involved in all the operations described above.
Extra rate shall be payable for providing rebates in double leaved shutters. Glazing when provided
shall be measured & paid for separately as specified in BOQ.
10.12.
HOLD FASTS
10.12.1.
These shall be made from mild steel flat 40 x 5 mm size conforming to IS 7196 without
any burns or dents. 5 cm length of M.S. flat at one end shall be bent at right angle and one hole
11 mm dia shall be made in it for fixing to wooden frame with 10 mm dia nut bolt. The bolt head
shall be sunk into the wooden frame, 10 mm deep and pluged with wooden plug. At the other end
10 cm length of the hold fast flat shall be forked and bent of length as specified at right angle in
opposite direction and embedded in cement concrete block of size 30 x 10 x 15 cm of mix 1 :3:6 (1
cement: 3 coarse sand: 6 graded stone aggregate, 20 mm nominal size) or as specified in CPWD
specification.
10.12.2. Measurements
Measurements for the hold fasts shall be in number.
10.12.3. Rate
It includes the cost of labour and material involved in all the operations described above including
fixing bolt and cement concrete blocks.
10.13.
FITTINGS
10.13.1.
Fitting shall be of mild steel brass, aluminium or as specified. Some mild steel fittings
may have components of cast iron. These shall be well made, reasonably smooth, and free from
sharp edges and corners, flaws and other defects. Screw holes shall be counter sunk to suit the
head of specified wood screws. These shall be of the following types according to the material
used.
(a) Mild Steel Fittings: These shall be bright finish black stone enamelled or copper oxidised
(black finish), nickel chromium plated or as specified.
(b) Brass Fittings: These shall be finished bright satin finish or nickel chromium plated or
copper oxidised or as specified.
Specifications
Page 64
Tender No: -1800000008
(c) Aluminium Fittings: These shall be anodised to natural matt finish or dyed anodic coating
not less than grade AC 10 of IS 1868.
The fittings generally used for different type of doors and windows are indicated in CPWD
specifications. The fittings to be actually provided in a particular work shall, however, be decided
by the Engineer-in-Charge.
Screws used for fittings shall be of the same lnetal, and finish as the fittings. However, chromium
plated brass screws or stainless steel screws shall be used for fixing aluminium fittings. These shall
be of the size as indicated in in CPWD specifications or directed by Engineer-In-Charge.
Fittings shall be fixed in proper position as shown in the drawings or as directed by the EngineerinCharge. These shall be truly vertical or horizontal as the case may be. Screws shall be driven
home with screw driver and not hammered in. Recesses shall be cut to the exact size and depth for
the counter sunking of hinges.
10.13.2. Butt Hinges
These shall be of the following types according to the material used.
(a)
Mild steel butt hinges (Medium).
(b)
Cast brass butt hinges IighUordinary or heavy.
(c)
Extruded aluminium alloy butt hinges.
10.13.2.1.
Mild Steel (Medium): These shall be medium type manufactured from M.S.
sheet. These shall be well made and shall be free from flaws and defects of all kinds. All
hinges shall be cut clean and square and all sharp edges and corners shall be removed.
These shall generally conform to IS 1341.
Hinge Pin: Hinge pin shall be made of mild steel wire. It shall fit inside the knuckles
firmly and rivetted head shall be well formed so as not to allow any play or shake, and
shall allow easy movement of the hinge, but shall not cause looseness.
Knuckles: The number of knuckles in tl)e hinges of different sizes shall be as per IS
1341. The size of knuckles shall be straight and at right angle to the flap. The movement
of the hinges shall be free and easy and working shall not have any play or shake.
Screw Holes : The screw holes shall be clean and counter sunk. These shall be suitable
for counter sunk head wood screws and of the specified size for different types, and sizes
of hinges. The size of the holes shall be such that when it is counter sunk it shall be able
to accommodate the full depth of counter sunk head of the wood screws. The nos. of
screw holes shall as specified in IS 1341.
10.13.2.2.
Sampling and Criteria for Conformity : The number of butt hinges to be
selected from a lot shall be depend on size of lot and shall be in accordance with
following Table below. Butt hinges for testing shall be selected at random from at least
10 per cent of the randomly selected packages subjected to minimum of three equal
number of hinges being selected from each package. All butt hinges selected shall be
checked for dimensions and tolerance requirements. Defects in manufacture and finish
shall also be checked and lot shall be considered conforming to the requirement of this
specifications, if the number of defective hinges among those tested does not exceed the
corresponding number given in following Table.
TABLE 14
Scale of Sampling and Criteria for Conformity
Sl. No.
Lot Size
Sample Size
Permissible No. of
Defective Hinges
1
Specifications
2
3
4
Page 65
Tender No: -1800000008
0
1.
Upto 150
5
2.
151 to 300
20
1
3.
301 to 500
32
2
4.
501 to 1000
50
3
5.
1001 and above
80
5
10.13.2.3.
Cast Brass: These shall be light ordinary or heavy as specified. These shall be
well made and shall be free from flaws and defects of all kinds. These shall be finished
bright or chromium plated or oxidised or as specified. These shall generally conform to
IS 205.
Hinge Pin: Hinge pin shall be made of brass or of stainless steel. The hinge pins shall be
firmly rivetted and shall be properly finished. The movement of the hinge pin shall be
free, easy and square and shall not have any play or shake.
Knuckles: The number of knuckles in each hinge shall not be less than five. The number
of knuckles in case of sizes less than 40 mm shall be three. The sides of the knuckles
shall be straight and at right angle to the flap. The movement of the hinge pin shall be
free and easy and working shall not have any play or shake.
Screw Holes : The screw holes shall be clean and counter sunk and of the specified size
for different types and size of hinges. The size of the holes shall be such that when it is
counter sunk it shall be able to accommodate the full depth of counter sunk head of
wood screw specified.
10.13.2.4.
Extruded Aluminium Alloy : These shall be manufactured fr('lM extruded
sections. These shall be well made and free from flaws and defects of all kinds. These
shall generally conform to IS 205.
Hinge Pin : Hinge pin shall be made of mild steel (galvanised or aluminium alloy). The
aluminium alloy hinge pin shall be anodised. The hinge pin shall be finally rivetted and
shall be properly finished. The movement of hinges shall be free easy and square and
shall not have any play or shake.
Knuckles : Number of knuckles in. each hinge pin shall not be less than 5. The number
of knuckles in case of sizes less than 40 mm be straight and at right angle to the flap.
The movement of the hinge pin shall be free and easy and working shall not have any
play or shake.
Screw Holes : The screw holes shall be suitable for counter sunk head wood screws, and
of specified sizes for different type of hinges. The size of the holes shall be such that
when it is counter sunk it shall be able to accommodate the full depth of counter sunk
head of wood screw specified.
10.13.2.5.
Sampling and Criteria for Conformity : The number of butt hinges to be
selected from a lot shall depend on the size of lot and shall be in accordance with the
following Table. Butt hinges for testing shall be taken at random from at least 10 per
cent of the package subject to a minimum of three, equal number of hinges being
selected from each package. All butt hinges selected from the lot shall be checked for
dimensional and tolerance requirements. Defects in manufacture and finish shall also be
checked. A lot shall be considered conforming to the requirements of this specification if
the number of defective hinges among those tested does not exceed the corresponding
number given in the following Table.
TABLE 15
Scale of Sampling and Criteria for Conformity
Sl. No.
1.
Specifications
Lot Size
Upto 200
Sample Size
15
Permissible No. of
Defective Hinges
0
Page 66
2.
3.
4.
5.
Specifications
201
301
501
801
to 300
to 500
to 800
and above
20
30
40
55
Tender No: -1800000008
1
2
2
3
Page 67
Tender No: -1800000008
Note: Any hinge which fails to satisfy the requirements of anyone or more of the
characteristics shall be considered as defective hinge.
10.13.2.6.
M.S. Sliding Door Bolts: These shall be made of M.S. sheets and M.S. rods
and shall generally conform to IS 281. M.S. sliding door bolts shall be copper oxidised
(black finish) or as specified.
10.13.2.7.
Cast Brass Sliding Door Bolts: These shall be made from rolled brass and
shall generally conform to IS 2681. The hasp shall be of cast brass and secured to the
bolt as or as specified in CPWD specification. Alternatively, the hasp and the bolt may
be cast in one piece. The fixing and staple bolts shall be cast with 6 mm studs. Bolts
shall be finished to shape and have threaded ends and provided with robs washers and
nuts of square or hexagon type. All components shall be finished smooth and polished
before assembly. Cast brass sliding bolts shall be finished bright or chromium plated or
oxidised or as specified.
10.13.2.8.
Aluminium Sliding Door Bolts: These shall be made of aluminium alloy and
shall generally conform to IS 2681. Aluminium sliding door bolts shall be anodized. All
screw holes shall be counter sunk to suit the counter sunk head of screws of specified
sizes. All edges and corners shall be finished smooth. In case of single leaf door, when
iron socket plate or a brass or aluminium fixing bolts (or sliding door bolt) cannot be
fixed, hole of suitable size shall be drilled in the door frame and an iron or brass ~ plate
cut to shape shall be fixed at the face of the hole. The leading dimensions of the sliding
door bolts shall be as per CPWD Specification.
10.13.2.9.
Sampling and Criteria for Conformity: The number of sliding door bolt to be
selected from a lot shall depend on the size of lot and shall be in accordance CPWD
Specification. For testing shall be taken at random from at least 10 percent of the
package subject to a minimum of three, equal number of door bolts being selected from
each package. All door bolts selected from the lot shall be checked for dimensional and
tolerance requirements. Defects in manufacture and finish shall also be checked. A lot
shall be considered conforming to the requirement of this specification if the number of
defects sliding door bolts among those tested does not exceed the corresponding number
given in CPWD Specification.
10.13.3. Tower Bolts
10.13.3.1.
These shall generally conform to IS 204 (Part. I) & IS 204 (Part. II). Tower
bolts shall be well made and shall be free from defects. The bolts shall be finished to the
correct shape and shall have a smooth action. All tower bolts made with sheet of 1.2 mm
thickness and above shall have counter sunk screw holes to suit counter sunk head of
wood screws. All sharp edges and corners shall be removed and finished smooth.
The height of knob of tower bolt when the door, window etc. is in closed position from
the floor level shall be not more than 1.9 metre.
(a) Aluminium barrel tower bolts with barrel and bolt of extruded sections of aluminium
alloy. The knob shall be properly screwed to the bolt and rivetted at the back.
(b) Brass tower bolts with cast brass barrel and rolled or cast brass bolt. or Brass tower
bolts with barrel of extruded sections of brass and rolled or drawn brass bolt. The knobs
of brass tower bolts shall be cast and the bolt fixed with knob, steel spring and ball shall
be provided between the bolt and the barrel.
(c) Mild steel barrel tower bolts with mild steel barrel and mild steel bolt. or Mild steel
tower bolts with mild steel barrel and cast iron bolts.
The plates and straps after assembly shall be firmly rivetted or spot welded. The rivet
head shall be properly formed and the rivet back shall be flush with the plate. These
shall be made in one piece.
10.13.3.2.
Specifications
Unless otherwise specified bolt shall have finish as given below:
Page 68
Tender No: -1800000008
(a) Mild steel tower bolts (Types 1 and 2) Bolts bright finished or plated as specified and
barrel and socket stove enamelled black.
(b) Brass tower bolts (type 3 to 5) Bolt and barrel polished or plated as specified. (c)
Aluminium alloy tower bolts (type 6) Bolt and barrel anodized.
The anodic film may be either transparent or dyed as specified. The quality of anodized
finish shall not be less than grade AC-10 of IS 1868.
10.13.3.3.
This shall be of mild steel polished bright or copper oxidised batch
electrogalvanised or stove enamelled. In case of stove enamelled locking bolts, the bolt
may be finished bright.
10.13.3.4.
These shall be of M.S. cast brass or aluminium as specified. M.S. pull bolt
locks shall be copper oxidized (black finish) or as specified.
10.13.3.5.
Brass pull bolt locks shall be finished bright, chromium plated or oxidised as
specified. Aluminium pull bolt locks shall be anodised and the anodic Goating shall not
be less than grade. A.C. 10 of IS 1868. The bolt shall be 10 mm in diameter and the
fixing plate 3 mm thick. The stop block shall be screwed to the fixing plate by a small
ball and spring over which the bolt shall slide.
10.13.3.6.
The fixing plate shall have four holes for fixing it to the door leaf, two of which
shall be square to receive 6 mm dia. bolts with round heads, the remaining two shall
receive machine screwed with lock nuts. The receiving plate shall be of the same width
and thickness as the fixing plate and shall have 3 counter sunk holes.
Where the bolt slides into wooden members, like the chowkhat, which have a rebate, the
receiving plate shall also be correspondingly shaped so as to fit into the rebate. The
screws and bolts shall have the same finish as the main bolt. The leading dimensions of
pull bolt locks are given in the drawing. The denominating size of the pull bolt locks
shall be length of the fixing plate between guides plus the thickness of the guides.
10.14.
Door Latch
10.14.1. This shall be of mild steel, cast brass, or as specified and shall be capable of smooth
sliding action. In case, of mild steel latch, it shall be copper oxidized (black finish) or as
specified and in case of brass, it shall be finished bright, chromium plated or oxidized or as
specified. The size of door latch shall be taken as the length of the latch.
10.14.2. Door handles shall be of the following types according to the material used:
(a) Cast or Sheet Aluminium Alloy Handles: These shall be of aluminium of specified size, and
of shape and pattern as approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. The size of the handle shall be
determined by the inside grip of the handle. Door handles shall be of 100 mm size and window
handles of 75 mm size unless, otherwise specified. These shall be fixed with 25 mm long wood
screws of designation No. 6. Aluminium handles, shall be anodized and the anodic coating
shall not be less than grade AC 15 - IS 1868 as specified. The finish can be bright natural,
matt or satin or dyed as specified.
(b) Cast Brass Handles: These shall be of cast brass of specified size and of the shape and
pattern as approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. The size of the handle shall be determined by
the inside grip of the handle. Door handles shall be of 100 mm size and window handles of 75
mm size, unless otherwise specified. These shall be fixed with 25 mm long wood screws of
designation No 6. Brass handles shall be finished bright satin or nickel chromium plated or
copper oxidised or as specified.
(c) Mild Steel Handles: These shall be of mild steel sheet, pressed into oval section. The size of
the handles will be determined by the inside grip of the handle. Door handles shall be 10 mm
size and window handles of 75 mm size unless otherwise specified. These shall be fixed with
25 mm long wood screws of designation No.6., Iron handles shall be copper oxidised (black
finish) or stove enamelled black or as specified.
Specifications
Page 69
Tender No: -1800000008
10.14.3. Sampling and Criteria for Conformity : The number of handles to be selected from a lot
shall depend on the size of lot and shall be in accordance with the following Table. Handles for
testing shall be selected at random for at least 10 percent of packages. Subject to a minimum
3, equal number of door handles being selected from each such package. All door handles
shall be checked for dimensional requirement and finish. Any door handle which fails to
satisfy the requirement of dimensions or finish or both shall be considered as defective.
A lot shall be considered as conforming to requirement of this specification, if the number of
defective handles among those tested does not exceed the corresponding number of defectives
is greater than or equal to rejection number given in column 4 of following Table, the lot shall
be deemed as not meeting the requirements of this specification.
TABLE 16
Scale of Sampling and Criteria for Conformity
Lot size
(1)
Upto 50
51 to 90
91 to 150
151 to 280
281 to 500
501 to 1200
1201 and above
Specifications
Sample size
(2)
8
13
20
32
50
80
125
Acceptance no.
(3)
0
1
1
2
3
5
7
Rejection no.
(4)
1
2
2
3
4
6
8
Page 70
Tender No: -1800000008
10.14.4. PTMT (Polytetra Methylene Tetraphthalate) is an engineering plastic (raw material
imported) and have following physical properties:(i) Tensile Strength (ii) Compressive Strength
(iii) Rockwell hardness L-scale (iv) Working temperature (v) E Value (vi) Density (vii)lmpact
Strength
P.T.M.T. fitting shall be in different colours like White, Green, Blue, Derby Brown, Mushroom,
Black, Gold, Silver & Broonze or any colours agreed by the manufactures and purchaser.
P.T.M.T. fittings are suitable for internal doors shutters kitchen, bath w.c. & cabinet etc.
These shall not be used in external door and where security is concern.
Screws used for fittings shall be counter sunk cross head of chromium plated brass or
stainless steel. Sizes of screws shall .be of same size as used in case non ferrous material
door/window fittings.
10.14.5. P. T.M. T. Butt Hinges: These shall be of required colour/shade ceramic look, glassy
smooth surface. These shall be of required size and thickness.
10.14.6. PTMT Tower Bolt: The tower bolt shall be generally barrel type moulded to required
shape and size. Size (length, dia, length of rod, number of holes) shall generally confirm to IS
204 PI & P-II. The rod shall be solid. If it in hollow it shall be provided with stainless steel rod
of required dia. for its strength protective coat of wood primer, polish or varnish.
10.14.7. Sampling and Criteria for Conformity: All the door closer of the same nominal size' a
shape and from the same batch of manufacture, in one consignment shall constitute a lot. The
num of door closers to be taken at random from a lot shall depend upon the size of the lot.
(Table 16). The sample shall be tested for construction, finish, dimensions, interchangeability
of parts and performance in accordance of Table 16. Any door closer failing in anyone or more
of these characteristics shall considered as defective. If in the first sample, the number of
defective door closer is less than or equal corresponding acceptance number, the lot shall be
declared as conforming to the requirement of the characteristics. If the number of defective
door closer is greater than or equal to the rejection number the acceptance number but less
than the rejection number, lot shall be deemed as not meeting requirements of these
characteristics. If the number of defectives is greater than the acceptance number, but less
than the rejection number, a second sample of the size equivalent to that of the f: shall be
taken to determine the conformity or otherwise of the lot. The number of defective door close
found in the first and the second sample shall be combined and if the combined number of
defective thus obtained is less than or equal to the corresponding acceptance number, the lot
shall be declared conforming to the requirements of these characteristics.
10.15.
Universal Hydraulic Door Closer (Exposed Type)
10.15.1.
These shall be made of cast iron/aluminium alloy/zinc alloy and of shape and pattern as
approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.
10.15.2.
These shall generally conform to IS Specifications for door closers (Hydraulically
regulated) IS 3564.
10.15.3.
The door closers may be polished or painted and finished with lacquer to desired colour.
Aluminium alloy door closer shall be anodized and the anodic coating shall not be less than
grade AC 15 of IS 1868. All dents, burrs and sharp edges shall be removed from various
components and they shall be pickled, scrubbed and rinsed to remove greese, rust, scale or
any other foreign elements. After pickling, all the M.S. parts shall be given phosphating
treatment in accordance with IS 3618.
10.16.
PARTITIONS
Tapered Edge Calcium Silicate Board are manufactured from Siliceous and Calcareous materials 'reinforced with fibers. The boards are made in a laminar process and then autoclaved to give a
stable crystalline structure. It is lightweight and can be fixed to either side of timber, aluminum or
lightweight galvanized metal sections. The partitions are non-load bearing and can easily be
assembled at site.
Specifications
Page 71
Tender No: -1800000008
10.16.1. Installation
The G.!. frame and board partitions shall be fixed as per nomenclature of the item and directions of
Engineer-in-Charge or as specified in CPWD specification.
10.16.2. Jointing & Finishing
Joints of the boards are finished with specially formulated Jointing compound and fibre tape to
provide seamless finish. Board surface can be decorated with any type of paint, wall paper, wood
veneer & hard laminates. Services should be incorporated before commencement of board fixing.
10.16.3. Fitting and Fixtures
It is easy and simple to attach different fittings to wall paneling boards. Inclined nails can be fixed
to the boards itself for light materials. For heavier materials the fastening should be centered on
internal stud work or steel or wood frame behind the boards, fixed before boarding. Services should
be incorporated before commencement of board fixing.
10.16.4. Tolerance
Tolerance in dimensions shall be .± 5 mm.
10.16.5. Measurement
10.16.5.1. Length and breadth of superficial area of the finished work shall be measured correct to
a cm. Area shall be calculated in square meter correct to two places of decimal. No
deduction will be made of openings of areas upto 0.40 sqm nor shall extra payment be made
either for any extra material or labour involved in forming such openings.
10.16.5.2. For openings exceeding 0.40 sqm. in area, deduction in measurements shall be made
but extra will be payable for any extra material or labour involved in making such openings.
10.16.6. Rate
The rate shall include the cost of all materials and labour involved in all the operations described
above including all scaffolding, staging etc.
10.17.
FIBRE GLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (F.R.P.) SHUTTERS
10.17.1.
F. R. P. Shutters shall be manufactured conforming to the specifications as per IS
14856 and nomenclature of item & direction of Engineer-in-Charge.
10.17.2.
Blocks of any seasoned hardwood of bulk density not less than 450 kg.lm3 at 12 per
cent moisture content or any other material of sufficient thickness and length shall be
provided inside the shutter at suitable place to hold fittings and fixtures such as
aldrops, tower bolt, handle, sliding door bolt, mortice lock etc. Blocks for hinges shall
be provided at three locations, unless otherwise specified by the purchaser. One at the
centre and other two at 200 mm from the top and the bottom of the shutter. Blocks
shall be provided at predetermined places in the shutter so as to fix hinges mortice
locks, tower bolts, aldrops, door closures, etc. The finished surface shall be buffed and
polished with wax.
10.17.3. Location of Fittings and Accessories
The lock rail of door shutters shall be so placed that is centre line is at a height 850 + 5 mm
from the bottom of the shutter. Door shutter shall be fixed to the frame with three hinges,
unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, of the type specified. These locations shall be, one
at centre and other two at 200 mm from the top and the bottom of the shutter, where blocks
Specifications
Page 72
Tender No: -1800000008
have already been provided and suitable indication by depressing the profile has been made.
Screws for fixing the hinges shall be screwed in with screwdrivers & not hammered. The length
of screw should be 8/30 mm. The hinges used shall be stainless steel or aluminum.
10.18.
10.18.1.
DOOR, WINDOW, VENTILATOR AND PARTITION FRAMES
Frame Work
First of all the shop drawings for each type of doors/windows/ventilators etc. shall be prepared
by using suitable sections based on architectural drawings, adequate to meet the requirement/
specifications and by taking into consideration varying profiles of aluminium sections being
extruded by approved manufacturers. The shop drawings shall show full size sections of glazed
doors, windows, ventilators etc. The shop drawings shall also show the details of fittings and
joints. Before start of the work, all the shop drawings shall be got approved from the Engineerin-Charge.
Actual measurement of openings left at site for different type of door/window etc. shall be
taken. The fabrication of the individual door/windows/ventilators etc. shall be done as per the
actual sizes of the opening left at site. The frames shall be truly rectangular and flat with
regular shape corners fabricated to true right angles. The frames shall be fabricated out of
section which have been cut to length, mitered and jointed mechanically using appropriate
machines. Mitered joints shall be corner crimped or fixed with self tapping stainless steel
screws using extruded aluminium cleats of required length and profile. All aluminium work
shall provide for replacing damaged/broken glass panes without having to remove or damage
any member of exterior finishing material.
10.18.2.
Fixing of Frames
The
holes
in
concrete/masonry/wood/any
other
members
for
fixing
anchor
bolts/fasteners/screws
shall
be
drilled
with
an
appropriate
electric
drill.
Windows/doors/ventilators etc. shall be placed in correct final position in the opening and
fixed to Sal wood backing using stainless steel screws of star headed, counter sunk and
matching size groove. of required size at spacing not more than 250 mm c/c or dash fastener.
All joints shall be sealed with approved silicone sealants.
In the case of composite windows and doors, the different units are to be assembled first. The
assembled composite units shall be checked for line, level and plumb before final fixing is
done. Engineer-in-Charge in his sole discretion may allow the units to be assembled in their
final location if the situation so warrants. Snap beadings and EPDM gasket shall be fixed as
per the detail shown in the shop drawings.
Where aluminium comes into contact with stone masonry, brick work, concrete, plaster or
dissimilar metal, it shall be coated with an approved insulation lacquer, paint or plastic tape to
ensure that electrochemical corrosion is avoided. Insulation material shall be trimmed off to a
clean flush line on completion.
The contractor shall be responsible for the doors, windows' etc. being set straight, plumb, level
and for their satisfactory operation after fixing is complete.
10.18.3.
Measurements
weight
All
running
section
thebecalculated
aluminium
in
meter
kilogram
along
on
sections
correct
theextra
outer
basis
to
including
the
of
periphery
actual
second
snap
average
of
place
beadings
composite
of(average
decimal
fixed
section
of
in
shall
five
place
correct
be
samples)
shall
taken
to be
afor
weight
millimeter.
measured
payment
of composite
The
in
(weight
shall
deduction
taken
nor anything
after
anodizing).
shall
The
be
weight
paid
of
for
cleat
skew
shall
cuts.
be
added
for
payment.
Neither
any
10.18.4.
Rate
The rate shall include the cost of all the materials, labour involved in all the operations as
described in nomenclature of item and particular specification.
Specifications
Page 73
Tender No: -1800000008
10.19.
DOOR, WINDOWS AND VENTILATOR SHUTTERS
Material, fabrication and dimensions of aluminium qoors, windows and ventilators
manufactured from extruded aluminium alloy sections of standard sizes and designs complete
with fittings, ready for being fixed into the building shall be as per IS 1948.
10.19.1. Glass Panes
Glass panes shall weigh at least 13.5 kg/m2 and shall be free from flaws, specks or bubbles.
All panes shall have properly squared corners and straight edges.
Specifications
Page 74
Tender No: -1800000008
11. STEEL WORKS:
11.1. Structural Work in built-up section (Welded/ bolted)
Although Broad Specifications for Structural Steel Works are as indicated below, the entire
work shall be executed strictly in keeping with the working methodology, sequence of
operations, safety and security etc. as approved by the Engineer-In-Charge, in best
workmanship in conformity with relevant IS codes and the specifications of this tender
document.
The Tenderer shall submit his own fabrication / erection methodology comprising sequence of
operations to suit the works requirement such as –
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Material movement / storage of material
Fabrication scheme considering space constraints
Scheme for erection to be done at about 30 mtr. height for trusses
Retractable Roof work
Sliding Motorized Doors work
Structural steel work of Blasting Chamber.
Necessary Safety precautions as per prevailing rules.
Security formalities to be maintained being a MDL area.
General
In addition to the requirements contained in this Specification, all materials shall conform to the
latest edition of the relevant Indian Standard or its equivalent standard approved by the
Engineer-In-Charge and shall, if required, be tested as prescribed therein.
In the event of conflict between this Specification and recognised standards, then the
requirement of this Specification shall govern.
The work shall be carried out by competent personnel skilled in their various trades. All work
shall be of the highest quality and the work shall be the subject of inspection and approval of the
Engineer-In-Charge and the Employer.
All material shall be obtained from an approved supplier and manufacturer's appropriate test
certificates shall be available upon request by the Engineer-In-Charge or the Employer.
All Steelwork shall be straightened or curved as necessary by pressure and not by hammering.
When bolt heads or nuts bear upon bevelled surfaces they shall be provided with square
tapered washers to afford seating for the nut square with the axis of the bolt.
All nuts and bolts specified on the Drawings shall be to the required size with correct threaded
length, and be supplied with matching nuts and washers also of the same material, except
where electrolytic action is to be avoided.
Where small parts such as bolts and nuts etc. are to be sherardised, they shall be treated to
receive a coating of finished thickness not less than 30 microns.
Where bolts, nuts and washers etc. are to be hot dip galvanised, they shall be treated to receive
a finished thickness of zinc coating of not less than 80 microns thickness.
The Contractor shall give due notice to the Engineer-In-Charge in advance of the materials or
workmanship getting ready for inspection.
The Engineer-In-Charge shall have free access at all reasonable times to those parts of the
contractor’s work which are concerned with the fabrication of the steel work and those portions
Specifications
Page 75
Tender No: -1800000008
of the site where assembly or erection is being carried out. The contractor shall give all
reasonable assistance required in connection with the inspection and testing of the work.
No part of the work shall be treated as approved unless so informed by the Engineer-In-Charge
in writing. However, approval of any material fabricated at shop / field shall not invalidate
final rejection at site by the Engineer-In-Charge if it fails to be in proper condition or has
fabrication inaccuracies, which prevents proper assembly. Similarly any approval of the
fabrication and / or erection by the Engineer-In-Charge shall not relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility for furnishing material and / or workmanship conforming to the requirements of
the specifications.
All sections shall be free from surface defects such as pitting, cracks, laminations, twists,
bends etc. The use of defective sections shall not be permitted and all such rejected material
shall be immediately removed away from the store / site at contractor’s cost.
All sections shall be marked for identifications and each lot shall be accompanied by
manufacturers quality certificate, chemical analysis and mechanical characteristics as
specified in relevant IS Codes.
Each lot of electrodes, bolts, nuts etc. shall be accompanied by manufacturer’s quality test
certificate conforming to relevant IS codes.
Materials at the shops shall be kept clean and protected from weather.
All members likely to collect rain water shall have drain holes.
Not more than one shop shall be provided to make the full length of a member.
All bolts, nuts, washers, rivets, electrodes, screws, etc. shall be supplied 10% in excess of the
requirement in each category and size.
Materials Unless specified other wise various materials shall conform to the following IS Codes and
Standards –
•
•
•
•
•
•
Structural steel ( Standard quality)
: IS:226
Rolled steel sections
: IS: 808
Steel tubes for structural purpose
: IS: 1161
Structural steel (for walkways, ladder, hand rails) : IS: 1977
Welded Electrodes
: IS: 811
Threaded fasteners
: IS 1367
Supply
Supply of structural steel and all required material for the works shall be arranged by the
Contractor.
Receipts and storing of materials
All steel shall be carefully off-loaded and stacked on timber or concrete supports suitably
spaced on a firm level surface, and of sufficient height to keep steel clear of the ground and
water. The steel shall be stored separately, by section size or thickness.
All sections shall be checked, sorted out and arranged by grade and quality in the store as per
instructions of the Engineer-In-Charge.
All bolts including nuts and washers shall be thoroughly checked, sorted out and arranged
diameter wise by grade and quality in the store.
Specifications
Page 76
Tender No: -1800000008
All materials shall be kept protected from corrosion. Storing shall be generally in accordance
with IS: 4082.
Welding electrodes and welding wires if used shall be stored separately in their original
bundles or cartons, in a dry place adequately protected from weather and other effects as per
IS :9595 and as per instructions given by Engineer-In-Charge. Electrodes shall be kept dry.
Shop Drawings
Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall prepare all the fabrication and erection
drawings for the structural steel work. These shall be prepared on the basis of the Engineer’s
design drawings ‘released for preparation of shop drawings or approved for construction (AFC)
drawings and shall be used for further work on the written approval to these drawings by the
Engineer-In-Charge to the Contractor. Such approval shall constitute approval of the size of
members, dimensions and general arrangement but shall not constitute approval of the
connections between members and other details. Furthermore any approval shall not relieve
the Contractor from the responsibility for correctness of engineering, design of connections,
workmanship, fit of parts, details, materials, errors or omissions of any and all work shown
thereon.
The Contractor should check for erection clearance and ensure that detailing of connections is
carefully planned to obtain ease in erection of structures, including field welded connections
and bolting. Particular care is required when detailing joints with the use of high strength
friction grip bolts as this involves clearances for use of sockets with torque wrench.
The contractor shall submit design calculations for substitution, if any and for the connection
details proposed by him.
The fabrication drawings shall be revised by Contractor to reflect all revisions in design
drawings as and when such revisions are made by the Engineer-In-Charge. The revised
fabrication drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer-In-Charge for approval. Only
approved and marked for construction drawings with appropriate revisions marking drawings
shall be used for carrying out the fabrication work. Unchecked, unsigned and drawings
without any stamp of (AFC) shall not be used for the purpose of proceeding with the work. If it
is found that the contractor has not adhered to these stipulations, the fabrication work shall
be liable for rejection.
The details regarding the reproducible, number of prints to be furnished etc. shall be as per
the tender provisions.
Laying Out
As shown on drawings or as directed by the Engineer-In-Charge.
Fabrication
Standard
All fabrication shall be done strictly as per the (AFC) drawings with latest revision in
accordance with IS: 800 (Code of Practice for use of Structural Steel in general Building
Construction) and IS: 1915 (Code of Practice for Steel Bridges) and also in accordance with
IS:9595 and other relevant IS Codes and ISI Hand book SP-6 (1), subject to approval of the
Engineer-In-Charge.
No holes or notches shall be made in the steel work other than those shown on the drawings
without approval of the Engineer-In-Charge. Similar approval must be obtained prior to the
enlargement of any hole.
The butting end of members shall be faced in a milling or ending machine after the members
have been completely fabricated so as to butt in close contact over the entire surface.
Specifications
Page 77
Tender No: -1800000008
Templates
Extensive use of templates shall be made. The templates shall be steel bushed where
considered necessary by the Engineer-In-Charge. In case actual members are used as
templates for drilling similar pieces it will be at the discretion of the Engineer-In-Charge to
decide whether such pieces are fit to be incorporated in the finished structure. The Contractor
shall arrange for corresponding parts of each unit manufactured from the same drawings, to
be interchangeable, as far as economic manufacturing conditions permit and shall advise the
Engineer-In-Charge of the precise arrangements made in this respect.
Connections
Shop/field connections shall be effected either by welding or by high strength friction grip bolts
as specified. High tensile bolts shall be used for field connections and standard MS bolts
conforming to IS: 1363 may be used for field connections for light members such as purlins,
girths, staircase stringers and landing beams or for other connections also, if permitted by the
Engineer-In-Charge.
Where necessary, tapered washers or flat washers or spring washers shall be used with bolts.
In case of high strength friction grip bolts, hardened washers shall be used under the nuts or
the heads depending upon whether the nuts or the heads are turned to tighten the bolts. The
length of the bolts shall be such that at least one thread of the bolt projections beyond the nut
except in case of high strength friction grip bolts where this projection shall be at least three
times the thread pitch.
All connections and splices shall be designed for full strength of members or loads indicated
unless otherwise approved.
All connections shall be precisely shown on the drawings and shall be strong enough to
develop the full strength of the member and shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer-InCharge.
All field connections shall be made with black steel bolts. All surfaces of steel and bolts shall
be entirely free of paint, lacquer or other protective substance. All shop connections shall be
welded as approved by the Engineer-In-Charge. As far as possible, it should be ensured to
have down hand welding for all shop joints.
In all cases where bearing is critical, the unthreaded bolt shall bear on the members
assembled. A washer of adequate thickness may be provided to exclude the threads from the
bearing thickness, if no longer grip bolt has to be used for this purpose. Column splices shall
be designed for the full tensile strength of the minimum cross section at the splice. Unless
otherwise noted, beam end connections shall be designed for 60% of the shear capacity of the
beam section plus additional axial forces, if any, shown on the Engineer’s design drawings.
Materials at the shops shall be kept clean and protected from weather.
Not more than one shop splice shall be provided to make the full length of a member.
All bolts, nuts, washers, rivets, electrodes, screws etc. shall be supplied 10% in excess of the
requirement in each category and size.
Straightening
All material shall be straight and if necessary shall be straightened and/or flattened by
pressure, unless required to be of curvilinear form and shall be free from twists. Straightening
will be done by methods that will not injure the materials. Long plates shall be straightened by
passing through a mangle or levelling rolls and structural shapes by hydraulic or mechanical
bar straightening machines. Heating of rolled sections and plates for purposes of straightening
shall not be permitted. Limited applications of heat with a gas-torch shall be permitted on
Specifications
Page 78
Tender No: -1800000008
approval of Engineer-In-Charge in writing. Sharp kinks or bends shall be the cause for
rejection.
Rolling and Forming
Plates for circular structural members shall be accurately laid off and rolled or formed to
required profile/shape as called for on the drawings. Adjacent sections shall be match-marked
to facilitate accurate assembly, welding and erection in the field.
Cutting
Rolled sections shall be sawed or milled to length. Small plate pieces like gussets may be
sheared or cropped to size. Sawing, shearing and cropping shall be clean, reasonably square
and free from any distortion. All re-entrant corners shall be shaped notch-free to a radius of at
least 12mm.
Gas-cutting shall preferably be done by a mechanically guided torch. Hand flame cutting may,
however, be permitted where the part being cut shall not be subjected to substantial tensile
stresses and only when approved by the Engineer-In-Charge. Gas-cut edges shall be free of
gouges. Any gauges that remain after cutting shall be removed by grinding.
Gas-cutting shall normally only be permitted for mild steel though gas cutting of high tensile
steel may also be permitted, provided special care is taken to leave sufficient metal to be
removed by machining so that all metal that has been hardened by flame is removed except
where the material is subsequently joined by welding, no loading shall be transmitted into
metal through a gas cut surface.
Edge plaining of sheared, cropped or gas cut edges is not intended unless the edges warrant
such plaining or is specifically called for by the Engineer-In-Charge.
Punching shall not be resorted to unless previously approved by the Engineer-In-Charge.
Where permitted in secondary members such as purlins, side sheeting runners, packing plates
and lacing bars, holes may be punched full size through material not over 12 mm thick except
where required for close tolerance bolts or barrel bolts. Holes must be clean cut, without burr
or ragged edges. Holes through more than one thickness of material (e.g. compound stanchions
and girder flanges) shall be drilled after assembling and tightly clamping or bolting the
members together. The various thickness shall then be separated, burrs formed by the drill
removed and the members reassembled.
Sub-punching may be permitted before assembly provided the holes are punched 3 mm less in
diameter than the required size and reamed after assembly to the full diameter. The thickness
of material punched shall not exceed 16 mm.
Holes for all other connections shall be drilled accurately and burrs removed effectively.
Punching shall not be adopted for dynamically loaded structure or its part.
Holes for bolts shall not be more than 1.5 mm larger in diameter than the nominal diameter of
the bolt. Holes for turned and fitted bolts shall be drilled to a slightly smaller diameter and
remade to a diameter equal to the nominal diameter of the shank or barrel. This shall be
subject to tolerance specified in IS 919. Parts to be connected with close tolerance or barrel
bolts shall be firmly held together by tacking bolts or clamps and the holes drilled through one
operation shall be drilled to a smaller size and reamed out after assembly. Where this is not
possible the parts shall be drilled and reamed separately.
Where reamed members are taken apart for stripping or handling, the respective pieces reamed
together shall be so marked that they may be reassembled in the same position in the final
setting up. No interchange of reamed parts will be permitted.
Specifications
Page 79
Tender No: -1800000008
Gas-cutting of holes shall be strictly prohibited. Poor matching, over drilling and ovality in
holes shall be a cause for rejection.
When batch-drilling is carried out in the operation through two or more separable parts, these
parts shall be separated after drilling and the burrs removed.
Machining
Column splices and butt joints of struts and compression members depending on contact for
load transmission shall be accurately machined and close butted over the whole section with a
tolerance not exceeding 0.2mm locally at any place.
In column caps and bases, the ends of shafts together with attached gussets, angles, channels,
etc. after welding together shall be accurately machined so that the parts connected, butt over
the entire surfaces of contract. In no case the parts connected butt less than 90% of the
surface of contract. Care shall be taken that these connecting angles or channels are fixed
with such accuracy that they are not reduced unduly in thickness in machining.
Ends of all bearing stiffeners shall be machined or ground to fit tightly at both top and bottom.
Where sufficient gussets or welding are provided to transmit the entire loading, the column
ends need not be machined.
Splicing
Splicing of built up/compound/latticed sections shall be done in such a fashion that each
component of the section is joined in a staggered manner.
Where no butt weld is used for splicing, the meeting ends of two pieces of joist/channel/built
up section shall be ground flush for bearing on each other and suitable flange and web splice
plates shall be designed and provided for the full strength of the flange/web of the section and
welds designed accordingly.
Where full strength butt weld is used for splicing (after proper edge preparation of the web and
flange plates) of members fabricated out of joist/channel/built up section, additional flange
and web plates shall be provided, over and above the full strength butt welds, to have 40 %
strength of the flange and web.
Where a cover plate is used over a joist/channel section the splicing of the cover plate and
channel/joist sections shall be staggered by minimum 500 mm. Extra splice plate shall be
used for the cover plate and joist/channel section as per provision of relevant IS Codes.
Bolting
All turned and fitted bolts shall be parallel throughout the barrel and within the tolerance of
only minus (-1/8) mm. unless otherwise specified and faces of heads and nuts bearing on steel
work shall be machined. All such bolts shall be provided with washers not less than 6 mm
thick so that when the nut is tightened, it shall not bear on the unthreaded body of the bolt.
In all cases, where the full bearing area of the bolt is to be developed, the threaded portion of
the bolt should not be within the thickness of the parts bolted together. The threaded portion
of each bolt shall project through the nut by at least one thread. Tapered washers of suitable
thickness shall be provided for all heads and nuts to afford a seating square with the axis of
the bolt.
11.2. Welding
Welding shall generally be done by electric arc process and shall conform to the respective IS
Codes and Standards as listed above.
Welding Procedures
Specifications
Page 80
Tender No: -1800000008
The Contractor shall make necessary arrangement for providing sufficient number of welding
sets of required capacity, all consumables, cutting & grinding equipment with requisite
accessories/auxiliaries, equipment etc.
The Contractor shall submit the welding procedure for each type of joint for the approval of the
Engineer-In-Charge and shall ensure that copies of the same are at all times, readily available
to the welders employed on the Works. The procedure shall include all details with reference to
provisions of IS 823 and IS 4353. It should be specifically ensured that filter glass used in
welding helmets shall be of internationally accepted quality and make.
The welding procedure shall be such as to ensure that the weld metal can be fully and
satisfactorily deposited throughout the length and thickness of all joints and that distortion
and shrinkage stresses are reduced to a minimum and that the welds meet the requirements of
quality specified.
Welding plant and accessories shall have capacity adequate for the welding procedure laid
down and shall satisfy appropriate standards and be of approved make and quality. The
Contractor shall maintain all welding plants in good working order. All the electrical plant in
connection with the welding operation shall be properly and adequately earthed and adequate
means of measuring the current shall be provided.
Welding of various materials under this specification shall be carried out using one or more of
the following processes –
a) Manual metal arc welding process (MMAW)
b) Submerged arc welding process (SAW)
Submerged arc, automatic or semi-automatic welding shall be generally be employed. Only
where it is not practicable to use submerged arc welding, manual arc welding maybe resorted
to.
Voltage and current (and polarity if direct current is used) shall be set according to the
recommendations of the manufacturer of the electrode being used and suitability to thickness
of material, joint form etc. Adequate means of measuring the current shall be available either
as part of the welding plant or by the provision of a portable ammeter. In checking the welding
current, a tolerance of 10% or 30 Amperes from the specified value whichever is less shall be
permitted.
The welding procedure adopted and the consumables used shall be specifically approved by
Engineer-In-Charge. Welding electrodes used shall conform to IS : 814 (latest) and shall be
supplied by manufacturer approved by the Engineer-In-Charge. Any electrode which has part
of its flux coating broken or is damaged shall be rejected.
No welding shall be done on base metal at a temperature below 5 Deg. C. Base metal shall be
preheated as required to the temperature given in the table below prior to tack welding or
welding. When base metal not otherwise required to be preheated is at a temperature below 0
deg. C, it shall be preheated to at least 20 Deg. C prior to tack welding or welding. Preheating
shall be done of the surface of the base metal on which the weld metal is being deposited
within 75 mm on each side of the point of welding to the specified preheated temperature and
this temperature shall be maintained as minimum inter-pass temperature while welding is in
progress. The temperature shall be measured on the face opposite to that heated. However
there is access to only one face, the heat source shall be removed to allow for temperature
equalization (one minute for each 25 mm of plate thickness) before measuring the temperature.
TABLE - 14
Thickness of
Specifications
Minimum preheat and inter-pass temperature
Page 81
thickest part
at point of
welding
Upto 20 mm.
Over 20 mm. to
40 mm. incl.
Over 40 mm. to
63 mm. incl.
Over 63 mm
Other than low
hydrogen
welding
electrodes
IS:226 steel or
IS:2062 steel
None
65 Deg. C
110 Deg. C
150 Deg. C
Tender No: -1800000008
Low hydrogen welding electrodes
IS: 961
steel
Welding
with
this
process
not
allowed
IS:226
steel, IS
2062 steel
None
10 Deg. C
95 Deg. C
110 Deg. C
IS: 961
steel
10 Deg. C
65 Deg. C
110 Deg C
65 Deg. C
Welding shall be done with the structural in flat position in a down hand manner wherever
possible. Adequate care shall be taken to maintain the current and polarity for the type of
electrode used and nature of work.
No welding shall be done when the surface of the members is wet nor during periods of high
wind unless the welding operation and the work are properly protected.
Before commencing fabrication of member or structure in which welding is likely to result in
distortion and/or locked up stresses, a complete programme of fabrication, assembly and
welding shall be made and submitted to the Engineer-In-Charge for approval. Such a
programme shall include besides other appropriate details, full particulars in regard to the
following:
a)
Proposed pre bending in components such as flanges and presetting of joints to offset
expected distortion.
b)
Make up of sub-assemblies proposed to be welded before incorporation in the final
assembly.
c)
Proposed joint forms, classification of wire and flux or covered electrodes, welding
process including fitting and welding sequence with directions in which freedom of movement
is to be allowed.
d)
Proposed number, spacing and type of strong backs and details of jigs and fixtures for
maintaining proper fit up and alignment during welding.
e)
Any other special features like assembling similar members back to back or stress relief.
Sequencing of welding
a) The contractor shall choose the welding sequence after carefully studying each case such
as to minimize distortion and shrinkage and submit the same to the Engineer-In-Charge for
comments and approval.
b) As far as practicable, all welds shall be made in sequence that will balance the applied heat
of welding while the welding progresses.
c) The direction of the general progression in welding on a member shall be from points where
the parts relatively fixed in position with respect to each other towards points where they
have a greater relative freedom of movement.
d) All splices in each component part of a cover-plated beam or built up member shall be
made before the component part is welded to other component parts of the member.
Specifications
Page 82
Tender No: -1800000008
e) Joints expected to have significant shrinkage shall be welded before joints expected to have
lesser shrinkage.
f)
Welding shall be carried continuously to completion with correct number of runs.
Preparation of fusion faces
Preparation of fusion faces shall be done in accordance with the approved fabrication drawings
by shearing, chipping, machining or gas cutting (except that shearing shall not be used for
thickness over 8 mm). The faces shall be smooth, uniform and free from irregularities such as
fins, tears, laminations etc. as would interfere with the deposition of the specified size of weld
to be the cause of defects.
Surfaces to be welded shall be free from loose scale, slag, rust, grease, paint, moisture and any
other foreign material, which might affect the quality of weld. Surfaces shall be wire-brushed
vigorously or machined/ground, if found necessary by the Engineer-In-Charge.
Welding of joints shall be undertaken only on approval by the Engineer-In-Charge of the
alignment, levels etc. of the members to be jointed.
Gaps for Joints
Parts to be fillet welded shall be brought in as close contact as possible and in no event shall
they be separated by more than 1.5 mm. In case of a gap of more than 1.5 mm the size of the
fillet weld shall be increased by the amount of the gap. A gap greater than 3 mm. wide shall be
packed with MS shims and the weld increased by the amount of the gap.
Abutting parts to be butt welded shall be carefully aligned together within a gap of 3 mm and
correct root gap shall be maintained throughout the welding operation.
Gaps shall be set by means of suitable jigs and the steel work held firmly in position by clamps
or bolts until the welded joint is sufficiently rigid to be freed of clamps without causing strain
or distortion.
Misalignment greater than 25 percent of the thickness of the thinner plate or 3 mm. whichever
is smaller shall be corrected and in making the correction the parts shall not be drawn into a
slope sharper than 2 Deg. (1 in 27.5)
Fillet Welds
The minimum leg length of a fillet weld as deposited should not be less then the specified size
and the throat thickness as deposited should not be less than that tabulated below –
Angle between fusion faces
Throat thickness
60 Deg. C
90 Deg. C
48 mm
91 Deg. C
100 Deg. C
16.5 mm
101 Deg. C
106 Deg. C
15 mm.
107 Deg. C
113 Deg. C
14 mm
114 Deg. C
120 Deg. C
12.5 mm.
In no case should a concave weld be deposited without the specific approval of the EngineerIn-Charge unless the leg length is increased from the above specified so that the resultant
throat thickness is as great as would have been obtained by the deposition of a flat. Welding
sequence should be such as to have minimized shrinkage stresses. After each run of weld, all
slag shall be removed and final run shall be protected by clean boiled linseed oil till approved.
Specifications
Page 83
Tender No: -1800000008
Butt Welds
All main butt welds shall be full penetration butt welds, unless otherwise specified with
complete fusion of the root edges. The ends of the welds shall have full throat thickness. This
shall be obtained on all main welds by use of extension pieces adequately secured on either
side of the main plates. Additional metal remaining after the removal of the extension pieces
shall be removed by machining or by other approved means and the ends and surfaces of the
weld shall be smoothly finished by machining or other approved means. Where the abutting
parts are thinner than 20 mm, the extension pieces may be omitted but the ends of butt welds
shall then be chipped or gouged out to sound metal and side welded to fill up the ends to the
required reinforcement.
Quality of Weld
The weld metal as deposited shall be free from blow holes, cracks, slag inclusions, excessive
porosity, cavities and other faults. It shall be properly fused with the parent material without
overlapping or serious under-cutting at the toes of the weld. The weld surfaces shall be cleaned
of slag or flux and show a uniform and consistent contour and regular appearance.
Faulty Works
In the event of excessive convexity, weld size is to be reduced by removing the excess weld
metal. In the event of faulty work the defective portions shall be cut out and re-welded. Where
serious under-cutting occurs, additional weld metal shall be deposited to make good the
reduction. In case of members getting distorted due to heat of welding, the members are to be
straightened out by mechanical means or by careful applications of limited amount of heat
when temperature of the areas affected more than 650 C.
Protection
Immediately after dislodging, inspection and approval, all site welds and the surrounding
surfaces shall be painted to protect the metal.
Tolerances
The dimensional and weight tolerances for rolled shapes shall be in accordance with IS: 1852
and/or ASTM A6.
No rolled or fabricated member shall deviate from straightness by more than 1/1000 of the
axial length or 100 mm whichever is smaller.
The length of members with both ends finished for contact shall have a tolerance of ± 1 mm.
Members without ends finished for contact bearing shall have a tolerance of ± 1.5 mm for
members upto 10 meters long and a tolerance of ± 3 mm for members over 10 meters in
length.
Lateral deviation between centre line of web plate and centre line of flange plate at contact
surface in the case of built up sections shall not exceed 3mm.
The combined warp age and tilt of flanges in welded built up sections shall not exceed 1/200th
of the flange width or 3 mm whichever is smaller.
The deviation from flatness of welded plate girder web in the length between stiffeners or a
length equal to the depth of the girder shall not exceed 1/150th of such length.
Deviations from the specified depth of welded girders measured at the centre line of the web
shall not exceed ± 3 mm upto a depth of 1000 mm, ± 5 mm for depths above 1000mm, upto
2000mm and + 8mm and – 5mm for depths over 2000mm.
Specifications
Page 84
Tender No: -1800000008
11.3. Inspection and testing of weld:
The Contractor shall carry out procedure tests in accordance with IS: 7307 to demonstrate by
means of a specimen weld of adequate length on steel sample of that to be used that he can
make welds with the welding procedure to be used for the work for the complete satisfaction of
the Engineer-In-Charge. The test weld shall include weld details from the actual construction
and it shall be welded in a manner simulating the most unfavourable instances of fit-up,
electrode condition etc. which are anticipated to occur on the particular fabrication. Where
material analysis are available, the welding procedure shall be carried out on material with the
highest carbon equivalent value.
After welding, but before the relevant tests given in IS: 7307 are carried out, the test weld shall
be held as long as possible at room temperature, but in any case not less than 72 hours and
shall then be examined for cracking. The examination procedure shall be sufficiently rigorous
to be capable of revealing significant defects in both parent metal and weld metal.
After establishing the welding method, the Contractor shall finally submit to the Engineer-InCharge for his approval the welding procedure specification in standard format given in IS:
9595 before starting the fabrication.
Approval to the welding procedure by the Engineer-In-Charge shall not relieve the Contractor
of his responsibility for correct and sound welding without undue distortion in the finished
structure.
The Contractor shall satisfy the Engineer-In-Charge that the welders are suitable for the work
upon which they shall be employed. For this purpose welders shall have satisfied the relevant
requirements of IS 7318. If the welders shall be working to approved welding procedures, they
shall have satisfied the relevant requirements of IS 7310.
Unless specified otherwise, inspection of steel work shall be made at the place of manufacture
prior to dispatch and shall be conducted so as not to interfere unnecessarily with the operation
of the work. Stage inspection during the progress of the work shall be carried out during final
assembly and erection at the Site.
The method of inspection shall be according to IS: 822 and extent of inspection and testing
shall be in accordance with the relevant application standard or in the absence of such a
standard as specified by the Engineer-In-Charge. Welds shall not be painted or otherwise
obscured until they have been inspected, approved and accepted.
The Engineer-In-Charge or his representative shall have access to the Contractor’s work at all
reasonable times and the Contractor shall provide him with all facilities necessary for
inspection during all stages of fabrication and erection with but not limited to the following:
i)
To check the conformity with the relevant standards and suitability to various welding
equipments & their performance
ii)
To witness/approve the welding procedure qualification.
iii)
To witness/approve the welders performance qualification.
iv)
To check whether shop/field welding being executed is in conformity with the relevant
specifications and codes of practice.
All welding shall be subject to inspection and tests as specified by the Engineer-In-Charge.
The Engineer-In-Charge may require test plates to be prepared in accordance with IS: 1181
“Qualifying Test for Metal Arc Welding (Engaged in welding structures other than pipes)”. At
main butt welds, these may be taken from plates cut from extensions of the main plates and
fixed as extensions at the butt joints, so that the direction of rolling is parallel to that of the
main plates and the welds continuous with the main welds.
Specifications
Page 85
Tender No: -1800000008
The Engineer-In-Charge may require radiographic tests and ultrasonic tests to be carried out
to check full strength butt welds at contractor’s cost. These shall be in accordance with the
recommended U.W. 51 of ASME Code Section VIII. Other non-destructive tests could be as
follows –
Magnetic Particle Test
This is carried out to examine the root and intermediate passes of weld in accordance with the
following as decided by the Engineer-In-Charge –
•
•
ASTM Specification.
ASTM Specification
E-109
E-138
If heat treatment is performed, the completed weld shall be examined after the heat treatment.
Magnetic particle test shall be carried out using alternating current. Direct current may be
used with the permission of the Engineer-In-Charge.
Liquid Penetrate Inspection
In the case of welds examined by Liquid Penetrate Inspection, such tests shall be carried out in
accordance with ASTM-E-165 or IS: 3658.
The above tests are generally not required to be carried out but if and when required, they
shall be paid done as specified at contractor’s cost.
Radiography Test
Ultrasonic Testing
(a)
Testing of welds shall be undertaken by an independent accredited testing authority
selected by the Contractor and approved by Engineer-In-Charge. The Contractor shall be
responsible for all costs of such testing. All welds shall be tested as specified.
(b)
The Contractor shall inspect each welded joint & they shall be inspected for edge fusion
and the possibility of cracking. Testing of welds shall be by ultrasonic examination and
they shall be carried out by the Contractor in accordance with standards to the
approval of the Engineer-In-Charge. The Engineer-In-Charge shall have the opportunity
to witness any or all of the tests. The Contractor shall give adequate prior notice before
the commencement of any tests. All ultrasonic operators shall be fully qualified, and
each weld shall be examined with sufficient probe angles to guarantee full coverage of
the joint.
(c)
The Contractor shall produce a test report for each weld joint or weld repair examined,
comprising:
a sketch of all flaws
the location and size of each flaw
dB level used
conclusions as to acceptance or rejection of the flaw with reference to these requirements
(d)
The Engineer-In-Charge along with the Contractor shall make an initial assessment of
defects against acceptance criteria. All ultrasonic reports including recommendations
shall be reviewed by the Engineer-In-Charge. Acceptance criteria shall be in accordance
with the approved standard. The standard on which the slag indication acceptability is
to be finally determined and this is to be agreed and confirmed prior to any ultrasonic
testing. When positive flaw type interpretations cannot be ascertained in any instance,
the flaw shall be considered planar and in need of repair.
Specifications
Page 86
Tender No: -1800000008
11.4. Assembly
Steel work shall be temporarily shop-erected completely or as directed by the Engineer-InCharge, so that the accuracy of fit may be checked before dispatch. Due notice shall be given
to the Engineer-In-Charge in all cases when the work is ready for inspection and the assembly
shall not be dismantled until it has been inspected and approved by the Engineer-In-Charge.
However, such approval shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for carrying out a
precise job in a workmanlike manner. The parts shall be assembled with a sufficient number
of parallel drifts to bring and keep the components in place. In the case of parts drilled or
punched through steel jigs with bushes resulting in similar parts being interchangeable for
portions of the steel work, trial assembly shall be carried out to the extent required by IS:
1915.
All steel work, which is bolted together, shall be in perfect contact over the whole surface. All
bearing stiffeners shall bear tightly at top and bottom without being drawn or caulked. When
two bolted surfaces are to be in permanent contact after assembly, each shall be thoroughly
scraped to remove loose scales, dirt, burrs and any foreign matter and cleaned and dried and a
coat of yellow zinc chromate or other approved primer paint shall be applied after cleaning and
drying. The surfaces shall be brought together while the paint is still wet.
Drilling done during assembly shall not distort the metal or enlarge the holes. Holes that must
be enlarged due to miss-matching shall be reamed. Poor matching of holes shall be cause for
rejection. Enlarging of holes with gas trench shall not be allowed. Enlargement of holes by gas
trench shall be cause for rejection.
Erection
All structural steel work shall be erected in accordance with IS: 800 and IS: 1915.
Detailed Scheme
The Contractor shall furnish a detailed scheme for erection of structural steel work for the
approval of the Engineer-In-Charge. Such scheme shall indicate the type, capacity and the
quality of equipment that the Contractor proposes to deploy for handling, hoisting and erecting
the steel work including staging, temporary bracing, guying etc. The scheme shall also
indicate the strength and trade-wise composition of the work force and supervising personnel
that the Contractor would deploy on the job.
The scheme shall be accompanied by a layout plan identifying the areas proposed for
unloading, main storage, subsidiary storage, assembly and the transportation of equipment
and fabricated materials between the storage and work areas. The layout shall clearly indicate
the points at which proposed erection begins, the directions in which it is proposed to
progress, the deployment of equipments etc. The locations and extent of site offices and
stores, labour quarters if any, layout of electrical cables and water pipes from the tap-off points
indicated on drawings shall also be indicted in detail on the above layout.
Any modifications to the erection programme directed by Engineer-In-Charge for the reasons of
inadequacy of the quality and/or capacity of the erection equipment, temporary bracing,
guying etc. or safety of the erection methods or stability of the erected portions of structures or
unsuitability of the erection sequence due to interference with the work of other shall be
incorporated by the Contractor and the work shall be carried out in accordance with the
revised programme. The approval by Engineer-In-Charge shall not relieve Contractor from his
responsibility for the safe, sound, accurate and timely erection of structural steel work as
required by the Engineer-In-Charge. The Contractor shall be deemed to have visualized all
erection problems prior to submission of bid documents for the work and no additional
compensation shall be claimed on this account.
The Contractor shall fully mobilize at site prior to the actual operation of erection commences
at site. Such mobilization shall include items like establishment of offices, stores, unloading
gantry / handling equipments, labour quarters if any, electrical and water connections,
Specifications
Page 87
Tender No: -1800000008
compressors, all tools and tackle, rivet guns, welding sets, torque wrenches, spud wrenches,
non-inflammable staging as a part of his contract and any other work that may be necessary to
start the erection work. The passageways, fences, safety belts, helmets, lights and other fittings
to be to the satisfaction of Engineer-In-Charge and to meet the rules of local authorities and for
protection of his men and materials. A licensed electrician shall be kept on the job for full
period to maintain the Contractor’s electrical equipment and connection.
The Contractor shall protect all existing plant structures, piping, conduits, equipment and
facilities against any damage during erection. Any damage caused by the Contractor shall be
rectified entirely at the Contractor’s cost to the satisfaction of Engineer-In-Charge.
When lifting and fitting steel work in position, care shall be taken that the parts thereof are not
strained, twisted, bent or damaged in any manner whatsoever. Should any part be strained,
twisted, bent or damaged, it shall be reinstated in a manner approved by the Engineer-InCharge by gentle heating & bending & not by hammering. Any parts that are badly damaged
shall be replaced with new materials at the Contractor’s expense.
No permanent bolting or welding shall be done until proper alignment has been obtained and
approved by the Engineer-In-Charge.
Any errors in the fabrication, which prevent the proper assembling and erection of the parts
with moderate amount of reaming, chipping or cutting is likely to render the steel work for
rejection unless corrective action, only if permitted by the Engineer-In-Charge, is taken. Any
expenditure involved in executing the corrective measures shall be borne by the Contractor.
All erection holes shall be plugged either by weld or bolts, nuts, washers shall be provided as
directed by the Engineer-In-Charge, without extra cost.
The Contractor shall be responsible for accurately positioning, levelling and plumbing of all
steel work and placing of every part of the structure in accordance with the approved
fabrications drawings to the entire satisfaction of Engineer-In-Charge.
Dispatch of materials stacking and handling
Each structural member either knocked down or a single composite each loose item (like
splices pack plates etc.) shall have “Mark number” painted on each item before it is dispatched
from the SHOP.
The Contractor shall deliver the fabricated steel work to the site as far as possible in the same
sequence as that which he wishes to allow for the erection. Dispatches should be scheduled to
avoid clustering up of the site.
Transportation
Loading & transportation shall be done in compliance with transportation rules. In case
certain parts can not be transported in the lengths stipulated in the drawings the position and
type of additional splice joints shall be got approved by the Engineer-In-Charge.
The bolts required for erection shall be bagged according to size prior to dispatch.
The Contractor shall ensure that steel work is not damaged due to careless or haphazard
stacking. The steel work shall be stacked at site in such a manner that it shall be free from
dirt, oil and other injurious elements and erection marks remain visible. Stacking shall, as far
as practicable be done in the sequence of erection but heavy members shall not be stacked on
top of light ones. Material shall also not be stacked in the vicinity of excavations for pits,
foundations etc. already done or proposed to be done.
Arrangement shall always be made at the time of handling to make sure that damage to steel
work is avoided. No dragging of steel shall be permitted.
Specifications
Page 88
Tender No: -1800000008
Scratched or abraded steel shall be given a coat of yellow zinc chromate primer prior to
erection. All milled and machined surfaces shall be properly protected from rust/corrosion by
suitable coating and also from getting damaged. In the event of damage due to improper
stacking and careless handling, the damaged piece will be rejected and shall be replaced by the
Contractor at his own expense.
Precautions
All operations connected with welding and cutting equipment shall conform to the safety
requirements and Health Provisions in Electric and Gas welding and cutting operations.
Safety & Security during erection
The Contractor is entirely responsible for the safety and stability of the structure during
erection.
The Contractor shall comply with IS: 7205 for necessary safety and adhere to safe erection
practices and guard against hazardous as well as unsafe working conditions during all stages
of erection.
During erection, the steel work shall be securely bolted or otherwise fastened and when
necessary temporarily braced/guyed till the completion including those due to the wind,
erection equipment and its operation etc. For the purpose of guying, the Contractor shall not
use other structure in the vicinity.
No permanent bolting or welding shall be done until proper alignment has been achieved.
Proper access, platform and safety arrangement shall be provided for working and inspection
(at no extra cost) whenever required.
Erection Clearance and Tolerances
Unless otherwise specified, the underside of base plates shall be within ±3 mm from the
elevations shown on the drawing. The lateral deviations of the base plates shall not exceed 5
mm from the theoretical centre line.
Maximum permissible erection tolerance
A)
Columns
1
2
3
Deviation of column axes at foundation top
level with respect to true axes.
i)
In longitudinal direction
ii)
In lateral direction
Deviation in the level of bearing surface of
columns at foundation top with respect to
true level
Out of plumbness (verticality) of column axis
from true vertical axis as measured at top
i) Upto and including 30 m. height
ii) Over 30 m. height
4
5
Specifications
Deviation in straightness in longitudinal &
transverse planes of column at any point
along the height.
Difference in the erection positions of
adjacent pairs of columns along length or
± 5 mm
± 5 mm
± 5 mm
± H or ± 25
1000
whichever is
± H or ± 35
1200
whichever is
± H or ± 10
1000
whichever is
± 5 mm
mm
less
mm
less
mm
less
Page 89
Tender No: -1800000008
6
7
B)
± 5 mm
± 5 mm
Trusses
1
Shift at the centre of span of top chord
member with respect to the vertical plane
passing through the centre of bottom
chord.
2
Lateral shift of top chord of truss at the
centre of span from the vertical plane
passing through the centre of supports of
the truss.
3
Lateral shift in location of truss from its
true vertical position.
Lateral shift in location of purlin from true
position.
Deviation in difference of bearing levels of
truss from the true difference.
4
5
C)
across width of building prior to connecting
trusses/beams with respect to true distance.
Deviation in any bearing or seating level with
respect to true level.
Deviation in difference in bearing levels of a
member on adjacent pair of columns both
across and along the building.
Note 1 : Tolerance specified under 3 should
be read in conjunction with 4 & 5
Notes 2 : ‘H’ is the column height in mms
± 1 of height of
250
truss in mm. at
centre of span or ±
15 mm whichever is
less.
± 1 of span of
1500
truss in mm. or ± 10
mm whichever is
less.
± 10 mm
± 5 mm
± 1 of span of
1200
truss in mm or ± 20
mm whichever is
less.
Gantry girders and rails
1
2
3
4
5
6
Specifications
Shift in the centre line of crane rail with
respect to centre line of web of gantry
girder.
Shift of alignment of crane rail (in plan)
with respect to true axis of crane rail at
any point.
Deviation in crane track gauge with
respect to true gauge.
i) For track gauge upto & including 15
mm
ii) For track gauge more than 15 mm
± (Web thickness of
girder(mm) ± 2mm)
± 5 mm
± 5 mm
±
(5+0.25
(S-15)
subject to maximum
± 10 mm where S in
metres
is
true
gauge.
Deviation in the crane rail level at any ± 10 mm
point from true level.
Difference in levels between crane track
rails (across the bay) at
i) Supports of gantry girders.
15 mm
ii) Mid span of gantry girders.
20 mm
Relative shift of crane rail surfaces (at a 2 mm
joining) in plan and elevation.
Page 90
Tender No: -1800000008
Alignment of individual beams, girders etc. shall not deviate more than ±5 mm from the
location given on the drawings.
The actual levels of trusses, collar beams, roofing beams, purlins etc. shall not vary more than
20mm. from their marked levels. The sweep of trusses, beams etc. in the horizontal plane shall
not exceed 1/1500 of their span, subject to a maximum of 10mm. The deviation of the upper
chords of trusses from vertical plane through centres of supports shall be within 1/250th of the
truss height. Deviation in spacing of purlins shall be within 5mm.
For Crane rail alignment, the maximum vertical and horizontal deviations permitted shall be ±
2 mm gauge variation shall also be ± 2 mm.
Anchor Bolts & Foundations
The holding down and anchor bolts shall conform to the requirements laid down in IS : 5624 or
as directed by Engineer-In-Charge. The Contractor shall carefully check the location and
layout of anchor bolts / HD bolts embedded in foundations constructed to ensure that the
structures can be properly erected as shown on the drawings. Any discrepancy in the anchor
bolts/foundations shall be reported to the Engineer-In-Charge.
All tolerance shall be as per IS : 7215 unless stated otherwise.
Anchor bolts / HD bolts may be provided with three nuts on upper threaded portion, one of
which may be used for levelling the column base to the required elevation and one will be a
lock nut. All shims shall be supplied by the Contractor at his own cost.
During casting of concrete Contractor shall ensure that space between the bolts or bolts and
sleeves is kept clean after removal of shuttering. Contractor shall fix timber plugs to maintain
this space in a clean condition. The projecting threads of bolts shall be protected by approved
wrapping materials. A certain amount of cleaning of foundations and preparing the area is
considered normal and shall be carried out by the Contractor at no extra cost.
Grouting under base plates
Grouting shall be done after erection and making proper alignment of the structural steel,
unless otherwise approved by the Engineer-In-Charge. The Contractor shall furnish all
shims/pack plates/wedges etc. and level all base plates to the proper elevations as shown on
the fabrication drawings before grouting as specified.
Contractor shall keep holes on the stanchion bases for escape of air. Unless specified the grout
to be used in bases shall be proportioned to 1:2 cement / sand along with non-shrinkage
agents of approved quality and dosage as recommended by the manufacturers & as approved
by Engineer-In-Charge & shall have a 28 days compressive strength of at least 300 kg/sq.cm.
The grout mixture shall be poured continuously (without any interruption till completion) by
grouting pumps from one side of the base plate. The pedestal/column surfaces, which are to
receive the grout shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dirt, mud, water, oil or other extraneous
matter using compressed air immediately prior to the grouting operation. The grout shall be
carefully worked under the base plates and shall completely fill the space between the
underside of the base plate and the concrete pedestal including voids around anchor bolts. If
the bolt sleeves have been provided for the flexible positioning of bolts, neat cement grout of
heavy consistency along with non shrink additives of approved make shall be poured in the
sleeves so as to completely fill the sleeve hole. After the grout has had its initial set, the grout
shall be cut back flush with the base plate and the surplus grout shall be removed. Before
leaving the site, the Contractor shall re-tighten the nuts of all anchor bolts / H.D. bolts. The
alignment of the structure shall now be rechecked and if found correct, the voids left by
removal of shims/wedges/pack plates (if removed) shall be filled up with the same grout. If
serious misalignment is found after checking the alignment, the grout shall be removed
Specifications
Page 91
Tender No: -1800000008
completely and fresh grouting to be done as explained above after carrying out appropriate
corrections to the alignment. All the form work should be made water tight to prevent the
leakage from the joints.
11.5. Painting
Painting work shall be carried out in accordance with IS: 8629 (Parts I to III)
All preparation, priming and painting, in colours selected by the Employer, shall be deemed
to be included in the Contract price.
Painting shall generally be in accordance with IS : 1477
All items of equipment shall be suitably protected and packed to resist corrosion and impact
damage.
Machined surfaces are to be treated with a proprietary sealing agent for
transportation and storage.
Paint materials shall be in accordance with the appropriate Indian Standard and shall be
obtained from approved manufacturers and applied in accordance with the manufacturers'
instructions or as ordered by the Engineer-In-Charge. All materials shall be delivered to
the Site in sealed and labelled containers.
The paint for each coat shall be from the same manufacturer, compatible with the underlying
coat and shall be a different colour for ease of identification.
Particular regard shall be paid to the maintenance of the recommended temperature and
humidity during application and curing. Painted steelwork shall not be over coated or
handled until the recommended curing period has elapsed. No finished paint coating will
be accepted until the specified dry film thickness has been achieved to the entire surface
including edges.
All steel surfaces shall be completely dry and free from oil and grease and all welds ground
smooth and weld spatter removed. All fins at saw cuts, burrs and sharp edges shall be
removed, and the edges shall be rounded off.
For all painted items, the Contractor shall submit for approval a `Paint System Sheet' stating
full details of each paint system proposed indicating the following information, with reference
to IS : 1477
surface preparation
system reference together with manufacturer's brand name and product reference
dry film thickness
colour
time to repaint
−
−
−
−
−
Items to be painted
All structural steel work and metals including floor plates, floor gratings, stair treads, hand
rails, brackets and steel inserts shall be painted except if otherwise specified.
No black bolts, nuts, washers and welds shall be painted before assembly or erection and
approved by Engineer-In-Charge. They shall be thoroughly cleaned and dipped into boiling
linseed oil and after erection, painted as specified herein.
Standard
The operations, workmanship, schedules and equipment for painting shall be generally comply
with the requirement to IS: 1477 (Parts I & II) “Code of Practice for Finishing of Iron and Steel
in Building – Painting and Allied Finishes”.
Specifications
Page 92
Tender No: -1800000008
All painting shall be carried out by brushing, spraying and roller application of paint shall not
be allowed without the written permission of the Engineer-In-Charge.
No painting shall commence until the cleaned surfaces are approved by the Engineer-InCharge.
No exterior or exposed painting shall be carried out under adverse weather conditions such as
rain, extreme humidity, dust storms etc.
Shop Painting
After inspection of the fabricated work and before leaving the shop, all steel work shall be
thoroughly cleaned by approved means to remove all rust, loose mill scales, drift and other
foreign material by hand tool cleaning, power tool cleaning, frame cleaning or sand blasting as
found appropriate and approved by Engineer-In-Charge. Greasy and oily surfaces shall be
cleaned with solvent and dry rags. Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall not flame,
clean or pickle the steel work prior to painting. Painting shall generally be done immediately
after the cleaning and to thorough dry surfaces as per IS: 1477.
All steel work shall be given one shop coat of approved metal primer as specified unless
otherwise it shall be yellow Zinc Chromate primer conforming to IS: 2074 in two coats and
shall be applied before any member of steel structure are placed on position or taken out of
workshop. A primer coat shall be applied thoroughly and evenly and well worked into joints
and other open spaces in order to ensure a continuous and uniform film without ‘holidaying’.
The primer coat shall be air dried and shall have a minimum thickness of 25 microns
(tolerance ± 10 % after drying), unless specified.
Surfaces which are inaccessible or not easily accessible after shop assembly shall receive the
full specified protective treatment before assembly (This shall not apply to the interior of
tube/pipe sealed hollow sections).
All rivets, bolts (except high strength bolts), nuts, washers etc. shall be thoroughly cleaned and
dipped in boiled linseed oil.
Parts to be encased in concrete and edges and surface areas adjacent to edges to be fieldwelded shall be thoroughly cleaned but shall not be painted or oiled.
Parts inaccessible after assembly shall be given two coats of shop paints of approved epoxy
paint of approved shades, unless specified..
Machine finished surfaces shall be protected against corrosion by a suitable coating.
Where galvanized surfaces are to be painted, they shall be cleaned and washed with a solution
of copper sulphate before the application of the first coat of primer.
Steel surfaces shall not be painted within a suitable distance of any edges to be welded if the
paint specified would turn out to be harmful to welders or impair the quality of the welds.
Welds and adjacent parent metal shall not be painted prior to dislagging inspection and
approval by Engineer-In-Charge.
Site Painting
After erection, the whole of the steel work shall be thoroughly cleaned and all dirt, marks,
grease overspills of primer paint and other foreign matter shall be removed by hand, cleaning
tool (power tool cleaning) using compressed water jet etc. Areas, where the shop coat has
suffered damage or deterioration, shall be cut back and repainted with primer in the same
manner as in the shop. All exposed surfaces of metal bolt heads and connections left
unpainted in the shop shall be similarly treated. After this preliminary work of making good
has been approved by the Engineer-In-Charge, all surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and
Specifications
Page 93
Tender No: -1800000008
when dry two finishing coats of approved paint shall be applied. Each coat shall be allowed to
dry and harden thoroughly before the next coat is applied. The paint manufacturer’s
instructions shall be followed strictly. Also proper attention shall be paid to the following:
•
•
•
•
Proper storage to avoid exposure and extremes of temperature
Surface preparation prior to painting.
Mixing and thinning.
Application of paint and the recommended limit on time intervals between consecutive
coats.
Primers and finish coat paints shall be from the same manufacture in order to ensure
compatibility. Unless specified and approved, painting colour code shall be tentatively as
follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Gantry girders and monorail
Gantry girder and monorail stopper
Building structural steel – columns,
brackets, beams, bracings, roof truss,
purlins, side girths, louvers, stringers
Pipe rack structure and trestle
Chequered plate (plain face)
Grating
Ladder
Hand railing Hand rail middle rail toe
plate
Vertical post
Dark green
Signal red
Dark admiralty grey
Dark admiralty grey
Black
Black
Rungs – black
Vertical and cage red
Signal red
Black
Rub down and primer application
The shop coated surfaces shall be rubbed down thoroughly with emery/abrasive paper to
remove dust, rust, other foreign matters and degreased, if required, in accordance with IS:
1477, cleaned with warm fresh water and air dried. The portions, from where the shop coat
has peeled off, shall be touched up and allowed to dry. Primer coat of yellow zinc chromate
primer (conforming to IS: 2074) shall be applied by brushing/spraying in a manner so as to
ensure a continuous and uniform film throughout. Special care shall be taken to cover all the
crevices, corners, edges etc. The each primer coat shall be air dried and shall have a minimum
film thickness of 25 microns (tolerance ± 10 % ) after drying, unless specified.
Final paint application
After the primer is dry, the surfaces shall be dusted off and one coat of synthetic enamel paint
of approved colour and shade (conforming to IS: 2932) shall be applied by brushing/spraying
so that a film free from “holidaying” is obtained. The colour and shade of first coat of paint
shall be slightly lighter than the second coat in order to identify the application of each coat.
The second coat of paint shall be applied after the first coat is hard dry. The minimum
thickness of each film shall be 20 microns (± 10 % tolerance) after drying, unless specified.
Inspection & testing of painting material
All painting materials including primer and thinners brought to site by the Contractor for
application shall be procured directly form reputed and approved manufacturers as per
specifications and shall be accompanied by manufacturer’s test certificates. Paint formulations
without certificates shall not be accepted.
Guarantee
The Contractor shall guarantee that the chemical & physical properties of paint materials used
are in accordance with the requisite specifications.
Specifications
Page 94
Tender No: -1800000008
11.6. Mode of Measurement
Generally Structural steel painting is included in structural steel fabrication work. If specified
separately the same will be measured as per IS 1200.
11.7. Rate
As specified in structural steel work.
11.8. M.S. land ties
General
All general specifications shall be as described under –Steel work specifications.
Materials
Structural steel work for fabrication of items shall comply with IS : 2062, Grade A.
All bolts and nuts shall comply with I.S. 1367, for Mild steel, high tensile steel structural
quality and high tensile steel special quality bolts, and nuts shall comply with the provisions of
Clause 3.5 of I.S. 800.
When bolt heads or nuts bear upon bevelled surfaces they shall be provided with square
tapered washers to afford seating for the nut square with the axis of the bolt.
All nuts and bolts specified on the Drawings shall be to the required size with correct threaded
length, and be supplied with matching nuts and washers also of the same material, except
where electrolytic action is to be avoided.
Where small parts such as bolts and nuts etc. are to be sherries, they shall be treated to
receive a coating of finished thickness not less than 30 microns.
Where bolts, nuts and washers etc. are to be hot dip galvanised, they shall be treated to receive
a finished thickness of zinc coating of not less than 80 microns thickness.
Fabrication and Laying / Fixing in position
Fabrication and laying, fixing in position of land ties shall be done strictly as per the approved
fabrication drawings subject to approval of Engineer-In-Charge.
Workmanship
It shall be of the highest quality in relation to the class of work. Care shall be taken in all
preparation of the work, the selection of the finest materials and in the employment of fully
qualified and tested workmen.
Painting
Exposed / top surface of land ties shall have 2 coats of zinc chromate primer coats (50 micron
DFT each), unless specified, embedded portion shall not be painted.
Measurement
Mode of measurement shall be actual structural member fixed in place and measured in
running metres correct to a millimetre in case of channels / beams / angels cleats, etc while
MS plates shall be measured in square meter nearest to two place of decimal and weights
calculated on the basis of Bureau of Indian Standard’s Structural Engineer’s Handbook No. 1
latest issue correct to the nearest kilogram.
Specifications
Page 95
Tender No: -1800000008
a) Unless otherwise specified, weight of cleats, brackets, placing pieces, bolts, nuts, washers,
distance pieces, separators, diaphragm gussets, fish plates, etc. shall be added to the
weight of respective items.
b) No deductions shall be made for rivet / or bolt holes paints or finishes.
c) The weight of steel sheets, plates and strips shall be taken from relevant Indian Standards.
For rolled sections, steel rods and steel strips, weight given in relevant Indian Standards
shall be used.
d) Unless other wise specified weight of welding material shall not be added in the weight of
members for payment and nothing extra shall be paid for making and filling holes for
temporary fastening of members during erection before welding.
Rate
Rate includes the cost of labour, materials, handling, cutting, welding etc, use of equipments
for all the operations, as described above including painting as described above.
11.9. CRS steel in crane rail with clamps
Materials
Rails shall comply with the specification of IS : 3443 - 1966.
Rails shall be free from all paint, oil, grease, dirt, loose rust and loose mill scale. Rail clamps
shall be adjustable type rubber nosed crane rail clamps shall be used in accordance with the
supplier’s recommendations or as specified.
Fixing
The rail shall be laid straight and levelled to the requirements as per specifications. The
location of rail on girders shall be such that the centre line of the rail is aligned on a vertical
plane with centre line of web of girder within a tolerance of half the thickness of the girder web.
If tighter tolerances are required the alignment of the girder should be corrected to bring the
position of the rail within the tolerances limit.
Tolerances
Tolerances of ± 1mm in 2 metres, cumulative to 5m and ± 3mm over the track span. All these
shall be with respect to approved datum line.
Joint Assembly
All joints shall be assembled on site and held together by the clipping of track to the rail
support. The rail clamps should have 2 bolt each and shall be provided at 500mm c/c unless
specified. Rail joint should have fish plate, as per standard good Engineering practices.
Painting
The rails shall be sand blasted and given one coat of epoxy primer with 25 micron DFT (Dry
Film Thickness), unless specified. The top surface of rail head shall not be painted.
Measurement
The rail shall be measured for actual fixed length and measured correct nearest to centimetre
(cm.)
Rate
Specifications
Page 96
Tender No: -1800000008
Rate shall be for supply and fixing in position and involved all operations, material, labour,
testing, etc. No separate payment shall be made for clamps, fittings and fixtures, etc.
11.10.
i)
Structural steel work in motorized doors
Horizontal moving panel sliding door
Materials
Structural steel shall be as described under-Steel work specifications.
Fabrication and Erection
Fabrication and erection shall be as described under –Steel work specifications and in
accordance with approved fabrication drawing.
Moving Panel
The horizontal moving panel of the door shall be suspended from 2 Nos. ‘4’ wheel trolleys,
unless specified. The trolley shall have single flanged wheels capable of moving on bottom
flange of rolled steel beam. The size of beam will be ISMB 200 to ISMB 400 unless otherwise
shown on the drawing or specified elsewhere.
One of the trolleys shall have all the ‘ 4 ‘ wheels driven by Electric motor through gear
reduction to get travel speed of ‘ 8 to 10 ‘ mtrs. per min. the other trolley shall be idler /
follower type.
Panel of the trolley drive motor shall be wall mounted with pushbuttons for selecting the
direction of movement e.g. open / close. These pushbuttons shall have identification on it. In
case of ‘2’ panel door the control panel shall be one for both the motors with separate switches
for moving the door panels.
Limit switches to avoid excess travel shall control the travel of door. The travel motor shall
have DC disc brake to stop the travel in case of power shutoff. The drive shall have facility for
manual operation in case of power failure.
Power supply to the travel drive motor shall be through festoon cable arrangement depending
upon travel distance.
Painting
Doors shall be sand blasted and primer coat and final coat shall be as specified in the item
described and in accordance with specifications as described under –Steel work specifications.
Measurement
Mode of measurement shall be actual structural member fixed in place and measured in
running metres correct to a millimetre in case of channels / beams / channels / angels, etc
while MS plates shall be measured in square meter nearest to two place of decimal and weights
calculated on the basis of Bureau of Indian Standard’s Structural Engineer’s Handbook No. 1
latest issue correct to the nearest kilogram.
Mechanical equipment and accessories such as wheels, motors, brakes, electrical supply,
power, etc. shall be measured and paid separately as described under Section – Cranes &
Rails.
a) Unless otherwise specified, weight of cleats, brackets, placing pieces, bolts, nuts, washers,
distance pieces, separators, diaphragm gussets, fish plates, etc. shall be added to the
weight of respective items.
Specifications
Page 97
Tender No: -1800000008
b) No deductions shall be made for rivet / or bolt holes paints or finishes.
c) The weight of steel sheets, plates and strips shall be taken from relevant Indian Standards.
For rolled sections, steel rods and steel strips, weight given in relevant Indian Standards
shall be used.
d) Unless other wise specified weight of welding material shall not be added in the weight of
members for payment and nothing extra shall be paid for making and filling holes for
temporary fastening of members during erection before welding.
Rate
Rate includes the cost of labour, materials, use of equipments for all the operations, as
described above including painting as described above but excluding mechanical / electrical
equipment and mechanical / electrical accessories, which shall be measured and paid
separately.
ii)
Vertical Rolling Steel shutters
Materials
Structural steel shall be as described under- Steel work specifications.
Fabrication and Erection
Specifications for fabrication and erection of sliding doors shall be generally as described
under- Horizontal moving panel sliding doors specifications.
Vertical Rolling Shutter
The drive for rolling shutter shall be through worm / bevel reduction gear. This will have
facility for manual operation in case of power failure. The manual operation shall be done from
floor level. Universal coupling only shall be used to connect gearbox output shaft with rolling
shutter pipe. Other coupling between motor and gearbox can be of geared type.
Limit switches shall be provided to control the open / close positions of shutter.
Tolerances
Tolerance shall be as described under – Assembly of steel work specifications.
Painting
Painting shall be as described under- Horizontal moving panel sliding door specifications.
11.11.
M.S. sag rods with necessary threading
Materials
a) Sag rods shall be made up from mild steel rounds conforming to IS : 432 – Grade I
b) Nuts and lock nuts (hexagonal type) shall be of Grade B as per IS : 1367 and IS : 3138
c) Punched washers shall be of mild steel as per IS : 226 and confirm to IS : 2016
Fabrication
Specifications
Page 98
Tender No: -1800000008
Fabrication of sag rods and their complete assemblies shall be strictly in compliance with the
specifications & drawings / standards. Threads to sag rods shall confirm to IS : 4218
Placement
Sag rod assemblies shall be placed in position strictly as per drawings. The holes for sag rods
and cleat bolts of appropriate size shall be drilled and all members / components shall be
given distinct erection marks in accordance with the marking drawings. Holes shall not be
formed by gas cutting process.
Tolerances
Tolerances in length allowed for sag rods shall allowed within ± 2mm
Galvanising
All hot dip galvanising shall be in accordance with I.S. 802 - Part 2.
Before galvanising, all components shall be grit blasted to give a clean roughened surface as a
pre-treatment.
The minimum thickness of coating shall be 1000 grams per square metre, unless specified,
and shall be measured in accordance with I.S 802 - Part2.
Samples of galvanised steelwork shall be tested at the galvaniser's works prior to despatch to
ensure compliance with the coating requirements.
The items to be galvanised are included in the Drawings or otherwise as directed by the
Engineer-In-Charge.
Measurement
The sag rods as fixed in place shall be measured in running metres correct to a centimetre and
their weights calculated on the basis of Bureau of Indian Standard’s Structural Engineer’s
Handbook No. 1 latest issue correct to the nearest kilogram unless otherwise specified. Weight
of nuts, washers, shall be added unless otherwise specified.
Rate
The rate shall include the cost of labour and material involved in the operations described
above including galvanising conforming to the specification as described above and as
applicable.
11.12.
CRS steel in track work
Specifications shall be as described under Section- 9000: Track work under relevant clauses
as applicable for this item of work.
11.13.
MS Anchor bolts
Materials
Anchor bolts shall be tuned from plain mild steel rounds conforming to IS : 432 Grade I.
Nuts and lock nuts (hexagonal type) shall be of grade ‘B’ as per IS : 1367 and conform to IS :
1363 and IS : 3138
Punched washers shall be of mild steel as per IS : 226 and conform to IS : 2016.
Specifications
Page 99
Tender No: -1800000008
Pipe sleeves shall be of mild steel tubes (medium duty) conforming to IS : 1239
Anchor plates and ribs shall conform to IS : 226
Fabrication
Fabrication of anchor bolts (diameter and length as specified in the item description) and their
complete assembles shall be strictly in compliance with the specifications and drawings /
standards. Anchor bolts shall have coarse type threads conforming to IS : 4218.
Placement
Anchor bolt assemblies shall be placed in position strictly as per drawings and securely held
during pouring and vibrating of concrete with necessary templates and other dummy
structures to prevent their dislocation.
Tolerances
Tolerances allowed for anchor bolts positioning shall be :
a) For sleeved bolts, one tenth of the bolt nominal diameter.
b) For bolts without sleeves, one twentieth of the bolt nominal diameter.
Protection
The exposed surface of bolts shall be properly covered (after greasing of bolts and packing of
sleeves) with jute cloth so as to protect them from damage.
Measurement
Anchor bolt shall be measured on the basis of actual weight in metric tons of the anchor bolt
assembly correct upto two decimal.
Rate
The rate shall include supply of all material and labour involved in above operations including
handling, transporting, fixing in position, welding if required, providing necessary templates,
greasing, packing of sleeves, covering with jute cloth etc. all complete.
11.14.
M.S. foundation bolt
Specifications for M.S. foundation bolt shall be generally as described under –MS Anchor bolt
specifications.
11.15.
M.S. Inserts
Materials
Metal inserts shall be of mild steel conforming to IS : 226 and IS : 2062
Lugs shall be of either mild steel bars / flats.
Mild steel rounds shall conform to IS : 432 (Grade I)
High yield deformed bars shall conform to IS : 1786
Mild steel flats shall conform to IS : 226
Specifications
Page 100
Tender No: -1800000008
Fabrication
Fabrication of inserts shall be done strictly as per drawings / standards and in compliance
with the requirements given in relevant specifications.
Placement
Metal inserts shall be correctly embedded (in plain concrete / reinforced concrete and masonry
works) as per their location shown in the drawings. Care shall be taken that these are securely
held in position and do not get disturbed during concreting. Where necessary, these may be
welded to the reinforcement bars. Suitable templates, spacers, dummy structures and
temporary staging shall be provided. Necessary cutting in the formwork and adjustment of
reinforcement bars shall be affected for the placement of metal inserts where required.
Painting
The exposed surfaces of inserts shall be cleaned (all the surfaces) with wire brush and
application of two coats of yellow zinc chromate primer on the plain surface after fabrication
conforming to IS: 2074 shall be given as described under- Steel work specifications.
Measurement
MS inserts shall be measured on the basis of actual weight in metric tones of the metal inserts
correct upto two decimal.
Rate
The rate shall include supply of all materials handling, transporting, fabrication, welding,
fixing in position, providing necessary templates, spacers, dummy structures, adjusting the
formwork & reinforcement, staging, applying two coat of yellow zinc chromate primer, etc. all
complete.
11.16.
M.S. Chequered Plate
Materials
Chequered plates shall be of mild steel (Grade I unless otherwise specified) and conforming to
IS: 3502.
Shop Drawings
Shop drawings shall be prepared by the Contractor on the basis of “Approved for Construction”
(AFC) design / drawing issued to the Contractor.
Fabrication
Chequered plates shall be fabricated as per the “Approved for Construction” Shop drawings
(prepared by the Contractor based on design drawings and duly approved by Engineer-InCharge). These shall be perfectly flat and without any dents / deformations and shall be cut to
the required size and shape. Holes / notches / openings of the required size, if any shown in
the drawings shall be made. If used for
staircase treads, nosing shall be made by cold
bending of chequered plates. All edges shall be made smooth and even. All chequered plate
units shall be given distinct erection marks in accordance with the marking drawings.
Erection / Fixing
Chequered plates shall be fixed to the bearing members by welding / bolting / screwing as
shown in the drawings.
Painting
Specifications
Page 101
Tender No: -1800000008
Chequered plates shall be cleaned (both side ) with wire brush and shall be given unless
otherwise specified in the item description two coats of yellow zinc chromate primer on the
plain surface after fabrication conforming to IS:2074 and specifications as described under –
Steel work specifications.
Measurement
Measurement shall be made on the basis of admissible weight in metric tons of the chequered
plates accepted by the Engineer-In-Charge. The weight shall be calculated on the basis of IS
Hand Book. No allowance in weight shall be made for rolling tolerances.
Rate
The rate shall include supplying, fabricating, erecting M.S. chequered plate including
transporting, handling, straightening, if required, cutting to required size and shape, making
holes / notches / opening of required size and nosing, smoothening the edges, fixing by
welding / bolting / screwing, preparing detailed fabrication drawings, surface cleaning,
removal of rust, scale, grease and applying two coat of yellow zinc chromate primer etc. all
complete as specified.
11.17.
M.S. Gratings
Categories
Category ‘A’ : Fabricated by the Contractor as per
design drawings / standards.
Category ‘B’ : Ready made bought out from an
approved manufacturer.
Material
Gratings shall be of mild steel flats with mild steel rounds as per detailed drawings forwarded
to Contractor.
Mild steel flats shall conform to IS: 226
Mild steel rounds shall conform to IS: 432 - Grade I
Fabrication Drawings
Fabrication and erection drawings shall be prepared by the Contractor on the basis of
“Approved for Construction” (AFC) design drawing issued to the Contractor. These drawings
shall be prepared by Contractor or by an agency approved by the Engineer-In-Charge.
Fabrication of Category ‘A’ Gratings
These shall be fabricated strictly as per the “Approved for Construction” fabrication drawings
prepared by the Contractor based on design drawings and standards. All units shall be given
distinct erection marks in accordance with the marking drawing.
Fabrication of Category ‘B’ Gratings
These shall be as per manufacturer’s details designed to carry loads as specified in the design
drawing supplied to the contractor. The deflection shall not exceed span / 200 or 6mm
whichever is minimum. The maximum clear size of voids in the grating be limited to 30mm x
55mm. The contractor shall make necessary notches / opening in the gratings as shown in
the drawings. All edges affected by such notches / openings shall be suitably stiffened by
welding additional flats of the requisite size. All units shall be given distinct erection marks in
Specifications
Page 102
Tender No: -1800000008
accordance with the marking drawings. Before procurement the contractor shall submit the
design calculations, drawings and manufacturer’s literature / catalogues and get the same
approved by the Engineer-In-Charge.
Erection / Fixing
Gratings shall be fixed to the bearing members by welding / clamping / bolting as indicated in
the drawings.
Painting
MS inserts shall be cleaned (both the surfaces) with wire brush and given two coats of yellow
zinc chromate primer on the plain surface after fabrication conforming to IS:2074 and
specifications as described under above under –Steel work specifications.
Measurement
Payment shall be made on the basis of admissible weight in metric tons of the gratings
accepted by the Engineer-In-Charge. The weight shall be calculated on the basis of IS Hand
Book. Manufacturer’s catalogues / charts shall be adopted in case of gratings of category ‘B’.
No allowance in weight shall be made for rolling tolerances
Rate
The rate shall include supplying, fabricating, erecting MS gratings (of the specified category)
including transporting, handling, cutting to required size and shape, making holes/notches /
opening of required size and nosing, smoothening the edges, fixing by welding / bolting /
screwing, preparing detailed fabrication drawings, surface cleaning, removal of rust, scale,
grease and applying two coats of yellow zinc chromate primer etc. all complete as specified.
11.18.
M.S. Tubular Hand Railing
Material
M.S. tubes for hand railing shall be 25mm and 32 mm nominal diameter, unless specified of
mild steel medium grade conforming to IS : 1239, vertical rolled steel angles etc. confirming to
IS-808 .
Toe/Base plates shall be of mild steel conforming to IS: 226
Fabrication Drawings
Fabrication and erection drawings shall be prepared by the Contractor on the basis of
“Approved for Construction” (AFC) design drawing issued to the Contractor. These drawings
shall be prepared by Contractor or by an agency approved by the Engineer-In-Charge.
Fabrication
Hand railing shall be fabricated strictly as per the “Approved for Construction” fabrication
drawings prepared by the Contractor based on design drawings and standards. All tubes shall
be straight and without any dents / deformations. Tubes shall be cut and ends shall be
prepared to a neat and workman like finish. All elements shall be directly welded. Tubes shall
be cold bent to shape and curvature in case of discontinuous ends of handrails. Lower ends of
vertical posts shall be cut and splayed (for grouting in pockets provided in the concrete
members). For removable type of hand railing, suitable base plates (with provision for bolting)
shall be welded to the lower end of vertical posts.
Erection / Fixing
Hand railing shall be fixed to the bearing members by welding / bolting / grouting as indicated
in the drawings or as directed by the Engineer-In-Charge.
Specifications
Page 103
Tender No: -1800000008
Painting
MS tubes shall be cleaned (both the surfaces) with wire brush and given two coats of yellow
zinc chromate primer on the plain surface after fabrication conforming to IS:2074 and 2 coats
of approved synthetic enamel paint as per specifications described under-Steel work
specifications.
Measurement
Actual length of structural steel tubes/ angles etc. fixed in place for railing as per design shall
measured in running metres correct to a millimetre ,while M.S. Plates shall be measured in
square meter nearest to two decimals and weights shall be calculated on the basis of Bureau
of Indian Standard’s Structural Engineer’s Handbook No. 1 latest issue correct to the nearest
kilogram.
Rate
The rate shall include preparation of fabrication drawings, supply of all materials handling,
transporting, straightening if required, cutting to required size, bending, welding, bolting,
grouting, surface cleaning, removal of rust, scale, grease and applying two coat of yellow zinc
chromate primer after fabrication etc. all complete as specified.
11.19.
Non Shrink High strength Grout
Materials
Grouting shall be carried out with ordinary cement in the proportion of (1:2) with nonshrinkage grouts of approved manufacturers dosage as recommended by the manufacturer
and approved by the Engineer-In-Charge. Cement and aggregate shall be as described under –
Mortars specifications.
Non-shrinkage high strength grout shall be of M/s. MC-Bauchemie (I) Pvt. Ltd., M/s.
FOSROCK, M/s. ROFEE, etc. or other approved equivalent .The dosage, proportions and
mixing procedures as per manufacturers details subject to Engineer-In-Charge’s approval. The
compressive strength after 28 days shall be at least 300 Kg./Sq.cm.
Grouting shall be done after erection and making proper alignment of the structural steel,
unless otherwise approved by the Engineer-In-Charge. The surface which are to receive the
grout shall be thoroughly cleaned using compressed air immediately prior to the grouting
operations. The grout mixture shall be poured continuously by grouting pumps from one side
of the base plate. The grout shall be carefully worked under the base plates and shall
completely fill the space between the under side of the plates and concrete pedestal including
voids around anchor bolts.
The procedure for laying grout shall be strictly as per
manufacturer’s procedure under expert’s supervision taking care to avoid air locks. Edges shall
be finished properly. After the grout has its initial set, the grout shall be removed.
Measurement
The grout laid in place shall be measured in Kilograms nearest to the two decimal.
Rate
The rate shall include the cost of all material and labour involved in all the operations
described above.
11.20.
M.S. Steel Rolling Shutters
Material
Specifications
Page 104
Tender No: -1800000008
Rolling shutters shall be of specified design and sizes and procured from approved
manufacturers conforming to IS 6248,
Unless otherwise specified, rolling shutter
shall be in 18 g. MS sheets and shall have 75 mm. Machine rolled lathes, interlocked with
each other and ends locked with clips.
shall have side guides of pressed steel channel 75 mm. Deep and 25mm wide fixed with
necessary hold fasts etc.,
shall be complete with necessary side guide brackets, suspension shafts, top rolling
springs, locking haps and staples on both sides with the bottom lock plates, handles, top
hood cover of 20 g. MS sheet with necessary stiffeners and frame work to prevent sagging.
shall be complete with pulling hooks, gear mechanism, gear handles
Lock plate must be of minimum 3.15 m. thickness with MS angle section of not less than
33 x 35 x 5 mm. at bottom.
Fixing
The arrangement for fixing in different situations in the opening shall be as per IS:6248 .
Brackets shall be fixed on the lintel or under the lintel as specified with rawl, plugs and screws
bolts, etc. The shaft along with the spring shall then be fixed on the brackets. The lap portion
(shutter) shall be laid on ground and the side guide channels shall be bound with ropes etc.
The shutters shall then be placed in position and top fixed with pipe shaft with bolts and nuts.
The side guide channels and cover frames shall then be fixed to the walls through the plate
welded to the guides. These plates and brackets shall be fixed by means of steel screws bolts,
and rawl plugs concealed in plaster to make their location invisible. Fixing shall be done
accurately in a workman like manner that the operation of the shutter is easy and smooth.
Rolling shutter shall be of approved manufacture suitable for fixing in the position ordered i.e.,
outside, inside, on or below lintel or between Jambs. Shutters upto 12 sq.m. (130 Sq m. ft.)
in area shall be manually operated or “Push up” type while bigger sizes shall be of reduction
gear type mechanically operated by chain or handles.
These shall consist of an 18 gauge sheet or as specified with 75 mm (3”) M.S. laths of best
quality mild steel strip machine rolled and straightened with an effective bridge depth of 16
mm. (5/8”) and shall have convex corrugation. These shall be interlocked together throughout
their entire length with end locks. These shall be mounted on specially designed pipe shaft.
The springs shall be of approved make coiled type. These shall be manufactured from tested
high tensile spring steel wire or strip of adequate strength to balance the shutters in position.
The spring pipe shaft etc. shall be supported on strong M.S. or malleable cast iron brackets.
Top cover of shaft, spring etc. shall be of the same material as that of lath.
Both the side guides and bottom rail shall be joint less and of single piece of pressed steel.
For rolling shutter with wicket gate night latch shall be provided.
The complete shutter with cover shall be painted with one coat of zinc chromate primer and
two coats of synthetic enamel paint of approved quality and shade.
Finish
All surfaces shall be cleared by sand blasting or chemically and immediately painting them
with the coats of zinc chromate.
Specifications
Page 105
Tender No: -1800000008
Painting
MS rolling shutters shall be cleaned (both the surfaces) with wire brush and given two coats of
yellow zinc chromate primer on the both surface after fabrication conforming to IS:2074 and
specifications as described under above under –Steel specifications.
Measurement
Clear width and clear height of opening for rolling shutter shall be measured. The clear
distance between the two jams of the opening shall be clear width and the clear distance
between the sill and the soffit (bottom of lintel) of the opening shall be the clear height.
Measurements shall be in square meters for actual clear opening.
Rate
The rate shall include the cost of materials and labour involved in all operations described
above including, cost of top cover, night latch if any and spring except ball bearing and
mechanical device of chain and crank operation, which shall be paid for separately.
M.S. Rolling Grills
Material
Rolling grills are similar in design, construction and operation to rolling shutters and all the
provisions as described under Section Clause 3010.22 above shall be applicable to rolling
grills except in respect of the shutter portion, and shall conform to IS:6248.
Shutters
Unless specified rolling grill shutter and the rolling grill portion of the rolling shutter-cum-grill
shall be fabricated with 8mm diameter mild steel round bars. Straight bars and bars bent to
the required profile are placed alternatively and held in position with 20mm wide and 5mm
thick mild steel flat links. Straight bars shall be spaced not exceeding 150mm centre to centre
and the bars bent to required profile shall be placed symmetrically between two consecutive
straight bars shall be bent to form a corrugated profile such that the pitch of the corrugation is
100 to 120mm and the depth of corrugation is 80 to 100mm. All the bent bars shall have
uniform profile. Straight bar along with the adjoining bent bars on both sides shall be held in
position by passing the bars through holes in the links. Each link shall have three holes and
the length of the links shall be such that the distance from centre of the hole to the nearest
edge of the flat is not less than the diameter of the hole. The corner of the links shall be
rounded. All links shall be of uniform size and shape. The spacing of the links measured
along the straight bar shall be uniform in size and shape. The spacing of the links measured
along the straight bar shall be the same as to the centre to centre distance between two
consecutive crests / troughs of the bars bent to the required profile. Each bar and link shall
be a continuous single piece without any joint.
Measurement
The measurements shall be as specified in 3010.22 above. In case of Rolling shutter-cum-grill,
where the area of the grill portion is half or less than half the area of opening, it shall be
measured and paid as rolling shutter and where the area of grill portion is more than half the
area of opening, it shall be measured as rolling grill.
Specifications
Page 106
Tender No: -1800000008
11.21.
Steel doors
Steel doors, shall be of specified design and sizes and procured form approved manufactures
only and shall confirm to IS : 1038.
The actual sizes of units shall not vary by more than 1.5 mm. from those given in the
drawings.
All fittings and fixtures shall be in oxidised brass as specified or as directed. Machine screws
used shall confirm to IS : 1362 in residential buildings and IS : 4218 in industrial buildings,
wood screws used shall confirm to IS : 451.
The framework for doors shall be strong and rigid, neat in appearance, free from any warping,
buckling or any other flaws and defects. All frames shall be square and flat. Exposed welded
joints shall be dressed smooth.
Fabrication / fixing
Steel Doors
All steel doors and frames shall be made of mild steel, welded without deposition of metal and
properly reinforced. Corners shall be of welded construction with all joint faces welded and
ground smooth.
Collapsible Steel Gate
It shall consist of vertical double channels at 10 cm. centres. The sizes of channels T-Section
for top and bottom shall be as approved by Engineer-In-Charge and/or as per drawing. The
gate shall be provided with necessary bolts, buts, locking arrangement, stoppers and with
brass handles on both sides. The gate shall be painted with one coat of anti-corrosive paint
before erection and two coats of synthetic enamel paint of approved quality and shade.
Wrought Iron Grill
Grills shall be manufactured as per drawings and the welded joints shall be smooth.
Painting
MS shutters frames shall be cleaned (both the surfaces) with wire brush and given two coats of
yellow zinc chromate primer on the both surface after fabrication conforming to IS:2074 and
specifications as described under above under- Steel work specifications.
Measurement
The measurement for collapsible gates / steel doors shall be in Sq.m. The height of the gate
shall be measured as the length of the double channels and breadth from outside of the end
fixed double channels in open position, of the gate.
11.22.
Pressed Steel Door Frames :
Material
Steel door frames shall be manufactured from mild steel sheet of 1.25mm thickness, unless
specified, conforming to IS : 226 and IS : 4351
Steel door frames with our without fan light shall be made in the profiles, which may be
manufactured to suit doors of either type opening inwards or outwards as directed by the
Engineer-In-Charge.
Construction
Specifications
Page 107
Tender No: -1800000008
Each door frame shall consist of hinge jamb, lock jamb, head and if required angle threshold.
These shall be welded or rigidly fixed together by mechanical means. Where no angle
threshold is required, temporary base tie shall be screwed to the feet of frames in order to form
a rigid unit. Where so specified base ties shall be pressed mild steel 1.25mm thick adjustable
to suit floor thickness of 35 or 40mm and removable, or alternatively, threshold of mild steel
angle of section 50 x 25mm minimum shall be provided for external doors frames.
Fabrication
The pressed door frames shall be got fabricated in an approved workshop as approved by the
Engineer-In-Charge and shall be as per approved for construction drawing.
Hinges: 100mm mild steel butt hinges shall be used. For door frames upto 89cm wide three
hinges shall be rigidly fixed to one jamb and for frames for door above 89cm wide, four hinges
shall be rigidly fixed to one jamb, if it is single shutter. Where the height of door shutter
exceeds 2.15 metres one additional hinge shall be provided for every 0.5m or part thereof of the
additional height.
In all cases the hinges shall be so fixed that the distance from the inside of the head rebate to
the top of the upper hinge is 20cm and distance from top of upper hinge to lower hinge is
about 175cm.
Hinges shall be made of steel 2.5mm thick with zinc coated removable pin of 6mm diameter,
unless specified. The space between the two leaves of the hinge when closed shall be 3mm and
the leaf that is not welded to the frame shall have four counter sunk holes to take No. 10 wood
screws.
Mortar Guards: Mortar guards as instructed by Engineer-In-Charge shall be provided. These
shall be welded to the frame at the head of the frame for double shutter doors to make
provision for bolts.
Lock-Strike Plate: There shall be an adjustable lock strike plate of steel complete with mortar
guard to make provision for locks or latches complying with the relevant Indian Standards.
Lock-strike plates shall be of galvanized mild steel and fixed at 95cm from the head of the
frame.
Shock Absorbers : For side hung door there shall not be less than three buffer of rubber or
other suitable materials inserted in holes in the rebate and one shall be located on the centre
line of the lock strike plate and the other two at least 45cm above and below the centre line of
the lock strike plate. For double shutter doors, there shall be two buffers or rubber or similar
suitable material inserted in holes in the rebate in the lock jamb only at the head and spaced
15cm at either side of the centre line of the door.
Finish
The surface of door frame shall be thoroughly cleaned, free of rust, mill-scale dirt, oil etc. either
by mechanical means, for example, sand or shot blasting or by chemical means such as
picking. After pre-treatment of the surface one coat of approved primer i.e. yellow zinc chrome
primer conforming to IS : 2074 and two coats of synthetic enamel paints of approved make and
shade as directed by the Engineer-In-Charge shall be applied to the exposed surface.
Fixing
Frames shall be fixed up right in plumb. To avoid sag or bow in width during fixing or during
construction phase, temporary struts across the width preventing sides bulging inwards may
be provided. Wall shall be built solid on each side and grouted at each course to ensure solid
contract with frame leaving no voids behind the frame.
Specifications
Page 108
Tender No: -1800000008
Three lugs shall be provided on each jamb with spacing not more than 75cm. The temporary
struts should not be removed till the masonry behind the frame is set. In case screwed base
tie is provided, this should be left in position till the flooring is laid.
After pre-treatment of the surface, two coats of zinc chromate primer and two coats of
synthetic enamel paint, as described under clause 3010.7 above or as directed by the
Engineer-In-Charge shall be applied to the exposed surface.
Measurements
i)
Frames : The length shall be measured in running metre correct to a cm along the
centre line of the frames.
ii)
Shutters : Width and height of shutter shall be measured to the nearest to cm. The
area shall be calculated in sq.m.
11.23.
MS Fan Clamps :
Types
Fan clamp shall be fixed during the laying of RCC slab and shall be made of 16mm M.S. bar
bent to shape with its ends hooked, as approved. The overall height of the clamps shall be
made to suit the depth of the slab and minimum length shall be about 1200 mm.
Fixing
Holes for inserting the fan clamps in the position shown in the drawing or as instructed by the
Engineer-In-Charge shall be made in the shuttering after the latter has been fixed in position.
After steel reinforcement is tied, fan clamps shall be fixed with their loops truly vertical and at
the correct depth from the underside of the slab or beam. The hooked arms and the loop shall
be tied to the reinforcement, either directly or through cut pieces of M.S. bars with annealed
steel wire 1.6mm or 1.00mm thick. The clamp shall neither be disturbed out of position
during concreting nor shall they be bent out of shape when shuttering of slabs or beams is
removed.
The exposed portion of loops of the clamp shall be given two coats of approved synthetic
enamel paint, including priming coat, of approved steel primer as ordered by the Engineer-InCharge.
M.S. Bars and M.S. Grills in Steel Frames :
M.S. round or square bars, with or without M.S. flats, M.S. grills of different patterns with flats
with M.S. or without M.S. bars, round or square, fixed in wooden or steel windows or clerestory
windows etc. are described in this clause.
Fabrication
When M.S. bars round or square are to be fixed in wooden or steel frame these are cut into
required length to form the required pattern, then fixed as per drawing. In the case of wooden
frames the length will be for fixing in the hole 5cm deep in one frame and right through and
flush with outer side of the frame.
When M.S. round or square bars are to be fixed to steel frames or in combination with M.S.
flats there are to be cut to proper size welded to steel frames or M.S. flats to form the required
pattern. In case of M.S. flats they should have counter sunk holes to facilitate fixing them to
wooden frames with wood screws. Welding shall be done in an approved workshop and not at
site.
Specifications
Page 109
Tender No: -1800000008
When the grill is to be fabricated mainly with M.S. flats with or without M.S. round or square
bars, the flats of required size are cut and bent to form the required pattern and design as per
drawing or all around the width of the flats or circumference of bars which are joined. At
corners of flats proper mitred joint forming a right angle shall be provided with welding for full
width. Welding shall be done in approved workshop and not at site.
Fixing
When M.S. round or square bars are to be fixed to wooden frames the bars shall be passed into
the wooden frame, from the end having a through hole and fixed flush with that end while at
the other end it will be 5cm deep in the hole drilled in the frame. In case of steel frames, the
bars will be welded to the steel frame by fillet weld all along the circumference of the bars in an
approved workshop and not at site.
In case of grill of bars welded to M.S. Flat forming the required pattern, the outer frame of M.S.
flats shall be fixed to the wooden frame with wood screws in the counter sunk holes drilled in
M.S. flats ensuring that screws are driven with some screw driver (not hammered) till the
screws are embedded fully inside flush with the M.S. flats.
In case of fixing to the steel frames, M.S. flats of required pattern with or without M.S. round
or square bars, the method of fixing will be similar to what is described above.
Any kind of welding at site shall be allowed only under written instructions of the Engineer-InCharge.
Measurements
The different types of M.S. grills as described in fabrication will be measured separately. The
length of bars and flats used in grills will be measured correct to cm and then weights
calculated in kg by using Bureau of Indian Standard’s Structural Engineer’s Handbook No. 1
latest issue.
Rate
The rate shall include the cost of materials and labour required for all the operations described
above. Grill of different types mentioned in fabrication shall be paid for separately.
11.24.
i)
M.S. Gutters:
Material -
Gutters shall be fabricated from plain M.S. sheets of 6mm thick unless otherwise shown on the
drawing or specified in the item description.
Structural steel sheets / strips shall confirm to IS : 1079
Gutters shall be of the shape and section specified in the description of the item. The overall
width of the sheet referred to there in shall mean the peripheral width of the gutter including
the rounded edges. The longitudinal edges shall be turned back to the extent of 12mm and
beaten to form a rounded edge. The ends of the sheets at the junctions of pieces shall be
hooked into each other and beaten finish to avoid leakage.
ii) Slope:
Gutter shall be laid with a minimum slope of 1 in 120, unless specified.
iii) Laying and fixing :
Specifications
Page 110
Tender No: -1800000008
Gutter shall be supported on and fixed to M.S. flat iron brackets bent to shape and fixed to the
requisite slope. The maximum spacing of brackets shall be as shown on the approved drawings
or unless otherwise specified shall be 1.20 meters.
Where the brackets are to be fixed to the sides of rafters, they shall be of 40 x 3mm section
bend to shape and fixed rigidly to the sides of rafters with 3 Nos. 10mm dia. bolts, nuts and
washers. The brackets shall overlap the rafter not less than 30cm and the connecting bolts
shall be at 12 cm centers.
Where the brackets are to be fixed to the purlins, it shall be as shown on the drawing approved
for construction or unless otherwise specified, the brackets shall consist of 50 x 3mm M.S. flat
iron bent to shape with one end turned at right angle and fixed to the purlin face with 2 Nos. of
10mm dia. bolts, nuts and washers. The brackets will be stiffened by provision of 50 x 3mm
M.S. flat whose over hung portion bent to right angle shape with its longer leg connected to the
bracket with 2 Nos. 6mm dia. M.S. bolts, nuts, and washers and its shorter leg fixed to face of
purlin with 1 No. 10mm dia. bolt, nut and washers. The over hang of the vertical portion of
the bracket from the face of the purlin shall not exceed 22.5cm with this arrangement. The
spacing of the brackets shall not exceed 1.20 meters unless otherwise shown on the drawing.
The gutter shall be fixed to the brackets with 2 Nos. G.I. bolts and nuts 6mm dia. each fitted
with a pair of G.I. and bitumen washers. The connecting bolts shall be above the waterline of
the gutters.
For connection to down take pipes, a proper drop end or funnel shaped connecting piece shall
be made out of Galv. sheet of the same thickness as the gutter and riveted to the gutter, the
other end tailing into the socket of the rain water pipe. Wherever, necessary stop ends, angles,
etc. shall be provided.
iv) Finish
The gutters when fixed shall be true to line and slope and shall be leak proof.
v) Painting
Gutters of internal surfaces shall be cleaned thoroughly and given two coats of approved
primer to suit polyurethane coating as per manufacturer’s instructions, unless otherwise
specified and shall be applied before laying in position finish coat shall be of approved brand
Polyurethane coat paint. External surface shall be painted with two coats of approved primer
i.e. Yellow zinc chrome primer conforming to IS : 2074 and approved two coats of synthetic
enamel paints as specified under painting item or directed by the Engineer-In-Charge
vi) Measurement
Measurement shall be taken for the finished work along the centre line of the top width of the
gutter connection to a cm. The hooked lap portion in the junctions and gutter length shall not
be measured. The effective area for payment shall be calculated in square meter. The weight
for M.S. sheet shall be calculated on the basis of Bureau of Indian Standard’s Structural
Engineer’s Handbook No. 1 latest issue. No allowance in weight shall be made for rolling
tolerances. The number of brackets which are fixed to purlins with stiffeners flats shall be
measured.
Welds, bolts, nuts, screw, and washers shall not be measured.
deemed to be inclusive of the same.
The quoted rate shall be
vii) Rate
The rate shall include the cost of all labour and materials specified above, including all special
such as angles, junctions, drop ends or funnel shaped connecting pieces, stop ends etc. flat
iron brackets and bolts and nuts required for fixing the latter to the roof members including
handling, painting etc. Brackets with stiffener flats shall be measured separately.
Specifications
Page 111
Tender No: -1800000008
11.25.
Polyurethane Coating Structural Surface
Material
Polyurethane coatings shall be in confirmation with relevant BIS / BS code or otherwise by
renowned manufacturers subject to inspection and approval of Engineer-In-Charge. The
contractor shall submit necessary supporting technical documents of manufacturer in regards
to heat, Ultra violet rays, metal expansion and contraction, abrasion resistance, life of coating,
special precautions to be taken care while application, its maintenance and guarantee etc. The
contractor should get approval before using the paint.
Key Properties of Coating
It shall be fast drying at room temperature. It shall withstand temperature around 100o C.
Broad details of coatings are described as below:
a)
Weather Resistance
exposure
:
Excellent colour & gloss retention even in sunlight
b)
Alcohol Resistance
:
Unaffected by splash and spillage
c)
Salts
:
Unaffected
d)
Water Resistance
:
Excellent water and salty water resistance (not
recommended for immersion)
e)
Oil & Grease
:
Unaffected.
Application
Before application of Topcoat PU-101 enamel or other approved coat, contractor shall carry out
all necessary pre-treatment preparation. For M.S. surface remove grease, oil and other
contamination by using proper de-rusting and phosphating chemicals to clean surface. Apply
properly TUFF COAT PU - 102 - primer coat / EP 102 Epoxy Primer / Grey Primer / Zinc Rich
Primer or Hi-Build wash primer.
After proper drying of primer coat apply PU-102 Enamel in the proportion and manner strictly
as per manufacturer’s specifications. Stir the base component thoroughly and mix four parts of
base and one part of hardener by volume to uniform consistency. Keep it for 15-30 min. for
stabilization and stir again before use. Make required viscosity as per application method with
TC / PU 101 Thinner. Mix the above material as per requirement.
Pot life: Close the containers immediately to avoid the chances of the moisture absorption in
material. Do not apply in humid condition during the raining, fog or mist or at very low
temperature i.e. below 70C.
Stability of Hardener: Once the hardener container is opened, try to consume it immediately
because it reacts with Hydroxyl groups present in atmosphere and it results in to deterioration.
Necessary scaffolding and safety precautions shall be as recommended by the Manufacturer or
as directed by the Engineer-In-Charge.
Measurements
Length shall be taken for the finished work along the centre line of the top width of the gutter
connection to a cm. The hooked lap portion in the junctions and gutter length shall not be
measured. The effective area for painting shall be measured for its gross superficial area and
shall be calculated in square meter.
Specifications
Page 112
Tender No: -1800000008
11.26.
FLOORING
Material
All tiles shall be of first quality of Indian make and shall be uniform in size, true and square
with sharp arises, perfectly flat, flawless without twist, cracks and other defects. They shall be
procured from approved sources. The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer-In-Charge
samples of different varieties he proposes to incorporate in the work. The Contractor shall
strictly conform only to the samples approved by the Engineer-In-Charge.
Tiles to be used for skirting and dado shall be of the same manufacture and shade as that for
floors.
11.27.
Workmanship
The surfaces to be laid with flooring or dado shall be thoroughly hacked, joints of masonry
racked, cleaned of all mortar scales and concrete lumps and loose materials etc. and washed to
remove mud, dirt, oil, grease etc. from the surface and shall be thoroughly wetted.
All tiles shall be laid in a pattern given on the drawings or directed by the Engineer-In-Charge.
All tiles in floor shall be truly and evenly set and pressed in position to obtain uniform plane
surface. The skirting tiles shall be in true plane, level and plumb.
Flooring/dado work shall not be started unless and until the surface is approved by the
Engineer-In-Charge.
11.28.
Indian Patent Stone (IPS) Flooring
Material
Material such as cement, sand, fine aggregate water etc. shall be as described under Mortars
specifications.
Laying
IPS shall be in concrete of specified proportion and thickness with metal size 12mm & below
well-graded. When used for terraces, an approved waterproofing compound shall be added to
the mix as per the specification of the manufacturer.
The surface of the sub-grade shall be thoroughly wetted and cement slurry shall be thoroughly
brushed into the surface just ahead of the finish.
The laying shall be done in alternative bays of 1.5 m x 1.5 m or other approved dimensions
with glass dividing strips of 25 mm. x 3 mm thick wherever specified. Only minimum quantity
of workable shall be used and the paving consolidated thoroughly by compacting with heavy
wooden battens.
Finishing operations shall follow shortly after compaction of concrete by trowelling three times
at intervals so as to produce uniform hard surface. Only just sufficient trowelling shall be done
to give a level surface. Successive trowelling shall be done till the moisture ceases to exude
from the mass. No dry cement shall be used directly on the surface to absorb moisture or to
stiffen the mix. The final trowelling shall be done well before concrete becomes too hard but at
such a time that considerable pressure is required to make any impression on the surface.
The paving shall be cured for at least 15 days and it shall be protected during this period with
hessian or other suitable material, which will not stain the surface. The laying and finishing
shall conform to IS: 2571.
Topping with a hardener
Specifications
Page 113
Tender No: -1800000008
If a floor hardener is specified, the cement concrete flooring shall be laid as described above
and the top finished with an approved hardener such as ‘Ironite’ or its equivalent. Ironite shall
be first mixed dry with cement in a proportion 1:4 by weight (one Ironite to 4 part of cement)
and this mix shall be sprinkled uniformly on the top of green cement concrete flooring after the
concrete is consolidated with wooden battens and before trowelling commences. The Ironite to
be used shall be such that 1.5 Kg. of Ironite is utilised for 1 Sq.m of area of cement concrete
flooring, unless specified.
Curing
The curing shall be done for a period of ten days. Curing shall not be commenced until the top
has hardened. Covering with empty cement gunnies shall be avoided as the colour is likely to
be bleached with the remnants of cement matter from the bags.
Measurements
Length and breadth shall be measured before laying skirting dado on wall plaster. No
deductions shall me made nor be extra paid for voids not exceeding 0.20 sq.m. Deductions for
ends of similar materials or other articles embedded shall not be for areas not exceeding 0.10
sq.m.
Rate
The rate shall include the cost of all materials and labour involved in all the operations
described above including application of cement slurry on base concrete including roughening
and cleaning the surface of base concrete. The base concrete shall be paid for separately.
11.29.
Glazed tile work
Material
Material shall be generally as described under- Flooring specifications. Glazed tiles shall
conform to IS 777.
Tiles shall be evenly and well glazed over the top surface and shall be grooved and recessed in
parts on the rear face to provide the necessary key for mortar. They shall be of specified sizes
and thickness . The tolerance on facial dimension shall be ± 1.0 mm. and ± 0.5 mm. in
thickness.
For coloured tiles, only the glaze shall be coloured as specified.
Mortar
Cement mortars shall be as described as under –Mortar specifications and the proportion of
mortar shall be as specified in the respective items of BOQ.
Laying
Tiles shall be soaked in water for at least 6 hours prior to their use in the job.
Tiles shall be laid on cement and sand mortar (1:3) bedding of average thickness of 20mm and
shall be spread, tamped and corrected to proper levels and allowed to harden for a day before
the tiles are set. Over this bedding neat grey cement slurry (1:3) mix of honey like consistency
shall be spread at a rate of 3.3 Kg of cement per Sq.m.. Tiles shall be washed clean and fixed
in this grout one after another, each tile being gently tapped with a wooden mallet till it is
properly bedded and in true level and line with the adjoining tile. Cement slurry oozing out
through the joints shall be immediately wiped clean. Joints shall be fine (width 1.5mm) and
nearly undistinguishable. Joints shall be pointed with white cement and matching pigment
and finished neatly. The flooring shall be thoroughly cleaned with suitable hydrochloric acid
Specifications
Page 114
Tender No: -1800000008
before handing over. Joints shall be of straight fit joints as shown on the drawing or as
directed by the Engineer-In-Charge.
Pointing and Finishing
The joints shall be cleaned off the grey cement slurry with wire / coir brush or trowel to a
depth of 2 mm to 3 mm and all dust and loose mortar removed. Joints shall then be flush
pointed with white cement added with pigment if required to match the colour of tiles. After
curing, the surface shall be washed and finished clean. The finished floor shall not sound
hollow when tapped with a wooden mallet.
Curing
Work shall be properly cured for at least 7 days and kept well protected.
Measurement
Measurement shall be as described under –IPS flooring specifications.
Rate
The rate shall include the cost of all materials and labour involved in all the operations
described above including wastage and application of cement slurry on base concrete /
surface, filling of joints as specified above etc.
11.30.
Glazed Ceramic Tiles Work
Material
Material shall be generally as described under- Flooring specifications. Ceramic
confirm to IS 13755 of 1st quality.
tiles shall
The finished tiles, when fractured will appear fine grained in texture, dense and homogeneous.
Tiles shall be sound, true to shape, flat and free from flaws and other manufacturing defects.
Mortar
Cement mortars shall be as described under –Mortar specifications and the proportion of
mortar shall be as specified in the BOQ.
Laying
Laying of ceramic tiles shall be as described under –Glazed tiles specifications.
Pointing and Finishing
Pointing and Finishing shall be as described under-Glazed tiles specifications.
Curing
Work shall be properly cured for at least 7 days and kept well protected.
Measurement
Measurement shall be as described under- IPS flooring specifications.
Rate
The rate shall include the cost of all materials and labour involved in all the operations
described above including application of cement slurry on base concrete/ surface.
Specifications
Page 115
Tender No: -1800000008
11.31.
Polished Kotah, Cuddappa, Flooring, Skirting and Dado
Material
These shall be of first quality procured from approved sources. They shall be sound, durable,
uniform in size & colour, free from soft veins, cracks or other flaws, with their edges true &
square. These natural stones shall be of thickness not less then 20mm, unless specified. They
shall be machine cut with top surface double machine polished.
The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer-In-Charge two samples each of the different
stones, he proposes to incorporate in the work together with the relevant literature from the
suppliers. The Contractor shall strictly conform only to the samples approved by the EngineerIn-Charge.
Stones to be used for skirtings and dado shall be from the same stock and shade as used for
floors.
The surfaces on which the stone slabs are to be laid shall be cleaned of all dust and saturated
with water.
Dressing
The edges of stones to be pointed shall be true to line and dressed to the required depth all
round. All the exposed edge shall be neatly polished to give a neat appearance.
Every slab shall be cut to the required size and shape and fine chisel dressed on the sides to
the full depth so that a straight edge laid along the side of the stone shall be in full contact
with it. The sides (edges) shall be table rubbed with coarse sand or machine rubbed before
paving. All angles and edges of the slabs shall be true, square and free from chipping and
surface shall true and plane.
Tolerance in thickness of stone shall be ± 3 mm.
The slabs shall be set in cement slurry (thin paste of neat cement shall be applied to sides,
bottom and the prepared base) over 20 mm. thick lime mortar (1:2) bedding and tamped with
wooden mallet. The joints shall be flushed with cement. The details of operations are similar as
for marble mosaic tile work.
Work shall be properly cured for at least 7 days and kept well protected.
Pointing and Finishing
The joints shall be cleaned off the grey cement slurry with wire / coir brush or trowel to a
depth of 2 mm to 3 mm and all dust and loose mortar removed. Joints shall then be flush
pointed with white cement added with pigment if required to match the colour of tiles. After
curing, the surface shall be washed and finished clean. The finished floor shall not sound
hollow when tapped with a wooden mallet.
Polishing and finishing
Polishing and finishing shall be machine polished in three stages with different grades of
polishing stones in the machine . After the first stage of polishing ,a grouting coat with
matching cement is given. After the final coat oxalic acid crystals ground into powder shall be
dusted over the surface at the rate of 32.5 gm/Sq.m sprinkled with water and rubbed hard
with a pad of woollen rags by means of the polishing machine.
Measurement
Measurement shall be as described under-IPS flooring specifications.
Specifications
Page 116
Tender No: -1800000008
The measurement of treads and risers shall be in linear meter or in Sq. m. as specified in the
Bill of Quantities. Only clear visible dimensions shall be considered ignoring bearing in plaster,
masonry etc.
Length shall be measured along the finished face of riser, skirting or dado correct to a cm.
Height shall be measured from the finished level of tread of floor to the top. This shall be
measured correct to a mm in the case of risers of steps and skirting and correct to two places
of decimal. Lining of pillars etc. shall also be measured under this item.
Rate
The rate shall include the cost of all materials and labour involved in all the operations
described above including application of cement slurry on base concrete/ surface, polishing
etc.
Marble Mosaic Tiles Flooring/Skirting/Dado
11.32.
Material
Marble mosaic tiles shall be first quality, hydraulic pressed and shall conform to IS 1237. They
shall be with white cement and pigments and marble chips of sizes as required.
Tiles shall be 250 x 250 square and not less than 20 mm. thick unless otherwise
.Tolerances allowed are:
•
Length and breadth
± 1 mm.
•
Thickness
± 5 mm.
specified
The top surface shall be smooth and polished with upper wearing layer of
minimum 5 mm.
thickness consisting of a mixture of marble chips of approved sizes and colour and white
cement.
Mortar
Cement mortars shall be as described under –Mortar specifications and the proportion of
mortar shall be as specified in the BOQ.
Laying
Tiles shall be soaked in water for at least 6 hours prior to their use in the job.
Cement mortar (1:3) bedding of average thickness of 20 mm. (thickness at any place being not
less than 10 mm.) shall be spread, tamped and corrected to proper levels and allowed to
harden for a day before the tiles are set. Over this bedding, neat gray cement slurry (1:3 mix) of
honey like consistency shall be spread at a rate of 4.4. Kg. of cement per Sq.m. over such an
area as would accommodate about 20 tiles. Tiles shall be washed clean and fixed in this grout
one after another, each tile being gently tapped with a wooden mallet till it is properly bedded
and in true level and line with the adjoining tile. Cement slurry oozing out through the joints
shall be immediately wiped clean. Joints shall be fine (width 1.5 mm) and nearly
undistinguishable. Joints shall be pointed with matching cement and finished neatly.
For skirting and dado work, the brick or concrete wall surface to which the tiles are to be fixed
shall first be wetted with clean water and later covered with 16 mm. cement mortar (1:3).
Before this is hardened, tiles with cement slurry shall be laid and gently tapped with a wooden
mallet in a true plane and level. The fixing shall be done from bottom upwards.
Curing
Specifications
Page 117
Tender No: -1800000008
Work shall be properly cured for at least 10 days and kept well - protected.
Polishing
When the flooring is ready for polishing, the joints shall be rubbed with Carborundum stones
to effect proper levelling. The flooring shall then be machine polished in three stages with
different grades of polishing stones in the machine. After the first stage of polishing, a grouting
coat with matching cement is given. After the final coat, oxalic acid crystals ground into
powder shall be dusted over the surface at the rate of 32.5 gm/Sq.m sprinkled with water and
rubbed hard with a pad of woollen rags by means of the polishing machine.
Skirting / dado shall be hand polished with Carborundum stones.
The finished floor and skirting / dado shall give a uniform shade of tiles. Any defective tiles
shall be removed by the Contractor and suitably replaced at his own cost.
Measurement
Measurement shall be as described under- IPS flooring specifications. Length shall be
measured along the finished face of skirting or dado correct to a cm.
Rate
The rate shall include the cost of all materials and labour involved in all the operations
described above including application of cement slurry on base concrete/ surface, polishing
etc.
Specifications
Page 118
Tender No: -1800000008
12. FINISHING WORKS:
12.1. Cement Plastering
Cement plaster shall be of 6, 12, or 20 mm thick as specified in the respective item.
Materials
Cement mortar shall be as described under- Mortar specifications. However, cement used in
the plaster shall be Portland Pozzolana Cement (PPC) Fly ash based conforming to IS: 1489
(Part-I.) unless other wise specified. Only river washed sand shall be used. Pan type mixer for
mortar should preferably be used.
Application
Unless otherwise specified all plaster work shall be carried out in accordance with IS 1661.
The thickness and proportion of cement mortar shall be as specified or directed.
Unless permitted otherwise by the Engineer-In-Charge, only double scaffolding of adequate
strength shall be provided by the Contractor. No holes shall be made in the masonry for
supporting the scaffolding. Scaffolding members shall not be tied to windows, doors, other
members provided in the walls.
No plastering work shall commence until the surface preparatory work is approved by the
Engineer-In-Charge.
The sand shall be as approved by Engineer-In-Charge and in accordance with IS 1542
specification for plaster.
Preparation of Surface
Joints of all masonry work shall be carefully raked out for a depth of about 12 mm. without
causing any damage to the masonry. Surfaces of concrete work shall be thoroughly roughened
with chisel by pricks prior to application of plaster. For materials, which are not able to receive
plaster directly, the necessary procedures shall be carried out as per the directions of the
Engineer-In-Charge
All surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dirt, soot, oil, grease and any other material
preventing proper bonding etc. and any efflorescence shall be removed by brushing and
scraping. The surface shall then be soaked with water for at-least 6 hours prior to application
of plaster to ensure proper adhesion between the surface and plaster. If any surfaces become
dry in spots, such area shall be moistened again to restore uniform suction.
Procedures / Precautions Applicable to Workmanship
Plaster work shall proceed from top to bottom in one operation on an entirely unobstructed
surface or on areas upto break against openings.
Long straight edge shall be used to ensure perfectly even surface. All corners, angles and
junctions shall be truly vertical and horizontal as the case may be and shall be carefully and
neatly finished. All soffits, exposed angles with door and window frames shall be carefully
finished. Internal angles shall be rounded if so directed and arises shall be rounded, splayed or
beaded as directed. The mortar shall adhere to the surface intimately when set and there
should be no hollow sound when struck.
All plaster work shall be kept cured for a minimum period of 10 days after the application of
finishing coat to prevent excessive evaporation. Matting of gunny bags should be hung over the
outside of the plaster in a hot dry weather.
Specifications
Page 119
Tender No: -1800000008
1st Coat
The thickness shall be about 12 mm. thick in case of brick walls, RC walls and columns and 6
mm. thick for ceiling, soffit of beams etc. Before this coat hardens, the surface shall be cross
scratched to provide a mechanical key for the 1st coat. The cross-scratch shall be horizontal as
far as possible to aid curing which will be done for at least 2 days immediately following the
application.
Chicken Mesh
Chicken wire mesh of 22 gauge unless specified at junction of RCC and masonry work 15 cm.
(at 6”) overlap on either side shall be fixed with nails.
Finish Coat
At least a period of 3 days should elapse between the application of the first coat and the finish
coat. Finish coat shall be applied as specified in the item description unless other wise, stated
neeru finish shall apply as described under the neeru finish specifications given below.
Curing
Curing shall be started as soon as the plaster has hardened sufficiently not to be damaged
when watered.
The plaster shall be kept wet for a period of at least 7 days. During this period, it shall be
suitably protected from all damages at the contractor’s expenses by such means as the
Engineer-In-Charge may approve. The Dates on which the plastering is done shall be legibly
marked on the various sections so that for the specified period r can be watched.
Measurement
For plastering, the measurement shall be on area superficial for the unfinished surfaces as
actually covered. Length and breadth shall be measured correct to a cm and its area shall be
calculated in Sq.m. correct to two places of decimal. Dimensions before plastering shall be
taken.
The areas shall include (all the actual pointed / plastered areas for jambs, sills, soffits of
openings etc.
No deductions shall be made for ends of joints, beams etc.
No extra shall be allowed for beaded, chamfered or rounded arrises or curved angles.
Rate
The rate shall include the cost of all labour and materials involved in all the operations
described above excluding chicken mesh, which shall be measured separately.
12.2. Neeru Finishing :
Materials
Lime shall be of best quality hydraulic lime properly burnt and from approved sources and
shall be slaked with fresh water on site. It shall be free from un-burnt kankar, ashes and other
impurities including salt. Lime shall be stored safely in weatherproof sheds, filled in bags. It
shall not be stacked against the walls of the shed. It should be used as soon as possible.
Instant Neeru
Specifications
Page 120
Tender No: -1800000008
Instant neeru shall conforming to IS 712 and mix /slurry shall be prepared as per the
recommendation of the manufacturer’s specification subject to approval of the Engineer-InCharge.
Application
The ‘Neeru’ as prepared above shall be applied to the prepared surface with a steel trowel to a
thickness not exceeding 3mm and rubbed and polished to a perfectly smooth and even finish
working from top to bottom. While towelling is going on soap stone powder contained in thin
muslin bags shall be dusted over the surface and worked in.
The surface of the under coat on which the punning is to be done shall be left rough. The
punning shall be applied, when the under coat is still green. The mortar for punning shall be
applied in a uniform layer slightly more than 3mm thick between gauged pads, with which to
ensure an even and uniformly thick surface by frequent checking with a wooden straight edge.
It shall be finished to an even and smooth surface with trowels.
All corners, arises, angles and junctions shall be truly vertical and horizontal as the case may
be and shall be carefully and neatly finished. Rounding or chamfering corners, arises,
junctions etc. where required, shall be punned without any extra payment. Such rounding,
chamfering or grooving shall be carried out with proper templates or battens to the size
required.
No portion of the surface shall be left out initially to be patched up later on.
Thickness
The thickness of the finished punning shall not be less than 3mm thick.
Scaffolding, Finishing, Precaution and Curing
Specifications for these shall be as described under-Plastering specifications.
Measurement
Included in plastering work wherever specified.
Rates
Included in plastering work wherever specified.
12.3. Chicken mesh 22 SWG :
Materials
Chicken wire mesh shall be 22 gauge of approved manufacturers, unless specified.
Fixing
The chicken wire mesh shall be provided at the junction of RCC and masonry work 150mm
over lap on either side fixed with ‘U’ nails. 150mm centre to centre before plastering the
junction.
Measurement
Length and breadth shall be measured correct to a centimetre (cm) and its area shall be
calculated in Square metres (Sq.m.) correct to two place of decimal.
Specifications
Page 121
Tender No: -1800000008
12.4. Plaster of Paris Finishing (POP) :
Material
The Plaster of Paris shall be of calcium-sulphate semi-hydrate variety. Its fineness shall be
such that when sieved through a sieve of IS sieve designation 3.35 mm for 5 minutes after
drying the residue left on it shall not be more than by 1% by weight. It shall not be too quick
setting. Initial setting time shall not be less than 13 minutes. The average compressive strength
of material determined by testing 5 cm cubes after removal from moulds, after 24 hours and
drying in an oven at 400 C till weight of the cubes is constant & shall not be less than 84 kg per
square metre.
Application
The ‘POP’ as prepared above shall be applied to the prepared surface with a steel trowel to a
thickness not exceeding 6mm and rubbed and polished to a perfectly smooth and even finish
working from top to bottom. While towelling is going on soap stone powder contained in thin
muslin bags shall be dusted over the surface and worked in.
The surface of the under coat on which the punning is to be done shall be left rough. The
punning shall be applied, when the under coat is still green. The mortar for punning shall be
applied in a uniform layer slightly more than 6mm thick between gauged pads, with which to
ensure an even and uniformly thick surface by frequent checking with a wooden straight edge.
It shall be finished to an even and smooth surface with trowels.
All corners, arrises, angles and junctions shall be truly vertical and horizontal as the case may
be and shall be carefully and neatly finished. Rounding or chamfering corners, arrises,
junctions etc. where required, shall be punned without any extra payment. Such rounding,
chamfering or grooving shall be carried out with proper templates or battens to the size
required. No portion of the surface shall be left out initially to be patched up later on.
Thickness
The thickness of the finished punning shall not be less than 6mm thick, unless specified.
Scaffolding, Finishing, Precaution and Curing
Specifications for these shall be as described under- Plaster specifications.
12.5. Sand Faced Cement Plaster:
General
This shall be done in two coats. Backing coat shall be 12 mm. thick in 1:4 cement mortar with
2% by weight of cement of approved integral cement waterproofing admixture added to it,
unless specified. The second and finishing coat shall be 8 mm. thick in 1:3 CM, unless
specified.
Materials
Cement mortar shall be as described under- Mortar specifications. However, cement used in
the plaster shall be Portland Pozzolana Cement (Fly ash based) conforming to IS: 1489 (Part - I)
unless other wise specified Only river washed sand shall be used. Pan type mixer for mortar
shall preferably be used.
Integral waterproofing compound conforming to IS: 2645 and of approved brand and
manufactured, enlisted by the Engineer-In-Charge from time to time shall be used. The
Contractor shall bring the materials to the site in their original packing. The containers will be
opened and the material mixed with dry cement in the proportion by weight, recommended by
Specifications
Page 122
Tender No: -1800000008
the manufacturers or as specifically described in the description of the item. Care shall be
taken in mixing, to see that the water proofing material gets well and integrally mixed with the
cement that does not run out separately when water is added.
Chicken wire mesh 22 gauge at junction of RCC and masonry work 150 mm. (at 6”) overlap on
either side shall be fixed with nails. (Chicken wire Shall be measured separately under relevant
item)
Application
This shall be applied in 2 coats. The first coat or the base coat shall be approximately 12 mm
and shall be continuously carried out without break to the full length of wall or natural
breaking points such as doors, windows etc. The base coat shall be splashed on to the
prepared surface with heavy pressures, brought to true and even surface and then lightly
roughened by cross scratch lines, to provide bond for the finishing coat. The base coat shall be
cured for at least seven days.
For backing coat about 15 cm. x 15 cm. plaster patches shall be prepared as gauges at
convenient distance apart to ensure even plastering in one plane. The mortar shall be firmly
applied with somewhat more than the required thickness and well pressed into the joint and on
the surface by wooden floats to produce an even and uniform surface. The surface shall be
roughened with wire brushes to give a good bond to the finishing coat. The backing coat shall
be cured for 4-5 day.
For the finishing coat, sand used shall be screened to pass through 3 mm. mesh sieve (all
material passing through 1.5 mm. mesh sieve shall be eliminated). The coat shall be applied
uniformly with wooden float and the entire surface shall be rubbed with approved sponges (e.g.
wooden float lined with cork) to expose the sand grains uniformly and predominantly, while
finishing steel trowel shall not be used and overworking shall be avoided.
Measurement
Measurement shall be as described under- Plastering specifications.
Rate
The rate shall include the cost of all labour and materials involved in all the operations
described above including integral waterproofing compound but excluding chicken mesh which
shall be measured separately.
12.6. Rough Cast Cement Plaster:
Materials
Cement mortar shall be as described under – Sand faced plaster specifications .
Application
This shall be done in two operations, backing coat of 12 mm. thick in 1:4 CM is done in an
identical manner as for sand-faced cement plaster. As soon as the backing coat is only slightly
set (i.e. when it is still essentially in a plastic state), the finishing coat 13 mm. thick in 1:1:2
proportion (1 cement: 1 of graded sand:2 of gravel generally 8 mm. to 12 mm. in size) shall be
dashed by means of trowels against the backing coat such that the dispersion of gravel shall be
uniform and it shall be seen predominantly on the surface.
12.7. Waterproof Cement Plaster :
Materials
Specifications
Page 123
Tender No: -1800000008
Cement mortar shall be as described under – Sand faced plaster specifications.
Application
Application shall be as described under- Sand faced plaster specifications.
Finish coat
When the plaster has been brought to a true surface with wooden straight edge it shall be
uniformly treated over its entire area with paste of neat cement and rubbed smooth, so that
the whole for surface is covered with neat cement coating. The quantity of cement applied for
floating coat shall be 1 kg per sq. m. Smooth finishing shall be completed with trowel
immediately and in no, case later than half an hour of adding water to plaster mix.
The first coat shall be evenly dampened and 5 mm thick finish coat shall be well smooth after
floating it with a coat of Portland Cement. The use of dry cement shall not be permitted.
Integral waterproofing compound conforming to IS: 2645 and of approved brand and
manufactured, enlisted by the Engineer-In-Charge from time to time shall be used.
Applications shall be as described under sand faced plaster specifications.
12.8. Grooves in Plaster :
Materials/mortars
Materials /mortar shall be as described under –Plastering specifications.
Application
The horizontal and vertical grooves shall be exactly to the required depth and width as shown
in the drawings and shall be in perfect lines without any break in continuity. The grooves shall
be neatly finished with extreme case.
Plasterwork shall follow following steps and work shall commence only after approval of the
Engineer-In-Charge. .
•
Surface shall be properly cleaned.
•
Plaster area shall be provided with level pads or spots allowing working & checking with 2 3m. straight edge. Depth of plaster shall not be less than 8mm. at any point.
•
Required concealing services work shall be completed and tested prior to start of
plasterwork.
•
No further cutting of masonry shall be allowed.
•
Repairs carried out to masonry or concealing work shall be cured and dry.
•
Surface shall be sufficiently damp / wet.
•
Plaster pads shall be checked for plumb & level and approved by Engineer-In-Charge.
Corners, external or internal shall be finished along with finished coat. It is advisable to have
rounded corners.
Plaster shall be cured for 14 days by wet curing except in neeru finish plaster.
Plaster shall be levelled and lined by Aluminium hollow section of 2-3 m. long. (This will give
even and levelled surface). There shall not be more than 2 mm. difference in level when
checked with 3 m. straight edge. It is important enough pressing and beating is done to
achieve compact filling of joints and area shall be fully compacted.
Specifications
Page 124
Tender No: -1800000008
Finishing of plaster may be carried out with wooden float (randhaas) or trowelled smooth with
sheet metal trowels as specified. Care shall be taken to avoid excessive trowelling and
overworking the wooden float.
All corners, internal or external, shall be truly vertical or horizontal. These shall be finished
with a proper template to achieve best workmanship for rounding and chamfering as specified
or directed.
Plaster shall be cut to correct horizontal or vertical line at the end of the day or if work
required to be suspended for any reason.
Area of plaster is advisable to be limited to 15 Sq.m. To avoid cracks due to thermal
movements of dissimilar material in contact, it is advisable to provide joints, treated with
groove or any other detail suggested by the Engineer-In-Charge. These joints if not specified
shall be treated with 100 mm. wide reinforcing chicken mesh fixed over joints by G.I. nails and
area plastered.
12.9. Cement Pointing
Materials
Materials shall be as described under-Mortar specifications.
Mortar
Cement & fine sand (washed, if necessary) are mixed in the specified proportion using
sufficient water to produce a smooth paste of homogeneous mix and uniform colour.
Waterproofing compound, as approved by the Engineer-In-Charge, shall be added as per
manufacturers specifications. Mixing platform shall be clean and impervious and shall be so
arranged that no deleterious extraneous material shall get mixed with mortar nor the mixing
water of the mortar shall flow out.
Preparation of Surface
All joints to be pointed shall be raked out to a depth not less than the width of the joint,
preferably when the mortar is green. Projections of stones shall be chiselled, if necessary. The
raked surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dust, loose particles and efflorescence
materials with stiff wire brushes and washed with water and kept well wetted before pointing.
The entire area shall be protected by a removable / non-staining coating of suitable approved
material.
Pointing
Mortar prepared as above shall be well pressed into the joints with a pointed trowel and
rubbed smooth either flush sunk or raised, according to the type of pointing required. The
mortar shall not be spread over the corner, edges or surface of the masonry. All superficial
mortar shall be removed with a trowel. The surface of the masonry shall be cleaned and no
stain shall be allowed to remain. Pointing shall be of uniform appearance with sharp, clear and
regular lines.
Curing
Pointed surfaces shall be kept wet continuously for a minimum period of seven days, during
which period it shall be suitably protected from all damage.
Bad Workmanship
Should the mortar perish or deteriorate through neglect of watering or any other default and if
the work is not done neatly and as specified above, the pointing shall be removed and redone
by the Contractor at his own cost when instructed by the Engineer-In-Charge.
Specifications
Page 125
Tender No: -1800000008
Measurements
For pointing, the area of masonry surface actually pointed shall be measured net.
12.10.
White / Colour Washing:
Materials
The materials for preparing lime wash shall be freshly burnt fat lime of good quality free from
unburnt stone or other foreign matter. Lime shall be of “C” type as mentioned in IS 712.
Lime shall be slaked on the spot, mixed and stirred thoroughly with sufficient quantity of water
(about 4.5 litres per Kg. of lime) to make a thin cream. This shall be allowed to stand for a
period of 24 hours and then strained through a clean coarse cloth. Clean gum dissolved in hot
water shall then be added in the proportion of 4 gm. of gum Arabic to one litre of lime cream to
prevent lime wash coming off easily when rubbed.
Indigo (Neel) up to 3 gm per Kg of lime dissolved in water shall be added and stirred well. Water
at 5 litres per Kg. of lime is then added to produce a milky solution.
Alternatively ready made whiting (ground white chalk) complying to IS 63 can be used. In this
case whiting shall be dissolved in sufficient quality of warm water to form thin slurry, which
shall then be screened through a clean coarse cloth. 2 gm. of gum and 0.4 gm. of copper
sulphate dissolved separately in hot water shall be added for every litre of the slurry, which
shall then be diluted with water to the consistency of milk for use. Rice size may be allowed
instead of gum.
Colour wash shall be lime wash as above to which a solution of water and lime fast pigment,
boiled if directed, shall be gradually added and stirred until the required tinge is available.
Preparation of surface
The surface shall be prepared by removing all mortar dropping and foreign matter and
thoroughly cleaned with wire or fibre brush or other means to be approved by the Engineer-InCharge. All loose pieces and scales shall be stuffed with mortar and cured.
Application
Lime wash shall be applied with a brush. Each coat must be allowed to dry and shall be
subject to an inspection before the next coat is applied. When dry, the surface shall not show
any signs of cracking and shall present a smooth and uniform finish easily when rubbed with a
finger. Patchy or streaky work will be rejected. No colour wash shall be done with a sample of
the colour wash to the required tint or shade unless it is approved by the Engineer-In-Charge.
Precautions
Doors, Windows, floors etc., shall be protected form being splashed upon. Any splashing and
droppings shall be removed and surfaces cleaned.
Scaffolding
Single or
required.
double
scaffolding
shall
be
provided
by
the
Contractor
as
and
when
Measurements
Cornices and other such wall or ceiling features, shall be measured along the girth and
included in the measurements.
Specifications
Page 126
Tender No: -1800000008
The number of coats shall be 3 coats unless otherwise specified. The item to include removing
nails making good holes, cracks, patches etc. not exceeding 50 sq.m. each with material
similar in composition to the surface to be prepared.
Painting
12.11.
All the water base and oil base paints such as distemper, cement paint, enamel paint, flat oil
paint etc. shall be of approved manufacturers and shall conform to the respective IS Codes and
Standards.
Colour and Shade shall be as approved by the Engineer-In-Charge.
Supply
All paint materials shall be supplied to the Site in the manufacturer’s sealed and branded
containers. Any containers reaching site with broken seals are liable for instant rejection by
the Engineer-In-Charge.
Storage
All paint materials shall be stored in cool dry conditions clear of other stores to the satisfaction
of the Engineer-In-Charge.
Usage
The mixing of materials of different brands before or during application shall not be permitted.
Brushes, pails, kettles and other implements and tools used in painting or preparation of the
work shall be clean and free from foreign matter.
The instructions of the manufacturer shall be followed regarding preparation of surface and
application of priming and finishing coats. In any event the following engineering practices
shall always be followed while carrying out work as specified in IS 2395 Part-I & Part-II.
a)
No exterior or exposed painting shall be carried out under adverse weather conditions
such as rains, extreme humidity, dust storms etc.,
b)
The work shall preferably be carried out in shade to avoid blistering or wrinkling due to
direct sunlight.
c)
All surfaces to be painted shall be free of loose matter, efflorescence, dust etc. before
application of each coat.
d)
No paint shall be applied to works, which are internally or superficially damp.
Preparation of Surfaces
General
All surfaces requiring paint shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dirt, dust, grease or oil before
spotting or priming. Oil or grease film shall be washed off with an acid that is non-injurious to
the surface or shop primers and rinsed off completely with plain or soapy water. Surfaces shall
be dry unless dampening is required for a particular finished material.
Before starting the work, the Contractor shall obtain the approval of the Engineer-In-Charge
regarding the soundness and readiness of the surface to be painted on.
Masonry, Concrete and Plastered Surfaces
Specifications
Page 127
Tender No: -1800000008
Surface shall be free from all efflorescence, mildew, loose paint or other foreign and loose
materials. Surface with mildew or efflorescence shall be treated as follows:
•
All mildewed surfaces shall be treated with an approved fungicide such as ammonical wash
consisting of 7 gm. of copper carbonate dissolved in 80 ml. liquor ammonia and silica
fluoride solution and allowed to dry thoroughly before paint is applied.
•
All efflorescence shall be removed by scrubbing and affected surfaces shall be treated with
a solution of muriatic acid in water (1:6 to 1:8) and washed fully with clean water and
allowed to dry thoroughly.
Masonry cracks shall be cleaned out and patch filled with mortar similar to the original
surfaces uniformly textured. Where this type of re-surfacing may lead to the finishing paint
being different in shade from the original surface, the surfaced area shall be treated with
minimum one coat of cement primer, which shall be continued to the surrounding area from a
distance of 100mm.
The plastered surface shall be carefully rubbed smooth and thoroughly cleaned with clean
fresh water.
Metal
All metal surfaces shall be absolutely clean, dry and free from wax, grease or dried soap films.
Grease shall be removed by proprietary brands of approved solvent cleaner or other solutions
or detergents. In addition all steel and iron surfaces shall be free from dust, rust and scales.
This shall be done by wire brushing and scraping. All galvanised surface shall be pre-treated
with a compatible primer according to the manufacturer’s direction. Any abrasion in ship coats
shall be touched with the same quality of paint as the original coat. The cleaning and operation
of priming paint at site shall be carried out after the erection of steelwork.
As required single or double scaffolding or ladder shall be used without damaging or scratching
the surfaces to be painted.
Woodwork
Surfaces to be painted shall be thoroughly dry, clean and smooth, properly sand papered to a
fresh surface. Resinous exudation and large knots shall be removed and replaced with filler
(sound wood). Small knots that do not justify cutting and sap tracks shall be covered with
minimum two coats of pure shellac coating applied thinly and extended 25 mm. beyond the
area.
Parts of timber to be enclosed shall always be primed unless already impregnated. When the
priming is hard, all cracks, holes, open joints etc. shall be made good with hard stopping and
rubbed down with fine abrasive paper.
Primer of joinery shall be applied only on site after the Engineer-In-Charge has approved the
joinery.
Application
The method of application shall be as per the recommendations of the manufacturer, wherever
relevant. Applications shall be by hand brushing, rolling or air spray. All priming undercoats
shall be applied by brush only. Rollers and spray equipments shall not be used for the
purpose.
All materials shall be evenly applied, shall be free of sags, runs crawls or other defects. All
coats shall be of proper consistency. All primer and undercoats shall be tinted to approximate
the colour of the finishing coats. Finished coats shall be of exact colour and shade as per
approved samples and all finish shall be uniform in colour and texture. All parts of mouldings
and ornaments shall be left clean and true to finish.
Specifications
Page 128
Tender No: -1800000008
All coats shall be thoroughly dry before being papered or before the succeeding coat is applied.
Coats of paint as specified are intended to cover surfaces perfectly. In case the surface is not
covered properly by applying the specifying number of coats, further coats shall be applied by
the Contractor when so directed by the Engineer-In-Charge.
In case of selection of special shades and colour (not available in standard shades) the
contractor shall mix different shades and prepare test panels of minimum size 1 metre square
as per instructions of the Engineer-In-Charge and obtain his approval prior to application of
finishing paints.
Equipment and Protection
All brushes used for the job shall be clean and in good condition.
Spray painting equipment shall be a type that will produce full, even coatings, shall be
equipped with grease and water separators and kept properly clean and well maintained at all
times.
Sufficient drop cloths, shields and other protective equipment shall be used to prevent sprays
or droppings from fouling surfaces not being painted. Empty containers, saturated rages and
waste shall not be allowed to accumulate. Any required ventilating or isolating measures for
protecting his workmen and others from toxic or unhealthy conditions due to painting shall be
provided by the Contractor.
Cleaning up
Cleaning of paint droppings and spilling, splashed or splattered, films and smudges from
finished surfaces and areas not to be painted shall be carried out concurrently with the work
to the satisfaction of the Engineer-In-Charge. At completion, all equipments, excess materials
and containers shall be removed and the premises shall be cleaned of all painting waste and
debris.
Measurements
Length and breadth shall be measured correct to a cm and area shall be calculated in sq.m.
correct to two places of decimals.
Corrugated surfaces shall be measured flat as fixed and the area so measured shall be
increased by the percentage as described in above para to allow for girthed area.
Cornices and other such wall or ceiling features, shall be measured along the girth and
included in the measurements.
The number of coats shall be 3 coats unless otherwise specified. The item to include removing
nails making good holes, cracks, patches etc. not exceeding 50 sq.m each material similar in
composition to the surface to be prepared.
•
•
•
•
Timber doors, windows etc. shall be measured flat (not girthed) overall including frames
and all edges, cleats etc. shall be deemed to be included in the item.
Steel doors, windows, etc. shall be measured flat (not girthed) including frames, edges, etc.
All pipes shall be measured in running meters and shall allow for all specials, brackets,
clamps, etc. which shall not be measured separately.
Multiplying co-efficient for EACH SIDE for the various items shall be as follows:
Specifications
Page 129
Tender No: -1800000008
TABLE 15
Multiplying Coefficient
Timber Doors, Windows etc
Panelled doors, windows etc.
Flush doors
Partly panelled & partly glazed doors,
windows etc.
Fully glazed doors, windows etc.
Fully timber louvered doors, windows etc
1.00
0.80
1.50
1.30
1.20
1.00
0.80
1.80
Steel Doors, Windows, etc
Plain sheeted doors, windows
Fully glazed doors, windows
Partly panelled, partly glazed doors, windows
Collapsible gates
Rolling shutters
1.10
0.50
1.50
1.10
1.10
0.50
0.80
1.50
1.10
1.14
1.20
1.10
1.00
1.14
1.20
1.10
General
Expanded metal, grill work, railings, gates
Corrugated iron sheeting
AC corrugated sheeting
AC semi corrugated sheeting
12.12.
Oil bound Distemper
In regards to materials, surface preparation, application, equipment & protection, cleaning etc.
shall be as described above.
Application
Priming coat
The priming coat shall be with distemper conforming to IS: 428 in one coat. After the surface
defects are treated with gypsum which is allowed to set hard and wiped clean, the priming coat
is applied with distemper primer (when wall surface has not dried completely).
Newly plastered if required to be distempered before a period of six months shall be given a
coat of alkali resistant priming paint conforming to IS: 109 and allowed to dry for at least 48
hours before distempering is commenced.
Distemper coat
After the primer coat has dried at least for 48 hours, the surface shall be lightly sand papered
to make it smooth. Distemper is then applied in dry weather with a broad stiff brush in long
paralleled strokes, each coat being allowed to dry before the next coat is applied. The
subsequent coats shall be applied in the same way. Two coats of distemper shall be applied
over primer coat to obtain an even shade. A time interval of at least 24 hours shall be allowed
between successive coats to permit proper drying of preceding coat. For old work the distemper
shall be applied over the prepared surface in the same manner as in new work. 15 cm double
bristled distemper brushes shall be used. After each days work, brushes thoroughly washed in
hot water with soap solution and hung down to dry. Old brushes which are dirty and caked
with distemper shall not be used on the work.
Specifications
Page 130
Tender No: -1800000008
12.13.
Plastic Emulsion Paint :
Materials, surface preparation, Application, Equipment and protection, cleaning etc. shall be
as described under- Painting specifications. The plastic emulsion paints is not suitable for
application on external, wood, and iron surface, which are liable to heavy condensation. These
paints are to be used on internal surfaces except wooden and steel. Plastic emulsion paints as
per IS: 5411 of approved brand and manufacture and of the required shade shall be used.
Application
The paint is mixed thoroughly adding about 50% water and then strained through a cloth. The
paint is then applied on wall and allowed to dry thoroughly. A putty is prepared by mixing
whiting and paint and is filled wherever necessary in holes depressions etc.
For the second coat only about 15 to 20% water is added.
(The correct quantity of water to be added shall be as per manufacturer’s instructions)
The number of coat shall be two unless otherwise specified in the item. The paint will be
applied in the usual manner with brush, spray, or roller. The paint dries by evaporation of the
water content and as soon as the water has evaporated the film gets hard and the next coat
can be applied. The time of drying varies from one hour on absorbent surfaces to 2 to 3 hours
on non- absorbent surfaces.
The surface on finishing shall present a flat velvety smooth finish. If necessary more coats will
be applied till the surface presents a uniform appearance. Painting on old surface shall be as
described for new work except that the surface before application of paint shall be flattened
well to get the proper flat velvety finish after painting.
12.14.
Oil Paint :
Materials, surface preparation, application, equipment & protection, cleaning etc. shall be as
described under-Painting specifications.
Application
Unless otherwise specified, paint shall be applied with brushes. The contents of the drum and
tins shall be well stirred before using and occasionally during the use to prevent sedimentation
at the bottom.
Priming coat
The priming coat shall be made up of materials depending on the surfaces to be plastered and
specified or recommended by the manufacturer.
The primer shall be ready mixed primer of approved brand and manufacture and shall be
compatible with finished painting scheme.
Where primer for wood work is specified it shall be prepared as per manufacturers
specifications. The wood work to be painted shall be dry and free from moisture. The surface
shall be thoroughly cleaned. All unevenness surface shall be rubbed down smooth with sand
paper and shall be well dusted. Appropriate filler material conforming to IS: 345 with same
shade as paint shall be applied .
Finishing coat
Unless otherwise specified, the finishing shall be done in at least two coats of paint. The last
coat shall give a flat, semi glossy or glossy finish as directed by the Engineer-In-Charge.
Specifications
Page 131
Tender No: -1800000008
12.15.
Synthetic Enamel Paint :
In regards to materials, surface preparation, application, equipment & protection, cleaning etc.
shall be as described above. Synthetic enamel paint conforming to IS:2932 shall be of approved
brand and manufacture and of required shade.
Application
Priming coat
Primary coat shall be of ordinary paint of shade to match with the top coat as recommended by
the same manufacture. As top coat shall be used. Under coat shall be allowed to dry
overnight. It shall be rubbed next day with the finest grade of wet abrasive paper to ensure
smooth and even surface, free from brush marks and all loose particles brushed off.
Finishing coat
It shall be applied on properly primed surface. Subsequent coat shall not be applied till the
previous coat is dry. The previous coat shall be lightly sand prepared for better adhesion of
subsequent coats.
Top coats of synthetic enamel paint of desired shade shall be applied after the under coat is
thoroughly dry. Additional finishing coats shall be applied if found necessary to ensure
properly uniform glossy surface.
Unless otherwise specified, the finishing shall be done in at least two coats of paint. The last
coat shall give a flat, semi glossy or glossy finish as directed by the Engineer-In-Charge. If,
however, the surface is not satisfactory additional coats as required shall be applied to get
correct finish.
12.16.
Waterproof Cement Paint :
In regards to materials, surface preparation, application, equipment & protection, cleaning etc.
shall be as described above. The cement paint shall be conforming to IS : 5410 of approved
brand and manufacture and of required shade.
Application
Priming coat
Cement primer coat is used as a base coat on wall finish. The cement primer is composed of a
medium and pigments which are resistant to alkalies present in the cement in wall finish and
provides a barrier for the protection of subsequent coats. Primer coat material shall be as per
recommendation of finish coat material. Primer coat shall be preferably applied by brushing
and not by spraying on the clean dry and smooth surface. The surface shall be finished as
uniformly as possible leaving no brush marks. It shall be allowed to dry for at least 48 hours,
before subsequent coat.
Finishing coat
The solution shall be applied on the clean and wetted surface with brushes or spraying
machine. The solution shall be kept well stirred during the period of application. Cement paint
shall be mixed with water in two stages and strictly as per manufacturer’s instructions.
The surfaces shall be given one coat of paint. Care shall be taken so that the paint does not dry
out too rapidly. After 4 to 6 hours, the water shall be sprinkled over the surface to assist
curing and prevent cracking. After the first coat has dried (24 to 48 hours), the second coat
shall be applied in a similar manner. The finished surface shall be kept moist by occasional
sprinkling with water for seven days after painting.
Specifications
Page 132
Tender No: -1800000008
Water proof cement paint shall not be applied on surfaces already treated with white wash,
colour wash, distemper dry or oil bound, varnishes, paints etc.
Rate
The rate shall include the cost of all labour and materials involved in all the operations
described above including scaffolding, unless specified. Quoted rate shall be inclusive of
Cement primer coat unless separate item is specifically provided for.
12.17.
Acid Proof Paint
Material- Acid proof paint of approved brand and manufacturer and of required shade shall be
used.
Standards- In regards to materials, surface preparation, application, equipment and
protection, cleaning etc. shall be as described above.
Specifications
Page 133
Tender No: -1800000008
13. FLOORING:
Material
All tiles shall be of first quality of Indian make and shall be uniform in size, true and square
with sharp arises, perfectly flat, flawless without twist, cracks and other defects. They shall be
procured from approved sources. The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer-In-Charge
samples of different varieties he proposes to incorporate in the work. The Contractor shall
strictly conform only to the samples approved by the Engineer-In-Charge.
Tiles to be used for skirting and dado shall be of the same manufacture and shade as that for
floors.
13.1. Workmanship
The surfaces to be laid with flooring or dado shall be thoroughly hacked, joints of masonry
racked, cleaned of all mortar scales and concrete lumps and loose materials etc. and washed to
remove mud, dirt, oil, grease etc. from the surface and shall be thoroughly wetted.
All tiles shall be laid in a pattern given on the drawings or directed by the Engineer-In-Charge.
All tiles in floor shall be truly and evenly set and pressed in position to obtain uniform plane
surface. The skirting tiles shall be in true plane, level and plumb.
Flooring/dado work shall not be started unless and until the surface is approved by the
Engineer-In-Charge.
13.2. Indian Patent Stone (IPS) Flooring
Material
Material such as cement, sand, fine aggregate water etc. shall be as described under Mortars
specifications.
Laying
IPS shall be in concrete of specified proportion and thickness with metal size 12mm & below
well-graded. When used for terraces, an approved waterproofing compound shall be added to
the mix as per the specification of the manufacturer.
The surface of the sub-grade shall be thoroughly wetted and cement slurry shall be thoroughly
brushed into the surface just ahead of the finish.
The laying shall be done in alternative bays of 1.5 m x 1.5 m or other approved dimensions
with glass dividing strips of 25 mm. x 3 mm thick wherever specified. Only minimum quantity
of workable shall be used and the paving consolidated thoroughly by compacting with heavy
wooden battens.
Finishing operations shall follow shortly after compaction of concrete by trowelling three times
at intervals so as to produce uniform hard surface. Only just sufficient trowelling shall be done
to give a level surface. Successive trowelling shall be done till the moisture ceases to exude
from the mass. No dry cement shall be used directly on the surface to absorb moisture or to
stiffen the mix. The final trowelling shall be done well before concrete becomes too hard but at
such a time that considerable pressure is required to make any impression on the surface.
The paving shall be cured for at least 15 days and it shall be protected during this period with
hessian or other suitable material, which will not stain the surface. The laying and finishing
shall conform to IS: 2571.
Topping with a hardener
Specifications
Page 134
Tender No: -1800000008
If a floor hardener is specified, the cement concrete flooring shall be laid as described above
and the top finished with an approved hardener such as ‘Ironite’ or its equivalent. Ironite shall
be first mixed dry with cement in a proportion 1:4 by weight (one Ironite to 4 part of cement)
and this mix shall be sprinkled uniformly on the top of green cement concrete flooring after the
concrete is consolidated with wooden battens and before trowelling commences. The Ironite to
be used shall be such that 1.5 Kg. of Ironite is utilised for 1 Sq.m of area of cement concrete
flooring, unless specified.
Curing
The curing shall be done for a period of ten days. Curing shall not be commenced until the top
has hardened. Covering with empty cement gunnies shall be avoided as the colour is likely to
be bleached with the remnants of cement matter from the bags.
Measurements
Length and breadth shall be measured before laying skirting dado on wall plaster. No
deductions shall me made nor be extra paid for voids not exceeding 0.20 sq.m. Deductions for
ends of similar materials or other articles embedded shall not be for areas not exceeding 0.10
sq.m.
Rate
The rate shall include the cost of all materials and labour involved in all the operations
described above including application of cement slurry on base concrete including roughening
and cleaning the surface of base concrete. The base concrete shall be paid for separately.
13.3. Glazed tile work
Material
Material shall be generally as described under- Flooring specifications. Glazed tiles shall
conform to IS 777.
Tiles shall be evenly and well glazed over the top surface and shall be grooved and recessed in
parts on the rear face to provide the necessary key for mortar. They shall be of specified sizes
and thickness . The tolerance on facial dimension shall be ± 1.0 mm. and ± 0.5 mm. in
thickness.
For coloured tiles, only the glaze shall be coloured as specified.
Mortar
Cement mortars shall be as described as under –Mortar specifications and the proportion of
mortar shall be as specified in the respective items of BOQ.
Laying
Tiles shall be soaked in water for at least 6 hours prior to their use in the job.
Tiles shall be laid on cement and sand mortar (1:3) bedding of average thickness of 20mm and
shall be spread, tamped and corrected to proper levels and allowed to harden for a day before
the tiles are set. Over this bedding neat grey cement slurry (1:3) mix of honey like consistency
shall be spread at a rate of 3.3 Kg of cement per Sq.m.. Tiles shall be washed clean and fixed
in this grout one after another, each tile being gently tapped with a wooden mallet till it is
properly bedded and in true level and line with the adjoining tile. Cement slurry oozing out
through the joints shall be immediately wiped clean. Joints shall be fine (width 1.5mm) and
nearly undistinguishable. Joints shall be pointed with white cement and matching pigment
and finished neatly. The flooring shall be thoroughly cleaned with suitable hydrochloric acid
Specifications
Page 135
Tender No: -1800000008
before handing over. Joints shall be of straight fit joints as shown on the drawing or as
directed by the Engineer-In-Charge.
Pointing and Finishing
The joints shall be cleaned off the grey cement slurry with wire / coir brush or trowel to a
depth of 2 mm to 3 mm and all dust and loose mortar removed. Joints shall then be flush
pointed with white cement added with pigment if required to match the colour of tiles. After
curing, the surface shall be washed and finished clean. The finished floor shall not sound
hollow when tapped with a wooden mallet.
Curing
Work shall be properly cured for at least 7 days and kept well protected.
Measurement
Measurement shall be as described under –IPS flooring specifications.
Rate
The rate shall include the cost of all materials and labour involved in all the operations
described above including wastage and application of cement slurry on base concrete /
surface, filling of joints as specified above etc.
13.4. Glazed Ceramic Tiles Work
Material
Material shall be generally as described under- Flooring specifications. Ceramic
confirm to IS 13755 of 1st quality.
tiles shall
The finished tiles, when fractured will appear fine grained in texture, dense and homogeneous.
Tiles shall be sound, true to shape, flat and free from flaws and other manufacturing defects.
Mortar
Cement mortars shall be as described under –Mortar specifications and the proportion of
mortar shall be as specified in the BOQ.
Laying
Laying of ceramic tiles shall be as described under –Glazed tiles specifications.
Pointing and Finishing
Pointing and Finishing shall be as described under-Glazed tiles specifications.
Curing
Work shall be properly cured for at least 7 days and kept well protected.
Measurement
Measurement shall be as described under- IPS flooring specifications.
Rate
The rate shall include the cost of all materials and labour involved in all the operations
described above including application of cement slurry on base concrete/ surface.
Specifications
Page 136
Tender No: -1800000008
13.5. Polished Kotah, Cuddappa, Flooring, Skirting and Dado
Material
These shall be of first quality procured from approved sources. They shall be sound, durable,
uniform in size & colour, free from soft veins, cracks or other flaws, with their edges true &
square. These natural stones shall be of thickness not less then 20mm, unless specified. They
shall be machine cut with top surface double machine polished.
The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer-In-Charge two samples each of the different
stones, he proposes to incorporate in the work together with the relevant literature from the
suppliers. The Contractor shall strictly conform only to the samples approved by the EngineerIn-Charge.
Stones to be used for skirtings and dado shall be from the same stock and shade as used for
floors.
The surfaces on which the stone slabs are to be laid shall be cleaned of all dust and saturated
with water.
Dressing
The edges of stones to be pointed shall be true to line and dressed to the required depth all
round. All the exposed edge shall be neatly polished to give a neat appearance.
Every slab shall be cut to the required size and shape and fine chisel dressed on the sides to
the full depth so that a straight edge laid along the side of the stone shall be in full contact
with it. The sides (edges) shall be table rubbed with coarse sand or machine rubbed before
paving. All angles and edges of the slabs shall be true, square and free from chipping and
surface shall true and plane.
Tolerance in thickness of stone shall be ± 3 mm.
The slabs shall be set in cement slurry (thin paste of neat cement shall be applied to sides,
bottom and the prepared base) over 20 mm. thick lime mortar (1:2) bedding and tamped with
wooden mallet. The joints shall be flushed with cement. The details of operations are similar as
for marble mosaic tile work.
Work shall be properly cured for at least 7 days and kept well protected.
Pointing and Finishing
The joints shall be cleaned off the grey cement slurry with wire / coir brush or trowel to a
depth of 2 mm to 3 mm and all dust and loose mortar removed. Joints shall then be flush
pointed with white cement added with pigment if required to match the colour of tiles. After
curing, the surface shall be washed and finished clean. The finished floor shall not sound
hollow when tapped with a wooden mallet.
Polishing and finishing
Polishing and finishing shall be machine polished in three stages with different grades of
polishing stones in the machine . After the first stage of polishing ,a grouting coat with
matching cement is given. After the final coat oxalic acid crystals ground into powder shall be
dusted over the surface at the rate of 32.5 gm/Sq.m sprinkled with water and rubbed hard
with a pad of woollen rags by means of the polishing machine.
Measurement
Measurement shall be as described under-IPS flooring specifications.
Specifications
Page 137
Tender No: -1800000008
The measurement of treads and risers shall be in linear meter or in Sq. m. as specified in the
Bill of Quantities. Only clear visible dimensions shall be considered ignoring bearing in plaster,
masonry etc.
Length shall be measured along the finished face of riser, skirting or dado correct to a cm.
Height shall be measured from the finished level of tread of floor to the top. This shall be
measured correct to a mm in the case of risers of steps and skirting and correct to two places
of decimal. Lining of pillars etc. shall also be measured under this item.
Rate
The rate shall include the cost of all materials and labour involved in all the operations
described above including application of cement slurry on base concrete/ surface, polishing
etc.
13.6. Vinyl Flooring
Material
The PVC flooring material shall conform to IS: 3462. It may in the form of tiles, sheets or rolls
as specified. It shall consist of thoroughly blended composition of thermoplastic binder, filler
and pigments. The thermoplastic binder shall consist substantially to one or both of the
following:
a) Vinyl chloride polymer
b) Vinyl chloride copolymer.
The polymeric material shall be compounded with plasticizers & stabilizers.
The thickness of PVC tiles for normal floor covering shall be normally1.5, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, or 4.0
mm and only specified thickness shall be used for work.
Tiles shall be laid as per the design/details furnished by the Engineer-In-Charge conforming to
the relevant IS Standards.
Rubber based adhesives are suitable for fixing over concrete, wooden and metal sub-floors.
PVA based adhesives shall be used for concrete and wooden sub-floors. PVA based adhesives
are not suitable for metallic surfaces and also for locations where there is constant spillage of
water.
Laying and fixing
The surface of the floor or wall to be treated with these tiles shall be smooth and even. This
surface as also the back side of the tile sheets shall be cleaned with dry cloth or cotton waste
and then the sticking solution shall be applied evenly thereto and the same shall be allowed to
dry. The sheets shall be placed with absolutely close joints and pressed at top from one end to
the other to ensure proper sticking without any air gap.
The sheets shall finally be cleaned with cotton waste dipped in cleaning solution to remove any
stains etc.
Measurement
Measurement shall be as described under-IPS flooring specifications.
Rate
The rate shall include the cost of all materials and labour involved in all the operations
described above including all required adhesives and surface preparations, cleaning etc.
Specifications
Page 138
Tender No: -1800000008
13.7. Marble Mosaic Tiles Flooring/Skirting/Dado
Material
Marble mosaic tiles shall be first quality, hydraulic pressed and shall conform to IS 1237. They
shall be with white cement and pigments and marble chips of sizes as required.
Tiles shall be 250 x 250 square and not less than 20 mm. thick unless otherwise
.Tolerances allowed are:
•
Length and breadth
± 1 mm.
•
Thickness
± 5 mm.
specified
The top surface shall be smooth and polished with upper wearing layer of
minimum 5 mm.
thickness consisting of a mixture of marble chips of approved sizes and colour and white
cement.
Mortar
Cement mortars shall be as described under –Mortar specifications and the proportion of
mortar shall be as specified in the BOQ.
Laying
Tiles shall be soaked in water for at least 6 hours prior to their use in the job.
Cement mortar (1:3) bedding of average thickness of 20 mm. (thickness at any place being not
less than 10 mm.) shall be spread, tamped and corrected to proper levels and allowed to
harden for a day before the tiles are set. Over this bedding, neat gray cement slurry (1:3 mix) of
honey like consistency shall be spread at a rate of 4.4. Kg. of cement per Sq.m. over such an
area as would accommodate about 20 tiles. Tiles shall be washed clean and fixed in this grout
one after another, each tile being gently tapped with a wooden mallet till it is properly bedded
and in true level and line with the adjoining tile. Cement slurry oozing out through the joints
shall be immediately wiped clean. Joints shall be fine (width 1.5 mm) and nearly
undistinguishable. Joints shall be pointed with matching cement and finished neatly.
For skirting and dado work, the brick or concrete wall surface to which the tiles are to be fixed
shall first be wetted with clean water and later covered with 16 mm. cement mortar (1:3).
Before this is hardened, tiles with cement slurry shall be laid and gently tapped with a wooden
mallet in a true plane and level. The fixing shall be done from bottom upwards.
Curing
Work shall be properly cured for at least 10 days and kept well - protected.
Polishing
When the flooring is ready for polishing, the joints shall be rubbed with Carborundum stones
to effect proper levelling. The flooring shall then be machine polished in three stages with
different grades of polishing stones in the machine. After the first stage of polishing, a grouting
coat with matching cement is given. After the final coat, oxalic acid crystals ground into
powder shall be dusted over the surface at the rate of 32.5 gm/Sq.m sprinkled with water and
rubbed hard with a pad of woollen rags by means of the polishing machine.
Skirting / dado shall be hand polished with Carborundum stones.
Specifications
Page 139
Tender No: -1800000008
The finished floor and skirting / dado shall give a uniform shade of tiles. Any defective tiles
shall be removed by the Contractor and suitably replaced at his own cost.
Measurement
Measurement shall be as described under- IPS flooring specifications. Length shall be
measured along the finished face of skirting or dado correct to a cm.
Rate
The rate shall include the cost of all materials and labour involved in all the operations
described above including application of cement slurry on base concrete/ surface, polishing
etc.
Specifications
Page 140
Tender No: -1800000008
14. ROOFING
14.1. Corrugated Colour coated steel sheet single skin for roofing/ Cladding :
Material
•
Manufacturer – Product reference here below given are of M/s. Interarch Building Products
Private Limited. However, other similar approved manufacturer’s product reference can be
used subject to prior approval of Engineer-In-Charge.
•
Product Reference - TRACDEK, HI-RIB AZ 150 GSM SMP Galvalume
•
0.50 mm (including metallic coating) cold rolled galvalume steel, 550 MPa
yield stress
(ASTM A 446 Grade-E) with hot dip metallic coating of AZ 150 (150 gm / sq.m, zinc /
aluminium alloy coating of 55% and 45% respectively conforming to ASTM 792/AS 1397).
Storage on Site
Storage /stacking of the material shall generally in confirmation with IS 4082 unless otherwise
specified by the manufacturer. Material shall be protected from damage while stored on site.
When they are stacked for any length of time, it is recommended that cover be provided.
Packs of sheets shall be kept dry in transit and on site to prevent water and / or condensation
being trapped between adjacent surfaces. Packs of sheets standing on site shall be stored
clear off the ground. Sheets shall be handled using clean dry gloves.
Paint
20 microns exterior coat of silicon modified polyester (SMP) paint system over 5 micron
polyester back coat over 5 micron approved primer. Colour of the roofing and cladding sheet
shall be as approved by the Employer
Laying and fixing
Roofing sheets shall be factory cut and supplied in required lengths (upto 12m) to suit shop
drawings. Sheets shall be crest fixed to purlins with 12 x 14 x 55 mm mechanically galvanized
self drilling fasteners with EPDM seals (one fastener on each crest, unless specified). Colour
caps same as that of roofing to be supplied along with fasteners. End laps of roofing to be
minimum 200 mm.
Cladding sheets shall be supplied in required lengths (upto 12 m) to suit shop drawings.
Sheets shall be valley fixed with 12 x 14 x 20 mm mechanically galvanized Self drilling
fasteners with EPDM seals (one fasteners in each valley, unless specified). Colour caps same
as that of cladding to be supplied along with fasteners. End laps of cladding to be minimum
100 mm.
Roofing and cladding shall generally comply with the following:
•
•
•
•
•
Slope of roofing shall be as shown on approved fabrication drawing.
Cut panels, sheets and flashings shall give clean true lines with no burrs.
Cut openings to minimum size necessary.
Lay panels and sheets with exposed joints of side laps away from prevailing wind unless
shown otherwise on drawings.
Panel and sheet ends, laps and raking cut edges fully supported and with fixings at top
of lap unless otherwise specified.
Specifications
Page 141
•
•
•
•
Tender No: -1800000008
Drill holes, position at regular intervals in straight lines, centred on support bearings or
as shown on the drawing.
Remove dust and other foreign matter before finally fixing panels and sheets.
After completion check fixings to ensure water tightness .
Cut edges paint to match face finish.
Foam fillers for roofing
Self adhesive PU form (polyurethane) fillers shall be supplied as per manufacturer’s
instructions matching to the shape of roof profile and to be fixed along the ridge and eaves end
of roofing.
Finish
The roof when completed shall be true to lines and slopes and shall be leak proof. The ridge
should be notched at the crest & turned down, at the ridge the valley of the roof to be turned
up to prevent entry of water & dust.
Safety Precautions
No person other than workmen employed by the roofing contractor shall be permitted access
to any area over which the sheeting is being laid. Cat ladders or roof boards should in
variably be used by men working on the roofs. The observations of this rule which is advocated
primarily on the grounds of safety, will also avoid damage to the roofing materials.
All personnel on roof top shall have safety belts tied to life-line attached from the ridge to the
eaves and also any other safety as per requirement of the manufacturer’s instructions.
Scaffolding for cladding
Only steel ‘H’ frames shall be used for scaffolding. The scaffolding shall be design to execute
the work at 30 meters height and same shall be checked from the Engineer-In-Charge.
Material warranty
At least minimum 10 years warranty against corrosion of material shall be given.
Leakages
Leakages if any, observed during contract period, including 2 years after expiry of defects
liability period rectification and maintenance shall be the responsibility of the contractor at his
own cost.
Measurements
The length and breadth shall be measured correct to a cm.
correct to two places of decimal.
Area shall be worked in sq.m.
The superficial area of roof / cladding shall be measured net ‘ as laid ’ and paid for accordingly.
Laps shall not be paid for separately. Measurement shall be taken on the flat and not girthed.
Roof with curved sheets shall be measured and paid for separately.
No deduction in measurement shall be made for opening up to 0.4 sq.m and nothing extra shall
be allowed for forming such openings. For any opening exceeding 0.4 sq.m in area, deduction
in measurements for the full opening shall be made.
Cutting across corrugation shall be measured on the flat and not girthed. No additions shall be
made for laps cut through.
Specifications
Page 142
Tender No: -1800000008
14.2. Colour coated sheet for flashing, capping & trims, etc. :
Material
These shall be formed out of same substrates and corresponding thickness as that of the
roofing / cladding sheets and shall be supplied in standard lengths of 2.5 m, unless specified
in the required shapes and girths.
Fixing
These shall be supplied in required lengths (upto 2.5 m) to suit shop drawings and shall laid /
fixed as per approved fabrication drawing. These shall be stitched to the roofing / cladding with
10x12x20 mm hex-head mechanically galvanised self drilling fasteners with EPDM seals at
every 500 mm c/c, unless specified. The end laps shall be stitched at minimum every 50 mm
c/c unless otherwise specifically instructed by the manufacturer.
Finish
The edges of the flashing / capping and Trims shall be straight from end to end and their
surfaces should be plane and parallel to the general plane of the roof. The ridges and hips
shall fit in squarely on the sheets.
Storage, paint, safety precautions, warrantee etc. shall be as described under
roofing and cladding specifications.
Measurement
The measurements shall be taken for net ‘as laid’ length along the centre line of flashing
capping or Trims, correct to a cm. Laps provided in between shall not be measured.
14.3. 2mm thick Fibre Reinforced Plastic corrugated transparent sheet
Materials
Manufacturer – Product reference here below given are of M/s. Interarch Building Products
Private Limited. However, other similar approved manufacturer’s product reference can be
used subject to prior approval of Engineer-In-Charge.
Product Reference
FRP sheets shall be supplied in 2mm thick matching to the roof profile in required length to
suit approved fabrication drawing.
Storage of materials, safety precautions, warrantee, leakages etc. shall be as described under
roofing/ cladding specifications.
Fixing
FRP sheets shall be fixed to purlins with 12 x 14 x 55 mm fasteners with EPDM seal and
having cyclonic washers. Butyl tape shall be applied on the side/ end lap of FRP sheets and
near about roofing sheets.
Fix in profile, in accordance with manufacturer’s day light system recommendations, technical
manual. Fixing should not be over tightened. Overlap (side and end) as per approved drawing.
Measurement
Specifications
Page 143
Tender No: -1800000008
The length & breadth shall be measured correct to a cm up to two places of decimal. The
superficial area of roofing shall be measured net ‘as laid’. Laps shall not be measured
separately. Measurement shall be taken on the flat and not girthed.
Rates
The rate shall include the cost of all the materials and labour involved in all the operations
described above including necessary fittings and accessories scaffolding for cladding, laps as
per drawing, safety precautions, overlaps etc.,
14.4. Colour coated steel sheet for gutters
Material
These shall be formed out of same substrates and corresponding thickness as that of the
roofing / cladding sheets and shall be supplied in standard lengths of 2.5 m. in the required
shapes and girths.
Profile
The depth, width and height should be as per the rainfall catchments area and as approved.
Fixing
Gutters shall be fixed as per profile and drawings approved for construction.
The gutter shall be fixed on MS brackets of size and location as shown on the drawings. The
end laps of gutter shall be bolted with galvanized (175 gauge minimum) nuts and bolts with
metallic washers to suit design
Finish
The edges of the gutters shall be straight from end to end and their surface should be plain of
the roof. Storage, paint, safety precautions, warrantee etc. shall be as described under roofing
and cladding specifications.
Measurement
The measurements shall be taken for net ‘as laid’ length along the centre line of gutters correct
to a cm. Laps provided in between shall not be measured.
Rate
MS brackets shall be measured and paid for separately under relevant item.
Specifications
Page 144
Tender No: -1800000008
15. DISMANTLING & DEMOLISHING:
The item wise detailed specifications are intended for the general description of quality,
workmanship, etc. desired for the items covered in the Schedule of Items. The Specifications are
not, however, intended to cover the minute details and the work shall be executed according to
the relevant latest Indian Standard Codes. In absence of the later, the work shall be executed
according to the prevailing local Public Works Department Practice or to the recommendations of
American and British Standard Institution at the discretion of the Engineer-In-Charge.
15.1. Scaffolding
Single or double scaffolding shall be provided by the Contractor as and when required.
15.2. Objective
The desired technique to be adopted in carrying out the demolition and dismantling work of
existing structure shall be such that the fragments falling out of such operation can be
contained within the work area or taking suitable protection so as to prevent materials from
going out. This would relieve the surrounding area from any uncertain or uncontrolled
behaviour of dismantled materials.
The rubbish / materials after dismantling shall also be stored systematically and disposed off
immediately outside the plant boundary in order to ensure no major formation of heaps inside /
adjacent to the work site and not hamper in any way the normal business operation of the
Employer.
The term demolition implies breaking up. This shall consist of demolishing whole or part of work
including all relevant items as specified or shown on the drawings.
The term ‘Dismantling’ implies carefully removing without damage (up or down). This shall
consist of dismantling one or more part of the structures / facilities as specified or shown on the
drawings.
15.3. Precautions
All materials obtained from dismantling or demolition shall be the property of the Contractor
once the materials are taken out of the boundary of MDL after completion of the necessary
gate pass and other formalities. But till such time the materials shall be kept in safe custody
as per the directives of the Engineer-In-Charge.
The demolition shall always be planned beforehand and shall be done in reverse order of the
one in which the structure was constructed. The scheme shall be got approved from the
Engineer-In-Charge before starting the work.
Necessary propping, shoring and / or underpinning shall be provided for the safety of the
adjoining work or property before dismantling and demolishing is taken up and the work shall
be carried out in such a way that no damage is caused to the adjoining work or property.
Wherever required, as per the opinion of the Engineer-In-Charge, temporary enclosures or
partitions shall be provided at the Contractor’s cost.
Necessary precautions shall be taken to keep down the dust nuisance.
Dismantling shall be done in a systematic manner. All materials which are likely to be
damaged by dropping from a height or demolishing roofs, masonry, etc. shall be carefully
removed first. The dismantled articles shall be passed by hand, where necessary, lowered to
the ground (and not thrown) and then properly stacked as directed by the Engineer-In-Charge.
Where fixing is done by nails, screws, bolts, rivets, etc. dismantling shall be done by taking out
the fixed items with proper tools and not by tearing or ripping of.
Specifications
Page 145
Tender No: -1800000008
Any serviceable material, obtained during dismantling or demolition, shall be separated out
and stacked properly as directed by the Engineer-In-Charge within work site for verification
required for gate pass and other formalities for taking outside the boundary. All unserviceable
materials, rubbish, etc. shall be disposed off immediately outside the Owner’s premises as
directed by the Engineer-In-Charge.
15.4. General
Necessary data such as building size, wall thickness, construction materials, etc. that may be
required shall have to be collected by the Tenderer from MDL site at his own expenses.
15.5. Information to be supplied by the Tenderer along with Tender
The information to be provided for by the Tenderer, unless otherwise specified, shall include
the following :
To submit his method of demolition duly supported by specifications and drawings and sequence
of operation along with a list of equipment, plants and machineries to be employed during such
operation, to meet the above mentioned objective.
15.6. Work to be provided by the Contractor
a) To arrange all the formalities as per requirement of statutory rules, if his method involves use
of explosives. He has to obtain permission from appropriate authority of buying, storing,
handling & making use of explosives.
b) To notify, the Employer for arranging to shut off all gas, water, electricity, steam and other
service lines running over ground or underground. Any temporary service connections
required for the demolition work shall be separately taken and arranged by the Contractor.
c) Any preliminary work, necessary for Contractor’s method of demolition.
d) To furnish all materials, labour, tools and plant and all consumables required for this work
and its related temporary work such as cordoning the area, staging etc.
e) To furnish the details of safety measures for human life / property / structures, the
Contractor proposes to take during the blasting operation of explosives, if he proposes to use
on this demolition work. This should be strictly as per rules and regulations laid down by
the concerned authority for explosives to be used in this work.
15.7. Work by Others
No work under this specification will be provided for by any agency other than the Contractor,
unless specifically mentioned otherwise elsewhere in the Contract or approved by the
Engineer-In-Charge / Employer.
15.8. Codes & Standards
The demolition work shall be carried out as per Indian Standard Code of Practice No. IS 4130 1970 (Safety Code for demolition of buildings) or any other relevant Indian Standard
Specifications and Codes of Practice. If demolition by blasting is adopted IS 4081 (Safety Code
for blasting and related drilling operations) shall be followed. However, if any, particular
aspect of the work is not specifically covered by any Indian Standard Specifications or any
other standard practices, Engineer-In-Charge’s instruction shall be followed.
15.9. Execution
The materials available after dismantling and demolition will be deemed to be the property of
the Contractor once the material are disposed off from the plant boundary and the amount
Specifications
Page 146
Tender No: -1800000008
offered by the Contractor against each of the facilities / buildings / structures are received by
the Employer.
It is presumed that the Contractor will adopt the most suitable method of demolition and
dismantling to protect the materials and its surroundings. While doing so the Contractor shall
ensure the following, which should be considered as binding towards the method and
specification adopted by the Contractor:
•
Total safety of the people working in the area of the Employer, other agencies employed by
the Employer as well as those employed by the Contractor.
•
Safety and no damage to the adjoining properties, facilities or services.
•
Disposal immediately after dismantling to keep the area clean after the days work and not
more than one truckload being accumulated.
•
No noise or dust nuisance around the area of working.
•
No obstruction to vehicular / pedestrian traffic during dismantling and disposal inside the
plant boundary as well as outside municipal areas.
•
No hindrance in the Employer’s day to day production work or other operation.
•
No accidents or other hazards.
15.10.
Blasting
In special cases, the Contractor may be allowed to resort to controlled blasting at the sole
discretion of the Employer/Engineer-In-Charge. The blasting, if allowed, will normally be for
underground and foundation works The work shall strictly be carried out as per the guidelines
given below.
General guidelines for use of explosives
In case use of explosive is adopted for demolition work, specific permission of Engineer-InCharge will have to be taken by the Contractor for blasting and he shall also obtain a valid
blasting license from the authorities concerned.
The contractor shall employ competent and experienced supervisors and licensed blaster incharge of each set of operations of blasting as well as operations of loading, unloading and
transporting of such explosives from the mezzanine, who shall be held personally responsible
to ensure that all safety regulations are carried out before and during the progress of blasting
and also during the transportation and handling of explosive materials.
Before any blasting is carried out, Contractor shall intimate the Engineer-In-Charge and obtain
his approval in writing for resorting to such operations. He shall intimate the hours of firing
charges, the nature of explosive to be used and the precautions taken for ensuring safety.
Contractor shall ensure that all workmen and the personnel at site are withdrawn from an
area within 200 metre radius from the firing points, at least 15 minutes before firing time by
sounding warning whistle. The area shall be encircled by red flags. Clearance signal shall also
be even by sounding a distinguishing whistle / siren.
The blasting near any existing building, equipment or any other property shall be done under
cover and Contractor has to make all such necessary muffling arrangements. Covering may
preferably be done by M.S. plates with adequate dead weight over them. Blasting shall be done
with small charges only and where directed by Engineer-In-Charge; a trench shall have to be
cut by chiselling prior to the blasting operation separating the area under blasting from the
existing structures.
Specifications
Page 147
Tender No: -1800000008
The firing shall be supervised by a experienced Supervisor. If the blasts do not tally with the
number fired, the misfired holes shall be carefully located after half an hour and when located,
shall be exploded by drilling a fresh hole near the misfired hole (but not nearer than 600mm
from it) and by exploding a new charge.
A wooden tamping rod with a flat end shall be used to push cartridges home by metal rod or
hammer shall not be permitted. The charges shall be placed firmly into place and not rammed
or pounded. After a hole is filled to the required depth, the balance of the hole shall be filled
with stemming, which may consist of sand or stone dust or similar inert material.
In no case shall blasting be allowed closer than 30 meters to any structures or to locations
where concrete has just been placed. In the later case the concrete must be at least 7 (seven)
days old.
Contractor shall preferably detonate the explosives electrically.
The explosive shall be exploded by means of primer, which shall be fired by detonating a fuse
instantaneous detonator (F.I.D) or other approved cables. The detonators with F.I.D. shall be
connected by special nippers.
In dry weather, ordinary low explosive gunpowder may be used.
explosive like gelatine with detonator and fuse wire may be used.
In damp weather, high
The quantity and strength of explosive used, shall be such as will neither damage nor crack the
other structures outside the limits of execution. All precautions, as directed by Engineer-InCharge, shall be taken during the blasting operations and care shall be taken that no damage is
caused to adjoining buildings or structures as a result of blasting operations. In case of any
damage done due to negligence, the same shall be rectified by the Contractor to the satisfaction
of Engineer-In-Charge at his own cost.
The Contractor shall observe rules and regulations controlling the storage and handling of
explosives as exercised by the Inspector of explosives or licensing authority. The fees if any
required for obtaining such license, shall be borne by Contractor. Contractor shall have to make
necessary storage facilities for the explosives etc. as per rules of local, State or Central
Government authorities and statutory bodies / regulations. Explosives shall be kept dry and
shall not be exposed to direct rays of sun or be stored in the vicinity of fire, stoves, steam pipes
or heated metal, etc. No explosives shall be brought near the work in excess of quantity required
for a particular amount of firing to be done; and surplus left after filling the holes shall be
removed to the magazine. The magazine shall be built as far away as possible from the area to
be blasted. The Engineer-In-Charge’s prior approval shall be taken for the proposed location of
the magazine and the structure of magazine shall be constructed as specified in the rules and
regulations laid down by the concerned authorities. The Contractor shall build the magazine at
his own cost. The contractor shall make this own arrangement for the site of this structure.
Contractor shall be responsible for any accident to workmen, public or Employer’s property due
to blasting operations. Contractor shall also be responsible for strict observances of rules, laid
by Inspector of Explosives, or any other authority duly constituted under the State and / or
Union Government.
Proper account of the explosive materials shall be kept at site as well as in the magazine as per
the rules and regulations of the concerned authority. For this purpose, registers shall be kept by
the Contractor and shall be filled and signed daily by his authorized and licensed blaster incharge indicating therein the proper and correct account of the stock of explosive material
brought in. For this purpose day to day operation-wise entry shall be made in the registers.
Misfired and unfired charges of explosive shall also be noted in the register indicating the place,
for safety.
Twenty four hours guards on duty shall be engaged by the Contractor to safeguard all kinds of
explosive materials and equipment at the place of magazine as well as during the transportation
period and on site when brought for using the same. Any theft, misuse or mishandling of the
Specifications
Page 148
Tender No: -1800000008
explosive materials shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and the Contractor shall
indemnify the owner for this purpose and for the damages of any kind which may occur due to
blasting of explosive in the magazine, during transportation, during handling in the work or due
to any accidental cause.
The Contractor shall make his own arrangement of transportation of required quantities of
explosive materials from the magazine to the work site as per the rules and regulations of the
concerned authorities.
The Contractor shall have to note that live electrical circuits of high voltage may be passing
overhead / underground and shall be likely to remain live at the time of operation of demolition
work. The Contractor shall take all safety measures in this regard.
15.11.
Rates
The rate shall include the cost of all labour involved and tools used in demolishing and
dismantling including scaffolding. The rate shall also include the charges for separating out
and stacking the serviceable material properly and disposing off unserviceable material out
side the premises into approved dumping grounds.
Specifications
Page 149
Tender No: -1800000008
16. MISCELLANEOUS:
16.1. Brickbat Coba
Brickbat coba shall be prepared from well-burnt hard broken bricks 5 mm. to 30 mm. in size
proportioned as 1 Cu.m. of brick aggregate to 0.35 Cu.m. of slaked lime.
Brick aggregate shall be soaked in water for a sufficiently long time prior to its mixing with
lime.
16.2. Putty
Putty shall be made by mixing and kneading whiting with sufficient linseed oil to render it into
a stiff paste.
Putty used for fixing glass in wooden frames shall conform to IS 419 and that used for fixing in
metal sashes to IS 420. Putty shall be free from impurities like dust, grit etc.
16.3. Bitumen: Bitumen for filling joints shall conform to IS 3117 / IS 3037.
16.4. Jointing Materials
Joint Filler
Performed joint filler shall be of bituminous material, non-extruding and resilient type and
conform to IS 1838.
Sealing Compound
Sealing compounds shall be of an approved brand and shall conform to Grade “A” of IS 1834.
They shall have good adhesive properties free from any corrosive effect and shall not slump in
vertical or inclined joint, nor shall they bleed into or corrode the materials with which they are
in permanent contact.
16.5. Galvanised iron Chain link fencing
Materials
The material requirement shall confirm to IS : 2721 latest edition. The chain link fencing shall
be woven from 3.55mm dia. wire with mesh size of 50mm, unless specified. The mesh wire
shall not vary from the specified dia. by more than 0.05mm
All steel wires shall be hot dipped galvanized wire and dia of the wire shall be 3.55mm. The
dia. shall be measured over the galvanized coating.
The line wire shall be 4mm dia. mild steel.
The stirrup wire for securing the line wires to the intermediate posts shall be 2.5mm diameter
mild steel and post of MS 75 x 75 x 6mm angle unless otherwise specified.
The tying wire for securing the chain link fencing to the line wire shall be 1.6mm diameter mild
steel.
Hair pin staples for fastening down the bottom of galvanized chain line fencing to the concrete
sill shall be of 3.55mm wire. The ends shall be bent outwards to secure anchorage.
Cleats for eye bolts shall be of uniform size and shall consists of mild steel angle of 75 x 50 x
6mm. Unless specified or otherwise shown on the drawing.
Specifications
Page 150
Tender No: -1800000008
The eye bolt strainer shall consist of bolts with welded eye sufficiently threaded and fitted with
a nut and washer.
Two way eye bolt strainer shall have suitable ring nuts fitted after wires have been strained on
one side.
Stretcher bar shall consist of mild steel flats 25mm x 4.75mm, unless specified. they shall be
secured to the cleats by steel bolts.
Fixing
The chain link fencing shall be strained between each pair of straining posts and secured to
each straining post by means of a stretcher bar. On of the top line wires shall be threaded
through the appropriate adjacent rows of mesh, care being taken that no meshes in the rows
are bye passed by the wire except where deviation is necessary at the straining posts. The
second top line wire shall be stained in front of the fencing. The fencing shall be attached to
the top and bottom line wires by wire ties spaced 150mm apart and to the other line wires by
wire ties spaced 450mm apart.
Continuous sill 125mm wide x 225 mm high for full length between post shall be cast with the
top 25mm above G.L. and 25mm below the chain link fencing. Hair pin staples shall be
threaded through the bottom row of mesh at 0.75m c/c and set in the masonry to a depth of
150mm.
Rates
The rate shall also include supplying and fixing necessary galvanized line wires, stirrup wires,
tying wires, hair pin staples for fixing the fence in masonry / sill, etc. tensioning the line wire
and fencing, all materials and labour etc. required to complete the job as per drawings or as
per direction of Engineer-In-Charge excluding structural steel work like MS post and flat bar
which shall be measured separately.
16.6. Pipe Sleeves for conduits / pipe crossing etc.
Materials
Material of the pipe sleeves shall be as described in the item description( BOQ) conforming to
the relevant IS Standard. Length and diameter of the pipe to be provided shall be as described
in the item description of the BOQ.
Making holes / chases in the concrete / masonry
Holes / chases of required size shall be done carefully during construction as shown on the
drawing or as specified in the item description or as directed by the Engineer-In-Charge. Any
damage to the adjoining portion or to any other item shall be made good at contractor’s cost as
directed by the Engineer-In-Charge.
Embedding pipe sleeves
After insertion of pipe sleeves, the holes / chases shall be repaired with cement concrete 1:2:4
and the surface finished to match with existing surface. The top and bottom shall be finished
properly to make the joint leak proof by cement grouting of areas around. Conduits, pipes etc.
and provision of chicken mesh there on prior to plastering. The specifications for cement
concrete work and finishing etc. shall be same as described under - Cement Concrete Work
specification.
Specifications
Page 151
Tender No: -1800000008
17. ROAD WORK:
17.1. Specifications for road work shall be as described under Ministry of Road Transport &
Highways (MORTH). Under relevant clauses as applicable.
17.2. Factory made Precast concrete paver blocks :
Materials
Cement
The cement used in the manufacture of high quality factory made precast concrete paving
block shall be conforming to IS 12269 latest (53 grade) ordinary Portland cement or IS 8112
(43 grade ordinary Portland cement). The minimum cement content in concrete used for
making paver blocks should be 400 kg/cu.m.
Aggregates
The fine and coarse aggregates shall consist of naturally occurring crushed or uncrushed
materials, which apart from the grading requirements comply with IS 383 (latest). The fine
aggregates used shall contain a minimum of 25 % natural silicon sand. Lime stone aggregates
shall not be used. Aggregates shall contain no more than 3% by weight of clay and shall be
free from deleterious salts and contaminants.
Water
The water shall be clean and free from any deleterious matter. It shall meet the requirements
stipulated in IS: 456-2000.
Other materials
Any other material/ingredients used in the concrete shall conform to latest IS specifications.
Paver Block Characteristics
The factory made precast concrete paver block (conforming to IS 2745-1974), shall have a size
of 200 x 100 x 100 mm and shall have a 6 mm peripheral chamfer on the top edges. The
maximum dimensional deviation from the stated size shall be as follows –
Length/Width
Thickness
+/- 2 mm
+/- 3 mm
The average compressive strength of precast blocks when tested in accordance with the
relevant IS Code shall not be less than 45 N/sq. mm. For every 1000 sq.m. of laid area,
minimum 6 Nos. blocks shall be tested.
Sand (conforming to relevant IS Code) bedding shall have a compacted thickness of 50 mm.
The sand for this purpose shall be clean, sharp and containing not more than 5 % silt and
clay.
The concrete pavers should be perpendicular after release from the mould and the same
should be retained until the laying.
The surface should be of anti-skid and anti-glare type.
The paver should have uniform chamfers to facilitate easy drainage of surface run off.
Specifications
Page 152
Tender No: -1800000008
The pavers should have uniform interlocking space of 2 mm to 3 mm to ensure compacted
sand filling after vibration on the paver surface.
The concrete mix design should be followed for each batch of materials separately and
automatic batching plant is to be used to achieve uniformity in strength and quality.
The pavers shall be manufactured in single layer only.
Skilled labour should be employed for laying blocks to ensure line and level for laying, desired
shape of the surface and adequate compaction of the sand in the joints.
The pavers are to be skirted all round with kerbing using solid concrete blocks of size 100 mm
x 200 mm x 400 mm or as directed by the Engineer-In-Charge. The kerbing should be
embedded for 100 mm depth. The concrete used for kerbing shall be cured properly for
minimum 7 days.
Laying
Priming
It will be the responsibilities of the Contractor to ensure that the manhole / pipeline cable
trenches / circular drainage system etc. raised to driveway level using the requisite materials
as per instruction of Engineer-In-Charge. The areas of potholes / deep depressions at the
isolated locations also have to be filled up before laying the paver blocks. No extra pavements
will be made for this purpose.
It will be the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that undulations on the pavers blocks
are eliminated after the traffic is allowed on it. Proper slope for drainage of water needs to be
ensured by the Contractor. All necessary materials, tools, tackles are required to be arranged
by the Contractor.
Bedding sand course
The bedding sand shall consist of clean well graded sand passing through 4.75 mm sleeve and
suitable for concrete. The bedding should be from either a single source or blended to achieve
the following grading –
In sieve size
% Passed
9.52 mm.
4.75 mm
2.36 mm
1.18 mm.
600 microns
300 microns
150 microns
75 microns
100
95-100
80-100
60-100
25-60
10-30
5-15
0-10
Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that single-sized, gap-graded sands or sands
containing an excessive amount of fins or plastic fins are not used. The sand particles should
preferably be sharp not rounded as sharp sand possess higher strength and resist the
migration of sand from under the block to less frequency areas even though sharp sands are
relatively more difficult to compact than rounded sands, the use of sharp sands is preferred for
the more heavily trafficked driveways. The sand used for bedding shall be free of any
deleterious soluble salts or other contaminants likely to cause efflorescence.
The sand shall be of uniform moisture content and within 4% - 8% when spread and shall be
protected against rain when stock piled prior to spreading. Saturated sand shall not be used.
The bedding sand shall be spread loose in a uniform layer as per drawing. The compacted
Specifications
Page 153
Tender No: -1800000008
uniform thickness shall be of 50 mm and within tolerance of ± 5 mm. Thickness variation
shall not be used to correct irregularities in the base course surface.
The spread sand shall be carefully maintained in a loose dry condition and protected against
pre-compaction both prior to and following screeding. Any pre-compacted sand or screeded
sand left overnight shall be loosened before further laying of paving blocks take place.
Sand shall be slightly screeded in a loose condition to the predetermined depth only slightly
ahead of the laying of paving unit.
Any depressions in the screeded sand exceeding 5 mm shall be loosened, raked and rescreeded before laying of paving blocks.
Laying of interlocking paver blocks :
Paver blocks shall be laid in herringbone laying pattern throughout the pavement. Once the
laying pattern has been established, it shall continue without interruption over the entire
pavement surface. Cutting of blocks, the use of infill concrete or discontinuities in laying
pattern shall not be permitted other than at approved locations.
Paver blocks shall be placed on the uncompacted screeded sand bed to the nominated laying
pattern, care being taken to maintain the specified bond throughout the job. The first row
shall be located next to an edge restraint. Specially manufactured edge paving blocks are
permitted or edge blocks may be cut using a power saw, a mechanical or hydraulic guillotine,
bolster or other approved cutting machine.
Paver blocks shall be placed to achieve gaps nominally 2 to 3mm wide between adjacent paving
joints. No joint shall be less than 1.5mm not more than 4mm. Frequent use of string lines
shall be used to check alignment. In this regard the “laying face” shall be checked at least
every two metres as the face proceeds. Should the face become out of alignment, it must be
corrected prior to initial compaction and before further laying job proceed.
In each row, all full blocked shall be laid first. Closure blocks shall be cut and fitted
subsequently. Such closer blocks shall consist of not less than 25% of a full block .
To infill spaces between blocks upto a gap of 50mm, concrete having screened sand, coarse
aggregate mix and strength of 45 N/sq. mm shall be used. Within such mix the nominal
aggregate size shall not exceed one third the smallest dimension of the infill space. For smaller
spaces dry packed mortar shall be used of required strength.
Except where it is necessary to correct any minor variations occurring in the laying bond, the
paver blocks shall not be hammered into position. Necessary care shall be taken to avoid
premature compaction of the sand bedding when working adjustment of paver blocks,
Initial Compaction
After laying the paver blocks, they shall be compacted to achieve consolidation of the sand
bedding and brought to design levels and profiles by not less than two (2) passes of a suitable
plate compactor.
The compactor shall be a high-frequency, low amplitude mechanical flat plate vibrator having
plate area sufficient to cover a minimum of twelve paving blocks. Prior to compaction all debris
shall be removed from the surface.
Compaction shall proceed as closely as possible following laying and prior to any traffic.
Compaction shall not, however, be attempted within one metre of the laying face. Compaction
shall continue until lipping has been eliminated between adjoining blocks. Joints shall then be
filled and re-compacted as described above.
All work further than one metre from the laying face shall be left fully compacted at the
completion of each day’s laying.
Specifications
Page 154
Tender No: -1800000008
Any blocks that are structurally damaged prior to or during compaction shall be immediately
removed and replaced.
Sufficient plate compactors shall be maintained at the paving site for both bedding compaction
and joint filling.
Joint filling and final compaction :
As soon as possible after compaction and in any case prior to the termination of work on that
day and prior to the acceptance of vehicular traffic, sand for joint filling shall be spread over
the pavement.
Joint sand shall pass a 2.36 mm (No. 8) sieve and shall be free of soluble salts or contaminants
likely to cause efflorescence. The same shall comply with the following grading limits –
In sieve size
% passing
2.36 mm.
1.18 mm
600 microns
300 microns
150 microns
75 microns
100
90-100
60-90
30-60
15-30
10-20
The Contractor shall supply a sample of the jointing sand to be used prior to delivery and such
materials to site for incorporation into the works. Certificates of test results issued by a
recognized testing laboratory conforming that the samples conform to the requirements of this
specifications shall accompany the sample.
The jointing sand shall be broomed to fill the joints. Excess sand shall then be removed from
the pavement surface and the jointing sand shall be compacted with not less than one (1) Pass
by the plate vibrator and joints refilled with sand to full depth. This procedure shall be
repeated until all joints are completely filled with sand. No traffic shall be permitted to use the
pavement until all joints have been completely filled with sand and compacted.
Both the sand and paver blocks shall be dry when sand is spread and broomed into the joints
to prevent premature setting of the sand.
The difference in level (lipping) between adjacent blocks shall not exceed 3mm with not more
than 1% in any 3 m x 3 m area exceeding 2 mm. Pavement which is deformed beyond above
limits after final compaction shall be taken out and reconstructed to the satisfaction of the
Engineer-In-Charge.
Edge Restraint
Edge restrains need to be sufficiently robust to withstand override by the anticipated traffic to
withstand thermal expansion and to prevent loss of the laying course material from beneath the
surface course. The edge restraint should present a vertical face down to the level of the
underside on the laying course.
The surface course should not be vibrated until the edge restraint together with any bedding or
concrete hunching has gained sufficient strength. It is essential that edge restraints be
adequately secured.
Sampling and testing
Frequency of testing shall be minimum 6 samples per 1000 Sq.m. laid area.
testing of paver blocks shall be done in accordance with following –
Specifications
Sampling for
Page 155
Tender No: -1800000008
Method of Sampling
Before laying paver blocks, each designated section comprising not more than 50,000 blocks
shall be divided into ten approximately equal groups. Nine blocks shall be drawn from each
group.
Marking and Identification
All samples shall be clearly marked at the time of sampling in such a way that the designated
section of part thereof and the consignment represented by the sample are clearly defined.
The sample shall be dispatched to the approved test laboratory taking precaution to avoid
damage to the paving in transit. Protect the paving from damage and contamination until they
have been tested. The samples shall be stored in water at 20OC + 5OC for 24 hours prior to
testing.
Compressive Strength
The average compressive strength of the 100 mm. thick paver blocks tested shall be 45 N/Sq.
mm. Testing for compressive strength shall be undertaken in accordance with the following Testing Machine
The testing machines shall be of suitable capacity for the test and capable of applying the load
at the rate specified. It shall comply as regards repeatability and accuracy with the
requirements of relevant IS Specification.
Procedure
The sample specimens shall be tested in wet condition after being stored for at least 24 hours
in water maintained at a temperature of 200 C + 50 C before the specimens are submerged in
water, the necessary area shall be determined.
The plates of the testing machine shall be wiped clean and any loose girt or other material
removed from the contact faces of the specimen. Plywood normally 4 mm. thick shall be used
as packing between the upper and lower faces of the specimen and the machine plates and
these boards shall be larger than the specimen by a margin of at least 5 mm at all points.
Fresh packing shall be used for each specimen tested. The specimen shall be placed in the
machine with the wearing surface in a horizontal plane and in such a way that the axes of the
specimen are aligned with those of the machine plates. The load shall be applied without shock
and increased continuously at the rate of Approximately 15 N/sq. mm per minute until no
greater load can be sustained. The maximum load applied to the specimen shall be recorded.
Calculation of corrected strength
The compressive strength of each block specimen shall be calculated by dividing the maximum
load by full cross section area and multiplying by an appropriate factor as given below:
TABLE 15
Work size
thickness
60
80
100
Correction Factors
Plain block Chamfered block
1.00
1.06
1.12
1.18
1.18
1.24
Compressive strength calculations
The average corrected compressive strength for the designed block section shall be calculated.
Water Absorption
Specifications
Page 156
Tender No: -1800000008
Testing for water absorption shall be in accordance with IS: 2185: 1979: (Specifications for
Concrete Masonry Blocks) as follows –
2% absorbed after 10 minutes
5% absorbed after 24 minutes.
Method for the determination of water absorption
The test specimens shall be completely immersed in water at room temperature for 24 hours.
The specimens shall then be weighed, while suspended by a metal wire and completely
submerged in water.
They shall be removed from the water and allowed to drain for one minute.
Visible surfaces water being removed with a damp cloth and immediately weighed.
Subsequent to saturation, all specimens shall be dried in a ventilated oven at 100 to 115 Dec.
C for not less then 24 hours and until two successive weightings at intervals of 2 hours show
an increment of loss not greater then 0.2 percent of the last previously determined mass of the
specimen.
Calculate the absorption as follows:
Absorption, kg/cu.m
1000)
= A – B x
A–C
Absorption, percent = A – B X 100
B
Where
A = Wet mass of unit in
Kg
B = Dry mass of unit in
Kg
and
C = Suspended immersed
mass of unit in Kg
Rates
The rate shall include the cost of all materials and labour involved in all the operations
described above including the cost of cleaning of compacted sand bedding below including
sampling and testing. The rate shall also allow for using different coloured paver blocks of
unshaped as per drawing or as directed by the Engineer-In-Charge.
Specifications
Page 157
Tender No: -1800000008
18. SERVICES MISCELLANEOUS WORKS:
18.1. Cutting Holes in walls up to 30 cm x 30 cm
Square holes of size as specified or as directed by the Engineer-In-Charge shall be cut in the
masonry. Any damage to the adjoining portion or to any other item shall be made good as
directed by the Engineer-In-Charge. All dismantled material shall be removed from the site.
Masonry Work:
Brick work etc. shall be made good by using the same class of brick, tile or stone masonry as
was cut during the execution of work. The mortar to be used shall be cement mortar 1:4 (1
cement: 4 fine sand) or as directed by the Engineer-In-Charge.
Finishing
Cement mortar in 1:4 mix (1 cement: 4 sand) shall be used for plastering or pointing, as may
be required. Sand shall be fine or coarse as used in the original work. The surface shall be
finished with two or more coats of white wash, colour wash, distemper or painting as required
but where the surface is not to be white washed, colour washed, distempered or painted, it
shall be finished smooth with a floating coat of neat cement or as required to match with the
surrounding surfaces.
18.2. Cutting holes in RCC floors (up to 15 cm x 15 cm):
Square holes of size as specified shall be cut in RCC floor and roofs for passing drain pipe etc.
Any damage to the adjoining portion or to any other item shall be made good as directed by the
Engineer-In-Charge. All the dismantled material shall be removed from the site.
Cement concrete:
After insertion of drain pipe etc. the hole shall be repaired with cement concrete 1:2:4 (1
cement: 2 coarse sand: 4 graded stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size) and the surface finished
to match with the existing surface. The top and bottom shall be finished properly to make the
joint leak proof. The specifications for cement concrete work and finishing etc. shall be the
same as detailed under relevant sub-heads.
18.3. Cutting chases in masonry walls:
Making chases:
Chases are made in the walls for housing GI pipes etc.
Cutting of chases in one brick thick
As far as possible, services should be planned with the help of vertical chases. Horizontal
chases should be avoided.
The depths of vertical chases and horizontal chases shall not exceed one third and one sixth of
the thickness of the masonry respectively.
When narrow stretches of masonry (or short lengths of walls) such as between doors and
windows, can not be avoided, they should not be pierced with openings for soil pipes or waste
pipes or timber joints etc. Where there is a possibility of load concentration, such narrow
lengths of walls shall be checked for stresses and high strength bricks mortar or concrete walls
provided, if required.
Horizontal chases when unavoidable should be located in the upper or lower one third of height
of storey and note more than three chases should be permitted in any stretch of a wall. No
Specifications
Page 158
Tender No: -1800000008
continuous horizontal chase shall exceed one metre in length. Where unavoidable, stresses in
the affected area should be checked & kept within the permissible limits.
Vertical chases should not be closer than 2 m. in any stretch of a wall. These shall be kept
away from bearings of beams and lintels. If unavoidable, stresses in the affected area should be
checked and kept within permissible limits.
Masonry directly above a recess, if less than 30 cm. (Horizontal dimension) should be
supported on lintel. Holes in masonry may be provided upto 30 cm. Width x 30 cm height
without any lintel. In the case of circular holes in masonry, no lintel should be provided upto
40 cm in diameter.
Filling Chases
After G.I pipes etc. are fixed in chases, the chases shall be filled with cement concrete 1:3:6 (1
cement: 3 coarse sand : 6 graded stone aggregate 20mm nominal size) or cement mortar 1:4 (1
cement : 4 coarse sand) as may be specified or otherwise directed by the Engineer-In-Charge
and made flush with the masonry surface. The concrete surface shall be roughened with wire
brushes to provide a key for plastering.
Measurements:
Chases shall be measured in running meter correct to a cm.
18.4. Embedding pipes in masonry (upto 150 mm dia)
Pipe shall be embedded in masonry during construction of the building. A hole of size upto 20
cm x 20 cm as directed shall be kept in the masonry. The pipes shall be centrally placed in the
hole and shall be fixed by filling the stacks with cement concrete around. The holes shall be
provided at correct positions as shown in the drawing or as directed by the Engineer-InCharge.
Embedding pipes:
Pipes shall be embedded in masonry with cement concrete 1:2:4 (1 cement: 2 coarse sand: 4
graded stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size). Where the wall thickness is 20 cm the cement
concrete shall be made flush with the masonry surface on both sides and the surface
roughened with wire brushes to receive plaster. Where the thickness of wall is more than 20
cm, the other side shall be covered with the same class of brick, tile or stone masonry etc. as
provided in the adjoining portion or the main building. This masonry shall be paid for
separately, under the relevant item.
18.5. Dry stone pitching
As far as possible it should be ensured that one rainy season has elapsed before pitching or
any kind of stone work is commenced, so that the embankment has time to settle, and loose
spots in the cutting, if any, show up.
The sides and bottom of the drain or the sides and top of embankment, as the case may be,
shall be brought to the required profile, slope and gradient and shall be compacted to a firm
and even surface. If the situation demands, and where so required by the Engineer-In-Charge
in consideration of the nature of the surface, the necessary back filling may be done with small
broken stone, murum, gravel or ballast well consolidated to proper profile. In case the soil is
unreliable and if the nature of the work requires it, a 75 mm thick layer of gravel or ballast may
be provided over the prepared surface and well consolidated..
Pitching:
Pitching shall be of 22.5 cm depth, unless specified otherwise. Profiles shall first, be put up by
means of pegs and strings or by placing stones, at interval of not more than 15 meter. Stone
Specifications
Page 159
Tender No: -1800000008
shall then be laid closely in position in between the profile and firmly embedded with joints
staggered and with exposed faces true to line, gradient and in uniform slope throughout.
The cross bands of approximately 22.5 cm width through bond stones equal to the full depth of
pitching, shall be provided at an interval of approximately 3 m centre to centre both
longitudinally and transversely.
The interstices between adjacent stones shall be filled in with stones of proper size, well driven
in with crow bars to ensure tight packing and complete filling of all interstices. Such filling
shall be carried on simultaneously with the placing in position of the large stones and shall in
no case be permitted to fall behind. Final wedging shall be done with the largest sized chip
particles, each chip being well driven home with a hammer so that no chip is possible of being
picked up or removed by hand.
Measurements:
The exposed finished surface shall be measured after the pitching has been done. The length,
width and side slope shall be measured correct to a cm. The area of pitching for drains shall be
calculated in sq.m by multiplying the perimeter (bed width plus side slopes) by the length of
the pitching.
Rate:
The rate shall include the cost of the materials and labour involved in all the operations
described above, except pitching stone which shall be paid for separately. The back filling done,
if any except when done with earth as material obtained locally, shall be paid for separately.
Specifications
Page 160
Tender No: -1800000008
19. ALUMINIUM WORKS:
19.1. Aluminium glazed door
Materials
Aluminium alloy extruded sections used in the manufacture, dimensions, weight per meter run
of extruded section shall be as recommended in IS : 1948 - 1961 and of fabricated form of
approved / renowned companies.
Aluminium alloy used in the manufacture of extruded window sections shall correspond to IS
Designation HE 9 WP of IS 733. Hollow aluminium alloy sections used shall conform to SI
Designation HV9-WP of IS 1285. Machine screws used shall conform to the requirements of IS
1362. Also cadmium plated screws, nuts, washers, bolts, lugs of steel shall be used on
direction of the Engineer-In-Charge.
Anodizing
Anodic coatings on aluminium and its alloys, shall be in confirmation with IS : 1868 - 1996. All
aluminium material used shall be anodized for protection against corrosion in marine
atmospheres. A thick coating of minimum 15- microns (on each face) from a sulphuric acid
bath shall improve its corrosion resistance. Further, anodized sections should be double sealed
or alternatively, sealed by exposure to steam.
The extrusions are anodized in different colours like silver, champagne, bronze and black as
approved by the Engineer-In-Charge. A fool proof scaling system ensures durable finish for
long lasting applications.
Anodized material received at site shall be with a certificate conforming coating of
aluminium sections as specified. The Engineer-In-Charge may get the same tested from outside
at the cost of contractor as per IS 5523.
Powder coated aluminium, if specified shall be used as approved by the Engineer-In-Charge.
Glazing
Unless otherwise specified, the glazing shall be of patent flattened Float glass of best quality
conforming to IS: 2835. Glass shall be free from cracks and of approved manufacture. It shall
be transparent, ground or figured as specified.
Glass shall be transparent or ground as specified, uniform in appearance and shall be free from
specks, bubbles, smoke, veins, air holes, blisters, stains, scratches and other flaws and defects
of specified thickness. All the glass panels shall have proper square corners, true & straight
edges.
Tolerance in length and width of Float glass shall be ± 2.0 mm. for glass thickness above 3 mm.
and maximum upto 6.3 mm.
For panels larger than 900 mm. plate glass (minimum thickness 6 mm.) shall be used unless
otherwise specified.
Roughcast wired glass shall be 6 mm. Thick, unless specified.
Float glass shall not have defects greater than those given in Table of IS 2835. Tests shall be
conducted, if asked, as specified in IS 2835 Appendix A, B, C at Contractor’s own cost.
Unless otherwise specified in BOQ, normal thickness of glass for window shall be 5.5 mm thk.
Weight @13.5 kg/Sq.m and for doors 6.3mm thk weight at 15.5 Kg/Sq.m.
Standard Sizes of Aluminium sections, Tolerances etc.
Specifications
Page 161
Tender No: -1800000008
Manufacturing tolerances : Dimensional extrusions are normally manufactured as per Indian
Standard / British Standard Specifications. Special tolerances shall be mutually agreed upon.
Tolerance on Cut length : Tolerance on cut length shall be +5mm upto 6 metres and + 7mm
above 6 metres.
Tolerance in Weight : Actual weight of section shall not vary by more than ± 10%.
Fixing sizes of Doors for fabrication : The type and the overall sizes of aluminium doors
shall be as indicated in the drawings. The dimensions shown are overall heights and widths to
the outside of frames of doors. These sizes are derived after allowing 12.50mm clearance on
both sides breadth wise while 12.50mm sides in height. While manufacturing the aluminium
doors to enable the fixing of the same easily in the openings provided in masonry correct to the
specified sizes of doors.
Fixing of Glass panels
Glazing shall be provided on the outside of the frames unless otherwise specified.
Fixing of glass panes shall be done with aluminium beading. Beadings are to be fixed with
screws, spaced not more than 10 cm from each corner and intermediate not more than 20cm
apart. When the glass panes are fixed with aluminium beading having mitred joints, epoxy
resin or silicon sealant shall be applied between glass panes and sash bars and also between
glass panes and the beading.
All glass panes shall be fixed within the aluminium framing by use of CP brass or stainless
steel screws as specified in item and the joints sealed with epoxy resin or silicon sealant to
make the unit completely waterproof. Glazing or Caulking compound around the perimeter of
glass shall not be permitted. Fixed glass panes shall be supported by setting blocks. There
shall be no whistling or rattling. For normal size glass panes glazing clips are not provided.
Screw threads shall be of machine screws and confirm to the requirements of IS : 1362.
Dimensions for screw threads for general purpose diameter range should be 0.25mm to 3.5mm.
Four glazing clips may be provided per pane for a size larger than 30cm x 60cm for all types
and panes size exceeding 80cm x 200cm, 6 glazing clips shall be used. In case of doors without
horizontal glazing bars, the glazing clips may be spaced according to the slots provided in the
vertical members only if the spacing does not exceed 30 cm otherwise minimum 30 cm spacing
or as specified shall be maintained.
The aluminium anodized extruded glazing beads or snap beading to be used should also be the
product from the manufacturer of aluminium extruded sections used for fabricating doors. No
beading manufactured by local units shall be permitted .
Fabrication
Frames shall be square and flat, with the corners fabricated to a true right angle.
The fixed as well as openable frame shall be constructed by cutting sections to exact length,
with corners mitred and welded. Mitred shutter frame joints must be cleated mechanically with
aluminium cleats if approved by the Engineer-In-Charge. Where hollow sections are used with
welded joints, argon-arc welding or flash butt welding shall be employed or, if approved,
mechanical connection assembly.
Subdividing bars of units shall be tenoned and riveted into the frame.
Fittings and fixtures shall be as detailed or approved by the Engineer-In-Charge and confirming
to IS 1948. Casement shutter shall have Peg stay, Handles, Locks. Samples of fittings shall be
submitted prior to being used for final approval of the Engineer-In-Charge.
Specifications
Page 162
Tender No: -1800000008
EDPM/Neoprene preformed profile shall be used for inserting into extruded pockets of sections.
Glazing beads shall also be of EDPM/Neoprene preformed profiles to hold the glass in frame
under pressure. Non metallic setting blocks shall be used to centralize the glass in frame.
Stainless steel ball bearing of approved make, housed in nylon type nylon roller, shall be used.
All mechanical connection shall be sealed with silicon sealant. Around all windows, approved
quality sealants shall be run down to make sure of total weather/water sealing. Fixing shall be
carried out as per IS 1081.
Frames : Frames shall be square and flat both the fixed and openable frames shall be
constructed of sections, which have been cut to length, mitred and mechanically jointed at the
corners. Sub-dividing bar of units shall be tenoned and riveted into frames. All frames shall
have corners welded to true right angles. For jointing hollow sections flash butt welding argon
arc welding or mechanical jointing by inserts shall be used. (Gas welding or brazing shall not
be done) Concealed screws shall be used for joining the sub-units.
Shutters : Doors shall be constructed with sections as detailed in drawings. Hinges shall be
non projecting and of heavy type. If specified or directed by the Engineer-In-Charge for floor
spring, closers, long grip handles and locks shall be provided. In normal course standard lock
with lever handle of approved make shall be provided.
For double door the first closing shutter shall have a concealed aluminium alloy bolt at top and
bottom so constructed as not to work loose or drop by its own height.
Standard projecting or butt hinges as specified or as directed by the Engineer-In-Charge shall
be provided which shall be inserted into the frames and riveted. For anodized work suitable
aluminium alloy pins shall be used. The Engineer-In-Charge may permit the use of
mechanical jointing instead of welding.
Openable shutters shall be provided with approved neoprene weather strips.
Tolerance
The size for doors shall not vary by more than ±1.5mm.
Fittings
All fittings and fixtures shall be of high quality and as shown in the drawing / as specified.
The samples of all fittings shall be got approved by the Engineer-In-Charge before fixing. The
general details of fittings for doors shall be as prescribed in IS : 1948 unless otherwise
specifically specified.
Hinges
Cast or extruded aluminium alloy hinges for doors shall be of same type as described under
clause 3020.2, but of larger size. The type of hinges projecting or non projecting type shall be
as specified in the item description or as directed by the Engineer-In-Charge.
Handles
Handles for the doors shall be of the design as shown in the drawing and as specified in the
item description or as directed by the Engineer-In-Charge.
Bolts
In double shutter doors, the first closing shutter shall have a concealed aluminium alloy bolt at
top and bottom and shall be so constructed as not to work loose or drop by its own weight.
Single and double shutter doors may be provided with a three way bolting device and in case of
double shutter door, concealed aluminium bolts shall not be provided.
Specifications
Page 163
Tender No: -1800000008
Position of holes and number of lugs per unitsOuter frames shall be provided with fixing holes centrally located in the web of the section in
the position as indicated in the drawing. Number of lugs to be provided as indicated in the
drawings or as directed by the Engineer-In-Charge.
Fixing of Aluminium doors in position
Aluminium doors shall be stacked as to keep them in true shape without damage. The sizes of
opening in the masonry shall be larger in width by 1.25cm on both the side and larger in height
of 1.25cm only on top face. This gap is to be filled up with mastic cement and plaster done
after door is fixed in position.
Fixing with G.I Steel lugs
Slotted G.I steel adjustable lugs shall be of natural finish and of size 100 x 16 x 3 mm.
Number of lugs and their position of fixing for an aluminium alloy door shall be as specified or
as directed.
Before the aluminium doors are fixed in position, a thick shop coat of clear transparent lacquer
based on the methylate or cellulose shall be applied on aluminium doors, windows, etc. to
protect the surface from wet cement during installation. The lacquer coating shall be removed
carefully after plastering etc. to the satisfaction of the Engineer-In-Charge without any extra
cost.
The size of the opening shall first be checked and cleared of obstruction if any. The position of
the unit for fixing holes shall be marked on the jamb. Necessary holes shall be made in the
masonry and lugs of size not less than 100mm long 15 x 3 mm size fixed in cement concrete
blocks of size 150 x 100 x 100mm in 1:3:6 mix (1 cement : 3 coarse sand : 6 graded stone
aggregate 20mm nominal size). The frame of units after treating with lacquer coating as
explained in above para shall be set in opening by using wooden wedges at jambs head (wedges
shall be preferably placed near the points where glazing bar or other members meet.)
The wedges should be fixed only when the doors / windows are kept in perfect position and
plumb. Later the frames should be fixed with lugs with 20mm long and 6.3mm dia. G.I.
counter sunk machine screws and nuts. Only after ascertaining that the doors are firmly fixed
with lugs in the opening, the wedges should be removed very carefully and the gap should be
filled with mastic cement and plaster taking particular care to see that the plaster done over
jambs do not in any way abut the front surface of aluminium door.
After the gaps are filled with mastic cement and plaster and the filling is finally set still if any
crack / gap is noticed / pointed out by the Engineer-In-Charge the same should be
immediately filled with either epoxy resin or silicon sealant.
Fixing on concrete surface
Contrary to the method adopted as stated above in this case instead of using lugs to fix the
doors the same is fixed with wood screws to the wooden plugs fixed in the concrete surface.
As in earlier case the opening is checked for size etc. the specified treatment is given to the
surfaces of aluminium doors and the correct positions for fixing wooden plugs marked on the
jamb with respect to the hoes provided in the door for fixing screws.
Only duly marked points on the jambs required size of hole shall be made in the concrete and
the wooden plug of teak wood of specified size shall be fixed in the hole with rich cement
mortar. Units shall be erected after plugs are duly set.
Specifications
Page 164
Tender No: -1800000008
Door should be fixed to the wooden plugs, with the help of galvanized wood screws of size 45 x
10mm
Later the 12.5mm wide gap between the concrete surface and the aluminium unit shall be filled
neatly with mastic cement and mortar. Alternatively if approved by the Engineer-In-Charge
instead of fixing the units of wooden plugs the same can be conveniently and firmly fixed with
rawl plugs using little longer size screws of designation 10.
Measurement
Shall be as per the relevant part of IS 1200
Frame work: The length of each extruded section used for fabrication of the door shall be
measured correct to 1mm. Length shall be measured by reducing the width by 2.5cm and
height by 1.25cm than the specified size of doors in the drawings issued for construction.
The weight of material used shall be calculated on the basis of actual weight of extruded
sections used for fabrication and shall be compared with the weights given in the
manufacturer’s catalogue, subject to the condition that the variation in actual weight given in
the manufacturer’s catalogue, and the actual weight should not exceed ±10% than the weights
specified in manufacturer’s catalogue, payment shall be made for the actual weight of the
extruded section. The final weights shall be calculated in Kgs upto two place of decimal.
Glazing
Length and width of glazing louvers shall be measured correct to a cm and area shall be
calculated in Sq.m. nearest to 0.01 Sq.m.
Fittings
All fittings and fixtures for doors shall be inclusive of the rate. However, weight of
same will be ignore while calculating the weight of aluminium sections.
the
Rate
The rate shall include the cost of material and labour for all operations
described above
including cost of glazing. The rate shall also allow finish of aluminium section to be supplied in
mat finished and provided with 15 micron thick anodizing in approved colour as specified in
the item description or otherwise as directed by the Engineer-In-Charge.
19.2. Aluminium glazed openable window
Material
Material shall be used as described under –Aluminium doors specifications relevant clauses as
applicable.
Standard Sizes, tolerances
Standard sizes/ tolerances etc. shall be used as described under-Aluminium doors
specifications relevant clauses as applicable.
Fixing sizes of windows for fabrication: The type and the overall sizes of aluminium windows
shall be as indicated in the drawings and should be reduced in size by 1.25 cm from all four
sides while manufacturing the aluminium alloy windows to enable the fixing of the units easily
in the openings provided in the masonry correct to the specified size of windows.
Glazing
Glazing shall be used as described under –Aluminium doors specifications.
Specifications
Page 165
Tender No: -1800000008
Fixing of Glass Panels
Fixing of glass shall be used as described under –Aluminium doors specifications
Fabrication
Frames: Frames shall be used as described under-Aluminium doors specifications.
Shutters: Openable windows shall be constructed to sections as detailed in drawings. The
hinges, handles, peg stays etc. shall be provided as specified or as directed by the Engineer-InCharge. Details of construction of aluminium alloy windows in accordance with IS : 1948
For double window shutter the first closing shall have a concealed aluminium alloy bolt at top
and bottom so constructed as not to work loose or drop by its own weight.
Standard projecting type as specified or as directed by the Engineer-In-Charge shall be
provided which shall be inserted into frames and reverted. For anodized work pins for hinges
shall be of aluminium alloy HR30. The Engineer-In-Charge may permit the use of mechanical
jointing instead of welding.
Openable shutters shall be provided with continuous neoprene weather strips.
Tolerances
The sizes for openable windows shall not vary by more than ±1.5mm
Fittings
Hinges of approved quality and size shall be used for fixing the shutters as per the direction of
Engineer-In-Charge.
Handles - For Side Hung Shutters
The handles shall be of cast aluminium of specified quality, manufactured by reputed
manufacturers.
The handles shall be mounted on a handle plate welded or riveted to the opening frame in such
a way that it could be fixed before the shutter is glazed.
The handle should have anodized finish with minimum anodic film thickness of 15 micron.
The handle shall have a two point nose, which shall engage with an aluminium striking plate
on the fixed frame in a slightly open position as well as in a fast position.
The height of the handles, in each type of side hung shutters shall be fixed in approximate
position as shown on the drawing specified or as directed by the Engineer-In-Charge.
Weather Bar
When a coupling member is fitted over an external opening shutter the coupling member
should incorporate an integrally extruded weather bar as per IS : 1948, Section No. Al –
HK12B.
Position of holes and number of lugs per unit – The position of holes and number of lugs to be
provided for windows of different sizes in accordance with IS : 1948
Fixing Aluminium Windows in position
In opening of masonry: Aluminium windows shall be stacked as to keep them in true shape
without damage. The sizes of openings in the masonry shall be larger in width / height by
Specifications
Page 166
Tender No: -1800000008
1.2cm for all four sides. This gap is to be filled up with mastic cement and plaster after window
is fixed in position.
Fixing with steel lugs
Fixing with steel lugs shall be used as described under-Aluminium doors specifications.
Fixing on Concrete surface
Fixing on concrete surface shall be used as described under- Aluminium doors specifications.
Measurement
Framework
The length of each extruded section used for fabrication of the window shall be measured
correct to 1mm. Length shall be measured by reducing the width and height by 2.5cm than the
specified size of window in the drawings issued for construction.
The weight of material used shall be calculated
specifications.
as described under Aluminium Doors
Glazing - Length and width of opening for glazing inserts shall be measured correct to a cm
and area of payment shall be calculated in Sq.m. nearest to 0.01 Sq.m.
Fittings - All fittings and fixtures for windows shall be included in the relevant items.
However, the weight of the same shall be ignore while calculated weight of aluminium sections.
Rate
The rate shall include the cost of material and labour for all operations described above except
the cost of glazing and panelling. It shall include screws expansion hold fastener, snap beading
including filling with necessary PVC / neoprene felt, cleats, etc. The rate shall also allow finish
of aluminium section to be supplied in mat finish and provided with 15 micron thick anodizing
in approved colour and shall allow for openings of all shapes including circular, segmental or
other shapes and sizes.
19.3. Aluminium glazed sliding window
Material :
Material shall be used as described under –Aluminium doors specifications.
Standard Sizes, tolerances, fixing sizes etc.
Standard sizes/ tolerances etc. shall be used as described under-Aluminium Doors
specifications under relevant clauses as applicable.
Glazing
Glazing shall be used as described under –Aluminium Doors specifications.
Fixing of Glass Panels
Fixing of glass shall be used as described under- Aluminium Doors specifications.
Fabrication
Frames : Frames shall be used as described under –Aluminium Doors specifications.
Specifications
Page 167
Tender No: -1800000008
Shutters : Panels and type of sliding windows shall be manufactured as specified in the
drawing, specified in the item description or as directed by the Engineer-In-Charge.
Fittings shall be self closing latch (normally fixed to the shutters while manufacturing the knob
fixed on the sliding glass panes), nylon rollers etc.
Tolerance
The size of sliding windows shall not vary by more than ±1.5mm.
Position of holes and number of lugs per units
In absence of any guidelines issued by IS code for sliding windows. The position of holes and
number of lugs to be provided for windows of different sizes in accordance with IS : 1948 and
can be followed with suitable modifications, wherever necessary.
Fixing Sliding Windows
In opening of masonry: Aluminium windows shall be stacked as to keep them in true shape
without damage. The sizes of openings in the masonry shall be larger in width / height by
1.2cm for all four sides. This gap is to be filled up with mastic cement and plaster after window
is fixed in position.
Fixing with steel lugs
As described under –Aluminium Doors specifications.
Fixing on Concrete surface
As described under –Aluminium Doors specifications.
Measurements
Frames shall be measured as described under –Aluminium Doors specifications.
Glazing: Length and width of opening for glazing inserts shall be measured correct to a cm
and area of payment shall be calculated in Sq.m. nearest to 0.01 Sq.m. However, the cost of
knob fixed in the glass of sliding window glass need not be paid separately.
Rate
The rate shall include the cost of material and labour for all operations described above except
the cost of glazing and panelling. It shall include screws expansion hold fastener, snap beading
including filling with necessary PVC / neoprene felt, cleats, nylon rollers, etc. The rate shall
also allow finish of aluminium section to be supplied in mat finish and provided with 15 micron
thick anodizing in approved colour and shall allow for openings of all shapes including
circular, segmental or other shapes and sizes. The rate shall also include the cost of automatic
closing latch provided in the sliding window while manufacturing.
The cost of glazing, panelling shall be paid under separate item, as described herein.
19.4. Aluminium glazed fixed / openable ventilators
Material :
Material shall be used as described under- Aluminium Doors specifications.
Standard Sizes, tolerances, fixing sizes etc.
Specifications
Page 168
Tender No: -1800000008
Standard sizes/ tolerances etc. shall be used as described under-Aluminium Doors
specifications under relevant clauses as applicable.
Glazing
Glazing shall be used as described under- Aluminium Doors specifications.
Fixing of Glass Panels
Fixing of glass shall be used as described under –Aluminium Doors specifications
Fabrication
Frames : Frames shall be used as described under-Aluminium Doors specifications under
relevant clauses as applicable.
Shutters : Ventilators shall be constructed to sections as detailed in drawings. The hinges,
handles, peg stays etc. shall be provided as specified or as directed by the Engineer-In-Charge.
Details of construction of aluminium alloy windows in accordance with IS : 1948
Standard projecting type hinges as specified or as directed by the Engineer-In-Charge shall be
provided which shall be inserted into frames and reverted. For anodized work pins for hinges
shall be of aluminium alloy HR30. The Engineer-In-Charge may permit the use of mechanical
jointing instead of welding.
Ventilators shall be provided with continuous neoprene weather strips.
Tolerances
The sizes for ventilators shall not vary by more than ±1.5mm
Fittings
Hinges – Top Hung Ventilators
Friction hinges of approved quality and size shall be used for fixing top hung ventilators as per
the direction of Engineer-In-Charge.
Cup Pivots Centre Hung Ventilators
The centre hung ventilators shall be hung on two pairs of cup pivots or on brass or bronze cup
pivots which should be either chromium or cadmium plated and reverted to the inner and outer
frames of the ventilator to permit the ventilator to swing through an angle approximately 85o.
The opening portion of the ventilators shall be so balanced that it remains open at any desired
angle under normal weather conditions.
Spring Catch – Centre Hung Ventilators
The spring catch shall be of specified make and type conforming to relevant IS specifications
and shall be made of either chromium plated or cadmium plated.
The spring catch shall be fitted in the centre of the top bar of the ventilator, for its operation.
This spring catch shall be secured (preferably screwed or reverted) to the frame and shall close
into the aluminium catch plate reverted or welded to the outside of the outer ventilator frame.
Cord Eye and Pulley Arrangement – Centre Hung Ventilator
Cord pulley wheel shall be of aluminium or cadmium plated brass in an aluminium bracket.
Specifications
Page 169
Tender No: -1800000008
This shall be fitted at the sill of the ventilator, with aluminium or galvanized or cadmium plated
steel screws or alternatively welded together with aluminium cord eye reverted or welded to the
bottom inner frame bar of the ventilator in a position corresponding to that of pulley.
Position of Holes and Number of Lugs per Unit
The position of holes and the number of lugs to be provided for the ventilators of different sizes
as described under –Aluminium Doors specifications.
Fixing Aluminium Ventilators in position
Fixing of Aluminium Ventilators shall be
specifications.
as
described
under
–Aluminium Window
Measurements
Frames shall be measured as described under –Aluminium Doors specifications .
Glazing: Length and width of opening for glazing inserts shall be measured correct to a cm and
area of payment shall be calculated in Sq.m. nearest to 0.01 Sq.m. However, the cost of knob
fixed in the glass of sliding window glass need not be paid separately.
Rate
The rate shall include the cost of material and labour for all operations described above except
the cost of glazing and panelling. It shall include screws expansion hold fastener, snap beading
including filling with necessary PVC / neoprene felt, cleats, etc. The rate shall also allow finish
of aluminium section to be supplied in mat finish and provided with 15 micron thick anodizing
in approved colour and shall allow for openings of all shapes including circular, segmental or
other shapes and sizes. The rate also includes the cost of fittings and fixtures.
The cost of glazing, panelling shall be paid under separate item, as described herein.
19.5. Aluminium glazed louvered window with adjustable louvers
Material
Material shall be used as described under-Aluminium Doors specifications.
Standard Sizes, tolerances
Standard sizes/ tolerances etc. shall generally
specifications.
as described under –Aluminium Doors
Tolerances in weight shall not vary by more than ±10%
Sizes of Ventilators for fabrications Overall sizes of aluminium adjustable louvered type ventilators shall be as specified in the
drawings should be reduced by 1.25cm from all four sides while manufacturing.
Glazing
Glazing shall be used as described under –Aluminium Doors specifications.
Fixing of Glass Panels
Fixing of glass shall be used as described under-Aluminium Window specifications.
Specifications
Page 170
Tender No: -1800000008
Fabrication
Frames: Frames shall be used as described under –Aluminium Doors specifications.
Fixing of Glass panels
Glazing shall generally as described under-Aluminium window specifications.
Glazed louvers shall be inserted inside the louvered frames.
removable type as and when required.
The glazed louvers can be
Fittings
Adjustable louvered frames, locking arrangement etc. shall be as per relevant IS code or as per
the manufacturers norms subject to confirmation to relevant IS codes, or manufacturers
instruction or otherwise as directed by the Engineer-In-Charge.
Fixing of louvered ventilators
Louvered ventilators shall be stacked as to keep them in true shape without damage. Fixing
shall be in confirmation to relevant IS codes, or manufacturer’s instruction or otherwise as
directed by the Engineer-In-Charge.
Measurements
Frame Work
Frames shall be measured as described under- Aluminium Window specifications under
relevant clauses as applicable.
Glazing - Length and width of opening for glazing inserts shall be measured correct to a cm
and area of payment shall be calculated in Sq.m. nearest to 0.01 Sq.m. .
Rate
The rate shall include the cost of material and labour for all operations described above except
the cost of glazing (which shall be measured and paid separately) The rate shall also allow
finish of aluminium section to be supplied in mat finish and provided with 15 micron thick
anodizing in approved colour.
19.6. Floor Spring (Hydraulically Regulated)
Type and size of floor spring
Type and size of floor spring shall be as specified in item description
Engineer-In-Charge from reputed manufacturers.
or as approved by the
Construction and Operational Details
The floor springs shall be suitable for fixing to the doors weighting up to 125 kg without use of
additional door units.
The speed of the closing door shall be adjustable by means of a suitable controlling device.
Tension of the spring shall be increased or decreased by turning the capstan nuts clock-wise
or anti-clockwise. For exceptionally low temperature the adjustment in the speed could be
made by change in the grade of oil.
The shoe shall be fitted to the governing pivot of the floor spring by a square profile.
Specifications
Page 171
Tender No: -1800000008
Workmanship
The floor spring shall be free from all mechanical defects, sharp edges and other surface
defects.
Quality Assurance
The floor spring should be with ISI mark for quality assurance.
Fixing
Suitable recess of the required size shall be cut in floor and the floor spring with all its
components viz. cover plate, outer box with slide plate etc. shall be embedded in floor.
19.7. Anodized Aluminium Alloy Grid – For False Ceiling
Material & Anodizing :
Material for Tee / angle sections are used for frame work of false ceiling shall be used generally
as described under-Aluminium Doors specifications.
Fabrication and fixing in position
The interlocking aluminium alloy grid shall consist of aluminium main “Tee” runners of size
25 x 40mm and 2.10mm thick or as specified / directed spaced 1200mm c/c and cross “Tee”
of size 24 x 24mm and 2.10mm thick or as specified / directed, 1200mm long spaced between
the main “Tee” at 600mm c/c to form a grid of 1200 x 600mm. Again a secondary cross “Tee”
of length 600mm and size 24 x 24mm and 2.10mm thickness as specified or directed to be
interlocked of the centre of 1200 x 600mm panel to form a grid of 600 x 600mm.
Main “Tee” runners are to be suspended from ceiling with M.S. level adjusting hangers.
The perimeter support on wall shall consist of aluminium angle of size 25 x 25 mm and
1.60mm thickness or as specified / directed fixed firmly to the walls with the help of rawl plugs
spaced at 230mm c/c and tightened with 25mm long cadmium plated screws or as directed.
Measurements
The aluminium Tee or Angle iron sections when fixed in position shall be measured correct to
1mm.
The weight per metre length of used ‘T’ angle sections shall be ascertained by weighting the
sample length and the weight thus worked out shall be compared with the weight per metre
prescribed by the manufacturer. However, payment shall be made for only the actual weight
worked out after ascertaining the weight of sample piece, subject to the condition that the
weight per metre ascertained is within the tolerance limit of ±10% of the weight of section
prescribed in the manufacturer’s catalogue.
Rate
The rate includes the cost of materials and labour involved in all operations described above
except the M.S. level adjusting hangers and its fixing arrangement which shall be measured
and paid separately.
19.8. Level adjusting hangers 6mm dia. Mild steel rod (upto 1200mm length)
Materials
Mild steel bars shall conform to the specifications IS:432-Grade-I.These shall be fabricated
from MS bar of 6mm diameter 1200mm length.
Specifications
Page 172
Tender No: -1800000008
Fixing
Necessary holes for expansion hold fasteners as per the architect drawing shall be made in
slab with drilling machine. MS angle 40 x 40 x 5mm and 40mm long be fixed with hold
fasteners 12.5mm dia and 40mm long. MS angle and steel rod be given a priming coat of zinc
chromate yellow primer complete as per direction of the Engineer-In-Charge.
19.9. Plain anodized aluminium sheet weather shed
Material
General specifications and materials shall confirm to requirements as described underAluminium Doors specifications. Anodized Aluminium Sheet of required width as shown on the
drawing and thickness shall be minimum 2.5mm thick (14 gauge) made out of wider sheet
duly machine cut unless otherwise any other width / thickness specified in the description of
item. Anodizing on aluminium sheet and washers to be 15 micron thick.
Fixing
Aluminium sheet shall be cut, shape, size as shown on the drawing or specified in the item
description supported on steel angle frames (supports shall be measured and paid under
respective items). The sheets shall be laid and fixed in the manner as specified or as directed
by the Engineer-In-Charge or otherwise shown in the drawings. Sheets shall be fixed to
supporting angles with aluminium or hook bolt, bolts, crank hook bolt, etc. as per requirement
with aluminium and neoprene washers. Holes must be made by drilling and not punched.
Hook bolts are used for fixing sheets to angle purlins, crank hook bolts are used to fasten
sheeting to angle purlins. The sheets shall be laid with minimum lap of 15cm at the end. The
slope of sheeting should not be greater than 1 vertical to 3 horizontal. The length of hook bolts
shall be varied to suit the particular requirements
The weather shed when completed shall be true to lines and slope and shall be leak proof.
19.10. Aluminium framed and panels made up of 4mm thick Synthetic Resin Bonded
paper laminate with decorative facing on both side conforming to IS: 2036-1995 for
toilets / bath / WC etc.)
Materials
General specifications shall be as described under- Aluminium Doors specifications.
Frame :
Frames shall be as described under –Aluminium Doors specifications.
The sizes / sections of top, bottom, lock rail and style shall be of the sizes as mentioned on the
drawings or otherwise as specified or directed.
Panelling
Panelling shall have minimum thickness 4mm, it shall be synthetic resin bonded paper
laminate with decorative facing conforming to IS : 2036 - 1995 and other technical data
conforming to approved manufacturer specifications.
Workmanship
General specifications shall be as described under-Aluminium Doors specifications.
Specifications
Page 173
Tender No: -1800000008
Frames shall be square, flat and have been cut to length, mitred and mechanically jointed at
the corners. All frames shall have corners welded to true right angles.
The panel inserts shall be either framed into the grooves. The depth of the groove shall be
12mm and its width shall accommodate the panel inserts such that the faces are closely fitted
to the sides of the groove. Panel inserts shall be framed into grooves of stilts and rails to the
full depth of groove leaving on space 1.5mm.
Fixing of Shutters
Overall dimensions shall be within ±1.5mm of size shown on drawings.
aluminium sections shall not vary by ±10% .
Actual weight of
Fixing of shutters shall be as described under Clause No. 3009.5 of under clause 3009 Woodwork & Joinery.
Fittings
Fittings shall be as prescribed under Section 9 – Wood Work and general specifications shall
confirm to IS : 1948 unless and otherwise specified. Fittings shall be measured and paid
separately.
Measurement
Frame work and panelling shall be measured separately
Frame Work
Frames shall be measured as described under –Aluminium Doors specifications.
Panelling
For panelling length and width of opening for panels inserts shall be calculated to the nearest
to 0.01 Sq.m. The portions of the panels inserts inside the groove shall not be measured for
payment.
Rates
The rate shall include the cost of material and labour for all operations described above except
the cost of panelling (which shall be measured and paid separately). The rate shall also allow
finish of aluminium section to be supplied in mat finish and provided with 25 micron thick
anodizing in approved colour. The frame work shall be paid in kg and panelling shall be paid in
square meter separately.
Specifications
Page 174
Tender No: -1800000008
20. WATERPROOFING WORKS:
20.1. Waterproofing Treatment
Patented waterproofing treatments shall be done strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s
specifications and in conformity with the relevant IS codes.
Any leakage or defects during guarantee period shall be made good by the Contractor at this
own cost. The responsibility for all rectifications shall solely rest with the Contractor
irrespective of the fact whether the specialised sub-contractor, if any, has given any guarantee
to the Contractor.
20.2. Cement based patented type waterproofing treatment to terrace, gutter beam etc and
similar location
General specifications for waterproofing and laying of brick bat coba shall be as described
below:
Materials
Cement: Cement shall be ordinary Portland cement conforming to the requirements of IS: 269
Fine Aggregate: The fine aggregate shall be conforming to the requirements of IS : 383
Brick Bats: Bricks shall be of class designation 35 conforming to the requirements of IS: 1077
Waterproofing Compound: Integral waterproofing compound shall conform to the requirements
of IS: 2645
Water: Conforming to provisions of IS: 456
Procedure for Laying of Waterproofing Treatment over Terraces- (India Water Proofing
Co. type)
The waterproofing procedure as outlined herein indicates the process in general. The details,
however, recommended by specialised agency shall have, however, to be strictly followed for
carrying out the work.
RC area to be waterproofed shall be cleaned off all dirt, dust, oil etc. Any honeycombs, cavities,
cracks etc. shall then be scaled by injecting with the necessary ‘damp-proof’ compound with
cement solution and the surface made rough. Over thoroughly cleaned slab surface, then
unless otherwise specified average 15mm thick plaster in cm 1:4 with admixture of approved
waterproofing compound shall be laid.
The cleaned terrace shall be watered properly and cement slurry shall be spread over the slab.
Brick bat coba in ‘damp-proof’ cement mortar shall then be laid to the specified average
thickness or as directed in CM 1:2 to provide necessary gradient in a special manner with
brickbats partly projected above. Unless otherwise specified average 75mm thick graded
brickbat coba in 1:4:8 mix (1 cement : 4 coarse sand : 8 brick bat coba with 40mm nominal
size) impregnated with approved water repellent / waterproofing chemical compound properly
consolidated to required grade and slope shall be laid.
The brick bat joints shall be filled in with ‘damp-proof’ cement mortar by joint less waterproof
plaster finished smooth with trowel in thin layer of cement and marked into 300 mm. x 300
mm. false squares or left smooth if directed by the Engineer-In-Charge. Unless otherwise
specified finishing the top surface, with 15mm thick plaster with an admixture of approved
chemical compound.
Specifications
Page 175
Tender No: -1800000008
The treatment shall be continued along the inner sides of parapets or adjoining wall upto a
height of 300 mm. to 375 mm in the shape of round vata and over that drip mould.
The construction joints shall be taken at ridges and shall be made properly watertight and
monolithic.
Care shall be taken to finish the rain water inlets etc. properly so that no leakage occurs. The
terrace shall be tested for water tightness after treatment is completed and any defects shall be
made good.
Testing
If leakage is observed wherever waterproofing treatment is carried out the source of leakage is
to be detected and the same shall be stopped with the help of injection grouting (with cement
slurry).
Measurement: The measurements shall be on the actual net area.
measured separately.
No vatas shall be
Rate
All labour, materials including waterproofing chemicals, use of equipments, tools and plant,
installing and removal of scaffolding, false work and forms and bracing, curing & testing
necessary for the satisfactory completion of the item.
Providing brick bat coba with waterproofing chemicals of specified proportion including
transporting, placing & compacting, curing, finishing to the dimensions and shapes shown on
the plans or as ordered by the Engineer-In-Charge.
Providing ‘vata’ at the junction of base and walls also for ponding
Grouting of areas wherever required.
20.3. Cement based patented type waterproofing treatment over Chajjas
Material and General specifications shall be as described under –Terrace water proofing
specifications.
20.4. Procedure for Laying of Waterproofing Treatment Over chajja’s - (India Water Proofing Co.
type)
General specification for laying waterproofing treatment over chajja’s shall be as described
under- terrace water proofing specifications except graded brick bat coba in 1:4:8 mix (1
cement: 4 coarse sand : 8 brick bat coba with 40mm nominal size) impregnated with approved
water repellent / waterproofing chemical compound properly consolidated to be laid at the
junction of wall and chajja to the required size and slope or as directed by the Engineer-InCharge.
The treatment shall be continued along the external sides of parapet / walls or adjoining
chajjas upto a height of 300mm – 375mm in the shape of round vata and over the drip mould.
Finish : As specified in the item description or otherwise finishing the top surface with 15mm
thick plaster with an admixture of approved chemical compound.
Testing
Testing shall be done as described under –Terrace water proofing specifications.
The chajja shall be tested for water tightness after treatment is completed and any defects
shall be made good.
Specifications
Page 176
Tender No: -1800000008
20.5. Cement based patented type treatment for sunken portion of WC / Bath / Toilet /
etc. for horizontal surfaces .
Material and General specifications shall be as described under-terrace water proofing
treatment specifications.
Procedure for laying of India Waterproofing Type Treatment for WC’s & Toilets etc.
Horizontal Surface
The preliminary preparatory work shall be as described under –terrace water proofing
specifications. After cleaning the surfaces and then laying 20mm thick waterproof cement
plaster to surfaces of brick walls / concrete of sunken floors using graded sand and mixed with
approved cement based integral waterproofing compound, finished smooth with a floating coat
of neat cement.
Brickbat coba shall be laid in CM 1:2 as per specifications and shall be kept wet for at least 45 days period. Brick bat coba in the sunken 1:4:8 proportion shall be measured and paid
separately.
The final treatment over the brickbat coba shall be carried out in one operations so that no
construction joints are left. Finishing top surface with 15mm thick plaster in CM 1:6 with an
admixture of approved chemical waterproofing compound.
The prepared surface shall be kept wet for at least 10 days period.
Testing
If leakage is observed wherever waterproofing treatment is carried out the source of leakage is
to be detected and the same shall be stopped with the help of injection grouting (with cement
slurry).
Measurement
The measurements shall be on the actual net area. For horizontal treatment the measurement
shall be taken on plan area and measured only once. Brick bat laid shall be measured
separately.
20.6. Cement based patented type treatment for sunken portion of WC / Bath / Toilet /
etc. for vertical surfaces.
Material and General specifications shall be as described under –terrace water proofing
specifications.
Procedure for laying of India Waterproofing Type Treatment for WC’s & Toilets etc.
Vertical Surfaces
Surface above the floor level shall be treatment with 20mm thick waterproof cement plaster in
CM 1:4 with an admixture of approved chemical waterproofing chemical or as per
manufacturer’s specifications upto the specified height and the surface shall be roughened.
The treated surface shall be kept wet for at least 7 days period.
Testing
If leakage is observed wherever waterproofing treatment is carried out the source of leakage is
to be detected and the same shall be stopped with the help of injection grouting (with cement
slurry).
Specifications
Page 177
Tender No: -1800000008
Measurement
The measurements shall be on the actual net area. Brick bat laid shall be measured
separately.
20.7. Cement based waterproof brick bat coba for filling in sunken portion of WC / Bath /
Toilet / etc.
Material and General specifications shall be as described under –terrace water proofing
specifications
Procedure for laying of Brickbat Coba as per India water Proofing Type Treatment
After the expiry of the curing period of RCC slab, the surfaces shall be brushed and cleaned of
all dust and foreign matter to lay the brickbat. The brickbat coba shall be laid and
consolidated to proper slopes as directed by the Engineer-In-Charge to facilitate easy drainage
of storm water and shall be of average thickness as specified in the item. The specifications for
the materials, laying and curing etc. of this concrete shall be as specified in IS 3038.
Consolidation shall be done the next day be beating the surface with wooden beaters and shall
continue on subsequent days till brick bat coba is properly consolidated and beater rebound
and do not make any impression on the surface. During the process of beating, the surface
shall be constantly kept wet by sprinkling water.
Graded brick bat coba in 1:4:8 mix (1 cement: 4 coarse sand: 8 brick bat coba, with 40mm
nominal size) impregnated with approved water repellent / water proofing chemical compound
properly consolidated to required depth, grade and slope.
Testing
If leakage is observed wherever waterproofing treatment is carried out the source of leakage is
to be detected and the same shall be stopped with the help of injection grouting (with cement
slurry).
20.8. Patented type cement based Box type waterproofing treatment – for under ground
structures from outside
Preparing the surface
The water proofing treatment over the lean concrete / levelling course should be roughened
when the concrete is still green or other wise proper key is provided for the 25mm thick base
layer.
The top surface of the RCC roof slab / Vertical shall be made rough by hacking the surface
with a specifically made hacking tool when the concrete is just laid and the initial set starts
taking place.
In order to arrest any leakage through junction of vertical / horizontal water proofing a proper
haunch in cement concrete shall be provided.
Blending Cement / Water with Water Proofing Compound
Proportions, method of mixing water proofing compound in powder or liquid form, to be used
in cement / cement slurry/ cement mortar shall be as per manufacturer’s recommendations
subject to approval of the Engineer-In-Charge.
Rough Kotah Stone
Specifications
Page 178
Tender No: -1800000008
The slabs shall be of selected quality, hard, sound, dense and homogenous in texture free form
cracks, decay, weathering and flaws. They shall be hand or machine cut to the requisite
thickness. They shall be of the colour indicated in the drawings or as instructed by the
Engineer-In-Charge. The slab shall have the top (exposed) face polished before being brought
to site, unless otherwise specified. The slabs shall conform to the size required. Before
starting the work the contractor shall get the samples of slabs approved by the Engineer-InCharge.
For the stone slabs that are used for arresting the leakages, while executing this type of water
proofing treatment, the first and foremost mandatory condition is that the number of joints in
the portion covered by the stone slabs shall be minimum and this condition can be achieved
only by using the maximum possible size of stone slabs. Normally the size of stone slabs used
for the purpose is 600 x 600mm or 600 x 900mm each stone slab weighing approximately 16
kg and 25 kg respectively.
The rough kotah stone slabs used for such works though are basically rough on the surface
still that much roughness will not be sufficient for the stone slabs to remain in vertical position
held by cement slurry.
Therefore the grip for the stone slabs has to be increased and this can easily be done by
planting 12mm to 15mm nominal size stone aggregate fixed with araldite on the face of each
stone slab.
A 20mm thick clear gap has to be formed between the masonry / concrete surface and the
stone slabs erected in vertical position for pouring the cement slurry.
This gap can be maintained by fixing with araldite the 20mm x 20mm cover blocks made out of
rich cement mortar on the four corners of the slabs and at centre.
Preparation of Cement Slurry
Cement slurry normally prepared and used on general building works with just 1½ Kgs to 2
Kgs of cement to cover an area of one sq.m. shall not be applicable for such works instead it
should have thick honey like consistency. Each time only that much quantity of slurry shall
be prepared which can be covered on the surface and the surface in turn would be covered
with 25mm thick cement mortar base within half an hour. Slurry prepared and remained unused for more than half an hour shall be totally rejected.
Preparation of Cement Mortar
The cement mortar 1:4 (1 blended cement : 4 coarse sand) shall be prepared with cement /
water duly blended as explained in above clause. Each time only that much quantity of
cement mortar that can be consumed within half an hour, shall be prepared. Any quantity of
cement mortar that is prepared and remains unused for more than half and hour shall be
totally rejected.
Fixing Water Proofing Course
Erecting Rough Kotah Stone forming 20mm wide gap
The rough kotah stone slab duly fixed with 20mm x 20mm cover blocks and 12mm to 15mm
size on the surface as explained in para (iii) above shall be erected against the masonry /
concrete surface to be treated by abutting the 20mm thick cover block against the surface thus
forming a clear gap of 20mm.
The stone slabs thus erected shall be supported with ballies / pipes to the scaffolding already /
erected for the purpose.
Specifications
Page 179
Tender No: -1800000008
The joints of stone slabs shall be temporarily closed from outside with cement mortar so that
the cement slurry poured in the gap does not escape through the joints. The bottom portion of
the stone slabs shall also be closed with cement mortar.
While erecting the stone slabs proper care shall be taken to see that stone slab are of uniform
size. In case smaller width slabs are used it shall be ensured that these are not fixed at the
corners but the same should be at the middle portion.
Another important point to noted is that one should be very careful in interlinking the Rough
Kota Stone Slabs of horizontal layer of water proofing with this vertical layer of water proofing
and the method of interlinking shall be strictly followed.
The Rough Kota Stone Slab shall be erected in perfect plumb and the stone slabs thus erected
and fixed in position can be considered as 2nd layer of water proofing on completion.
Further lifts of Rough Kota Stone Slabs upto the full height of the masonry / concrete wall
shall be erected only after filling the gap of each lift erected, with cement slurry.
Filling Cement Slurry in the gap formed by erecting Rough Kota Stone slabs.
When the first lift of stone slabs are erected and checked to be in perfect plumb, cement slurry
prepared as detailed above shall be poured in the gap till the gap is filled completely.
The further filling of slurry in the second lift shall be done when the second lift of stone slabs
are erected in position and thus the work on 2 nd and 1st layer of the items shall be completed
simultaneously till the cladding over the entire height of the wall is complete.
Thus on completion of filling cement slurry and erecting stone slabs for the entire height of the
wall it can be considered that the first layer i.e. the layer of cement slurry and the second layer
i.e. the layer of erecting Rough kota stone slabs is completed as per the item.
Plastering over 2nd layer with cement mortar 1:4 (1 Blended Cement: 4 Coarse Sand)
Immediately on completion of the work of cladding the entire masonry / concrete wall with
Rough Kota Stone Slab the cement mortar applied over the joints shall be removed and the
joints exposed.
The entire surface cladded with stone slabs shall be cleaned with water neatly to start the work
of plastering.
Cement mortar 1:4 (1 blended cement : 4 coarse sand) prepared as per para (v) above for the
purpose.
Care shall be taken to see that the 20mm thickness of cement plaster over the entire surface
shall be maintained correctly.
The work of plastering shall be taken up immediately on completion of cladding the wall
surface rather it should be a continuous process from the day of starting the erection of stone
slabs till the finishing work of plastering is done.
The plastering shall be taken up from top to bottom without leaving any joint. As far as
possible the joints in plaster shall be minimum, still in case a joint has to be left to continue
the work on the subsequent day, cement slurry prepared as explained under para (iv) above
shall be applied over the entire joint and then only the work of plastering shall be taken up.
Finishing with Neat Cement Punning
When the surface of plastering is still green, the cement slurry prepared as above shall be
applied over the plastered surface and the surface shall be finished neatly to a smooth surface
with specially made semi-round thapis.
Specifications
Page 180
Tender No: -1800000008
The surface should show a smooth and neat finish without any undulations.
Curing & Testing
The exposed faces of the water proofing course shall be kept wet for 14 days. No back filling
shall be done before expiry of 14 days from the date of completing the water proofing course
from outside.
Water tank shall be filled with water to full capacity and kept under observations for at least
one week to detect leakage. In addition to that the same shall be completely emptied and shall
be kept in dry condition to check the leakages, seepages from external surfaces.
Water Stops
Water stops shall be in confirmation with IS -3370 Part I.
Water bars are performed strips of impermeable material which are embedded in the concrete
during construction so as to span across the joint and provide a permanent watertight seal
during the whole range of joint movement.
The most usual forms of water bars are strip with a longitudinal corrugation. Water bars of
polyvinyl chloride (PVC) are to be used.
Fixing Water Bar
The water bar should have such shape and width that the water path through the concrete
around the bar shall not be unduly short. It is important to ensure proper compaction of
concrete around the water bar
Proper cover to all the reinforcements shall be maintained.
Water bars should be placed at the centre of the wall or if it is to be provided away from the
centre its distance from either face of the wall shall not be less than half the width of water
bar.
Specifications
Page 181
Tender No: -1800000008
21. SANITARY APPLICIANCES AND FITTINGS:
21.1. All vitreous sanitary appliances (Vitreous China) shall conform to IS 2556 (Part-I) general
requirements.
21.2. Flushing Cisterns
21.3. The flushing cisterns shall be automatic or manually operated high level or low level as
specified, for water closets and urinals. A high level cistern is intended to operate with
minimum height of 125 cm and a low level cistern with a maximum height of 30 cm between
the top of the pan and the under side of the cistern.
Cisterns shall be of following type (i) Vitreous China (IS 774) for Flushing type (ii) Automatic
Flushing Cistern (IS 2326) and (iii) Plastic cisterns (IS 7231).
21.4. Vitreous Chine Cisterns: The thickness of the body including cover shall be not less than 6
mm for vitreous China cisterns. The outlet of each syphon or stand pipe shall be securely
connected to the cistern by means of lock nut. The cistern shall be free from manufacturing
faults and other defects affecting their utility. All working parts shall be designed to operate
smoothly and efficiently. Cistern shall be mosquito proof. A cistern shall be considered
mosquito proof only if there is no clearance any where which would permit a 1.6 mm wire to
pass through in the permanent position of the cistern i.e. in the flushing position or filling
position.
The breadth of a low level cistern, from front to back shall be such that the cover or seat, or
both, of water closet pan shall come to rest in a stable position when raised.
The cistern shall be supported on two cast iron brackets of size as approved by the Engineerin- Charge and embedded in cement concrete 1:2:4 block 100 x 75 x 150' mm. These shall be
properly protected by suitable impervious paint. Alternatively the cisterns shall have two holes
in the back side above the overflow level for screwing into the wall, supplemented by two cast
iron wall supports. A 5; litres cistern, however, may be supported by larger brackets cast on
the body of the cistern.
The cistern shall have a removable cover which shall fit closely on it and be secured against
displacement. In designs where the operating mechanism is attached to the cover this may be
made in two sections, but the section supporting the mechanism shall be securely bolted or
screwed to the body. The outlet fitting of each cistern shall be securely connected to the
cistern. The nominal internal diameter of cistern outlet shall be not less than 38 + 1 mm for
low level cisterns respectively. The length of the outlet of the cistern shall be 37 + 2 mm.
Ball valve shall be of screwed type 15 mm in diameter and shall conform to IS 1703. The float
shall be made of polyethylene as specified in IS 9762. (The design shall permit the cistern to fill
in rapidly and close effectively when the level of water reaches the working water level.)
In the case of manually operated cisterns the siphonicaction of the flushing cistern shall be
capable of being rapidly brought into action by the operating lever, but shall not self siphon or
leak. When tested according to IS 774 the discharge rate shall be 10 + 0.5 litre in 6 seconds
and 5 + 0.5 litre in 3 seconds for cisterns of capacities 10 litre and 5 litre respectively. The
cisterns shall be so designed that there is not appreciable variation in the force of flush during
the discharge of the required quantity of water. The cistern shall have a discharge capacity of 5
& 10 litres as specified. When required to give a full flush, they shall respectively discharge 5
litres and 10 litres with variation of + 0.5 litres.
The flush pipe shall be of (a) medium quality Galvanised iron having internal diameter of 38 +
1 mm for low level cistern. The flush pipe shall be of suitable length with bends etc. as
required for fixing it with front or back inlet W.C. Pan. (b) Polyethylene pipes low density
conforming to IS 3076 or high density (c) Unplasticised PVC pipes. For high density
polyethylene and unplasticised PVC pipes, the outside diameter of the pipes shall be 40 mm.
When PVC plumbing pipes are used the outside diameter of the pipe shall be 40 mm for high
level cisterns and 50 mm for low level cisterns.
Specifications
Page 182
Tender No: -1800000008
In case of low level cistern the flush pipe shall be a vertical pipe 30 cm long and having a
nominal internal dia 38 ± 1 mm (except plastic flush pipes).
Over Flow Pipe
(a)
GI overflow pipe shall be of not less than 20 mm nominal bore and shall incorporate a
non-corrodible mosquito proof brass cover having 1.25 mm dia perforation, screwed in a
manner which will permit it to be readily cleaned or renewed when necessary. No provision
shall be made whereby the overflow from the cistern shall discharge directly into the water
closet or soil pipe without being detected.
The invert of the overflow pipe in the case of high level and low level cisterns shall be 19 mm
minimum above the working water level. In case of overflow due to any reason water should
drain out through the over flow pipe and not through the siphon pipe.
(b) The plastic overflow pipes shall be manufactured from high density polyethylene
conforming to IS 4984 or un-plasticized P.V.C. conforming to IS 4985.
Inlet and Overflow Holes: The cistern shall be provided with inlet and overflow holes,
situated one at each end which shall be capable of accommodating an overflow pipe of not less
than 20 mm nominal bore and a 15 mm size ball valve. The holes shall be cleanly cast or
drilled and the adjacent surfaces shall be smooth.
The thickness of the body including cover at any point shall not be less than 2 mm for GRP,
and not less than 3 mm for other plastic materials. The cistern shall be free from
manufacturing faults and other defects affecting its utility. All working parts shall be designed
so as to operate smoothly and efficiently. The cistern shall be mosquito-proof. It shall be
deemed to be mosquito proof only when there is no clearance anywhere in it which would
permit a 1.6 mm diameter wire to pass through. The outlet of each siphon or stand pipe or
flush valve shall be securely connected to the cistern by means of a lock nut. In the case of
plastic siphon, it shall be provided with suitable means of ensuring and maintaining watertight
and airtight joint to the cistern.
The cistern shall be provided with a removable cover which shall fit closely and shall be
secured against displacement. In designs, where the operating mechanism is attached to the
cover, the cover may be made in two sections, the section supporting the mechanism being
securely fixed or booked to the body.
The flush pipe (except plastic flush pipe) shall have an internal diameter of 32 .±. 1 mm for
high level cistern and 38 + 1 mm for low level cistern. The steel flush pipe shall be not less
than 1 mm thick whereas the lead flush pipe shall have a minimum thickness of 3.5 mm. For
high density polyethylene pipes, the outside diameter of the pipes shall be 40 mm. For
unplasticised PVC plumbing pipes the outside diameter of the pipe shall be 40 mm for high
level cisterns, and 50 mm for low level cisterns. In the case of high level flushing cisterns, a
pipe clip fitted with a rubber buffer shall be fixed to the flush pipe to prevent damage either to
the pipe or to the seat when the seat is raised. No flush pipe is required for coupled cisterns.
Note: The minimum thickness specified is for normal conditions of service. Where
highly corrosive atmospheres are expected, greater thicknesses are required to be
provided as per nomenclature of the item.
21.4.1. Flush Pipe Connection to Cistern
The flush pipe shall be securely connected to cistern outlet and made airtight by means of a
coupling nut. The nuts made of injection-molded HDPE/Polyacetal may be used only if the end
pipe is also made of plastic. The nominal internal diameter of the cistern outset shall be not
less than 32 mm and 38 mm for high-level and low-level cisterns respectively.
The screw threads for connection to the flush pipe shall not be less than size 1 ~ of IS 2643
(Part 3). In the case of polyethylene and unplasticised PVC flush pipes, the upper end of the
Specifications
Page 183
Tender No: -1800000008
flush pipe shall be provided with suitable means of ensuring and maintaining a watertight and
airtight joint to the flushing cistern. When ordered for use with a flush pipe, the outlet
connection may be supplied with coupling nut made of copper based alloy or other noncorrodible material and a plain tail piece having a minimum length of 60 mm. The centre of the
outlet hole shall be generally central to the length of the cistern. The length of the outlet shall
be 37±2 mm in case of interchangeable siphon; however, where integral siphon is provided, the
outlet length shall be 20±2 mm.
Note: The length of the cistern outlet shall be the dimension from the bottom surface
of the cistern to the end of the outlet after the cistern with siphon/stand pipe has been
duly fitted with all washers, lock-nuts, etc.
Inlet and Overflow Holes
The cistern shall be provided with inlet and overflow holes, situated one at each end, which
shall be capable of accommodating overflow pipe of not less than 20 mm nominal bore and a
15 mm size float valve. The holes shall be cleanly moulded or drilled and the adjacent surfaces
shall be smooth.
Float Valve
The float valve shall be 15 mm nominal size and shall conform to IS 1703 or IS 12234 or IS
13049.
Operating Mechanism Lever
The operating mechanism/lever shall not project beyond the side of the cistern for a distance
greater than 350 mm measured from the centre of the cistern to the end of the lever arm. The
lever arm shall be provided with a suitable hole near the end through which a split rings or Shook can be inserted. A string (chain) shall be attached to the ring or hook. When S-hook is
employed, it shall be effectively closed after assembly to prevent accidental disconnection.
In the case of low-level cisterns, where the mechanism is handle operated, the handle, whether
situated on the front or at the end of the cistern, shall be within the projection limit. Particular
attention shall be given to the case of operation of the handle. To be so designed that there is
no appreciable variation in the force of the flush during the discharge of the required quantity
of water. For coupled cisterns, this test shall not be applicable.
Spec. Requirements Distortion Resistance Test
The cisterns, complete with its fittings, shall be installed and filled with water to the marked
water line and observed for any distortion. The cistern shall not budge more than 6 mm and
the cover shall not be dislodged.
Dead Load Test
When the flushing mechanism incorporates chain pull or hand operated lever, the cistern,
complete with its fittings, when installed and filled with water to the marked water line and
tested by the application of a dead load of 230 N applied 6 mm from the end of the operating
lever arm for 30 seconds, shall not distort to such an extent that any part becomes detached.
In the case of other operating mechanism, the dead load applied shall be a mass equivalent to
the operating force required to overcome the normal hydrostatic head; Thirty seconds after the
load is removed, the function and appearance of the cistern shall not be impaired.
Front Thrust Test
The front thrust test shall be applied only to cisterns intended for low level use. The cistern
complete with its fittings, when installed and filled with water to the marked water line and
tested by the method described in IS 7231, shall not distort to such an extent as to be
inoperable or unsightly when the load is removed.
Specifications
Page 184
Tender No: -1800000008
Impact Test
The cistern, complete with its fittings, when installed and filled as described in IS 7231 shall
show no defect after one impact. Repeat the test but with the cistern empty. The cistern shall
show no defect after the further impact.
21.5. Draining Board
Draining board made of Glazed fireclay conforming to C.P.W.D. Specifications and as per
directions of Engineer-in-Charge, shall be provided. The size of the board shall be as specified.
The entire surface including bottom of the board shall be finished smooth.
21.6. Foot Rests
Foot rests shall be of Vitreous China conforming to IS 2556 (Part-X). Foot rests which are
rectangular shall meet the minimum requirements and dimensions as shown in CPWD
specification and may be of different designs where so specified. Foot rests of different shapes
and sizes shall also be allowed subject to approval of Engineer-in-Charge.
21.7. Mirror
The mirror shall be of superior glass with edges rounded off or beveled, as specified. It shall be
free / from flaws, specks or bubbles. The size of the mirror shall be 60 x 45 cm unless
specified otherwise and its thickness shall not be less than 5.5 mm. It shall be uniformly silver
plated at the back and shall be free from silvering defects. Silvering shall have a protective
uniform covering of red lead paint. Where beveled edge mirrors of 5.5 mm thickness are not
available, fancy looking mirrors with PVC beading/border or aluminium beading or stainless
steel beading/border based on manufacture's specifications be provided nothing extra shall be
paid on this account. Backing of mirrors shall be provided with environmentally friendly
material other than asbestos cement sheet.
21.8. M.S. Stays and Clamps
.
The clamps shall be made from 1.5 mm thick M.S. flat of 32 mm width, bent to the required
shape and size to fit tightly on the socket, when tightened with nuts & bolts. It shall be formed
of two semicircular pieces with flanged ends on both sides with holes to fit in the screws, bolts
and nuts 40 mm long. The stay shall be minimum one metre long of 10 mm dia M.S. bar. One
end of the stay shall be bent for embedding in the wall in cement concrete block of size 20 x 10
x 10 cm in 1 :2:4 mix (1 cement: 2 coarse sand: 4 graded stone aggregate 20 mm nominal
size). The concrete shall be finished to match with the surrounding surface.
21.9. Pillar Taps
Pillar taps shall be chromium plated brass and shall conform to IS 1795. The nominal sizes of
the pillar tap shall be 15 mm or 20 mm as specified. The nominal size shall be designated by
the nominal bore of the pipe outlet to which the tap is to be fitted. Finished weights of 15 mm
and 20 mm pillar taps shall be as prescribed in Table 17
TABLE 17
Minimum Finished Weights of Pillar Taps
Particulars
Body
Washer plate loose valve
Back nut
Tap
Weights in gms
15 mm size
20 mm size
25
505
15
28
40
50
6
1175
Casting shall be sound and free from laps, blow hole and pitting. External and internal
surfaces shall be clean, smooth and free from sand and be neatly dressed. The body, bonnet
and other parts shall be machined true so that when assembled, the parts shall be axial,
Specifications
Page 185
Tender No: -1800000008
parallel and cylindrical with surfaces smoothly finished.
The area of waterway through the body shall not be less than the area of the circle of diameter
equal to the bore of the seating of the tap. The seating of pillar tap shall be integral with the
body and edges rounded to avoid cutting of washer. Pillar taps shall be nickel chromium plated
and thickness of coating shall not be less than service grade NO.2 of IS 4827 and plating shall
be capable of taking high polish which shall not easily tarnish or scale.
Every pillar tap, complete with its component parts shall withstand an internally applied
hydraulic pressure of 20 Kg/sq. cm maintained for a period of 2 minutes during which period
it shall neither leak nor sweat.
21.10.
Sand Cast Iron or Centrifugally Cast (Spun) Iron Pipes and Fittings
Sand cast iron spigot and socket soil, waste and ventilating pipes, fittings and accessories shall
conform to IS 1729. Centrifugally cast (Spun) iron spigot and socket soil, waste and ventilating
pipes, fittings and accessories shall conform to IS 3989.
The fittings shall conform to the same I.S. specifications to which the p~ itself conforms in
which they are connected.
The pipes shall have spigot and socket ends, with head on spigot end in case of sand cast iron
pipes and without head on spigot end in case of cast iron (Spun) pipes. The pipes and fittings
shall be true to shape, smooth and cylindrical, their inner and outer surface being as nearly as
practicable concentric. They shall be sound and shall be free from cracks, taps, pinholes and
other imperfections and shall be neatly dressed and carefully fettled. All pipes and fittings shall
ring clearly when struck with a light hand hammer.
The ends of pipes and fittings shall be reasonably square to their axis. The sand cast iron pipes
shall be 1.5/1.8/2.0 metre in length including socket ends, cast iron (Spun) pipes shall be
l.5/1.75/2.0/2.5/3.0 metre in length excluding socket ends, unless shorter lengths are either
specified or required at junctions etc. The· pipe and fittings shall be supplied without ears,
unless specified or directed otherwise.
All pipes and fittings shall be coated internally and externally with the same material at the
factory, the fitting being preheated prior to total immersion in a bath containing a uniformly
heated composition having a tar or other suitable base. The coating material shall have good
adherence and shall not scale off. In all instances where the coating material has tar or similar
base it shall be smooth and tenacious and hard enough not to flow when exposed to a
temperature of 77 degree centigrade but not so brittle at a temperature of 0 degree centigrade
as to chip off when scribed lightly with a pen knife.
The standard weights and thicknesses of pipes and their tolerances shall be as prescribed
standard.
The thickness of fittings and their socket and spigot dimensions shall conform to the
thickness and dimensions specified for the corresponding sizes of straight pipes. The tolerance
in weights & thicknesses shall be the same as for straight pipes.
The access door fittings shall be designed so as to avoid dead spaces in which filth may
accumulate. Doors shall be provided with 3 mm rubber insertion packing and when closed
and bolted, these shall be water tight.
21.11.
Sand Cast Iron Floor Trap or Nahani Trap
Sand cast Iron Floor trap or Nahani trap shall be 'P' or 'S' type with minimum 50 mm seal.
However, if the plumbing is in two pipe system and with a gully trap at the ground level the
minimum water seal shall be 35 mm. The traps shall be of self cleansing design and shall have
exit of same size as that of waste pipe. These shall conform to IS 1729.
Specifications
Page 186
Tender No: -1800000008
21.12.
Towel Rail
The towel rail shall be of PTMT as specified and as per direction of Engineer-in-charge.
21.13.
Toilet Paper Holder
The toilet paper holder shall be of CP brass or vitreous china as specified and of size and
design as approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. It shall be fixed in position by means of C.P.
brass screws and rawl plugs embedded in the wall.
21.14.
Urinals
21.14.1.
Bowl Type Urinals : Urinal basins shall be of flat back or corner wall type in front.
These shall be of white vitreous china conforming to IS 2556-(Part 6). The urinals shall of
one piece construction. Each urinal shall be provided with not less than two fixing holes
of minimum dia 6.5 mm on each side. Each urinal shall have an integral flushing rim of
suitable type and inlet or supply horn for connecting the flush pipe. The flushing rim and
inlet shall be of the self draining type. It shall have a weep hole at the flushing inlet of the
urinals.
At the bottom of the urinal an outlet horn for connecting to an outlet pipe shall be
provided. The exterior of the outlet horn shall not be glazed and the surface shall be
provided with grooves at right angles to the axis of the outlet to facilitate fixing to the
outlet pipe. The inside surface of the urinal shall be uniform and smooth throughout to
ensure efficient flushing. The bottom of pan shall have sufficient slope from the front
towards the outlet such that there is efficient draining.
21.14.2. Half Stall Urinals: They shall be of white vitreous China conforming to IS 2556 (Part
6). They shall be of one piece construction with or without an integral flushing box rim
and provided with slots or alternative fixing arrangement at the flat back end. They shall
be provided with ridges where integral flushing rim is not provided in the sides of the
interior of the bowl, to divert the water towards the front line of the urinal where integral
flushing box rim is specified, water spreaders provided shall conform to IS 2556 Part-6 (or
as specified in CPWD specification). These shall be vitreous China of one piece
construction with integral flush inlet. The tolerance of ± 4 per cent may be allowed on the
dimensions specified.
21.15.
Wash Basins
Wash basins shall be of white vitreous china conforming to IS 2556 (Part-I) and IS 2556 (Part4). Wash basins either of flat back or angle back as specified shall be of one piece
construction, including a combined overflow. All internal angles shall be designed so as to
facilitate cleaning. Each basin shall have a rim of all sides, except sides in contact with the
walls and shall have a skirting at the back. Basins shall be provided with single or double tap
holes as specified. The tap holes shall be 28 mm square or 30 mm round or 25 mm round for
pop up hole. A suitable tap hole button shall be supplied if one tap hole is not required in
installation. Each basin shall have circular waste hole to which the interior of basin shall
drain. The waste hole shall be either rebated or beveled internally with dia meter of 65 mm at
top. Each basin shall be provided with a non-ferrous 32 mm waste fitting. Stud slots to receive
the brackets on the underside of the wash basin shall be suitable for a bracket with stud not
exceeding 13 mm diameter, 5 mm high and 305 mm from the back of basin to the centre of
the stud. The stud slots shall be of depth sufficient to take 5 mm stud. Every basin shall have
an integral soap holder recess or recesses, which shall fully drain into the bowl. A slot type of
overflow having an area of not less than 5 sq. cm, shall be provided and shall be so designed
as to facilitate cleaning of the overflow.
Where oval shape or round shape wash basins are required to be fixed these shall be fixed
preferably in RCC platform with local available stone topping either fully sunk in stone top or
Specifications
Page 187
Tender No: -1800000008
top flush with the stone topping as directed by Engineer-in-Charge.
The wash basins shall be one of the following patterns and sizes as specified
a)
Flat back:
660 x 460 mm (Surgeon’s Basin)
630 x 450 mm
550 x 400 mm
450 x 300 mm
b)
Angle back:
660 x 480 mm
400 x 400 mm
White glazed pedestals for wash basins, where specified shall be provided. The quality of the
glazing of the pedestal ~all be exactly the same as that of the basin along with which it is to be
installed. It shall be completely recessed at the back to accommodate supply and waste pipes
and fittings. It shall be capable of supporting the basin rigidly and adequately and shall be so
designed as to make the height from the floor to top of the rim of basin 75 to 80 cm or as
specified in CPWD specification. All the waste fittings shall be brass chromium plated, or as
specified.
21.16.
Waste Fittings for Wash Basins and Sinks
The waste fittings shall be of nickel chromium plated brass, with thickness of plating not less
than service grade 2 of IS 4827 which is capable of receiving polish and will not easily scale
off. The fitting shall conform in all respect to IS 2963 and shall be sound, free from laps, blow
holes and fittings and other manufacturing defects. External and internal surfaces shall be
clean and smooth. They shall be neatly dressed and be truly machined so that the nut
smoothly moves on the body.
Waste fitting for wash basins shall be of nominal size of 32 mm. Waste
fittings for sinks shall be of nominal size 50 mm.
21.17.
Water Closet
21.17.1. Squatting Pans (Indian Type W.C.): Squatting pans shall be of white vitreous china
conforming to IS 2556 Part-I for General Requirements and relevant IS codes for each
pattern as described below:
13
(i)
Long pattern-conforming to IS 2556 (Part-3).
(ii)
Orissa pattern-conforming to IS 2556 (Part-3).
(iii)
Integrated type conforming to IS 2556 (Part-14).
Preferably Orissa type pan should be used.
Each pan shall have an integral flushing rim of suitable type. It shall also have an inlet
or supply horn for connecting the flush pipes, or as specified in CPWD specification.
The flushing rim and inlet shall be of the self draining type. It shall have weep hole at
the flushing inlet to the pan. The flushing inlet shall be in the front, unless otherwise
specified or ordered by the Engineer-in-Charge. The inside of the bottom of the pan
shall have sufficient slope from the front towards the outlet and the surface shall be
uniform and smooth to enable easy and quick disposal while flushing. The exterior
surface of the outlet below the flange shall be an unglazed surface which shall have
grooves at right angles to the axis of the outlet. In all cases a pan shall be provided with
a (100 mm) S.C.!. trap 'P' or 'S' type with approximately 50 mm water seal and 50 mm
dia vent horn, where required by the Engineer-in-Charge.
21.17.2. Wash Down Type (European Type W.C): Water closets shall be of white vitreous china
conforming to IS 2556 (Part-1) and 2556 (Part-2), as specified and shall be of 'Wash down
Specifications
Page 188
Tender No: -1800000008
type". The closets shall be either of the two patterns (Pattern I & Pattern II) and sizes as
shown in or as specified in CPWD specification as specified. The closets shall be of one
piece construction. Each water closet shall have not less than two holes having a
minimum diameter of 6.5 mm for fixing to floor and shall have an integral flushing rim of
suitable type. It shall also have an inlet or supply horn for connecting the flushing pipe of
dimensions as shown in or as specified in CPWD specification the flushing rim may be
boxed or open type. In the case of box rims adequate number of holes, on each side
together with a slot opposite the inlet shall be provided. The flushing rim and inlet shall
be of the self draining type. The water closet shall have a weep hole at the flushing inlet.
Each water closet shall have an integral trap with either 'S' or 'P' outlet with at least 50
mm water seal. For P trap, the slope of the outlet shall be 14 deg. below the horizontal.
Where required the water closet shall have an antisiphonage 50 mm dia vent horn on the
outlet side of the trap with dimension conforming to those given in or as specified in
CPWD specification and on either right or left hand or centre as specified set at an angle
of 45 deg. and invert of vent hole not below the central line of the outlet. The inside
surface of water closets and traps shall be uniform and smooth in order to enable an
efficient flush. The serrated part of the outlet shall not be glazed externally. The water
closet, when sealed at the bottom of the trap in line with the back plate, shall be capable
of holding not less than 15 litres of water between the normal water level and the highest
possible water level of the water closet as installed.
21.18.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR INSTALLATION OF W.C. PAN
21.18.1.
The work shall be carried cut, .complying in all respects with the requirements of
relevant byelaws of the local body in whose jurisdiction the work is situated.
21.18.2. Any damage caused to the building, or to electric, sanitary, water supply or other,
installations etc. therein, either due to negligence on the part of the contractor, or due to
actual requirements of the work, shall be made good and the building or the installation
shall be restored to its original condition by the contractor. Nothing extra shall be paid for
such restoration works except where otherwise specified.
21.18.3. For making good the damage to the under mentioned items of work, the specifications
as given in the following paras shall apply, unless directed otherwise.
(a) Masonry Work: The masonry work shall be made good by using the same class of
bricks, tiles or stones as was damaged during the execution of the work. The mortar
used shall be cement mortar 1:5 (1 cement: 5 fine sand) or as directed by the
Engineer-in-Charge.
(b) Plain Concrete Work: Concrete work for sub-grade of the flooring, foundations and
other plain concrete works shall be cement concrete 1:5:10 (1 cement: 5 coarse
sand: 10 graded stone aggregate 40 mm nominal size). A coat of neat cement slurry
shall be applied at the junction with old work, before laying fresh concrete.
(c) Cement Concrete Flooring and R.C.C. Work: Cement concrete 1:2:4 (1 Cement : 2
Coarse sand: 4 graded stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size) shall be used after
applying a coat of neat .cement slurry at the junction with old work, and the surface
finished to match with the surrounding surface.
21.19.
Rate
The rate shall include the cost of all materials and labour involved in all the operations
described above.
Specifications
Page 189
Tender No: -1800000008
21.20.
FIXING AND JOINTING OF PIPES AND FITTINGS
21.20.1.
The specifications described in sub-head 12.0 shall apply, as far as applicable,
except that the joint shall be lead caulked. All soil pipes shall be carried up above the roof
and shall have sand cast iron terminal guard.
21.20.2. Height of Ventilating Pipes
The ventilating pipe or shaft shall be carried to a height of at least 60 cms above the outer
covering of the roof of the building or in the case of a window in a ga61e wall or a dormer
window it shall be carried up to the ridge of the roof or at least 2 metres above the top of the
window. In the case of a flat roof to which access for use is provided it shall be carried up to a
height of 2 metres above the roof and shall not terminate within 2 metres, measured vertically
from the top of any window opening which may exist up to a horizontal distance of 3 meters
from the vent pipe into such building and in no case shall be carried to a height less than 3
metres above plinth level. In case the adjoining building is taller, the ventilating pipe shall be
carried higher than the roof of the adjoining building, wherever it is possible.
The pipes above the parapet shall be secured to the wall by means of M.S. stay and clamps as
specified / instructed.
The connections between the main pipe and branch pipes shall be made by using branches
and bends with access doors for cleaning. The waste from lavatories, kitchen, basins, sinks,
baths and other floor traps shall be separately connected to respective waste stack of upper
floors. The waste stack of lavatories shall be connected directly to manhole while the waste
stack of others shall separately discharge over gully trap. Where single stack system is
provided, the connection shall be made direct to the manhole.
21.20.3. Jointing
The interior of the socket and exterior of the spigots shall be thoroughly cleaned and dried. The
spigot end shall be inserted into the socket right up to the back of the socket and carefully
centered by two or three laps of treated spun yarn, twisted into ropes of uniform thickness well
caulked into the back of the socket. No piece of yarn shall be shorter than the circumference of
the pipe. The jointed pipe line shall be at required levels and alignment.
The leading of pipes shall be made by means of ropes covered with clay or by using special
leading rings. The lead shall be melted so as to be thoroughly fluid and each joint shall be
filled in one pouring.
The following precautions shall be taken for melting lead:
(a) The pot and the ladle in which lead shall be put shall be clean and dry.
(b) Sufficient quantity of lead shall be melted.
(c) Any scum or dross which may appear on the surface of the lead during melting shall
be skimmed off.
After the lead has been run into the joint the lead shall be thoroughly caulked. Caulking of
joints shall be done after a convenient length of the pipes has been laid and leaded.
The leading ring shall first be removed and any lead outside the socket shall be removed with a
flat chisel and then the joint caulked round three times with caulking tools of increasing
thickness and hammer 2 to 3 kg. weight. The joints shall not be covered till the pipe line has
been tested under pressure.
Use of collars for jointing is not permitted in any concealed or embedded location. However, in
exposed locations where full length pipes cannot be fixed due to site constraints, collars (and
not loose sockets) may be used subject to the following:
(a)
Specifications
No two consecutive joint shall be with the use of collars.
Page 190
Tender No: -1800000008
(b)
The joint of collar with the cut/spigot end of the pipe shall be made on the
ground in advance and tested against leakage before fixing.
(c)
Cut/spigot end of the pipes shall be inserted in the collars up to the projection
inside the collar and jointing shall be done as in the case of socket and spigot
joint. The jointed pipe line shall be at required level/slope and alignment.
Note: The dimensions of loose sockets shall correspond to those of appropriate nominal size of
pipe.
21.20.4. Testing
In order to ensure that adequate lead is poured properly into the joints and to control waste in
use of lead, at the beginning of work three or four sample joints shall be made and the
quantum of lead per joint approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. All sand cast iron/cast iron
(Spun) pipes and fittings including joint shall be tested by smoke test to the satisfaction of the
Engineer-in-Charge and left in working order after completion. The smoke test shall be carried
out as under:
Smoke shall be pumped into the pipes at the lowest end from a smoke machine which consists
of a bellow and burner. The material usually burnt is greasy cotton waste which gives out a
clear pungent smoke which is easily detectable by sight as well as by smell, if there is leak at
any point of the drain.
21.20.5. Painting
All sand cast iron/cast iron (Spun) pipes and fittings shall be painted with shade to match the
colour of the background as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
21.20.6. Measurements
(a)
The pipes shall be measured net when fixed in position excluding all fittings along its
length, correct to a cm.
(b)
When collars are used for jointing SCI pipes these shall be measured as fittings and
shall be paid for separately.
(c)
No allowance shall be made for the portions of the pipe lengths entering the sockets
of the adjacent pipes or fittings. The above shall apply to both cases i.e. whether the
pipes are fixed on wall face or embedded in masonry.
(d)
No deduction shall be made in the former case from the masonry measurement for
the volume of concrete blocks embedded therein. Similarly no deduction shall be
made for the volume occupied by the pipes from the masonry when the former are
embedded in the later.
21.20.7. Rates
The rate shall include the cost of all labour and materials involved in all the operations
described above, excluding fittings, lead caulk jointing, the supply and fixing M.S. holder bat
clamps and M.S. stays and clamps, floor trap and painting, which shall be paid for separately.
21.21.
Ball Valve (Brass)
The ball valve shall be of Brass or Gunmetal as specified conforming to IS 1703 (as specified in
CPWD specification). The ball valve shall be of following two classes:-
(a) High Pressure: High pressure float valves are indicated by the abbreviation 'HP' and are
designed for use on mains having pressure of 0.175 MPa or above.
Specifications
Page 191
Tender No: -1800000008
(b) Low Pressure: Low Pressure float valves are indicated by the abbreviation 'LP' and are
designed for use on mains having a pressure up to. 0.175 MPa.
The ball valves shall be of following nominal sizes 15 mm, 20 mm, 25 mm, 32 mm, 40 mm
and 50 mm. The nominal size shall correspond with the nominal bore of the inlet shanks.
Polyethylene floats shall conform to IS 9762
21.22.
Bib Taps and Stop Valve
Brass (or as specified in CPWD specification): A bib tap is a draw off tap with a horizontal inlet
and free outlet and a stop valve is a valve with suitable means of connections for insertion in a
pipe line for controlling or stopping the flow. They shall be of specified size and shall be of
screw down type and shall conform to IS 781. The closing device shall work by means of disc
carrying a renewable non-metallic washer which shuts against water pressure on a seating at
right angles to the axis of the threaded spindle which operates it. The handle shall be either
crutch or butterfly type securely fixed to the spindle. Valve shall be of the loose leather seated
pattern. The cocks (taps) shall open in anti-clock wise direction.
The bib tap and stop valve shall be polished bright. The minimum finished weights of bib tap
and stop valve shall be as specified in Table 18.
TABLE 18
MINIMUM FINISHED MASS OF BIB TAPS AND STOP VALVES
Size
(mm)
Bib Taps
(kg)
8
10
15
20
25
32
40
50
0.250
0.300
0.400
0.750
1.250
-
Minimum Finished Mass
Stop Valves
Internally
Externally
Mixed End
Threaded
Threaded
(kg)
(kg)
(kg)
0.220
0.250
0.235
0.300
0.350
0.325
0.330
0.400
0.365
0.675
0.750
0.710
1.180
1.300
1.250
1.680
1.800
1.750
2.090
2.250
2.170
3.700
3.850
3.750
In case these are required to be nickel plated, the plating shall be of the first quality with a
good thick deposit of silvery whiteness capable of taking high polish which will not easily
tarnish or scale.
21.23.
Pipes – Centrifugally Cast (Spun) Iron Pipes
21.23.1. The spun iron pipes shall conform to IS 1536. The spun iron pipes shall be of cast iron
cast centrifugally and vary in diameters from 80 mm to 750 mm. These shall be of class
LA, class A and class B, as specified. Pipes shall be tested hydrostatically at the pressure
specified in table 19 & 20. Tolerances on specified dimensions shall be as prescribed in
CPWD specification
21.23.2. Specials: The specials shall conform to IS 1538. The hydraulic test pressure of each
class shall be as detailed in Table 21. Tolerances on specified dimensions shall be as
prescribed in in CPWD specification
TABLE 19
Hydrostatic Test Pressure for Centrifugally Cast Socket and Spigot Pipes in MPa
Specifications
Page 192
Tender No: -1800000008
Hydrostatic Test pressure for works in MPa
Class
LA
A
B
Up to DN 600
3.5
3.5
3.5
DN 700 & above
1.5
2.0
2.5
TABLE 20
Hydrostatic Test Pressure for Centrifugally Cast Pipes with Screwed on flanges in MPa
Class
B
Up to DN 600
2.5
DN 700 & above
1.6
TABLE 21
Hydrostatic Test Pressure for Fittings in MPa (N/mm2) (metre head)
Nominal – Diameter
Up to and including 300
mm
Over 300 mm and up to
and including 600 mm
Over 600 mm and up to
and including 1500 mm
Fitting without branches or
with branches not greater
than half the principle
diameter
2.5 (25)
Fitting with branches
greater than half the
principal diameter
2.0 (20)
2.0 (20)
1.5 (15)
1.0 (10)
2.5 (25)
21.23.3. Shower Rose Brass
The shower rose shall be of chromium plated brass of specified diameter. It shall have uniform
perforations. The inlet size shall be 15 mm or 20 mm as required.
14
21.24.
CHLORINATED POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (CPVC) PIPES
21.24.1.
CPVC pipes & fittings used in hot & cold potable water distribution system shall
conform to requirement of IS 15778. The material from which the pipe is produced shall
consist of chlorinated polyvinyl chlorides. The polymer from which the pipe compounds
are to be manufactured shall have chlorine content not less than 66.5'9o.~
The internal and external surfaces of the pipe shall be smooth, clean and free from
grooving and other defects. The pipes shall not have any detrimental effect on the
composition of the water flowing though it.
Diameter and wall thickness of CPVC pipes are as per given in Table 22 below.
TABLE 22
Sr.
Nominal
Nominal
Mean Outside
Outside
No.
Size
Outside
Diameter
Diameter at
Diameter
Wall Thickness
any point
Min
Max
Min
Max
Class 1, SDR 11
Avg.
Min
Max
Max
Class 3, SDR 17
Avg.
Min
Max
Max
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
I
15
15.9
15.8
16.0
15.8
16.0
2.2
1.7
2.2
-
-
-
Ii
20
22.2
22.1
22.3
22.0
22.4
2.5
2.02
2.5
-
-
-
Iii
25
28.6
28.5
28.7
28.4
28.8
3.1
2.6
3.1
-
-
-
Specifications
Page 193
Tender No: -1800000008
Iv
32
34.9
34.8
35.0
34.7
35.1
3.7
3.2
3.7
-
-
-
V
40
41.3
41.2
41.4
41.1
41.5
4.3
3.8
4.3
-
-
-
Vi
50
54.0
53.9
54.1
53.7
54.3
5.5
4.9
5.5
-
-
-
Vii
65
73.0
72.8
73.2
72.2
73.8
-
-
-
4.8
4.3
4.8
Viii
80
88.9
88.7
89.1
88.1
89.7
-
-
-
5.9
5.2
5.9
Ix
100
114.3
114.1
114.5
113.5
115.1
-
-
-
7.5
6.7
7.5
X
150
168.3
168.0
168.6
166.5
170.1
-
-
-
11.1
9.9
11.1
Notes : For CPVC pipes SDR is calculated by dividing the average outer diameter of the pipe
in mm by the minimum wall thickness in mm. If the wall thickness calculated by this formula
is less than 1.52 mm, it shall be increased to 1.52 mm. The SDR values shall be rounded to
the nearest 0.5.
21.24.2. Dimensions of Pipes
The outside diameter, outside diameter at any point and wall thickness shall be as
given in Table 22.
21.24.2.1.Diameter: The outside diameter and outside diameter at any point as given in
Table 22 shall be measured according to the method given in IS 12235 (part 1).
21.24.2.2. Diameter at any point: The difference between the measured maximum outside
diameter and measured minimum outside diameter in the same cross-section of
pipe (also called tolerance on ovality) shall not exceed the greater of the following two
values:
(a) 0.5 mm, and
(b) 0.012 dn rounded off to the next higher 0.1 mm.
21.24.2.3. Wall Thickness: The wall thickness of the pipes shall be as given in Table 22. Wall
thickness shall be measured by any of the three methods given in IS 12235 (part 1).
To check the conformity of the wall thickness of the pipe throughout its entire
length, it is necessary to measure the wall thickness of the pipe at any point along
its length. This shall be done by cutting the pipe at any point along its length and
measuring the wall thickness as above. Alternatively, to avoid destruction of the
pipe, non destructive testing methods such as the use of ultrasonic wall thickness
measurement gauges shall be used at any four points along the length of the pipe.
Tolerance on Wall Thickness
(a) For pipes of minimum wall thickness 6 mm or less, the permissible variation
between the minimum wall thickness (eMin) and the wall thickness at any point
(e), (e - eMin) shall be positive in the form of +Y, where y=0.1 eMin+0.2 mm.
(b) For pipes of minimum wall thickness greater than 6mm, the permissible
variation of wall thickness shall again be positive in the form of +Y, where y
would be applied in two parts.
(c)
The average wall thickness shall be determined by taking at least six
measurements of wall thickness round the pipe and including both the absolute
minimum and absolute maximum measured values. The tolerance applied to
this average wall thickness from these measurements shall be within the range
0.1 eMin+0.2 mm (see Table 22).
(d) The maximum wall thickness at any point shall be within the range 0.15 Min
(see Table 22).
(e)
Specifications
The results of these calculations for checking tolerance shall be rounded off to
the next higher 0.1 mm.
Page 194
Tender No: -1800000008
21.24.2.4. Effective Length (Le): If the length of a pipe is specified, the effective length shall
not be less than that specified. The preferred effective length of pipes shall be 3, 5 or
6 m. The pipes may be supplied in other lengths where so agreed upon between the
manufacturer and the purchaser.
21.24.2.5. Pipe Ends: The ends of the pipes meant for solvent cementing shall be cleanly cut
and shall be reasonably square to the axis of the pipe or may be chamfered at the
plain end.
The internal and external surface of the pipe shall be smooth, clean and free from
grooving and other defects.
21.24.2.6. Opacity: The wall of the plain pipe shall not transmit more than 0.1 per cent of the
visible light falling on it when tested in accordance with IS 12235 (Part 3).
21.24.2.7. Effect on Water: The pipes shall not have any determinate effect on the
composition of the water flowing through them, when tested as per 10.3 of IS 4985.
21.24.2.8. Reversion Test: When tested by the method prescribed in IS 12235 (Part 51 Sec 1
and Sec 2), a length of pipe 200 ±20 mm long shall not alter in length by more than
5 per cent.
21.24.2.9. Vicat Softening Temperature: When tested by the method prescribed in IS 12235
(part 2), the Vicat softening temperature of the specimen shall not be less than
110°C.
21.24.2.10.
Density: When tested in accordance with IS 12235 (Part 14), the density
of the pipes shall be between 1450kg/m3 and 1650kg/m3.
21.24.2.11.
Hydrostatic Characteristics: When subject to internal hydrostatic
pressure test in accordance with the procedure given in IS 12235 (part 8/Sec 1), the
pipe shall not fail during the prescribed test duration. The temperatures, duration
and hydrostatic (hoop) stress for the test shall conform to the requirements given in
Table 23. The test shall be carried out not earlier than 24 h after the pipes have
been manufactured.
TABLE 23
Requirements of Pipes for Internal Hydrostatic
Pressure Test
SI.
No.
Test
(1)
i
ii
iii
iv
(2)
Acceptance
Type
Type
Type
Test
Test Period
°C
(3)
20
95
95
95
h
(4)
1
165
1000
8760
Hydrostatic
Stress
MPa
(5)
43.0
5.6
4.6
3.6 (Test for
stability)
21.24.2.12.
Thermal Stability by Hydrostatic Pressure Testing : When subject to
internal hydrostatic pressure test in accordance with the procedure given in IS
12235 (Part 8/Sec 1) and as per requirement given in Table 23, SI. No. (iv), the pipe
shall not burst or leak during the prescribed test duration.
21.24.2.13.
Resistance to External Blow at DOC: When tested by the method
prescribed in IS 4985, with classified striker mass and drop height as given in Table
24, the pipe shall have a true impact rate of not more than 10 per cent.
TABLE 24
Classified Striker Mass and Drop Height Conditions for the FallingSpecifications
Page 195
Tender No: -1800000008
Weight Impact Test
SI.
No.
(1)
i
ii
iii
iv
v
(vi)
vii
(viii)
(ix'
(x)
Nomina Mass of Fallin
Weight
mm
Kg
(2)
(3)
15
0.5±0.5%
20
0.5±0.5%
25
0.5±0.5%
32
0.5±0.5%
40
0.5±0.5%
50
0.5±0.5%
65
0.8±0.5%
80
0.8±0.5%
100
1.0±0.5%
150
1.6±0.5%
Falling
mm
(4)
300±10
400±10
500±10
600±10
800±10
1000± 10
1000±10
1200±10
1600±10
2000±10
21.24.2.14.
Flattening Test: When tested by the method prescribed in IS 12235 (part
19), pipe shall show no signs of cracking, splitting and breaking.
21.24.2.15.
Tensile Strength: When tested by the method prescribed in IS 12235
(Part 19), the tensile strength at yield shall not be less than 50 MPa at 27 ± 2°C.
21.24.3. Marking
21.24.3.1. Each pipe shall be clearly and indelibly marked in ink/paint or hot embossed on
white base at intervals of not more than 3 m. The marking shall show the following:
(a) Manufacturer's name
(b) Outside diameter,
(c) Class of pipe and pressure rating, and
(d) Bath or lot number
21.24.3.2. Fittings
The fittings shall be as follows:
(a) Plain CPVC solvent cement fittings from size 15 mm to 160 mm.
(b) Brass threaded fittings.
(c) Valve from size 15 mm to 160 mm
(d) Brass Threaded Fittings: All types of one end brass threaded male/female
adaptors in various fittings like coupler, socket, elbow, tee are available for
transition to other plastic/metal piping and for fixing of CP fittings. Ball, Gate
valves in CPVC are available in all dimensions. All fittings shall carry the
following information:
(i) Manufacturer's name/trade mark.
(ii) Size of fitting
21.25.
POLYETHYLENE WATER STORAGE TANKS
21.25.1. Material
Polyethylene used for manufacture of tanks and manhole lids may be high density (HOPE)
density (LDPE) or linear low density (LLDPE) and shall conform to IS 10146. Polyethylene sh
compounded with carbon black so as to make the tank resistant to ultra violet rays from the
sun percentage of carbon black content in polyethylene shall be 2.5 ± 0.5 percent and it
shall be unif distributed. The materials used for the manufacture of tank, manhole lid and
fittings shall be sue they neither contaminate the water nor impart any taste, colour, odour
Specifications
Page 196
Tender No: -1800000008
or toxity to water.
21.25.2. Manufacture and Finish
The tanks shall be manufactured by rotational moulding process. Each tank and the
manhole shall be single piece having arrangement for fixing and locking the manhole lid with
the tanks. E material at the mould parting line and near the top rim shall be neatly cut and
finished. The interna external surface of the tanks shall be smooth, clean and free from
hidden internal defects lik bubbles, pit and metallic or other foreign material inclusion.
Capacity of the tank, minimum weight empty tank (without manhole lid) and the
manufacture brand name shall be embossed on th surface of the tank near manhole.
21.25.3. Shape, Size and Capacity
The tank shall be cylindrical vertical with closed top having a manhole. Diameter and height
tank of various capacities shall be as per manufacturer's specifications and a clearance of ± 3
pe shall be permitted on these dimensions. Capacity of the tank or up to the bottom of the
inlet 10 whichever is less. Capacity of the tank shall be specified. Extra capacity if any shall
be ignored.
21.25.4. Weight and Wall Thickness
Minimum weight of the empty tank (exclusive of manhole lid fittings) and the minimum wall
thick of top, bottom and sides shall be specified in Table below. Wall thickness shall be
checked beyon mm of the edge where the direction the plane of tank surface changes.
21.25.5. Installation and Fittings
The flat base of the tank shall be fully supported over its whole bottom area on a durable rigio
and level platform sufficiently strong to stand without deflection the weight of the tank when
fully j with water. Depending upon the capacity and location tanks may be suitably anchored
as per directions of the Engineer-in-Charge. For inlet, outlet and other connections fully
threaded GI, HOP PVC connections with hexagonal check nuts and washers on either side of
the tank wall shal provided. Holes for threaded connections shall be drilled and not punched.
Pipes entering of leaving tank shall be provided with unions and suitably supported on a firm
base to avoid damage to the walls.
21.25.6. Manhole Lid
The lid shall rest evenly and fit over the rim of the manhole so as to prevent the ingress of any
for matter into the tank. The lid shall be provided with suitable arrangement for locking it
with the tank.
21.25.7.
The tank and its component shall confirm to local bye laws for preventions of
mosquito menace.
21.25.8. Measurements
Dimensions shall be measured to the nearest cm. and weight of the empty tank shall be
recorded to the nearest 100g. Capacity of the tank as defined in above shall be calculated to
the nearest litre.
Specifications
Page 197
Tender No: -1800000008
S.
No.
1
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
Capacit
/itres
2
200
300
400
500
700
1000
1250
1500
1700
2000
2500
3000
4000
5000
6000
7500
10000
15000
20000
TABLE 25
Minimum Wall
mm
3
4.4
4.4
5.5
6.0
6.6
7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
8.2
8.2
8.8
10.4
10.7
10.7
10.7
11.5
11.5
13.2
Minimum Weight
Empty Tank (kg)
4
7.8
9.0
15.0
18.0
23.5
33.0
40.0
47.0
54.0
64.0
81.0
96.0
138.0
191.0
209.0
250.0
363.0
550.0
814.0
21.25.9. Rates
The rate shall include the cost of the tank, manhole lid, carriage and delivery at the place
specified. Hoisting, installation, fittings, platform and anchoring shall be payable separately.
21.26.
MANHOLES
At every change of alignment, gradient or diameter of a drain, there shall be a manhole or
inspection chamber. Bends and junctions in the drains shall be grouped together in manhole
as far as possible. The maximum distance between manholes shall be 30 m.
Manholes of different types and sizes as specified shall be constructed in the sewer line at
places and to such levels and dimensions as shown in the drawings or as directed by the
Engine Charge. The size specified shall indicate the inside dimensions between brick faces of
the manholes.
Where the diameter of the drain is increased, the crown of the pipe shall be fixed at the same
level and necessary slope given in the invert of the manhole chamber. In exceptional cases
and where unavoidable, the crown of the branch sewer may be fixed at lower level but in
such cases the peak flow level of the two sewers shall be kept the same.
Sewers of unequal sectional area shall not be jointed at the same invert in a manhole. The
invert of the smaller sewer at its junction with main shall be at least 2/3 the diameter of the
main above the invert of the main. The branch sewers shall deliver sewage in the manhole in
the direction of main flow and junction must be made with care so that flow in main is not
impeded.
No drain from house fittings, e.g. gully trap or soil pipe, etc. to manhole shall normally
exceed a length of 6 m unless it is unavoidable.
Manholes 90 x 80 cm are generally constructed within compound for house drainage only
and near the buildings for house drainage. Manholes 1.2 m x 90 cm are generally
constructed for main drainage work for depths less than 1.5 m.
Specifications
Page 198
Tender No: -1800000008
Manhole 1.4 m x 90 cm is of the arched type and is generally constructed for main drainage
works where depth is 1.50 m or more. The width of manholes shall be increased more than
90 cm on bends or junctions or pipes with diameter greater than 450 mm and that the
benching width on either side channel is minimum 20 cm.
Manholes 1.4 m internal diameter are generally constructed for main drainage works where
depth is 2.45 m or more as an alternative to manholes of arch type. The diameter shall be
increased suitably, for pipes with diameter greater than 450 mm in the same manner as in
the case of rectangular manholes.
Before deciding size of manholes, Local Municipal Bye Laws shall be consulted. As a general
guide some typical type designs of manholes followed have been as per CPWD specification.
When manholes are constructed on foot path, these shall be provided with cover of medium
duty casting and when built within the width of the road under vehicular traffic, these shall
be provided with cover of heavy duty casting.
21.26.1. Excavation
The excavation for manhole shall be true to dimensions and levels shown on the plans or as
directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
21.26.2. Bed Concrete
The manhole shall be built on a bed of cement concrete 1:4:8 (1 cement: 4 coarse sand: 8
graded stone aggregate 40 mm nominal size) unless required by local authorities. The
thickness of the bed concrete shall be 20 cm for manholes up to 4.25 m depth and 30 cm for
depths beyond 4.25 m unless otherwise specified or directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. In bad
ground, special foundation as suitable shall be provided.
21.26.3. Brick Work
The brick work shall be with class 75 bricks in cement mortar 1:4 (1 cement: 4 coarse sand).
The external joints of the brick masonry shall be finished smooth, and the joints of the pipes
with the masonry shall be made perfectly leak proof. For arched type and circular manholes,
brick masonry in arches and arching over the pipes shall be in cement mortar 1.3 (1 cement: 3
fine sand). In the case of manholes of circular type the excess shaft shall be corbelled inwardly
on three sides at the top to reduce its size to
the cover frame to be fitted.
.
The walls shall be built of one brick thickness for depths up to 4.25 m. Below a depth of 4.25
m in ordinary subsoil the wall thickness shall be increased to one and half brick and at 9.75 m
below ground two brick thick walls shall be built.
21.26.4. Plaster and Pointing
The walls of the manholes shall be plastered inside with 12 mm thick cement plaster 1: 3 (1
cement: 3 coarse sand) finished smooth. In the case of arched type manhole the walls of the
manhole shall be plastered inside all-around only up to the crown level, and flush pointed for
the shaft with cement mortar 1:2 (1 cement: 2 fine sand). Where the saturated soil is met with,
also the external surface of the walls of the manhole shall be plastered with 12 mm thick
cement plaster 1: 3 (1 cement: 3 coarse sand) finished smooth up to 30 cm above the highest
sub-soil water level with the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge. The plaster shall further be
water proofed with addition of approved water proofing compound in a quantity as per
manufacturer's specifications. In case Local Authorities/Bye Laws specify richer specifications,
the same shall be adopted.
For earth work excavation, bed concrete brick work, plaster and pointing, R.C.C. work and
refilling of earth, respective specifications shall be followed.
Specifications
Page 199
Tender No: -1800000008
21.26.5. Benching
The channels and benching shall be done in cement concrete 1:2:4 (1 cement: 2 coarse sand: 4
graded stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size) and rendered smooth with neat cement. The
depth of channels and benching shall be as given in Table below.
21.26.6. Foot Rests
All manholes deeper than 0.8 m shall be provided with M.S. foot rests. These shall be
embedded 20 cm deep in 20 x 20 x 10 cm blocks of cement concrete 1:3:6 (1 cement: 3 coarse
sand 6 graded stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size). The concrete block with M.S. foot rest
placed in its centre shall be cast in situ along with the masonry and surface finished with 12
mm thick cement plaster 1:3 (1 cement: 3 coarse sand) finished smooth.
Sizes of
mm
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
TABLE 26
Top of channel lilt the
Depth of benching at side
above bed concrete
above bed concrete
cm
cm
15
20
20
30
25
35
30
40
35
45
40
50
45
55
50
60
Foot rests which shall be of 20 x 20 Sq. M.S. bars as specified in CPWD specifications shall be
fixed 40 cm vertically and staggered laterally and shall project 10 cm beyond the surface of the
wall. The top foot shall be 45 cm below the manhole cover.
Foot rests shall be painted with coal tar, the portion embedded in the cement concrete
block t painted with thick cement slurry before fixing.
21.26.7. Manhole Covers and Frames
The frame of manhole shall be firmly embedded to correct alignment and levels in R.C.C.
slG plain concrete as the case may be on the top of the masonry. After completion of the
work, man covers shall be sealed by means of thick grease.
21.26.8. Measurements
Manholes shall be enumerated under relevant items. The depth of the manhole shall be
reckc from the top level of C.1. cover to the invert level of channel. The depth shall be
measured correct em. The extra depth shall be measured and paid as extra over the
specified depth.
21.26.9. Rate
The rate shall include the cost of materials and labour involved in all the operations
described above but excludes the cost of (i) excavation, (ii) M.S. foot rests and (iii) 12 mm
thick cement plaster with water proofing material applied at the external surface of the
manhole if required. These items shall be paid for separately under relevant items of work.
Payment for extra depths of manholes shall be made separately under relevant items of
Specifications
Page 200
Tender No: -1800000008
work.
Specifications
Page 201
Tender No: -1800000008
22. EXTERNAL DRAINAGE & SEWAGE DISPOSAL:
22.1.
General Scheme
The contractor shall install a drainage system to effectively collect; drain and dispose all soil
and waste water from various parts of the buildings, appurtenances and equipment. The
piping system shall finally terminate and discharge into the Municipal sewer / Sewage
treatment plant. The piping work mainly consists of laying of Salt glazed stoneware pipes,
reinforced cement concrete pipes and cast iron soil pipes as called for. Unless otherwise stated
or permitted by Engineer-In-Charge, all piping shall be installed at depth at least 60 cm below
finished ground level. The disposal system shall include construction of gully traps, manholes,
intercepting chambers as indicated. The piping system shall be vented suitably at the starting
point of all branch drains, main drains, the highest / lowest point of drain and at intervals as
shown. All ventilating arrangements shall be un obstructive and concealed. The work shall be
executed strictly in accordance with IS: 1742. The sewage system shall be subject to smoke
test for its soundness as directed by the Engineer-In-Charge. Wherever the sewerage pipes run
above water supply lines, same shall be completely encased in cement concrete 1:3:6 all round
with the prior approval of the Engineer-In-Charge.
22.2. Piping Material
22.2.1. Stoneware Pipes
Stoneware pipes shall be perfectly salt glazed, sound, free from cracks, deformities and
imperfections in glazing. They shall be cylindrical, straight and of standard nominal diameter,
length and depth of socket. They shall be made of hard burnt stoneware of dark grey colour
and thoroughly glazed and shall give a sharp clear note when struck with a light hammer. The
pipe shall conform to the requirements of Indian Standards IS: 651 & the sizes and make
specified in the Bill of Quantities.
22.2.2. Stoneware Gully Trap
Gully trap shall be stoneware as specified above. These shall be sound and free from visible
defects such as any type of crack. The glaze of the traps shall be free from cracks. They shall
give a sharp clear note when struck with light hammer. There shall be no broken blisters. Each
gully trap shall have one CI grating of square size corresponding to the dimensions of inlet of
gully trap. It will also have a water tight CI cover with frame inside dimensions 300 x 300 mm
the cover weighing not less than 4.5 kg and the frame not less than 2.7 kg. The grating cover
and frame shall be of good casting and shall have truly square machined seating faces.
22.2.3. Cast Iron Pipes
Cast iron pipes and fittings shall conform to IS:3989 in the documents.
22.2.4. Cast Iron Manhole Cover and Frame
The Cast Iron Manhole Cover and Frame shall conform to IS: 1726 and the grade and types
have been specified in the Bill of Quantities. The cover and frames shall be cleanly cast & they
shall be free from air and sand holes and from cold shuts. They shall be neatly dressed and
carefully trimmed. All castings shall be free from voids whether due to shrinkage or other
causes. Covers shall have a raised checkered design on the top surface to provide an adequate
non-slip grip.
The sizes of covers specified shall be taken as the clear internal dimensions of the frame.
The covers and frames shall be coated with a black bituminous composition. The coating shall
be smooth and tenacious. It shall not flow when exposed to a temperature of 63° C and shall
not brittle as to chip off at a temperature of 0° C.
Specifications
Page 202
Tender No: -1800000008
22.3. Laying and Jointing of Pipes
22.3.1. General
All the material shall be new of best quality conforming to specifications and subject to the
approval of the Engineer-In-Charge. Drainage lines shall be laid to the required gradients and
profiles. All drainage work shall be done in accordance with the local municipal by-laws.
Contractor shall obtain necessary approval and permission for the drainage system from the
municipal or any other competent authority. Location of all manholes, catch basins etc. shall
be confirmed by the Engineer-In-Charge before the actual execution of work at site. All work
shall be executed as directed by the Engineer-In-Charge.
22.3.2. Alignment and Grade
The sewer and storm water drainage pipes shall be carefully laid to levels and gradients shown
in the plans and sections but subject to modifications as shall be ordered by the Engineer-InCharge from time to time to meet the requirements of the works. Great care shall be taken to
prevent sand etc. from entering the pipes.
The pipes between two manholes shall be laid truly in straight lines without vertical or
horizontal undulations. The body of the pipes shall rest on an even bed in the trench for its
length and places shall be excavated to receive collar for the purpose of jointing. No deviations
from the lines, depths of cuttings or gradients as called for on the drawings shall be permitted
without the written approval of the Engineer-In-Charge. All pipes shall be laid atleast 60 cms
below the finished ground level or as called for on the drawings.
22.3.3. Setting out Trenches
The contractor shall set out all trenches, manholes, chambers and such other works to true
grades and alignments as called for. He shall provide the necessary instruments for setting out
and verification for the same. All trenches shall be laid to true grade and in straight lines and
as shown on the drawings.
The trenches shall be laid to proper levels by the assistance of boning rods and sight rails
which shall be fixed at intervals not exceeding 10 meters or as directed by the Engineer-InCharge.
22.4. Trench Excavation
The trenches for the pipes shall be excavated with bottoms formed to level and gradients as
shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer-In-Charge. In soft and filled in ground,
the Engineer-In-Charge may require the trenches to be excavated to a greater depth than the
shown on the drawings and to fill up such additional excavation with concrete (1:4:8)
consolidated to bring the excavation to the required levels as shown on the drawings.
All excavations shall be properly protected where necessary by suitable timbering, piling and
sheeting as approved by the Engineer-In-Charge. All timbering and sheeting when withdrawn
shall be done gradually to avoid falls. All cavities shall be adequately filled and consolidated.
No blasting shall be allowed without prior approval in writing from the Engineer-In-Charge. It
shall be carried out under thorough and competent supervision, with the written permission of
the appropriate authorities taking full precautions connected with the blasting operations. All
excavated earth shall be kept clear of the trenches to a distance equal to 75 cms.
22.5. Obstruction of Roads
The contractor shall not occupy or obstruct by his operation more than one half of the width of
any road or street and sufficient space shall then be left for public and private transit. He
shall remove the materials excavated and bring them back again when the trench is required
to be refilled. The contractor shall obtain the consent of the Engineer-In-Charge in writing
Specifications
Page 203
Tender No: -1800000008
before closing any road to vehicular traffic and the foot walks must be clear at all times.
22.6. Protection of Pipes etc.
All pipes, water mains, cables etc. met in the course of excavation shall be carefully protected
and supported. Care shall be taken not to disturb the cables, the removal of which shall be
arranged by the contractor with the written consent from the Owner.
22.7. Trench Back Filling
Refilling of the trenches shall not be commenced until the length of pipes therein has been
tested and approved. All timbering which may be withdrawn safely, shall be removed as filling
proceeds. Where the pipes are unprotected by concreted haunching, selected fine material
shall be carefully hand-packed around the lower half of the pipes so as to buttress them to the
sides of the trench.
The refilling shall then be continued to 150 mm over the top of the pipe using selected fine
hand packed material, watered and rammed on both sides of the pipes with a wooden hammer.
The process of filling and tamping shall proceed evenly in layers not exceeding 150 mm
thickness, each layer being watered and consolidated so as to maintain an equal pressure on
both sides of the pipe line. In gardens and fields the top solid and turf if any, shall be carefully
replaced.
22.8. Contractor to ensure Settlement and Damages
The contractor shall at his own costs and expenses, make good promptly during the whole
period for the works in hand if any settlement occurs in the surfaces of roads, beams,
footpaths, gardens, open spaces etc. in the public or private areas caused by his trenches or by
his other excavations and he shall be liable for any accident caused thereby. He shall also, at
his own expense and charges, repair (and make good) any damage done to building and other
property. If in the opinion of the Engineer-In-Charge he fails to make good such works with all
practicable dispatch, the Engineer-In-Charge shall be at his liberty to get the work done by
other means and the expenses thereof shall be paid by the contractor or deducted from any
money that may be or become due to him or recovered from him by any other manner
according to the laws of land.
The contractor shall at his own costs and charges provide places for disposal of all surplus
materials not required to be used on the works. As each trench is refilled, surplus soil shall be
immediately removed, the surface shall be properly restored and roadways and sides shall be
left clear.
22.9. Removal of water from Sewer, trench etc
The contractor shall at all times during the progress of work keep the excavations free from
water which shall be disposed by him in a manner as will neither cause injury to the public
health nor to the public or private property nor to the work completed or in progress nor to the
surface of any road or streets, nor cause any interference with the use of the same by the
public.
If any excavation is carried out at any point or points to a greater width of the specified cross
section of the sewer with its cover, the full width of the trench shall be filled with concrete by
the contractor at his own expense and charges to the requirements of the Engineer-In-Charge.
22.10.
Route Markers
Specifications
Page 204
Tender No: -1800000008
Markers indicating the particular service shall be provided along with the routes of pipe
trenches. Markers shall be of mild steel indicating the type of service installed and the
direction of flow painted on it. The markers shall be set firmly in a concrete base and installed
at all corner and turning points. Over straight runs, markers shall be spaced centre to centre
at 50 meter centre (generally).
22.11.
Laying and Jointing of Cement Concrete pipes
Cement concrete pipes shall be laid and jointed as described in IS:783. After setting out the
pipes, the collar shall be centered over the joint and a few skins of spun yarn soaked in a neat
cement wash shall be inserted in the groove at the end of the pipe and two adjoining pipes
butted against each other. After setting out the pipes, the collar shall then be slipped over the
joint, covering equally both the pipes. Spun yarn soaked in neat cement wash shall be passed
round the pipes and inserted in the joint by means of caulking tools from the ends of the
collar. More skins of yarn shall be added and well rammed above.
Cement mortar with one part of cement and two parts of sand shall be slightly moistened and
must in no account be soft or sloppy and shall be carefully inserted by hand into the joint and
more cement mortar be added until the space of the joint has been filled completely with tightly
caulked mortar. The joint shall be finished off neatly outside the collar on both sides at an
angle of 45 degree, any surplus mortar projecting inside the joint is to be removed and to
guard against any such projection, sack or gunny bags shall be drawn past each joint after
completion. Cement mortar joint shall be cured for seven days.
22.12.
Fixing Of Stoneware Gully Trap
The excavation for gully traps shall be done true to dimensions and levels as indicated on
plans or as directed by the Engineer-In-Charge. The gully traps shall be fixed on cement
concrete foundation [wherever required] 65cm square and not less than 10 cm thick. The mix
for the concrete will be 1:4:8. The jointing of gully outlet to the branch drain shall be done
similar to the jointing of S.W. Pipes described earlier. After fixing and testing gully and branch
drain, a brick work of specified class in cement mortar 1:5 shall be built with a half brick
masonry work round the gully trap from the top of the bed concrete upto ground level. The
space between the chamber and trap shall be filled in with cement concrete 1:3:6. The upper
portion of the chamber i.e. above the top level of the trap shall be plastered inside the cement
mortar 1:3 finish with a floating coat of neat cement. The corners and bottom of the chamber
shall be rounded off so as to slope towards the grating.
CI cover with frame 300 x 300 mm (inside) shall then be fixed on the top of the brick masonry
with cement concrete 1:2:4 and rendered smooth. The finished top cover shall be so as to
prevent the surface water from entering the gully trap.
22.13.
Construction of Manhole
Where manholes are to be constructed, the excavation, filling back and ramming, disposal of
surplus earth, preparation of bottom and sides etc. shall be carried out as described earlier
under trench excavation. Manhole shall be sized and depths as called for in the drawings and
Bill of Quantities.
The manhole shall be normally constructed as per detail drawing having lean mix concrete
provided for leveling pores with 230mm thick BB masonry for shade walls usually plastered
smooth from inside and outside and top of manhole provided with RCC slab as shown in the
drawing along with cast iron or fibre reinforced concrete manhole frame and cover as specified
or directed by Engineer-In-Charge. The bottom of the chamber will be provided with lean mix
concrete for providing benching of suitable size and shape. The surface of benching shall be
finished smooth with neat cement. The cost of benching, plaster and neat cement finishing
shall deemed to have been included in the quoted rate of the manhole. Manholes with left more
Specifications
Page 205
Tender No: -1800000008
than 900 mm shall be provided with suitable size of cast iron rungs as indicated in the
drawing and as specified in the item. These rungs will be paid separately as per rates shown in
the Bill of Quantities.
Above the horizontal diameter, the sides of channel shall be extended vertically to the same
level as the crown of the outgoing pipe and the top edge shall be suitably rounded off. The
branch channels shall also be similarly constructed with respect to the benching but at their
junction with the main channel an appropriate fall suitably rounded off in the direction of flow
in the main channel shall be given. Rungs of cast iron or mild steel of suitable dimensions
shall be provided in all manholes over 800 mm depth. These rungs shall be set at 30 cms
interval in two vertical runs at 380 mm apart horizontally. The top rung shall be 450 mm
below the manhole cover. Unless otherwise mentioned, manholes shall be constructed to the
requirements of Indian Standard IS:4111 (Part I). All manholes shall be constructed so as to be
water tight under test. All angles shall be rounded to a 75 mm radius with cement plaster 20
mm thick. The benching at the side shall be carried out in such a manner so as to provide no
lodgment for any splashing in case of accidental flooding. Manhole cover with frame shall be
cast iron of an approved make. The covers and frame shall generally be double seal as specified
in the Bill of Quantities.
22.14.
Drop Connection
Drop connection shall be provided between branch sewer and main sewer in the main sewer
itself in steep ground when the difference in invert level of two exceeds 45 cms of the required
sizes. Drop connections from gully traps to main sewer in rectangular shall be made inside the
manholes and shall have HCI special types door bend on to top and heel rest bend at bottom
connected by a HCI pipe. The pipe shall be supported by holder bat clamps at 180 cms
intervals with at least one clamp for each drop connection. All joints shall be lead caulked
joints 25 mm deep.
Drop connections from branch sewer to main sewer shall be made outside the manhole wall
with HCI / CI class LA pipe, connection, vertical pipe and bend at the bottoms. The top of the
tee shall be finished upto the surface level and provided with a CI hinges type frame & cover 30
cms x 30 cms. The connection and tee upto the surface chamber of the tee.
Drop connection made from vertical stacks directly into manholes shall not be considered as
drop connections. They shall be paid for under the relevant soil and waste pipes.
22.15.
Making Connections
Contractor shall connect the new sewer line to the existing manhole by cutting the walls
benching and restoring them to the original condition. A new channel shall be cut in the
benching of the existing manhole for the new connection. Contractor shall remove all sewage &
water if encountered in making the connection without additional cost.
22.16.
Shifting of Excavated Surplus Material
Contractor shall make his own arrangement to shift the surplus excavated material within the
site limits as directed by Engineer-In-Charge.
22.17.
Testing
All lengths of the sewer and drain shall be carefully tested for water tightness by means of
water pressure maintained for not less than 30 minutes. Testing shall be carried out from
manhole to manhole. All pipes shall be subject to a test pressure of 1.5 metre head of water.
The test pressure will however, not exceed 6 metres head at any point. The pipes shall be
plugged preferably with standard design plugs with rubber plugs on both sides, the upper end
shall, however, be connected to a pipe for filling with water and getting the required head
poured at one time permit.
Specifications
Page 206
Tender No: -1800000008
Sewer lines shall be tested for straightness by:
(a) Inserting a smooth ball 12mm less than the internal diameter of the pipe. In the
absence of obstructions such as yarn or mortar projecting at the joints the ball should
roll down the invert of the pipe and emerge at the lower end.
(b) Means of a mirror at one end and a lamp at the other end. If the pipe is straight the full
circle of light will be seen otherwise obstructions or deviations will be apparent.
(c) The contractor shall alternatively give a smoke test to the drain and sewer at his own
expense and charge, if directed by the Engineer-In-Charge.
(d) A test register shall be maintained which shall be signed and dated by contractor,
Engineer-In-Charge.
Contractor to provide :
The Contractor shall provide and maintain at site throughout the period of works the following
at his own cost and without extra charge, the cost being held to be included in the Contract
Rates :
1) All labour, materials, plant, equipment and temporary works required to complete
and maintain the works to the satisfaction of the Engineer-In-Charge.
2) Lighting for night work, and also whenever and wherever required by the EngineerIn-Charge.
3) Temporary fences, guards, lights and protective work necessary for protection of
workmen, supervisors, engineers or any other persons permitted access to the site.
4) All equipment, instruments and labour required by the Engineer-In-Charge for
measurement of the works.
5) A testing room of not less than 20m2 equipped with the following, and labour and
materials required for carrying out tests therein :
i)
Set of standard sieves for testing, grading of sand.
ii)
Sieves with opening respectively of 4.75 mm, 10 mm, 20 mm and 40 mm
for testing grading of aggregates.
iii)
Balance, capacity up to 10 kg, reading to 5 gm.
iv)
Electric Thermostat controlled oven and pans for drying of sand and
aggregates.
v)
Glass measuring flasks of ½, 1 and 2 litre capacity and graduated
cylinders for testing silt content.
vi)
Flask for determining moisture content of sand.
vii)
Slump cone with rod for slump test.
viii)
Compressive testing Machine for cube test.
ix)
Minimum 24 steel moulds for 150 mm x 150 mm x 150 mm concrete test
cubes. It may be necessary to provide more steel cube moulds depending
upon concreting programme.
x)
Vibrator with 25 mm dia needle for compaction of concrete in test cubes
and also vibrating table.
xi)
Work benches, shelves, desks, sinks and any other furniture and lighting
as required by the Engineer-In-Charge.
xii)
Where concrete cube testing facilities from recognized institute near the
site are not available or if the size of the project is large enough or if
directed by the Engineer-In-Charge, the Contractor should provide at site
Specifications
Page 207
Tender No: -1800000008
concrete cube testing machine of adequate capacity to be able to test
concrete cubes of grades M50 and below, at his own cost.
6) Any of equipment not specifically mentioned above which can reasonably be held
necessary for the completion and maintenance of the works to the satisfaction of the
Engineer-In-Charge.
Specifications
Page 208
Tender No: -1800000008
APPENDIX
GUIDELINES FOR STORAGE AND INSTALLATION OF CPVC PIPES
1 STORAGE
CPVC pipes of all sizes are packed in polyethylene packing rolls and both the ends of the
packed roll are sealed with air bubble film cap in order to provide protection during handling
and transportation. After packing, the whole bunch of pipes is tightened with polypropylene/
HOPE strapping. Each role is then marked with size/type of the pipe, lot number and
quantity. The packed pipe rolls are stored in their respective racks in properly covered storage
area. Apart from providing protection during handling and transportation, the packing rolls
also protect the pipe from ultra violet rays.
2
INSTALLATION GUIDELINES
2.1
Visually inspect pipe ends before making the joint. Use of a chamfering tool will help
identify and crakes, as it will catch on to any crack.
2.2
Pipe may be cut quickly and efficiently by several methods. Wheel type plastic tubing cutters
are preferred. Ratchet type cutter or fine tooth saw are another options. However, when
using the ratchet cutter be certain to score the exterior wall by rotating the cutter blade in
circular motion around the pipe. Do this before applying significant downward pressure to
finalize the cut. This step leads to a square cut. In addition, make sure ratchet cutter blades
are sharp. Cutting tubing as squarely as possible provides optimal bonding area within a
joint.
2.3
Burrs and filings can prevent proper contact between the tube and fittings during the
assembly, and should be removed from the outside and inside of the tube. A chamfering tool
is preferred, but a pocket knife or file is also suitable for this purpose.
2.4
Use only CPVC cement jointing. Use CPVC cement, which is fully recommended by the
manufacturer.
2.5
When using adhesive solution/solvent cement be certain of proper ventilation.
2.6
When making a join, apply a heavy, even coat of cement to the pipe end. Use the same
applicator without additional cement to apply a thin coat inside the fitting socket. Too much
cement can cause clogged waterways. Do not allow excess cement to puddle in the fitting
and pipe assembly. This could result in a weakening of the pipe wall and possible pipe
failure when the system is pressurized.
2.7
Rotate pipe one-quarter to one-half turn while inserting it into the fitting socket and remove
the excess adhesive solution/solvent cement from the joint with clean rag.
2.8
When making a transition connection to metal threads, use a special transition fitting or
CPVC male threaded adapter whenever possible. Do not over-torque plastic threaded
connections. Hand tight plus one-half turn should be adequate.
2.9
Hang or strap CPVC systems loosely to allow for thermal expansion. Do not use metal straps
with sharp edges that might damage the tubing.
2.10
CPVC stub outs for lavatories, closets and sinks are appropriate. However, on areas where
there is a likelihood that movement or impact abuse will occur, metal pipe nipples may be
amore appropriate stub-out material. Showerheads, tub spouts and outside still cocks are
examples.
2.11
When connected to a gas water heater, CPVC tubing should not be located within 50 cm of
the flue. For water heaters lacking reliable temperature control, this distance may be
increased up to 1 m a metal nipple or flexible appliance connector should be utilized. This
measure eliminates the potential for damage to plastic piping that might result from
excessive radiant heat from the flue.
Specifications
Page 209
Tender No: -1800000008
GENERAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION-II– (ELECTRICAL WORK)
SECTION
PERTICULARS
Page
No.
1
CHAPTER-1: WIRING (WG)
211
2
CHAPTER-2: FITTING
268
3
CHAPTER 3:APPLIANCES
291
4
CHAPTER-4: ENERGY SAVING DEVICES
302
5
CHAPTER-5: SWITCHGEARS
312
6
CHAPTER-6: DELETED
7
CHAPTER-7: CABLES
8
CHAPTER-8: DELETED
-
9
CHAPTER-9: EARTING
331
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
CHAPTER-10: SUB STATION
CHAPTER-11: GENERATORS
CHAPTER-12: WATER PUMPS
CHAPTER-13: FIRE FIGHTING & FIRE ALARM
CHAPTER-14: LIFTS
CHAPTER-15: TEMPORARY ILLUMINATION
CHAPTER-16: SIREN
317
335
339
346
353
375
382
385
17
CHAPTER-17: CIVIL WORKS
388
18
CHAPTER-18: LIST OF APPROVED MATERIALS
394
Specifications
Page 210
Tender No: -1800000008
CHAPTER-1
WIRING
1.1
Mains in Metal Conduit
WG-MA/MC
1.2
Mains in PVC conduit
WG-MA/PC
1.3
Bunch of Wires
WG-MA/BW
1.4
Mains on GI Bare wire
WG-MA/GB
1.5
Concealing of Conduits
WG-MA/CC
1.6
PVC Flexible/Rigid
Conduits/Casing-n-capping
WG-MA/CON
1.7
Wiring Accessories
WG-MA/WA
1.8
Modular switches and
Accessories
No Specs
Point wiring
WG-PW/PW
1.9
1.10 Telephone wiring &
Accessories
WG-TW/TW
1.11 Telephone Accessories
WG-TW/TA
1.12 Computer Cabling
WG-COC
1.13 Networking Components
WG-COC/NWC
1.14 Networking Accessories
WG-COC/NAS
Specifications
Page 211
Tender No: -1800000008
Chapter 1:WIRING
(WG)
General:
All material shall be conforming to relevant standard as per BIS and shall carry ISI mark. If
any particular category of material for which ISI mark is not available in market, it shall
either carry valid ‘Quality Control’ certificate issued by the Chief Engineer (Elect), P.W. Dept.
Maharashtra State Govt. as included in approved list.
Work shall be carried out as per the Method of Construction specified by BIS. If there is no
reference for particular Method of Construction in IS, such work shall be carried out as per
the approved Method of Construction specified in chapter 16 of P.W. Dept. Handbook.
Material and Work not qualifying to any provision mentioned above shall be to the
satisfaction of the Engineer in Charge.
Material shall be tested in approved Testing Laboratory and shall qualify the relevant tests
as and when directed by Engineer In-Charge.
Recommended Standards:
The following list is showing Indian Standards, which are acceptable as good practice, and
accepted standards.
IS 732: 1989
Code of Practice for Electrical Wiring Installations?
IS 4648: 1968
Guide for Electrical Layout in residential buildings
IS 9537 (Part 1): 1980
Conduits for Electrical Installations: General requirements
IS 9537 (Part 2): 1981
Rigid Steel Conduits
IS 9537 (Part 3): 1983
Rigid Plain Conduits of insulating material
IS 3419: 1989
Specifications for fittings for rigid non metallic conduits
IS 694:
PVC insulated cables for working voltages up to and including
1100V
IS 1554 (Part 1): 1988
PVC insulated (heavy-duty) electric cables for working voltages
up to and including 1100V
IS 3961 (Part 5): 1968
Recommended current ratings for cables: PVC insulated light
duty cables.
IS 4288: 1988
PVC insulated (heavy duty) electric cables with solid
aluminium conductors for voltages up to and including 1100V
IS 14772: 2000
IS 3043: 1987
SP 30: 1984
SP 7 (Group 4): 2005
IS 14927(Part 1): 2001
Specifications for Accessories for household and similar fixed
Electrical Installations
Code of practice for Earthing
National Electrical Code
National Building Code
Cable Trunking and Ducting systems for electrical
installations.
1.1
Conduits / Trunking (Casing Capping) (Surface type)
1.1.1
PVC Conduits
Specification No :(WG-MA/CON)
Scope:
PVC Conduits: Surface
Providing specified PVC Conduits and erecting as per approved Method of Construction; on
surface of wall / ceiling, etc. including entries through walls / slabs / flooring as per
Specifications
Page 212
Tender No: -1800000008
requirement, and with all necessary hardware, accessories such as Spacers, Saddles, Bends,
Tees, Junction boxes, Check-nuts, etc.; making conduits erection work rigid and duly
finishing, removing debris from site.
Material:
PVC Conduit:
PVC pipe minimum 20mm dia and above depending on No. of wires to be drawn (refer Table
No. 1/2) ISI mark, HMS grade (2mm thick), accessories for PVC pipes of the same make that
of pipe; such as Spacers & Saddles, Couplers, Bends, inspection or non inspection type
Elbows, Tees, Junction boxes of required ways and resin / adhesive to make all joints rigid.
Black pipe shall not be used for surface type wiring.
Hardware:
Sheet Metal (SM) screws of sizes specified in Method of Construction, washers, rawl / PVC /
fill type plugs, wooden gutties, etc.
Method of Construction:
Erection PVC Conduits for Surface type wiring:
General:
Erection shall be done as per the final approved layout, in perfect level and plumb. Conduits
shall be firmly fixed on spacers with saddles. Fixing of spacers shall be equidistant and at
ends, bends, elbows, junction boxes, couplings, boards. CSK screws of minimum 35x8 mm
and suitable plugs shall be used for fixing spacers and 12x5 mm, round headed screws for
fixing saddles on spacers. In case of stonewalls wooden gutties shall be grouted in wall for
fixing of spacers. Distance between 2 spacers shall not be more than 600mm. Size of conduit
shall be correct depending on number of wires to be drawn (as per Table No. 1/2 for PVC
conduits). Separate pipe shall be used for each phase in 1-ph distribution and for power and
light distribution. Also for wiring for other utilities like data, telephone, TV cabling distance
between pipes shall not be less than 300 mm. or ant electrostatic partition/separate pipe
should be used. Adequate use of conduit accessories shall be made at required locations.
Entries in wall shall be at level of surface and with colour coding conduit (For visual
identification) as per Table No. 1/4. Flexible conduits shall be used at expansion joints.
Especially for PVC Conduits of surface type wiring:
In addition to general instructions above, all joints shall be made rigid with resin / adhesive.
Wherever offsets are necessary, it shall be done with bending spring. Size of conduit shall be
as per Table No. ½ for number of wires to be drawn through the conduit.
1.1.2 PVC Trunking (Casing capping)
Specification No (WG-MA/CON)
Scope:
PVC Trunking:
Providing specified PVC Trunking (Casing capping) and erecting as per approved Method of
Construction, on surface of wall / ceiling, etc. including entries made with PVC conduit
through walls / slabs / flooring as per requirement with all necessary hardware, accessories
such as inner / outer Elbows, Tees, Junction boxes, etc. and duly finishing, removing debris
from site.
Material:
PVC Trunking (casing capping):
Specifications
Page 213
Tender No: -1800000008
PVC Trunking (casing capping) ISI mark, 1.2 mm thick, minimum 20 mm width and above
depending on No. of wires to be drawn (Refer Table No 1/3 for the size of trunking and
number of wires to be drawn); with double locking arrangement, 1.8mm thick push-fit
joints/ accessories for PVC trunking such as couplers, elbows, internal / external angles,
junction boxes of required ways of the same make.
Hardware:
Sheet Metal (SM) screws of sizes specified in Method of Construction, washers, rawl / PVC /
fill type plugs, wooden gutties, etc.
Method of Construction:
Erection of PVC Trunking for surface type wiring:
Erection shall be done as per the final approved layout. The Trunking shall be in perfect
level and plumb. Screws of minimum 35x8 mm and suitable plugs shall be used for fixing.
In case of stonewalls wooden gutties shall be grouted in wall for fixing of screws of Trunking.
Distance between 2 screws shall not be more than 600 mm. Size of Trunking shall be
correct depending on number of wires to be drawn as per Table No 1/3 but not less than
20mm. Separate Trunking shall be used for each phase in single phase distribution and for
power and light distribution and also for wiring of other utilities like data, telephone, TV
cabling and distance of 300 mm shall be maintained between the Trunking or anti
electrostatic partition to be provided. Double locking shall be checked while fixing capping.
Adequate use of accessories shall be made at joints and at required locations.
1.1.3 Rigid Steel Conduits
Specification No (WG-MA/CON)
Scope:
Rigid Steel Conduits: Surface
Providing specified Rigid Steel Conduits and erecting as per approved Method of Construction;
on surface of wall / ceiling, etc including entries through walls / slabs / flooring as per
requirement along with continuous earth wire, earth-clips and all necessary hardware,
accessories; such as; spacers, saddles, Bends, Tees, Junction boxes, Check-nuts, etc. and
duly finishing, removing debris from site.
Material:
Rigid Steel conduit:
Rigid steel conduit minimum 20mm dia and higher depending on No. of wires to be drawn
as per Table No. 1/1, 16 gauge, ISI mark, ERW grade duly processed for anti-rust treatment
and painted with black enamel paint including inspection type or normal accessories such
as, 5mm thick 20mm width spacers and G.I. saddles for individual pipe or GI strip for
bunch of pipe, sockets, open bends, junction boxes of required ways all of the same make.
Earth continuity wire:
GI wire of 2.5 Sqmm; GI earth clips 22g, 10mm width, for fixing earth wire along the
conduits.
Hardware:
Sheet Metal (SM) screws of sizes specified in Method of Construction, washers, rawl / PVC /
fill type plugs, wooden gutties, PVC/ rubber bushings etc.
Method of Construction:
Erection of Rigid steel Conduits:
General:
Erection shall be done as per the final approved layout, in perfect level and plumb. Conduits
shall be duly screwed and firmly fixed on spacers with saddles. Fixing of spacers shall be
equidistant and at ends, bends, elbows, junction boxes, couplings, boards. CSK screws of
Specifications
Page 214
Tender No: -1800000008
minimum 35x8 mm and suitable plugs shall be used for fixing spacers and 12x5 mm round
headed for fixing saddles on spacers. In case of stonewalls wooden gutties shall be grouted in
wall for fixing of spacers and saddles. Distance between 2 spacers shall not be more than
600mm. Separate pipe shall be used for each phase in single phase distribution and for power
and light distribution. Also for wiring for other utilities like data, telephone, TV cabling
distance between pipes shall not be less than 300 mm or anti electrostatic partition to be
provided. Adequate use of conduit accessories shall be made at required locations. Entries in
wall shall be at level of surface conduit with colour coding (For Visual identification) as per
Table No 1/4. Flexible conduits shall be used at expansion joints. Bushing shall be provided
at open ends.
Erection of Rigid steel Conduits:
Especially for Rigid Steel Conduit of surface type wiring
In addition to general conditions above, Size of conduit shall be correct depending on number
of wires to be drawn (as per Table No. 1/1 for steel conduits). All exposed threaded portion of
Rigid Steel Conduits shall be painted with anti corrosive paint. Sharp edges at cut ends shall
be made smooth by removing burr. Inspection type conduits accessories shall be used as per
requirement in accessible position to facilitate drawing or withdrawing of wires. All conduits
piping work shall be properly Earthed with 2.5 sq. mm G.I Earth wire fixed to conduit and
made continuous with Earth clips at every 1m and at ends and joints viz. bends, junction
boxes.
Testing:
Earth continuity:
Earth continuity shall be ensured at termination points of Earth wire, and between the ends of
Rigid steel conduit.
Polarity:
Polarity test and should be done including confirmation of phase entry in switch only.
Mode of Measurement:
Measurement shall be carried out on the basis per running meter length of conduit /
Trunking.
1.2
Conduits (Concealed type)
Specification No (WG-MA/CC)
1.2.1 Concealing PVC Conduits in RCC work
Scope:
Providing specified PVC conduit and laying / erecting in RCC work, such as slab, beam,
column before casting as per approved Method of Construction along with of all required
material including hardware, binding wire, fish wire; accessories such as deep / long neck
PVC junction boxes, PVC / MS junction / draw-in boxes, check-nuts, flexible PVC pipe,
drawing fish-wires and making all piping rigid, removing debris from site and supervising the
work during casting to confirm rigidity, continuity and avoid damages.
Material:
PVC Conduit:
PVC pipe of minimum 20mm dia and above depending on No. of wires to be drawn (refer
Table No.1/2); ISI mark, HMS grade (2mm thick), accessories for PVC pipes of the same
make that of pipe; Couplers, long Bends, deep Junction boxes of required ways and resin /
adhesive to make all joints rigid.
Junction boxes / Draw-in boxes:
Junction box shall be 5 sided with removable top plate and of suitable size to accommodate
No. of entries; PVC or fabricated from 16g CRCA sheet steel with earth terminal duly treated
with antirust treatment and painted with two coats of red oxide paint. There shall be
knockout holes in required numbers and dia. for entry of conduit pipes and arrangement to
fix cover plates on it.
Hardware:
Specifications
Page 215
Tender No: -1800000008
‘U’ nails, plumbing and general use nails of required sizes, washers, check-nuts, steel binding
wire, steel fish wire etc.
Method of Construction:
Concealing of PVC conduits:
General:
Work shall be done in co-ordination with civil work and to suite final approved layout. Size
of conduit shall be correct depending on number of wires to be drawn. (Table No 1/2 for PVC
conduits) Separate pipe shall be used for each phase in single phase distribution and for
power and light distribution and also for wiring for other utilities like data, telephone, TV
cabling, etc. The distance between pipes shall not be less than 300 mm or anti electrostatic
partition is to be provided. Adequate use of conduit accessories shall be made at required
locations. Entries in wall shall be at level of corresponding conduit with colour coding as per
Table No. 1/4. (For Visual identification) Flexible conduits shall be used at expansion joints.
Erection shall be done as per the layout finalized, with minimum sharp bends, with junction
boxes at angular junctions and for straight runs at every 4.25m, in such manner so as to
facilitate drawing of wires. All PVC conduit bending shall be done with Bending Spring. All
joints shall be made rigid with resin.
Concealing of PVC conduits:
In RCC work:
Work shall be commenced after fixing of steel re-enforcement on centering material.
Conduits shall be firmly fixed on steel of RCC work by binding wire. Fixing of conduits shall
be such that it will remain rigid during casting of slab, beam, and column even after use of
vibrator. Deep junction boxes and other draw-in boxes shall be such that their open end and
centering material will not have gap in between so as to avoid concrete entering inside even
after fixing covers to steel re-enforcement; and be filled with dry sand. Open ends of
conduits; to be concealed in walls, shall be provided with couplers / sockets at ends and be
flush with bottom of beam, and located at the center of the beam. As far as possible
bunching / grouping of conduits shall be avoided so that it will not affect strength of RCC
work especially in beams. Suitable steel fish wire shall be drawn through in the conduits for
drawing of wires later on.
1.2.2 Concealing PVC Conduits in walls / flooring
Scope:
Providing specified PVC conduit and erecting / laying in wall, flooring by making chases /
grooves / entries as per approved Method of Construction along with of all required material
including hardware such as ‘U’ nails, binding wire, fish wire; accessories such as PVC / MS
junction boxes / inspection boxes, check-nuts, flexible PVC pipe, glands, drawing fish-wires
and making all piping rigid, refinishing the surface with cement mortar, removing debris from
site.
Material:
PVC Conduit:
PVC pipe minimum 20mm dia and above depending on No. of wires to be drawn (refer Table
No.1/2), ISI mark, HMS grade (2mm thick), accessories for PVC pipes of the same make that
of pipe; Couplers, long Bends, Junction boxes of required ways, type and resin / adhesive to
make all joints rigid.
Junction boxes / Draw-in boxes:
Junction box shall be 5 sided with removable top plate and of suitable size to accommodate
No. of entries; PVC or fabricated from 16g CRCA sheet steel with earth terminal duly treated
with antirust treatment and painted with two coats of red oxide paint. There shall be
Specifications
Page 216
Tender No: -1800000008
knockout holes in required numbers and dia. for entry of conduit pipes and arrangement to
fix cover plate on it.
Hardware:
‘U’ nails, plumbing and general use nails of required sizes, washers, check-nuts, steel binding
wire 20g, steel fish wire, etc.
Other material for Surface finishing: Cement, sand, putty, and water.
Method of Construction:
Concealing of PVC conduits: (General)
Work shall be done in co-ordination with civil work to suite final approved layout. Size of
conduit shall be correct depending on number of wires to be drawn. (Table No 1/2 for PVC
conduits) Separate pipe shall be used for each phase in 1-ph distribution and for power and
light distribution and also for wiring for other utilities like data, telephone, TV cabling, etc.
for which the distance between pipes shall not be less than 300 mm or anti electrostatic
partition is be provided. Adequate use of conduit accessories shall be made at required
locations. Entries in wall shall be at level of corresponding conduit with colour coding as per
Table No.1/4. (For Visual identification) Flexible conduits shall be used at expansion joints.
Erection shall be done as per the layout finalized, with minimum sharp bends, with junction
boxes at angular junctions and for straight runs at every 4.25m, in such manner so as to
facilitate drawing of wires. All bending of conduits shall be done with Bending Spring. All
joints shall be made rigid with resin.
Concealing of PVC Conduits In walls / flooring:
Chases shall be made in walls of adequate width, with cutter and chiseling through it.
Necessary finishing of the wall surface shall be done. Work in flooring shall not disturb RCC
work, Conduits of adequate size shall be erected with use of appropriate accessories, and ‘U’
nails. All joints shall be made rigid with resin. Draw-in / inspection boxes shall be fixed
with check-nut, flush with surrounding surface and earthed.
1.2.3 Rigid Steel Conduits in RCC work
Specification No (WG-MA/CC)
Scope:
Concealing of Rigid Steel Conduits:
In RCC work:
Providing specified Rigid Steel conduit and laying / erecting in RCC work, such as slab, beam,
column before casting as per approved Method of Construction along with continuous earth
wire and all required material including earth clips, hardware, binding wire, fish wire;
accessories such as deep junction boxes, MS draw-in / junction / inspection boxes, checknuts, flexible PVC pipe, drawing fish-wires and making all piping rigid, removing debris from
site and supervising the work during casting to confirm rigidity, continuity and avoid
damages.
Material:
Rigid Steel conduit:
Rigid HG steel screwed conduit, minimum 20mm dia. and higher depending on No. of wires
to be drawn as per Table No. 1/1, 16 gauge, ERW grade duly processed for anti-rust
treatment and painted with black enamel paint, accessories for rigid steel conduits such as
check nuts, long bends, deep junction boxes for slab, regular junction boxes for walls; of
required ways, all of the same make.
Earth continuity wire:
GI wire of 2.5 sq. mm; GI earth clips 22g, 10mm width, for fixing earth wire along the
conduits.
Junction boxes / Draw-in boxes:
Specifications
Page 217
Tender No: -1800000008
Junction box shall be 5 sided with removable top plate and of suitable size to accommodate
No. of entries; fabricated from 16g CRCA sheet steel with earth terminal duly treated with
antirust treatment and painted with two coats of red oxide paint. There shall be knockout
holes in required numbers and dia. for entry of conduit pipes and arrangement to fix cover
plate on it.
Hardware:
U’ nails, plumbing and general use nails of required sizes, washers, check-nuts, steel binding
wire 20g, fish wire, etc
Method of Construction:
Concealing of Rigid steel Conduits:
General:
Work shall be done in co-ordination with civil work to suite final approved layout. Conduit
shall be duly screwed and size of conduit shall be correct depending on number of wires to
be drawn. (Table No.1/1, for Steel conduits) Separate pipe shall be used for each phase in 1ph distribution and for power and light distribution and also for wiring for other utilities like
data, telephone, TV cabling, etc. for which distance between pipes shall not be less than 300
mm or anti electrostatic partition is to be provided. Adequate use of conduit accessories
shall be made at required locations. Entries in wall shall be at level of corresponding conduit
with colour coding as per Table No. 1/4. (For visual identification). Flexible conduits shall be
used at expansion joints. Erection shall be done as per the layout finalized, with minimum
sharp bends, with junction boxes at angular junctions and for straight runs at every 4.25m,
in such manner so as to facilitate drawing of wires. All bending of conduits shall be done
approved manner without changing the cross-section.
In RCC work:
Work shall be commenced after fixing of steel (re-enforcement) on centering material.
Conduits shall be firmly fixed with steel in slab by binding wire. Fixing of conduits shall be
possibly done with welding tags so that it will remain rigid during casting of slab, beam, and
column even after use of vibrator. Deep junction boxes and other draw-in boxes shall be
such that their open end and centering material will not have gap in between so as to avoid
concrete entering inside even after fixing covers to steel re-enforcement; and be filled with
dry sand. Open ends of conduits; to be concealed in walls, shall be provided with couplers /
sockets at ends and be flush with bottom of beam, and located at the center of the beam. As
far as possible bunching / grouping of conduits shall be avoided so that it will not affect
strength of RCC work especially in beams. Suitable steel fish wire shall be drawn through
the conduits for drawing of wires later on.
1.2.4 Rigid steel Conduits in walls / flooring
Specification No (WG-MA/CC)
Scope:
Concealing of Rigid steel Conduits:
In walls / flooring:
Providing specified Rigid Steel Conduits and erecting in wall, flooring by making chases /
grooves / entries as per approved Method of Construction along with continuous earth wire
and all required material including earth clips hardware such as ‘U’ nails, binding wire, fish
wire; accessories such as MS junction / inspection boxes, check-nuts, flexible PVC pipe,
drawing fish-wires and making all piping rigid, refinishing the surface with cement mortar,
removing debris from site.
Material:
Rigid Steel conduit:
Rigid steel HG conduit minimum 20mm dia. and 16 gauge, ERW grade duly processed for
anti-rust treatment and painted with black enamel paint, accessories for rigid steel conduits
such as check nuts, long bends, deep junction boxes for flooring, regular junction boxes for
walls; of required ways all of the same make.
Specifications
Page 218
Tender No: -1800000008
Earth continuity wire:
GI wire of 2.5 sq. mm, GI earth clips 22g, 10mm width, for fixing earth wire along the
conduits.
Junction boxes / Draw-in boxes:
Junction box shall be 5 sided with removable top plate and of suitable size to accommodate
No. of entries; fabricated from 16 SWG CRCA sheet steel with earth terminal duly treated
with antirust treatment and painted with two coats of red oxide paint. There shall be
knockout holes in required numbers and dia. for entry of conduit pipes and arrangement to
fix cover plates on it.
Hardware:
‘U’ nails, plumbing and general use nails of required sizes, washers, check-nuts, steel binding
wire 20g, GI fish wire, etc.
Other material for Surface finishing: Cement, sand, putty and water.
Method of Construction:
Concealing of Rigid Steel Conduits:
General:
Work shall be done in co-ordination with civil work to suite final approved layout. Size of
conduit shall be correct depending on number of wires to be drawn. (Table No.1/1, for Steel
conduits) Separate pipe shall be used for each phase in 1-ph distribution and for power and
light distribution and also for wiring for other utilities like data, telephone, TV cabling, etc; for
which the distance between pipes shall not be less than 300 mm or anti electrostatic partition
is to be provided. Adequate use of conduit accessories shall be made at required locations.
Entries in wall shall be at level of corresponding conduit with colour coding as per Table No.
1/4. (For Visual identification) Flexible conduits shall be used at expansion joints. Erection
shall be done as per the layout finalized, with minimum sharp bends, with junction boxes at
angular junctions and for straight runs at every 4.25 metre, in such manner so as to facilitate
drawing of wires. All bending of conduits shall be done approved manner without changing
the cross-section.
Concealing of Rigid Steel Conduits in walls/ flooring:
Chases shall be made in walls of adequate width, with cutter and chiseling through it.
Necessary finishing of the wall surface shall be done. Work in flooring shall not disturb RCC
work, Conduits of adequate size shall be erected with use of appropriate accessories, and
hardware like ‘U’ nails, etc. Draw-in / inspection boxes shall be fixed with check-nut, flush
with surrounding surface and earthed.
Testing:
Earth continuity:
Earth continuity shall be ensured at termination point of Earth wire, between the ends of
metal conduit.
Mode of Measurement:
Measurement shall be carried out on the basis per running meter length of conduit.
1.3
Bunch of wires:
Specification No (WG-MA/BW)
Scope:
Bunch of wires:
Providing specified wires and drawing them through provided conduits / trunking and / or as
directed; with coded ferrules, harnessing the bunch of wires with necessary material when
used in panel boards, duly connecting / terminating with lugs, and testing for safety and
beneficial use.
Material:
Wires: in conduits / trunking / panel boards
Specifications
Page 219
Tender No: -1800000008
Mains / Sub-mains / Circuit mains (comprising phase and neutral wires):
PVC insulated wire of specified size, minimum FR grade insulation, copper conductor of
electrolytic tough pitch (ETP) grade, having insulation of 1.1 kV grade, ISI marked, of
required colour coding as per Table No 1/5.
Wires: open
PVC insulated and PVC sheathed wire of specified size, minimum FR grade insulation,
copper conductor of electrolytic tough pitch (ETP) grade, having insulation of 1.1 kV grade,
ISI marked, of required colour coding as per Table No 1/5.
Earth Continuity Wire:
PVC insulated wire minimum FR grade insulation copper conductor of electrolytic grade,
having insulation of 1.1 kV grade, of green / green yellow colour, ISI marked, of specified
size but not less than 2.5 Sqmm as per Table No 1/5.
Lugs: Copper lugs of appropriate size & type
Other material: Rubber grommet, bush, harnessing material, flexible conduit etc.
Method of Construction:
Bunch of wires:
Drawing of wires: General
Specified wires shall be drawn with adequate care. Correct colour coding as per Table No.
1/5, shall be used for phase, neutral and earth. Wires shall not have intermediate joint in
between terminals of the accessories. Earth-wire and Return wire (neutral) may be looped
only within circuit. For lighting load or single-phase distribution wires of two different
phases shall not be drawn in single pipe. Wires shall be terminated in the terminals of
accessories only, with appropriate type and size of lugs.
Drawing of wires: through PVC conduits
Bush shall be used at pipe opening to protect wire insulation from getting damaged due to
sharp edges. Number of wires shall not exceed with respect to size of pipe as per Table No.
1/2.
Drawing of wires: through Rigid Steel conduits
Bush shall be used at pipe opening to protect wire insulation from getting damaged due to
burrs / sharp edges. Number of wires shall not exceed with respect to size of pipe as per Table
No. 1/1.
Open Wire bunch: Open wires shall be erected with due care so as to avoid chances of any
mechanical injury. Harnessing shall be done with required material in an approved manner in
panel boards or where ever necessary. For covering lead wires flexible conduit shall be used
with gland as per necessity.
Testing:
Insulation resistance test:
All wiring shall be tested with 500V Meggar between phases, phase – neutral and to Earth. IR
value shall not be less than 1M-ohm.
Earth continuity:
Earth continuity shall be ensured between termination points of Earth wire.
Polarity Test:
Test shall be carried out for ensuring the correct polarity in switch and plug.
Mode of Measurement:
Measurement shall be carried out on the basis per running meter length of single wire or
bunch as specified.
1.4
Mains (surface type)
1.4.1 Mains in surface PVC conduit
Specification No (WG-MA/PC)
Specifications
Page 220
Tender No: -1800000008
Scope:
Mains in surface PVC conduit:
Providing specified PVC Conduits, Wires and erecting the conduits as per approved Method of
Construction; on surface of wall / ceiling, etc. including entries through walls / slabs /
flooring as per requirement, and with all necessary hardware, accessories such as Spacers,
Saddles, Bends, Tees, Junction boxes, Check-nuts / glands, etc.; making conduits erection
work rigid; and drawing the specified wires through these conduits and duly connecting /
terminating with lugs, complete finishing, removing debris from site; testing for safety and
beneficial use.
Material:
PVC Conduit:
PVC pipe of minimum 20mm dia and above depending on No. of wires to be drawn (refer
Table No 1/2); ISI mark, HMS grade (2mm thick), accessories for PVC pipes of the same
make that of pipe; such as Spacers & Saddles, Couplers, Bends, inspection or non
inspection type Elbows, Tees, Junction boxes of required ways and resin / adhesive to make
all joints rigid. Black pipe shall not be used for surface type wiring.
Hardware:
Sheet Metal (SM) screws of sizes specified in Method of Construction, washers, rawl / PVC /
fill type plugs, wooden gutties, etc.
Wires: Mains / Sub-mains / Circuit mains (comprising phase and neutral wires)
PVC insulated wire of specified size, minimum FR grade insulation, copper conductor of
electrolytic tough pitch (ETP) grade, having insulation of 1.1 kV grade, ISI marked, of
appropriate colour coding as per Table No 1/5
Earth Continuity Wire:
PVC insulated wire minimum FR grade insulation copper conductor of electrolytic grade,
having insulation of 1.1 kV grade, of green or green yellow colour, ISI marked, of specified
size but not less than 2.5 Sqmm as per Table No 1/5
Lugs: Copper lugs of appropriate type and size.
Other material: Rubber grommet, bush, flexible PVC conduit, gland etc.
Method of Construction:
Erection PVC Conduits for Surface type wiring:
General:
Erection shall be done as per the final approved layout, in perfect level and plumb. Conduits
shall be firmly fixed on spacers with saddles. Fixing of spacers shall be equidistant and at
ends, bends, elbows, junction boxes, couplings, boards. CSK screws of minimum 35x8 mm
and suitable plugs shall be used for fixing spacers and 12x5 mm, round headed screws for
fixing saddles on spacers. In case of stonewalls wooden gutties shall be grouted in wall for
fixing of spacers. Distance between 2 spacers shall not be more than 600 mm. Size of conduit
shall be correct depending on number of wires to be drawn (as per Table No. ½ for PVC
conduits). Separate pipe shall be used for each phase in 1-ph distribution and for power and
light distribution. Also for wiring for other utilities like data, telephone, TV cabling distance
between pipes shall not be less than 300 mm or anti electrostatic partition is to be provided.
Adequate use of conduit accessories shall be made at required locations. Entries in wall shall
be at level of surface conduit with colour coding (For Visual identification) as per Table No.
1/4. Flexible conduits shall be used at expansion joints.
Especially for PVC Conduits of surface type wiring:
In addition to general instructions above, all joints shall be made rigid with resin / adhesive.
Wherever offsets are necessary, it shall be done with bending spring. Size of conduit shall be
as per Table No. 1/2 for number of wires to be drawn through the conduit.
Specifications
Page 221
Tender No: -1800000008
Drawing of wires: General
Wires shall be drawn with adequate care. Correct colour coding as per Table No. 1/5, shall
be used for phase, neutral and earth. Wires shall not have intermediate joint in between
terminals of the accessories. Earth-wire and Return wire (neutral) may be looped only
within circuit. For lighting load or single-phase distribution wires of two different phases
shall not be drawn in single pipe. Lead wires of sufficient extra length shall be provided and
shall be terminated in the terminals of accessories only, with appropriate type and size of
lugs.
Drawing of wires: through PVC conduits for surface type wiring
Insulated Earth wire of green or green-yellow colour of minimum 2.5 sq mm or as per specified
shall be drawn through conduit. Number of wires shall not exceed with respect to size of pipe
as per Table No. 1/2. At the termination end flexible PVC conduit shall be used with gland as
per required.
1.4.2 Mains in PVC Trunking (casing capping)
Specification No (WG-MA/PC)
Scope:
Surface type Mains in PVC Trunking (casing capping)
Providing specified PVC Trunking, Wires and erecting the Trunking as per approved Method of
Construction; on surface of wall / ceiling, etc. including entries made with PVC conduit
through walls / slabs / flooring as per requirement with all necessary hardware, accessories
such as inner / outer Elbows, Tees, Junction boxes, etc; including erection of specified wires
in PVC trunking, with coded ferrules and duly connecting with lugs, and finishing, removing
debris from site; testing for safety and beneficial use.
Material:
PVC Trunking:
PVC Trunking (casing capping) ISI mark, 1.2 mm thick, minimum 20 mm width and above
depending on No. of wires to be drawn (Refer Table No 1/2 for the size of trunking and
number of wires to be drawn); with double locking arrangement, 1.8mm thick push-fit
joints/ accessories for PVC trunking such as couplers, elbows, internal / external angles,
junction boxes of required ways of the same make.
Hardware:
Sheet Metal (SM) screws of sizes specified in Method of Construction, washers, rawl / PVC /
fill type plugs, wooden gutties, etc.
Wires: Mains / Sub-mains / Circuit mains (comprising phase and neutral wires)
PVC insulated wire of specified size, minimum FR grade insulation, copper conductor of
electrolytic grade, having insulation of 1.1 kV grade, ISI marked, of required colour coding
as per Table No 1/5
Earth Continuity Wire: PVC insulated wire minimum FR grade insulation copper
conductor of electrolytic grade, having insulation of 1.1 kV grade, of green colour, ISI
marked, of specified size but not less than 1.5 Sqmm as per Table No 1/5
Lugs: Copper lugs of appropriate type and size.
Other material: Flexible PVC conduit, gland coded ferrules, etc.
Method of Construction:
Erection of PVC Trunking for surface type wiring
Erection shall be done as per the final approved layout. The Trunking shall be in perfect
level and plumb. Screws of minimum 35x8 mm and suitable plugs shall be used for fixing.
In case of unleveled surface number and size of screws shall be changed to higher size as
per requirement and in case of stonewalls wooden gutties shall be grouted in wall for fixing
of screws of Trunking. Distance between 2 screws shall not be more than 600 mm. Size of
Trunking shall be correct depending on number of wires to be drawn as per Table No 1/3
but not less than 20mm. Separate Trunking shall be used for each phase in 1-ph
distribution and for power and light distribution and also for wiring of other utilities like
data, telephone, TV cabling and distance of 300 mm shall be maintained between the
Trunking or anti electrostatic partition is to be provided. Double locking shall be checked
Specifications
Page 222
while fixing capping.
locations.
Tender No: -1800000008
Adequate use of accessories shall be made at joints and required
Erecting wires in Trunking:
Wires shall be erected within Trunking with adequate care. Correct colour coding as per Table
No. 1/5 shall be used for phase, neutral and earth. Wires shall not have intermediate joint in
between terminals of the accessories. Earth-wire and Return wire (neutral) may be looped only
within circuit. For lighting load or single-phase distribution wires of two different phases shall
not be erected in single Trunking. Wires shall be terminated in the terminals of accessories
only, with appropriate type and size of lugs. Insulated Earth wire of green or green-yellow
colour of minimum 2.5 sq mm or as per specified shall be erected through Trunking. Number
of wires shall not exceed with respect to size of Trunking as per Table No. 1/3. After erection
of wires double locking shall be checked while fixing capping. At the termination end flexible
PVC conduit shall be used with gland as per required.
1.4.3 Mains in Rigid steel conduit (Surface type)
Specification No (WG-MA/MC)
Scope:
Surface type Mains in Rigid steel conduit:
Providing specified Rigid Steel Conduits and erecting as per approved Method of Construction;
on surface of wall / ceiling, etc including entries through walls / slabs / flooring as per
requirement along with continuous earth wire, earth-clips and all necessary hardware,
accessories; such as; spacers, saddles, Bends, Tees, Junction boxes, Check-nuts, etc; and
drawing the specified wires through these conduits in approved manner; with coded ferrules
and duly connecting with lugs, and duly finishing, removing debris from site; testing the
installation for safety and beneficial use.
Material:
Rigid Steel conduit:
Rigid steel HG screwed conduit minimum 20mm dia. and higher depending on No. of wires
to be drawn as per Table No. 1/1, 16 gauge, ISI mark, ERW grade duly processed for antirust treatment and painted with black enamel paint, accessories for rigid steel conduits
such as 5 mm thick 20mm width spacers and G.I. saddles, sockets, open bends, junction
boxes of required ways all of the same make.
Earth continuity wire:
GI wire of 2.5 sq. mm GI earth clips 22g, 10mm width, for fixing earth wire along the
conduits.
Hardware:
Sheet Metal (SM) screws of sizes specified in Method of Construction, washers, rawl / PVC /
fill type plugs, wooden gutties, PVC/ rubber bushings etc.
Wires: Mains / Sub-mains / Circuit mains (comprising phase and neutral wires): PVC
insulated wire of specified size, minimum FR grade insulation, copper conductor of electrolytic
tough pit (ETP) grade, having insulation of 1.1 kV grade, ISI marked, of required colour coding
as per Table No 1/5
Earth Continuity Wire:
PVC insulated wire minimum FR grade insulation copper conductor of electrolytic tough
pitch (ETP) grade, having insulation of 1.1 kV grade, of green / green-yellow colour, ISI
marked, of specified size but not less than 2.5 Sqmm as per Table No 1/5
Lugs: Copper lugs of appropriate size & type
Other material: Rubber Bush, Flexible metal conduit, gland etc.
Method of Construction:
Erection of Rigid Steel Conduits:
Specifications
Page 223
Tender No: -1800000008
General:
Erection shall be done as per the final approved layout, in perfect level and plumb. Conduits
shall be duly screwed and firmly fixed on spacers with saddles. Fixing of spacers shall be
equidistant and at ends, bends, elbows, junction boxes, couplings, boards. CSK screws of
minimum 35x8 mm and suitable plugs shall be used for fixing spacers and 12x5 mm round
headed for fixing saddles on spacers. In case of stonewalls wooden gutties shall be grouted in
wall for fixing of spacers and saddles. Distance between 2 spacers shall not be more than
600mm. Size of conduit shall be correct depending on number of wires to be drawn (as per
Table No. 1/1 for steel conduits). Separate pipe shall be used for each phase in 1-ph
distribution and for power and light distribution. Also for wiring for other utilities like data,
telephone, TV cabling distance between pipes shall not be less than 300 mm or anti
electrostatic partition is to be provided. Adequate use of conduit accessories shall be made at
required locations. Entries in wall shall be at level of surface conduit with colour coding (For
Visual identification) as per Table No 1/4. Flexible conduits shall be used at expansion joints.
Bushing shall be provided at open ends.
Erection of rigid steel Conduits:
Specially for Rigid Steel Conduit of surface type wiring:
In addition to general conditions above, Size of conduit shall be correct depending on number
of wires to be drawn (as per Table No. 1/1 for steel conduits). All exposed threaded portion of
Rigid Steel Conduits shall be painted with anti corrosive paint. Sharp edges and burr at cut
ends shall be made smooth. Inspection type conduits accessories shall be used as per
requirement in accessible position to facilitate drawing or withdrawing of wires. All conduits,
piping work shall be properly earthed with 2.5 Sqmm G.I Earth wire duly fixed to conduit and
made continuous with Earth clips at every 1m and at ends and joints viz. bends, junction
boxes.
Drawing of wires:
General:
Wires shall be drawn with adequate care. Correct colour coding as per Table No. 1/5 shall
be used for phase, neutral and earth. Wires shall not have intermediate joint in between
terminals of the accessories. Earth-wire and Return wire (neutral) may be looped only within
circuit. For lighting load or single-phase distribution wires of two different phases shall not
be drawn in single pipe. Lead wires of sufficient extra length shall be provided and shall be
terminated in the terminals of accessories only, with correct type of and correct size of lugs.
Drawing of wires:
Through Rigid Steel conduits for surface type wiring:
Bush shall be used at pipe opening to protect wire insulation from getting damaged due to
burrs / sharp edges. Number of wires shall not exceed with respect to size of pipe as per Table
No. 1/1. At the termination end flexible metal conduit shall be used with gland.
Testing:
Insulation resistance test:
All wiring shall be tested with 500V Meggar between phases, phase – neutral and to
Earth. IR value shall not be less than 1M-ohm.
Earth continuity:
Earth continuity shall be ensured at all earth terminals and at earth terminals of metal
enclosures.
Polarity test:
Polarity test shall be carried out for ensuring polarity in switch and plug.
Mode of Measurement:
Measurement shall be carried out on the basis per running meter of pipe length.
1.5
Mains (Concealed type)
1.5.1 Mains in PVC Conduits in RCC work
Specification No (WG-MA/CC, WG-MA/BW)
Scope:
Concealed Mains in PVC Conduits in RCC work:
Specifications
Page 224
Tender No: -1800000008
Providing specified PVC conduit, wires and laying / erecting Conduits in RCC work, such as
slab, beam, column before casting as per approved Method of Construction along with of all
required material including hardware, binding wire, fish wire; accessories such as deep PVC
junction boxes, PVC / MS junction boxes / inspection boxes, check-nuts, flexible PVC pipe,
drawing fish-wires and making all piping rigid, removing debris from site and supervising the
work during casting to confirm rigidity, continuity and avoid damages and as and when
directed drawing of specified wires through these conduits with fish wire, tagging with coded
ferrules and duly connecting with lugs, complete testing the installation for safety and
beneficial use.
Material:
PVC Conduit:
PVC pipe of minimum 20mm dia and above, depending on number of wires to be drawn
(refer Table No 1/2, ISI mark, HMS grade (2mm thick), accessories for PVC pipes of the
same make that of pipe; Couplers, long Bends, deep Junction boxes of required ways and
resin / adhesive to make all joints rigid.
Junction boxes / Draw-in boxes:
Junction box shall be 5 sided with removable top plate and of suitable size to accommodate
No. of entries; PVC or fabricated from 16 SWG CRCA sheet steel with earth terminal duly
treated with antirust treatment and painted with two coats of red oxide paint. There shall
be knockout holes in required numbers and dia. for entry of conduit pipes and arrangement
to fix cover plates on it.
Hardware:
‘U’ nails, plumbing and general use nails of required sizes, washers, check-nuts, steel binding
wire 20g, GI fish wire, etc.
Wires: Mains / Sub-mains / Circuit mains (comprising phase and neutral wires):
PVC insulated wire of specified size, minimum FR grade insulation, copper conductor of
electrolytic tough pitch (ETP) grade, having insulation of 1.1 kV grade, ISI marked, of
required colour coding as per Table No 1/5
Earth Continuity Wire: PVC insulated wire minimum FR grade insulation copper
conductor of electrolytic grade, having insulation of 1.1 kV grade, of green / green-yellow
colour, ISI marked, of specified size but not less than 1.5 Sqmm as per Table No 1/5
Lugs: Copper lugs of required size & type
Other material: Rubber grommet, bush, harnessing material, flexible conduit etc.
Method of Construction:
Concealing of PVC conduits:
General:
Work shall be done in co-ordination with civil work and to suite final approved layout. Size
of conduit shall be correct depending on number of wires to be drawn. (Table No. 1/1 for
Steel conduits & Table No 1/2 for PVC conduits) Separate pipe shall be used for each phase
in 1-ph distribution and for power and light distribution and also for wiring for other utilities
like data, telephone, TV cabling, etc. The distance between pipes shall not be less than 300
mm or anti electrostatic partition is to be provided. Adequate use of conduit accessories
shall be made at required locations. Entries in wall shall be at level of corresponding conduit
with colour coding as per Table No. 1/4. (For Visual identification) Flexible conduits shall be
used at expansion joints. Erection shall be done as per the layout finalized, with minimum
sharp bends, with junction boxes at angular junctions and for straight runs at every 4.25m,
in such manner so as to facilitate drawing of wires. All PVC conduit bending shall be done
with Bending Spring. All joints shall be made rigid with resin.
Concealing of PVC conduits:
Specifications
Page 225
Tender No: -1800000008
In RCC work:
Work shall be commenced after fixing of steel (re-enforcement) on centering material.
Conduits shall be firmly fixed on steel of RCC work by binding wire. Fixing of conduits shall
be such that it will remain rigid during casting of slab, beam, and column even after use of
vibrator. Deep junction boxes and other draw-in boxes shall be such that their open end and
centering material will not have gap in between so as to avoid concrete entering inside even
after fixing covers to steel re-enforcement; and be filled with dry sand. Open ends of
conduits; to be concealed in walls, shall be provided with couplers / sockets at ends and be
flush with bottom of beam, and at located at the center of the beam. As far as possible
bunching / grouping of conduits shall be avoided so that it will not affect strength of RCC
work especially in beams. Suitable steel fish wire shall be drawn through in the conduits for
drawing of wires later on.
Drawing of wires:
General:
Wires shall be drawn with adequate care. Correct colour coding as per Table No. 1/5 shall
be used for phase, neutral and earth. Wires shall not have intermediate joint in between
terminals of the accessories. Earth-wire and Return wire (neutral) may be looped only within
circuit. For lighting load or single-phase distribution wires of two different phases shall not
be drawn in single pipe. Lead wires of sufficient extra length shall be provided and shall be
terminated in the terminals of accessories only, with appropriate type and size of lugs.
Drawing of wires:
Through PVC conduits:
Insulated Earth wire of green or green-yellow colour of minimum 2.5 sq mm or as per specified
shall be drawn through pipe. Number of wires shall not exceed with respect to size of pipe as
per Table No. 1/2.
1.5.2 Concealed Mains in PVC Conduits in walls / flooring:
Specification No (WG-MA/CC)
Scope:
Concealed Mains in PVC Conduits in walls / flooring:
Providing specified PVC conduit, Wires and laying / erecting the conduits in wall, flooring by
making chases / grooves / entries as per approved Method of Construction along with of all
required material including hardware such as ‘U’ nails, binding wire, fish wire; accessories
such as PVC / MS junction boxes / inspection boxes, check-nuts, flexible PVC pipe, drawing
fish-wires and making all piping rigid, refinishing the surface with cement mortar, removing
debris from site and as and when directed drawing of specified wires through these conduits
with fish help of wire, tagging by coded ferrules and duly connecting / terminating with lugs,
complete testing the installation for safety and beneficial use.
Material:
PVC Conduit:
PVC pipe minimum 20mm dia and above depending No. of wires to be drawn (refer Table
No1/2, ISI mark, HMS grade (2mm thick), accessories for PVC pipes of the same make that
of pipe; Couplers, long Bends, Junction boxes of required ways and resin / adhesive to
make all joints rigid.
Junction boxes / Draw-in boxes:
Junction box shall be 5 sided with removable top plate and of suitable size to accommodate
No. of entries; PVC or fabricated from 16g CRCA sheet steel with earth terminal duly treated
with antirust treatment and painted with two coats of red oxide paint. There shall be
knockout holes in required numbers and dia. for entry of conduit pipes and arrangement to
fix cover plate on it.
Hardware:
‘U’ nails, plumbing and general use nails of required sizes, washers, check-nuts, steel binding
wire 20g, steel fish wire, etc.
Specifications
Page 226
Tender No: -1800000008
Other material for Surface finishing: Cement, sand, putty and water.
Wires: Mains / Sub-mains / Circuit mains (comprising phase and neutral wires):
PVC insulated wire of specified size, minimum FR grade insulation, copper conductor of
electrolytic tough pitch (ETP) grade, having insulation of 1.1 kV grade, ISI marked, of
required colour coding as per Table No 1/5
Earth Continuity Wire: PVC insulated wire minimum FR grade insulation copper
conductor of electrolytic grade, having insulation of 1.1 kV grade, of green / green-yellow
colour, ISI marked, of specified size but not less than 2.5 Sqmm as per Table No 1/5
Lugs: Copper lugs of appropriate size & type
Other material for wire drawing: Rubber grommet, bush, harnessing material, flexible
conduit etc.
Method of Construction:
Concealing of PVC conduits:
General:
Work shall be done in co-ordination with civil work and to suite final approved layout. Size
of conduit shall be correct depending on number of wires to be drawn. (Table No. 1/1 for
Steel conduits & Table No 1/2 for PVC conduits) Separate pipe shall be used for each phase
in 1-ph distribution and for power and light distribution and also for wiring for other utilities
like data, telephone, TV cabling, etc. The distance between pipes shall not be less than 300
mm or anti electrostatic partition is to be provided. Adequate use of conduit accessories
shall be made at required locations. Entries in wall shall be at level of corresponding conduit
with colour coding as per Table No. 1/4. (For Visual identification) Flexible conduits shall be
used at expansion joints. Erection shall be done as per the layout finalized, with minimum
sharp bends, with junction boxes at angular junctions and for straight runs at every 4.25m,
in such manner so as to facilitate drawing of wires. All bending of conduits shall be done
with Bending Spring. All joints shall be made rigid with resin.
Concealing of PVC Conduits In walls / flooring:
Chases shall be made in walls of adequate width, with cutter and chiseling through it.
Necessary finishing of the wall surface shall be done. Work in flooring shall not disturb RCC
work, Conduits of adequate size shall be erected with use of appropriate accessories, and ‘U’
nails. All joints shall be made rigid with resin. Draw-in / inspection boxes shall be fixed
with check-nut, flush with surrounding surface and earthed.
Drawing of wires:
General:
Wires shall be drawn with adequate care. Correct colour coding as per Table No. 1/5 shall
be used for phase, neutral and earth. Wires shall not have intermediate joint in between
terminals of the accessories. Earth-wire and Return wire (neutral) may be looped only
within circuit. For lighting load or single-phase distribution wires of two different phases
shall not be drawn in single pipe. Lead wires of sufficient extra length shall be provided and
shall be terminated in the terminals of accessories only, with correct type of and correct size
of lugs.
Drawing of wires:
Through PVC conduits:
Insulated Earth wire of green or green-yellow colour of minimum 2.5 sq mm or as per specified
shall be drawn through pipe. Number of wires shall not exceed with respect to size of pipe as
per Table No. 1/2. At the termination end flexible PVC conduit shall be used with gland as
per necessity.
1.5.3 Concealed Mains in Rigid Steel Conduits in RCC work
Specification No (WG-MA/CC, WG-MA/BW)
Scope:
Specifications
Page 227
Tender No: -1800000008
Concealed Mains in Rigid Steel Conduits in RCC work:
Providing specified PVC conduit, Wires and laying / erecting the conduits in RCC work, such
as slab, beam, column before casting as per approved Method of Construction along with
continuous earth wire and all required material including earth clips, hardware, binding wire,
fish wire; accessories such as deep PVC junction boxes, PVC / MS junction boxes / inspection
boxes, check-nuts, flexible PVC pipe, drawing fish-wires and making all piping rigid, removing
debris from site and supervising the work during casting to confirm rigidity, continuity and
avoid damages and as and when directed drawing of wires through these conduits with fish
wire, ferruling by coding tags and duly connecting with lugs, complete testing the installation
for safety and beneficial use.
Material:
Rigid Steel conduit:
Rigid HG steel screwed conduit minimum 20mm dia. and higher depending on No. of wires
to be drawn as per Table No. 1/1, 16 gauge, ERW grade duly processed for anti-rust
treatment and painted with black enamel paint, accessories for rigid steel conduits such as
check nuts, long bends, deep junction boxes for slab, regular junction boxes for walls; of
required ways all of the same make.
Earth Continuity wire:
GI wire of 2.5 sq. mm 22g 10mm width, GI earth clips for fixing earth wire along with the
conduits.
Junction boxes / Draw-in boxes:
Junction box shall be 5 sided with removable top plate and of suitable size to accommodate
No. of entries; fabricated from 16 SWG CRCA sheet steel with earth terminal duly treated
with antirust treatment and painted with two coats of red oxide paint. There shall be
knockout holes in required numbers and dia. for entry of conduit pipes and arrangement to
fix cover plates on it.
Hardware:
‘U’ nails, plumbing and general use nails of required sizes, washers, check-nuts, steel binding
wire 20g, steel fish wire, rubber / PVC bushes etc.
Wires: Mains / Sub-mains / Circuit mains (comprising phase and neutral wires):
PVC insulated wire of specified size, minimum FR grade insulation, copper conductor of
electrolytic grade, having insulation of 1.1 kV grade, ISI marked, of required colour coding
as per Table No 1/5
Earth Wire: PVC insulated wire minimum FR grade insulation copper conductor of
electrolytic grade, having insulation of 1.1 kV grade, of green / green-yellow colour, ISI
marked, of specified size but not less than 2.5 Sqmm as per Table No 1/5
Lugs: Copper lugs of required size & type.
Other material: Rubber grommet, bush, harnessing material, flexible conduit etc.
Method of Construction:
Concealed Mains in Rigid Steel Conduits in RCC work:
Concealing of conduits:
General:
Work shall be done in co-ordination with civil work and to suite final approved layout. Size
of conduit shall be correct depending on number of wires to be drawn. (Table No1/1, for
Steel conduits) Separate pipe shall be used for each phase in 1-ph distribution and for
power and light distribution and also for wiring for other utilities like data, telephone, TV
cabling, etc. The distance between pipes shall not be less than 300 mm or anti electrostatic
partition is to be provided. Adequate use of conduit accessories shall be made at required
locations. Entries in wall shall be at level of corresponding conduit with colour coding as per
Table No. 1/4. (For Visual identification) Flexible conduits shall be used at expansion joints.
Erection shall be done as per the final approved layout, with minimum sharp bends, with
junction boxes at angular junctions and for straight runs at every 4.25 m, in such manner
so as to facilitate drawing of wires. All bending of conduits shall be done approved manner
without changing the cross-section.
Specifications
Page 228
Tender No: -1800000008
Concealing of conduits:
In RCC work:
Work shall be commenced after fixing of steel (re-enforcement) on centering material.
Conduits shall be firmly fixed with steel in slab by binding wire. Fixing of conduits shall be
possibly done with welding tags so that it will remain rigid during casting of slab, beam, and
column even after use of vibrator. Deep junction boxes and other draw-in boxes shall be
such that their open end and centering material will not have gap in between so as to avoid
concrete entering inside even after fixing covers to steel re-enforcement; and be filled with
dry sand. Open ends of conduits; to be concealed in walls, shall be provided with couplers /
sockets at ends and be flush with bottom of beam, and located at the center of the beam. As
far as possible bunching / grouping of conduits shall be avoided so that it will not affect
strength of RCC work especially in beams. Suitable steel fish wire shall be drawn through
the conduits for drawing of wires later on.
Drawing of wires:
General:
Wires shall be drawn with adequate care. Correct colour coding as per Table No. 1/5 shall
be used for phase, neutral and earth. Wires shall not have intermediate joint in between
terminals of the accessories. Earth-wire and Return wire (neutral) may be looped only
within circuit. For lighting load or single-phase distribution wires of two different phases
shall not be drawn in single pipe. Lead wires of sufficient extra length shall be provided and
shall be terminated in the terminals of accessories only, with correct type of and correct size
of lugs.
Drawing of wires:
Through Rigid Steel conduits:
Bush shall be used at pipe opening to protect wire insulation from getting damaged due to
burrs / sharp edges. Number of wires shall not exceed with respect to size of pipe as per Table
No. 1/1
1.5.4 Mains in Rigid steel Conduits in walls / flooring
Specification No (WG-MA/CC, WG-MA/BW)
Scope:
Concealed Mains in Rigid Steel Conduits in walls / flooring:
Providing specified Metal conduit, Wires and erecting in wall, flooring by making chases /
grooves / entries as per approved Method of Construction along with continuous earth wire
and all required material including earth clips hardware such as ‘U’ nails, binding wire, fish
wire; accessories such as MS junction / inspection boxes, check-nuts, flexible PVC pipe,
drawing fish-wires and making all piping rigid, refinishing the surface with cement mortar,
removing debris from site and as and when directed drawing of wires through these conduits
with fish wire, ferruling by coding tags and duly connecting with lugs, complete testing the
installation for safety and beneficial use.
Material:
Rigid Steel conduit:
Rigid HG steel screwed conduit minimum 20mm dia. and higher depending on No. of wires
to be drawn as per Table No. 1/1, 16 gauge, ERW grade duly processed for anti-rust
treatment and painted with black enamel paint, accessories for rigid steel conduits such as
Specifications
Page 229
Tender No: -1800000008
check nuts, long bends, deep junction boxes for flooring, regular junction boxes for walls; of
required ways all of the same make.
Earth continuity wire: GI wire of 2.5 sq. mm 22g 10mm width, GI earth clips for fixing
earth wire along with the conduits.
Junction boxes / Draw-in boxes:
Junction box shall be 5 sided with removable top plate and of suitable size to accommodate
No. of entries; fabricated from 16 SWG CRCA sheet steel with earth terminal duly treated
with antirust treatment and painted with two coats of red oxide paint. There shall be
knockout holes in required numbers and dia. for entry of conduit pipes and arrangement to
fix cover plates on it.
Hardware:
‘U’ nails, plumbing and general use nails of required sizes, washers, check-nuts, steel binding
wire 20g, steel fish wire, rubber, PVC bushes etc.
Other material for Surface finishing; Cement, sand, putty and water.
Wires: Mains / Sub-mains / Circuit mains (comprising phase and neutral wires):
PVC insulated wire of specified size, minimum FR grade insulation, copper conductor of
electrolytic grade, having insulation of 1.1 kV grade, ISI marked, of required colour coding
as per Table No 1/5
Earth Continuity Wire: PVC insulated wire minimum FR grade insulation copper
conductor of electrolytic grade, having insulation of 1.1 kV grade, of green / green-yellow
colour, ISI marked, of specified size but not less than 2.5 Sqmm as per Table No 1/5.
Lugs: Copper lugs of appropriate size & type
Other material: Rubber grommet, bush, harnessing material, flexible conduit etc.
Method of Construction:
Concealed Mains in Metal Conduits in walls / flooring Concealing of conduits:
General:
Work shall be done in co-ordination with civil work and to suite final approved layout. Size
of conduit shall be correct depending on number of wires to be drawn. (Table No 1/1, for
Steel conduits) Separate pipe shall be used for each phase in 1-ph distribution and for
power and light distribution and also for wiring for other utilities like data, telephone, TV
cabling, etc. The distance between pipes shall not be less than 300 mm or anti electrostatic
partition is to be provided. Adequate use of conduit accessories shall be made at required
locations. Entries in wall shall be at level of corresponding conduit with colour coding as per
Table No. 1/4. (For Visual identification) Flexible conduits shall be used at expansion joints.
Erection shall be done as per the layout finalized, with minimum sharp bends, with junction
boxes at angular junctions and for straight runs at every 4.25m, in such manner so as to
facilitate drawing of wires. All bending of conduits shall be done approved manner without
changing the cross-section.
Concealing of Conduits in walls/ flooring:
Chases shall be made in walls of adequate width, with cutter and chiseling through it.
Necessary finishing of the wall surface shall be done. Work in flooring shall not disturb RCC
work, Conduits of adequate size shall be erected with use of appropriate accessories and
hardware like ‘U’ nails, etc. Draw-in / inspection boxes shall be fixed with check-nut, flush
with surrounding surface and earthed.
Drawing of wires:
General:
Wires shall be drawn with adequate care. Correct colour coding as per Table No. 1/5, shall
be used for phase, neutral and earth. Wires shall not have intermediate joint in between
terminals of the accessories. Earth-wire and Return wire (neutral) may be looped only within
circuit. For lighting load or single-phase distribution wires of two different phases shall not
Specifications
Page 230
Tender No: -1800000008
be drawn in single pipe. Lead wires of sufficient extra length shall be provided and shall be
terminated in the terminals of accessories only, with correct type of and correct size of lugs.
Drawing of wires:
Through Rigid Steel conduits:
Bush shall be used at pipe opening to protect wire insulation from getting damaged due to
burrs / sharp edges. Number of wires shall not exceed with respect to size of pipe as per Table
No. 1/1. At the termination end flexible metal conduit shall be used with glands as per
necessity.
Testing:
Insulation resistance test:
All wiring shall be tested with 500V Meggar between phases, phase – neutral and to
Earth. IR value shall not be less than 1M-ohm.
Earth continuity:
Earth continuity shall be ensured at all earth terminals and at earth terminals of metal
enclosures.
Polarity Test:
Polarity test shall be carried out for ensuring correct polarity in plug and switch.
1.6
Mode of Measurement:
Measurement shall be carried out on the basis per running meter of pipe length.
Point wiring (Surface type)
Specification No (WG-PW/SW)
Scope:
Point wiring (Surface type):
Providing all required approved specified material including hardware and erecting wiring on
surface of wall, ceiling from switch board to outlet for light / fan / bell / independent plug
point, in rigid steel / PVC conduit or PVC trunking as specified; fixing one board with a 1
way switch for one way point or two boards with a 2 way switch on each board, in case of 2
way point; for controlling power supply and one board / block with accessory for outlet of
light / fan / plug and terminating wires within as per approved Method of Construction;
removing all debris and testing the installation for safety and beneficial use.
Material:
Point wiring (Surface)
PVC conduit:
PVC pipe of minimum 20mm dia and above depending No. of wires to be drawn (refer Table
No 1/2); ISI mark, HMS grade (2mm thick), accessories for PVC pipes of the same make that
of pipe; such as Spacers & Saddles, Couplers, Bends, inspection or non inspection type
Elbows, Tees, Junction boxes of required ways and resin / adhesive to make all joints rigid.
Black pipe shall not be used for surface type wiring.
PVC Trunking:
PVC Trunking (casing capping) ISI mark, 1.2 mm thick, minimum 20 mm width and above
depending on No. of wires to be drawn (Refer Table No 1/2 for the size of trunking and
number of wires to be drawn); with double locking arrangement, 1.8 mm thick push-fit
joints / accessories for PVC trunking such as couplers, elbows, internal / external angles,
junction boxes of required ways of the same make.
Rigid Steel conduit:
Rigid steel screwed conduit minimum 20mm dia. and higher depending on No. of wires to
be drawn as per Table No. 1/1, 16 gauge, ISI mark, ERW grade duly processed for anti-rust
Specifications
Page 231
Tender No: -1800000008
treatment and painted with black enamel paint, accessories for rigid steel conduits such as
5mm thick 20mm width spacers and G.I. saddles for individual pipe or GI strip for bunch of
pipes, sockets, inspection type or normal; open bends, junction boxes of required ways all of
the same make.
Wires: Phase and Neutral
PVC insulated wires of specified size, 1.1 kV, & minimum FR grade insulation, electrolytic
tough pitch (ETP) copper conductor, ISI marked, of required colour coding as per Table No
1/5
Earth Wire:
PVC insulated minimum FR grade copper wires of electrolytic grade, having insulation of 1.1
kV grade, of green / green-yellow colour, ISI marked, 2.5 Sqmm or bare copper wire of 14g
Accessories:
Switch: 1 or 2 way Piano type 6/10 A, 1 or 2 way Modular type switch 6/10A.
Outlet: 6A angle / batten lamp holder or 3 plate ceiling-rose or Bakelite / porcelain three way
connector or if plug point, 6A, 3-pin plug socket.
Boards:
Switchboards shall be double walled (back and front) of suitable size, to accommodate
independent slot for each switch, socket, fan regulator. Boards shall be made up of 4mm
thick marine grade plywood for back and front fixed on wooden frame with 0.8mm thick
laminate pasted on exposed portion of front ply, totally varnished and with either brass
hinged door or screwed top.
Or
As above with 3mm thick Bakelite/Hylam top instead of laminated front ply.
Or
Board made from Filled polypropylene.
Round/Square double wooden block or PVC board for mounting light / fan outlet accessory.
Hardware:
Sheet Metal (SM) screws of sizes specified in Method of Construction, washers, rawl / PVC /
fill type plugs, wooden gutties, PVC/ rubber bushings etc.
Method of Construction:
Point wiring (Surface)
Erection of conduits:
General:
Erection shall be done as per the final approved layout, in perfect level and plumb. Conduits
shall be duly screwed and firmly fixed on spacers with saddles. Fixing of spacers shall be
equidistant and at ends, bends, elbows, junction boxes, couplings, boards. CSK screws of
minimum 35x8 mm and suitable plugs shall be used for fixing spacers and 12x5 mm round
headed for fixing saddles on spacers. In case of stonewalls wooden gutties shall be grouted in
wall for fixing of spacers and saddles. Distance between 2 spacers shall not be more than
600mm. Separate pipe shall be used for each phase in 1-ph distribution and for power and
light distribution. Also for wiring for other utilities like data, telephone, TV cabling distance
between pipes shall not be less than 300 mm. Adequate use of conduit accessories shall be
made at required locations. Entries in wall shall be at level of surface conduit with colour
coding (For Visual identification) as per Table No 1/4. Flexible conduits shall be used at
expansion joints. Bushing shall be provided at open ends.
Erection of conduits:
PVC pipes for surface type wiring:
Specifications
Page 232
Tender No: -1800000008
In addition to General conditions above, all joints shall be made rigid with resin / adhesive.
Wherever offsets are necessary, same shall be done with bending spring. Size of conduit shall
be correct depending on number of wires to be drawn as per Table No. 1/2.
Or
Specially for Rigid Steel Conduit of surface type wiring:
In addition to general conditions above, Size of conduit shall be correct depending on number
of wires to be drawn (as per Table No. 1/1 for steel conduits). All exposed threaded portion of
Rigid Steel Conduits shall be painted with anti corrosive paint. Sharp edges and burr at cut
ends shall be made smooth. Inspection type conduits accessories shall be used as per
requirement in accessible position to facilitate drawing or withdrawing of wires. All conduits
piping work shall be properly earthed with 2.5 sq. mm G.I Earth wire fixed to conduit and
made continuous with Earth clips at every 1m and at ends and joints viz. bends, junction
boxes.
Or
Erection of PVC Trunking for surface type wiring:
Erection shall be done as per the final approved layout. The Trunking shall be in perfect
level and plumb. Screws of minimum 35x8 mm and suitable plugs shall be used for fixing.
In case of unleveled surface number and size of screws shall be changed to higher size as
per requirement and in case of stonewalls wooden gutties shall be grouted in wall for fixing
of screws of Trunking. Distance between 2 screws shall not be more than 600 mm. Size of
Trunking shall be correct depending on number of wires to be drawn as per Table No 1/3
but not less than 20mm. Separate Trunking shall be used for each phase in 1-ph
distribution and for power and light distribution and also for wiring of other utilities like
data, telephone, TV cabling and distance of 300 mm shall be maintained between the
Trunking.
Double locking shall be checked while fixing capping. Adequate use of
accessories shall be made at joints and required locations.
Drawing of wires: General
Wires shall be drawn with adequate care. Correct colour coding as per Table No 1/5 shall
be used for phase, neutral and earth. Wires shall not have intermediate joint in between
terminals of the accessories. Earth-wire and Return wire (neutral) may be looped within
circuit. For lighting load distribution wires of two different phases shall not be drawn in
single pipe. Wires shall be terminated in the terminals of accessories only. Insulated Earth
wire of green or green-yellow colour of minimum 2.5 sq mm or as per specified shall be
erected wherever necessary. In case of 2-way point wiring additional wires of phase
conductor shall be provided between the 2-way switches.
Drawing of wires: through PVC conduits for surface type wiring
Insulated Earth wire of green or green-yellow colour of minimum 2.5 sq mm shall be drawn
through pipe. Number of wires shall not exceed with respect to size of pipe as per Table No.
1/2.
Or
Drawing of wires: through Rigid Steel conduits for surface type wiring
Bush shall be used at pipe opening to protect wire insulation from getting damaged due to
burrs / sharp edges. Number of wires shall not exceed with respect to size of pipe as per Table
No. 1/1.
Or
Erecting wires in Trunking:
Wires shall be erected within Trunking with adequate care. Number of wires shall not exceed
with respect to size of Trunking as per Table No. 1/3. After erection of wires double locking
shall be checked while fixing capping.
Fixing Switchboards and accessories:
Control switchboards shall generally be erected at 1.35m height or as specified and fixed with
minimum 2 Nos. (and more as per size of board) of screws of length not less than 50mm,
termination of wires shall be done with lugs on switch and other accessories only by carefully
inserting all strands in lugs, terminals and proper tightening. Switches shall be provided on
phase wire only. Bare wire shall not be used for looping incoming supply to switches and for
earthing inside switchboards. For plug socket phase wire shall be connected in right side
Specifications
Page 233
Tender No: -1800000008
terminal when seen from front. Proper termination of earth wire in Earth terminal shall be
ensured.
Testing:
Insulation resistance test:
All wiring shall be tested with 500V Meggar between phases, phase – neutral and to Earth. IR
value shall not be less than 1M-ohm.
Earth continuity:
Earth continuity shall be ensured at all earth terminals of plug outlets and at earth terminals
of metal enclosures.
Polarity test:
Polarity test shall be carried out for ensuing the correct polarity in switch and plug.
Mode of Measurement:
Measurement shall be carried out on the basis per number of points, for the point length
up to 6 metre between switch and outlet. For the length exceeding 6 metre 10% of overall
rate shall be added for every 1m.
1.7
Point wiring (Concealed type)
Specification No (WG-PW/CW)
Scope:
Point wiring (Concealed type):
Providing all required approved specified material including hardware and erecting rigid steel
/ PVC conduits, junction boxes, provided fan boxes, along with required accessories in RCC
slabs before casting and in walls, flooring by making chases, and refilling the same after
erection of conduits, fixing concealed type boxes for switch boards in walls, drawing wires
through conduits, from switch board to outlet for light / fan / bell / independent plug point
fixing modular type switch for controlling power supply and an accessory for outlet of light /
fan / bell / plug at other end, with mounting plate, and terminating wires within at both ends,
as per approved Method of Construction, closing all junction boxes with plates; removing all
debris and testing the installation for safety and beneficial use.
Material:
Point wiring (Concealed):
PVC conduit:
PVC pipe of minimum 20mm dia and above depending No. of wires to be drawn (refer Table
No 1 / 2); ISI mark, HMS grade (2mm thick), accessories for PVC pipes of the same make
that of pipe; such as Spacers & Saddles, Couplers, Bends, deep / normal Junction boxes of
required ways and resin / adhesive to make all joints rigid. Black pipe shall not be used for
surface type wiring.
Rigid Steel conduit:
Rigid steel screwed conduit minimum 20mm dia. and higher depending on No. of wires to
be drawn as per Table No.1/1, 16 gauge, ISI mark, ERW grade duly processed for anti-rust
treatment and painted with black enamel paint, accessories for rigid steel conduits such as
sockets, bends, deep / normal junction boxes of required ways all of the same make.
Sheet metal Junction boxes / Draw-in boxes:
Junction box shall be 5 sided with removable top plate, fabricated from 16g CRCA sheet
steel with earth terminal duly treated with antirust treatment and painted with two coats of
red oxide paint. There shall be knockout holes in required numbers and dia. for entry of
conduit pipes and arrangement to fix surface cover plate on it. Cover plate shall be made up
of fire resistant PVC material / 3mm thick laminate / Bakelite / Hylam / transparent acrylic
sheet painted from inside to match colour of wall with duly tapered edges.
Wires: phase and neutral wires
PVC insulated wires of specified size, 1.1 kV, & minimum FR grade insulation, electrolytic
tough pitch (ETP) copper conductor, ISI marked, of required colour coding as per Table No
1/5
Specifications
Page 234
Tender No: -1800000008
Earth Continuity Wire:
PVC insulated minimum FR grade copper wires of electrolytic grade, having insulation of 1.1
kV grade, of green colour, ISI marked, 2.5 Sqmm or bare copper wire of 14g
Lugs: Pin type Copper lugs.
Accessories:
Switch: 1 or 2 way Modular type switch 6/10A.
Outlet:
Modular type 6A angle / batten lamp holder or 3 plate ceiling-rose or Bakelite /
way connector or if plug point, 6A, 3-pin plug shuttered socket.
porcelain 3
Boards:
Switchboards shall comprise of; concealed type box of required modules made of sheet metal
or Polypropylene material, mounting plate and cover plate. The required modules shall be
worked out on the basis of points, plug socket/sockets, step type fan regulator, etc are to be
fixed. For every blank module, 1 way blank plate shall be fixed. All the above accessories
shall be of same make, as that of switch.
Hardware:
Sheet Metal (SM) screws of sizes specified in Method of Construction, washers, rawl / PVC /
fill type plugs / wooden gutties, ‘U’ nails, plumbing nails, steel binding wire, fish wire 20g,
rubber / PVC bushes etc.
Other material for Surface finishing: Sand, Cement, water etc.
Method of Construction:
Point wiring (Concealed):
Concealing of conduits:
General:
Work shall be done in co-ordination with civil work and to suite final approved layout. Size
of conduit shall be correct depending on number of wires to be drawn. (Table No. 1/1 for
Steel conduits & Table No 1/2 for PVC conduits) Separate pipe shall be used for each phase
in 1-ph distribution and for power and light distribution and also for wiring for other utilities
like data, telephone, TV cabling, etc. The distance between pipes shall not be less than 300
mm. Adequate use of conduit accessories shall be made at required locations. Entries in
wall shall be at level of corresponding conduit with colour coding as per Table No. 1/4. (For
Visual identification) Flexible conduits shall be used at expansion joints. Erection shall be
done as per the layout finalized, with minimum sharp bends, with junction boxes at angular
junctions and for straight runs at every 4.25m, in such manner so as to facilitate drawing of
wires. All the bends shall be done with Bending Spring.
Concealing of conduits: In RCC work
Work shall be commenced after fixing of steel (re-enforcement) on centering material.
Conduits shall be firmly fixed on steel of RCC work by binding wire. Fixing of conduits shall
be such that it will remain rigid during casting of slab, beam, and column even after use of
vibrator. Deep junction boxes and other draw-in boxes shall be such that their open end and
centering material will not have gap in between so as to avoid concrete entering inside even
after fixing covers to steel re-enforcement; and be filled with dry sand. Open ends of
conduits; to be concealed in walls, shall be provided with couplers / sockets at ends and be
flush with bottom of beam, and at located at the center of the beam. As far as possible
bunching / grouping of conduits shall be avoided so that it will not affect strength of RCC
work especially in beams. Suitable steel fish wire shall be drawn through in the conduits for
drawing of wires later on.
Concealing of Conduits: In walls
Specifications
Page 235
Tender No: -1800000008
Chases shall be made in walls of adequate width, with cutter and chiseling through it.
Necessary finishing of the surface shall be done. Conduits of adequate size shall be erected
with use of appropriate accessories and ‘U’ nails.
Drawing of wires:
Use of Steel fish wire shall be made for drawing of wires. Wires shall be drawn with
adequate care. Correct colour coding shall be used for phase, neutral and earth. Wires shall
not have intermediate joint in between terminals of the accessories. Earth-wire and Return
wire (neutral) may be looped within circuit only. For lighting load distribution, wires of two
different phases shall not be drawn in single pipe. Wires shall be terminated in the
terminals of accessories only. Adequate extra length shall be left at termination points. In
case of 2-way point wiring additional wires of phase conductor shall be provided between the
2-way switches.
Fixing Switchboards and accessories:
Control switchboards shall generally be erected at 1.35m height or as specified and fixed
with minimum 2 Nos. of screws of length not less than 50 x 8mm, Boards shall be in line
and plum and shall be in level with wall surface so as to fix mounting plate flush with wall,
Termination of wires shall be done in switch and other accessories only by carefully
inserting all strands in terminals and proper tightening. Switches shall be provided on
phase wire only. Bare wire shall not be used for looping incoming supply to switches.
Phase wire shall be routed through switch only. For plug socket phase wire shall be
connected in right side terminal when seen from front. Proper termination of earth wire in
Earth terminal shall be ensured. All blank modules shall be plugged with blanking plates.
Testing:
Insulation resistance test:
All wiring shall be tested with 500V Meggar between phases, phase – neutral and to Earth. IR
value shall not be less than 1M-ohm.
Earth continuity:
Earth continuity shall be ensured at all earth terminals of plug outlets and at earth terminals
of metal enclosures.
Polarity test:
Polarity test shall be carried out for ensuring the correct polarity in the plug.
Mode of Measurement:
Measurement shall be carried out on the basis per number of points, for the point length
up to 6 metre between switch and outlet. For the length exceeding 6 metre 10% of overall
rate shall be added for every 1metre.
DISMANTLING POINT WIRING:(WG-PW/DM)
Electrical installation of point wiring along with circuit mains from DBs shall be dismantled
with adequate care without damaging surface of wall, ceiling, and flooring. The holes shall
be refinished to match with the surrounding surface. Site shall be made clean by removing
debris. Dismantled material shall be retained by the agency.
Mode of Measurement:
Executed quantity will be counted on the basis of number of points. (i.e. per Point)
Table No. 1/1
Maximum Number Of Single Core 1.1 kV Cables That Can Be Drawn In Rigid Steel Conduits
Size of cable mm2
Nominal No. and dia.
Cross
of wires
sectional
area
16
20
S
B
S
B
Size of conduit mm
25
32
40
S
B
S
B
S
B
1.0
1 / 1.12 Cu
5
4
7
5
13
10
20
1.5
1 / 1.4
4
3
7
5
12
10
20
Specifications
50
S
63
B
14
14
Page 236
S
B
Tender No: -1800000008
2.5
4.0
6
10
16
1 / 1.8
3 / 1.06 Cu
1 / 2.24
7 / 0.85 Cu
1 / 2.80
7 / 1.06 Cu
11 / 3.55 Al
7 / 1.40 Cu
7 / 1.70
3
2
0
5
10
8
18
12
3
2
4
3
7
8
12
10
3
2
6
5
10
8
5
4
4
3
8
6
7
5
4
3
7
6
2
5
4
8
6
9
4
3
7
5
8
5
4
6
2
2
2
2
25
7 / 2.24
3
35
7 / 2.50
2
50
7 / 3.0 Al
19 / 1.80
2
7
6
5
Note 1: Cu- applicable to only copper cable; Al- applicable to only Aluminium
cable
Note 2: The table shows maximum capacity of conduits for the simultaneous drawing of cables.
The columns headed ‘S’ apply to straight runs of conduits which have distance not exceeding 4.25m
between draw in boxes and which do not deflect from straight by an angle more than 150. The
columns headed ‘B’ apply to bent runs of conduit, which deflect from the straight by an angle of
more than 150.
Note 3: In case of inspection type draw in box has been provided and if the cable is first drawn
through one straight conduit, then through the draw in box and then through the second straight
conduit such system may be considered as that of straight conduit even if the conduit deflects
through the straight by more than 150.
Specifications
Page 237
Tender No: -1800000008
Table No. 1/2
Maximum Number of Single Core 1.1 kV Cables That Can Be Drawn In Rigid Non-Metallic
Conduits
Size of cable mm2
Nominal
Cross
sectional
area
1.0
1.5
2.5
4.0
6
10
16
25
35
50
Size of conduit mm
No. and dia.
of wires
16
20
25
32
1 / 1.12 Cu
5
7
13
20
1 / 1.4
4
6
10
14
3
5
10
14
2
3
6
10
14
2
5
9
11
4
7
9
2
4
5
12
2
2
6
7 / 2.50
2
5
7 / 3.0 Al
19 / 1.80
2
2
5
3
1 / 1.8
3 / 1.06 Cu
1 / 2.24
7 / 0.85 Cu
1 / 2.80
7 / 1.06 Cu
11 / 3.55 Al
7 / 1.40 Cu
7 / 1.70
7 / 2.24
40
50
Note 1: Cu- applicable to only copper cable; Al- applicable to only Aluminium cable
Table No. 1/3
Maximum Number of Single Core 1.1 kV Cables in Cable Trunking (Casing and Capping)
Size of cable mm2
Size of Trunking mm
Nominal Cross
12/16 x 12
25 x12
32 x 12
20 x 12 mm
40 x 20 mm
sectional area
mm
mm
mm
1.0
1.5
3
5
6
8
12
2.5
2
4
5
6
9
4.0
2
3
4
5
8
6
2
3
4
6
10
1
2
3
5
16
1
2
4
25
1
3
35
2
50
1
Note 1: Cu- applicable to only copper cable; Al- applicable to only Aluminium cable
Specifications
Page 238
50 x 20
mm
18
15
12
9
8
6
5
4
3
Tender No: -1800000008
Table No. 1/4
Table No 1/5
Colour Coding For Conduits in Wall Entry
Colour Code for Wires
Conduit for
Colour
Type
Colour
Light / Power circuit
Black
Phase
Red, Yellow, Blue
Security wiring
Fire Alarm wiring
Blue
Red
Low voltage circuits
Brown
UPS circuits
Green
Neutral
Earth
Black
Green
1.11Telephone wiring (TW)
1. General
All material shall conform to relevant standard as per BIS and shall carry ISI mark. If any
particular category of material for which PSI mark is not available in market, it shall be
approved either by ITD I DOT of Govt. of India.
Work shall be carried out as per the Method of Construction specified by BIS and as
specified
by
DOT
(Department
of
Telephone),
Govt.
of
India.
Material and Work not qualifying to any provision mentioned above shall be to the
satisfaction of Engineer in Charge.
2. Scope:
Specification No (WG-TW)
To provide wiring for telephone on surface of wall or ceiling concealed in slab, wall,
under flooring, etc, through existing metallic conduits, rigid PVC conduits, PVC trunking,
with all necessary hardware, material, etc. as specified.
To provide, install, test & commission the instruments / equipments and accessories used
in telephone system, such as; Main Distribution Frames (MDF), Krone Modules, Over
Voltage Magazine, PBX / EPABX, CO-axial cable, Rosette box, Jumper wire, etc.
3. Material:
PVC Telephone cable: PVC insulated Tinned copper solid conductor with minimum 0.5 mm
dia. (Single & Multi pair) properly paired and colour coded, shall be terminated on KRONE
module with suitable tool.
Jelly filled Armoured Telephone cable: PVC insulated, PVC sheathed with steel
armouring, Tinned copper solid conductor with minimum 0.5 mm dia multi pair, with
Jelly, properly paired and colour coded.
Saddles: Saddles fabricated from G I sheet of required gauge (16/18 gauge) either
galvanized finish or painted with superior quality enamel black paint, with necessary
Specifications
Page 239
Tender No: -1800000008
shearing for mechanical strength, semi circular shaped with extended piece having suitable
holes for fixing on spacer.
Hardware: Sheet Metal (SM) screws of required sizes, plugs, wooden gutties, etc.
MDF: Manufactured by reputed manufacturer of specified capacity, facility for wall
mounting, with door & lock, aluminium frame for fixing of KRONE, duly enclosed in cabinet
made from 18 SWG CRCA sheet with powder coating of required colour.
Junction box: Manufactured by reputed manufacturer of specified capacity, facility for +
wall mounting, with door & lock, aluminium frame for fixing of Krone, duly enclosed in
cabinet made from 18 SWG CRCA sheet with powder coating of required colour. The depth
of the box should consider the height of KRONE module plus protection magazine.
Over Voltage protection Magazine: Manufactured by reputed manufacturer of 10 pair
capacity, with 3 pole gas discharge tube should be properly fitted on KRONE module in MDF
/ Junction box.
Rosette box: PVC I Bakelite box with LED indicator, RJ 11 jack, facility for fixing on wall.
Jumper wire: Twin twisted PVC insulated with Tinned copper solid conductor minimum 0.5
mm dia.
KRONE Module: Disconnection type KRONE module having capacity to connect 10 pairs
with silver-plated terminal contacts.
RG-11 Co-axial low voltage grade cable: PVC insulated with Tinned copper solid
conductor minimum 0.5 mm dia, with connector at both ends suitable for termination in RJ
type socket.
PBX (Analogue type): Manufactured by reputed manufacturer and approved by Telephone
Engineering
Certificate
(TEC)
of
specified
extensions,
having
following
features:
•
•
•
•
•
Direct Inward dialling (DID) with voice guidance facility.
Caller line Identification (CLI) on Analog as well as digital extension.
Call Billing software (CB)
Dynamic STD locking
Conferencing facility for specified extensions.
EPABX (Digital type): Manufactured by reputed manufacturer and approved by Telephone
Engineering
Certificate
(TEC)
of
specified
extensions,
having
following
features:
•
•
•
•
•
4.
Direct Inward dialling (DID) with voice guidance facility.
Caller line Identification (CLI) on Analog as well as digital extension.
Call Billing software (CB)
Dynamic STD locking
Conferencing facility for specified extensions.
. Provision of battery back-up and power failure line transfer.
Method of Construction:
4.1Drawing of telephone wire through Steel conduit I PVC conduit I PVC Trunking:
As specified in Chapter for Point Wiring.
4.2Erection of Jelly filled armoured Telephone cable:
Erection shall be done as per the layout finalized, in perfect level and plum. Before fixing the
cable shall be straightened as far as possible for good aesthetics look. Cable shall be fixed
with saddles firmly clipped on cable. Saddles shall be fixed to wall with minimum 50x8 mm
SM screws with plugs/wooden gutties (Distance between two saddles shall be minimum 600
mm). Wooden gutties shall be used wherever required (Especially for stone wall). The entries
made in wall, floor slab, etc for laying the cable shall be made good by filling and finishing
with plastering the same.
Specifications
Page 240
4.3
5.
Tender No: -1800000008
Erection of MDF Junction box / Rosette box / PBX / EPABX, etc:
Specified equipment shall be fixed to wall with minimum 50x8 mm SM screws, with
necessary plugs, wooden gutties, etc. or may be fixed on Table Top if required.
Mode of Measurement:
Work done for telephone in Steel I PVC conduit I PVC Trunking will be measured on running
meter basis, (i.e. per running meter) for each single run. For the other
accessories
/equipments
shall
be
done
as
per
unit
specified.
(I.e.
Job
/
each)
1.12
Computer Cabling
(COC)
A) UTP Networking Cable
General:
All material shall conform to relevant standard as per ISO/IEC11801, CENELEC
EN50173 & TIA/EIA 568-B2-1; CUL listed & ETL verified.
Material and Work not qualifying to any provision mentioned above shall be to the
satisfaction of Engineer in Charge.
Scope:
Specification No (WG-COC/NC)
To lay the cables for Computers on surface of wall or ceiling concealed in slab, wall, under
flooring etc, through existing metallic conduits, rigid PVC conduits, PVC trunking, with all
necessary hardware, material, etc. as specified. The cable shall be used only for connections
between Information Outlet & Patch/ Multimax Panel. (Exception: For making MDIX patch
cord)
Material:
UTP cable:
4 pairs,100 ohms, unshielded twisted pair (UTP), each pair separated by a PE former
(Star shaped) solid 23AWG tinned copper conductor rated for temperature of 750
C,
PVC insulated grey colour with following types as in the table 1.12/1
Table 1.12/1
Sr. No.
1
2
Type
Cat 6
Cat 6+
Class
E
E
Tested frequency
350MHz
500MHz
1. The Category 6 cable and Category 6 channel components shall be manufactured by a single
manufacturer. The manufacturer shall warrant the Category 6 channel cable, components, and
applications for a period of 20 years.
2. The Delay Skew on the 100 meter channel shall not exceed 30 ns
3. The 20 year warranty shall be a transferable warranty and has component replacement policy in
case of manufacturing defect
4. Category 6, 100mtr channel, 4-connection model should guarantee 400% margin over
standard NEXT specification across swept frequency
5. Category 6, 100mtr channel, 6-connection model should guarantee +4dB margin over standard
NEXT Specification across swept frequency (1~250MHZ)
6. The high performance Category 6 UTP cable 23AWG shall be of the traditional round design
with Mylar bisector tape Non-Plenum rated.
Specifications
Page 241
Tender No: -1800000008
7. The cable shall support Voice, Analog Baseband Video/Audio, Fax, Modem,Switched-56, T-1,
ISDN,RS-232, RS422, RS-485, 10BASE – T Ethernet, Token Ring, 100Mbps TP-PMD, 100BASET Ethernet, 155 Mbps ATM, AES/EBU Digital Audio, 270 Mbps Digital Video, 622 Mbps 64-CAP
ATM and emerging high-bandwidth applications, including 1 Gbps Ethernet, gigabit ATM, IEEE
1394B S100 and S400, as well as all 77 channels (550 MHz) of analog broadband video.
8. The cable jacket shall comply with Article 800 NEC for use as a non-plenum cable. The 4 pair
UTP cable shall be UL and c (UL) Listed Type CM.
9. Performance shall be characterized to 550 MHz to support high-bandwidth video applications
Non Plenum CAT6 UTP Cable
1 Weight=25.3 lb (1000 ft)
2 Jacket Thickness=.022 in
3 Outside Diameter=0.232 in
4 Conductor Diameter=.022 in
5 Insulation Type=High density Polyethylene
6 Jacket Material=PVC
7 Maximum Pulling Tension=25 lbs
8 Nom. Velocity of Propagation=0.69
9 Max DC Resistance=9.83 Ohms/100m
10 Mutual Capacitance @ 1 kHz = 4.95 nF/100m
11 Operating Temperature= -20 to 60° C
12 The high performance Category 6 UTP cable shall be of the traditional round design
with Mylar bisector tape.
13 The 4 pair UTP cable shall be UL Type CM (non-plenum)
14 Performance shall be characterized to 550 MHz to support high-bandwidth video
applications
Method of Construction:
The cable shall be laid in provided separate casing n capping/ PVC conduit/ trunking
400mm away from electrical cables wherever required without sharp bends. The
cable shall be spliced at both the ends for punching/ crimping at keystone jacks/
UTP connectors.
Mode of measurement: Executed quantity shall be measured on running metre
basis.
B) UTP Patch cord
Scope:
Specification No (WG-COC/PC)
Structured cabling, to make connections from switch to patch panel or information outlet to
computer
Material:
UTP Patch Cord:
Assembly (conforming to EIA/TIA 568B-2-1) of Cat 6 type 4 unshielded twisted pair 2426AWG (0.51mm-0.40mm), each pair separated by a PE former (Star shaped)
100 ohms
stranded wire PVC insulated cables with modular RJ-45 polycarbonate UL94V
housing
15milliohms gold over nickel contacts (superior three piece connector) crimped on both ends
with T568A & T568B wiring schemes with 8P8C
connection. The cord shall be branded.
The cords shall be used in structured cabling in accordance with following table 1.12/2.
Table 1.12/2
Specifications
Page 242
Tender No: -1800000008
Sr. No.
Length
Use in
1
1m
from switch to patch panel
2
3m
from computer to information
outlet
1. All patch cords shall exceed TIA/EIA and ISO/IEC Category 6/Classs E
specifications.
2. All patch cords shall be backward compatible with Category 5 and Category 5E systems.
3. The patch cords shall incorporate an anti-snag feature that provides maximum protection from
snagging during moves and re-arrangements.
4. Patch cords shall be UL listed, UL-C certified and AUSTEL approved.
5. Patch cords shall support network line speeds in excess of 1 gigabit per
second.
Physical Specifications:
Contact Material:
Contact Plating:
Insertion Life:
Plug Material:
Operating Temperature:
Phosphor Bronze
Gold 50 micro-inch (1.27 microns) Nickel 100
micro –inch (2.54 microns)
750 minimum
Polycarbonate UL-rated 94 V-O
14°F to 140°F (-10°C to 60°C)
Method of construction:
The patch cord shall be erected for making connections from switch to patch panel or from
computer to information outlet.
Mode of measurement: Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis
BACKBONE (Fibre Network)
C) PVC Armoured Optical Fibre Cable (OFC)
General:
All material shall conform to relevant standard as per IEEE, EIA/TIA 568-B.3
Scope:
Specification No (WG-COC/OFC)
Optical fibre cable is used for connecting remote places networks by means of fibre switch or
fibre module without much loss of signal.
Material:
Optical Fibre Cable:
Dielectric & metallic sheath armoured multimode optical fibre cable for underground/ aerial
applications, fibres separated into binder groups inside a Industry standard 3mm gel filled
buffer tubes standard around a central strength member; water blocked with dry water
blocking material, making access & handling individual tubes easier & craft-friendly cable
core; operating temperature of 40 - 700 C, crush resistance of 44N/m, as per table 1.12/3.
Table 1.12/3
Specifications
Page 243
Tender No: -1800000008
Sr.
No.
1
2
3
4
Grade
FR
FR
FRLS
FRLS
04/ 06/ 12/ 24 fibres
Core dia.
1Gbps Distance at
wavelength
850nm
1300nm
62.5 µm
3000m
550m
50 µm
1100m
600m
62.5 µm
3000m
550m
50 µm
1100m
600m
1. The cable shall support Gigabit Ethernet and legacy applications including Ethernet,
Fast Ethernet, Token Ring, ATM and FDDI.
2. The loose tube dielectric OSP cable shall be armored with a corrugated polymer
3. coated steel tape and constructed with industry standard 3mm buffer tubes, stranded
around a central strength member.
4. The armor layer shall provide crush protection meeting the Telcordia requirements for
Superior Armored cable.
5. The buffer tubes shall compatible with standard hardware, cable routing and fan-out
kits.
6. The cable core shall be water blocked with dry water-blocking materials, making access
and handling of individual tubes easier and craft-friendly.
7. The cables shall be designed for point-to point applications as well as mid-span access,
and provide a high-level of protection for fiber installed in the outside plant
Physical Specifications:
Fiber Subun Outer Weight Minimum Bend Max. Tensile Load
its
Coun
Diameter lbs/kit Radius In. (cm)
lbs.
t
(Newtons)
in. (mm) kg/km
Short
Long
Loaded Unloade
Term
Term
d
4 - 48
5
0.46
63 (94)
9.2
4.6
607 (2700) 180
(11.7)
(23.4)
(11.7)
(800)
72
6
0.50
72 (107) 10.0
5.0
607 (2700) 180
(12.7)
(25.4)
(12.7)
(800)
96
8
0.58
95 (141) 11.5
5.8
607 (2700) 180
(14.7)
(29.4)
(14.7)
(800)
144
12
0.74
146
14.8
7.4
607 (2700) 180
(18.9)
(217)
(37.8)
(18.9)
(800)
288
24
0.86
211
17.2
8.6
607 (2700) 180
(21.9)
(315)
(43.8)
(21.9)
(800)
Note* There are 12 fibres per tube
Max.
Vertical
Rise Feet
(Meter)
2856 (871)
2509 765)
1904 (580)
1237 (377)
852 (260)
environment.
Specifications
Page 244
Tender No: -1800000008
S. No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Features
Support 10 Gbps up to 300 meters
Meets and exceeds the next generation multimode fiber (OM3)
specifications in standards
Gigabit Ethernet is supported up to over 1.0 kilometre for
1000BASE-SX.
Supports very high speed data transmission by controlling DMD
Differential Mode Delay Exceeds TIA-492AAAC-A (IEC-60793-210ed2) @ 850nm
> 2,000 MHz-km laser bandwidth at 850 nm
Core Diameter should be 50.0 ± 3.0 µm
Cladding Diameter should be 125.0 ± 1.0 µm
Max. Attenuation, Loose Tube Cable 3.0 dB/km
Coating/Cladding Concentricity Error should be =< 6 µm
Clad Non-Circularity ≤ 1%
Zero Dispersion Wavelength 1297-1316 nm
Water Immersion, 73.4°F (23°C) should be ≤ 0.20 dB
Environmental and Mechanical
Operating Temperature
Installation Temperature
Storage Temperature
Crush Resistance
Impact Resistance
Flexing
Twist Bend
Specification
-40°to +70°C
20°to +70°C
-40°to +70°C
44 N/mm
Exceeds
Exceeds
Exceeds
Test Method
FOTP - 3
N/A
N/A
FOTP - 41
FOTP - 25
FOTP - 104
FOTP - 85
Cable Identification:
Buffer Tubes and Fibres are identified with
standard color coding:
1 - Blue
5 - Slate
9 - Yellow
2 - Orange
6 - White
10 - Violet
3 - Green
7 - Red
11 - Rose
4 - Brown
8 - Black
12 - Aqua
Hardware:
Sheet Metal (SM) screws of required sizes, plugs, wooden gitties, clips etc.
Method of Construction:
As per the method of construction of PVC armoured cable. But these cables shall be tagged
as “OFC” every metre length & can be laid in trench side by side. For underground cable
laying cable indicator mentioning “Optical Fibre Cable” is a must.
Mode of measurement: Executed quantity shall be measured on running meter
basis.
Specifications
Page 245
Tender No: -1800000008
D)
Fibre Patch Cord (FPC)
General:
All material shall conform to relevant standard as per IEEE, EIA/TIA, CENELEC
Scope:
Specification No (WG-COC/FPC)
The cord is to be used to connect fibre optic equipment to fibre optic cross-connects,
interconnects & information outlets. (e.g. Remote Ethernet switch with fibre optic module
can be connected to another same type of switch or Fibre Optic Switch.)
Material:
FRLS duplex fibre patch cord/ pigtails 1mtr in length with LC/ SC/ ST termination
consisting of 1.6mm/ 3.0mm dia. 62.5um fibre with minimum bandwidth of 200MHz- km
at 850nm & 500MHz at 1300nm with following specifications, as per table 1.12/4.
Table 1.12/4
Sr.
No
.
Outside dia.
1
1.6mm: 1.6mm x
3.3mm
Cable
retentio
n
strengt
h
50
Newton
2
3.0mm: 3.0mm x
5.9mm
50
Newton
Minimum
Bend Radius
Maximum Cordage
Tensile Load
Loaded:
5.1cm
Unloaded:
3.5cm
Loaded:
5.8cm
Unloaded:
3.5cm
Short Term : 3111
Newton
Long Term: 93 Newton
Short Term :
Newton
Long
Term:
Newton
400
120
1. The fiber-optic patch cord shall be configurable with standard LC, SC, and ST
terminations, and shall be available in either 1.6 mm or 3.0 mm duplex zip cord.
2. The 1.6 mm cordage shall exceed the requirements for larger diameter cordage
and allows at least twice as many fibers to be installed in a cabinet.
3. The duplex cordage shall be 1.6 mm by 3.5 mm and have two single fiber cords
joined together with a web.
4. The connector shall have a pull-proof design that helps prevent accidental
disconnects and helps to assure optimal performance of equipment.
5. Custom hybrid patch cords shall also be available, to simplify migration to
industry-leading connectors.
6. All fibers shall be Differential Mode Delay (DMD) tested by using a highresolution test bench that exceeds the FOTP-220 standards and shall be
independently certified by UL®.
7. All patch cords shall be a distinctive aqua color for positive identification.
Physical Specifications:
Minimum Bandwidth
Attenuation:
Specifications
@ 850 nm: 4700 MHz-km (laser), 3500 MHzkm (OFL)
@ 1300 nm: 500 MHz-km (laser), 500 MHzkm (OFL)
3.0 dB/Km @ 850 nm, 1.0dB/Km @ 1300 nm
Page 246
Tender No: -1800000008
Cable Outside
Duplex: 1.6 x 3.7 mm
Diameter:
Min. Bend Radius:
2.5 cm
Operating Temperature
-20 to 70 ºC
Range:
Average Connection
LC = 0.1 dB
Loss:
Return Loss Minimum: -20 dB
Tip Material:
Ceramic
Mating Durability for:
500 Reconnects
Insertion Loss Change: <0.2 dB
Temperature Stability: -40 to + 75 ºC
Insertion Loss Change: <0.3 dB
Method of Construction:
Supplying & plugging FRLS duplex fibre patch cord/ pigtails into the LC/ SC/ ST
termination of LIU & fibre module/ fibre switch port complete.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis
1.13
Networking Components
(NWC)
Switches/ Routers
A) Web Smart Power Over Ethernet Switch
(ENS)
General:
All material shall conform to relevant standard as per IEEE802.3af PoE
Scope:
Specification No:WG-NWC/ENS)
Preferred in Wireless LAN obviating the use of external power supply for Access Points
Material:
Ethernet Switch:
Ethernet Switch with PoE: 24 ports PoE (Power Over Ethernet) with IEEE 802.3af PoE
protocol, each PoE to supply up to 15.4 Watts for connecting devices such as Access Point
needing additional power, 10/100Base-Tx 24 Fast Ethernet ports, 1000 Base-T 4 ports, 2
combo ports for flexible copper/fibre Gigabit connections, VLAN web manageable switch
with rack mountable clips, screws, console utility software, mechanisms to detect an attack
against the central processing unit of the switch and to take corrective action on
attacking interface.
1. Feature-rich solution with functionality enabling by Secure Always On access to
mission critical applications
2. High performance switch architecture and stacking performance delivering
320Gbps
3. High-density 10/100 ports for edge connectivity
4. Two combo 10/100/1000/SFP uplinks ports per switch for high speed gigabit or
low speed connections such as 100FX
Specifications
Page 247
Tender No: -1800000008
5. Simplified converged network deployments through support for Power over
Ethernet (PoE), advanced Quality of Service (Quos), and auto-configuration of
ports with IP Handsets & Wireless Access Points
Technical Specifications:
• 10/100 Power over Ethernet ports: 24 per switch
• 10/100/1000/SFP Gigabit ports: 2 per switch
• SFP support: SX, LX, XD, ZX, CWDM, 100FX,& T1
• Resilient Stacking: up to 8 units / 192 ports per stack
• Stacking ports: 2 built-in stacking ports per switch
• Total stacking capacity: 320 Gbps
• Individual switch packet throughput: 6.6 Mpps
• Individual switch capacity: 48.8Gbps
• Concurrent VLANs: 256
• Jumbo Frame Support on Gigabit ports
• Maximum MAC addresses: 8,000
Standards Compliance:
• IEEE 802.3 10BASE-T Ethernet
• IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-TX Fast Ethernet
• IEEE (ANSI) 802.3 Auto-negotiation
• IEEE 802.3z Gigabit Ethernet
• IEEE 802.3x Flow Control
• IEEE 802.1Q VLANs
• IEEE 802.1p Priority Queues
• IEEE 802.1D Spanning Tree
• IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree
• IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree Groups
• IEEE 802.3ad Link Aggregation
• IEEE 802.1X Ethernet Authentication Protocol
• IEEE 802.3AB Link Layer Discovery Protocol
• RFC 783 Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP)
• RFC 791/950 Internet Protocol (IP)
• RFC 792 Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP)
• RFC 826 Address Resolution Protocol (ARP)
• RFC 854 Telnet Server and Client
• RFC 951 / 1542 BOOTP
• RFC 1112 Internet Group Management Protocol v1
• RFC 1215 SNMP Traps Definition
• RFC 1271 / 1757 / 2819 RMON
• RFC 1361 / 1769 Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP)
• RFC 1493 Bridge MIB
• RFC 1573 / 2863 Interface MIB
• RFC 1643 / 2665 Ethernet MIB
• RFC 1905 / 3416 SNMP
• RFC 1906 / 3417 SNMP Transport Mappings
• RFC 1907 / 3418 SNMP MIB
• RFC 1945 HTTP v1.0
• RFC 2011 SNMP v2 MIB for IP
• RFC 2012 SNMP v2 MIB for TCP
• RFC 2013 SNMP v2 MIB for UDP
• RFC 2138 RADIUS
• RFC 2236 Internet Group Management Protocol v2
• RFC 2474 Differentiated Services Support
• RFC 2570 / 3410 SNMPv3
• RFC 2571 / 3411 SNMP Frameworks
• RFC 2572 / 3412 SNMP Message Processing
Specifications
Page 248
Tender No: -1800000008
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
RFC 2573 / 3413 SNMPv3 Applications
RFC 2574 / 3414 SNMPv3 USM
RFC 2575 / 3415 SNMPv3 VACM
RFC 2576 / 3584 Co-existence of SNMP v1/v2/v3
RFC 2660 HTTPS (Secure Web Server)
RFC 2665 Ethernet MIB
RFC 2863 Interfaces Group MIB
RFC 2674 Q-Bridge MIB
RFC 2737 Entity MIBv2
RFC 2819 RMON MIB
Additional features:
• Customizable Auto-negotiation Advertisements (CANA)
• Distributed Link Aggregation Groups
• Virtual Link Aggregation Control Protocol (VLACP)
• Single IP address for stack management
• Resilient fail-safe stacking
• Automatic Unit Replacement (Configuration and Software)
• Automatic Detection Automatic Configuration (ADAC)
• 802.1X Single Host Single Authentication
• 802.1X Single Host Multiple Authentication
• 802.1X Multiple Host Multiple Authentication
• 802.1X Guest VLAN
• 802.1X Non-EAP (NEAP) access
• DSCP-based Recognition, Marking and Recolouring
• Ingress and Egress Port Mirroring
• Broadcast and Multicast Rate limiting per port
• ASCII Configuration File
• Web, NNCLI, JDM
• SSHv2 and SNMPv3 secure management support
• Secure Network Access (NSNA) support
• BPDU Filter
• Stack Monitor
• USB software and ASCII configure upload
• New unit quick to configure
Resiliency Features:
• Should support a technology which will allow multiple physical network links between
two network switches and another device (which could be another switch or a network
device such as a server) to be treated as a single logical link and load balance the traffic
across all available links
• Generally all the physical ports in the link aggregation group must reside on the same
switch. It should also support protocols remove this limitation by allowing the physical
ports to be split between two switches.
• Load balancing mechanism should not be round robin or dynamic which may not work
with applications like Voice & Video, where session persistence is must.
Main Objective of above features is to achieve Active-Active Cluster Switching. And achieve
sub second fail over in case of Link failure & Device Failure, which will result in 99.999%
uptime.
Power over Ethernet specifications:
• 802.3af compliant with Power classification support
• Signal pair power delivery
• Maximum 15.4 watts per port
• Maximum DTE Power AC 320 watts
• Maximum DTE Power AC + RPS 740 watts
Specifications
Page 249
Tender No: -1800000008
Electrical specifications:
• Power supply: AC 100-240V, 50-60Hz
• Input current at 110v: 7.1A
• Input current at 220v: 3.6A
• Max power consumption: 470W
Dimensions:
• Width: 438.2mm (17.25 in)
• Height: 1RU 43.7mm (1.72 in)
• Depth: 368.3mm (14.5 in)
Environmental specifications:
• Operating temperature: 0 to 50 degrees C
• Storage temperature: -25 to 55 degrees C
• Relative humidity: 10% - 90%vnon-condensing
• Peak noise level: 42.3 dB
• Thermal rating: 375 BTU/hr
• Calculated MTBF: 242,552 hrs
Safety Agency Approvals:
• IEC 60950 International CB Certification
• EN 60950 European Certification
• UL60950 US certification
• CSA22.2, #60950 Canadian Certification
• NOM Mexican Certification
Electromagnetic Emissions and Immunity:
• CISPR22, Class A/CISPR24 International
• EN55022, Class A/EN55024 European
• FCC, Past 15, Class A US Certification
• ICES-003, Class A Canadian Certification
• AN/NZS 3548 Australian/NZ Certification
• BSMI - Taiwan - CNS 13438, Class A
• MIC - Korea - MIC, No. 2001-116
• VCCI Class A Japanese Certification
Hardware: Chromium plated brass nuts & bolts with special type of U shaped square
washers of required sizes.
Method of construction:
The Ethernet switch fitted with rack mountable clips shall be fixed in U Rack (Networking
Cabinet) with 4 nos. of chromium plated brass nuts & bolts. The switch shall be configured
for TCP/IP addresses for switch IP & Gateway.
Mode of measurement: Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis
B) 24 Port Gigabit Switch (GBS)
Scope:
Specification No (WG-NWC/GBS)
To be used in wired LAN connections.
Material:
Gigabit Ethernet Switch:
Specifications
Page 250
Tender No: -1800000008
24 nos. of 10/100/1000 Base-T Gigabit ports, 2 or 4 combo SFP slots for flexible fibre
backbone, VLAN, manageable, 19”standard rack mountable, auto detection of MDI/MDIX,
Layer 2, Safeguard Engine to protect against traffic flooding caused by virus/worm
outbreaks with rack mountable clips, screws, console utility software.
1. Feature-rich solution with functionality enabling by Secure Always On access to mission
critical applications
2. High performance switch architecture and stacking performance delivering 320Gbps
3. High-density 10/100/1000 ports for edge connectivity
4. Shared SFP uplinks ports per switch for gigabit fibre connectivity
Technical Specifications:
• 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports: 24 per switch
• SFP Gigabit ports: 4 per switch
• SFP support: SX, LX, XD, ZX, CWDM, 100FX & T1
• Resilient Stacking: up to 8 units
• Stacking ports: 2 built-in ports per switch
• Total stacking capacity: 320 Gbps
• Individual switch packet throughput: 36 Mpps
• Individual switch capacity: 88 Gbps
• Concurrent VLANs: 256
• Jumbo Frame Support on Gigabit ports
• Maximum MAC addresses: 8,000
Standards compliance:
• IEEE 802.3 10BASE-T Ethernet
• IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-TX Fast Ethernet
• IEEE (ANSI) 802.3 Auto-negotiation
• IEEE 802.3z Gigabit Ethernet
• IEEE 802.3x Flow Control
• IEEE 802.1Q VLANs
• IEEE 802.1p Priority Queues
• IEEE 802.1D Spanning Tree
• IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree
• IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree Groups
• IEEE 802.3ad Link Aggregation
• IEEE 802.1X Ethernet Authentication Protocol
• IEEE 802.3AB Link Layer Discovery Protocol
• RFC 783 Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP)
• RFC 791/950 Internet Protocol (IP)
• RFC 792 Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP)
• RFC 826 Address Resolution Protocol (ARP)
• RFC 854 Telnet Server and Client
• RFC 951 / 1542 BOOTP
• RFC 1112 Internet Group Management Protocol v1
• RFC 1215 SNMP Traps Definition
• RFC 1271 / 1757 / 2819 RMON
• RFC 1361 / 1769 Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP)
• RFC 1493 Bridge MIB
• RFC 1573 / 2863 Interface MIB
• RFC 1643 / 2665 Ethernet MIB
• RFC 1905 / 3416 SNMP
• RFC 1906 / 3417 SNMP Transport Mappings
• RFC 1907 / 3418 SNMP MIB
• RFC 1945 HTTP v1.0
• RFC 2011 SNMP v2 MIB for IP
Specifications
Page 251
Tender No: -1800000008
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
RFC 2012 SNMP v2 MIB for TCP
RFC 2013 SNMP v2 MIB for UDP
RFC 2138 RADIUS
RFC 2236 Internet Group Management Protocol v2
RFC 2474 Differentiated Services Support
RFC 2570 / 3410 SNMPv3
RFC 2571 / 3411 SNMP Frameworks
RFC 2572 / 3412 SNMP Message Processing
RFC 2573 / 3413 SNMPv3 Applications
RFC 2574 / 3414 SNMPv3 USM
RFC 2575 / 3415 SNMPv3 VACM
RFC 2576 / 3584 Co-existence of SNMP v1/v2/v3
RFC 2660 HTTPS (Secure Web Server)
RFC 2665 Ethernet MIB
RFC 2863 Interfaces Group MIB
RFC 2674 Q-Bridge MIB
RFC 2737 Entity MIBv2
RFC 2819 RMON MIB
Additional features:
• Customizable Auto-negotiation Advertisements (CANA)
• Distributed Link Aggregation Groups
• Virtual Link Aggregation Control Protocol (VLACP)
• Nortel Multiple Spanning Tree groups
• Single IP address for stack management
• Resilient fail-safe stacking
• Automatic Unit Replacement (Configuration and Software)
• Automatic Detection Automatic Configuration (ADAC)
• 802.1X Single Host Single Authentication
• 802.1X Single Host Multiple Authentication
• 802.1X Multiple Host Multiple Authentication
• 802.1X Guest VLAN
• 802.1X Non-EAP (NEAP) access
• DSCP-based Recognition, Marking and Recolouring
• Ingress and Egress Port Mirroring
• Broadcast and Multicast Rate limiting per port
• ASCII Configuration File
• Web, NNCLI, JDM
• SSHv2 and SNMPv3 secure management support
• Nortel Secure Network Access (NSNA) support
• BPDU Filter
• Stack Monitor
• USB software and ASCII configure upload
• New unit quick to configure
Resiliency Features:
• Should support a technology which will allow multiple physical network links between
two network switches and another device (which could be another switch or a network
device such as a server) to be treated as a single logical link and load balance the traffic
across all available links
• Generally all the physical ports in the link aggregation group must reside on the same
switch. It should also support protocols remove this limitation by allowing the physical
ports to be split between two switches.
• Load balancing mechanism should not be round robin or dynamic which may not work
with applications like Voice & Video, where session persistence is must.
• Main Objective of above features is to achieve Active-Active Cluster Switching .And
achieve sub second failover in case of Link failure & Device Failure which will result in
99.999% uptime
Specifications
Page 252
Tender No: -1800000008
Electrical specifications:
• Power supply: AC 100-240V, 50-60Hz
• Input current at 110v: 1.3A
• Input current at 220v: 0.7A
• Max power consumption: 150W
Dimensions:
• Width: 438.2mm (17.25 in)
• Height: 1RU 43.7mm (1.72 in)
• Depth: 368.3mm (14.5 in)
•
Environmental specifications:
• Operating temperature: 0 to 50 degrees C
• Storage temperature: -25 to 55 degrees C
• Relative humidity10% - 90% non-condensing
• Peak noise level: 42.4 dB
• Thermal rating: 290 BTU/hr
• Calculated MTBF: 312,001 hrs
Safety Agency Approvals:
• IEC 60950 International CB Certification
• EN 60950 European Certification
• UL60950 US certification
• CSA22.2, #60950 Canadian Certification
• NOM Mexican Certification
Electromagnetic Emissions and Immunity:
• CISPR22, Class A/CISPR24 International
• EN55022, Class A/EN55024 European
• FCC, Past 15, Class A US Certification
• ICES-003, Class A Canadian Certification
• AN/NZS 3548 Australian/NZ Certification
• BSMI - Taiwan - CNS 13438, Class A
• MIC - Korea - MIC, No. 2001-116
• VCCI Class A Japanese Certification
Hardware:
Chromium plated brass nuts & bolts with special type of U shaped square washers of
required sizes.
Method of construction:
The Ethernet switch fitted with rack mountable clips shall be fixed in U Rack (Networking
Cabinet) with 4 nos. of chromium plated brass nuts & bolts. The switch shall be configured
for TCP/IP addresses for switch IP & Gateway.
Mode of measurement: Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis
C) Broadband ADSL Router (ADSL)
General:
All material shall conform to relevant standard as per ITU G.992.2 & RFC
Scope:
Specifications
Page 253
Tender No: -1800000008
Specification No (WG-NWC/ADSL)
For broadband internet connections to individual computer or Wired LAN/ Wireless
LAN.
Material:
Broadband ADSL Router:
ADSL2+ broadband router with PPP(Point-to-Point Protocol), DHCP support, TCP/IP,
downstream up to 24Mbps, upstream up to 1Mbps, RJ-11 for ADSL line, RJ-11 for phone
line with Patch cord 3 metre in length, 10/100 Base-T port, USB 1.1 & 9V adaptor with
UTP( Ethernet) Patch Cord, USB 2.0 patch cord, USB driver software
•
•
•
Designed for the small to medium business - Simpler than enterprise class routers
but more robust than consumer grade routers
Secure - Good security and heavy encryption, but easy to implement; simple yet statefull
firewall with simple filters
Simplified architecture - Has a smaller processor that does not require a noisy fan,
making it small and attractive for in-office or desk top installation
Note: Provision of Network Interface Card (NIC) shall be made for computer without
built in NIC.
Input/Output Requirements:
• WAN 1- 10/100 Base-T Auto-sensing - RJ-45
• LAN -4 Port Ethernet 10/100 Base-T Auto-sensing switch – RJ- 45 (fifth port for internal
connection)
VPN Services:
•
Minimum 10 IPSec tunnels
• IKEv1 Main Mode
• IKEv1 Aggressive Mode
• Up to 3 IP pools for Client
• 16 Split networks configured
• 64 Subnets specified for Split (inverse) network
• Diffie-Hellman Group 1, 2
• IPSec Tunnel Mode
• ESP
• Support for Dynamically addressed peers – ABOT
• NAT Traversal
• IPSec Transport Mode
• Keep Alive – For branch office and client tunnels
•
VPN Router Client termination
Cryptographic Services:
•
DES
• 3DES
• Data authentication SHA-1
• Data authentication MD-5
• AES -128
• AES – 192, 256 – Branch Office
Authentication Services:
• Pre-shared secrets
• External RADIUS support
• 802.1x/EAP support
Specifications
Page 254
Tender No: -1800000008
Firewall:
•
Statefull Packet Inspection
•
IP application Inspection (FTP, SMTP, HTTP, Telnet, SSL, DNS, etc.)
•
Denial of Service (DoS) detection and prevention
•
URL Filtering
•
Content filtering
ALG’s:
•
CU-SeeME
•
FTP
•
SIP
•
H.323
•
IPSEC
•
VDiLive
•
RealAudio
IP
•
•
•
•
•
•
Services: NAT:
NAT, Many to One, Static, Many to Many, Many One-to-One
Port Forwarding
IPSec pass-through
SIP and H.323 ALG’s
Cone NAT
NAT support for tunnel Mode IPSec tunnels
IP
•
•
•
•
Services: Routing:
Clear text routing
Static
RIP v1
RIP v2
IP
•
•
•
•
Services: DHCP:
Client
Server
Relay
Static mapping – 8 IP address lease mapping
IP Services: DNS:
• DNS Proxy
• Dynamic DNS
IP Services: NTP:
• RFC-867, 868, 1305
Layer Two Protocols:
• PPPoE
• IP masquerade/ alias – Configurable MAC address
Performance and Scaling:
• 20 Mbps 3DES throughput w/ 1500 byte packets
• 10 IPSec tunnels
Management:
• TFTP/FTP firmware upload
• RS232 console port
• Built-in Diagnostic tool
• SNMP
Specifications
Page 255
Tender No: -1800000008
•
•
•
•
•
Web GUI
CLI (Command Line Interpreter)
Remote management (FTP, Telnet, Web)
Backup and restore configuration via FTP and Web
WAN and LAN Ports:
The WAN and LAN ports are 10/100-base T Ethernet ports, without PoE
Two-Port Router:
• The router is based on the Intel IXP-425 network processor, running at 266 MHz. It will
have 64 Mbytes of FLASH, and 32 Mbytes of RAM.
5-Port Switch:
• The 5-port layer-2 switch uses the Infineon 6996i chip
Serial Port:
• The serial port provides a DCE connection that can be used for either WAN back-up or for
installing software into a router that has a corrupted software load
Power Supply:
• The router will be powered by 19 volts DC. The power supply circuit block will convert
this supply to the supply voltages needed by the rest of the circuitry. The Business Secure
Router 222 uses a universal wall-mount power supply.
Method of construction:
The ADSL Router shall be connected directly to the incoming phone line without any parallel
telephone, then to telephone to avoid breaks in Internet connection, 9V DC adaptor
connected to provide power supply, UTP patch cord for connections between router Ethernet
port to computer/ switch. The router shall be configured as per the requirements of
Broadband Internet Service Provider. As far as possible use of USB port shall be avoided.
Mode of measurement: Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis
Wireless LAN
D) Indoor LAN Dipole Antenna (DPA)
General:
All material shall conform to relevant standard as per IEEE.
Scope:
Specification No (WG-NWC/DPA)
To enhance the signal strength of Access Point & Wireless PCI adaptor/ Router up to 500
metres.
Material:
Indoor LAN Dipole Antenna:
2.4 GHz, 5dBi gain, 50 ohms Omni-Directional Indoor Antenna outer covering made
from polyurethane, polycarbonate swivel mechanism with built-in connector (RPSMA & Reverse SMA/ TNC) for 802.11b/g wireless network
Method of Construction:
Specifications
Page 256
Tender No: -1800000008
Supplying & erecting 2.4 GHz, 5dBi Omni-Directional Antenna to be screwed to Access
point/ wireless PCI adaptor complete.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis.
E) Omni Directional Antenna (ODA)
Scope:
Specification No (WG-NWC/ODA)
To enhance the signal strength of Access Point & Wireless PCI adaptor/ Router at
difficult to reach or far places.
Material:
Omni Directional Antenna:
2.4 GHz, 4dBi gain, Collinear, 50 ohms Omni-Directional Indoor Antenna covering
horizontal 360 deg. vertical 36 deg. with 1.5m ULA-316 fixed cable, connectors (RP-SMA &
Reverse SMA/ TNC), sturdy magnetic base stand to place it on flat surfaces
&
can be mounted on wall for 802.11b/g wireless network
Method of Construction:
Supplying & erecting 2.4 GHz, 4dBi Omni-Directional Antenna on wall or on the desktop or
suitable place which shall be at least 150mm away from electronic devices
such
as
computers, TV, video equipment & audio/video tapes.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis.
F) Aesthetic Omni Directional Antenna (AODA)
Scope:
Specification No (WG-NWC/AODA)
To enhance the signal strength of Access Point & Wireless PCI adaptor/ Router at
difficult
to reach or far places.
Material:
Aesthetic Omni Directional Antenna:
2.4 GHz, 20W (cw) power handling, 40 deg down tilt, 50 ohms Omni-Directional Aesthetic
Indoor Ceiling Antenna with ULA-316 fixed cable, connectors (RP-SMA & Reverse
SMA/
TNC) for 802.11b/g wireless network.
S No. Type
Colour
Gain (dBi)
Coverage (deg)
Horizonta
Vertical
Cable
(mtr)
Use
1
Glob
e
White
4
360
63
2.0
Places with false
ceiling
2
Rod
GrayWhite
5
360
32
3.0
Any other place
Hardware: Sheet Metal (SM) screws of required sizes, plugs, wooden gitties, etc.
Method of Construction
Specifications
Page 257
Tender No: -1800000008
Supplying & erecting 2.4 GHz, Omni-Directional Indoor Aesthetic Ceiling Antenna on
ceiling at suitable place fixed with required size of SM screws, plugs/ gitties etc.
complete.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis.
1.13 Networking Accessories (NAS)
LAN Accessories
A) UTP connector (RJ-45) (UTPC)
General:
All material shall conform to relevant standard as per TIA/EIA 568-B2-1.
Scope:
Specification No (WG-NAS/UTPC)
To make MDIX (Cross) patch cord required for cascade connections of switches &
routers.
Material:
UTP connector:
Assembly of Gold over nickel contacts with 1.5A current carrying capacity, 30V with 15milli
ohms contact resistance, 8P8C connection easy to crimp with crimping tool in polycarbonate
UL94V housing.
Method of construction:
The UTP cable shall be spliced, untwisted not more than 12mm, inserted into the
connector with sequence as shown in the diagram ____ as per EIA/TIA 568 B.2-1 &
crimped firmly with crimping tool.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis.
B) Information Outlet (Ethernet) (IO)
General:
All material shall conform to relevant standard as per TIA/EIA 568-B2-1.
Scope:
Specification No:(WG-NAS/IO)
For connecting computers to wired LAN or external wireless Ethernet interface in Wireless
LAN.
Material:
Information Outlet Flush/ Surface type:
Spring shuttered front access, high impact plastic body FR grade with high performance
unshielded RJ-45 keystone jack (conforming to EIA/TIA 568-B.2-1 Cat 6), 15 milliohms
Specifications
Page 258
Tender No: -1800000008
contact resistance, gold over nickel spring contact, 1.5A current carrying capacity, with
T568A/T568B wiring option, insulation displacement connector for cable crimping to accept
22-26AWG solid wire for connections up to Gigabit Ethernet.
1. All Category 6 outlets shall meet or exceed Category 6 transmission requirements
for connecting hardware, as specified in TIA/EIA 568-B.2-1 Commercial Building
Telecommunications Cabling Standard and ISO/IEC 11801:2002 Second Edition.
2. The Category 6 outlets shall be backward compatible with Category 5E, 5 and 3
cords and cables.
3. The Category 6 outlets shall be of a universal design supporting T568 A & B
wiring.
4. The Category 6 outlets shall be capable of being in a modular patching situation
or as a modular telecommunication outlet (TO) supporting current 10BASE-T,
Token Ring, 100 Mbps TP-PMD, 155 Mbps ATM, 622 Mbps ATM using parallel
transmission schemes and evolving high-speed, high-bandwidth applications,
including Ethernet, 1000BASE-T and 1.2 Gbps ATM.
5. The Category 6 outlets shall be capable of being installed at either a 45 or a 90
angle in any M-series modular faceplate, frame, or surface-mounted box avoiding
the need for special faceplates.
6. The Category 6 outlets shall have improved pair splitters and wider channel for
enhanced conductor placement. The outlet shall also have a low-profile wire cap,
which protects against contamination and secures the connection. Multicolored
identification labels shall be available to assure accurate installation.
Hardware:
Sheet Metal (SM) screws of required sizes, plugs, wooden gitties, etc.
Method of construction:
The Information outlet shall be fixed on the wall with sheet metal (SM) screws, rawl
plugs/wooden gitties and making due connections as per EIA/TIA 568 B.2-1 by splicing the
UTP cable, untwisted up to 12mm & punching the 4 pairs in the keystone
jack with
the help of punching tool. Not a single wire shall be left without connections.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis.
C) Keystone jack (RJ-45) (KJ)
Scope:
Specification No (WG-NAS/KJ)
Structured cabling, to provide connections to switch/ server from desktop computers/
Wireless devices in the patch panel.
Material:
Keystone jack:
High impact plastic body FR grade with high performance unshielded RJ-45 keystone jack
(conforming to EIA/TIA 568-B.2-1 Cat 6) , 20milli ohms contact resistance, gold over nickel
spring contact ,1.5A current carrying capacity, with T568A/T568B
wiring option,
insulation displacement connector for cable crimping to accept 2226AWG solid wire
for connections up to Gigabit Ethernet
Method of construction:
The keystone jack shall be fixed with the help of its self-locking arrangement in provided
patch panel before making due connection as per EIA/TIA 568 B.2-1 by splicing UTP cable,
untwisted up to 12mm & punching the 4 pairs in the keystone jack with the help of
punching tool. Not a single wire shall be left without connections.
Specifications
Page 259
Tender No: -1800000008
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis.
D) Patch Panel (PP)
Scope:
Specification No (WG-NAS/PP)
Structured cabling for the installation of keystone jacks.
Material:
Patch Panel:
Three piece structure including front panel, cable management plate with pre-fitted B-clip to
help in routing cables & metal case of 1.6mm thick Mild Steel powder coated
panel of
size 442.6mm X 44.5mm with the provision for 1 to 24 high density keystone
jacks
1. 24 and 48 port patch panels with 110 IDC connector terminations on rear
2. The patch shall have electrical performance guaranteed to meet or exceed TIA/EIA 568B.2-1 Category 6 and ISO/IEC Category 6/Class E specifications.
3. The panel shall have vertical and horizontal cord organizers available as to improve
patch cord management.
4. The panel shall be available in 24-port and 48-port configurations with universal A/B
labeling and 110 connector terminations on rear of panel allowing for quick and easy
installation of 22 to 24 AWG cable.
5. The patch panel shall have a black powder finish over high-strength steel.
6. The panel shall be equipped with a removable rear mounted cable management bar
and front and rear labels.
7. The panel shall be UL listed, UL-C certified and ACA approved.
8. The panel shall support network line speeds in excess of 1 gigabit per second and be
backward compatible with Category 5e, 5 and 3 cords and cables.
9. The Category 6 modular jack panels shall meet or exceed the Category 6/Class E
standards requirements in ISO/IEC 11801, CENLEC EN 50173 and TIA/EIA and shall
be UL Listed.
10. The panels shall be either wall or 19-inch rack mountable.
11. The panels shall meet the following specifications:
Performance Specifications:
High
Performance
Category 6
Patch Panel
Typical Worst
Insertion Loss
NEXT
PSNEXT
ELFEXT
PSELFEXT
Return Loss
Frequency Range
Pair Margin*
64.3%
6.6 dB
7.3 dB
6.4 dB
6.1 dB
6.6 dB
1-250 MHz
Solution
Premium
Performanc
e
Solution
Category 6 Channel
(4 Connectors)
Guaranteed
Guarantee
d
Margin**
Margin**
5.0%
7.5%
6.0 dB
7.0 dB
7.5 dB
8.5 dB
6.0 dB
8.0 dB
8.0 dB
10.0 dB
4.0 dB
4.0 dB
1-250 MHz
1-250 MHz
Operational Specifications:
Specifications
Page 260
Tender No: -1800000008
Operating Temperature
Range:
14°F to 140°F (-10°C to 60°C)
Storage Temperature Range: -40°F to 158°F (-40°C to 70°C)
Humidity:
95% (non-condensing)
Nominal Solid Conductor
Diameter:
0.025 to 0.020 in (0.64 to 0.51 mm) (22 to 24
AWG)
Nominal Stranded Conductor 0.025 to 0.020 in (0.64 to 0.51 mm (22 to 24
Diameter:
AWG)
Insulation Size:
0.042 in (1.08 mm) (22 to 24 AWG) Maximum
DOD
Insulation Types:
All plastic insulates (including PVC, irradiated
PVC, Polyethylene, Polypropylene,
PTF Polyurethane, Nylon, and FEP)
Insertion Life:
750 minimum insertions of an FCC 8-Position
Telecommunications Plug
Front Panel:
Black powder painted steel.
Plastic:
High-impact, flame retardant, UL-rated 94V-0
thermoplastic
Hardware:
Chromium plated brass nuts & bolts with special type of U shaped square washers of
required sizes.
Specifications
Page 261
Tender No: -1800000008
Method of construction
The Patch Panel shall be firmly secured in U Rack (Networking Cabinet) with 4 nos. of
chromium plated brass nuts & bolts.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis.
E) Lightguide Interconnect Unit (LIU)
General:
All material shall conform to relevant standard as per IEEE, EIA/TIA, CENELEC
Scope:
Specification No (WG-NAS/LIU)
To terminate the fibre backbone cables & the equipment cables.
Material:
Lightguide Interconnect Unit:
Wall mount type Lightguide Interconnect Unit with dimensions shown in the table, an
interfacing unit for fibre cables coming in from field & those originating from the
equipments. consisting of fibre spools to provide minimum bending radius & splice trays as
splice cover for pigtail splicing, two compartment design with adaptor panel
in
the
centre, compartmentalizing the box, complete aluminium housing, fully powder coated, two
doors enclosure with lock & key, rubber grommets at the cable entry
points for tight
sealing; Splice trays of 140 x125 x 10mm complete aluminium body fully powder coated
with provision for fibre splices fully cushioned splice holder containing grooves for fixing
splice protective sleeves; FR grade high impact resistance plastic two halves design
stackable sufficient room for excess cable.
Sr.
No.
Ports
Dimensions
Fibre
splices
1
12
300 x
80mm
300
x
6
2
24
370 x
80mm
350
x
12
Hardware:
Sheet Metal (SM) screws of required sizes, plugs, wooden gitties, etc.
Method of Construction:
Supplying & erecting Lightguide Interconnect Unit (LIU) on wall with cable termination
complete with sheet metal screws of required size, plugs/ wooden gitties.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis.
Fibre Accessories
F) ST “D" type Multimode Adaptor (MMA)
General:
All material shall conform to relevant standard as per IEEE, EIA/TIA 568-B.3
Specifications
Page 262
Tender No: -1800000008
Scope:
Specification No (WG-NAS/MMA)
To couple two connectors together i.e. to provide optical connectivity between fibre
cable & fibre switch/ fibre module.
Material:
ST "D" type multimode adaptor consists of Die cast zinc alloy housing Nickel plated,
thread type mounting, washer, nut, 2 nos. of rubber plugs, high precision mechanical
design Zirconium/ Phosphor Bronze sleeve having insertion loss < 0.3dB max, return loss <
-40dB.
Method of Construction:
Supplying & fixing ST " D" type with threads in provided Lightguide Interconnect Unit on
adaptor panel with nut & washer. The adaptor which is not in use shall be
plugged
with rubber plugs on both the sides to avoid dust accumulation in the
adaptor.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis.
G) ST “D" type Multimode Connector for LIU (MMA-LIU1)
General
All material shall conform to relevant standard as per IEEE, EIA/TIA 568-B.3
Scope:
Specification No (WG-NAS/MMA-LIU1)
To terminate the optical fibre cables in Lightguide Interconnect Unit (LIU)
Material:
1. ST "D" type Multimode connector consists of bayonet coupling, 2.5mm Zirconium Ferrule,
wide range of Ferrule selection, pre-radiused ferrule to provide fast physical contact
polishing, insertion loss < 0.5dB.
2. Distilled water (as lubricant & flushing agent between each polishing process).
3. Epoxy or Anaerobic adhesive (to bond the fibre inside the ferrule).
Tools to be used:
• Carbide cleaving tool with 30 deg tip (to cut off the fibre to the desired height above
the ferrule)
• Portable Microscope (200X minimum)
• Polishing kit (includes a polishing puck, pads & an assortment of diamond,
aluminium oxide & silica films)
Method of Construction:
The fibre shall be stripped & cleaved. Epoxy and polish connectors field-installed to
terminate backbone and distribution cables. Epoxy and polish fibre termination includes the
following steps: injecting the connector ferrule with epoxy, curing, scribing the protruding
fibre(s) from the ferrule, and polishing the ferrule end-face.
The
correct
amount of epoxy must be injected into the ferrule and cured for the
specified time and
temperature before the ferrule end-face is scribed and polished. Air bubbles shall be
avoided in the epoxy to avoid micro-bending and increased loss. The cured epoxy securely
Specifications
Page 263
Tender No: -1800000008
bonds the fibre to the ferrule over the operating temperature minimizing relative fibre
movement. The connectors with fibre cable shall be tested for loss test with Optical Time
Domain Reflectometer
(OTDR) & recording the results.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis.
H) No Epoxy No polish ST “D" type Multimode Connector (MMA-LIU2)
Scope:
Specification No (WG-NAS/MMA-LIU2)
To terminate the optical fibre cables in Lightguide Interconnect Unit (LIU)
Material:
ST "D" type Multimode connector with Factory pre-polished fibre stub end face
consists of bayonet coupling, 2.5mm Zirconium Ferrule, insertion loss < 0.5dB
Tools to be used:
Carbide cleaving tool with 30 deg tip (to cut off the fibre to the desired height above the
ferrule)
Method of Construction:
The no Epoxy no polish connectors field-installed to terminate backbone and
distribution
cables. The fibre shall be striped, cleaved, inserted into the connector & mechanically
secured. The connectors with fibre cable shall be tested for loss test with Optical Time
Domain Reflectometer (OTDR) & recording the results.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis.
I) Power over Ethernet Adaptor (PoEA)
General:
All material shall conform to relevant standard as per IEEE, TIA/EIA.
Scope:
Specification No (WG-NAS/PoEA)
To provide DC power supply to Ethernet devices, which do not have external/ built-in power
supply.
Material:
Power over Ethernet Adaptor with output voltage of 5V DC or 12V DC (selectable) with
input of 48V DC consists of Power over Ethernet base unit, Power over terminal unit, AC to
DC power adaptor, DC power cable & Ethernet cable.
Method of Construction:
Supplying & connecting Power over Ethernet Adaptor with all its connections of base
unit, terminal unit & AC to DC power adaptor for supplying power to Access Point,
Router or Wireless Ethernet Transceiver complete.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis.
J) Tri-Mode Dual band Wireless PCI LAN Card (LANC1)
Specifications
Page 264
Tender No: -1800000008
General:
All material shall conform to relevant standard as per IEEE 802.11 xs.
Scope:
Specification No (WG-NAS/LANC1)
Making provision of Wireless LAN connectivity for desktop PCs in difficult places where
signal strength is low.
Material:
Wireless PCI 32 bit interface LAN card covering 100 metres (indoor) transmission speed
of 108Mbps to connect 802.11b, 802.11g & 802.11a networks operating in two noninterfering
bands 2.4 GHz & 5GHz with 4dBi to 5dBi gain Omni directional dipole
antenna & driver.
Method of Construction:
Supplying & fixing Tri-mode dual band wireless PCI LAN card in desktop computer with
installation of driver & configuration for TCP/IP address complete.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis.
K) Wireless PCI LAN Card (LANC2)
General:
All material shall conform to relevant standard as per IEEE 802.11g.
Scope:
Specification No (WG-NAS/LANC2)
Making provision of Wireless LAN connectivity for desktop PCs.
Material:
Wireless PCI 32 bit interface LAN card to connect 802.11g networks operating in
2.4
GHz band covering 100 metres range (indoor), transmission speed of 54Mbpswith external
dipole antenna, detachable reverse SMA connector & driver.
Method of Construction:
Supplying & fixing Wireless PCI LAN card in desktop computer with installation of
driver & configuration for TCP/IP address complete.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis.
L) Manageable Wireless LAN Access Point (LAP1)
General:
All material shall conform to relevant standard as per IEEE 802.11b/g & IEEE802.3/u
Scope:
Specification No (WG-NAS/LAP1)
To provide wireless access to the WLAN network.
Specifications
Page 265
Tender No: -1800000008
Material:
Wireless Access Point consists of 108Mbps turbo mode handling heavy data payloads,
2dBi gain detachable dipole antenna with reverse SMA connector, external AC to DC 5V
adaptor.
Method of Construction:
Supplying & connecting Wireless Access Point with AC to DC adaptor to Ethernet
switch with due configuration for TCP/IP address complete.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis.
M) High Performance Manageable Wireless LAN Access Point with PoE (Power
Ethernet)
(LAP2)
General:
over
All material shall conform to relevant standard as per IEEE 802.11b/g, IEEE 802.3/u
IEEE 802.3af
&
Scope:
Specification No (WG-NAS/LAP2)
To provide high performance wireless access to the WLAN network.
Material:
Wireless Access Point consists of 108Mbps turbo mode handling heavy data payloads, dual
5dBi gain detachable dipole antenna with reverse SMA connectors, Power over Ethernet
10/100 Base-Tx port.
Note: To connect the Access Point, availability of PoE Ethernet Switch or PoE
adaptor is essential.
Method of Construction:
Supplying & connecting Wireless Access Point to PoE Ethernet switch or Ethernet Switch
through PoE Adaptor with due configuration for TCP/IP address complete.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis.
N) Dual Band High Performance Manageable Wireless LAN Access Point with PoE
over Ethernet) (LAN3)
(Power
Scope:
Specification No (WG-NAS/LAP3)
To provide high performance wireless access to the WLAN network.
Material:
Wireless Access Point consists of 108Mbps turbo mode handling heavy data
payloads
operating in 2.4 GHz & 5 GHz bands, dual 5dBi gain detachable dipole
antenna
with
reverse SMA connectors, Power over Ethernet 10/100 BaseTx
port.
Specifications
Page 266
Tender No: -1800000008
Note: To connect the Access Point, availability of PoE Ethernet Switch or PoE
adaptor is essential.
Method of Construction:
Supplying & connecting Wireless Access Point to PoE Ethernet switch or Ethernet
Switch through PoE Adaptor with due configuration for TCP/IP address complete.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis.
Specifications
Page 267
Tender No: -1800000008
CHAPTER-2
FITTINGS
2.1
Lamps
FG-LP
2.2
Indoor fittings
FG-IF
2.3
Outdoor fittings
FG-OF
2.4
Accessories for fittings
FG-AS
2.5
Brackets for Outdoor fittings
FG/BKT
2.6
Fans
FG-FN
2.7
Accessories for Fans
No Specs
2.8
Drawings
Chapter 2: Fittings (FG)
2.1 Lamps (FG-LP)
A)
GLS/MF Lamps (GLS)
Specification No (FG-LP/GLS)
Scope:
Supplying and fixing of GLS/MF lamps suitable for 230 volts, and of specified wattage,
conforming to IS: 418-1978. The lamp shall meet with the requirements mentioned in Table
No. 2.1/1
Material:
Lamp: Made of blown molten glass, and shall comply with IS: 418-1978.
Filament: Made from Tungsten.
Cap: Made from high grade Aluminium sheet either Bi pin/Edison screwed.
Method of Construction:
The lamp shall be fixed at specified location as directed by site engineer.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis. (i.e each)
Specifications
Page 268
Tender No: -1800000008
Table No. 2.1/1
Lamp Data for GLS lamps
Watts (W)
25
40
60
100
150
200
300
500
1000
1500
B)
Filling
Filament
Vacuum
Single Coil
Finish
Clear
Gas filled
Coiled coil
Luminous
flux (lm) at
230 V
220
425
700
1380
2080
2920
4700
8300
18600
29500
Fluorescent tubes (FT)
Specification No (FG-LP/FT)
Scope:
Supplying and fixing of fluorescent tube suitable for 230 volts, and of specified wattage,
conforming to IS: 2418 (Part 1 to 4) - 1977. The lamp shall meet with the requirements
mentioned in Table No. 2.1/2
Material:
Lamp: Based on Tri-phosphor fluorescent powder, with triple coil electrode & anode ring.
Cap: Bipin cap made from high grade Aluminium sheet.
Method of Construction:
The lamp shall be fixed at specified location as directed by site engineer.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis. (i.e. each)
Table No. 2.1/2
Lamp Data for Fluorescent tubes
Lamp
Type
Colour
Renderin
g Index
Tri-band
phospho
r 36 W
24 W
Normal
18 W
Normal
36 W
Specifications
Lam
p
watt
(W)
36
Lam
p
volt
(V)
103
Operating
lamp
current
(A)
0.44
Nominal
lumino
us flux
(lm)
3250
Life
(hrs)
82 %
Colou
r
Temp.
(0K)
6500
84 %
4000
36
103
0.44
3250
15000
86 %
85 %
85 %
54 %
2700
3000
3400
6500
36
24
24
18
103
58
0.44
0.37
3250
1350
1350
1015
15000
-
54 %
6500
36
103
0.44
2450
-
15000
Page 269
Tender No: -1800000008
C) High Pressure Mercury Vapour Lamps
(MV)
Specification No (FG-LP/MV)
Scope:
Supplying and fixing of High pressure Mercury vapour lamps suitable for 230 volts, and of
specified wattage, conforming to IS: 9900 (Part 1 to 4) - 1981. The lamp shall meet with the
requirements mentioned in Table No. 2.1/3
Material:
Lamp: Hard glass lamp made from high pressure mercury vapour with quartz discharge
tube in an ovoid shaped, internally phosphor coated outer shell, with average colour
temperature 3800 0K
Cap: 3 Pin BC/Screwed cap made from high grade Aluminium sheet.
Method of Construction:
The lamp shall be fixed at specified location as directed by site engineer.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis. (i.e. each)
Table No. 2.1/3
Lamp Data for High Pressure Mercury Vapour lamps
Lamp
Type
HPL-N
HPL-N
HPL-N
HPL-N
Colou
r
Temp.
(0K)
3800
3800
3800
3800
Lam
p
watt
(W)
80
125
250
400
Lamp
volt
(V)
115
125
135
140
D) ML Blended Lamp/Self Ballasted Lamp
Operating
lamp
current
(A)
0.80
1.15
2.0
3.2
Nominal
lumino
us flux
(lm)
3500
6250
13500
23000
Starti
ng
Time
(min.)
3.5
3.5
4.0
4.0
(MLL)
Specification No (FG-LP/MLL)
Scope:
Supplying and fixing of ML Blended lamps suitable for 230 volts, and of specified wattage,
conforming to IS: 9900 (Part 1 to 4) - 1981. The lamp shall meet with the requirements
mentioned in Table No. 2.1/4
Material:
Lamp: Hard glass lamp made from high pressure mercury vapour self ballasted with quartz
discharge tube in an ovoid shaped, with average colour temperature 3600 0K
Cap: 3 Pin BC cap made from high grade Aluminium sheet.
Method of Construction:
The lamp shall be fixed at specified location as directed by site engineer.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis. (i.e. each)
Table No. 2.1/4
Lamp Data for High Pressure Mercury Vapour lamps
Specifications
Page 270
Tender No: -1800000008
Lamp
Type
MLL
Colou
r
Temp.
(0K)
3600
Lam
p
watt
(W)
160
Min.
mains
Voltag
e (V)
190
Lamp
current
(A)
0.72
Nominal
lumino
us flux
(lm)
2900
Average
life (hrs)
5000
E) High Pressure Sodium Vapour Lamps (SV)
Specification No (FG-LP/SV)
Scope:
Supplying and fixing of High pressure Sodium vapour lamps suitable for 230 volts, and of
specified wattage, conforming to IS: 9974 (Part 1 & 2) - 1981. The lamp shall meet with the
requirements mentioned in Table No. 2.1/5
Material:
Lamp: High pressure sodium vapour lamps with a polycrystalline translucent Aluminium
discharge tube enclosed in an ovoid or tubular outer glass envelope. The ovoid shell shall
have internally coated with uniform layer of diffusing powder applied electro statically. The
discharge tube shall contain an amalgam of mercury and sodium along with Xenon gas as
starting aid.
Cap: Screwed cap made from high grade Aluminium sheet.
Method of Construction:
The lamp shall be fixed at specified location as directed by site engineer.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis. (i.e. each)
Table No. 2.1/5
Lamp Data for High Pressure Sodium Vapour lamps
Lamp
Type
Lamp
watt (W)
SON
SON
SON-T
SON
SON-T
SON
SON-T
70
150
150
250
250
400
400
Average
Lamp volt
(V)
90
100
100
100
100
105
105
Average lamp
current (A)
Nominal luminous
flux (lm)
1.0
1.8
1.8
3.0
3.0
4.4
4.4
5800
13500
14000
25000
27000
47000
47500
F) Metal Halide Lamps (MHL)
Specification No (FG-LP/MHL)
Scope:
Supplying and fixing of Metal Halide lamps single/Double ended, suitable for 230 volts, and
of specified wattage. The lamp shall meet with the requirements mentioned in Table No.
2.1/6
Material:
Lamp: High pressure metal halide gas discharged lamps with iodide additives indium,
thallium and sodium in the mercury discharge. The discharge tube shall be enclosed in an
Specifications
Page 271
Tender No: -1800000008
ovoid, hard glass outer bulb with fluorescent coating (HPI-BU) or clear tubular outer hard
glass envelope, (HPI-T).
•
Colour Temperature :
:
HPI-BU - -> 4300 0K
HPI-T - -> 4300 0K to 4900 0K
Cap: Pin type/Screwed cap made from high grade Aluminium sheet.
Method of Construction:
The lamp shall be fixed at specified location as directed by site engineer.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis. (i.e. each)
Lamp
Type
Lam
p
watt
(W)
Minimu
m
Voltage
for
Ignition
(V)
HPI-BU
HPI-BU
HPI-T
HPI-T
HPI-T
HPI-T
250
400
70
150
250
400
200
200
200
200
200
200
Table No. 2.1/6
Lamp Data for Metal Halide lamps
Average Average Lamp
CRI
lamp
lamp
starti
(Ra)
voltage
current ng
after
after
curre
100
100
nt (A)
burning burning
hours
hours
(V)
(A)
128
2.2
3.2
69
125
3.4
6.0
69
90
1.0
1.4
80
98
1.8
2.4
85
128
2.2
3.9
65
125
3.4
6.0
65
Average
lumino
us flux
after
100
burning
hours
(lm)
17000
30600
5500
12100
17000
30500
G) Compact Fluorescent Lamps (CFL)
Specification No (FG-LP/CFL)
Scope:
Supplying and fixing of Compact Fluorescent lamps either with adapter (Retrofit – Instant
Start type) or without (Pin type-PL tube to be used with ballast), suitable for 230 volts, and
of specified wattage. The lamp shall have life of 10000 burning hours and shall meet with
the requirements mentioned in Table No. 2.1/7. All lamps shall have pf above 0.9.
Material:
Lamp: Based on fluorescent powder, with electrode.
Cap: Pin type/Screwed cap made from high grade Aluminium sheet.
Method of Construction:
The lamp shall be fixed at specified location as directed by site engineer.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis. (i.e. each)
Table No. 2.1/7
Lamp Data for Compact Fluorescent lamps
Mounti
ng type
Specifications
Lam
p
watt
Colou
r
Temp.
Luminous
flux (lm)
Efficacy
(lm/W)
Average
life in
(hrs)
Page 272
Tender No: -1800000008
Retrofit
Retrofit
Retrofit
Retrofit
Retrofit
Retrofit
Retrofit
Retrofit
Retrofit
PL
PL
PL
PL
PL
PL
PL
PL
PL
PL
PL
PL
PL
(W)
13
13
13
18
18
18
25
25
25
9
11
15
15
20
20
23
23
5
5
7
7
11
(0K)
5000
6000
2700
5000
6000
2700
5000
6000
2700
2700
2700
2700
5000
2700
5000
2700
5000
2700
4000
2700
4000
4000
2.2
575
575
550
850
850
800
1100
1100
1050
400
600
900
800
1200
1100
1500
1350
250
250
400
400
900
44
44
42
47
47
45
44
44
42
44
55
60
53
60
55
65
59
50
50
57
57
91
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
8000
8000
8000
8000
8000
Indoor fittings (FG/IDF)
A) Bulkhead Fitting
Scope:
Specification No: (FG-IDF/BHF)
Supplying and erecting bulkhead fitting with fine finished cast Aluminium enamel painted
body with 20 mm conduit entry and clear glass / prismatic glass with guard and complete
water tight hinged with locking screw porcelain holder to house CFL up to 5/9/11 Watt
erected in position on polished double wooden block.
Material:
Bulkhead fitting:
Bulk Head Fitting shall be made from pressure dia-cast aluminium LM6 body in stove
enamel finish and fitted with a heat resistant elegant glass cover through a gasket. A two pin
BC porcelain holder for GLS or a CFL holder shall be fitted inside the housing. An electrogalvanized MS wire guard for protection against pilferage. Glass and wire guard assembly
shall be hinged to the body for ease of
maintenance. The bulkhead shall be suitable for
Integral type CFL, with cable entry through one no.3/4” B.S. threaded inlet. Incoming
wires shall be terminated on the
lamp holder terminals in case of GLS and in the
terminal block in case of CFL. Two lugs with slots for facilitating wall/ceiling mounting.
The fitting shall be I.P. 54
protected.
Wooden board: As per (WG-PW/PW) 1.6 specified in chapter for Point wiring.
Hardware: Sheet Metal (SM) screws, washers, plugs / wooden gutties, etc.
Method of Construction:
The Bulkhead shall be mounted on polish double wooden block with required size of
screws, duly wired.
SM
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis. (i.e.each)
Specifications
Page 273
Tender No: -1800000008
B) Mirror Light Fitting Suitable for CFL 9/13/18 watts (ML1)
Scope:
Specification No (FG-IDF/ML1)
Supplying and erecting luminaries suitable for 9/13/18 watt CFL lamp made of
engineering Plastic in approved colour finish and an elegantly designed milky white acrylic
front diffuser, and bright anodized Aluminium reflector, with VPIT ballast, lamp holder, and
connector.
Material:
Fitting:
The Luminaries Comprises housing made of engineering plastic in approved colour finish
and an elegantly designed mike white acrylic front diffuser enclosing a bright anodized
Aluminium reflector. Pre-wired with vacuum pressure impregnated copper ballast,
lamp
holder and mains connector with two holes on rear side facilitates wall/ceiling
mountings,
the grommet should be provided at rear side.
Wooden board: As per 1.6 specified in chapter for Point wiring. (WG-PW/PW)
Hardware: Sheet Metal (SM) screws, washers, plugs / wooden gutties, etc.
Terminal connector: As per (FG-FG/AS10) specified in chapter 2.4.
Connection Wire: Two core flexible stranded copper wire cord 24/0.2mm ISI marked.
Method of Construction:
The fitting shall be mounted on polished Wooden / Laminated 4mm plywood top / block by
required size of screws with necessary flexible wire for connection.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis. (i.e. each)
C) Mirror Light Fitting Suitable for CFL 9 watts (ML2)
Scope:
Specification No (FG-IDF/ML2)
Supplying and erecting Mirror light fitting with 1 x 9 Watts CFL, with necessary
Choke & accessories complete erected on polished wooden / sunmica block.
Material:
Fitting:
Channel fabricated from CRCA MS sheet and finished in reflector white inside and outside.
Pre-wired with vacuum pressure impregnated copper ballast, lamp holder and
mains
connector, and an aesthetically appealing serrated / reeded opal diffuser held in position by
decorative end covers white (W) / deep blue (B) / orange (O) / H.C. grey (G), post office red
(R)/ Black (BK) or approved colour, 12mm dia grommet.
Two
6.5 mm dia holes on the rear side of the channel to facilitate wall / ceiling mounting.
Wooden board: As per 1.6 specified in chapter for Point wiring. (WG-PW/PW)
Hardware: Sheet Metal (SM) screws, washers, plugs / wooden gutties, etc.
Connection wire: Two core flexible stranded copper wire cord 24/0.2mm ISI marked.
Terminal connector: As per (FG-FG/AS10) specified in chapter 2.4.
Method of Construction:
The fitting shall be mounted on polished Wooden / Laminated 4mm plywood top / block by
required size of screws with necessary flexible wire for connection.
Specifications
Page 274
Tender No: -1800000008
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis. (i.e. each)
D) Mirror Optic Recessed down Lighter suitable for 2 x 18 watts CFL (DL1)
Scope:
Specification No (FG-IDF/DL1)
Supplying and erecting circular type recessed down lighter suitable for 2x18 watts CFL,
including gear box. The luminaire comprises a ceiling ring spun from Aluminium attached
to mounting unit made of mild steel. The mounting unit has a pair of sliding
brackets for
fixing the luminaire to the ceiling.
Material:
Fitting:
Scientifically designed highly polished & anodized Aluminum reflector ensures precise light
control with optimum light utilization, leading to substantial savings in energy cost and
excellent ambient conditions. Reflector is fitted into the frame with decorative screw
arrangement. Frame is fabricated from CRCA MS sheet and epoxy powder coated white.
Precoated frame ensure corrosion free life. Fitting shall have a prismatic acrylic diffuser
resting on upper part of reflector to reduce glare. Retaining clips facilitate mounting in false
ceilings.
Ballast: As per (FG-FG/AS1) specified in chapter 2.4.
Bi-pin lamp holder: Conforming to IS: 3323/80 with amendment No.1 to the extent
possible /applicable.
Capacitor / Condenser: As per (FG-FG/AS7) specified in chapter 2.4.
Connection wire: Flat / round Two core flexible stranded copper wire cord 24/0.2mm ISI
marked.
Terminal connector: As per (FG-FG/AS10) specified in chapter 2.4.
Method of Construction:
The fitting shall be fixed firmly in the designated place (False ceiling / unspecified ceiling)
with the help of swinging bracket, and making the connection.
In case where fittings are to be installed flush with /on false ceiling; layout shall be given to
civil wing and work shall be done in co-ordination with civil wing e.g. making
recesses in
false ceiling.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis. (i.e. each)
E) Mirror Optic CFL fitting (MOF)
Scope:
Specification No (FG-IDF/MOF)
Supplying & erecting recessed / surface down lighter with mirror optics suitable for
specified wattage of CFL.
Material:
Fitting:
Housing fabricated from CRCA sheet, epoxy powder coated, white enamelled, with mirror
assembly comprising of significantly designed high purity aluminium reflector for high optical
performance back wing light and with improved vertical illumination.
Ballast: As per (FG-FG/AS1) specified in chapter 2.4.
Bi-pin lamp holder: Conforming to IS: 3323/80 with amendment No.1 to the extent
possible /applicable.
Connection wire: Flat / round Two core flexible stranded copper wire cord 24/0.2mm ISI
marked.
Hardware: Sheet Metal (SM) screws, washers, plugs / wooden gutties, etc.
Chain: Heavy duty lacquered MS chain with hooks.
Block: As per 1.6 specified in chapter for Point wiring. (WG-PW/PW)
Terminal connector: As per (FG-FG/AS10) specified in chapter 2.4.
Method of Construction:
Specifications
Page 275
Tender No: -1800000008
Mirror optic fitting suitable for specified wattage of CFL complete erected on wooden
block/PVC block /on ceiling directly in case of surface mounting fitting, as directed by site
engineer, with necessary screws of suitable size, with rawl plugs, gutties, etc. In case
of
recesses mounting, the fitting shall be secured and erected by fixing the hook
at
ceiling,
and the chain shall be fixed to the fitting, in such a manner that the fitting
shall be in
level with the designated place (false / unspecified ceiling)
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis. (i.e. each)
F) Box type Fluorescent fitting
(BFF)
Scope:
Specification No (FG-IDF/BFF)
Supplying & erecting white stove enamelled / powder coated box type fluorescent fitting
suitable for T 8 tube/ tubes, with specified ballast, and necessary accessories, duly wired
up for use on 250 V AC, supply and erected if required on varnished wooden / PVC block
with flexible wire, twin core 24/0.20 mm. and with necessary materials complete and
marking Sr. No. and date of erection.
Material:
Fitting:
White stove enameled / powder coated box type fluorescent fitting suitable for T 8 tube,
made of CRCA sheet not less than 0.5 mm thick, painted white on the reflector side
and
gray/any other colour (specified by the Engineer in-charge) on other surface. Wire
ways
shall be smooth & free from sharp edges, burrs, flashes & like which might cause abrasion
of the insulation of the wiring. Parts such as metal set screws shall not protrude into wire
ways. Fitting shall be duly wired up internally with appropriate size of wire. (Refer drawing
no.IDF-1 (Fig.1))
Ballast: As per (FG-FG/AS2) / (FG-FG/AS3) / (FG-FG/AS4) specified in chapter 2.4.
Tube holders: As per (FG-FG/AS8) specified in chapter 2.4
Starter: As per (FG-FG/AS11) specified in chapter 2.4
Condenser: As per (FG-FG/AS7) specified in chapter 2.4
Starter holder: As per (FG-FG/AS9) specified in chapter 2.4
Terminal connector: As per (FG-FG/AS10) specified in chapter 2.4.
Connection wire: Flat / round Two core flexible stranded copper wire cord 24/0.2mm ISI
marked.
Paint: Superior quality enamel paint of specified colour.
Hardware: Sheet Metal (SM) screws, washers, plugs / wooden gutties, etc.
Chain: Heavy duty lacquered MS chain with hooks.
Down Rod: Steel conduit as per (WG-MA/CON) specified in chapter for Point wiring.
Block: As per 1.6 specified in chapter for Point wiring. (WG-PW/PW)
Method of Construction:
The complete fitting with all the above accessories shall be fixed on wooden / PVC
block
with SM screws (minimum size shall be 25x8 mm). The wooden/PVC block shall be fixed on
wall/ceiling with SM screws (minimum size shall be 75x8mm) with necessary plugs, gutties,
etc. S. No and date of erection shall be painted/marked by enamel paint. The fitting shall be
connected with PVC insulated copper wire leads, to the point and testing shall be carried
out.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis. (i.e. each)
G) Chalk Board type Fluorescent fitting (CBF)
Scope:
Specification No (FG-IDF/CBF)
Specifications
Page 276
Tender No: -1800000008
Supplying & erecting white stove enameled / powder coated Chalk board type fluorescent
fitting with enameled reflector of 0.8 mm thick, white on the reflector side and gray on other
surface suitable for T 8 tube/ tubes, with specified ballast, and necessary accessories, duly
wired up for use on 250 V AC, supply including material required for erection and erecting
as per requirement complete and marking Sr. No. and date of erection.
Material:
Fitting:
White stove enameled / powder coated Chalk board type fluorescent fitting suitable for T 8
tube, made of CRCA sheet not less than 0.5 mm thick, with enameled reflector of 0.8 mm
thick, painted white on the reflector side and gray on other surface. Wire ways shall be
smooth & free from sharp edges, burrs, flashes & like which might cause abrasion of the
insulation of the wiring. Parts such as metal set screws shall not protrude into wire ways.
Fitting shall be duly wired up internally with appropriate size of wire. (Refer drawing no.IDF1 (Fig.2))
Ballast: As per (FG-FG/AS2) / (FG-FG/AS3) / (FG-FG/AS4) specified in chapter 2.4.
Tube holders: As per (FG-FG/AS8) specified in chapter 2.4
Starter: As per (FG-FG/AS11) specified in chapter 2.4
Condenser: As per (FG-FG/AS7) specified in chapter 2.4
Starter holder: As per (FG-FG/AS9) specified in chapter 2.4
Connection wire: Flat / round Two core flexible stranded copper wire cord 24/0.2mm ISI
marked.
Paint: Superior quality enamel paint of specified colour.
Hardware: Sheet Metal (SM) screws, washers, plugs / wooden gutties, etc.
Block/ Board: As per 1.6 specified in chapter for Point wiring. (WG-PW/PW)
Terminal connector: As per (FG-FG/AS10) specified in chapter 2.4.
Method of Construction:
The complete fitting with all the above accessories shall be fixed on wooden / PVC block
with SM screws (minimum size shall be 25x8 mm). The wooden/PVC block shall be fixed on
wall/ceiling with SM screws (minimum size shall be 75x8mm) with necessary plugs, gutties,
etc. S. No and date of erection shall be marked/painted by enamel paint. The fitting shall be
connected PVC copper wire leads, to the point and testing shall be carried out.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis. (i.e. each)
H) Industrial type Fluorescent fitting (INF)
Scope:
Specification No (FG-IDF/INF)
Supplying & erecting white stove enameled / powder coated Industrial type fluorescent
fitting with enameled reflector of 0.8 mm thick, white on the reflector side and gray on other
surface suitable for T 8 tube/ tubes, with specified ballast, and necessary accessories, duly
wired up for use on 250 V AC, supply including material required for erection and erecting
as per requirement complete and marking Sr. No. and date of erection.
Material:
Fitting:
White stove enameled / powder coated Industrial type fluorescent fitting suitable for T-8
tube, made of CRCA sheet not less than 0.5 mm thick, with enameled reflector of 0.8 mm
thick, painted white on the reflector side and gray on other surface. Wire ways shall be
smooth & free from sharp edges, burrs, flashes & like which might cause abrasion of the
insulation of the wiring. Parts such as metal set screws shall not protrude into wire ways.
Fitting shall be duly wired up internally with appropriate size of wire. (Refer drawing no.IDF1 (Fig.3))
Ballast: As per (FG-FG/AS2) / (FG-FG/AS3) / (FG-FG/AS4) specified in chapter 2.4.
Tube holders: As per (FG-FG/AS8) specified in chapter 2.4
Starter: As per (FG-FG/AS11) specified in chapter 2.4
Condenser: As per (FG-FG/AS7) specified in chapter 2.4
Specifications
Page 277
Tender No: -1800000008
Starter holder: As per (FG-FG/AS9) specified in chapter 2.4
Connection wire: Flat / round Two core flexible stranded copper wire cord 24/0.2mm ISI
marked.
Paint: Superior quality enamel paint of specified colour for marking.
Hardware: Sheet Metal (SM) screws, washers, plugs / wooden gutties, etc.
Block: As per 1.6 specified in chapter for Point wiring. (WG-PW/PW)
Terminal connector: As per (FG-FG/AS10) specified in chapter 2.4.
Method of Construction:
The complete fitting with all the above accessories duly wired up shall be fixed on block with
SM screws (minimum size shall be 25x8 mm). The block shall be fixed on wall/ceiling with
SM screws (minimum size shall be 75x8mm) with necessary plugs, gutties, etc. The fitting if,
to be ceiling suspended, it shall be fixed to the provided 16 SWG 20 mm dia., HG conduit
duly threaded in ball suspension plate. The provided ball suspension plate shall be fixed on
block with SM screws (minimum size shall be 25x8 mm) and the block shall be fixed at
ceiling with SM screws (minimum size shall be 75x8mm) with necessary plugs, gutties, etc.
S. No and date of erection shall be marked/painted by enamel paint. The fitting shall be
connected with PVC insulated copper wire leads, to the point and testing shall be carried
out.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis. (i.e. each)
I) Recess /Surface mounting Mirror Optic Fluorescent Fitting
(MOP)
Scope:
Specification No (FG-IDF/MOP)
Supplying & erecting white stove enameled / powder coated Mirror Optic type fluorescent
fitting with enameled reflector of 0.8 mm thick, white on the reflector side and gray on other
surface suitable for T 8 tube/ tubes, with specified ballast, and necessary accessories, duly
wired up for use on 250 V AC, supply including material required for erection and erecting
as per requirement complete and marking Sr. No. and date of erection.
Material:
Fitting:
White stove enameled / powder coated recess /surface mounting mirror optic type
fluorescent fitting suitable for T 8 tube, made of CRCA sheet not less than 0.5 mm thick,
painted white on the reflector side and gray on other surface, and with Mirror assembly
comprising of significantly designed high purity aluminium reflector for high optical
performance. Wire ways shall be smooth & free from sharp edges, burrs, flashes & like
which might cause abrasion of the insulation of the wiring. Parts such as metal set screws
shall not protrude into wire ways. Fitting shall be duly wired up internally with appropriate
size of wire. (Refer drawing no.IDF-2 (Fig.4 & Fig.5))
Ballast: As per (FG-FG/AS2) / (FG-FG/AS3) / (FG-FG/AS4) specified in chapter 2.4.
Tube holders: As per (FG-FG/AS8) specified in chapter 2.4
Starter: As per (FG-FG/AS11) specified in chapter 2.4
Condenser: As per (FG-FG/AS7) specified in chapter 2.4
Starter holder: As per (FG-FG/AS9) specified in chapter 2.4
Connection wire: Flat / round Two core flexible stranded copper wire cord 24/0.2mm ISI
marked.
Paint: Superior quality enamel paint of specified colour.
Hardware: Sheet Metal (SM) screws, washers, plugs / wooden gutties, etc.
Chain: Heavy duty lacquered MS chain with hooks.
Down Rod: As per (WG-MA/CON) specified in chapter for Point wiring.
Block: As per 1.6 specified in chapter for Point wiring. (WG-PW/PW)
Specifications
Page 278
Tender No: -1800000008
Terminal connector: As per (FG-FG/AS10) specified in chapter 2.4.
Method of Construction:
The complete fitting with all the above accessories shall be fixed on wooden / PVC block / on
provided chain / down rod with ball suspension plate with SM screws (minimum size shall be
25x8 mm). The wooden/PVC block shall be fixed on wall/ceiling with SM screws (minimum
size shall be 75x8mm) with necessary plugs, gutties, etc. The fitting if, to be ceiling
suspended, it shall be fixed to the provided 16 SWG 20 mm dia., HG conduit duly threaded in
ball suspension plate. The provided ball suspension plate shall be fixed in wooden /PVC block
with SM screws (minimum size shall be 25x8 mm).The wooden/PVC block shall be fixed at
ceiling with SM screws (minimum size shall be 75x8mm) with necessary plugs, gutties, etc. In
case of recesses mounting, the fitting shall be secured and erected by fixing the hook at
ceiling, and the chain shall be fixed to the fitting, in such a manner that the fitting shall be in
level with the false / unspecified ceiling. Sr. No and date of erection shall be marked or
painted by enamel paint. The fitting shall be connected PVC copper wire leads, to the point
and testing shall be carried out.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis. (i.e. each)
2.3
Outdoor fittings (FG/ODF)
A) Street Light fitting suitable for CFL (CSL)
Scope:
Specification No (FG-ODF/CSL)
Supplying & erecting Street Light suitable for specified wattage of CFL complete with
serrated acrylic diffuser & gasket, with necessary control gear and erected on provided
bracket.
Material:
Fitting:
The fitting canopy shall be made of deep drawn of CRCA Sheet, powder coated
/
epoxy
powder coated CRCA sheet housing with epoxy white powder coated CRCA sheet steel gray
tray covered with anodized Aluminium reflector wired with a provision for housing open
construction ballast required for specified wattage of CFL with clear acrylic cover with
rubber gasket fixed by 4 Nos. toggles of suitable OD entry for direct mounting pipe bracket.
Fitting shall be with degree of protection IP 54 electrical Safety Class-I. Fitting shall be duly
wired up internally with appropriate size of wire. (Refer drawing no.ODF-1 (Fig.1 & Fig.2 )
Ballast: As per (FG-FG/AS1) specified in chapter 2.4.
Bi-pin lamp holder: Conforming to IS: 3323/80 with amendment No.1 to the extent
possible /applicable.
Connection wire: Flat / round Two core flexible stranded copper wire cord 24/0.2mm ISI
marked.
Terminal connector: As per (FG-FG/AS10) specified in chapter 2.4.
Method of Construction:
The complete fitting with all the above accessories shall be erected with provided
bracket, on wall/street light pole or at any place as directed by Site engineer, duly
connected and giving necessary testing.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis. (i.e. each)
B) Street Light fitting suitable for HPMV/HPSV/MH Lamps (GSL)
Specifications
Page 279
Tender No: -1800000008
Scope:
Specification No (FG-ODF/GSL)
Supplying & erecting Street Light fitting suitable for specified wattage of
HPSV/HPMV/MH
lamps, with all accessories, erected with provided bracket onwall/street light pole or at any
place as directed by Site engineer with necessary materials.
Material:
Fitting:
The fitting comprises deep drawn one piece Aluminium body. Lamp compartment has stove
enamel white finish from inside & gray finish from outside. nickel chrome plated reflector /
Aluminium reflector is mounted inside the lamp compartment for high optical efficiency
control gear compartment houses a detachable gear tray & is wired with provided copper
wound ballast, power factor improvement capacitor, electronic ignitor & with mains
connector. The cable entry is through mounting pipe & terminated on mains connector
inside the control gear housing with felt gasket which ensures weather proofness & also
prevents entry of insects inside the housing. The fittings lamp compartment shall have IP 43
protection & IP 23 protection for control gear compartment. The fitting shall be ISI marked
to IS: 10322 part -5: 1987 with Amendment No.1&2 and comply with requirements of IS:
10322: part-5/Sec-1:1985 with Amendment No.1&2 IS: 13383: part 2: 1992 with
Amendment No.1. Fitting shall be duly wired up internally with appropriate size of wire.
(Refer drawing no.ODF-2 (Fig.3))
Ballast: As per (FG-FG/AS5) specified in chapter 2.4
Ignitor: As per (FG-FG/AS6) specified in chapter 2.4
Condenser: As per (FG-FG/AS7) specified in chapter 2.4
Terminal connector: As per (FG-FG/AS10) specified in chapter 2.4.
Method of Construction:
The complete fitting with all the above accessories shall be erected with provided bracket, on
wall/street light pole or at any place as directed by Site engineer, duly connected and
giving necessary testing.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis. (i.e. each)
C) Street Light fitting suitable for T 8 Fluorescent tubes
(FSL1)
Scope:
Specification No (FG-ODF/FSL1)
Supplying & erecting Street Light suitable for specified wattage complete with serrated
acrylic diffuser & gasket, with necessary control gear and erected on provided bracket.
Material:
Fitting:
ISI marked Fluorescent Street light fittings complete with electronic ballast, transparent
cover made out of 3mm thick acrylic sheet, gear cum reflector tray, canopy and lamp holder
duly wired for use on 240 volt AC single phase 50 Hz without fluorescent lamp. Canopy
shall be made of Aluminium sheet 1.25 mm thick minimum. Gear cum reflector tray (GCRT)
shall be made of either CRCA sheet of 0.8 mm thick or Aluminium sheet of 1.25 mm thick.
Fitting shall be suitable for mounting up to a height of 15 meters and shall be able to
withstand wind load test. It shall conform to class-1 of IS: 10322 (part 5/sec 3)/87 with
amendment 1 and IP-53 protection with photometric test requirement with luminous
efficiency not less than 65%.
i) Various components of fittings shall conform to IS specification as noted below.
a) Electronic ballast (EB) to IS: 13021: Part-1:1991 with Amendment No.1, IS: 13021: Part2:1991 with Amendment Nos.1 and 2 and additional requirement as per the
b) Bi-pin lamp holders to IS: 3323/80 with amendment No.1/
c) PVC cables to IS: 694/90 with amdt.No.1 & 2.
Specifications
Page 280
Tender No: -1800000008
ii) Surface of CRCA Steel and Aluminium sheets used shall be properly phosphatized and
stove enamelled white on the reflector side, tray side and other surface stove enamelled grey.
iii) The street light fittings shall be required with socket bore of 30mm or 40 mm or 50mm
for side entry/top entry type fittings. The socket bore, however, will be specified by the
indenters at the time of placement of supply order.
iv) All wire leads to be adequately covered with sleeves for protection against accidental
contracts.
v) All hardware parts used should be zinc coated or nickel/chromium plated so as to
be
corrosion resistant.
vi) Fitting shall be wired with multi-stranded copper wire terminating on suitable
connectors. The wiring shall be properly clamped.
Ballast: As per (FG-FG/AS1) specified in chapter 2.4.
Bi-pin lamp holder: Conforming to IS: 3323/80 with amendment No.1 to the extent
possible /applicable.
Connection wire: Flat / round Two core flexible stranded copper wire cord 24/0.2mm ISI
marked.
Terminal connector: As per (FG-FG/AS10) specified in chapter 2.4.
Method of Construction:
The complete fitting with all the above accessories shall be erected with provided
bracket, on wall/street light pole or at any place as directed by Site engineer, duly
connected and giving necessary testing.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis. (i.e. each)
D) Energy efficient T-5 2X14 & 2X24 Street Light fitting (FSL2)
Scope:
Specification No (FG-ODF/FSL2)
Supplying & erecting Energy efficient T-5 2X14 & 2X24 Street Light fitting
suitable for specified wattage of T-5 lamp complete with serrated acrylic diffuser &
gasket, with necessary control gear and erected on provided bracket.
Material:
Fitting:
ISI marked Energy efficient T-5 2X14 & 2X24 Street Light fitting complete with electronic
ballast, transparent cover made out of 3mm thick acrylic sheet, gear cum reflector tray,
canopy and lamp holder duly wired for use on 240 volt AC single phase 50 Hz without T-5
lamp. Canopy shall be made of Aluminium sheet of width 3” minimum per lamp. Gear cum
reflector tray (GCRT) shall be made of either CRCA sheet of 0.8 mm thick or Aluminium
sheet of 1.25 mm thick. Fitting shall be suitable for mounting up to a height of 15 meters
and shall be able to withstand wind load test. It shall conform to class-1 of IS: 10322 (part
5/sec 3)/87 with amendment 1 and IP-65 protection
i) Various components of fittings shall conform to IS specification as noted below.
a) Electronic ballast (EB) to IS: 13021: Part-1:1991 with Amendment No.1, IS: 13021:
Part-2:1991 with Amendment Nos.1 and 2 and additional requirement as per the
b) Bi-pin lamp holders to IS: 3323/80 with amendment No.1/
c) PVC cables to IS: 694/90 with amdt.No.1 & 2.
ii) Surface of CRCA Steel and Aluminium sheets used shall be properly phosphatized and
stove enamelled white on the reflector side, tray side and other surface stove enamelled grey.
iii) The street light fittings shall be required with socket bore of 30mm or 40 mm or 50mm
for side entry/top entry type fittings. The socket bore, however, will be specified by the
indenters at the time of placement of supply order.
iv) All wire leads to be adequately covered with sleeves for protection against accidental
contracts.
Specifications
Page 281
Tender No: -1800000008
v) All hardware parts used should be zinc coated or nickel/chromium plated so as to
be
corrosion resistant.
vi) Fitting shall be wired with multi-stranded copper wire terminating on suitable
connectors. The wiring shall be properly clamped.
Method of Construction:
The complete fitting with all the above accessories shall be erected with provided
bracket, on wall/street light pole or at any place as directed by Site engineer, duly
connected and giving necessary testing.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis. (i.e. each)
E) Flood Light fitting suitable for HPMV/HPSV/MH Lamps
(GFL)
Scope:
Specification No (FG-ODF/GFL)
Supplying & erecting Flood Light fitting suitable for specified wattage of HPSV/HPMV/MH
lamps, with all accessories, erected with provided bracket on wall/street light pole or at any
place as directed by Site engineer with necessary materials.
Material:
Fitting:
Luminaries comprising of a die cast aluminium housing with store enamel finish. A flat
toughened heat resistance glass is firmly fixed with a synthetic rubber gasket to the housing
by stainless steel toggles. Control gear comprises of provided copper wound ballast, power
factor improvement capacitor, and electronic ignitor & with mains connector. Luminaire shall
be mounted on a MS cradle for rotating in horizontal & vertical planes for facilitating
positioning of the luminaire to effectively illuminate the target area. Brightened & anodized
aluminium reflector for high optical efficiency. Cable entry shall be through suitable cable
glands/ nipple provided for cable entry.
(Refer drawing no.ODF-2 (Fig.4))
Ballast: As per (FG-FG/AS5) specified in chapter 2.4
Ignitor: As per (FG-FG/AS6) specified in chapter 2.4
Condenser: As per (FG-FG/AS7) specified in chapter 2.4
Terminal connector: As per (FG-FG/AS10) specified in chapter 2.4.
Method of Construction:
The complete fitting with all the above accessories shall be erected with provided
bracket, on wall/street light pole or at any place as directed by Site engineer, duly
connected and
giving necessary testing.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis. (i.e. each)
F) Gate Light fitting (PTL) suitable for HPMV/HPSV/MH Lamps (PTL)
Scope:
Specification No (FG-ODF/PTL)
Supplying and erecting Gate light fitting suitable for specified wattage of HPMV/SV/MH
lamp/lamps, complete with control gear, duly wire and erected on provided pipe/pole or at
any other place, as directed by site engineer.
Material:
Fitting:
The fitting comprising of a control gear capsule made of die cast aluminium alloy and shall
have provision for fixing of control gear. Fitting shall have acrylic bowl with ushroom/round
shape bowl of specified diameter, and shall be fixed on the top of the capsule. The bowl shall
be adequately gasketed for weather proofness. The inner diameter of control gear capsule base
shall be suitable for pipe of 50 mm to 77 mm O.D. Fitting shall have entry for termination of
cable. The control gear capsule shall have IP 43 protection class. (Refer drawing no.ODF-2
(Fig.5))
Ballast: As per (FG-FG/AS5) specified in chapter 2.4
Specifications
Page 282
Tender No: -1800000008
Ignitor: As per (FG-FG/AS6) specified in chapter 2.4
Condenser: As per (FG-FG/AS7) specified in chapter 2.4
Terminal connector: As per (FG-FG/AS10) specified in chapter 2.4.
Method of Construction:
The complete fitting with all the above accessories shall be erected with provided
pole/pipe or at any place as directed by Site engineer, duly connected and giving
necessary testing.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis. (i.e. each)
G) Gate / Garden Light fitting suitable for CFL (GLT)
Scope:
Specification No (FG-ODF/GLT)
Supplying and erecting Gate / Garden light fitting suitable for specified wattage of CFL (One or
Two), complete with control gear, duly wire and erected on provided pipe/pole or at any other
place, as directed by site engineer.
Material:
Fitting:
The fitting comprising of a control gear capsule made of die cast aluminium alloy and shall
have provision for fixing of control gear. Fitting shall have acrylic bowl with mushroom/round
shape bowl of specified diameter, and shall be fixed on the top of the capsule. The bowl shall
be adequately gasketed for weather proofness. The inner diameter of control gear capsule base
shall be suitable for pipe of 50 mm to 77 mm O.D. Fitting shall have entry for termination of
cable. The control gear capsule shall have IP 43 protection class.
Ballast: As per (FG-FG/AS5) specified in chapter 2.4
Ignitor: As per (FG-FG/AS6) specified in chapter 2.4
Condenser: As per (FG-FG/AS7) specified in chapter 2.4
Terminal connector: As per (FG-FG/AS10) specified in chapter 2.4.
Method of Construction:
The complete fitting with all the above accessories shall be erected with provided
pole/pipe or at any place as directed by Site engineer, duly connected and giving
necessary testing.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis. (i.e.
each)
2.4
Accessories for fittings
(FG/AS)
Specifications for Ballasts / Ignitor / Condenser
Scope:
This chapter deals with supply, erection and connecting the accessories required in
types of fittings suitable for fluorescent tubes, HPMV/SV/MH lamps, etc., and
necessary testing of the fittings after erecting the accessory.
arious
giving
Specification No: (FG-FG/AS1)
1.
CFL Ballast:
Ballast shall be copper wire wound, polyester filled or vacuum impregnated type suitable for
Compact fluorescent lamp (CFL) conforming to I.S. 1534 with amendment No. 1 to 4
suitable for use on 230 V, 50 Hz, Single phase AC Supply, Temperature rise for ballast shall
Specifications
Page 283
Tender No: -1800000008
be 50 degree C, above the ambient temperature under normal conditions, minimum
preheating current shall be 153 milliamp at 90 % of rated voltage and maximum 240
milliamp at 110 % of the rated voltage.
Specification No (FG-FG/AS2)
2.
Electromagnetic Ballast for T 8 fluorescent tubes:
The ballast shall be of self Inductive coil of super enamelled copper low loss silicon steel
lamination inductive coil with or without as additional resistor, designed to give operational
characteristics for 40 W, at rated voltage of 220 V to 240V with calibration current 0.43 A.,
conforming to IS: 1534. Air temperature of the ballast winding shall not exceed 250 C
above ambient, with appropriate IP protection class.
Specification No (FG-FG/AS3)
3.
Electronic Ballast for T 8 fluorescent tubes:
The High frequency electronic ballast suitable for T 8 tube shall have circuit P.F of 0.95 /
protected against mains disturbances, automatic cut off protection for a deactivated tube,
glass fuse in main input circuitry, short circuit protection for a limited duration for both
PCB terminals and components. Should withstand 1.5 KV AC high voltage for insulation as
per IS 1302/ Part I. Terminal block should be provided for mains and lamp connections,
separate earthing terminal & tamper proof warrantee seal, the losses should not be more
than 4 watts & without humming noise.
Specification No (FG-FG/AS4)
4.
VPIT Ballast T 8 fluorescent tubes:
Vacuum impregnated low loss copper ballast made of low loss silicon steel lamination with
super enamelled copper wire, vacuum impregnated with white resin, two way terminal block
and winding temperature limited to 1200C, conforming to IS 1534 (Part -1 of 1977) and
suitable for 240 Volt 50 Hz, AC supply.
Specification No (FG-FG/AS5)
5.
Ballast for HPMV/SV and Metal Halide Lamps:
Ballast shall confirm to IS: 6616/82 with the following variations. The ballast shall be
marked with watt loss and at rated voltage power delivered shall be between 92.5% and
107.5% of the power delivered by the reference ballast.
Ballast used in the fittings shall be energy efficient where watt loss will not exceed the
following limits:Ballast
Ballast
Ballast
Ballast
for
for
for
for
70 Watts Lamp :
150 Watts Lamp
250 Watts Lamp
400 Watts Lamp
15 Watts max.
:
19 Watts max.
:
26 Watts max.
:
38 Watts max.
Winding Resistance shall be within a Tolerance of +5% & 10 % on values declared by the
manufacturer.
Specification No (FG-FG/AS6)
6.
Ignitor:
Ignitor shall be suitable for HPSV/MV and Metal Halide lamps. It shall not pulsate after the
lamp has been fully ignited. Ignitor improper connection shall not cause any deleterious
effects on the luminaries. The components shall be fitted inside the polypropylene,
insulating container. Necessary wires with standard colour coding (Red, yellow & Black),
shall be drawn outside the container for facilitating the connections.
Specifications
Page 284
Tender No: -1800000008
Specification No (FG-FG/AS7)
7.
Condenser / Capacitor:
Made of Metallized Polypropylene (MPP) housed in a polypropylene container, hermetically
sealed designed for tropical conditions, of appropriate capacity conforming to IS: 1569 of
1976 used for P.F improvement not less than 0.9 for all types of luminaries or other
appliances. Condenser shall be connected across the mains or in series with one ballast for
lead / lag circuit.
Specification No (FG-FG/AS8)
8.
Tube holders:
Lamp holder should be designed for tubular fluorescent T 8 lamps for all wattages, for end
to end mounting, rotary locking type. The holder shall conform to IS: 3323 of 1980.
Specification No (FG-FG/AS9)
9.
Starter holder:
Starter holder made from PVC with copper contacts, and groove for securely holding the
starter. The starter holder shall conform to IS: 2215/1984.
Specification No (FG-FG/AS10)
10.
Terminal connector:
Connector shall be made of Porcelain / Bakelite / PVC, with necessary brass / copper
contacts, screws for connections. The nominal cross sectional area of the connector shall be
suitable for leads of 2.5 mm2.
Specification No (FG-FG/AS11)
11.
Starter:
Starter made of bi-metallic glow switch housed in polypropylene can with plastic cover and
brass pins, with radio interference suppression capacitors and heavy gauge nickel plated
brass contact, conforming to IS 2215 of 1983. Starter shall be suitable for fixing in all types
of starter holders.
Method of Construction:
The above accessories shall be fixed in the fitting, duly wired and necessary testing shall be
carried out in presence of site engineer.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis. (i.e. each)
2.5 Brackets for Outdoor fittings (BKT)
A) Bracket welded to Pole Cap
(BKT/BPC)
Scope:
Specification No (FG-BKT/BPC)
Fabrication of Street light bracket of specified diameter ‘B’ class G.I. Pipe, of specified length
welded to pole cap erected on top of the pole for erection of either single / double, side entry
WP fluorescent/CFL/MV/MH/SV fitting(s), duly painted with one coat of red oxide & one
coat of Aluminium paint, and erecting the same with provided
leads.
Specifications
Page 285
Tender No: -1800000008
Material:
GI Pipe: GI Pipe of specified diameter as per (CW-PLB/GP) mentioned in chapter
Pole Cap: Pole cap fabricated from 4 mm thick MS Sheet, of 30 cm in length.
Corner support: 3 mm thick MS flat / sheet
Set screws: MS bolts, nuts of 6 mm dia.
Paint: Red oxide & Aluminium paint.
17.5
Method of Construction:
The bracket shall be fabricated as per drawing No(s) BKT-1 ( Fig.1 Fig.3), BKT-2 (Fig.4, Fig.5)
and shall be placed on the pole cap. Inner diameter of pole cap shall be as per the outer
diameter of pole with sufficient clearance, so as to facilitate easy placing of the cap on top of
pole. Two
holes of minimum 6 mm diameter shall be drilled to pole cap. The nuts shall
be
placed on the pole cap duly aligned with the hole, and shall be butt welded. Bolts
shall then be tightened through the nut so as to hold the bracket in vertical position.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis. (i.e.
each)
B)Wall Bracket (BKT/WB)
Scope:
Specification No (FG-BKT/WB)
Fabrication of Street light bracket of specified diameter ‘B’ class G.I. Pipe, 1.2 m in length
erected on wall for erection of side entry WP fluorescent/CFL/MV/MH/SV fitting(s), duly
painted with one coat of red oxide & one coat of Aluminium paint, and duly connected to
supply with PVC wire leads.
Material:
GI Pipe: GI Pipe of specified diameter as per (CW-PLB/GP) mentioned in chapter
Hardware: Grouting MS bolts, nuts of 10 mm dia. & 100 mm length. ‘U” shaped
clamps of suitable diameter made of GI.
MS Flat: MS flat 3 mm thick 50 mm wide
Paint: Red oxide & Aluminium paint.
Wire leads: 1.5 mm2, as per (WG-MA/BW) mentioned in chapter 1.3
Miscellaneous: Cement, Sand, Water, etc.
17.5
Method of Construction:
•
•
•
•
The bracket fabricated as per drawing No BKT- 1 (Fig.2) shall be erected on wall as
explained
below:
MS flat of length 15 cm with 10 mm diameter hole shall be welded to the pipe as shown in
drawing.
Grouting bolts shall be grouted in wall and finished with cement plaster.
Bracket shall be placed on the grouted bolts with clamps and nut shall be tightened.
Fitting shall then be inserted onto the bracket and connections shall be made.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis. (i.e.
each)
C)
Street Light Bracket (BKT/SLB)
Scope:
Specification No (FG-BKT/WB)
Specifications
Page 286
Tender No: -1800000008
Fabrication of Street light bracket of specified diameter ‘B’ class G.I. Pipe, of required length
erected on pole for erection of side entry WP fluorescent/CFL/MV/MH/SV
fitting(s),
duly painted with one coat of red oxide & one coat of Aluminium paint, and duly connected
to supply with PVC wire leads.
Material:
GI Pipe: GI Pipe of specified diameter as per (CW-PLB/GP) mentioned in chapter
Hardware: MS nuts & bolts, Rubber Grommet.
MS Flat: MS sheet 5 mm thick 40 mm wide.
Paint: Red oxide & Aluminium paint.
Wire leads: 1.5 mm2, as per (WG-MA/BW) mentioned in chapter 1.3
17.5
Method of Construction:
•
•
•
•
The bracket fabricated as per drawing no BKT-2 (Fig.6)…. , shall be erected on pole as
explained below:
Clamps of required length shall be fabricated as per outer diameter of pole and the pipe
used for bracket.
Bracket shall be clamped with the pole and the nuts bolts shall be tightened so as to keep
bracket in plum.
Hole for drawing the mains wire shall be drilled just below the bracket. The grommet shall
be placed and the wires shall then be drawn.
Fitting shall then be inserted onto the bracket and connections shall be made.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be measured on running metre basis of the
pipe used. (i.e. each)
2.6
Fans :(FG/FN)
A) Ceiling Fans
Scope:
Specification No (FG-FN/CF)
Supplying and erecting Ceiling fan of specified sweep with all accessories and
materials, erected in provided hook/clamp.
necessary
Material:
Ceiling Fan:
Electric Ceiling fan capacitor type with double ball bearing complete with capacitor, 300 mm
down rod, canopies, shackles, reel insulator, half threaded bolts of 9.53 mm (3/8”) dia 62.5
mm (2-1/2”) to 88 mm (3-1/2”) long and 7.94 mm (5/16”) dia 44.5 mm (1-3/4”) to 57 mm
(2-1/4”) long with nuts, with lock type split pin, spring & plate washers, etc.; three number
blade made of Aluminium alloy, suitable for single phase, AC 210 volts, 50 Hz supply and
conforming to class I of IS : 374/1979 with amendment no 1 to 6 except for performance
parameters to the extent modified as details in general requirements. The down rod shall be
capable to withstand a tensile load of 1000 kg without breakdown and a torsion load of 500
kg.cm without breakage as per Clause 10.14.1 of IS: 374/1979 with amendment no.1 to 6.
Electrical motor should be single phase permanent capacitor type with no. of poles
12/14/16/18 (As per sweep), Class-I with basic insulation. Class of insulation shall be B
class. The winding wire used for fan should be synthetic enamelled of 30 to 38 SWG.
Connection wire: Flat / round Two core flexible stranded copper wire cord 24/0.2mm ISI
marked.
Paint: Superior quality enamel paint of specified colour for marking Sr. No and date of
rection.
Specifications
Page 287
Tender No: -1800000008
Table 2.6/1
Performance Parameters for Fans suitable for Rated Voltage
S.No.
1
2
3
Sweep
900 mm
1200 mm
1400 mm
Maximum
Input
Power in
watts
Air delivery
in m3/minute
Minimum
Service
Value
at Rated
Voltage
140
215
270
at 180 V
42
50
60
3.4
4.3
4.5
Method of Construction:
Blades of ceiling fan shall be properly fixed. Down rod, clamp shall be carefully fixed with
nut bolt and split pin. Canopies shall be tightened on down rod keeping sufficient clearance.
Wiring connections shall be made with required wire leads. Regulator of fan shall be erected
on provided switchboard with required wire leads.
Testing:
After erection fan shall be tested by connecting to supply at all positions of regulator. Also
steadiness of fan shall be checked at full speed, so that there is no wobbling.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis. (i.e.
each)
B) Exhaust Fans
Scope:
Specification No (FG-FN/EXF)
Supplying and erecting Exhaust fan of specified sweep and speed, with all
accessories
and necessary materials, suitable to work on 230 V / 415 V, AC Supply 50 Hz, erected in
position.
Material:
Exhaust Fan:
ISI marked Exhaust fan suitable for Single/Three phase AC 230/415 Volts 50 Hz, capacitor
run with mounting ring, four numbers of fixing hole without regulator and
louvers.
The weep and speed shall be as per table below. Fan motor with moisture proof treatment
and E class insulation, ISI marked, conforming to IS: 2312/67 with amendments 1 to 8. The
fan mounting rings shall be proper pre-treatment followed with at least two coats of primer;
final finish shall be with two coats of grey colour paint duly baked. The connecting leads
shall be brought out for making connections.
Paint: Superior quality enamel paint of specified colour.
Table 2.6/2
Corresponding Speed with Sweep
Specifications
Page 288
S.No.
1
2
3
4
5
Sweep
375
375
450
450
375
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
Speed in
RPM
900
1400
1400
900
900
Voltage level
230
230
230
230
415
V
V
V
V
V
Tender No: -1800000008
CFM in
m3 /hr
2460
4000
6800
4350
2460
Method of Construction:
The Exhaust fan complete with all above accessories and duly wired shall be erected
specified position, connected to the supply and tested.
at
Testing:
After erection fan shall be tested by connecting to supply. Also steadiness and vibrations
any, of fan shall be checked at full speed, so that there is no wobbling.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis. (i.e
2.7
each)
Accessories for Fans (FG-FAS)
Metal Sheet Cawl
A)
if
(MSC)
Metal Sheet Cawl
Scope:
Specification No (FG-FAS/MSC)
Supplying & erecting metal sheet cawl made from GI sheet of specified shape and with
radius more than the size of exhaust fan. The cawl mounted on angle iron frame to be fixed
to wall with grouting nut & bolts, duly painted.
Material:
GI Sheet: 20/22 SWG
Angle iron: 25x5x3 mm, 40x40x4 mm
MS Flat: 25 x 3 mm
Metal mesh: Expanded metal mesh
GI Wire: 8 SWG
Paint: Red Oxide, Superior quality enamel paint
Grouting bolts: 6 x 100 mm, 10 x 100 mm MS nut, bolts.
Finishing material: Cement, Sand, Putty, and Water.
Method of Construction:
Sector shaped Cawl:
Fabrication of Cawl shall be made from 22 SWG GI Sheet. The cawl shall be of round with
sector shape, having radius more than the radius of exhaust fan. Cawl shall be fixed to the
angle iron frame made from 40x40x4 mm angle, duly welded and the edges made smooth by
removing burrs, etc. At the open end expanded metal mesh shall be fixed with 25x3 mm MS
flat. Spray painting shall be done by applying 1 coat of red oxide and 2 coats of superior
quality enamel paint of colour directed by site engineer. Cawl than shall be fixed on wall by
grouting the foundation bolts. The damaged portion of wall shall be finished properly with
cement mortar, with necessary colour washing. (Refer drawing no FG-FAS-3 (Fig. 5) for
fabrication details.)
Specifications
Page 289
Tender No: -1800000008
Rectangular/Round shaped Cawl:
Fabrication of Cawl shall be made from 20 SWG GI Sheet with slanting flaps at 45 degree.
The cawl shall be of rectangular/round shape, having 10 cms radius more than the radius
of exhaust fan. Cawl shall be fixed to the angle iron frame made from 25x25x3 mm angle,
duly welded and the edges made smooth by removing burrs, etc. At the fan end expanded
metal mesh shall be fixed. The flaps shall be rigidly fixed by GI wire of 8 SWG on the width
wise. Spray painting shall be done by applying 1 coat of red oxide and 2 coats of superior
quality enamel paint of colour directed by site engineer. Cawl than shall be fixed on wall by
grouting the foundation bolts. The damaged portion of wall shall be finished properly with
cement mortar, with necessary colour washing. (Refer drawing no FG-FAS-3 (Fig. 6 & Fig.7)
for fabrication details.)
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis. (i.e. each)
DRAWINGS
Fan clamp for round pipe with hook ( Refer drawing no. FG-FAS-1 (Fig.1)
Fan clamp for I-beam with hook ( Refer drawing no. FG-FAS-1 (Fig.2)
Fan box with hook ( Refer drawing no. FG-FAS-2 (Fig.3)
Specifications
Page 290
Tender No: -1800000008
CHAPTER-3
APPLIANCES
3.1
Water-heaters
AP-WH
3.2
Air-conditioners
AP-AC
3.3
Water-coolers, Refrigerators
AP-WC
3.4
Air Cooler
AP-ACR
3.5
Water Purifier
AP-WPF
3.6
Inverter,
AP-INV
3.7
On line UPS
AP-UPS
3.8
Batteries for Inverter & UPS
No Specs
3.9
Voltage Stabilizers
AP-VS
Chapter 3 Appliances: (AP)
3.1
Water Heaters (AP-WH)
A)Storage / Pressure type Water Heaters (STWH)
Scope:
Specification No (AP-WH/STWH)
Supplying, erecting and testing of horizontal/ vertical, stove enameled, storage/pressure
type water heater, suitable for wall / floor mounting, of specified capacity, one inlet with non
Specifications
Page 291
Tender No: -1800000008
return valve, one outlet with dead weight, pressure reducing valve, stop cock; suitable to
work on 230/250-V single phase AC Supply, heating element of specified wattage,
thermostat, control fusible plug, pilot lamp etc. ISI mark only and marking of S No. and
date of erection. (IS 2082)
Material:
Outer Casing: Corrosion proof stove enameled/ powder coated, mild steel /
engineering
plastic body. Colour of the casing shall be as directed by Engineer incharge.
Inner tank: It should be of electrolytic copper (99% pure) properly fabricated so as
to be leak proof and of specified capacity.
Heating Element: Mineral filled / tubular / copper cord & nickel plated, and conforming to
IS: 4159, of specified wattage.
Pilot Lamp: A neon gas field indicating lamp shows functioning of heating elements along
with thermostat & thermal cut-out.
Thermal Insulation: Resin bonded glass wool slab insulation & should be filled between
two casings of storage water heater.
Thermostat: A Stem type snap action thermostat, which should cut off the electric
supply automatically as per setting of temperature & should be ISI mark.
Thermal Cut-out: In case of thermostat failure this cutout should cut off the electric
supply automatically and should restart only on pressing the reset knob.
Pressure Release Valve: If pressure exceeds above 50 psi, it should release the pressure &
should be fitted on the inlet pipe.
Dead weight: It will operate when pressure in inside tank increase beyond specified limit.
Fusible plug: Cast aluminium body with threading, and hole for plug with fusible metal.
The metal shall be fused, only all the other safeties fails & at high pressure
Hardware: 100x10 mm grouting bolts, MS washers, nuts, etc.
Wall Fasteners: 100x10 mm with vertical cuts, and pin at the centre, washer and nut, etc.,
made of MS. (Similar to Anchor bolt fastener)
Grouting material: Cement, Sand, water, etc.
Paint: Superior quality enamel paint of specified colour.
Method of Construction:
The water heater shall be erected in required position with necessary hardware’s and base is
grouted, as per the site situation. The water heater is to be connected to
water supply on inlet side by valve, mountings and connected to outlet tap.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis. (i.e. each)
3.2
Air Conditioners (AC)
A)Window Model Air Conditioners (WAC)
Scope:
Specification No (AP-AC/WAC)
•
•
•
•
•
Supplying, erecting, and testing Window model room air conditioner of specified tonnage,
conforming to I.S.1391 suitable for operation on single phase, AC supply, 230/250 Volts 50
Hz, using best quality compressor, dehumidifier in provided air circulating, ventilators and
fitting in position in recess or in window to required size, and connected to supply, and
marking of S No. and date of erection.
The AC unit shall be capable of performing following functions:
Cooling
Dehumidifying
Air Circulating
Air Filtering
Ventilation
Specifications
Page 292
Tender No: -1800000008
The Window AC should be of minimum 3 Star rating as directed by B.E.E.
Material:
Compressor:
The room air conditioners shall be fitted with hermetically sealed type suction cooled
(Reciprocating) or discharge cooled (Rotary) compressor with suitable rated capacitor start
electric motor. It should start unloaded and shall be equipped with overload protection. The
compressor shall be mounted on resilient mountings for quiet operation. The compressor
shall conform to IS.10617 (part-1): 1983 with amendment 1 & 2.
Cooling capacity for Compressors shall be as under:
For 1.5 Ton
Minimum 4750 kcal/hour
For 2.0 Ton
Minimum 6250 kcal/hour
Energy efficiency ratio for Compressor shall be minimum 2.625 kcal/hour/watt.
Cabinet:
The cabinet of the air conditioner be made from either galvanized MS sheet of 1mm
thickness or aluminium alloy sheet of 1.2mm thickness. The sheets shall be suitably
stiffened by embossing the fabrication work and shall be of suitable workmanship. The
sheets shall be suitably phosphate and protected by powder coated paint. The galvanized
steel sheets shall conform to IS: 277:2003 and have a coating grade of 120 gm/m2.
Air Filter: The air filters provided shall be of cleanable type and made of synthetic
material.
Thermostat:
The air-conditioner shall be fitted with thermostat suitable for a working range from 16
degree Centigrade to 35 degree Centigrade with a differential of +/-1 degree Centigrade, with
operational voltage as 240V and current rating not exceeding 25
amps. The thermostat shall conform to IS: 11338:1985.
Condenser: As per (FG-FG/AS7) specified in chapter 2.4
Paint: Superior quality enamel paint of specified colour.
Method of Construction:
The AC unit shall be fixed in the recess/window with necessary materials. The outer frame
shall be fitted to recess or cutout made in window making the recess/window airtight, duly
connecting the unit to power supply by means of metal clad switch & plug and giving
satisfactory trials.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis. (i.e. each)
B) Split type Air Conditioners (SAC)
Scope:
Specification No (AP-AC/SAC)
•
•
•
•
•
Supplying, erecting, and testing Split type room air- conditioner of specified tonnage,
conforming to I.S.1391, having one/two air handling units Hi-wall / ceiling (suitable for
false ceiling) mounting type having cooling unit and the outdoor condensing unit connected
with 12/9 mm copper piping up to 6 meter duly insulated and 3 core copper flexible cord of
required length etc. with stand for condensing unit, complete with testing etc. (Conforming
to IS: 1391 Part-I & Part-II with all amendments & as per BEE) suitable for operation on
single phase, AC supply, 230/250 Volts 50 Hz, using best quality compressor, and fitting in
position as per site situation and as directed by site engineer, duly connected to supply, and
marking of S No. and date of erection.
The AC unit shall be capable of performing following functions:
Cooling
Dehumidifying
Air Circulating
Air Filtering
Ventilation
The Split type AC should be minimum 3 Star rating as directed by B.E.E.
Specifications
Page 293
Tender No: -1800000008
Material:
Compressor:
The air conditioners shall be fitted with hermetically sealed type suction cooled reciprocation
or discharge cooled rotary compressor (as applicable), compressor unit operating on
Refrigerant R-22 with suitable rated capacitor start electric motor. It shall be equipped with
overload protection. These shall be mounted on resilient mountings for quiet operation. The
compressor shall conform to IS: 10617 part (1) -1983 (amendment 1 & 2)
The air conditioners shall be complete with automatic temperature control and cut-in and
cut-out etc. for temperature range 16 degrees to 35 deg. C. The differential of the thermostat
for cut-in and cut-out shall not be greater than +/- 1 degree Centigrade.
Outdoor Cabinet:
The cabinet of the evaporator unit and condensing unit shall be made from galvanized steel
sheet of 1.0mm thick with stiffness for robust construction and shall have rounded corners,
steel parts/front panel etc. shall have stove-enameled finish preceded by undercoat of anti
corrosive primer paint phosphate and through cleaning of the surface. Alternate method of
corrosion protection like plastic powder coating, electrostatic paintings are also acceptable
in lieu of stove enameled finish. Galvanized sheet shall conform to IS: 277/ 2003.
Indoor Unit:
The indoor units made of ABS/HIPS shall be of flame retardant and impact resistant life.
ABS/HIPS indoor unit cabinet shall pass in flammability test requirement for Grade V-O as
per UL -94. For impact resistance the unit duly packed, when dropped from a height of 1
metre shall show no damage.
Air Filter: The air filters provided shall be of cleanable type and made of synthetic
material.
Thermostat: Thermostat or electronic thermostat as per IS 11338: 1985.
Condenser: As per (FG-FG/AS7) specified in chapter 2.4
Piping:
Suction line -Copper pipe of min 0.70mm thickness and of suitable diameter
as per manufacturers design.
Liquid line -Copper pipe of min 0.70mm thickness and of suitable diameter
as per manufacturers design.
Drain pipe
-15mm dia flexible PVC pipe.
Connection Cable: Suitable capacity 3 Core PVC insulated FRLS copper wire to
be electrically connected to both the units.
Paint: Superior quality enamel paint of specified colour.
Remote Control: Remote control (Cordless) shall be provided with one On/Off timer,
selecting Fan speed(Three speeds) and setting up of temperature.
Drain Pipe: Drain pipe (15mm dia flexible PVC pipe).
Method of Construction:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The installation shall comprise the following work:
Mounting/Fitting indoor & outdoor units at the respective locations on provided MS stands
with necessary hardware’s.
Laying refrigerant piping of 6m length and connecting both the units after drilling
hole/holes in the wall, if required. The thickness of the copper tubing shall not be less than
0.70mm and diameter of required size by flaring, threading, etc.
Insulating the suction pipe with expanded polyethylene of foam 5mm tubing.
Laying 15mm drain pipe to throw out the condensate water formed in the Indoor unit.
Leak testing of the entire system.
Charging Refrigerant gas in the unit.
Suitable electric wiring between indoor and outdoor units up to 6 m length & up to switch
within 3 metre of location of indoor unit.
Testing and giving satisfactory trials.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis. (i.e. each)
3.3
Specifications
Water Coolers, Refrigerators (WCR)
Page 294
Tender No: -1800000008
A) Water Coolers (WC)
Scope:
Specification No (AP-WCR/WC)
Supplying, erecting, testing and commissioning self contained water cooler with specified
storage capacity & cooling capacity, and marking S No and date of erection.
Material:
Water Cooler:
The water cooler shall be suitable for operation on 230 V +/- 10% , 50 Hz, single phase AC
supply with hermetically sealed type suction cooled compressor with overload
protection
conforming to IS :-10617(part I) : 1983 with amendment no 1&2.
Tank:
Tank shall be fabricated from SS sheet of 0.8 mm min. thickness as per ISI 304 and shall be
made by electrically seam welded lap joints or alternatively from 0.63 mm thickness
stainless steel sheet with PUF insulation, with required number of Taps. However tank
fabricated by double seam jointing is also acceptable if the same is reinforced and sealed by
lead free solder material. Use of lead soldering material for sealing the joints of water tank is
not permitted. Water tank cover and lid bottom shall be made of 1.25 mm aluminum sheet
duly anodized / epoxy painted / high impact polystyrene (HIP) of 1.5 mm thickness. Positive
locking of the lead is to be provided (lock with two keys). A drain valve at the bottom of the
storage tank to be provided to draw out water while cleaning.
Cabinet (Body):
The cabinet of the water cooler shall be made of GS or SS sheet of 1.0 mm. The front panel,
below the water outlets in the storage type water coolers shall be made of
stainless
steel of 0.8 mm. The drain pan for storage type water coolers shall be made of stainless steel
sheet of 0.63 mm upto size 40 liters/hour and beyond 40 liters/hour of 0.8 mm thickness.
The bottom pedestal shall be made of 2.65 mm minimum thick stainless steel sheet.
Pedestal shall have a minimum ground clearance of 100 mm for ease of cleaning. Pedestal
shall be strong enough to withstand weight with storage tank full and shall be reinforced to
prevent skewing. The body shall be held securely with the pedestal with stainless steel nuts
and bolts. The drain size should be 25 mm or above. In case water outlets are provided on
three sides then all the three lower panels should be made of aluminium sheet or stainless
steel sheet.
The mild steel components used in the manufacture of the cabinet shall be individually
degreased, pickled, scrubbed and rinsed to remove grease, rust, scale or any other foreign
elements. Immediately after pickling the MS parts shall be given phosphate treatment. The
components along with the front panels shall then be given a primer coat with a finish coat
of stove with a finish coat of stove enamel paint. The finish shall be smooth and uniform
with hard tough film of the enamel adhering to the surface. The finish shall be free from all
the visible defects and shall not chip when tapped lightly with a dull pointed instrument.
Alternatively method of corrosion protection like plastic powder coating, electrostatic
painting shall be permitted
Refrigeration coils to be fully soldered to the outside of the tank for good thermal
contact and not merely tack welded.
There shall not be any gap between water tank cover (mask) and water tank to prevent
rodent/ insect/ dust entry.
Water tank overflow should be adequately covered with strainer such as wire mesh etc
to
avoid rodent/ insect/ dust entry.
Condenser Fan Motor: The condenser fan motor shall be capacitor start and capacitor run
(CSR) or permanently split capacitor (PSC) or alternatively permanently lubricated motor
may be provided.
Thermostat: The thermostat shall conform to IS: 11338-1985. The position of the
thermostat shall be adjustable through a rotary switch mounted on the front or side
Specifications
Page 295
Tender No: -1800000008
panels. Min and max of
the thermostat setting shall be from 0 degree Celsius
and
25 degree Celsius which shall be marked.
Method of Construction:
The water cooler shall be fixed at designated place or as directed by the site engineer, duly
connected with inlet and drain by leak proof joints. The water cooler is to be erected on
stand and tested.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis. (i.e. each)
3.4
Air Coolers (ACR)
A) Desert type Air Coolers
(DAC)
Scope:
Specification No (AP-ACR/DAC)
Supplying and erecting and testing evaporative air cooler (desert Cooler) with fibre body,
230/250 Volts, 50 cycles, comprising of fan, pump,, drip proof motor , filter pads,
confirming to IS: 3315 and having specified cooling capacity, complete with 5 metre long 3
core cable and 5A hand shield type three pin top and marking S No. and date of erection.
Material:
Exhaust fan for Inlet air:
Exhaust fan shall be complete with motor and ISI marked to IS: 2312:1967 with amendment
No 1 to 8. Fan shall be complete with motor and fan, motor shall be ISI marked to IS:
996:1979 with amendment No 1, 2 &3. Cooler pump shall be ISI marked, and confirming to
IS: 11951:1987 with amendment No 1 to 4. Exhaust fan shall be of 900mm (6 pole motor)
and shall have single speed
Cooler:
Cooler shall be suitable for operation on 230 volts +/- 10%, single phase, 50 Hz AC supply.
Pump set shall conform to IS: 11951-1987 with amendment no.1 to 4. The coolers shall be
omplete with fan, motor, filter pads, water pump, etc. Fan motor will be of 1400 rpm (4
poles) and shall have three speeds. Filter panel, front grill, and top of the cooler body shall
be made of 0.8 mm galvanized steel sheet. The sump tank and rest of the body shall be
made of 1.2 mm thick galvanized steel sheet. The galvanized steel sheet shall be ISI marked
and shall have
zinc coating not less than 120 gm/m2 and shall conform to IS: 2772003. All internal surfaces including inside of the tank, fan blades, motor body, pump,
pump body and frame shall be painted with water resistant paint conforming to IS: 98621981 with amendment No 1.
Water pump shall be provided with proper clamping arrangement. The shaft of the pump
shall be stainless steel. Impeller, housing, and fan shall be of polypropylene.
The pump
shall conform to IS: 11951-1987 with amendment No 1 to 4 and shall be ISI marked.
Suitable nylon bushes shall be provided in the grill for easy and smooth movement of
louvers.
The filter pads shall contain wood wool. The filter pads shall be fixed over the panel and
secured by clamping guard of galvanized wire of 2 mm dia approx and net size 50 to 75
mm approx, square/ rectangular. The wire guard shall be fixed in the clamps
to avoid
any sagging.
15 mm size punched hole shall be provided to fix the float valve where required.
The drain plug of brass shall be fitted in such a way so as to be able to completely drain the
water from the tank.
The inside wiring connection shall be through suitable non- ferrous thimbles and the
live
contacts of rotary switch shall be protected by suitable enclosure of insulating material.
Rotary switches:
The cooler shall be provided rotary/ piano type On-Off and speed selection switch for three
speed cooler fan motor.
Specifications
Page 296
Tender No: -1800000008
Method of Construction:
The air cooler shall be fixed at designated place or as directed by the site engineer, duly
connected to electric supply by means of 3 core copper wire and tested.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis. (i.e. each)
3.6Inverter (AP-INV)
General
This part of the specifications covers the technical aspects of the Digital pure Sine wave
Inverter.
Scope:
Supplying, erecting, testing & commissioning of Digital pure sine wave Inverter with
necessary safeties, etc.
Specification No (AP-INV)
Material:
Equipment manufactured as per standard manufacturer’s specification. The unit housed in
powder coated CRCA sheet enclosure with following fault protection on mains / inverter mode:
Under voltage on mains mode
Over voltage on mains mode
Charger protection on mains mode
Overload on inverter mode
Short circuit on inverter mode
Low battery on inverter mode
Battery reverse on inverter mode
Under voltage on inverter mode
Over voltage on inverter mode
LED display for above fault protection
Alarm for above fault protection
Arrangement to cut of neutral of supplier when supply from invertors is on.
In addition to above the inverter shall comply with the specifications mentioned in Table No.
3.6/1
Table No. 3.6/1
Additional Specifications for Inverter
S.No.
1
2
Specifications / Features
Input AC range
Under Voltage
Under Voltage restoration
Over Voltage
Over Voltage restoration
Output
on Maximum power
Inverter Mode
Minimum Efficiency
3
Conversion
4
Inverter
mode
protection
Specifications
Voltage (Inverter mode)
Frequency (Inverter mode)
Overload
Transfer time
Switching device
Harmonic distortion
Low battery
Battery reverse
Over load
Standard Parameters
180 +/- 5 V
185 +/- 5 V
260 +/- 5 V
255 +/- 5 V
As specified
85 % (As per Clause 7.9.3
of ISS)
230 V Nominal +/- 12%
50 Hz +/- 2%
> 110% for 10 minutes
30 ms
MOSFET or IGBT.
<5%
Electronic trip
Through fuse
Electronic trip
Page 297
6
7
Mains
mode
protection
Battery
Battery charger
8
LED Display
9
Alarms
10
Environmental
11
Enclosure
5
Short Circuit
Over load / Short Circuit
Charger
Charging time
Constant voltage with current limit
Switch On, Inverter ON, Low battery
Pre-alarm, Battery low, Mains ON,
Smart
charge,
Overload, Short
Circuit, Battery fuse fail, Battery
reverse, MCB Trip.
Low battery Pre-Alarm
Overload Pre-alarm
Short Circuit
MCB Trip
Operating temperature
Storage temperature
Humidity
CRCA/MS sheet minimum 1.2 mm
thick
Tender No: -1800000008
Electronic trip
Through MCB
Through MCB
10 – 12 hours
10 amp with boost voltage
& float voltage as per
manufacturer’s
specification
High power factor boost
charger
As per manufacturer’s
standard specification
Continuous beeping
Continuous beeping
Continuous beeping
Continuous beeping
0 - 400 C
0 - 400 C
0 -95 % RH noncondensing
Aesthetically
finished,
duly pre treated and
powder coated.
Mode of Measurement:
Executed quantity will be measured on number basis. (i.e. each)
3.7On Line UPS (UPS)
General
This part of the specifications covers the technical aspects of the Online UPS system for 1 to
10 kVA capacity.
Scope:
Specification No (AP-UPS)
Supplying, erecting, testing & commissioning of Online UPS with
necessary safeties,
etc.
Material:
Equipment manufactured as per standard manufacturer’s specification and as
tabulated in
Table No. 3.7/2. The unit housed in powder coated CRCA sheet
enclosure with following
fault protection on mains / UPS mode:
Under voltage on mains mode
Over voltage on mains mode
Charger protection on mains mode
Overload on UPS mode
Short circuit on UPS mode
Low battery on UPS mode
Battery reverse on UPS mode
Under voltage on UPS mode
Over voltage on UPS mode
LED & LCD display for above fault protection
Specifications
Page 298
Tender No: -1800000008
Alarm for above fault protection
Batteries shall be of Sealed Maintenance Free type (Tubular). The selection of number
of batteries required shall be as per Table No 3.7/1
Table No. 3.7/1
Details of Batteries required for the UPS in respect to the Backup Period.
kVA
rating
1kVA
2kVA
3kVA
5/6
kVA
8kVA
10kVA
A)
B)
C)
Outpu
t pf
No of
SMF
Batterie
s
15
mins.
36V
96V
192V
0.7
0.7
0.8
3
8
16
192V
240V
240V
0.8
0.8
0.8
16
20
20
DC
Voltag
e
Back Up Period
1Hr
2Hrs
3Hrs
17AH
17AH
17AH
30
mins.
2X
17AH
26AH
17AH
42AH
42AH
26AH
65AH
65AH
42AH
100AH
100AH
65AH
17AH
17AH
26AH
26AH
26AH
42AH
42AH
42AH
65AH
65AH
100AH
2X 65AH
100AH
2X 65AH
2X 100AH
The Batteries considered are Sealed Maintenance Free Batteries
(SMF)
The Batteries need to be placed in Ambient Temperature of 20Deg C 25Deg C
The UPS is considered to be working @ 90% Load of its capacity
Table No. 3.7/2
Specifications & Standard Parameters of On Line UPS
The UPS shall comply with specifications as indicated in the following table:
S.No. Specifications / Features
Standard Parameters
1
Technology
True online Double Conversion design
(DSP / Microprocessor based)
2
Input voltage range
160 V to 270 V for 1 Phase Input
335 V to 477 V for 3 Phase Input
3
Input power factor
Near unity Power factor
> 0.93 for 1 Phase input
4
Generator compatibility
Yes (1.2 times the UPS rating)
5
Nominal input frequency
50 Hz +/- 6 %
6
Rectifier type
Advance Rectifier with inbuilt APFC (Advance
Power Factor Compensated) for 1 Phase.
IGBT charger Advance Rectifier with inbuilt
APFC (Advance Power Factor Compensated)
for 3 Phase.
7
Output Voltage
230 V AC +/- 1 % for 1 Phase Output.
400 V AC (380/415 selectable) for 3 Phase &
Neutral.
8
Total
distortion
9
Overload Capacity
Specifications
Harmonic
1 Phase Output
< 3 % for Linear load
< 5 % for Non-linear load
3 Phase Output
< 2 % for Linear load
< 5 % for Non-linear load
110 % for 10 Seconds & 130 % for 2 Seconds
for 1 & 2 kVA UPS.
125 % for 10 Minutes & 150 % for 60
Page 299
10
Inverter
11
Crest Factor
12
13
Static Bypass
Display
14
15
Output Power factor
Load in terms of PC per
kVA. (PC with 15” CRT
Monitor)
Battery type
DC Voltage
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Battery charger current
limit
Ambient temperature
Noise level
Testing standards
Isolation Galvanic
Tender No: -1800000008
Seconds for 3 to 10 kVA UPS.
IGBT based PWM with Digital control
(Microprocessor based)
3: 1 for 1 & 2 kVA UPS.
5: 1 for 3 to 10 kVA UPS.
Automatic bypass switch facility
Should be User friendly with LED & LCD
display with showing important parameters.
0.7 lag to Unity within kVA & kW rating.
3 PC’s per kVA (for 1 & 2 kVA UPS)
5 PC’s per kVA (for 3 to 10 kVA UPS)
SMF / Thick plate / Tubular
1 kVA – 36 V, 2 kVA – 96 V, 3 & 5 kVA – 192
V,
8 to 10 kVA – 240 V
1 & 2 kVA – 6 A, 3 & 5 kVA – 4 & 6 A,
8 & 10 kVA – 8 & 15 A.
450 C
< 50 db @ 3 metres
IEC 62040 Part III
Isolation transformer from 3 to 10 kVA
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity will be measured on number basis. (i.e.
each.
3.9
A)
Voltage Stabilizer (VS)
Servo Motor controlled Voltage Stabilizer (SVS)
Scope:
Specification No (AP-VS/SVS)
Providing single phase auto/manual line voltage servo motor operated voltage
stabilizer
confirming to IS 9815-1981 of specified KVA capacity duly tested with guarantee for one year
marking S. No. & date of erection.
Material:
Single Phase auto/manual line voltage stabilizer confirming to IS 9815-1981 with
following components:
Motorized variable voltage auto transformer.
Double wound Buck boost/series transformer
Servo control sensing card (PCB)
Suitable for input 160 to 250 volts & output voltage 230 + 1%
Zero wave distortion losses should be negligible with 95% efficiency
No phase shift.
No effect of load power factor.
Natural air-cooled.
Correction rate 20 to 30 volts per second.
Audio alarm for over voltage & under voltage.
Volt meter 0-300 volts with selectors switch to monitor input & output voltage, overload
& short circuit protection.
Method of Construction:
The stabilizer shall be installed at designated place as directed by engineer inwith both input & output connected, with necessary testing.
Specifications
Page 300
charge,
Tender No: -1800000008
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity will be measured on number basis. (i.e.
Each)
Specifications
Page 301
Tender No: -1800000008
CHAPTER-4
ENERGY SAVING DEVICES
4.1
Solar Hot water system
ESD-SHWS
4.2
Pipes for Solar Hot Water
System
ESD-HWP
4.3
Solar Lighting
ESD-SOL
4.4
Energy Devices (Harmonic
Active Filter, APFC Panel
with Harmonic filters)
4.5 Miscellaneous
4.5 Drawings
Specifications
ESD-ESD/DAHF
ESD-ESD/APFC
No Specs
Page 302
Tender No: -1800000008
Chapter 4 :Energy Saving Devices (ESD)
4.1
Solar Hot Water Systems
(SHWS)
Scope:
Specification No (ESD-SHWS)
Supplying, erecting, testing and commissioning of Solar Water Heating System with &
without heat exchanger for cold & warm regions respectively with Solar flat plate collector
conforming to IS: 12933 (part 1) with amdt.no.1 and IS: 12933 (Part 2)/2003 suitable for
inlet water with chlorine and fluorine content up to 100 ppm and supply hot water at the
outlet. (Refer drawing no.ESD-SHWS-1)
Material:
1. Solar water heating system:
Comprising of solar flat plate collector, collectors stand assembly, stainless steel insulated
hot water storage tank with heat exchanger and various other components.
Solar flat plate collector component shall have:
•
•
•
Solar flat plate collector cover plate made of toughened glass
Sheet for absorber made of copper
Absorber made of copper sheet and copper tube.
2. Solar Flat Plate Collector:
Solar flat plate collector shall conforming to IS: 12933 (Part 1) with amdt.no.1 and IS:
12933 (Part 2)/2003 and various components shall be as under:
Cover plate: Cover plate shall be toughened glass and thickness of 4.0 mm (min.)
conforming to section-1 of IS: 12933(Part-2)/2003. The solar transmittance of the cover
plate shall be minimum 82 percent at near normal incidence.
Collector Box: Collector box shall be made of Aluminium sections only. Type, grade, size,
workmanship and finish of the material used shall be as per section-2 of IS: 12933
(pt2/2003. The minimum thickness of Aluminium shall be as under:
a) Channel section for sides 1.6 mm
b) Sheet for bottom 0.7 mm
c) Support for glass retaining 1.2 mm
d) Sheet for entire body 1.0 mm
3. Absorber:
Absorber shall consist of riser, header, and sheet for absorber. The Diameter of header shall
be 25.4 +/-0.5mm and thickness 0.71mm. The Diameter of riser shall be 12.7 +/- 0.5mm
and thickness 0.56mm and made of copper only. The distance between the risers from
center to center shall be 120mm. Type grade, size, workmanship and finish of the material
used shall be as per section-3 of IS:12933 (Part 2)/2003.
Riser and header assembly designed for working pressure up to 24.5 K Pa (2.5
kg/cm2 shall be tested for leakage at a minimum hydraulic pressure of 490 K Pa (5 kg/cm2).
Sheet for absorber:
Sheet for absorber shall be made of copper only. Type, grade, size,
workmanship and
finis of the material used shall be as per sectiob-3 of IS: 12933 (pt2)/2003. A sample piece of
the absorber for having minimum area of 400 square cm. shall be heated in an oven at
temperature of 175 degree C for 2 hours. After heating, the sample shall be taken out from
the oven and cooled at room temperature. The cooled sample shall be inspected visually for
damages, if any.
There shall not be any appearance of
blistering/rupture/peeling
off of the coated/painted surface and of weakening of the bonding between absorber sheet
and risers/headers.
Collector box insulation: Insulation shall be provided at back and sides. Thermal
Resistance ® of insulation material shall be minimum 0.96 m square degree C/W for back
insulation and minimum 0.48 m square degree C/W for side insulation. This shall be
derived after determining thermal conductivity (K) value at 100 degree C mean temperature
Specifications
Page 303
Tender No: -1800000008
in accordance with IS:3346.Collector box insulation shall conform to sec.4 of IS: 12933(Part2)/2003
Gaskets and Grommets: Gaskets and Grommets shall conform to sec.5 of IS: 12933 (Part2)/2003.
4. Insulated hot water storage tank: The thickness of the water storage tank shall be
uniform.
Material: Insulated hot water storage tank shall be non-pressure type and made of
stainless steel grade (X04Cr19Ni9 or X07Cr18Ni9 of IS: 1570(part 5) /1985), TIG welded.
Insulation: Solar water heating system (SWHS) up to and including 500 LPD shall be
insulated with 40mm thermal grade PUF insulation of 32 Kg/ meter cube or higher density.
PUF insulation could be pre extruded type fitted with FRP exterior cladding or alternatively
injection moulded in a twin walled steel tank and PPE end cap. Other systems shall be
insulated with 100 mm thick Rock wool of 48Kg/m3 density with 22swg Aluminium
cladding. Systems up to 500 LPD may also alternatively be installed with 100 mm thick
Rock wool of same specifications with aluminium or GI powder coated cladding.
Tank stand: Tank stand assembly shall be made of MS angle of size (min) 38x38x4 mm
duly pre-treated and stove enamelled with black Colour paint. Alternatively tubular
structure with Powder coating could also be provided.
5. Heat Exchanger: Heat Exchanger shall be cage type and made of copper/stainless steel
tubes of grade X04Cr19Ni9 or X07Cr18Ni9 of IS: 1570(part 5)/1985 .Heat exchangers shall
have a minimum of 0.24 sq. meters heat transfer area per 100 LPD capacities.
6. System inter connecting piping: ISI marked G.I. pipes, medium class of IS: 1239 duly
insulated with 50mm thick rock wool of 48 Kg/m3 density and 26swg Al cladding. EPDM
hose pipes can also be used for systems up to and including 500LPD.
7. Collector stand: Collector stand assembly shall be made of MS angle of size 38x38x4 mm
duly pre-treated and stove enamelled with black Colour paint. Alternatively tubular
structure with Powder coating could also be provided.
8. Make up water tank: The capacity of make up tank shall be 5 litres up to 500 LPD and 10
litres for 1000 LPD and above.
9. Electrical heaters: Electrical heater shall be ISI marked. Electrical heater backup shall be
two nos. each of rating 3 KW for 500 LPD, 3 nos. each of rating 3 KW for 1000 LPD, 4 nos.
each of rating 3 KW for 2000 LPD and 2 nos. of 3 KW rating in each of the three phase for
3000 LPD.
10. Temperature Gauge: Dial type, duly calibrated and suitable for temperature range from 0
degree C to 120 degree C and shall be provided for capacity above 500 LPD.
11. Valves: 3 valves, one for inlet, outlet, and make up tank each.
Method of Construction:
The entire Solar Hot water system with all accessories shall be installed at
place, with necessary plumbing, wiring and testing.
designated
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity will be counted on number basis. (i.e. each)
4.2 Pipes for Solar Hot Water System (ESD-HWP)
A)
Thermal insulated GI pipes: (TIP)
Scope:
Specification No (ESD-HWP/TGP)
Supplying and erecting ISI mark GI Pipe with accessories, as piping for solar hot
water system of specified diameter with resin bonded flap rock wool/glass wool
insulation with aluminium cladding to withstand the temperature of 100 degree C
maximum, complete as
directed by the site engineer.
Specifications
Page 304
Tender No: -1800000008
Material:
GI Pipe: As per (CW-PLB/GP) specified in chapter 17.5 for Plumbing
Glass Wool: Superior quality with thermal conductivity value 1.67 per cm2 per watt.
Rock wool: Superior quality with density of 30 – 32 kg/ cm2
Bonding material: Resin or adhesive.
Cladding material: Aluminum sheet of 26 SWG or Plastic sheet, Chicken mesh.
MS Clamps: Clamps fabricated of required length and shape, of 3 mm thick mild steel
having 25 mm width.
Hardware: Sheet Metal (SM) screws of required sizes, plugs/wooden gutties, etc.
Method of Construction:
Before preparing the piping, exact measurements shall be taken. The pipes shall be
insulated either by rock wool or with glass wool as explained below:
Glass wool insulation: Firstly the outer surface shall be cleaned so as to make it free from
oily substance, if any. Then the glass wool shall be pasted with resin or adhesive uniformly
for a thickness of 50 mm. The glass wool shall then be covered with plastic sheet so as to
hold it in position, this will form the insulation. Then the aluminium sheet shall be fixed to
the insulation and the ends shall be securely fixed with SM screws. The insulation at fixing
ends of pipe (i.e. at coupling, bend, elbows, Tee’s, valves, etc) shall be done after the piping
is fixed to the system. The entire insulated piping shall be tested for leakages, temperature.
Rock wool insulation: As mentioned above, but with rock wool bonded to the pipe and
covered with chicken mesh to hold in its place.
The insulated piping shall be fixed on wall or at any other location directed by the site
engineer, with MS clamps fixed with SM screws, with plugs, wooden gutties (for erection
on stone wall) complete. In addition to above the erection shall meet the requirements
mentioned in para 4.2.1 of chapter 17.5 for Plumbing.
Mode of Measurement:
Executed quantity shall be measured on running meter basis, including the entire
accessory. The lengths shall be measured net on the straight and bends along the
center line of the pipes and fittings correct up to a cm. (i.e. per meter)
B)
Polyethylene Composite Pipes: (PCP)
Scope:
Specification No (ESD-HWP/PCP)
Supplying and erecting Polyethylene Composite Pipe with accessories, as piping for
solar hot water system of specified diameter, suitable for continuous operating
temp. of 95 degree C. and rated pressure of 6.9 Kg / sq. cm at 82 degree C complete
as directed by the site engineer. The pipe shall have chemical composition prepared as per
ASTMF1282-02 specifications (pressure rating of 13.8 kg per sq cm and 11 kg per sq. cm at
60 degree, short term excursions to 95 degree C) and shall
not affect the overall
performance
Material:
Composite Pipes & accessories:
Pipes shall be made from aluminum and polyethylene composite by combining the two
materials along with adhesive layers. The pipe shall have the following properties:
Properties of Pipe:
a) No thermal expansion and deformation.
Specifications
Page 305
Tender No: -1800000008
High flexibility, frost resistant, ready to use with plastic.
Malleable. Easy to form curves, bends.
Corrosion free.
No scaling build up, to avoid reduction in flow of water.
Non-toxic, rust free and shall not allow growth of micro-organisms to make it
contamination free.
g) Fire retardant with Low smoke.
h) UV resistant and shall be Opaque.
i) Pipe walls shall not allow Permeation. (No entry of foreign material inside the
pipe through the pipe walls)
j) Low coefficient of linear expansion.
k) Thermal expansion of 25x10-6 degree Kelvin (Expansion/Contraction rate
shall be less than 10% of Plastic pipe). Anti-freezing, with thermal
conductivity of 0.43 watt /m degree Kelvin.
MS Clamps: Clamps fabricated of required length and shape, of 3 mm thick mild steel
having 25 mm width.
Hardware: Sheet Metal (SM) screws of required sizes, plugs/wooden gutties, etc.
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
Method of Construction:
Before preparing the piping, exact measurements shall be taken. The pipe shall bejoined by
compression/crimp fitted with internal as well as external end with
necessary sealing
arrangement, to make it leak proof.
The piping shall be fixed on wall or at any other location directed by the site engineer, with
MS clamps fixed with SM screws, with plugs, wooden gutties (for erection on stone wall)
complete. In addition to above the erection shall meet the requirements mentioned in para
4.2.1 of chapter 17.5 for Plumbing.
Mode of Measurement:
Executed quantity shall be measured on running meter basis, including the entire
accessory. The lengths shall be measured net on the straight and bends along the
center line of the pipes and fittings correct up to a cm. (i.e. per meter)
4.3 Solar Lighting (ESD-SOL)
A) Solar Street Light (SOL)
Scope:
Specification No (ESD-SOL/STL)
Supplying & erecting Solar Street Light Fittings suitable for specified wattage of CFL,
along with GI/MS Pipe Pole. The system should be designed to automatically switch
ON at dusk, operate throughout the night, and automatically switch OFF at the
dawn, under average daily, solar radiation conditions of 5 kWh/m2 on a horizontal surface.
(Refer drawing no.ESD-SOL-1 (Fig.1))
Material:
•
•
•
•
•
1.
PV Module(s):
The PV module(s) shall contain crystalline silicon solar cells.
The power output of the module(s) under STC should be a minimum of 74 W, either two
modules of minimum 37W output each or one module of 74W output should be used.
The operating voltage corresponding to the power output mentioned above should be 16.4 V.
The open circuit voltage of the PV modules under STC should be at least 21.0 Volts.
The terminal box on the module should have a provision of opening for replacing the cable, if
required.
Specifications
Page 306
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Tender No: -1800000008
2. Inverter:
The inverter should be of quasi sine wave or full sine wave type with frequency in the range
of 20-35 KHz.
The total electronic efficiency should be at least 80%.
No blackening or reduction in the lumen output by more than 10% should be observed after
1000 ON/OFF cycles (two minutes ON followed by four minutes OFF is one cycle).
The idle current consumption should not be more than 10 mA.
Electronics should operate at 12 V and should have temperature compensation for proper
charging of the battery through out the year.
Necessary length of wires, cables, and fuses should be provided.
The PV module will be used to sense the ambient light level for switching ON and OFF the
lamp.
3. Electronic Protections:
Adequate protection is to be incorporated under no load conditions e.g. when the lamp is
removed and the system is switched ON.
The system should have protection against battery overcharge and deep discharge
conditions.
Fuses should be provided to protect against battery overcharge and deep discharge
conditions.
A blocking diode should be provided as a part of the electronics to prevent reverse flow of
current throughout the PV module(s), in case such diode is not provided with the solar
module(s).
Full protection against open circuit accidental short circuit and reverse polarity should be
provided.
4. Mechanical Hardware:
A metallic frame structure (with corrosion resistance paint) to be fixed on the pole to hold
the SPV module(s). The frame structure should have provision to adjust its angle of
inclination to the horizontal between 0 and 45 degrees so that the module(s) can be oriented
at the specified tilt angle.
The pole should be made of mild steel pipe with a height of 4 meters above the ground level,
after grouting and final installation. The pole should have the provision to hold the weather
proof lamp housing. It should be painted with a corrosion resistant paint.
A vented acid proof and corrosion resistant painted metallic box for outdoor use should be
provided for housing the battery.
Method of Construction:
The entire solar light with all accessories shall be installed at designated place, duly wired
and giving necessary testing.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity will be counted on number basis. (i.e. each)
B)Solar Home Lighting System (SHL)
General:
A solar home system aims at providing solar electricity for operating lights and/or fan or
energizing a DC operated portable TV set for specified hours of operation per day.
Scope:
Specification No (ESD-SOL/SHL)
Supplying & erecting Solar Home Light Fittings suitable for specified wattage of CFL/DC
Fan, along with required accessories.
Specifications
Page 307
Tender No: -1800000008
Material:
1. Models:
The model shall be as mentioned in the Table No. 4.3/1 given below:
Table No. 4.3/1
Model wise details of Solar Home Lights
S.N
o.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Model
Configuratio
n
Details of
PV Module
No. of
9/11
Watts
CFL
1
Model 1 (1
Light)
1x18 Wp
under STC
1
No. of
DC Fan
(Wattage
< 20
Watts)
0
2
Model 2 (2
Lights)
1x37Wp
under STC
2
0
3
Model 3 (1
Light and 1
Fan)
1x37Wp
under STC
1
1
Battery
1x12 V, 20 AH,
Tubular/Plate,
low
maintenance
1x12 V, 40 AH,
Tubular/Plate,
low
maintenance
1x12 V, 40 AH,
Tubular/Plate,
low
maintenance
2. Lamps:
The lamps shall be of compact fluorescent (CFL) type, either 4-Pin or 2 Pin types, with rating
of 9/11W. For the 4-Pin type CFL a suitable preheating circuit must be provided.
(b) The light output from the lamps should be around 600 +/- 5% lumens (9W CFL) and 900
+/- 5% lumens (11W CFL).
(c)The lamps should be housed in an assembly suitable for indoor use, with a reflector on its
back. While fixing the assembly, the lamp should be held in a base up configuration.
3. Battery:
The battery will be of flooded electrolyte type, positive tubular plate, low, maintenance lead
acid battery.
(b) The battery will have a minimum rating of 12V, 20 or 40 or 75 Ah, the discharge rate of
1/10th of the AH capacity of the battery.
75% of the rated capacity of the battery should be between fully charged & load cut off
conditions.
4. Electronics:
The inverter should be of quasi sine or full sine wave type with frequency in the range of 2035 KHz. Half wave operation is not acceptable.
(b) The total electronic efficiency should be at least 80%.
© No blackening or reduction in the lumen output by more than 10% should be observed
after 1000 ON/OFF cycles (two minutes ON followed by four minutes OFF is one cycle.)
(d) The idle current consumption should not be more than 10 mA.
(e) Electronics should operate at 12 V and should have temperature compensation for proper
charging of the battery though out the year.
Necessary lengths of wires/cables, switches suitable for DC use and fuses should be
provided.
5. PV Module(s):
The PV module(s) shall contain crystalline silicon solar cells.
The power output of the module(s) under STC should be a minimum of 18W or 37W or 74W.
In case of Model 4 & 5 either two modules of 37 W each or one module of 74W should be
used.
Specifications
Page 308
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Tender No: -1800000008
The operating voltage corresponding to the power output mentioned above should be 16.4 V
The open circuit voltage of the PV modules under STC should be at least 21.0 Volts
The terminal box on the module should have a provision for opening for replacing the cable,
if required.
A strip containing the following details should be laminated inside the module so as to be
clearly visible from the front side:
6. DC Fan:
The wattage of the fan should not be more than 20 Watts and it should operate at 12V DC.
7. Electronic Protections:
Adequate protection is to be incorporated under no load conditions e.g. when the lamps are
removed and the system is switched ON.
The system should have protection against battery overcharge and deep discharge
conditions.
Fuses should be provided to protect against short circuit conditions.
8. Mechanical Components:
Metallic frame structure (with corrosion resistance paint) to be fixed on the roof of the house
to hold the SPV module(s). The frame structure should have provision to adjust its angle of
inclination to the horizontal between 0 and 45, so that it can be installed at the specified tilt
angle.
A vented metallic box with acid proof and corrosion resistance paint, for housing the storage
battery indoors should be provided. The box can be of injection Moulded plastic or wooden
for home lighting models 1, 2 and 3 only.
Method of Construction:
The entire Solar Home light with all accessories shall be installed at designated place, duly
wired and giving necessary testing.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity will be counted on number basis. (i.e. each)
4.4Energy Devices (ESD-ED)
A) Digital Active Harmonic Filter (DAHF)
Scope:
Specification No (ESD-ED/DAHF)
Designing, supplying, erecting, testing, and commissioning of Digital Active Harmonic
filter cum Power conditioner, with high speed IGBT device for specified filtering
current.
Material:
The unit shall comprise of following features and meet the following parameters:
Topology
4 wire (3Ph + N) Active Power Filter
Technology
Digital Closed Loop Active Filter with Source Current Sensing
32 bit, Digital Signal processing, High speed IGBT’s in power
circuit with necessary CT for current sensing.
Working Principle Synchronous rotating reference frame.
Application
Selectable for Harmonic Filtration & or PF Correction.
Compensation
30 AMP
60 AMP
Filter current
Heat dissipation
< 1500 W
< 1700 W
Input Voltage
Nominal 400 Volt Phase to Phase
Accepted Phase to Phase voltage range: +10%, -15%
Input Frequency
Nominal: 50Hz +/-10%, (60Hz Optional)
Specifications
Page 309
Interrupting
capacity
Over load
capacity
Harmonics
Filtering
Power Factor
correction
Audible noise
level
Operating
temperature
range
Storage
temperature
range
Relative
Humidity
Standards
Protection degree
Electrostatic
discharge
immunity
Cooling
Color
Access
External cable
connections
Configuration
Switches for →
Remote Signals
for →
Indications for →
Display Faults
for →
Display
Parameters for
→
Specifications
Tender No: -1800000008
100 KA,
100 KA,
Fused
Fused
Limiting to nominal current continuous limiting operation
possible
3rd to 31st Harmonic compensation attenuation ratio up to
96%.
Programmable for Selective Harmonic Elimination.
Adjustable up to unity from 0.6 lag or 0.6 lead without Over
compensation OR Under compensation
< 65 db (A)
< 65 db (A)
-5°C To 40°C
-25°C To + 55°C
Max. 90%, Non-condensing
IEEE 519 for compensated harmonics
IEC / EN62040-2: 2006- Category C3.
EN 50178: 1997. CE approved.
IP32
4 KV contact / 8 KVA air discharge
Forced air cooling with axial flow fan
Havells grey or as specified by Engineer in-charge
Front access
Bottom / Top Entry (Front Side)
Standalone/ with facility of Paralleling up to 8 Machines.
1. ON
5. Down
2. OFF
6. Acknowledge
7. Soft Key 1
3. Reset
4. Up
8. Soft Key 2
1. Filter Running – 1 Amp – 125 V AC
2. Fault
1. OK (Filter Running)
2. Alarm
3. Warning
1. Wrong Phase sequence
8. Over Load
2. External Inhibit
9. Over Temp.
3. Fast DCOV
10. Over current
4. Rph CTFB Wrong
11. No Sync
5. Yph CTFB Wrong
12. Mains Abnormal
6. Bph CTFB Wrong
13. DC Under Volt
7. DC Over voltage
14. Filter Trip
11. No. of mains failures
1. Status
2. ID
12. Total Filter ON Time
13. Alarm Log
3. Input Voltage
4. Input Voltage
14. Power Factor
Waveform
15. DC BUS Voltage
5. Input Voltage FFT
16. Filter Load %
6. Input Current
17. Mains Frequency
7. Input Current
18. Heat Sink Temp.
Page 310
Tender No: -1800000008
Waveform
8. Input Current FFT
9. Input Current (KW)
10. Input Power (KVA)
19. Date & Time
Method of Construction:
The entire equipment shall be installed at designated place, duly wired with provided
cable/leads and giving necessary testing.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity will be counted on number basis. (i.e. each)
B) APFC Panel with Harmonic suppressor (APFC)
Scope:
Specification No (ESD-ED/APFC)
Supplying, Installing Testing & commissioning manual / Auto power load correction panel of
required capacity in kVAR, 440 Volts, 3 phase 50 Hz, Thyristor switch consisting of
minimum 4 steps suitably design to take care of 5% of load variation at any time. Steps
configuration shall be by the Engineer in charge as per site conditions.
Material:
Capacitors: App Type IS: 13585 part-I 1994 any type gas filled 525 Volts.
Thyristor switches: Thyristor switches should be designed for zero crossing with
snubber circuit forced cooling & min 1600 PIV rating.
Series reactor: Copper wound dry type, iron core suitable as per requirement.
Harmonic filter circuit: Circuit suitable to filter Harmonics up to 17th Harmonics.
CRCA sheet: CRCA sheet 14/16 SWG with 7 tank process & powder coating
suitable to
site condition of required colour shade.
MS angles & channels: Size as per site condition.
Bus bar: Electrolytic copper bus bar of suitable capacity.
Exhaust fan: Tube axial exhaust fan of adequate capacity.
Fabrication materials: MS Jali, Hinges, nut bolts washers, screws etc. of suitable
size.
Switchgear: SFU, MCB, MCCB, HRC Din type fuse base as specified in chapter switchgear.
Power factor Controller Relay: Minimum four steps, microprocessor based programmable
intelligent relay / dynamic correction Intelligent relay with switches
time from selected
1sec.to 1200 sec. having display of system v/s, current, frequency,
target PF, THD,
short fall KVAR, active power KW, KVAR, Harmonic display up to 17th order.
Accessories: Digital ammeter, digital Voltmeter, Bar primary CTS Class 1, 15VA and
of
require ratio, selector switch indicating pilot Lamps all Bakelite with colour glass, push
buttons.
Method of construction:
APFC panel shall be designed to cater required KVAR capacity with 20% expandable
additional load requirement.
Fabrication of panel shall be in such away to accommodate additional extra capacitors.
Panel shall be delivered after testing in presence of the engineer in charge.
Method of Construction:
The entire equipment shall be installed at designated place, duly wired with provided
cable/leads and giving necessary testing.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity will be measured according to the sum of
capacitor banks installed on kVAR basis. (i.e. per kVAR)
Specifications
Page 311
Tender No: -1800000008
CHAPTER-5
SWITCHGEARS
5.1
LT --I/C M/C Switches,
ATS, Bus Bar, Feeder
Pillar
SW-SWR
5.2
I/C M/C Distribution boards
SW-DB
5.3
LT -- MCB
SW-MCB
5.4
LT -- MCBDB
SW-MCBDB
5.5
LT -- MCCB
SW-MCCB
5.6
LT -- RCCB
SW-RCCB
5.7
LT – Oil Circuit Breakers
SW-OCB
5.8
LT – Air Circuit Breakers
SW-ACB
5.9
HT – SFU, LBS
SW-HTS
5.10 HT – Breakers (VCB)
SW-VCB
5.10
Drawings
Chapter 5 Switchgears (SW)
5.1
LT—I/C M/C Switches, ATS, Feeder Pillar (SWR)
General
All material shall confirm to relevant standard as per BIS and shall carry ISI mark.
Work shall be carried out as per the method of construction as specified by BIS/Chapter 1
6 of P.W. Dept. Handbook/NEC.
Refer IS; 13947/1993, For Switch gears, IS: 13703/1993 for HRC fuses.
Incoming contacts for all switchgears shall be shrouded for avoiding accidental
contact.
A) Indicator DP (BDP)
Scope:
Specification No (SW-SWR/BDP)
Supplying surface/flush mounting Bakelite D.P switch and erecting on filled
polypropylene ISI marked board or on screwed board with top of plywood pasted with
laminate.
Material:
DP Switch: Bakelite double pole switch 32A 250V, with copper contacts for make &
break, and fuse, indicator lamp with shrouded incoming contacts.
Boards: As per (WG-PW/SW) in chapter of Wiring para No. 1.6
Hardware: SM screws, rawl plug, wooden gutties etc.
Method of Construction:
The DP switch shall be erected on specified board or flush in provided enclosure.
Mode of Measurement:
Executed quantity will be counted on number basis. (i.e. Each)
Specifications
Page 312
Tender No: -1800000008
B) IC/Metal clad DP (MDP)
Scope:
Specification No (SW-SWR/MDP)
Supplying and erecting IC/Metal clad DP switches of specified rating on angle iron frame of
suitable size.
Material:
DP Switch: Single phase Double pole metal / iron clad weatherproof air break switch fuse
unit, confirming to IS: 13947 (part- 1 &3)/ 1993 with facility to de-link neutral, suitable for
single phase 240 volts, 50 Hz AC supply, having positive make break
arrangement with
shrouded incoming contacts, cable entry holes, sealing
arrangement and mounting
arrangements.
Fabrication: Required size of angle iron / MS Flat.
Paint: Superior quality enamel paint of specified shade & colour, Red Oxide paint.
Hardware: SM screws, MS Nuts & bolts, rawl plug, wooden gutties etc.
Grouting Material: Cement, Sand, Putty, water, etc.
Method of Construction:
The switch shall be erected at designated place duly mounted on suitable size of angle iron
frame as per Table no. 5.1/1 with the help of required nut bolt washer etc. The angle frame
to be erected on wall with the help of screws, or to be grouted in wall
with the help of
cement concrete etc. Frame shall be painted prior to erection.
Mode of Measurement:
Executed quantity will be counted on number basis. (i.e. Each)
C)IC/Metal clad TP/TPN switches (MTP)
Scope:
Specification No (SW-SWR/MTP)
Supplying and erecting IC/Metal clad TP/TPN /on load/off load changeover switches of
specified rating on angle iron frame of suitable size.
Material:
TP/TPN Switches: Three phase Triple pole / Three phase Triple pole with neutral link
weatherproof metal clad air break switch fuse unit of specified rating, confirming to IS:
13947 (part- 1 &3)/ 1993 with positive make and break arrangement with shrouded
incoming contacts, facility suitable for Three phase 415 volts, 50 Hz AC supply, It
shall be fitted with interlock-able cover and re-wire able type porcelain fuse and
having cable entry holes, sealing arrangement and mounting arrangements.
Fabrication: Required size of angle iron / MS Flat.
Paint: Superior quality enamel paint of specified shade & colour, Red Oxide paint.
Hardware: SM screws, MS Nuts & bolts, rawl plug, wooden gutties etc.
Grouting Material: Cement, Sand, Putty, water, etc.
Method of Construction:
The switch shall be erected at designated place duly mounted on suitable size of angle iron
frame as per Table No. 5.1/1 with the help of required nut bolt, washer, etc;
on
frame/wall. The angle frame to be erected on wall with the help of screws, or to be grouted
in wall with the help of cement plaster, and finished as original. The Frame shall be painted
prior to erection.
Mode of Measurement:
Executed quantity will be counted on number basis. (i.e. Each)
Specifications
Page 313
Tender No: -1800000008
D)Metal clad TP/TPN Switches with HRC fuse (TPHRC)
Scope
Specification No.: (SW-SWR/TPHRC)
Supplying and erecting Metal clad TP/TPN switches with HRC Fuses of specified rating on
angle iron frame of suitable size.
Material:
TP/TPN Switches: Combination fuse switch unit, Metal clad, Triple pole with Neutral link,
Degree of Protection IP-2L3 as per IS: 13947 (pt.3) 1993.Quick make and break, Interlockable cover, uninterrupted duty, Utilization category AC-23A and confirming to
IS:
13947 (Part.3) 1993. It shall be suitable for three high rupturing capacity equal to 80 KA
(HRC) cartridge fuses confirming to IS: 13703 (Part.1) 1993 and IS: 13703 (Part.2/Section &
2) 1993 having rupturing capacity 80 KA minimum, with rated voltage 415 Volts, 50 Hz. AC
with shrouded incoming contacts.
Enclosure: Made of CRCA sheet of thickness not less than 1.2mm.
Fuses: 80 kA High rupturing capacity fuses with ISI mark.
Mounting: Required size of angle iron / MS Flat.
Paint: Superior quality enamel paint of specified shade & colour, Red Oxide paint.
Hardware: SM screws, MS Nuts & bolts, rawl plug, wooden gutties etc.
Grouting material: Cement, Sand, Putty, Water, etc.
Method of Construction
The switch shall be erected at designated place duly mounted on suitable size of angle iron
frame as per table no. 5.1/1 with the help of required nut bolt, washer, etc
on
frame/wall. The angle frame to be erected on wall with the help of screws, or to be grouted
in wall with the help of cement plaster, and finished as original. The Frame
shall be
painted prior to erection.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity will be counted on number basis. (i.e.
each)
Packing material: Rubber / Neoprene gasket
Paint: Red oxide paint /Primer, Enamel paint
Hardware: Nuts, bolts, washers, etc of required size & length.
Danger Board: GI Sheet danger board in Marathi & English or Screen printed sticker.
Method of Construction:
The bus bar chamber shall be fabricated from 16 SWG CRCA sheet with necessary clearance
on all side as mentioned in Table No 5/1 duly painted with one coat of red oxide/primer and
with 2 coats of Superior quality enamel paint of required shade. The earth stud shall be
welded to the chamber. The bus bar shall be fixed on fabricated bracket (to be fixed on inner
rear surface of the box), with minimum three porcelain / epoxy bus bar insulator minimum
at both ends & at the centre of the bar (with
distance of 45cms.between insulators),
with minimum 40x8 mm MS nut bolt, spring washers, etc. The above method shall be
adopted for all the 4 bars. The bar shall be vertically fixed in staggered manner so as to
maintain clearance in between the bars as per Table No. 6.2/2. All the bars shall either be
covered with colour coded PVC heat shrunk sleeves or wrapped with PVC insulation tape
with colour coding. (i.e. R, Y, B, N). The chamber shall be fixed on 25x25x4 mm angle iron
frame to make it sturdy. The chamber shall have minimum one hole per bus bar for fixing
incoming cable, and required holes for the out going cables. The size of the bar either
aluminium / copper for the required rating shall be as per Table No 6.2/1
Specifications
Page 314
Tender No: -1800000008
Mode of Measurement:
Measurement will be on running metre basis of the length of the bus bar provided in the
chamber. (i.e. per meter length of bus bar)
Specifications
Page 315
Tender No: -1800000008
Table No 6.2/1
Dimensions of Bus bar chamber & Size & Number of Strips required for the corresponding
current rating.
S.N
o.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Dimensions
of Bus bar
chamber
Length,
Height,
Depth in
mm
Aluminum
/Copper
bus bar
length per
phase in
mm
Current
rating
in
ampere
s
No. of
Insulator
s (Epoxy
/Porcelai
n) per bus
Recommended rectangular cross
section
Aluminium
Copper
No. of
Size
No. of Size in
strips in mm
strip
mm
per
per
phase
phase
1150x400x1
50
1150x400x1
50
1150x400x1
50
1150x500x3
00
1150x500x3
00
1150x500x3
00
1000
100
3
1
25x5
1
20x5
1000
200
3
1
40x5
1
30x5
1000
300
3
1
50x5
1
40x5
1000
400
3
1
1
50x5
1000
630
3
2
-
-
1000
800
3
2
50x1
0
40x1
0
50x1
0
-
-
Table No 6.2/2
Minimum Clearance between Bus Bars in Bus Bar Chamber / Control Panel
(IS: 4237-1967)
S.No.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Specifications
Voltage level (kV)
0.416
0.6
3.3
11
22
33
Clearance in mm
Between Phases Between Phase & Earth
19
16
25
19
51
35
127
77
242
140
356
223
Page 316
Tender No: -1800000008
CHAPTER-7
CABLES
7.1
LT Cables (Aluminium)
CB-LT/AL/
7.2
LT Cables (Copper)
CB-LT/CU
7.3
HT Cables
CB-HT/
7.4
Cable Joints, Termination
Kit (LT)
CB-JT/LT
Cable Joints, Termination
Kit (HT)
CB-JT/HT
7.6
Cable Enclosure (Pipes)
CB-CE/
7.7
Cable Glands
CB-GL/
7.8
Street Light Boxes &
Cable Indicators
CB-SB/ CB-CIP
Cable Lugs (Copper)
CB-CL/CU
7.5
7.9
7.10 Cable Lugs (Aluminium)
7.10
Specifications
CB-CL/AL
Drawings
Page 317
Tender No: -1800000008
Chapter 7:PVC/XLPE Cables (CB)
7.1, 7.2, & 7.3Armoured Cables (HT & LT)
1.
General
All material shall conform to relevant standard as per BIS and shall carry ISI mark. If any
particular category of material for which ISI mark is not available in market, it shall be as
included in approved list.
Work shall be carried out as per the method of construction specified by BIS. If there is
no reference for particular method of construction in IS, such work shall be carried
out
as per the approved method of construction specified in chapter 16 of P.W. Dept. Handbook.
Material and Work not qualifying to any provision mentioned above shall be to the
satisfaction of the Engineer in Charge.
2.
Cables: (Armoured)
The following list records those Indian Standards in force, which are acceptable as good
practice, and accepted standards.
SP 30: 1984
:
SP 7 (Group 4): 2005 :
IS 1255: 1983
IS 3961: Part 2: 1967 :
IS 1554: Part 1; 1988 :
IS 1554: Part 2; 1988 :
IS 10810: Part 63; 1993:
3
National Electrical Code
National Building Code
Code of practice of Installation & Maintenance of armoured
cables up to 33 kV.
Recommended current ratings of PVC cables.
PVC Insulated (Heavy duty) Electric Cables; Part 1
for working voltages up to and including 1100 Volts.
PVC Insulated (Heavy duty) Electric Cables; Part 1
for working voltages up to and including 3.3 kV to 11 kV.
Method for Test of cables, Part 63 Smoke density of
electric cables under fire condition.
. Scope: (Armoured cables)
Specification No. (CB-LT/AL, CB-LT/CU, CB-HT)
Providing armoured cable of specified voltage level, size & specified conducting material
(Aluminum / Copper) as per Table no. 7/3 including required material, hardware’s for
erection and erecting on wall, ceiling, RCC slab or drawing the same
through pole, pipe,
laying in provided conduit, trench, ducts, trays as per approved method of construction
including glands, lugs, etc.
4.
Material:
Cables:
Cables shall be PVC for LT/MP and XLPE for HT as per Table no. 7/3 and of required
construction, colour, shall carry ISI mark, IS No, manufacturer’s name, size, duly embossed
/ screen printed at every metre and having the total count of progressive length in meter at
each mark.
Earth wire: Galvanized Iron (G I) wire of appropriate gauge as per Table No 7/1.
Glands: As per specification (CB-GL)
Lugs: As per specification (CB-CL/AL, CB-CL/CU)
Saddles: Saddles fabricated from GI sheet of required gauge and size depending on dia of
cable either galvanized or painted with superior quality enamel black paint with necessary
shearing mechanical strength, semi circular shaped with extended piece having suitable
holes for fixing.
G I Strip: 22 g x 25 mm width G I Strip.
Specifications
Page 318
Tender No: -1800000008
Clamps: MS Clamps fabricated of required length and shape, having the size of 3/6 mm
thick mild steel having 25/50 mm width (as per size of cable), rounded ends with wooden /
resin cast grip for holding the cable.
Identification tags: For identifying root, connection position GI strip with identification
mark / name embossed / painted with arrangement to tie should be fix on cable or
arrangement of ferrules to be done.
Hardware: Sheet Metal (SM) screws of required sizes, plugs / wooden gutties, etc.
k the cable in the bent portion, shall be buried along the route of cable in the trench made for
laying the cable. For clear visibility, the Cable indicator plate shall be buried in such a manner
that the plate should be minimum 200 mm above the ground level and shall be provided at
every 15-25 metre in straight run, at both ends of road crossing and immediate before and
after turning point of cable.
Mode of Measurement:
Executed quantity will be measured on number basis. (I.e. each).
B) Street Light Boxes (SB)
Scope:
Specification No (CB-SB)
Providing and fixing of CRCA sheet metal / FRP boxes on pole with MS Clamps fixing to
poles and terminating the cable.
Material:
CRCA sheet metal box: 16 gauge CRCA sheet with mounting arrangement for kitkat
/
MCB
Bakelite connectors: Bakelite connector of 2/4 ways, 32A, 250 V.
MS Clamps: Clamps fabricated of required length and shape, of 3 mm thick mild steel
having 40 mm width.
Hardware: 10 mm mild steel nuts and bolts.
Paint for CRCA box: Superior quality aluminum / silver paint or required shade
enameled
paint as per the requirement of site engineer.
Primer / Red oxide: Superior quality primer / red oxide for use on sheet metal.
Method of Construction:
CRCA Sheet metal boxes:
Box shall be fabricated from 16 gauge CRCA sheet as per dimensions specified in item, with
minimum 3 mm fold on front side of the box so as to make it water proof (Rubber beading /
gasket shall be pasted on the edges / asbestos rope beading).
Edges of front cover shall
be folded in such a manner so that it shall cover the front opening of the box. The front cover
shall be fixed either by screws or be hinged (as per requirement), with self-locking
arrangement. There shall be provision of fixing connector / porcelain kitkat fuse / single pole
MCB, inside the box. Provision of two holes of minimum 10 mm dia. for fixing bolt of clamp
and one hole of required dia. for PVC wire leads, shall be made at the rear side of the box and
provision for holes of required dia. at bottom for fixing the cable gland of incoming and
outgoing cables. Box shall have earth terminal. Box shall have anti rust treatment and be
painted with two coats of red oxide and finally two coats aluminum / silver paint. Rubber
gasket shall be provided for making the box watertight. Unless and otherwise specified, the
mounting height of the box shall be minimum 1750 mm from the finished ground level
for
facilitating easy maintenance.
FRP boxes:
FRP boxes manufactured with minimum wall thickness of 2.7 mm either gray or blue in
colour, having provision for fixing either porcelain kitkat fuse or Single pole MCB, 4 way
Specifications
Page 319
Height
12.5 m
without
Power Tool
Hot dipped
galvanised
as per
specification
BSEN ISO
1461
12.5 m
with Power
Tool
Hot dipped
galvanised
as per
specification
BSEN ISO
1461
Top and
bottom
Dia.
Thickness
110 mm
and 242
mm
thickness
3 / 3 mm
150 mm
and 360
mm
thickness
3/3 mm
Overlap
1.5 times
the Dia
Max.
Dynamic
loading to
withstand
Max.
Wind
pressure
Opening
of base
door
Double
internal
lock
Base
As per IS
875 part 3
1.
Material
Specifications
175 X 500
mm
Yes
20 mm thick
16 m
Power Tool
20 m
Power Tool
Hot dipped
galvanised
as per
specification
BSEN ISO
1461
Hot dipped
galvanised
as per
specification
BSEN ISO
1461
1.5 times
the Dia
150 mm
(thickness
3mm) and
460 mm
(thickness
4mm)
1.5 times
the Dia
150 mm
(thickness
3mm) and
460 mm
(thickness
4mm)
1.5 times
the Dia
As per IS
875 part 3
As per IS
875 part 3
As per IS
875 part 3
225x1050
mm
1200 X 250
mm
1200 X 250
mm
Yes
Yes
Yes
25 mm thick
25mm thick
30 mm thick
Tender No: -1800000008
Remarks
Each section
shall be
fabricated out
of individual
plates duly
folded and
welded. There
shall be only
one
longitudinal
seam weld per
section. Hot
deep
internally and
externally
having
uniform
thickness of
85 microns for
bottom section
and 65
microns for top
and middle
section
At site
sections shall
be joined
together by
slip-stressedfit method. No
site welding or
bolted joints
shall be done
to the mast.
Max. Dynamic
loading to
withstand
Max. wind
pressure
The welding
Page 320
plate
320 X 320
mm
520 mm Dia
670mm Dia
670mm Dia
Anchor
plate
3 mm
5 mm
8 mm
8 mm
Specifications
Tender No: -1800000008
connection of
the base
flange shall be
fully
developed to
the strength of
the entire
section. The
base flange
shall be
provided with
supplementary
gussets
between the
bolt- holes to
ensure
elimination of
helical stress
concentration.
Page 321
2.
Accessori
es
Lantern
Carriage
arrangem
ent
Tender No: -1800000008
Remarks
12.5 m
12.5
m
16 m
20 m
Hexagonal
Lantern
Carriage for 6
fittings
symmetrically
Lantern
carriage of
50 NB
ERW
ClassBM.S pipe
covered
with PVC
sleeve
suitable to
carry 250
Kg load
upto 8
fittings
Lantern
carriage of
50 NB ERW
Class-BM.S
pipe
covered
with PVC
sleeve
suitable to
carry 250
Kg load
upto 8
fittings
Hot deep, in two
halves with
stainless steel bolts
and lock type
stainless steel nuts
to ensure easy
installation, lining
with protective PVC
arrangement.
junction box of cast
aluminium- weather
proof
Yes
Yes
Raising
and
lowering
mechanis
m
----
Lanter
n
carriag
e of 50
NB
ERW
ClassB M.S
pipe
covere
d with
PVC
sleeve
suitabl
e to
carry
250
Kg
load
upto 6
fittings
Yes
Head
frame
MCB
erected
on PVC
board
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Completely self
sustaining Winch
fixed at the base
without the need of
brake shoe, spring
or clutches. Gravity
activated pawls.
Gear ratio 53:1, with
self lubricating oil
bath
Galvanised
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
OF suitable rating.
3. Lighting protection
By G.I. single spike 1200mm at top
4. Trailing
PVC sheathed 5 X 2.5 Sq. mm copper cable
5. Winch
Double drum, oil bath (SAE 90/140) with
lubrication arrangement
6. Wire rope
2 Nos stainless steel wire rope 7/19, 6mm
dia. Breaking load capacity 2400 Kgx2
7. Integral power tool
3 Ph 1 HP 2m/ min single speed,
8. Torque limiter
Upto 500Kg adjustable
9. Aviation obstruction light
Twin dome with 2 Nos 100W GLS/LED lamp
Standards applicable:
a) I.S. 875 (part- III) 1987
-
b)
c)
-
BSEN10-025/DIN17100
B.S 5135/AWS
Specifications
Code and practice for design for
structures
Grades of M.S plates
Welding
Page 322
d)
e)
B.S. ISO1461
TR. No.7 2000 of ILE UK
-
Tender No: -1800000008
Galvanising
Specification for Mast and
foundation
Manufacturer of the Mast must have conducted wind tunnel test on their Mast
sample.
Mode of Measurement:
Executed quantity will be measured on number basis (i.e. each)
B) Octagonal Poles (OPL)
Scope:
Specification No (OH-PL/OPL)
Supplying and erecting 9 m high galvanised octagonal pole details are as specified
below.
Material:
9 m high galvanised Octagonal pole with details of given below.
Particulars
Material
CSR Item No 8-3-3
Galvanised as per
specification
Top and bottom Dia.
Thickness
100 mm A/F and 200
mm A/F thickness 3mm
HT plate
1500 mm long
decorative sword type
single arm bracket
Bracket
CSR Item No 8-3-4
Hot dipped galvanised
as per specification
BSEN ISO 1461
70 mm A/F and 155
mm A/F thickness 3mm
HT plate
1500 mm long
decorative sword type
double arm bracket
Method of construction:
The pole shall be erected in provided cement concrete foundation specially designed.
Erection shall be in plum.
Mode of Measurement:
Executed quantity will be measured on number basis (i.e. each)
8.4 Brackets (BKT)
A)Pole Bracket (Cross arm) (OH-PL/BKT)
Scope:
Specification No (OH-PL/BKT)
Supply and erection of MS Pole Bracket for erection of L T insulators on provided
Specifications
Page 323
pole.
Tender No: -1800000008
Material:
Pole Bracket: MS pole bracket fabricated as per specifications in Table 8.4/1.
and size of channel is to be checked from the steel table.
Thickness
Table No 8.4/1
Details of Pole Brackets
8-4-1
Angle iron
50x50x6 mm
550 mm
2
No of
insula
tor
2
8-4-2
Angle iron
50x50x6 mm
750 mm
2
2
8-4-3
ISMC Channel
75x40x 6.8 mm
550 mm
4
4
8-4-4
ISMC Channel
75x40x 6.8 mm
750 mm
5
5
8-4-5
ISMC Channel
75x40x 6.8 mm
ISMC Channel
75x40x 6.8 mm
ISMC Channel
75 x40x 6.8
mm
ISMC Channel
75 x40x 6.8 mm
550 mm
2
2
1100 mm
4
4
550 mm
2
2
300mm of
same channel
1100 mm
4
4
300mm of
same channel
Item
No
8-4-6
8-4-7
8-4-8
Material of
bracket
Length
No of
insulator
Guarding
Extension
piece
Remark
For LT
guarding for
vertical
formation
For LT
guarding for
horizontal
formation
For LT 3
phase 4 wire
vertical
formation
For LT 3
phase 5 wire
vertical
formation
D’ type Clamps: MS Flat of 50x6mm, 15 mm MS nut bolts
Paint: Silver paint, Red oxide paint
Method of construction:
The cross arm shall be made up of size of channel mentioned in above table. The
length shall be as stated above table. The cross arm shall be complete with pole
clamp of size 50X6 mm MS flat and holes required for pin / shackle insulator. For MS
pole bracket with guarding extension, an extension piece of same size of length 300
mm shall be welded to bracket as per drawing attached herewith. The cross arm and pole
clamp shall be painted with one coat of red oxide and two coat silver enamel
paint any other colour paint (as per the instructions of engineer in-charge).
Cross arm shall be fabricated as per drawing no. OH-PL/BKT-1 ( Fig.2 & Fig.3)
.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity will be measured on number basis. (i.e.
Each)
Specifications
Page 324
Tender No: -1800000008
B)
Vee Cross Arm (OH-PL/VCA)
Scope:
Specification No (OH-PL/VCA1)
Supplying Vee cross arm, suitable for 11 kV and necessary ancillary materials
complete
erection on provided pole with necessary painting as per specification and as per
instructions from the site engineer.
Material:
Cross arm: Channel Iron cross arm
Hardware: G.I. nut bolts
Flat: MS flat 80 x 10 mm thick
Clamp: Two clamps made from MS flat of size 80 x 10 mm.
Paint: Red oxide, Silver paint.
Method of construction:
Fabricating the Vee cross arm for erecting Insulators with channel 75 x 40 mm with
4.4
mm thick web and 7.3 mm thick flange, length of 45 mm for base of insulator, vertical
member of suitable length to maintain the clearance of 1220 mm, with angle of 60 degrees
to horizontal and M.S. flat of 80 x 10 mm at centre of cross arm fixed to the pole
by
means of two M.S. clamps of 80 x 10 mm. M.S. flat with 15mm. dia bolts and
nuts
duly
painted with one coat of red oxide paint and two coats of aluminium paint. Cross arm shall
be fabricated as per drawing no. OH-PL/BKT-1 ( Fig.1)
Detailed specifications of material of the items included in CSR are given in
Table No 8.4/2.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity will be measured on number basis (i.e. each)
C)Vee Cross Arm (OH-PL/VCA)
Scope:
Specification No (OH-PL/VCA2)
Supplying Vee cross arm, suitable for 22 kV and necessary ancillary materials complete
erection on provided pole with necessary painting as per specification and as per
instructions from the site engineer.
Material:
Cross arm: Channel Iron cross arm
Hardware: G.I. nut bolts
Flat: MS flat 80 x 10 mm thick
Clamp: Two clamps made from MS flat of size 80 x 10 mm.
Paint: Red oxide, Silver paint.
Method of construction:
Fabricating the Vee cross arm for erecting Insulators with channel 75 x 40 mm with
4.4
mm thick web and 7.3 mm thick flange, length of 45 mm for base of insulator, vertical
member of suitable length to maintain the clearance of 1530 mm, with angle
of
60
degrees to horizontal and M.S. flat of 80 x 10 mm at centre of cross arm fixed to the pole by
means of two M.S. clamps of 80 x 10 mm. M.S. flat with 15mm. dia bolts and
nuts
duly
painted with one coat of red oxide paint and two coats of aluminium
paint. Cross arm
shall be fabricated as per drawing no. OH-PL/BKT-1 ( Fig.1)
Specifications
Page 325
Tender No: -1800000008
Detailed specifications of material of the items included in CSR are given in
Table No 8.4/2.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity will be measured on number basis (i.e. each)
Table No 8.4/2
Details of Iron Cross Arm / Bracket as Per Item in CSR
Item
No.
8-411
8-412
Item
description
100X50
channel cross
arm
Vee-cross arm
8-413
Vee-cross arm
8-414
Channel with
clamp for
erection of
11/22 KV pin
insulators
Channel
bracket for
guarding
8-415
8-416
Angle iron
bracket for
guarding
Size of channel
Clamps
Nut bolts
100 x 50 mm. with 4.7 mm
thick web and 7.5 mm thick
flange channel X 2.7 m length
made out of channel 75 x 40
mm with 4.4 mm thick web
and 7.3 mm thick flange with
clearance of 1220 mm.
between the insulators as per
drawing attached here with
100x50 mm with 4.7 mm
thick web and 7.5 mm thick
flange size suitable with
clearance of 1530 mm.
between the insulators
75x40 mm with 4.4 mm thick
web and 7.3 mm thick flange
channel
Two clamps
of 50x6mm.
M.S. flat
Clamps of
75x10 mm
of MS Flat
15mm. nuts and bolts
Clamps of
75x10 mm
of MS Flat
15mm. dia. bolts and
nuts
Clamps of
80x10 mm
of MS Flat
with 3 sets screws
channel iron 1600 mm. in
length and 75x40 mm. with
4.4 mm. thick web and 7.3
mm thick flange
Angle iron bracket 65 x 65 x
6mm. Angle 1600 mm. in
length and 75x40 mm. with
4.4 mm. thick web and 7.3
mm thick flange
Clamps of
50x6 mm of
MS Flat
15mm. dia nuts and
bolts with 2 earthing
clips, made from 25x3
mm
15mm. dia nuts and
bolts with 2 earthing
clips, made from 25x3
mm
Clamps of
50x6 mm of
MS Flat
15mm. dia bolts and
nuts
8.5 Conductors (CON)
A)
All Aluminium Conductors (AAC)
(OH-CON/AAC)
Scope:
Specification No (OH-CON/AAC)
Supply and erection of All Aluminium Conductors for overhead line.
Material:
Conductor: All aluminium stranded conductor (As per table 8.5/1)
Binding wire: 12 SWG aluminium binding wire
Clamps: PG clamps as per requirement
Specifications
Page 326
Tender No: -1800000008
Method of construction:
At first the conductor is removed from bundle/drum straighten without knots, bends, etc.
Stringing of conductor shall be done with draw vice. Conductor shall not be twisted
while stringing. Shackle insulators shall be used if the line deviates by 30 degrees or
more, at terminal pole and at junction/ cut pole.
Parallel double groove clamp having two nut bolts designated to carry full line current
shall be used for making Jumper wire connections.
On straight line the conductor shall be bounded on top groove of insulator and at angular
position binding shall be done in side groove. Binding wire of 12 SWG shall
be of the
same metal as that of conductor.
Mode of Measurement:
For measurement purpose, sum of the total conductor including jumper connections shall
be considered. (i.e. per km)
B)Aluminium Conductor Steel Reinforced (ACSR) (OH-CON/ACSR)
Scope:
Specification No (OH-CON/ACSR)
Supply and erection of aluminium conductor steel reinforced for overhead line.
Material:
Conductor: All aluminium conductor steel reinforced (As per table 8.5/1)
Binding wire: 12 SWG aluminium binding wire
Clamps: PG clamps as per requirement
Method of construction:
At first the conductor is removed from bundle/drum straighten without knots, bends, etc.
Stringing of conductor shall be done with drawing vice. Conductor shall not be twisted
while stringing.
Disc insulators shall be used if the line deviates by 30 degrees
or
more, terminal pole and tri-pole or four pole structure at terminal pole and at
junction/ cut pole.
Parallel double groove clamp having two nut bolts designated to carry full line current
shall be used for making Jumper wire connections. Universal parallel double groove
clamp having two nut bolts shall be used for Tap Off point.
On straight line the conductor shall be bounded on top groove of insulator and at angular
position binding shall be done in side groove. Binding wire of 12 SWG shall be of the same
metal as that of conductor.
Mode of Measurement:
For measurement purpose, sum of the total conductor including jumper connections shall
be considered. (i.e. per km)
Specifications
Page 327
Tender No: -1800000008
Table No. 8.5/1
Conductor Specifications As Per I.S. 398/1961
Code
Name of
Conductor
Resistance
at 200 ohm
/km.
Approx. Current
Carrying Capacity
in Amperes.
At 400 C At 450 C
Rose
Gnat
Irish
Pansy
Ant
1.361
1.071
0.850
0.677
0.544
Squirrel
Weasel
Ferret
4.04
Mink 0.06
Raccoon
Dog 0.1
1.374
0.911
0.679
Number of
Strands /
Diameter of
each Strand
in mm
All Aluminium Conductor
116
108
7/1.96
133
123
7/2.21
150
138
7/2.48
178
165
7/2.78
204
189
7/3.10
ACSR Conductor
115
107
6+1/2.11
150
139
6+1/2.59
181
618
6+1/3.0
0.456
0.365
1.137
234
270
520
217
250
482
Overall
Diameter
of
Conducto
r in mm
Weight of
Conducto
r
(
kg/km)
5.88
6.63
7.44
8.34
9.30
58
73
92
116
144
6.33
7.77
9.00
85
128
171
10.98
12.27
21.00
255
318
976
6+3.66
6+1/4.09
30+7/3.0
Table No 8.5/2
Minimum Clearance between Conductors
(IS: 4237-1967)
S.No.
Voltage level (kV)
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
11
22
33
110
230
400
Clearance in mm
Between Phases Between Phase & Earth
460
305
610
460
915
610
1675
1000
3350
1675
4000
3500
8.6 Insulators (INS)
A)
Porcelain Disc Type Insulator 11/22/33 kV (OH-INS/DI)
Scope:
Specification No (OH-INS/DI)
Supplying porcelain disc type insulator, suitable for 11/22/33KV and necessary ancillary
materials and complete erection on provided cross arm / bracket and
connected to the
over-head line as per instructions from the site engineer
Specifications
Page 328
Tender No: -1800000008
Material:
Insulator: Distribution class Disc type insulator made from porcelain, suitable for specified
voltage level, having ISI mark, with necessary hardware.
Hardware: Nuts, washers, etc.
Binding wire: Bare Copper wire or conductor.
Clamps: MS clamps.
Method of construction:
Distribution class porcelain disc type insulator, suitable for specified voltage level, erected
on provided cross arm or bracket with clamps, ancillary materials, and connected to the
over-head line. Connection shall be made with bare copper wire of
specified gauge.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity will be measured on number basis (i.e. each)
B) Pin Type Insulator 11/22/33 kV (OH-INS/PN)
Scope:
Specification No (OH-INS/PN)
Supplying porcelain Pin type insulator, suitable for 11/22/33KV and necessary ancillary
materials and complete erection on provided cross arm / bracket and
connected to the
over-head line as per instructions from the site engineer
Material:
Insulator: Distribution class Pin type insulator made from porcelain, suitable for
voltage level, having ISI mark, with necessary hardware.
Hardware: Nuts, washers, etc.
Binding wire: Bare Copper wire or conductor.
Clamps: MS clamps.
specified
Method of construction:
Distribution class porcelain pin type insulator, suitable for specified voltage level, erected on
provided cross arm or bracket with clamps, ancillary materials, and
connected to the
over-head line. Connection shall be made with bare copper wire of specified gauge.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity will be measured on number basis (i.e.
each)
C) Post Type Insulator 11/22/33 kV (OH-INS/PST)
Scope:
Specification No (OH-INS/PST)
Supplying porcelain Post type insulator, suitable for 11/22/33KV and necessary ancillary
materials and complete erection on provided cross arm / bracket and
connected to the
over-head line as per instructions from the site engineer
Specifications
Page 329
Tender No: -1800000008
Material:
Insulator: Distribution class Post type insulator made from porcelain, suitable for specified
voltage level, having ISI mark, with necessary hardware.
Hardware: Nuts, washers, etc.
Binding wire: Bare Copper wire or conductor.
Clamps: MS clamps.
Method of construction:
Distribution class porcelain post type insulator, suitable for specified voltage level, erected
on provided cross arm or bracket with clamps, ancillary materials, and connected to the
over-head line. Connection shall be made with bare copper wire of
specified gauge.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity will be measured on number basis (i.e.
each)
D) Thyrite type Lightening Arrestor 11/22 kV OH-INS/LA)
Scope:
Specification No(OH-INS/LA)
Supplying porcelain Thyrite type lightening arrestor, suitable for specified voltage
and necessary ancillary materials and complete erection on provided
cross arm /
bracket and connected to the over-head line as per instructions from
the
site
engineer.
level
Material:
Arrestor: Distribution class Thyrite type lightening arrestor made from porcelain, suitable for
specified voltage level, having ISI mark.
Hardware: Nuts, washers, etc.
Binding wire: Bare Copper wire or conductor.
Clamps: MS clamps.
Method of construction:
Distribution class porcelain Thyrite type lightening arrestor, suitable for specified voltage
level, erected on provided cross arm or bracket with clamps, ancillary materials, and
connected to the over-head line. Connection shall be made with bare copper wire of specified
gauge.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity will be measured on number basis (i.e. each)
Specifications
Page 330
Tender No: -1800000008
Chapter 9
EARTHING
9.1
Plate, Pipe
EA-EP/
9.2
Accessories
No Specs
9.3
Drawings
Specifications
Page 331
Tender No: -1800000008
Chapter 9 Earthing (EA)
9.1 Plate / Pipe type Earthing
A)
Plate type Earthing (With or Without CI Cover, Funnel, etc)
(EA-EP)
Scope:
Specification No(EA-EP)
Supplying and erecting galvanised cast iron / copper earth plate type / G.I. pipe type
earthing with / without C.I. cover as per instructions from the site engineer.
Material:
Earth Plate: Galvanised cast iron / Copper earth plate or G.I. pipe as per specifications given
in Table No 9.1/1.
CI Cover: As per specifications given in Table No 9.1/1.
Earthing Conductor: Copper/G.I strip/Annealed bare copper wire/G.l. earth wire of size as
per specifications given in Table No 9.1/1.
GI Pipe: As per specification (CW-PLB/GP) mentioned chapter no. 17.5 for watering, and as
enclosure for Earth wire, refer specifications given in Table No 9.1/1.
Hardware: Screw / nut bolts with required washer of dimensions, Rawl plug / clip/ ‘U’ nails
and material as per specifications given in Table No 9.1/1.
Filling material: Coal /Charcoal/ salt as per specifications given in Table No 9.1/1.
as per specifications given in Table No 9.1/1.
Lugs: As per specification (CB-LG/AL, CB-LG/CU) mentioned chapter 7.9 & 7.10 Copper/
Aluminium lugs as per specifications given in Table No 9.1/1.
Method of construction:
Pit is to be dug of required dimension and depth for the earthing at site, and laying of
Galvanised cast iron / Copper earth plate or G.I. pipe shall be as per Table No 9.1/1. The
earth connection to equipment/ switch gear and earthing electrode shall be connected as
shown in the diagram and as per IS 3043 amended up to-date. The connections shall be
made either by strip or double run of earth wire with drilling, welding, riveting, brazing and
nut bolting to plate or pipe, where ever required in an approved manner. As far as possible
continuous strip shall be used, but where ever jointing of strip is unavoidable, the overlap
portion must not be less than 21/2 times the width of the strip either welded/
brazed/soldered by all sides or 6 inches overlap with two nut bolts/ riveting of
adequate size with required washer and covered by anti-corrosive paint as per approved
jointing
practice in the industry and as per directives from site engineer in charge.
Pit shall then be filled with screened soil with alternate layer of coal and salt, and if,
necessary brick masonry work ( Where ever applicable) shall be done as specified in IS:
3043, with laying wires in PVC/ G.I. pipe and watering arrangement as per drawing no EA-1
and covered with C.I. Cover ( Where ever applicable).
Where ever requires or as specified by Site Engineer, a Test link shall be provided for
facilitating the testing of resistance of earth electrode.
Testing:
The value of each earth electrode shall be measured by earth tester in presence of site Engineer and
record to be submitted.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity will be measured on number basis (i.e.
Specifications
Page 332
each)
Tender No: -1800000008
Table No 9.1/1
Detailed Specifications of various types of Earthing
Type of earthing ------------->
S.No.
1)
2)
Particulars
Depth from top of
plate
Up to Ground level
Size & type of
material for pipe /
Plate type earthing.
Galvanised
cast iron
earth plate
type
without
C.I cover
Copper
earth
plate
type with
C.I cover
Galvanised
cast iron
earth plate
type with
C.I cover
Pipe type
earthing
with out
C.I cover
1.5 m
1.5 m
1.5 m
1.5 m
Cast iron
earth plate
size
60x60x0.6
cms
Copper
earth
plate size
60x60x0.6
cms
cast iron
earth plate
size
60x60x0.6
cms
30 Kg.
charcoal
and salt
each
Double G.l.
wire 8 SWG
40 Kg.
charcoal
and salt
each
Double G.l.
6 SWG
‘B’ grade
G.l. pipe
40mm.
dia. 2.5
mtr. Long
or 20 mm
dia. G.l.
Rod
NA
3)
Salt/charcoal
4)
Type of Wire
5)
Wire enclosure
12mm. dia.
G. l. pipe 2
mtr. Long
6)
Nut bolts
12 mm dia.
Cadmium /
GI
7)
8)
Washers
Watering pipe
GI
19mm. dia.
G.l. pipe
9)
Lugs
Yes
30 Kg.
charcoal
and salt
each
Double
G.l. 8
SWG
12mm.
dia. G. l.
pipe 2
mtr. Long
12 mm
dia.
Cadmium
/ GI
GI
19mm.
dia. G.l.
pipe
Yes
10) funnel
No
11)
No
12mm. dia.
G. l. pipe
2.5 mtr.
Long
12 mm dia.
Cadmium /
GI
double
G.l. 8
SWG
NA
NA
GI
19mm. dia.
G.l. pipe
NA
NA
Yes
Yes
yes
yes
NA
yes
yes
NA
Brick Masonry
B)
Low Impedance Earthing (Pipe in pipe technology)
(EA-EPP)
Scope:
Specification No (EA-EPP)
Specifications
Page 333
Tender No: -1800000008
Supplying and erecting approved type earthing system with Pipe in pipe technology
with
necessary ancillary materials and complete erection as per instructions from the site
engineer
Material:
GI Pipe: As per specification no. (CW-PLB/GP) mentioned chapter 17.5;
1. 50 mm dia x 3 meter long (In place of traditional GI pipe Earthing), for LV / MV
applications.
Or
2. 80 mm x 3 meter long (In place of traditional copper plate Earthing), for HV/EHV
applications.
Earthing Conductor: G.I strip/GI earth wire of size as per specifications given in Table No
9.1/1.
GI Pipe: As per specification no. (CW-PLB/GP) mentioned chapter 17.5 for watering and as
enclosure for Earth wire, as per specifications given in Table No 9.1/1.
Hardware: Screw / nut bolts with required washer of dimensions, Rawl plug / clip/ ‘U’ Nails
and material as per specifications given in Table No 9.1/1.
Filling material: Coal /Charcoal/ salt as per specifications given in Table No 9.1/1.
as per specifications given in Table No 9.1/1.
Lugs: As per specification no. (CB-LG/AL, CB-LG/CU) mentioned in chapter 7.9 & 7.10 for
Copper/ Aluminium lugs and as per specifications given in Table No 9.1/1.
Method of construction:
Earthing Pipe in pipe technology with ancillary materials shall be done by digging an 8” /
10” dia hand bore 10.5’ deep sufficient to install the electrode in normal soil conditions. The
space between the soil and the electrode is filled up with electrolyte material mixed with the
dug out mother soil, along with water and tightly packed up to the base of the terminal. In
rocky areas and under hard soil and sandy soil conditions the method of installation will be
as specified by manufacturer. Installation shall include drilling, welding, reverting, brazing
and nut bolting pipe when ever required in an approved manner with required material such
as nut bolts and washer etc. and with necessary brick masonry work as per the
specification. (As per IS 3043 amended up to-date). As far as possible continuous GI strip
shall be used but when ever jointing of strip is un avoidable, the jointing over lap portion
must not be less than 21/2 times the width of the strip either welded/ brazed/soldered by all
sides or overlap of 6 inch with two nut bolts/ riveting of adequate size with required washer
and covered by anti corrosive paint as per approved jointing practice in the industry and as
per directives from site engineer in-charge.
Testing:
The value of each earth electrode shall be measured by earth tester and record to be
submitted. (Also refer drawing No. EA-2 )
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity will be measured on number basis i.e.
each
Specifications
Page 334
Tender No: -1800000008
Chapter 10
SUB STATION
10.1 Transformer
SS-TR
10.2 Accessories
No Specs
10.3 Drawings
Specifications
Page 335
Tender No: -1800000008
Chapter 10 Sub Station (SS)
10.1
Transformer
(TR)
Scope:
Specification No (SS-TR)
Supplying and erecting AC three phase 11or 22 kV/0.44 kV, 50 Hz, oil immersed and
naturally cooled indoor/outdoor type copper wound distribution transformer of specified
capacity, connected delta on HV side and star on LV side with additional neutral brought
out on load side.
Recommended standards:
The following list shows Indian Standards which are acceptable as good practice and
accepted standards.
IS 335: 1963
Dielectric Strength
IS 2026 part I 1977
Specification for Transformer
IS 2026 part II 1977
Specification for type of cooling and
permissible temp. rise of transformer
IS 2026 part III 1981
Specification for insulation level and
dielectric strength of transformer
IS 2026 part IV 1977
Specification for terminal marking tapping
and connections
IS 1180 part I 1989
Specification for outdoor type three phase
distribution transformer
IS 10028 Part I 1985
Code of practice for selection installation
and maintenance of transformers
CBIP/TAC Manuals
Material:
1. Copper wound Transformer with Delta connection on HV side and star
connection on LV side complete with Manufacturer’s test certificates
2. Standard mountings required for transformer are shown below. The mountings
are to be selected from them and any additional if required.
Off load tap changing
Oil conservator with fitting holes and cap and plain oil level gauge
Silica gel dehydrating breather
Oil drain valve
Thermometer pockets
Oil filter valve
Lifting arrangement
Two earthing terminals
Diagram and rating plate
Four bi directional plain rollers
Air vent
Explosion vent
Terminal arrangement
Bushing with lugs and/or cable end box on LV side
HV cable end box and/or HV bushing
The transformer losses shall be as mentioned in Table No 10.1/1
Method of Construction:
The contractor should intimate name of manufacturer and make of the Transformer and
location of the manufacturer factory to engineer in charge prior to delivery of the
Specifications
Page 336
Tender No: -1800000008
transformer. After manufacturing of the transformer, the agency/contractor shall intimate
the engineer-in-charge for carrying out the inspection.
After receipt of intimation engineer-in-charge or his representative should inspect the
Transformer at manufacturer factory and shall carry out the following tests jointly in
presence of concern contractor.
1) Open Circuit test
2) Short Circuit test
3) Specific Resistance Test
4) Insulation Resistance of HV, LV, in between HV and LV, Winding and Body.
5) Dielectric Strength and acidity test of Transformer oil.
The test results of joint inspection shall be recorded on the test report of Transformer with
its Sr. No. prior to delivery of the Transformer to site.
Necessary work of plinth and or for D.P. structure with D.O. set, L.A., A.B. switch should be
completed before dispatch of the transformer. The channel arrangement on plinth is to be
done. Earthing arrangement should be completed. The Transformer should be installed on
plinths / double pole structure/floor by arranging chains pulley block, crane etc as per IS
Norms.
After installation of Transformer the stopper/lock should be provided to rollers of the
Transformer.
The connection of H.T/L.T. side should be completed by provided Copper wire/ cable with
necessary lugs to avoid loose connection. The earthing (2 Nos for Neutral & 2 Nos for Body)
should be connected from distinct electrodes. The earthing should be connected by
lugs/proper size of strip.
The Engineer in charge or his representative should check all connections on H.T. side, L.T.
side and earths and insulation and earth résistance test should be carried out and results
obtained shall be recorded.
.
Statutory Permissions to be obtained by the Agency/Contractor:
Before commencement of work, the drawings of installation shall be got approved from the
Electrical Inspector, I E & L Department.
The installation should be got inspected from Electrical Inspector and obtain written
permission to charge the Transformers.
Commissioning:
After above formalities the Transformer, should be charged/commissioned in presence of
Engineer in charge or his representative along with load trials and shall be handed over to
the department for beneficial use
After charging the Transformer, line, phase voltages and line current shall be measured, and
the same shall be submitted.
Following test certificates shall be submitted:
1. Manufacturer’s original certificate of Transformer as stipulated in IS.
2. Test certificate for dielectric strength of oil as per IS.
3. Test results of IR values.
4. Test results of all earth electrodes.
5. Readings of Voltages & currents at the time of commissioning.
Specifications
Page 337
Tender No: -1800000008
Table No 10.1/1
Capacity wise maximum losses of Transformers
Sr.
No.
Transformer
Rating
kVA
Voltage
Ratio in
kV
Winding
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
63
63
63
63
100
100
100
100
160
160
160
160
200
200
200
200
250
250
315
315
500
500
630
630
11/0.433
22/0.433
11/0.433
22/0.433
11/0.433
22/0.433
11/0.433
22/0.433
11/0.433
22/0.433
11/0.433
22/0.433
11/0.433
22/0.433
11/0.433
22/0.433
11/0.433
22/0.433
11/0.433
22/0.433
11/0.433
22/0.433
11/0.433
22/0.433
Cu
Cu
Al
Al
Cu
Cu
Al
Al
Cu
Cu
Al
Al
Cu
Cu
Al
Al
Cu
Cu
Cu
Cu
Cu
Cu
Cu
Cu
(At 75°C)
Losses at
100
%
Load
(Watts)
1250
1193
1235
84
260
1800
1717
1765
133.34
400
2400
500
3000
500
3000
550
3600
580
4200
420.02
1000
7000
840.04
(At 75°C)
Losses
at
No Load
(Watts)
155
(At 75°C)
Losses at
50
%
Load
(Watts)
380
362
180
220
520
495
Short
Circuit
Current
Amp
266.67
DRAWINGS
SS-1 :
SS-2 :
SS-3 :
SS-4 :
SS-5 :
SS-6 :
SS-7 :
SS-8 :
SS-9 :
SS-10
SS-11
SS-12
22kv Plinth mounted substation
22kV Pole mounted susbstation
Layout of Plinth mounted substation with feeder pillar
Layout of Plinth mounted substation with LT panel room
Layout of Plinth mounted substation with 4 pole structure for 2 transformers
Layout of Partial outdoor substation
Layout of Indoor substation for one transformer
Layout of Indoor substation for two transformers
22kV Metering cum isolator panel
: 11kV Earth pits & connections
: Overhead line distribution system 1
: Overhead line distribution system 2
Specifications
Page 338
Tender No: -1800000008
Chapter 11
GENERATORS
11.1 Generators
GEN-GEN
11.2 AMF Panel
GEN-AMF
11.3 Acoustic Enclosure
GEN-ACS
11.3 Drawings
Specifications
Page 339
Tender No: -1800000008
Chapter 11 Generators (GEN)
11.1
Generators
A) Portable Generator (PG)
Scope:
Specification No (GEN-PG)
The work includes supplying, erecting, final testing, putting in to operation and handing
over of the complete system of portable generator set with petrol start & Kerosene run
suitable to give specified output at 220 V +/-13 volts A. C. with accessories like tool kit and
comprehensive maintenance of the installation up to 1 year from date of commissioning.
Material:
Portable generator suitable to give output 1400 VA/ 2000 VA output Generator with built in
voltmeter, non fuse circuit breaker, along with one set of tool kit comprising of one spanner,
screw driver spark plug opener & Oil, fuel etc.
Portable Generator shall be of standard design and of original manufacturer with petrol start
and kerosene run engine of 4 stroke, single cylinder, TCI ignition system, centrifugal
governor, air cooled, semi dry type air cleaner and recoil starter, noise suppressor, oil alert
system, with blushless, self exciting, two pole, rotating field type and with “E” class
insulation alternator suitable to give specified output, duly tested at full load for continuous
2 hours with first filling of oil and fuel.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity will be counted on number basis. (i.e.
each)
B) Diesel Generator (DG)
Scope:
Specification No (GEN-DG)
Providing D.G. Set at site, carrying out all preparatory works, assembling, installing, making
adjustments, confirming all pre-commissioning requirement as per manufacturer’s
instructions, commissioning, final testing, putting in to operation and handing over of the
complete system of D.G. set including inspection from inspectorate office. The work include
necessary minor Civil works including opening on wall/Slab/floor and making good as it
was etc. & comprehensive maintenance of the DG set for 1 year from date of commissioning.
Material:
Diesel Generator set with continuous rating, 3 Phase, 415 V., 50 Cycles A.C. supply
of specified capacity, comprising of totally enclosed air/water cooled diesel engine
with standard control panel & tool kit. (Refer drawing no. GEN-DG-1 & GEN-DG-2)
Specifications
Page 340
Tender No: -1800000008
Diesel Engine:
•
•
The engine shall be of standard design of original manufacturers. It should be a totally
enclosed air/water cooled Diesel engine with 4 stroke multi cylinders developing suitable
BHP (As per Table 11/3) for giving power rating of (As per table 11/3) at the load terminals
of alternator at 1500 R.P.M., at armature temperature of 400 C for height
at 1000
Meter above M.S.L. at 50% R.H. The engine shall be capable of delivering specified power at
variable loads for P.F. of 0.8 (lag) with 10% over load available in excess of specified output
for one hour in every 12 hours. The average load factor of the engine over period of 24 hours
shall be 0.85 for power output. The engine shall confirm to IS: 10000 and Amended up to
date.
The engine shall be fitted with following accessories:1) Dynamically balanced fly wheel.
2) Necessary flexible coupling and guard for alternator and engine applicable
3) Lubricating oil cooler
4) Air cleaner Dry/Bath type
5) Lubricating oil pressure gauge
6) Lubricating oil filter with replicable element
7) Dry exhaust manifold with suitable exhausts heavy duty residential type exhaust
silencer and vertical hot air duct both logged with asbestos rope exhaust piping of
required length to reduce noise level.
8) 12/24 V. Electric starting equipment complete with standard batteries, dynamo,
cut-out, ammeter, necessary wiring, self starter etc. The system shall be capable of
starting D.G. set within 20 to 30 second even in winter
condition with an ambient
temperature down to 00 C.
9) Mechanical Governor of Class A2 for up to and including 200 KVA capacities
t should be furnished from the manufacturer along with manufacturer’s technical details.
Permission from Electrical Inspector.
Method of Construction:
The DG Set with canopy shall be erected with due care and ensuring the perfect level
withthe help of Sprit level, on provided cement concrete foundation and connecting the
providedearthing connections. The exhaust system shall be connected to the exhaust
manifold. After ensuring the filling of fuel, lubricating oil and medium of coolant, the set
shall be commissioned, with giving necessary full load trials or with the available load at
site. The set shall then be handed over to the department along with
the
installation
report given by the manufacturer and with all
the necessary certificates
and
permissions
obtained.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity will be counted on number basis. (i.e.
each)
Specifications
Page 341
Tender No: -1800000008
Table No 11/3
Rating of Alternator and minimum BHP of Engine
S KVA Capacity of
No.
Alternator
Minimum BHP of
Diesel Engine
Average Fuel
consumption litre
per hour at 100 %
Load
1
10
12
3.0
2
15
19
4.1
3
20
26
6.0
4
25
32
6.4
5
30
42
8.3
6
40
50.5
10.3
7
50
65.8
13.0
8
62.5
76
15.6
9
75
91
16.0
10
82.5
102
18.6
11
100
127
22.8
12
125
154
28.0
13
140
166
30.0
14
160
198
34.3
15
180
235
40.0
16
200
254
44.0
17
250
313
54.0
11.2
Automatic Mains Failure Panel
(AMF)
Scope:
Specification No (GEN-AMF)
The work includes supplying, installing, Testing & commissioning of automatic
mains failure control panel including auto by-pass, suitable for specified rating of DG Set
complete with accessories and comprehensive maintenance of the panel up to 1
year from date of commissioning.
AMF Panel shall comply following IS specification:
IS: 2147 1962
IS: 4722
Specifications
Degree of protection.
H.V. testing for panel
Page 342
Tender No: -1800000008
Material:
Panel shall consist of following:
Power module a pair of electromechanically interlocked contactors for all the phase / phases
& neutral. (For mains & generator)
Overload relay for generator contactor, neutral contactor for mains and generator.
Control and Metering module: Line voltage monitor. Generator voltage monitor, Ammeter, 3
times attempt to start facility.
MCB/MCCB of suitable rating for auto/manual operation. Auto/manual switch.
Emergency stop push buttons.
Manual start push button.
Frequency meter.
Engine hour and RPM meter. (Taco meter)
Two earthing studs.
Protection module: The engine shutdown in the unlikely event of low lube oil pressure, high
cylinder head temperature, high water temperature (For water cooled engine)
Indicators with alarm for Full/ Maximum Load on generator.
Indicators for Load on mains, Load on D.G. set, Engine fails to start, Emergency stop.
Battery charger complete with transformer/ rectifier, D.C Voltmeter and Ammeter, selector
switch for trickle, off, and boost charging and current adjustment.
Main supply failure monitor.
Timers.
Fault reset push button.
Method of Construction:
1.
•
•
•
•
2.
•
•
AMF Panel complete with relays, timers, set of CT’s for metering & protection and energy
analyzer to indicate currents, phase and line voltages, frequency, power factor, KWH,
KVARH & provision for overload, short circuit, fault, under frequency, control cabling from
AMF panel to diesel engine and elsewhere if required, complete with metering as per
material list.
System Operation:
The above-mentioned facilities provided shall be functional for following operational
requirements:
Auto Mode
A line voltage monitor shall monitor supply voltage on each phase when the mains supply
voltage fails completely or falls below set value (variable between 80 to 95 % of the normal
value) on any phase, the monitor module shall initiate start-up of diesel engine. To avoid
initiation due to momentary disturbance, a time delay adjustment between 0 to 5 second
shall be incorporated in start-up intimation.
A three attempt starting facility shall be provided 6 seconds ON, 5 seconds OFF, 6 seconds
ON, 5 Seconds OFF, 6 seconds ON. If at the end of the third attempt, the engine does not
start it shall be locked out of start and a master timer shall be provided for this function,
suitable adjustment timers are to be incorporated which will make it feasible to vary
independently ON-OFF setting periods from 1-10 seconds, if alternator does not build up
voltage after the first or second start as may be the case, further starting attempt will not be
made until the starting facility is reset.
Once the alternator has built up voltage, the alternator circuit breaker shall close
connecting the load to the alternator. The load is now supplied by the alternator.
When the main supply is restored and is healthy as sensed by the line voltage monitor
setting, both for under voltage or unbalance, the system shall be monitored by a suitable
timer which can be set between 1 minute to 10 minutes for the load to be transferred
automatically to main supply.
The panel shall start the set in the event of fault condition of under voltage, over voltage,
phase reversal, high frequency, neutral snapping, short circuit, etc., on the mains side. If
the above fault condition arises if the load is being fed from the DG Set, then the panel start
cut off the load from the set with an audible alarm, and the set shall run on no load.
Manual Mode:
In a manual mode, it shall be feasible to start-up the generator set by the operator on
pressing the start push button.
Three attempts starting facility shall be operative for the start-up function.
Specifications
Page 343
•
3.
•
•
•
•
Tender No: -1800000008
Alternator circuit breakers closing and trip operations shall also be through operator only by
pressing the appropriate button on the panel and closed shall be feasible only after
alternator has built up full voltage.
Test Mode:
When under test mode, pressing of test button should complete the start up sequence
simulation, and engine shall be started.
Engine shall build up voltage but the set shall not take load by closing alternator circuit
breaker when the load is on the mains, monitoring performance for voltage/ frequency etc.
shall be feasible without supply to load
If during test mode, the power supply has failed, the load shall automatically get transferred
on DG Set.
Bringing the mode selector to auto position shall shut down the set provided main supply is
ON if the mains supply is not available at that time, the alternator shall take load.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity will be counted on number basis. (i.e. each)
Specifications
Page 344
Tender No: -1800000008
11.3
Acoustic Enclosure (AEC)
Scope:
Specification No (GEN-AEC)
The Work includes supplying & erecting the Acoustic Enclosure (Canopy) fabricated from
CRCA sheet of specified gauge, suitable for indoor / outdoor installation exposed to weather
conditions & to limit overall noise level to 75 dB at distance 1 meter from the enclosure as
per CPCB / MPCB norms under free field condition.
Material:
Acoustic enclosure (canopy) shall be fabricated out of the CRCA sheet of thickness not less
than 1.6 mm on the outside cover with inside cover having not less than 0.6 mm thick
perforated power coated CRCA sheet.
Method of Construction:
The construction of Acoustic enclosure (canopy) should be such that, it shall prevent entry
of rain water splashing into the enclosure, and shall allow free & quick flow of rain water to
the ground in the event of heavy rain.
The detailed construction shall confirm to the details as under:The hinged doors shall be made from not less than 16 SWG (1.6 mm) thick CRCA sheet and
will be made air tight with neoprene rubber gasket and heavy duty locks.
All sheet metal parts should be processed through 7-tank process.
The enclosure should be powder coated.
The enclosure should accommodate the daily service fuel tank of the D.G. set to make the
system compact.
There should be provision of fuel gauge, which should show the level of the fuel even when
the DG set is not running. The gauge should be calibrated. The fuel tank should be filled
from the out side as in automobiles and should be with a lockable cap.
The batteries should be accommodated in the enclosure in battery rack.
The canopy should be provided with high enclosure temperature safety device.
The acoustics lining should be made up of high quality insulation material/ glass / mineral
or rock wool of minimum 50 mm thickness and shall be of 75 kg/m3 to 100 kg/m3 density
for sound absorption as per standard design of manufacturers to reduce the sound level as
per CPCB norms. The insulation material shall be covered with fine glass fiber cloth and
would be supported by perforated MS sheet duly powder coated.
The enclosure shall be provided with suitable size and No. of hinged type doors along the
length of the enclosure on each side for easy access inside the acoustic enclosure for
inspection, operation, and maintenance purpose. Sufficient space will be provided inside the
enclosure on all sides of the D.G. set for inspection, easy maintenance, and repairs.
The canopy should be as compact as possible with good aesthetic look
The complete enclosure shall be of modular construction.
The forced ventilation shall be as per manufacturer design using either engine radiator fan
or additional blower fans. If the acoustic enclosure is to be provided with forced ventilation
then suitable size of axial flow fan with motor (Auto-start arrangement) and suitable size of
axial flow exhaust fan to take the hot air from the enclosure complete with necessary motors
and auto start arrangement should be provided. The forced ventilation arrangement should
be provided with auto stop arrangement to stop after 5 minutes of the stopping of D.G. sets.
The acoustic enclosure should be suitable for cable connection through bus-trucking. Such
arrangements on acoustic enclosure should be water proof and dust-proof conforming to IP65 protection.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity will be counted on number basis. (i.e. each)
Specifications
Page 345
Tender No: -1800000008
Chapter 12
WATER PUMPS
12.1 Centrifugal
WP-CGP/
12.2 Ejecto type Water Pump
WP-EJP/
12.3 Submersible Pumps for
Bore wells
WP-SMP/
12.4 Submersible pumps for
Open well
WP-OSP
12.5 Accessories
No Specs
12.6
Specifications
Drawings
Page 346
Tender No: -1800000008
Chapter No. 12 :Water Pumps (WP)
12.1
Centrifugal Pump
(CGP)
General:
This part of the specifications deals with providing, installing, testing & commissioning of
Centrifugal pump.
All material shall conform to relevant standard as per BIS and shall carry ISI mark.
Work shall be carried out as per the method of construction as specified by BIS/Chapter 16
of P.W. Dept. Handbook/NEC.
Scope:
Specification No (WP-CGP)
Providing, installing, testing & commissioning of ISI mark Centrifugal water pump
(Monobloc), of required
HP with specified discharge and head with required size of
suction & delivery, foundation bolts grouted in provided cement concrete. (As Per IS: 9079
specifications)
The following list records those Indian Standards, which are acceptable as good practice,
and accepted standards.
SP 30: 1984
:
SP 7 (Group 4): 2005 :
National Electrical Code
National Building Code
Material:
Pump Body: Cast iron Grade FG 200 of IS 210 -1978
Impeller: Cast iron Grade FG 200 of IS 210 -1978
Shaft: High grade carbon steel Grade C-40 of IS 2073
Bearings: Stainless Steel
Motor: Squirrel cage induction.
Protection class: IP 55 TEFC with Class “F” insulation, with copper windings operated on
Single phase, 250 V / Three phase 415 V, 50 Hz, AC, Supply, with 2900 RPM. IS: 325
Base plate: Mild steel
Foundation Nut Bolts: Mild steel
Shaft seal: Fitted with high quality mechanical seal ensuring zero leakage
Method of Construction:
Pump mounted with motor on base plate, shall be placed on provided foundation with
perfect alignment, proper leveling. The pump should be connected to suction & delivery in
an approved manner, with provided MS / CI flange. (Refer drawing no.WP-1 (Fig.1))
After the completing the erection of pump ,it shall be run continuously for minimum 2
hours, and following tests shall be carried out for its performance:
a) Alignment, b) Bearing noise, c) Discharge, d) Current
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity will be counted on number basis. (Each)
Dismantling:
Dismantling of pump along with/without pipeline shall be done with utmost care with
required tools / shackles, machinery, if any. The dismantled pump and the pipeline shall be
store in a safe place or shall be transported to the place as per the direction of Engineer-incharge.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity will be counted on number basis. (Each)
Specifications
Page 347
Tender No: -1800000008
12.2
Ejecto Type Jet Water Pump
(EJP)
General:
This part of the specifications deals with providing, installing, testing & commissioning of
Ejecto type Jet pump.
All material shall conform to relevant standard as per BIS and shall carry ISI mark.
Work shall be carried out as per the method of construction as specified by BIS/Chapter 16
of P.W. Dept. Handbook/NEC.
Scope:
Specification No (WP-EJP)
Providing, installing, testing & commissioning of ISI mark Ejecto type Jet water pump of
required HP with specified discharge and head with required size of suction, delivery &
pressure pipe, with “H” type MS clamps to hold the suction & pressure pipe and duly
grouted with foundation nuts & bolts on provided cement concrete, spring washers of
requisite size or on provided angle iron frame. (As Per IS 9079 specifications)
The following list records those Indian Standards, which are acceptable as good practice,
and accepted standards.
SP 30: 1984
:
National Electrical Code
SP 7 (Group 4): 2005 :
National Building Code
Material:
Pump Body: Cast iron Grade FG 200 of IS 210 -1978
Impeller: Cast iron Grade FG 200 of IS 210 -1978
Shaft: High grade carbon steel Grade C-40 of IS 2073
Bearings: Stainless Steel
Motor: Squirrel cage induction. TEFC fan cooled with Class “F” insulation, with copper
windings operated on Single phase, 250 V / Three phase 415 V, 50 Hz, AC Supply, with
2900 RPM. IS: 325
Venturi & nozzle: High tensile bronze.
H type clamps with nut bolts: Made from Mild steel.
Foundation Nut Bolts: Mild steel.
Method of Construction:
First inspect the jet pump for any foreign particles in nozzle as well as in venturi with the
help of screw for freeness of plunger of foot valve to ensure no damage has taken place in
transit. Plunger should be free for up & down movements. While connecting Suction &
pressure pipe to jet pump, do not over tighten as this may damage the threads on jet pump
and also do not move away the two pipes. A good practice is to hold two pipes together by
tying with steel wire keeping the pipes in vertical position & filling the same with water &
checking the leakage of venturi, as well as of joints. Ensure that the pipes are ndependently
supported so as to avoid the transmitting of load of pump.
After the completing the erection of pump ,it shall run continuously for minimum 2 hours,
and following tests shall be carried out for its performance:
a) Alignment, b) Bearing noise, c) Discharge, d) Current
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity will be counted on number basis. (i.e. each).
Dismantling:
Specifications
Page 348
Tender No: -1800000008
Dismantling of pump along with the pipeline shall be done with utmost care with required
tools / shackles, machinery, if any. The dismantled pump and the pipeline shall be store in
a safe place or shall be transported to the place as per the direction of Engineer-in-charge.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity will be counted on number basis. (i.e. each).
12.3
Submersible Pump for Bore Well
(SMP)
General:
This part of the specifications deals with providing, installing, testing & commissioning of
Submersible pump.
All material shall conform to relevant standard as per BIS and shall carry ISI mark.
Work shall be carried out as per the method of construction as specified by BIS/Chapter 16
of P.W. Dept. Handbook/NEC.
Scope:
Specification No (WP-SMP)
Supplying and erecting ISI mark submersible pump set suitable for bore well, with
high quality wear resistance and dynamically balanced bronze impeller with stainless steel
shaft sleeves, pump-coupling and pivot with squirrel cage induction motor of 415 V/230 V,
50 cycles A.C. supply winding with waterproof PVC insulated copper wire of high precision
strength, not to be affected by chemically aggressive water and suitable bronze bearings
with nut & bolts etc. of required stage, specified H.P, discharge, head and delivery pipe
with necessary H. type clamp of suitable size and strength.
The following list records those Indian Standards, which are acceptable as good practice,
and accepted standards.
SP 30: 1984
:
SP 7 (Group 4): 2005 :
IS 8034
:
National Electrical Code
National Building Code
Submersible Pumps
Material:
Pump Body: Cast iron Grade FG 200 of IS 210 -1978.
Impeller: Made of Gun metal.
Shaft: High carbon steel Grade C-40 of IS 2073.
Bearings: Mitchell type thrust bearing unit with tilting pad assembly.
Motor & Pump: Windings with weather proof class, PVC insulated copper wire, Rotor with
stainless steel shaft & spine coupling, Stage casing high grade engineering polymer &
intermediate plate with stainless steel protection ring, Re-woundable stator with stainless
steel casing, Diffuser with stainless steel protection ring, etc.
H type clamps with nut, bolts: Made from Mild steel.
Foundation Nut Bolts: Mild steel.
Method of Construction:
Before installing the pump, the bore shall be checked thoroughly for its trueness and
presence of any protruding material (stones, tree roots, etc). After ascertaining the trueness,
the pump along with pipe line shall be lowered in to the bore with the help of Tripod. While
connecting delivery pipe to Submersible pump do not over tighten as this may damage the
threads on Submersible pump, Keep the pipes in vertical position & fill the same with water
& check the leakage at joints. The delivery pipes shall be clamped with 2 Nos of ‘H’ type
clamps and shall be rested on the top of the bore casing. (Refer drawing no.WP-1 (Fig.2))
After the completing the erection of pump ,it shall be run continuously for minimum 2
hours, and following tests shall be carried out for its performance:
a) Alignment, b) Bearing noise, c) Discharge, d) Current
Specifications
Page 349
Tender No: -1800000008
Mode of measurement: - Executed quantity will be counted on number basis. (i.e. each).
Dismantling:
Dismantling of pump along with the pipeline shall be done with utmost care with required
tools / shackles, machinery, if any. The dismantled pump and the pipeline shall be store in
a safe place or shall be transported to the place as per the direction of Engineer-in-charge.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity will be counted on number basis. (i.e. each).
12.4
Submersible Pumps for Open well (OSP)
General:
This part of the specifications deals with providing, installing, testing & commissioning of
Submersible pump.
All material shall conform to relevant standard as per BIS and shall carry ISI mark.
Work shall be carried out as per the method of construction as specified by BIS/Chapter 16
of P.W. Dept. Handbook/NEC.
Scope:
Specification No (WP-OSP)
Supplying and erecting ISI mark submersible pump set suitable for bore well, with
high quality wear resistance and dynamically balanced bronze impeller with stainless steel
shaft sleeves, pump-coupling and pivot with squirrel cage induction motor of 415 V/230 V,
50 cycles A.C. supply winding with waterproof PVC insulated copper wire of high precision
strength, not to be affected by chemically aggressive water and suitable bronze bearings
with nut & bolts etc. of required stage, specified H.P, discharge, head and delivery pipe
with necessary H. type clamp of suitable size and strength.
The following list records those Indian Standards, which are acceptable as good practice,
and accepted standards.
SP 30: 1984
:
SP 7 (Group 4): 2005 :
National Electrical Code
National Building Code
Material:
Pump Body: Cast iron Grade FG 200 of IS 210 -1978.
Impeller: Made of high quality and purity Bronze metal.
Shaft: High grade carbon steel Grade C-40 of IS 2073.
Bearings: Stainless steel.
Motor & Pump: Windings with weather proof class, PVC insulated copper wire, Rotor with
stainless steel shaft & spine coupling, Stage casing high grade engineering polymer &
intermediate plate with stainless steel protection ring, Re-woundable stator with stainless
steel casing, Diffuser with stainless steel protection ring, etc.
H type clamps with nut bolts: Made from Mild steel.
Foundation Nut Bolts: Mild steel.
Method of Construction
While connecting delivery pipe to Submersible pump do not over tighten as this may damage
the threads on Submersible pump, Keep the pipes in vertical position & fill the same with
water & check the leakage at joints. The delivery pipe shall be clamped with 2 Nos of ‘H’ type
clamps and shall be rested on the top of the well.
After the completing the erection of pump ,it shall be run continuously for minimum 2
hours, and following tests shall be carried out for its performance:
Specifications
Page 350
Tender No: -1800000008
a) Alignment, b) Bearing noise, c) Discharge, d) Current
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity will be counted on number basis. (i.e. each).
Dismantling:
Dismantling of pump along with the pipeline shall be done with utmost care with required
tools / shackles, machinery, if any. The dismantled pump and the pipeline shall be store in
a safe place or shall be transported to the place as per the direction of Engineer-in-charge.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity will be counted on number basis. (i.e. each).
Specifications
Page 351
Tender No: -1800000008
Chapter 13
FIRE FIGHTING & FIRE ALARM
13.1 Main Fire Pumps
(Single Stage Centrifugal)
FF-MFP/SSC
13.2 Main Fire Pumps
(Multi Stage Centrifugal)
FF-MFP/MSC
13.3 Main Fire Pumps
(Submersible)
FF-MFP/SBM
13.4 Jockey Pumps
FF- MFP/JP
13.5 Booster Pump
FF- MFP/BP
13.6 Pipes
FF-PP
13.7 Valves
FF-VL
13.8 Fire Fighting Accessories
FF-FFA
13.9 Fire Alarm System
FF-FAS
13.1 Fire Alarm accessories
FF-FAAS
13.1 P. A. System
FF-PAS
13.1 Sprinklers
FF-SPR
Specifications
Page 352
Tender No: -1800000008
Chapter 13
13.1
13.2
13.4
13.5
FIRE FIGHTING & FIRE ALARM SYSTEM (FF)
Main Fire Pumps (Single Stage Centrifugal) (FF-MFP/SSC)
Main Fire Pumps (Multi Stage Centrifugal) (FF-MFP/MSC)
Jockey Pumps (FF-MFP/JP)
Booster Pumps (FF-MFP/BP)
General:
Fire safety in building has become very important consideration in construction and
maintenance. A normal office building has fire load in the form of large quantity of papers
and furnishing. Buildings like Hospitals, Laboratories, Auditorium, Libraries, and
Museum etc. require fire safety provisions by virtue of their type of occupancy and
importance irrespective of their height.
The design and installation of a fire fighting system is of utmost importance. The fire
fighting installation on completion will have to be got cleared from the local fire fighting
authorities (Fire Service) for its efficacy, suitability and usability by the Fire Service in the
event of a fire.
Following types of water based fixed fire fighting installations are normally
provided in buildings:
Wet Riser.
Down Comer.
Automatic Sprinkler.
The design of fire fighting system for a building shall base as per the provisions in National
Building Code of India (Part IV) (Amended up to date) and also considering the provisions
in the Development Control Rules of local body/authority.
The operating pressure of individual hydrant shall be between 5.5 kg/cm2 to 3.5 kg/cm2
and the operating pressure of the furthest level hydrant from main pump shall be
minimum 3.5 kg/cm2.
The pipeline will be designed in such a way that it should be possible to get
discharge at any location.
Specifications:
This part deals with the specifications of following pumps:
Specification No(s)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Main Fire Pumps (Single Stage)
Main Fire Pumps (Multi Stage)
Jockey Pumps
Booster Pumps
(FF-MFP/SSC)
(FF-MFP/MSC)
(FF- MFP/JP)
(FF-MFP/BP)
Scope:
Supplying, installing, testing, perfect aligning, proper levelling and
commissioning of Fire service main/jockey/booster pump single/multi stage
having specified discharge and head with required HP or similar to with
minimum parameters, confirming to IS: 1520 with specified size of suction
and delivery pipes, coupled with squirrel cage A.C. induction motor. The
Specifications
Page 353
Tender No: -1800000008
pump set shall be erected in alignment on cement concrete foundation.
The Main Fire pumps should be able to deliver minimum operating
pressure of 3.5 kg/cm2 at highest and farthest hydrant.
Selection of Main Fire Pumps (Single & Multi Stage Centrifugal type) shall be as per
Table No. 13.1/1, & 13.1/2 and, whereas the selection of Jockey Pump (Centrifugal
type) & Booster Pump (Centrifugal type) shall be as per Table No. 13.1/3 & 13.1/4
respectively.
Material:
Pump Body:
The centrifugal pumps shall conform to IS 1520. The pump casing shall be of
heavy
section close grained cast iron and designed to withstand 1.5 times the working pressure.
The casing shall be provided with shaft seal arrangement as well as flanges for suction and
delivery pipe connections as required.
Impeller:
The impeller shall be bronze. This shall be shrouded type with machined collars. Wear
rings, where fitted to the impeller, shall be of the same material as the impeller. The impeller
surface shall be smooth finished for minimum frictional loss. The impeller shall be secured
to the shaft by a key.
Shaft:
The shaft shall be of stainless steel EN-8/ C – 40 and shall be accurately machined.
The
shaft shall be balanced to avoid vibration at any speed within the operating range of
the
pump.
Shaft Sleeve:
The shaft sleeve shall be of bronze.
Bearing:
The bearing shall be of stainless steel and of ball or roller type suitable for duty involved.
These shall be grease lubricated and shall be provided with grease nipples /cups. The
bearings shall be effectively sealed against leakage of lubricant or entry of dust or water.
Shaft seal:
The shaft seal shall be mechanical type so as to allow minimum leakage. A drip well shall be
provided beneath the seal.
Motor:
Suitable HP squirrel cage induction motor, TEFC (totally enclosed fan cooled) synchronous
speed 2900 RPM, suitable for operation on 415 volts, 3 phase 50 Hz. AC with IP 55
protection for enclosure, horizontal foot mounted type with Class-‘F’ insulation, conforming
to IS-325.
Body: Cast iron
Rotor Shaft: Stainless steel
Bearing: Refer specification for bearing under Pump above.
Winding: Class ‘F’ insulated copper winding.
Base plate: Fabricated from Mild Steel, foundation bolts etc.
Cement Concrete Foundation: Cement, Sand, and Water, in 1:2:4 ratio.
Anti Vibrating Pads: Made from high quality rubber of specified grade and
strength.
Hardware: Mild Steel
Method of Construction:
The surface of the pump foundation should be chipped with pneumatic hammer or sharp
pointed chisel. The teak wood box of appropriate size shall be placed and filled with cement
concrete in 1:2:4 ratio with 20 to 25 mmstone metal and required size and strength of
foundation nut & bolts. The necessary curing & finishing shall be done in approved
manner. The M.S. fabricated base plate of suitable size & strength should be fixed with antivibration rubber pads. Proper levelling and alignment shall be observed before tightening of
foundation bolts. Both the pump and motor shall be placed on common base plate frame
Specifications
Page 354
Tender No: -1800000008
with perfect alignment, proper levelling. The pump should be connected to pipe line with
M.S. flanges, gaskets, nut bolt etc and shall be checked for the leakages. The coupling guard
shall be provided with nut bolts of required size. The pump shall be tested for 3.5kg/cm2
pressure at highest and farthest point of the building for minimum 2 hours. The necessary
test certificate from manufacturer of pump and motor shall be produced. The motor should
have efficiency more than 90% and power factor above 0.80.
Mode of Measurement:
Executed quantity shall be measured on number basis.
Table No. 13.1/1
Fire Fighting pump (Single Stage Centrifugal)
Capacity in
HP
30
50
75
Speed in
RPM
2900
2900
2900
Discharge in
LPM
1400
1800
2400
Head in
metre
56
76
76
Suction/Delivery Size in
mm
80/65
80/65
100/80
Table No. 13.1/2
Fire Fighting pump (Multi Stage Centrifugal)
Capacity in
HP
30
50
75
75
120
Speed in
RPM
1450
1450
1450
1450
1450
Discharge in
LPM
1400
1800
2400
2800
2800
Head in
metre
56
76
88
76
105
Suction/Delivery Size in
mm
80/65
100/80
125/100
125/100
150/125
Table No. 13.1/3
Jockey Pump (Centrifugal type)
Capacity in
HP
15
20
Speed in
RPM
2900
2900
Discharge in
LPM
240
240
Head in
metre
56
105
Suction/Delivery Size in
mm
50/32
50/32
Table No13.1/4
Booster Pump (Centrifugal type)
Specifications
Capacity in
HP
Speed
in RPM
Discharge in
LPM
7.5
10
2900
2900
450
468
Head
in
metre
35
40
Suction/Delivery Size in
mm
50/32
50/32
Page 355
Tender No: -1800000008
13.3 Main Fire Pumps (Submersible) (FF- MFP/SBM)
13.4 Jockey Pumps
(FF-MPF/JP)
Specification No
1. Main Fire Pumps
2. Jockey Pumps
(FF- MFP/SBM)
(FF- MFP/JP)
Scope:
Supply, installation, testing & commissioning of fire pump (submersible) of required
stages having specified discharge and head with min. HP or equivalent for design
parameters. Submersible pump sets shall be manufactured in accordance with IS:
8034 specifications.
Selection of Main Fire Pumps (Submersible type) shall be as per Table No. 13.1/5
Material:
Pump bowls & casings: Closed grained C.I. coated with special Epoxy resin paint or high
corrosion resistance.
Impeller: Made form Gun metal & dynamically balanced for smooth and silent operations.
Strainer: Stainless steel
Bearing Bushes: Lead bronze
Bearing sleeves: High quality stainless steel
Pump shaft: High quality stainless steel & dynamically balanced for smooth and
silent
operations.
Motor body: Cast iron
Rotor shaft: High quality stainless steel & dynamically balanced for smooth and silent
operations.
Stator Housing: MS Seamless tube.
Thrust bearing: Bronze
Thrust bearing plate: High quality fiber sheet
Windings: PVC insulated copper
Method of Construction:
The provided M.S. frame shall be erected at inclined level at bottom of sump in rigid
manner. The submersible pump shall be erected on this frame & shall be clamped properly
& shall be connected to delivery pipe line with M.S. flanges, gaskets, nutbolts, water level guard connections, etc. The pump shall be checked for the leakages. The
proper electrical connection shall be made. The pump shall be tested for 3.5 Kg/ cm2 .
Pressure at highest & furthest point building for minimum 2 hours. The test certificate from
manufacturer of pump and motor shall be submitted. The motor should have
efficiency
more than 90% and power factor above 0.80.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be measured on number basis.
Table No-13.1/5
Fire Fighting pump (Submersible pump)
Capacity in
HP/ No. Of
stages
30/2
45/3
75/5
30/2
Specifications
Speed in
RPM
Discharge in
LPM
Head in
metre
Delivery/Size in
mm
2900
2900
2900
2900
1400
1800
2400
1800
56
76
88
56
130
130
Page 356
Tender No: -1800000008
105/7
60/4
2900
2900
2800
2800
13.6 Pipes
105
76
(FF-PP)
Pipes
Specification No (FF-PP)
Scope:
Supplying erecting C class (Heavy Duty) galvanized iron pipe, ISI mark of
specified diameter with screwed sockets, Joints & necessary G.I. fittings such
as sockets, check nuts, elbows, bends, tees, reducers, enlarger, plugs, etc. including electric
resistance welding (ERW), fixing with clamps & all connected works such as excavation,
drilling holes in wall, slabs, backfilling & making good the damages.
Material:
The galvanized iron pipes shall be of type and diameter as specified and
shall comply with I.S. 1239--1973 and 1969 for the specified type. The
specified diameter of the pipes shall refer to the inside diameter of the bore
pipes. The fittings of which the galvanizing has been damaged shall not be
used. For the firefighting works, the C Class pipes and accessories shall be
used.
Anti-Corrosive Protection On Under Ground Pipe:
Corrosion protection tape shall be wrapped on M.S. Pipes to be buried in ground. This
corrosion protection tape shall comprise of coat tar/asphalt component supported on fabric
of organic or inorganic fiber and minimum 4 mm. thick and conform to requirement of IS:
10221-Code of practice for coating and wrapping of under ground mild steel pipe line. Before
application of corrosion protection tape all foreign matter on pipe shall be removed with the
help of wire brush and suitable primer shall be applied over the pipe thereafter. The primer
shall be allowed to dry until the solvent evaporates and
the surface becomes tacky. Both
primer and tape shall be furnished by the same manufacturer. Corrosion protection tape
shall then be wound around the pipe in spiral fashion and bounded completely to the pipe.
There shall be no air pocket or bubble beneath the tape. The overlaps shall be 15 mm. and
250 mm. shall be left uncoated on either end of pipe to permit installation and welding. This
area shall be coated and wrapped after the pipe line is installed.
The tapes shall be wrapped in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. If
application is done in cold weather, the surface of the pipe shall be pre-heated until it is
worm to touch and traces of moisture are removed and then primer shall be applied and
allowed to dry.
No joint shall be located in the thickness of the walls.
If the pipe is required to be cut and the end threaded, the burns of the cut end shall be filled
smooth and any obstruction in the bore shall be entirely eliminated. The rate includes
wastage in cutting etc.
When the pipe is to be fixed to walls it shall be fixed with standard bracket, or holder bates
keeping the pipe about 12mm clear of the wall. The pipe shall be fixed to the wall
horizontally and vertically and parallel to one another when more than one pipe is laid
unless unavoidable. The supporting clips, etc., for the pipe shall be spaced at about two
meters or so as necessary. When holes are not left during construction they shall be cut into
the walls or slabs, etc., to pass the pipe through or to fix clamps. etc., after fixing of the
pipes, clamps etc., these shall be neatly made good.
Pressure Testing:
All piping shall be tested to hydrostatic test pressure of at least one and a half times the
maximum operating pressure, but not less than 10 kg/cm2 for a period not less than 24
Specifications
Page 357
Tender No: -1800000008
hours. All leaks and defects in joints revealed during the testing shall be rectified to the
satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge.
Piping repaired subsequent to the above pressure test shall be re-tested in the same
manner.
System may be tested in sections and such sections shall be securely capped.Pressure
gauges may be capped off during pressure testing of the installation.
Method of Construction:
Galvanized iron pipes of specified diameter and type and galvanized iron fittings with ERW
shall be erected on MS angle support with one coat of red oxide primer and two coats of Post
Office fire red enamel paint duly tested to 1.5 times of working pressure.
Excavating and back filling trenches including dewatering, cutting through
walls, floor, etc., and making site good.
Laying, jointing, and fixing the pipe with the fittings including cutting pipes,
wastage and threading the ends.
At all the road crossings the pipes shall be laid lower than the crust of the road.
During excavation if, any other service pipes (Water, electric, telephone, etc) come across,
these shall be carefully protected and supported. Any damagesdone shall be made good.
The pipe shall be laid on a well compacted bed in the trench. The trench after
laying the
pipe shall be refilled except at the joints in layers and manually rammed. Care shall be
taken to see that no earth, etc., gets inside the pipes. The filling shall be kept raised by
about 5 cm. for subsequent settlement. Bedding and cushioning of murum, good earth, or
sand shall be provided for the pipe in case of trench through rock. The trench at the joints
shall be filled similarly after satisfactory testing of the pipe. Any surplus excavated stuff
shall be disposed of satisfactorily without causing nuisance.
Mode of Measurement:
Measurement shall be for one metre of each type and diameter of pipe laid
complete with fittings, clamps etc., as specified.
The lengths shall be measured net on the straight and bends along the
center line of the pipes and fittings correct up to a cm.
13.7 Valves
(FF-VL)
A) Foot Valve with Strainer (-ve suction)
Scope:
Specification No (FF- VL/FV)
Supplying and installing cast iron foot valve of specified diameter with strainer conforming
to IS: 4038 with Gun metal seat (flapper), nut bolts, gasket, washers etc. for
negative
suction.
Material:
Housing, seat discs and disc plates: Grey cast iron
Hinge pins and disc guide: High tensile Stainless Steel bars
Strainers: a) Grey cast iron, b) Galvanized steel
Disc faces: a) Vegetable tanned leather (Min. 3 mm. thick), b) Leaded tin bronze, c) Natural
rubber (with reinforcement of cotton canvas), d) Synthetic rubber (with reinforcement of
cotton canvas)
Flange jointing nature:
a) Compressed fibre board or rubber minimum 1.5 mm thick. The fibre board shall be
impregnated with chemically neutral oil and shall have a smooth and hard surface.
b) Compressed asbestos fibre.
Specifications
Page 358
Tender No: -1800000008
Method of Construction:
The footwall with strainer shall be fitted with provided flange, gaskets, nut bolts to be
erected at required position and fitted firmly to pipe with proper alignment so as the joints
should be leak proof with shellac and other material required including necessary labour
and required tools and plants
Mode of Measurement:
Executed quantity shall be measured on number basis.
B) End line strainer (+ ve suction)
Specification No (FF- VL/ELS)
Scope:
Supplying and installing end liner strainer of specified diameter as per IS: 907,
fabricated out of brass perforated sheet of 14 SWG (2.0 mm. thick) duly with brazing
to
flange or pipe with nut bolts, gaskets, washers etc, in position for only suction in an
approved manner.
Material:
Body: Cast Iron
Strainer screen: Stainless steel/Brass screen of 1mm thick perforated sheet with 3
mm diameter holes.
Flange:
Cast iron / M.S. sheet
Method of Construction:
End line strainer with strainer shall be fitted with provided flange, gaskets, nut bolts etc,
and to be erected at the end of suction pipe, including labour and required tools and plants.
Mode of Measurement:
Executed quantity shall be measured on number basis.
C)Sluice valve
Specification No (FF- VL/SV)
Scope:
Supplying and installing cast iron double flange sluice valve of specified diameter
conforming to IS: 780, ISI mark, having cast iron body and gun metal working parts with
nut bolts, gaskets etc. and tested to 1.5 times of working pressure, in an approved manner.
Material:
Body: a) Brass, b) Leaded tin bronze
Bonnet or cover: a) Leaded tin bronze, b) Forged brass, c) Brass
Stuffing box, disc hinge, check nut, stem nut, disc retaining nut, gland, gland
nut, gland flange, body seat rings and disc or wedge facing rings (where
renewable): a) Leaded tin bronze, b) Extruded brass rod, c) Forged brass, d) Brass
Stem, hinge pin and plug: a) Extruded brass rod, b) High-tensile brass, c)ForgedBrass
Ball (for ball type check valves): Chromium steel
Nut bolts: Mild steel
Hand wheel: Cast iron
Gasket: Compressed asbestos fibre
Gland packing: a) Hemp and jute, b) Asbestos
Spring: Phosphor bronze wire
Seating ring: Synthetic rubber
Specifications
Page 359
Tender No: -1800000008
Method of Construction:
The double flange sluice valve shall be fitted with provided flange, gaskets, Nut bolts, etc. to
be fitted to pipe, accessories with washers, spring washers, check nuts as required
with
proper alignment so as to be leak proof including necessary labour and required tools
and
plants.
Mode of Measurement:
Executed quantity shall be measured on number basis.
D)Butterfly valves
Specification No (FF- VL/BFV)
Scope:
Supplying & installing cast iron double flange butterfly valve of size 75/80mm.dia
confirming to IS: 13095 having cast iron body, FG 220 Nitrite rubber replaceable seat with
Moulded ‘O’ ring, C.I. powder coated disc flow control complete & tested to 1.5 times
of
working pressure in an approved manner.
Material:
Body: Cast iron Spheroid graphite iron Carbon steel
Disc: a) Cast iron Spheroid graphite iron carbon steel, b) Stainless steel Gun metal
c) Aluminum bronze
Shaft: a) Stainless steel, b) Carbon steel Aluminum bronze Nickel copper alloy
Seating ring/Seal retaining ring: a) Stainless steel, b) Gun metal aluminum bronze
deposited metal suitable for duty or resilient material
Seat: Elastomers
Shaft bearing seals: Manufacturer’s standards suitable for duty
Internal fastenings: Stainless steel
External bolting: Carbon steel: tensile strength 390 n/mm or MPa
Method of Construction:
The double flange butterfly valve shall be fitted with provided flange, gaskets, Nut bolts etc.
to be fitted to pipe, accessories with washers, spring washers, check nuts as required with
proper alignment so as to be leak proof including necessary labour and required tools and
plants.
Mode of Measurement:
Executed quantity shall be measured on number basis.
.
E)Non Return Valves
Specification No (FF- VL/NRV)
Scope:
Supplying and installing double flange NRV of specified diameter conforming to IS:
(Part-I), ISI mark, having cast iron body and gun metal working parts with nut
gaskets, etc. and tested to 1.5 times of working pressure in an approved manner.
Material:
Body, cover, door, bearing holder: Grey cast iron
Hinge pin, door pin and door suspension pin: Stainless steel
Body seat rings: Leaded tin bronze
Door face ring: Leaded tin bronze
Bearing bushes/ Bearing block: Leaded tin bronze
Plugs for hinged pin/Air release plug: Leaded tin bronze
Bolts: Carbon steel
Nuts: Carbon steel
Gaskets: Rubber
Hinges: Grey cast iron
Specifications
Page 360
5312
bolts,
Tender No: -1800000008
P N Rating and Test Pressure:
S No.
PN Rating
1
PN 1.0
2
PN 1.6
Test for
Body
Seat
Body
Seat
Test Pressure
(Gauge) MPa
1.5
1.0
2.4
1.6
Test Duration
in minutes
5
2
5
2
Method of Construction:
The double flange NRV shall be fitted to pipe with provided flange, gaskets, and Nut bolts
etc, accessories with washers, spring washers, and check nuts as required with
roper
alignment so as to be leak proof including necessary labour and required tools and plants.
Mode of Measurement:
Executed quantity shall be measured on number basis.
F)Gate Valves
Specification No (FF- VL/GV)
Scope:
Supplying & installing gun metal gate valve of specified diameter having threaded ends,
conforming to IS: 778, ISI mark, along with G.I. threaded nipple.
Material:
Body: a) Brass, b) Leaded tin bronze
Bonnet or cover: a) Leaded tin bronze, b) Forged brass, c) Brass
Stuffing box, disc hinge, check nut, stem nut, disc retaining nut, gland, gland
nut, gland flange, body seat rings and disc or wedge facing rings (where
renewable): a) Leaded tin bronze, b) Extruded brass rod, c) Forged brass, d) Brass
Stem, hinge pin and plug: a) Extruded brass rod, b) High-tensile brass, c)Forged Brass
Ball (for ball type check valves): Chromium steel
Nut bolts: Mild steel
Hand wheel: Cast iron
Gasket: Compressed asbestos fibre
Gland packing: a) Hemp and jute, b) Asbestos
Spring: Phosphor bronze wire
Seating ring: Synthetic rubber
Method of Construction:
The Gate Valve shall be fitted to pipe with provided flange, gaskets, and Nut bolts etc,
accessories with washers, spring washers, and check nuts as required with proper
alignment so as to be leak proof including necessary labour and required tools and plants.
Mode of Measurement:
Executed quantity shall be measured on number basis.
.
G) Hydrant Valves (Landing Valves)
Specification No (FF- VL/HV)
Specifications
Page 361
Tender No: -1800000008
Scope:
Supplying and installing gun metal single outlet hydrant valve Morris pattern, oblique type,
conforming to IS:5290, ISI mark, with G.M. blanks cap and M.S. or G.I. chain in
an
approved manner.
Material:
Valve Body, bonnet, stop valve, Check nut, female outlet: Bronze/ Aluminium
alloy or Stainless Steel
Valve spindle: Bronze/ Aluminum alloy or Stainless Steel
Hand Wheel: M.S. or C.I. (Black painted)
Spring: Made of phosphor wire.
Washer, Gasket: Rubber
Blank Cap: ABS plastic.
Method of Construction:
The hydrant valve shall be connected with provided flange, gaskets, Nut bolts etc.
use of required tools and plants.
The water discharge shall be not less than 900 lpm for single head and 1800 lpm for
double head valves at 7 kg / cm2
with
Mode of Measurement:
Executed quantity shall be measured on number basis.
.
13.8 Fire Fighting Accessories
(FF-FFA)
A) Priming Tank
Specification No (FF- FFA/PT)
Scope:
Supplying & Installing One piece Moulded HDP / Fibre water tank of required capacity with
necessary plumbing material on provided M.S. structural supports in an approved manner.
Material:
Priming Tank: HDPE/ Fiber of good quality material
Gate Valves: As per (FF- VL/GV) above.
Method of Construction:
The Priming tank shall be installed on provided M.S. structural supports with 20/25
dia. inlet valve and 50 mm dia. outlet valve with provided necessary G.I. piping up
delivery of main fire pump before non-return valve.
mm
to
Mode of Measurement:
Tank capacity will be measured on litre basis. (i.e. per litre)
B) Hose Reel
Specification No (FF-FFA/HRD)
Scope:
Supplying and installing wall mounting swinging Hose reel drum as per IS: 884 and fitted
with 19 mm dia 22.5 meter long high pressure polypropylene (Polyhose) pipe as per IS: 444
(type III) G.M. chrome plated nozzle and 19 mm dia and G.M. gate valve on the inlet pipe
with necessary M.S. Bracket for holding Hose reel drum fitted in position with
wall
fasteners, in an approved manner.
Specifications
Page 362
Tender No: -1800000008
Material:
Hub and sides: Aluminum Alloy/Mild steel/ Aluminum sheet
Wall Bracket: Cast iron / Mild steel.
Hose tube (20 mm): Thermoplastic (Textile Reinforced) Type-2,
as per IS- 12585
Nozzle with branch Pipe: Brass as per IS 8090
Stop Valve (Ball Valve): Gun metal.
(Nominal internal
dia)
Method of Construction:
The Wall Mounting swinging Hose reel drum with Gun Metal Nozzle, gate valve, shall
be
connected on M.S. bracket with provided flange, gaskets, Nut bolts etc. with use of required
tools and plants. The water flow rate shall be not less than 24 LPM and the
range of jet shall be not less than 6 metre.
Mode of Measurement:
Executed quantity shall be measured on number basis.
.
C) Hose pipe for Hose reel
Specification No (FF-FFA/HOP)
Scope:
Supplying & erecting high pressure polypropylene hose pipe 20 mm. dia as per IS 444- type
III & IS 446-1980 type I fabricated from polyester core braided with high tensile textile yarn
suitable for erection of 19 mm Gun Metal Crome plated nozzle.
Material:
Hose pipe material: Polypropylene, the lining and the cover shall be of uniform thickness,
reasonably concentric and free from air blisters, porosity and splits. The tensile strength
shall be minimum 5.00 MPa and shall withstand for 10.2 kg/cm2
Nozzle: Crome plated gun metal
Method of Construction:
The hose pipe shall be connected with provided couplings.
Mode of Measurement:
Executed quantity shall be measured on per meter basis.
D)Rubber Hose Pipe
Specification No (FF-FFA/RHP)
Scope:
Supplying & erecting high pressure rubber hose pipe 20 mm. Dia as per IS 446- 1978 (type
I) &IS 444- 1978 (type II) fabricated lead moulded with high tensile yarn braided
rubber
hose pipe suitable for erection of 19 mm gun metal Crome plated nozzle.
Material:
Hose pipe material: Rubber. The lining and the cover shall be of uniform thickness,
reasonably concentric and free from air blisters, porosity, and splits. The tensile shall
minimum 5.00 MPa and shall withstand pressure of 10.2 kg/cm2
Nozzle: Crome plated gun metal
Method of Construction:
The hose pipe shall be connected with provided couplings.
Specifications
Page 363
be
Tender No: -1800000008
Mode of Measurement:
Executed quantity shall be measured on per meter basis.
E) Controlled Percolation Hose Pipe
Specification No
(FF-FFA/CPH)
Scope:
Supplying fire fighting C P (Controlled Percolation) Hose pipe of 63 mm in diameter,
conforming to IS: 8423, and 15 metre in length, fitted with male and female G.M.
coupling confirming to IS: 903, ISI mark.
Material:
Hose pipe material: Synthetic cotton yarn confirming to IS 8423 and shall be made of
jacket or cotton or synthetic material or their combination. It shall be tested as specified in
IS and shall withstand for pressure 10.2 kgf/cm2 and
should not burst before a
pressure of 35.7 kg/ cm2 is reached.
Coupling: Gun metal confirming to IS 903
Method of Construction:
Hose pipe of 15 metre length with male and female Gun metal coupling shall be connected
as per direction.
Mode of Measurement:
Executed quantity shall be measured on number basis.
F) R.R.L Hose Pipe
Specification No (FF-FFA/RRL)
Scope:
Supplying fire fighting R.R.L. Hose pipe, conforming to IS: 636 (Type-A) 15 metre length,
itted with male and female G.M. coupling confirming to IS: 903, with ISI mark.
Material:
Hose pipe material: Rubber lined woven jacketed & 63mm in dia., the lining and the
cover shall be of uniform thickness, reasonably concentric and free from air
blisters, porosity and splits. The tensile shall be minimum 5.00 MPa and shall
withstand pressure of 10.2 kg/ cm2
Coupling: Gun metal
Method of Construction:
Hose pipe of 15 metre length with male and female Gun metal coupling shall be connected
as per direction.
Mode of Measurement:
Executed quantity shall be measured on number basis
G) Canvas Hose Pipe
Specification No (FF-FFA/CHP)
Scope:
Supplying fire fighting canvas Hose pipe, conforming to IS: 4927 and 15 metre length, fitted
with male and female G.M. coupling confirming to IS: 903, with ISI mark.
Material:
Hose pipe material: Canvas
Coupling: Gun metal
Specifications
Page 364
f
Tender No: -1800000008
Method of Construction:
Canvas hose pipe 15 metre in length with male and female Gun metal coupling
necessary labour, material and use of required tools and plants.
including
Mode of Measurement:
Executed quantity shall be measured on number basis
H) Nozzles
Specification No (FF-FFA/NZ)
Scope:
Supplying G.M. branch pipe of 63 mm diameter with specified length fitted with 20
diameter detachable hexagonal nozzle confirming to Is: 903, ISI mark.
mm
Material:
Nozzle: Chrome plated Gun metal
Method of Construction:
Gun metal hexagonal nozzle fitted with required tools and plants including necessary
labour, material, etc.
Mode of Measurement:
Executed quantity shall be measured on number basis.
I) Fire Brigade connection
Specification No (FF-FFA/FBC)
Scope:
Supplying and installing fire brigade Header of 150 mm Ø, G.I. ‘C’ class pipe having 2 Nos.
of 100 mm ‘T’ outlet with 100 mm Ø flange, fitted with 2 Nos. of G.M. fire
branching
inlet connection, each consisting of 2 Nos. 63 mm dia. G.M. male inlet for supplying water
in fire tank.
Material:
Pipe material: G.I. ’C’ class (Heavy duty)
Branching Inlet: Gun metal
Male Inlet: Gun metal
Method of Construction:
In case under ground storage tank is not approachable by fire tenders, a 4 way 63
mm
diameter instantaneous male inlet connection is provided at street level and
connected
to UG tank with 1 meter length of 150mm. diameter under ground pipe.
The whole unit shall be placed in provided MS box made of 2 mm thick MS sheet with
openable glass cover.
Mode of Measurement:
Executed quantity shall be measured on number basis
J) Siamese connection (Fire service Inlet)
Specification No (FF-FFA/SMC)
Scope:
Supplying and installing fire brigade Header (Siamese Connection) of 150 mm Ø, G.I. ‘C’
class pipe having 2 Nos. of 100 mm ‘T’ outlet with 100 mm Ø flange, fitted with 2 Nos.
of
G.M. male inlets with spring type NRV for supplying water to Wet riser.
Specifications
Page 365
Tender No: -1800000008
Material:
Pipe material: G.I. ’C’ class
Branching Inlet: Gun metal
Male Inlet: Gun metal
Non Return Valve: As per (FF- VL/NRV) above.
Method of Construction:
In order to facilitate feeding of water in the system by fire service, a 4 way 63 mm diameter
collecting head shall be provided and connected with each riser/down
comer and the ring
main with non return valve and with provided butterfly/sluice
valve. This should be
located at a place where fire brigade tender can reach.
The whole unit is placed in provided MS box made of 2 mm thick MS sheet with open-able
glass cover.
Mode of Measurement:
Executed quantity shall be measured on number basis
K) Air Cushion Tank (Air Vessel)
Specification No (FF-FFA/ACT)
Scope:
Supplying and installing Air Vessel of 300 mm Ø 1.5 mtr. in height M.S. Tank
fabricated from M.S. black ERW pipe, conforming to I.S.: 3589, having 6mm
thickness,
dish end at both ends, duly welded with 300 mm Ø pipe, having inlet of 100 mm Ø, duly
fitted with 100 mm Ø sluice valve and 20/25 mm Ø draw in with
G.M. gate valve, to
be installed inside pump house along with provided M.S. angle
tripod.
Material:
Air Vessel: MS ERW pipe confirming to IS 3589
Tripod: MS angle of size 75 x 75 x 5mm
Method of Construction:
300mm dia, 1.5 metre height air vessel, Gate Valve, flanges, MS angle Tripod
necessary labour, material and use of required tools and plants.
including
Mode of Measurement:
Executed quantity shall be measured on number basis
L) Air Release Valve
Specification No (FF-FFA/ARV)
Scope:
Supplying and erecting Air release cock of 20/25 mm Ø made from G.M. with necessary G.I.
coupling for fixing on top of Air vessel or on wet riser.
Material:
Air release Valve: Gun metal
Coupling: G.I.
Method of Construction:
Air release Valve with necessary GI Coupling shall be fixed on top of wet riser with required
labour, tools, etc.
Mode of Measurement:
Executed quantity shall be measured on number basis
Specifications
Page 366
Tender No: -1800000008
M) Pressure Gauge
Specification No (FF-FFA/PG)
Scope:
Supplying and installing pressure gauge of 100 mm Ø. 0-300 PSI or 0-21 kg/cm2
square
fitted with 12/15 mm Ø. pad cock valve, and G.I. pipe, elbow etc. as per requirement in an
approved manner.
Material:
Pressure Gauge: 100 mm diameter made from Brass metal.
Cock valve, elbow, and pipe: G.I
Method of Construction:
The 100 mm dia pressure gauge with G I cock valve, erected with GI Pipe including
accessories, with required labour, tools, etc, as directed by the Engineer-in-charge.
Mode of Measurement:
Executed quantity shall be measured on number basis
N) Pressure Switch
Specification No (FF-FFA/PS)
Scope:
Supplying and installing pressure switch with 12/15 mm Ø isolation valve, G.I. nipple,
elbow etc. in an approved manner.
Material:
Pressure switch: Brass metal
Isolation valve, elbow, Nipple: G.I
Method of Construction:
The Pressure switch with G I isolation valve, and necessary GI fittings (elbow, Nipple) fitted
with required labour, tools, etc.
Mode of Measurement:
Executed quantity shall be measured on number basis
O) Orifice plate
Specification No (FF-FFA/OP)
Scope:
Supplying and erecting one no. Brass orifice plate having 6 mm. thick with specified
outer diameter and suitable inner diameter to reduce the pressure between
3.2 kg/cm2 to 5.5 kg/cm2
Material:
Body: Stainless steel 6 mm thick
Method of Construction:
The Orifice plate shall be placed before the hydrant valve.
Specifications
Page 367
Tender No: -1800000008
Mode of Measurement:
Executed quantity shall be measured on number basis
13.9 Fire Alarm System
(FF-FAS)
A) Heat detector
Specification No (FF-FAS-HD)
Scope:
Supplying, erecting, and testing heat detector with base erected on 16 gauges M.S.
box of 100 x 100 x75 mm size duly painted.
sheet
Material:
Heat detector: UL listed / LPCB marked with 3600 blinking LED & having 680 C/780 C
fixed temperature.
Box: CRCA/MS sheet of 16 gauges
Red oxide paint: Superior quality
Enamel paint: Superior quality of specified colour
Hardware: Sheet metal screws
Plugs: Plastic
Method of Construction:
The Heat Detector shall be fixed on the CRCA/MS sheet box duly painted with one coat
of
red oxide & 2 coats of enamel paint of specified shade with necessary SM screws, plugs, etc
on ceiling, duly terminating the provided cable with provided glands and
making
the
connection.
Mode of measurement:
Executed quantity shall be measured on number basis
B) Optical type Photo electric smoke detector
Specification No (FF-FAS/SD)
Scope:
Supplying, erecting and testing optical type smoke detector complete with base
on 16 gauge CRCA/MS sheet box of 100 x 100 x 75 mm duly painted.
erected
Material:
Smoke detector: UL listed / LPCB marked
Box: CRCA/MS sheet of 16 gauge
Red oxide paint: Superior quality
Enamel paint: Superior quality of specified colour
Hardware: Sheet metal screws
Plugs: Plastic
Method of Construction:
The Smoke Detector shall be fixed on the CRCA/MS sheet box duly painted with one coat of
red oxide & 2 coats of enamel paint of specified shade with necessary SM screws, plugs, etc
on ceiling, duly terminating the provided cable with provided glands and
making
the
connection.
Mode of Measurement:
Executed quantity shall be measured on number basis.
C) Beam type Photo-Thermal/Thermal Smoke detector (Optical Beam Detector)
Specifications
Page 368
Tender No: -1800000008
Specification No (FF-FAS/OBSD)
Scope:
Supplying, erecting and testing Optical Beam Detector (Beam type Photo-Thermal Smoke
detector) complete with Transmitter and receiver unit erected on wall/ceiling
with base.
Material:
Detector: Comprising Transmitter & Receiver unit, UL listed / LPCB marked, with BS
5839 part 1 2002, compliance and duly tested & certified as per EN54-12: 2002.
The detector shall have following features:
• Automatic drift compensation
• Dust tolerance chamber to provide optimum detection performance and
minimal
nuisance alarms to minimize maintenance
• Digital addressing capability
• Photoelectric and Photo-thermal multi criteria
• Operating voltage range 8 to 30 V DC
• Operating temperature range -30 to +700 C
• Multi-function Alarm- Normal bi-colour LED indicator.
Hardware: Sheet metal screws
Plugs: Plastic
Applications:
• Photo-Thermal detector to be used in General purpose halls, auditoriums, and at
spaces where the ceiling height is more than 4.0 metre.
• Thermal detector with combination of fixed and rate of rise heat shall be used in
kitchens, pantry and bars and at similar spaces where the ceiling height is more than
4.0 metre.
Method of Construction:
The Detector consisting of Transmitter (Detector) and receiver shall be mounted / fixed
designated place duly connected with provided cable/wires and tested.
at
Mode of Measurement:
Executed quantity shall be measured on number basis.
13.10 Fire Alarm Accessories (FF-FAAS)
A) Pill Box (Manual Call Point [MCP])
Specification No (FF-FAAS/MCP)
Scope:
Supplying, erecting, testing, and commissioning pill box with break glass, push button. MCP
is manually operated device used to initiate an alarm signal
Material:
Push Button: Plastic
Enclosure: CRCA/MS with 100/150 mm round/square with Glass cover
Hammer with chain: Brass
Enamel paint: Superior quality Post Office red colour
Hardware: S.M. Screw
Specifications
Page 369
Tender No: -1800000008
Plugs: Plastic
Method of Construction:
The pill box with break glass cover, push button in circular/ square enclosure with push
button kept inside per set with a glass outside marked “IN CASE OF FIRE BREAK
GLASS”
provided with a small hammer and chain fixed to the pill box shall be mounted on wall or
any other place as directed and provided with cable entry with suitable terminal inside and
painted with two coats of red oxide and two coats of post office red enamel paint.
Mode of Measurement:
Executed quantity shall be measured on number basis
B) Hooter
Specification No (FF-FAAS/HTR)
Scope:
Supply and erecting hooters with CRCA enclosure duly connected to main amplifier
radiate two tone sounds for public.
to
Material:
Hooter: Electronic type with 6W output, Line matching transformer
Enclosure: CRCA sheet of 14 SWG with perforation
Enamel paint: Superior quality Post Office red colour
Hardware: S.M. Screw
Plugs: Plastic
Gitties: Wooden
Method of Construction:
The electronics hooter with Line matching transformer shall be enclosed in suitable
size
perforated CRCA enclosure and installed as per instructions and shall be connected
and
fixed at suitable site to ensure that the alarm is heard anywhere in the protected area. The
minimum sound level shall be 80 dB.
Mode of Measurement:
Executed quantity shall be measured on number basis
C) Remote Response Indicators
Specification No (FF-FAAS/RRI)
Scope:
Supplying, erecting, and testing of remote response indicators.
Application:
Remote Response Indicators shall be fixed for closed rooms,
cabins, or for inaccessible rooms, etc.
Material:
Indicator: 5 mm LED (2 Nos) / 10 mm LED (1 No) in Red colour
Enclosure: CRCA sheet of 14 SWG with perforation
Enamel paint: Superior quality of specified colour
Hardware: S.M. Screws
Plugs: Plastic
Gitties: Wooden
Specifications
Page 370
Tender No: -1800000008
Method of Construction:
Remote response indicator housed in enclosure shall be fitted out side the rooms, cabins at
accessible height and shall be clearly visible.
Mode of Measurement:
Executed quantity shall be measured on number basis
D) Fire Alarm Control Panel
Local Control Panel
Specification Nos
Fire Alarm Control Panel (FF-FAAS/FACP)
Local Control Panel (FF-FAS/LCP)
Scope:
Supplying, erecting, testing, & commissioning of Fire Alarm Control Panel with all
accessories.
Material:
Panel: Microprocessor based Conventional Main Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP)
with
necessary Test Certificate from ERTL as per IS 2189-1999 provided with SMPS (Switch Mode
Power Supply) of suitable battery (2x12V) 24V, 24 AH capacity maintenance free battery as
standby supply to switch over automatically for a period
of
8 hours in case of A.C. supply failure to panel with 7 AH capacity battery charger,
panel
shall have following features.
a) Visual zone indication in which fire has emerged.
b) Audio alarm devices.
c) Acknowledge reset and test devices.
d) Visual indication (2x20 character LCD display) incorporating following
indications:
(i) Fire condition
(ii) Fault condition
(iii) A.C. Pilot indication
(iv) Low battery indication
(v) Blown fuse indication A.C. as well as D.C.
(vi) Built in electronic hooters of 2 tone round for fire condition and
single tone for fault condition.
(vii) Open and short circuit fault.
(viii) Push button switch for checking each zone.
(ix) Push button to disable audio alarm.
(x) Reset push button.
e) Fire protection and alarm circuit shall have modular design using electronic
plug in type printed circuit boards (PCB) with spare cards.
Method of installation:
The microprocessor based main fire Alarm control panel designed as per IS 2189-1999 with
ERTL Test certificate shall be fixed at accessible place so that security or fire personal can
attend to the fault immediately.
Testing:
The control shall be tested for following features:
1) Alarm cancel Test
2) Reset 1 lamp
3) Fire Test
4) Open Test (for detector & hooter)
5) Short circuit Test (for detector & hooter)
6) Walk Test(one man test)
7) Sounder Test
Specifications
Page 371
Tender No: -1800000008
Mode of Measurement:
Executed quantity shall be measured on number basis
13.11 P.A. System (FF-PA/AFR)
A) Amplifier for P A System
Specification No (FF-PA/AFR)
Scope:
Supplying, erecting, testing, and commissioning amplifier 120 W / 250W for Public address
system.
Material:
Amplifier: Amplifier unit with wall mounted closed cabinet having rated output wattage 120
W / 250W with 4 Nos input channels (2 Nos for Microphone & 2 Nos Auxiliary),
4/8/16
Output lines, suitable to work on 230 V AC supply / 12 V DC supply, and
necessary
protection circuit.
Method of Construction:
Amplifier unit shall be installed as per guide lines of manufacture and shall be tested
rated output.
for
Mode of Measurement:
Executed quantity shall be measured on number basis
B) Sound Column
Specification No (FF-PA/SOC)
Scope:
Supplying, erecting, testing, and commissioning 15 watts Sound Column.
Material:
Sound Column: Wall mounted Sound column shall give 15 watts output, with
fixing arrangement.
necessary
Method of Construction:
Sound column shall be installed as per guide lines of and connected to the amplifier
tested.
Mode of Measurement:
Executed quantity shall be measured on number basis
C) Microphone
Specification No (FF-PA/MIC)
Scope:
Supplying, erecting, testing, and commissioning hand shield microphone
Material:
Microphone: Microphone unit as per manufacturer’s standard specifications.
Specifications
Page 372
duly
Tender No: -1800000008
Method of Construction:
Microphone unit shall be connected with cord to amplifier unit as per guide lines of
manufacture and shall be tested.
Mode of Measurement:
Executed quantity shall be measured on number basis
D) Microphone Cable
Specification No (FF-PA/MCC)
Scope:
Supplying erecting, testing to 2 core shielded Microphone cable.
Material:
Microphone cable: 2 core microphone cable, PVC insulated with copper conductor.
Method of Construction:
Microphone cable shall be connected to microphone and tested.
Mode of Measurement:
Executed quantity shall be measured on meter basis
13.12 Sprinklers (FF-SPR)
A) Sprinklers
Specification No (FF-SPR)
Scope:
Supplying and erecting 15 mm (1/2”) dia. NBCM Body chrome finished, pendent type
quartzoid bulb sprinkler.
Material:
Chrome plated sprinkler bulb having 680 / 780C fixed temperature rating UL listed.
Method of Construction:
The sprinklers bulb shall be fitted to sprinklers pipe line and tested for required pressure.
Mode of Measurement:
Executed quantity shall be measured on number basis.
Specifications
Page 373
Tender No: -1800000008
Chapter 14
LIFTS
14.1 Lifts
LFT-LFT
14.2 Drawings
Specifications
Page 374
Tender No: -1800000008
Chapter 14:Lift
14.1 Lifts
Scope:
Specification No
(LFT)
Supplying erecting and commissioning passenger lift, hospital lifts and goods lift with
technical requirements of lift installation, its components, safety devices various type of
controls and methods of operation. The selection of a particular type of control and method
of operation will be guided by the requirements in individual case such as nature of
building, usage, occupancy, traffic pattern, etc. and has to be decided in individual case
considering quality and quantity analysis of service.
(Refer drawing no. LFT-1, LFT-2, LFT-3)
Recommended Standards:
The following list is for Indian Standards which are acceptable as good practice and
accepted standards;
IS 14665 part I
IS 14665 part II
IS 14665 part III
IS 14665 part IV
: Guidelines for outline dimensions of passenger,
goods, service and hospital lifts.
: Code of practice for installation, operation and
maintenance of
lifts.
: Safety rules
: Components
Development Control
Rules
: Of concerned Corporation or Local Authority
National Building Code 2005
Bombay Lift Act 1939
Bombay Lift Rules 1958
I. E. Rules 1956
: Reprint as per 2005
Material:
Electric Supply:
Three phase, 50 c/s, 415 V electric supply shall be made available by owner. The entire
lift equipments should be suitable for operation at +10% to - 20% of the rated supply
voltage.
Gearless machine:
The gearless machine shall consist of a motor, traction sheave and break-drum or brake
disc completely aligned on a single shaft. Gearless machine shall be AC. gearless with
VVVF drive.
Geared machine;
The lift machine shall be of worm gear reduction type with motor, brake, worm gearing
and driving sheave and suitable for type of control specified.
Electric motor:
Energy efficient Electric motor of suitable HP with class F insulation and S-4 duty cycle
Car:
As per IS 14665 part IV with MS Girders, bracings of adequate size and strength at the
bottom and top with angle iron frame and side panels of CRCA/MS of 16 gauge duly
powder coated paint or SS sheet of 18 gauge with mirror or hairline finish with safety
factor more than 5.
Signals:
FPI in car and CPI at all landings are to be provided with up / down direction indicators
with call registration facility.
Specifications
Page 375
Specifications
Tender No: -1800000008
Variable Voltage Variable Frequency:
Incoming mains AC power is first rectified to DC and then inverted to provide controlled
AC current to the elevator drive. Precision monitoring is required for motor speed, car
direction, position and load to enable the pulse width of the AC power supplied to the
motor and to be adjusted to ensure that elevator speed is maintained very accurately to
an ideal profile. Energy saving through reduced power consumption should be achieved.
Controls:
Microprocessor based Control panel duly wired with proper size and strength of copper
wire.
Control panel box:
Control panel box of MS sheet of 16 gauge with duly power coated of MS sheet of 16
gauge.
Driving / traction pulley:
Sheaves and pulleys shall be of hard alloy, cast iron, SG iron or steel and free from
cracks, sand holes and others defects. They shall have machined rope grooves. The
traction sheave shall be grooved to produce proper traction and shall be of sufficient
dimension to provide for wear in the groove. The deflector sheave shall be grooved so as
to provide a smooth bed for the rope.
Over speed governor:
The car safety shall be operated by speed governor located overhead and driven by
governor rope suitably connected to the car and mounted on its own pulleys. Governor
shall be provided for lifts with a travel of more than 5.5 meters. The governor rope shall
be not less than 6mm in dia and shall be made of steel or phosphor bronze. These shall
be in accordance with IS 14665 (part 4lsec-4): 2001.
Electromagnetic breaks:
The lift drive machinery shall be provided with an electro-magnetic brake or motor
operated brake normally applied by means of springs in compression when the operating
device is in off position. The brake shall be suitably curved over the brake drum or brake
disc and provided with fire proof friction lining. The operation of brake shall be smooth,
gradual and noiseless. The brake shall be designed to be of sufficient size and strength
to stop and hold the car at rest with rated load. The brake should be capable of
operation automatically by the various safety devices.
Automatic Rescue Devices (ARD)
ARD should monitor the normal power supply in the main controller and shall activate
rescue operation within 10 seconds of normal power supply failure. It should bring the
elevator to the nearest floor at a slower speed than the normal run. While proceeding to
the nearest floor the elevator will detect the zone and stop. After the elevator has
stopped, it automatically opens the doors and parks with door open. After the operation
is completed by the ARD the elevator is automatically switched over to normal operation
as soon as normal power supply resumes.
In case the normal supply resumes during ARD in operation the elevator will continue to
run in ARD mode until it reaches the nearest landing and the doors are fully opened. If
normal power supply resumes when the elevator is at the landing, it will automatically
be switched to normal power operation.
All the lift safeties shall remain active during the ARD mode of operation.
The battery capacity should be adequate so as to operate the ARD for duration of at least
30 minutes.
Suspension wire rope:
Round strand steel wires ropes made from steel wire ropes having a tensile strength not
less than 12.5 tones / cm2 and of good flexibility shall be used for lift. Lubrications
between the strands shall be achieved by providing impregnated hemp core.
Guide rails:
The guide rails shall be continuous throughout the entire travel and shall withstand
without any deformation by the action of safety gear with a fully loaded car. Generally
the guide rails shall be supported by brackets secured to the hoist way frame at each
floor. The rails shall be securely fastened to the brackets or other supports by approved
heavy rail clamps. Guide rails shall extend from pit floor to the underside of concrete
Page 376
Tender No: -1800000008
slabs or grafting at top of the lift well. They shall be erected in plumb and parallel with a
maximum deviation of 3mm.
Buffers:
Buffers shall be suitable for installation in the space available. Buffer anchorage at pit
floors shall be installed avoiding puncturing of water proofing. Oil buffers of the car and
counter weight shall be of the spring return type or of gravity type. The contractor must
indicate the name of buffer manufacturers, buffer stroke & certified maximum loads.
Method of Construction:
Bar chart shall be prepared as per tender condition and requirement.
Lift hoist way measurement shall be done before finalizing the material
quantity.
Drawing should be prepared according to tender specification considering hoist
way
size and permission from Lift Inspector for erection of lift should be taken prior to
commencement of erection.
White wash in lift well shall be carried out by the client.
Site in full readiness shall be handed over to the agency.
Minor civil work pertaining to front wall architraves internal / external plastering
etc. shall be done by the lift agency.
•
Prepare and install scaffolding and template by adjustment required.
•
List of components / finished items those are not manufactured by lift
manufacturer shall be informed by the agency.
•
Brackets are to be erected and fixed in to plum line.
•
Put the fasteners (16 mm dia x 100 mm) if the brackets are to be fixed on RCC
wall
/ beam / lintel or fix rig bolts if brick work found in RCC.
•
After fixing brackets and guides with adjustment fix the car and counterweight
•
Fix the landing door frame / door bottom with sill and suitable brackets to with
stand the load of passenger / freight as per specification
•
Fix metal trunking / PVC pipe as per IS requirement
•
Complete civil work such as fixing up hoist way, push button, buffers, machine
room I beams for resting machine, foundation for control panel, minor civil work,
making holes in bottom slab of machine room to pass traction rope, speed
governor rope / wiring and complete finishing according to sizes and
specification.
•
Electrical wiring in lift shaft and supply cable shall be carried out from electrical
agency as per requirement of lift rules.
•
Fix machine with complete gear box unit, suitable rubber pad / anti vibrating pad,
diverter if required with alignment as per norms.
•
Fix the control panel at accessible height from floor level to inspect, connect,
and
operate easily.
•
Put wires in accordance with the control panel connection diagram according to
colour code in metal trunking with insulating paper on all bends, corners. Metal
trunking shall be duly earthed from top to bottom according to IS specifications.
•
Mid way junction boxes are to be fixed according to size but it should be marked
by every wire with nos. (Ferrules) Traveling cables should be fixed with suitable
hanger to take load of travelling cable and put extra wire of 20 % approximately
•
Fix the car and counterweight frame according to sizes, adjustment of safety
block wedges shoes as per requirement.
•
Toe Guard Aprons:
•
The toe guard apron of gauge not less than 1.6mm sheet steel may be provided
extending at least 15mm beyond entrance jams at each side. The guards shall
have a straight vertical face extending below the level of the finished car floor
and
not less than the depth of the levelling zone plus 7.5mm. It shall be seamed
to car platform construction and be reinforced and braced.
•
Car Apron, Landing Thresholds and Sills:
•
•
Specifications
Page 377
•
•
•
•
Tender No: -1800000008
An apron shall be fitted to the car platform such that no dangerous gap exist at any time
when the landing door is opened, Thresholds and sill plates shall be provided at
the
landings also. The distance between landing sill and the sill on car platform shall not be
more than 30mm.
ARD should be provided
Emergency Power Supply for lift car, fan and intercom system:
This shall include suitable secondary battery with trickle/Boost charge arrangement and
inverter power pack with necessary contactors for supply to light fixtures in the lift car,
fresh air fan in lift car. The same battery shall also feed the alarm bell and
communication equipment.
Inter-communication system:
Intercom system shall be provided in car to have communication in case of an
emergency and shall be connected to re-chargeable battery supply.
Ratings and Instructions:
Inside the lift car, the lift supplier shall also provide a stainless steel metallic plate
indicating the rated load and detailed instructions for the passengers. This shall be
mounted at a suitable place.
•
General:
a) Put main traction ropes from car to counterweight with rope tension adjustment.
b) Put counterweight i.e. of CI blocks in counter weight frame for suitable
equilibrium.
c) Put car platform and car with adjustment.
d) Fix car door and panels / car push button/ fall ceiling light, fan.
e) Fix landing panels and put in lock in circuit.
f) Fix hoist way accessories like drum reels terminators, final limits, levelling
g) Removing the scaffolding.
h) Connect three phase supply from main switch along with earthing to controllers
as
per instruction given.
i) Wiring from controller to motor along with earth wire is to be completed.
j) Check motor / gear oil.
k) Start lift in maintenance mode.
l) Check adjustment of hoist way switch/ safety doors and check all parameters of shaft.
m) Put controller on normal mode.
n) Test run to be taken and & service inspection of lift with all safeties shall be
done in presence of site in charge.
o) Pre commissioning work such as cleaning of shaft, pit etc shall be done.
p) After completion of work, NOC shall be obtained from lift inspector by the agency before
putting LIFT in to operational use.
Testing of Lift Installation:
Tests at site:
(a) Levelling Test:
Accuracy of the floor levelling shall be tested with the lift empty, fully loaded. The lift
shall be run to each floor while travelling both in upward and downward directions
and the actual distance of car floor above, below landing floor shall be measured. In each
case there shall not be any appreciable difference in these measurements for levelling at the
floors when the car is empty and when it is fully loaded. The tolerances for levelling shall be
as specified in para 8 of chapter IV, section I.
(b) Safety Gear Tests:
Instantaneous safety gear controlled by a governor should be tested with contract load and a
contract speed, the governor being operated by hand. Two tests should be made, however,
with wedge clamp or flexible clamp safeties, one with contract load in the car and the other
Specifications
Page 378
Tender No: -1800000008
with 68 kg (equivalent to one person) in the car. The stopping distance obtained should be
compared with the specified figures and the guides, car platform, and safety gear should be
carefully examined afterwards for signs of permanent distortion.
Counterweight safety gear should be tripped by the counter weight governor and the
stopping distance noted. In this case, however the governor tripping speed may exceed that
of the car safety governor but by not more than 10 percent. During the safety gear tests, car
speed (from the governor or the main sheave) should be determined at the instant or
tripping speed with that stated in IS. The governor jaws and rope should be examined for
any undue wear.
(c) Contract speed:
This should be measured with contract load in the car, with half load, with no load, and
should not vary from the contract speed by more than 10 percent. The convenient method is
by counting the number of revolutions, made by the sheave or drum in a known time, Chalk
mark on the sheave or drum and a stop switch will facilitate timing but care must be
exercised to ensure that no acceleration or retardation periods are included. If the roping is
2 to 1 the sheave speed is twice the car speed. Alternatively, the speed can be measured by a
tachometer applied directly to shaft immediately below the sheave.
(d) Lift balance:
After the above test, some of the weight shall be removed until the remaining weights
represent the figures specified. With this condition at half way travel the effort required to
move the lift car in either direction with the help of winding wheel shall be as nearly as can
be judged by the same.
(e) Car and landing doors interlock:
The lift shall not move with any door open. The car door relay contact and the retiring
release cam must be tested. The workings of the door operation and the safety edges and
light equipment if any provided shall also be examined.
(f) Controllers:
The operation of the contactors and interlocks shall be examined and it shall be ascertained
whether all the requirements laid down in the specifications have been met.
(g) Normal terminal stopping switches:
These shall be tested by letting the car run to each terminal landing in turn, first with no
load and then with contract load and by taking measurements, top and bottom over travels
can be ascertained.
(h) Final terminal stopping switches:
The normal terminal stopping switches shall be disconnected for this test. It shall be
ensured that these switches operate before the buffers are engaged.
(i) Insulation Resistance:
This shall be measured (after removing the electronic PCB’s and their connection) between
power and control lines and earth and shall not be less than 5 mega-ohms when measured
with D.C. voltage of 500 volts. The test shall be carried out with contactors so connected
together as to ensure that all parts of every circuit are simultaneously tested.
(j) Earthing:
Earthing continuity of all conduits, switches, casing and similar metal work shall be tested.
(k) Ropes:
The size, number construction and fastenings of the ropes should be carefully examined and
recorded.
Specifications
Page 379
Tender No: -1800000008
(I) Buffers:
The car should be run on to its buffers at contract speed and with contract load in the car to
test whether there is any permanent distortion of the car or buffers. The counter weight
buffers should be tested similarly. Test report shall be intimated after testing at works.
Service Temperature Test:
A continuous run of one hour should be made with number of starts and stops to reproduce
as nearly as practical the anticipate duty in service. (The standard duty cycle is for 180
starts per hour). It is very difficult in practice to carry out this test with alternate starts at
full load and no load and it is necessary therefore to simulate these cycles. A suitable test
for all motors except squirrel cage motors is to run the car up from the bottom landing with
contract load and stop at each floor. From the top floor a non stop run is made to the lowest
floor and the upward journey with stop is then repeated. The time intervals between stops
and starts at the floors should be uniform and such as to give about 150 starts in one hour.
At the end of this run the temperatures of the armatures and fields of the motor and
generator are recorded. The temperature rise should, not exceed 55 deg C or 75 deg C for
class A or B insulation respectively.
Method of Construction: Executed quantity will be counted on number basis. (i.e. each)
Specifications
Page 380
Tender No: -1800000008
Chapter 15
TEMPORARY ILLUMINATION
15.1 Temporary Illumination
TE-IL
15.2 Hiring of DG Set
TE-DG
Specifications
Page 381
Tender No: -1800000008
Chapter 15 :Temporary Illumination (TE)
15.1 Temporary Illumination
(TE/IL)
Scope:
Specification No (TE/IL)
This work is to be carried out within municipal premises or as instructed by Engineer- incharge.
Method of Construction:
Wires shall be used of copper conductor with one continuous length and with minimum
joints and of good insulation quality.
All switchgears and panels must be checked, tested with earth test, IR test Polarity,
continuity prior to commencement or charging of installation. The results for the same shall
be maintained in the logbook at site.
Termination shall be done with copper lugs at an important place such as in main
switchgears and in panel.Necessary ancillary works such as making holes in brick wall or
concrete wall, scaffolding or wood work, mechanical work, civil work etc. to be done and
again have to make good as original with no extra cost if required. Maintenance personnel
shall be made available for the entire period of function.
Safety Code:
All the safety codes under different statutory authorities shall be observed strictly while
doing the work.
Full load testing shall be given prior to trial day with all necessary latest testing equipment.
15.2 Hiring of DG Sets (TE/HDG)
Scope:
Specification No
(TE/HDG)
This work is to be carried out within municipal premises or as instructed by Engineer- incharge and for temporary functional programs.
Method of Construction:
The DG Set on hire basis shall be fully equipped with all accessories, four pole changeover,
etc and shall be filled with fuel. The connections of the changeover shall be made in
presence of site engineer. Necessary testing on full load or on available load shall be taken in
presence of site engineer. As far as possible load balancing shall be done. In case of switches
with interlocking neutral isolation should be confirmed.
The set shall be properly earthed and earth connection are to be connected to body &
neutral as per IE rules.
Termination shall be done with copper lugs at an important place such as in main
switchgears and in panel.
Agency must have sufficient quantity of fuel and oil to be stored at site with tools for
necessary maintenance, arrangement of first aid and fire extinguishing system.
Maintenance personnel along with Operator of DG Set shall be made available for the entire
period of function.
Specifications
Page 382
Tender No: -1800000008
Safety Code:
All the safety codes under different statutory authority shall be observed strictly while doing
the work.
Full load testing shall be given prior to function day with all necessary latest testing
equipment.
Certificate:
Commencement certificate shall be obtained by the agency from concerned Electrical
Inspector of I.E. & L. Department.
Chapter 16
Specifications
Page 383
Tender No: -1800000008
SIREN
16.1 Siren & Accessories
Specifications
SRN-SRN
Page 384
Tender No: -1800000008
Chapter 16 :Siren
(SRN)
16.1 Siren & Accessories
A)
(SRN-AS)
Weather Shade (WS)
Scope:
Specification No (SRN-AS/WS)
Supplying and erecting weather shade for protection of Siren motor, with louvers from all
sides for ventilation and clear sounding of siren, duly painted with one coat of red oxide
paint and two coat of approved enamel paint.
Material:
MS Sheet: 18 SWG.
Fabrication: MS angle iron
Paint: Primer & Enamel paint
Anti vibrating Pads: High density, heavy duty class rubber pads, with nut, bolts.
Method of Construction:
Weather shade for covering Siren motor shall be fabricated from 18 SWG MS sheet with
necessary cutting, bending & welding. Shade shall have louvers from all sides for ventilation
& clear sounding of Siren. Shade of size 91 cm height x 91 cm length x 60 cm width, top
having hollow trapezium of size 91 cm x 35 cm x 35c m with angle iron frame work of size
25 x 25 x 3 mm shall be fabricated and painted with one coat of red oxide & two coats of
approved enamel paint from both sides i.e., from inside & outside. The weather shade shall
be firmly erected on anti vibrating pads.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity will be measured on number basis (i.e., each)
B)
Scrapping & Painting of Shade
(PTG)
Scope:
Specification No (SRN-AS/PTG)
Scrapping the existing paint and repainting the weather shade of Siren motor to withstand
all weather conditions.
Material:
Surface cleaning material: Iron brush and emery paper.
Paint & Red Oxide: Epoxy red oxide, Epoxy Enamel paint, and Special thinner for painting.
Method of Construction:
Scrapping the existing paint of outer and inner surface of the weather shade with cleaning
powder (Shade having an area of 3.5 Sq. mtr approx. on one side) and applying one coat of
special primer red oxide mixed in special type thinner (844)in 1:3 proportion. After curing
Specifications
Page 385
Tender No: -1800000008
time of 6 hours, apply two coats of epoxy air dry paint (anticorrosive) of approved colour
mixed in special type thinner complete (the job is to be carried out on site).
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity will be measured on number basis (i.e., each)
C)
Siren Motor
(SM)
Scope:
Specification No (SRN-AS/SM)
Supplying & erecting Siren Motor of specified HP 1 ph / 3 ph AC, 50 Hz. 230/415 Volt type
and as per IS 1941 (Part I) 1976, at the rated speed of 2800 RPM within 10 seconds of start
for the range up to 3.25/8 Km.
Material:
Motor:
The stator & rotor shall be of aluminium alloy or similar material. The siren motor shall be
compact in design and reliable in operation and stable for installation in open as well as in
exposed position any where in the country. The electric motor with Class ‘F’ insulation shall
be totally enclosed with greased sealed ball bearing and shall conform to IS 325 of 1970. If
housing is provided for protection against rains, it shall not affect the sound output at the
specified distance. The siren motor shall be fitted with two blowers (double mounted )
horizontally properly balanced and mounted on opposite side of motor shaft and having
unequal numbers of slots on the stators capable of producing a basic note from 400 to 1000
Hz.
Anti vibrating Pads: High density, heavy duty class rubber pads, with nut, bolts.
Method of Construction:
The Siren motor complete assembly shall be erected on designated plate on provided cement
concrete foundation with anti-vibration pads nut-bolts etc. as directed by the engineer
incharge.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity will be measured on number basis (i.e., each)
Specifications
Page 386
Tender No: -1800000008
Chapter 17
CIVIL WORK
17.1 Excavation
CW-EXN
17.2 Masonry work
No Specs
17.3 C.C. Foundation
No Specs
17.4 Painting
CW-PTG
17.5 Plumbing
CW-PLB
17.6 Plumbing Accessories
No Specs
Specifications
Page 387
Tender No: -1800000008
Chapter 17 Civil Work (CW)
17.1
A)
Cable Trench (CTR)
1.
General
Excavation
(EXN)
This part of specification deals with the preparation of trenches in soft soil, hard murum, BT
road, and laying of cables inside the trench, etc as per IS: 1255.
2.
Scope:
Specification No (CW-EXN/CTR)
Excavating in all types of soil strata and making trench for laying cable/cables, providing
sand bed for laying the cable, covering cable with specified material as per requirement, and
finishing the same by making the surface proper with crown on top of the trench.
The following list shows Indian Standards, which are acceptable as good practice, and
accepted standards.
SP 30: 1984
:
National Electrical Code
SP 7 (Group 4): 2005 :
National Building Code
IS 1255: 1967
:
Code of practice of Installation & Maintenance of armoured
cables up to 33 kV.
3. Material:
Bricks: Solid Clay bricks of minimum size 225x110x62.5 mm (L x B x H), burnt in the kiln,
of good quality.
Sand: Screened sand of good quality.
4. Method of Construction:
Trench in Soft soil / Hard Murum / Tar road: Single run of cable
Before excavating the soil for preparing trench, route of cable laying shall be got finalized from
the site in-charge. Trench of minimum 300 mm width shall be excavated up to minimum
depth below the ground surface as per Table No 17.1/1 Bottom of the trench should be
carefully levelled and freed from stones. Cable duly straightened shall be laid flat and
embedded in the 200 mm layer of screened sand at the bottom of the trench. Bricks shall be
laid all over the run of cable as specified below:
Lengthwise for cable up to and including 10 Sqmm of all cores.
Width wise for cable above 10 Sqmm of all cores.
Remaining portion of the trench shall be back filled with the excavated material after
removing stones and sharp / hard material, and making the surface proper. Crown of 150
mm shall be provided over the trench. The remaining excavated material shall be removed
from site and dumped in scrap yard of Local authorities or at suitable place.
Trench in Soft soil / Hard Murum / Tar road: Two or more cables run of cable
Before excavating the soil for preparing trench, route of cable laying shall be got finalized from
the site in-charge. Trench of minimum required width more than 300mm. shall be excavated
up to minimum depth as per Table No 5, below the ground surface. Bottom of the trench
should be carefully levelled and freed from stones. Cables duly straightened shall be laid flat
and embedded in the 200 mm layer of screened sand. The inter-axial distance between two
cables shall be between 230 and 400 mm. at the bottom of the trench. Bricks shall be laid all
over the run of cable as specified below:
Lengthwise for cable up to and including 10 Sqmm of all cores.
Width wise for cable above 10 Sqmm of all cores.
Remaining portion of the trench shall be back filled with the excavated material after
removing stones and sharp / hard material, and making the surface proper. Crown of 150
Specifications
Page 388
Tender No: -1800000008
mm shall be provided over the trench. The remaining excavated material shall be removed
from site and dumped in scrap yard of Local authorities or at suitable place.
Trench in Soft soil/Hard Murum/Tar road with half round Hume pipe:
(For cables of size 25 Sqmm. and above shall be covered by min. 150 mm. dia.
RCC Hume pipe)
of
Before excavating the soil for preparing trench, route of cable laying shall be got finalized from
the site in-charge. Trench of minimum required width more than 300mm. shall be excavated
up to minimum depth as per Table No 5, below the ground surface. Bottom of the trench
should be carefully levelled and freed from stones. Cables duly straightened shall be laid flat
and embedded in the 200 mm layer of screened sand. The inter-axial distance between two
cables shall be between 230 and 400 mm. at the bottom of the trench. Inverted 150mm. dia.
Half round RCC Hume pipe shall be laid above full length of cable. For more than one cable
higher size or more number of Hume pipes are to be provided.
Remaining portion of the trench shall be back filled with the excavated material after
removing stones and sharp / hard material, and making the surface proper. Crown of 150
mm shall be provided over the trench. The remaining excavated material shall be removed
from site and dumped in scrap yard of Local authorities or at suitable place.
As per 3.1 above, in place of bricks, the cable of size 25 sq.mm and above shall be covered
with 150 mm dia. half round Hume pipe.
4.4
Mode of Measurement:
Executed quantity shall be measured on the basis of running meter per run of cable.
Table No 17.1/1
Minimum laying Depth of cables (IS: 1255)
S.No
1
2
3
4
5
Voltage level of cables
Up to 1.1 kV
3.3 kV to 11 kV
22 kV to 33 kV
At road crossing
At railway crossing (from Bottom of
sleepers to Top of pipe)
17.4
Minimum depth from top of
the cable
750 mm
900 mm
1050 mm
1000 mm
1000 mm
Painting (PTG)
General:
This part of specification deals with the painting of all types of Fans, Poles, Fluorescent
fittings, Panel type lift doors, Collapsible gates of lift, Transformer, Fencing & Gate of
transformer sub station, Feeder pillar, etc.
A)
Painting of Fans (PTF)
Specification No (CW-PTG/PTF)
Scope:
Spray painting of table fan / pedestal fan / cabin fan / ceiling fan / exhaust fan including
guards etc., shall be carried out in the workshop by adopting following method:
Method of construction:
a) Existing paint on the surface of the fan body and its accessories shall first be scrapped off
with the help of Emery paper of required grade or by heating the surface with blowlamp.
One coat of primer shall then be uniformly applied with spraying gun and same shall be
allowed to dry out. The body of fan then shall be spray painted with 2 coats of enamel paint
of specified colour. When the colour is completely dried, rubbing Wax compound shall be
applied. With a smooth cloth, the surface shall then be vigorously rubbed, until the painted
Specifications
Page 389
Tender No: -1800000008
parts starts shining. Same method shall be adopted for fan blades, base & stand of pedestal
fan, mounting frame of exhaust fan. After complete drying, fan shall be covered in paper, to
avoid abrasion.
b) Grills of the fan shall be soaked and then cleaned with solvent and pressure dried. Paint
shall be applied either by brush or with by spraying. After complete drying, it shall be
covered in paper, to avoid abrasion.
c) The agency shall have to make arrangement of transportation of fans from site to workshop
& back to site, after completion of painting job.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis. (i.e. each)
B) Painting of Poles/Channels (PTP)
Specification No (CW-PTG/PTP)
Scope:
Painting of channel / steel tubular / Rail / RSJ / pipe pole along with street light / pole
brackets / clamps completely & providing one coat of red oxide paint and two coats of
aluminum paint (Black paint up to 1.5 m from plinth is recommended)
Method of construction:
a) Existing paint of the pole/channel shall be scrapped completely by emery paper/wire brush.
Then one coat of red oxide shall be applied on cleaned surface. After drying out of the red
oxide two coats of aluminium paint shall be uniformly applied to the pole/channel. In case
of pole, it is recommended to apply black paint for the portion, which shall get embedded in
soil/foundation. Remaining portion of the pole shall then be painted with two coats of
aluminium paint as per instruction.
b) The agency shall make arrangement of ladders, tools, spares, etc. required for carrying out
painting at site.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be measured on running meter
basis. (i.e per meter)
C) Painting of Fluorescent fittings (PFT)
Specification No (CW-PTG/PFT)
Scope:
Spray painting of fluorescent fitting with flat reflector for ½ - 4’ FTL completely from inside
and outside after dismantling inside wiring / accessories and providing one coat of red oxide
and two coats of best quality enamel paint of required colour and duly wired with
accessories complete with re-erection as original.
Method of construction:
a) Fitting shall be dismantled from its location. All wiring shall then be dismantled and stored
in safe place, so as to reuse it after the painting.
b) Existing paint of the metal surface of both the surfaces (inside & outside) shall be scrapped
completely by using emery paper. After cleaning the scrapped surface, one coat of red oxide
shall be applied by spraying gun. When the red oxide is completely dried out, two coats of
white or any other specified colour shall be uniformly applied with spraying gun.
c) The fitting duly painted then shall be erected at its location with necessary required
hardware.
d) The agency shall make necessary arrangements of tools/ladders required for executing the
above job.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis. (i.e.each)
Specifications
Page 390
Tender No: -1800000008
D) Painting of Panel type doors of Lift
(PLD1)
Specification No (CW-PTG/PLD1)
Scope:
Spray Painting of Panel type lift doors of MS, complete with scrapping the existing paint
preparing the surface, painting the door with one coat of red oxide paint, white primer and
finally with two coats of best quality paint of colour specified by engineer in-charge &
polishing with rubbing compound & final polish of surface painting of doors etc.
Method of construction:
a. Existing paint on the surface of the door and its accessories shall first be scrapped off
with the help of Emery paper of required grade or by heating the surface with blowlamp.
b. One coat of primer shall then be uniformly applied with spraying gun and same shall be
allowed to dry out. Then all parts shall be spray painted with 2 coats of enamel
paint of specified colour. When the colour is completely dried, rubbing Wax compound shall
be applied. With a smooth cloth, the surface shall then be vigorously rubbed, until the
painted parts starts shining.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis. (i.e. each)
E)
Painting of lift door of Collapsible type (PLD2)
Specification No
(CW-PTG/PLD2)
Scope:
Painting lift door of collapsible type complete by scrapping the existing paint & preparing the
surface, applying one coat of red oxide, white primer & two coats of approved quality enamel
paint of required colour.
Method of construction:
Existing paint collapsible door of lift shall be scrapped completely by emery paper/wire
brush. Then one coat of red oxide shall be applied on cleaned surface. After drying out of the
red oxide, two coats of best quality paint of colour specified by engineer in-charge shall be
uniformly applied to the door.
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be counted on number basis. (i.e. each)
F)
Spray painting of Distribution Transformer (PDT)
Specification No
(CW-PTG/PDT)
Scope:
Spray painting of distribution transformer of specified capacity with one coat of red oxide &
two coats of approved quality enamel paint after scrapping the existing paint without any
damages, in an approved manner as per direction.
Method of construction:
Existing paint of the transformer body, radiator fins, conservator tank, along with cable end
boxes if any, shall be scrapped with emery paper of required grade. Sufficient care shall be
taken while scrapping the paint at joints, so as to avoid leakage of oil. All the oil stains shall
be removed. After preparing the surface, one coat of red oxide shall be applied with spray
gun. After drying out of red oxide two coats of superior quality paint shall then be uniformly
applied as instructed by site in charge.
Specifications
Page 391
Tender No: -1800000008
Mode of Measurement: Executed quantity shall be measured on job basis. (i.e. job)
17.5
A)
Plumbing (PLB)
Galvanized Iron Pipes (GP)
1. General
This part of specification deals with the Galvanized Iron pipes of different Class (Heavy,
Medium & Light) used for water supply, or for any other purpose.
The guidelines for the use of pipes are as under:
• Heavy gauge pipes shall be used for delivery line of Submersible pumps/Ejecto Jet
pumps/Open well submersible pumps.
• Medium gauge shall be used for suction pipe of Centrifugal pumps, (Except for
Centrifugal pumps meant for Fire fighting purpose.) and shall be used enclosure for
cables while meant for laying underground at road crossing, or any other location as
directed by engineer in-charge, etc.
• Light gauge shall be used as enclosure for cables on wall, pole, or for other purpose
wherever specified.
2. Scope:
Specification No (CW-PLB/GP)
Supplying and erecting GI Pipes of specified class, with necessary accessories, (such as:
bends, tees, couplings, unions, sockets, enlargers, reducers, check nuts, plugs, etc.) at
designated place, having relevant ISI mark, complete to the satisfaction of the department.
3. Material:
Pipe: The galvanized iron pipes shall comply with IS: 1239--1973 and 1969 for the
specified class. The specified diameter of the pipes shall refer to inside diameter.
Fittings & Accessories: Bends, Tees, Couplings, Unions, sockets, bends, tees, enlargers,
reducers, back nuts, plugs, unions, etc shall made of galvanized iron and shall comply IS:
1239-1973 and 1969.
Plumbing material: Hemp, Linseed oil.
MS Clamps: Clamps fabricated of required length and shape, of 3/6 mm thick mild steel
having 25/50 mm width.
Hardware: MS nuts & bolts of required size and strength, Sheet Metal (SM) screws of
required sizes, plugs/wooden gitties, etc.
4.
Method of Construction:
4.1
Pipes to be used as Enclosure:
4.1.1
Erection of Pipe on wall:
The required length of pipe shall be machine cut, without any sharp edges, burrs, etc. The
pipe duly enclosing the specified material, shall be erected on wall in plum, and fixed with
required size of MS clamps on wall with plugs, gitties, etc.
When the pipe is to be fixed to walls it shall be fixed with standard bracket, clips or holder
by keeping the pipe about 12mm clear of the wall. The pipe shall be fixed to the wall
horizontally and vertically and parallel to one another, when more than one pipe is to be
laid, unless unavoidable. The supporting clips, etc. for the pipe shall be spaced at about
two meters or so as necessary. Holes cut during construction shall
not be left out;
they shall be filled and finished after passing of the pipe through it.
Specifications
Page 392
Tender No: -1800000008
4.1.2
Erection of Pipe on pole:
The required length of pipe shall be machine cut, without any sharp edges, burrs, etc. The
pipe duly enclosing the specified material, shall be erected on pole in plum, and fixed with
required size of MS clamps with MS nuts & bolts of required size and strength.
When the pipe is to be used as cable enclosure and is to be terminated on street light
pole(s), the pipe at the trench level should be placed at least 30 cm above the cable
level for avoiding damage to the insulation of cable.
4.1.3
Laying the Pipe underground:
The excavation for laying the pipe underground shall be done as required, and in advance of
laying, so as to cause least damage to the trench and least inconvenience to traffic and in
other respects. The trench for laying the pipe shall be excavated to the lines and levels as
directed by the site engineer. The bed shall be made even. Unless otherwise specified in the
special provisions, the excavation shall be about 30 cm. wide and not less than 45 cm. deep.
The trench shall be excavated through all strata met with. Where necessary, sides may be
shored or sloped. In case rock is met with the section of the trench, the depth may be
slightly reduced but shall be sufficient to receive the pipe and the cushioning with a safe
margin. Dewatering shall be done where necessary.
During excavation, if any, pipes, water mains, cables. etc. are met, these shall be
carefully protected and supported; any damage done shall be made good by the contractor
at his own cost.
4.3
Pipe used for Plumbing purpose:
The required length of pipe shall be machine cut and threaded (threading shall be done by
machine only), without any sharp edges, burrs, etc. The pipe shall then be properly aligned
with the accessory and tightening by applying hemp, linseed oil, so as to make it leak proof.
During the erection, wherever required, correct accessory shall be used. When holes are not
left during construction they shall be cut into the walls or slabs, etc., to pass the pipe
through. The necessary clamps, supports shall be provided wherever required.
5.
Mode of Measurement:
Executed quantity shall be measured on running meter basis, including the entire
accessory. The lengths shall be measured net including the straight and bends along the
center line of the pipes and fittings correct up to a cm. (i.e. per meter)
Specifications
Page 393
Tender No: -1800000008
CHAPTER –18
LIST OF
APPROVED MATERIALS
Unless otherwise mentioned specifically only the following approved make / brands of various
electrical accessoris will be used. In case, there are two types of product under one brand name,
then product having I.S.I mark shall be used. In case, the approved brands are not available in the
market then, equivalent product conforming to relavant standards, as approved by the Engineer
Incharge shall be used. The contractors should distinctly understand that it would not be their
prerogative to insist on using a particular make/brand amongst the approved ones.
Sr. No
1
Item Description
Makes/Brand
L.T.Switchgear
Enclosed in sheet steel with H.R.C. fuses for
A) 63A and above
L&T, Siemens,Schneider
B) Cast Iron with rewirable fuses
KEW, CPL, Kalki
C) Circuit Breakers (Moulded Case)
Legrand,Havell's, Schneider
D) Miniature Circuit Breakers
Legrand,Havell's,Schneider
E) Cubical Panel Switchgear Accessories
I) TPN / DP Switches / Isolators
Legrand, Havell's,L&T
II) Rotary CAM type, Selector Switch
Siemens, AEI
III) Start / Stop push Button stations
L&T, Siemens, Havell's
IV) Contactors
Havell's, L&T, Siemens
V) Indicating Lamp
Siemens, Vaishno
VI) Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers
Legrand,Havells,Siemens
VII) HRC Fuse
Siemens, L&T, English Electric
2
Distrinution Boards with MCB's
Legrand,Havell's,,MDS
3
Cables
Polycab,Havell's,Finolex
4
Socket / Lugs
Dowells, Jainson
5
PVC wires
Polycab,Havell's,Finolex
6
Conduit
A) M.S. Black and G.I. Conduit
Precision, Diamond, BEC
B) Rigid PVC Conduit and accessories
Precision, Asian, Diamond, BEC
Specifications
Page 394
Tender No: -1800000008
7
PVC casing-n-capping and PVC casing-ncapping accessories
Precision, Modi's,Presto-plast
8
Screws
Precision Fastners
9
Piano switches flush mounting (5 to 15 A) /
wall sockets & plugs (surface mounting),
Modular switches (5 to 15 A) holder pendant /
batten / angle, three plate ceiling rose (for 3
core twisted flexible wire), 30 A D.P. Ticcino
type switch fuse with indicating lamp, bell Legrand,Roma, Anchor, 'elle' of
push surface mounting, flush mounting
M/s Aerolite
10
Wall Socket and plug Metal clad (ray roll type)
Legrand, Crompton
Greaves,Havell's
11
PVC Boards
Presto-Plast ISI marked
12
Special Accessories concealed / decorative
(plate switches)
Roma, Precision,CPL, Anchor
13
Two / Three core flexible wires
Polycab, Havells, Finolex
14
Storage Heater with thermostatic control
Almonard,Crompton, Racold
15
Lamps
A) Flourescent, HPMV, HP/LP-SV, Halogen / MLL Crompton, Philips, Havells
B) Halogen / MLL& Metal Halide
Philips, Crompton,GEC
Philips,Crompton, Anchor, Wipro,
C) CFL 8 to 24 W upto 36W, Groove type, pin type GE
Crompton, Philips,
D) LED
Havells,Bajaj,Halonix
16
Fittings for flourescent HPMV lamps and LP /
HPSV lamps with copper wound chokes and
condensers. Bulkhead fittings, Duoflux /
dispersive reflectors, flood light fittings.
Recessed mounted CFL 36W & low watt.
Fittings which use energy saving light source Crompton, Philips,
like CFL, TL-5 and LED.
Havells,Bajaj,Halonix
17
Bell
18
19
Call Bell / buzzer
Anchor, Rider, Cona
Exhaust Fans / Pedestal Fans air circulators
Crompton, Almonard, Bjaj
A) Ceiling Fans with double ball bearings
Specifications
Crompton, Almonard, Bjaj
Page 395
Tender No: -1800000008
B) Table Fans wall mounting Fans / cabin fans
Crompton, Usha
20
Terminal Block
Elmex, Everest, Jyoti
21
Meters: Ammeter & Voltmeter (Analog)
Automatic Electric, Meco
22
G.I. Pipes
Zenith, Diamond
23
Electronic Ballast
Philips, Asian
24
Fan's Electronic Regulator
Rider,Anchor, Cona
25
Flourescent Tube 28W T5 (4 ft or 3 ft or 2 ft)
26
Cable Trays and its accessories
Philips, GE, Osram
Legrand, Asian Anciliary
Corporation
Specifications
Page 396
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals

Download PDF

advertisement